diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957-0.txt | 6579 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 94065 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957-8.txt | 6660 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 92715 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 144971 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957-h/35957-h.htm | 8635 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 48214 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957.txt | 6660 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35957.zip | bin | 0 -> 92688 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
12 files changed, 28550 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/35957-0.txt b/35957-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0c8ce0 --- /dev/null +++ b/35957-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6579 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp + +Author: Ross Kay + +Release Date: April 25, 2011 [EBook #35957] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + +BY ROSS KAY + +Author of “The Search for the Spy,” “The Air Scout,” “With Joffre +on the Battle Line,” “Dodging the North Sea Mines,” “The Go Ahead +Boys on Smugglers’ Island,” “The Go Ahead Boys and the Treasure +Cave,” etc., etc. + + + + +PREFACE + +Every one who loves outdoor life knows the charm and the pleasures of +camping. To look back on the days passed in a tent by the shore of some +forest lake or stream is a source of never-ending enjoyment to those of +us who have had that experience. In this book I have tried to describe +the adventures of four boys who spent a vacation camping in the +Adirondacks, and who indulged in water sports of various kinds while +there. Many of the episodes are true or at least founded on the +experiences of former boys who enjoyed them. If the boys who may read +this tale will derive some of the pleasure in hearing about them that +the real boys did in participating in them I shall feel repaid. + + --Ross Kay + + + + +CONTENTS + + · CHAPTER I—MAKING CAMP + · CHAPTER II—A MISHAP + · CHAPTER III—JOHN HEARS SOMETHING + · CHAPTER IV—SETTING SAIL + · CHAPTER V—THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS + · CHAPTER VI—ADRIFT + · CHAPTER VII—AN UNEXPECTED MEETING + · CHAPTER VIII—A PREDICAMENT + · CHAPTER IX—DANGER + · CHAPTER X—WAIT AND SEE + · CHAPTER XI—WHAT GEORGE DID + · CHAPTER XII—A CHALLENGE + · CHAPTER XIII—THE OUTCAST + · CHAPTER XIV—TALKING IT OVER + · CHAPTER XV—PREPARATION + · CHAPTER XVI—GRANT MISSES + · CHAPTER XVII—GEORGE’S STRATEGY + · CHAPTER XVIII—A CLOSE MATCH + · CHAPTER XIX—A CLOSE SHAVE + · CHAPTER XX—GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS + · CHAPTER XXI—HOW THE PLAN WORKED + · CHAPTER XXII—A STRANGE PERFORMANCE + · CHAPTER XXIII—AN UNEXPECTED HONOR + · CHAPTER XXIV—IN QUEST OF GAME + · CHAPTER XXV—THE WORM TURNS + · CHAPTER XXVI—AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER + · CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + + + + +CHAPTER I—MAKING CAMP + + +“Here is the place to put the tent, String.” + +“I think this spot is better.” + +“Not at all. It’s higher over here and consequently we won’t be flooded +by every rain that comes along and besides that, the flies won’t be so +apt to bother us.” + +“All right, just as you say.” + +The boy addressed as “String” had been named John Clemens by his +parents. He was six feet three inches tall, however, and extremely thin +so that the nickname applied to him seemed quite appropriate. At any +rate his friends thought so and that was the name by which he usually +was called. + +Talking with him and arguing about the location of the tent was Fred +Button, a boy as short as John was tall. He was so small that the +nicknames of Stub, Pewee and Pygmy had all been applied to him, the last +one sometimes shortened to Pyg much to Fred’s disgust. He had found out +long ago, however, that there was no use in showing his irritation at +this for it only served to increase the frequency with which the name +was applied to him. + +These two boys, together with two of their friends, were pitching camp +preparatory to spending a summer on one of the Adirondack lakes. Grant +Jones was one of these boys and the other was George Washington Sanders. +Grant was the most serious-minded of the four and everything he did he +did with all his heart. As a result he was a leader not only on the +athletic field but in his studies as well. The other boys usually came +to him for advice and looked up to him in many ways. The fact that he +was of a serious nature, however, did not mean that he was not +oftentimes just as full of fun as anybody. + +George Washington Sanders having been named after the father of his +country, had acquired the name of Pop. He was often in mischief and took +especial delight in teasing his three friends. It was almost out of the +question to be angry at him, however, for he never lost his temper for +more than a moment himself and was always bubbling over with spirits and +fun. He was the life of any crowd he was in. + +While the argument between John and Fred was in progress Grant and +George approached. + +“What are you two arguing about?” demanded Grant. + +“We’re trying to decide where to put the tent,” replied Fred. “What have +you two been doing all this time?” + +“Putting the canoes away,” said Grant. “Where are you going to locate +the tent, anyway?” + +“Well,” said Fred, “John wants it over in that hollow, but I say it +ought to be up on this little plateau.” + +“I think you’re right, Fred,” said George. “We won’t get so many flies +up there.” + +“Just what I said,” exclaimed Fred triumphantly. “What do you think +about it, Grant?” + +“I think your place is better,” said Grant. “Besides everything else +we’ll have a good view of the lake from there.” + +“All right,” said John, pretending to be very sad. “You all seem to be +against me so I guess I’ll have to give in.” + +“You see, String,” exclaimed George with a sly twinkle in his eye, “we +all know so very much more about this business than you do that you +might just as well take our advice in everything.” + +“You talk too much, Pop,” said John shortly, which remark drew a laugh +of glee from George who had tried to irritate his friend and was +delighted at having succeeded. + +“I say we all stop talking and get to work on the tent,” said Grant. “We +can do all the fooling we want later.” + +“Great idea, Grant,” exclaimed George, who was in excellent spirits at +the prospect of all the good times ahead of them. “You’re a wonder.” + +“You were right when you said Pop talked too much, String,” laughed +Grant. “We’ll put him to work now, though.” + +In an incredibly short time the white tent was erected on the little +bluff overlooking the lake. It was spacious with plenty of room for the +four young campers and all their equipment, which was speedily stored +away inside. + +“How about a few fish for dinner?” exclaimed George, when the tent was +in place. “Personally I think they’d taste pretty good.” + +“Go ahead and catch some, then,” urged John. “I’ll help you eat them.” + +“Oh, I didn’t worry about your not helping me out in that way,” laughed +George. “That’s the least of my troubles. What bothers me is who is to +clean the fish.” + +“The man who catches them always cleans them,” said Fred. + +“Oh, no, he doesn’t,” laughed George. “Not in this case, anyway.” + +“How about the cook doing it?” inquired John. + +“As I am to do the cooking all summer I can’t say I approve of that +plan,” laughed Grant. “That seems a little bit too much.” + +“Well, he hasn’t caught any fish yet, anyway,” said Fred. “Let him do +that first and we’ll argue about them afterwards.” + +“Where are you going to fish, Pop?” asked Grant. + +“I thought I’d try it off those rocks down on the point there,” said +George. “That looks like a likely spot.” + +“While you’re fishing I’ll cut some balsam boughs and make four beds in +the tent,” said John. + +“And I’ll get a place ready to make a fire in,” said Grant. “That’ll +take a little time.” + +“How about you, Fred?” demanded George. “It looks as if you were about +the only loafer in the whole crowd.” + +“I’ll help String cut balsam.” + +“Very good,” said George haughtily. “You may go now.” + +“I’ll put you in the lake if you’re not more careful,” said John +threateningly, but he laughed in spite of himself. + +A few moments later every boy was busied with his appointed task. +George, armed with his fishing rod, made off for the end of the little +wooded island. John and Fred disappeared in search of balsam boughs, +while Grant remained behind to make a fireplace. This was an interesting +piece of work, the secret of which he had learned from a guide some few +summers before during a sojourn in the woods. + +First he selected eight or ten rocks as nearly the size and shape of +cobblestones as he could find. These he placed on the ground in two +parallel rows some twelve inches apart. Both little stone walls thus +formed he endeavored to make as nearly the same height as possible and +before long his fireplace was complete. Between the two rows of stones +the fire was to be made; pots and pans could thus be set over the fire +and rest upon the rocks which formed the walls of the fireplace; in this +way they could be kept from actual contact with the coals and at the +same time most of the heat from the fire was concentrated upon them. + +This is a very efficient method of making a camp-fire as Grant had +learned from previous experience. Of course, in the case of a temporary +camp or unless there are plenty of rocks close at hand, it is hardly +worth while and it is not the kind of a fire that campers like to sit +around in the evening. As a cooking fire, however, it is one of the +best. + +Grant had hardly finished this task when John and Fred returned to the +camp. They were loaded down with balsam boughs and staggered under the +weight of the loads they were carrying. With a sigh of relief each boy +dropped his bundle on the ground and sat down to regain his breath. + +“You fellows look as if you’d been working hard,” laughed Grant. + +“We have,” panted John. “Just carry a load like that for a while and see +what you think of it.” + +“I’ll take your word for it,” said Grant. “Have you got all you want?” + +“All the balsam, you mean?” + +“Yes.” + +“Well, I should hope so,” exclaimed Fred. “At any rate I refuse to go +back after any more. My fingers are all gummy and sticky, too.” + +“The boughs smell great, though,” said Grant admiringly. + +“Don’t they?” exclaimed John. “They’ll be wonderful to sleep on.” + +“You see, Grant,” remarked Fred, “String here is so tall we had to cut +an extra supply to make a bed long enough for him. I’m really quite +worried, too, for fear his feet may stick out beyond the flap of the +tent, anyway.” + +“I’m not as bad as that I hope,” laughed John. “It would be awful, +wouldn’t it, if I couldn’t keep out of the rain?” + +“You might stand on your head,” suggested Fred. “Your feet sticking +straight up in the air could take the place of umbrellas. They’re big +enough so that they’d shelter you, all right.” + +“Look here,” exclaimed John, “that sounds like one of Pop’s remarks. I +hope you’re not getting as bad as he is.” + +“By the way,” said Fred, “where is he? He ought to be back pretty soon.” + +“He’s still fishing,” said Grant. “I guess he hasn’t had very good +luck.” + +“He ought to have taken one of the canoes, anyway,” said John. “He can’t +catch anything just standing on the shore.” + +“Oh, I don’t know,” said Grant. “He might get some small perch or bass.” + +“What I want is a good big trout,” exclaimed Fred. “I’ll consider this +summer a failure unless I get one.” + +“Maybe we’ll each get one,” said Grant. “They say there are lots of them +around here.” + +“Not so much in the lake as in the streams running into it, I guess,” +remarked John. “It seems to me that the big trout are always in small +pools.” + +“Well, I’ll try them all,” said Fred eagerly. “I don’t want just to +catch trout; any one can do that. What I want is a big one.” + +“One you can take home stuffed, I suppose,” suggested Grant. + +“That’s it exactly. I mean to have one, too.” + +“Well, we might fix up the beds first,” said John. “It won’t take long. +All we want is four piles and we can spread the blankets out on them +when we are ready to turn in. Just think of it; a nice soft +sweet-smelling bed to sleep on and we won’t feel any of the rocks and +roots and bumps that may be under us.” + +“It sounds fine all right,” laughed Grant. “We’d better get to work +soon, too, for it’ll be dark before long.” + +“I should think Pop would be back by now, too,” said John. “You don’t +suppose anything could have happened to him, do you?” + +“Why, I don’t see how—” began Fred, when he suddenly ceased speaking and +listened intently. + +“What’s the matter?” demanded Grant. + +“Ssh,” whispered Fred. “I thought I heard some one call.” + + + + +CHAPTER II—A MISHAP + + +All three boys bent their heads and listened intently. The only sound +that came to them, however, was the soft sighing of the breeze through +the treetops and the occasional call of some bird preparing to settle +down for the night. The sun was low in the west, just sinking below the +fringe of the forest which skirted the little lake. All seemed quiet and +serene. + +“What did you think you heard, Fred?” demanded Grant after the lapse of +several moments. + +“I thought I heard a call. In fact I was almost—” + +Once more he stopped suddenly and listened. “What was that?” he +exclaimed. + +“I heard something, too,” whispered John excitedly. “Listen!” + +“I don’t hear a thing,” muttered Grant. “I must be deaf.” + +“There it is again,” cried Fred suddenly. + +“I heard it, too,” exclaimed John. “It came from that end of the +island.” + +“That’s the direction Pop took,” said Grant in alarm. “Perhaps there has +something happened to him.” + +“We’ll soon find out anyway,” cried Fred. “Come along!” and he began to +run at top speed in the direction George had gone a short time before. + +Close behind him followed Grant and John. Every boy was worried and +beset with a thousand and one evil thoughts as to what might have +befallen their light-hearted and well-loved comrade. Almost everything +conceivable in the way of misfortune suggested itself to their anxious +minds. + +“Keep close to the shore, Fred,” called Grant. “He was fishing, you +know.” + +Fred did keep as close to the shore as possible, but it was no easy task +a great many times. The island was rough and rocky and heavily wooded, +the trees growing down to the water’s edge in many places. Crashing +through the underbrush and making a great deal of noise the three boys +raced along. Whether or not the cry which John and Fred had heard was +repeated they could not say, for the tumult of their own mad course +drowned out all other noises. + +After what seemed a long time they came to the end of the island. Here +the forest gave way to the rocks which ran out a considerable distance, +forming a small peninsula. At the tip end were several big boulders +which had become separated from the main island after long years of +action by the water and in order to reach them it was necessary to jump +across several feet from one to the other. Towards these boulders the +three boys made their way. + +“I don’t see anybody,” panted John. + +“Nor I,” agreed Fred. “I don’t hear anything, either.” + +“Listen,” warned Grant, holding up his hand. + +“And look, too,” murmured Fred under his breath. + +Suddenly John started forward excitedly. “Look,” he cried, “there he +is.” + +“Where? Where?” demanded Grant. + +“Down there in the water. Don’t you see him?” + +“Help! Help!” came the call, and John, Fred and Grant sped to the +assistance of their comrade. His head showed above the water and he +splashed a great deal in an effort to remain afloat. That he was very +rapidly becoming weaker, however, was plain to be seen. + +“Give me a hand, somebody,” cried George. + +“All right, Pop. We’ll be right with you,” Grant reassured him. + +George was struggling in the water close to one of the big boulders. Its +sides were so steep and high, however, that he was unable to climb out. +From his actions it also appeared as if he were keeping himself afloat +merely with his hands. + +“Get a stick, Grant,” cried Fred. “You can hold it out for him to take +hold of.” + +“Where is one? Find one, quick!” exclaimed Grant excitedly. + +“Here you are,” said John. “This one will do. Take this.” + +He held out a stick some six or eight feet long which had been lying on +the shore at his feet. Grant seized it eagerly and hastened to George’s +assistance. + +“Hurry up, Grant!” called George. “I can’t last much longer!” + +“Here you are!” cried Grant, leaning out from the shore as far as he +dared and holding the stick toward his friend. “Grab hold of this.” + +After one or two unsuccessful attempts George succeeded in catching hold +of the stick. Grant drew him up as close to the rock as possible and +then Fred and John bending down over the edge seized him by his arms and +quickly pulled him out of the water and to safety. + +“How did you happen to—” began Fred, when John suddenly interrupted him. + +“What have you got around your legs?” he demanded in astonishment. + +“My fishing line,” said George, smiling weakly. “It tripped me up.” + +“Well, I should think it might,” exclaimed John. “How in the world did +you ever get it wound around you like that?” + +“I had my rod in one hand,” said George, “and I tried to jump from that +rock over there to this one. I landed here all right, but when I jumped +the line got twisted around my ankles and I lost my balance. It finally +tripped me up and I fell into the water. When I got there the line kept +getting more and more tangled up the harder I kicked, until finally I +could hardly move my feet at all. I had to keep afloat just by using my +hands.” + +“That was certainly a bright trick,” exclaimed Fred. “Why, you might +have drowned.” + +“I thought I was going to be,” said George grimly. “I was getting pretty +tired.” + +“Where’s your rod?” inquired Fred. + +“At the other end of the line. A steel rod doesn’t float, you know.” + +“That’s true,” laughed Fred. “Haul in that line, John.” + +Of course all the line unrolled from the reel before the rod was rescued +but it was finally brought safely to shore. A large section of the line, +however, had to be sacrificed as it was found almost impossible to +untangle the mass that had wound itself around George’s legs and ankles, +and a knife was necessary to free him. + +“Where are your fish, Pop?” inquired Fred. “I suppose you dropped them +all when you fell in,” and he nudged Grant as he spoke. + +“I had only one,” replied George ruefully. “He did fall in and I lost +him.” + +“What kind was it?” + +“A black bass.” + +“A big one, I suppose.” + +“No, he wasn’t either. He was pretty small. I didn’t have any luck at +all.” + +“You ought to have taken one of the canoes,” said Grant. “You can’t +expect to catch anything from the shore.” + +“He’d probably upset the canoe,” said Fred. “I don’t think we should +allow him to do anything alone after this.” + +“Huh!” was George’s only reply to this sally. + +“Feel like walking, Pop?” asked Grant. “If you do we’d better go back to +camp and get some dry clothes for you.” + +“I was just thinking that,” said George. “I’m commencing to feel chilly. +These nights in the Adirondacks are pretty cool, I find.” + +“They certainly are,” John agreed. “Let’s go back.” + +“I could eat something, too,” remarked Fred. “The cool air also seems to +give you an appetite.” + +“Come on,” cried Grant, and a moment later the four young campers were +retracing their steps to the tent. + +Arriving there, George made haste to change his wet garments for some +dry ones. Fred and John collected wood for the fire while Grant made +ready to cook the dinner. A short time later the odor of sizzling bacon +filled the air, lending an even keener edge to four appetites that were +sharp already. The first meal in camp was voted a great success by every +member of the party, and all agreed that Grant was a wonderful cook. + +“Isn’t this great!” exclaimed George, when the dishes had all been +washed. + +The four young friends were seated around a camp-fire crowned by a great +birch log that blazed so brightly it lighted up everything for a +considerable distance round about them. + +“It surely is,” agreed John. “I don’t see how you could beat this.” + +“Just think of it,” said Fred. “We’re here for all summer, too.” + +“Oh, the summer will go fast enough. Don’t worry about that,” Grant +warned him. “It’ll be over before we know it.” + +At last the fire burned low until it was nothing but a mass of glowing +embers. John arose to his feet and yawned. “I’m going in and try those +new beds we made this afternoon,” he said. “I’m tired.” + +“I’m sleepy, too,” exclaimed Grant. “Let’s all turn in.” + +The few remaining coals from the fire were carefully scattered so that +they could do no damage during the night. These four friends had had +enough experience in the woods to know what a forest fire means. They +also knew that all good woodsmen were careful about such things and +always had regard for the rights of others. + +Every one was sleepy and it was not long before four tired and happy +boys were stretched upon four sweet-smelling balsam beds, sound asleep. +How long he slept John could not tell when he suddenly awoke with the +feeling that he had heard a cry for help. + + + + +CHAPTER III—JOHN HEARS SOMETHING + + +John sat upright and peered about him in the darkness, every nerve +alert. He heard nothing, however. Perhaps he had been mistaken after +all. George’s mishap that afternoon had been on his mind and probably he +had dreamed of it. + +Somehow the feeling that he had heard a cry still seemed very distinct, +however, and it gave him a most unpleasant sensation. He listened +intently. He could hear the deep and steady breathing of his three +comrades lying asleep around him, and he heaved a sigh of relief. At +least nothing had happened to them. + +Not a sound came to break the silence of the night and John began to +feel sure that he had been deceived. He prepared himself to lie down +again and go to sleep. He must have had a nightmare, he thought. Who +could be in trouble on a calm, still night like this? At any rate it was +none of their party and undoubtedly was no one at all. It had all been a +dream, though a most unpleasant one, and John shivered unconsciously at +the recollection. His nerves had all been set on edge, but gradually he +quieted down and once more settled himself to rest. + +Barely had he closed his eyes, however, when the cry was repeated. There +was no mistaking it this time, and John instantly was wide awake once +more, the cold shivers dancing up and down his spine. Never had he heard +such a voice. Some one evidently was in terrible distress mingled with +fear with which hopelessness seemed combined. The voice trailed off in a +wail of despair that brought John’s heart up into his mouth. + +It seemed to him that the cry must have awakened his companions as well, +but no, he could still hear their regular breathing even above the +violent pounding of his heart. What should he do? There was no question +about it this time; it had not been a dream. Some one was in trouble and +needed help, and evidently needed it badly. Consequently it was needed +quickly, too, and John was determined to do his best. + +He leaned over in the darkness and felt for the boy who was lying next +to him. + +“Grant,” he whispered. “Grant, wake up.” + +Grant merely groaned and stirred uneasily. + +“Wake up, Grant,” he repeated, shaking his friend by his shoulder. “Wake +up, I tell you.” + +“What do you want?” demanded Grant sleepily. “What’s the matter?” + +“Matter enough,” exclaimed John. “There’s somebody in trouble out here +on the lake and he’s calling for help.” + +“Is that so?” cried Grant, now wide awake. “Are you sure?” + +“I heard him call twice.” + +“Was it a man?” + +“I think so. I never heard such a voice. It was awful.” + +“We’d better go see what we can do then,” exclaimed Grant. “Which +direction did the voice come from?” + +“I couldn’t say; it seemed to come from all over. Oh, Grant, it was +awful.” + +“Sure you didn’t dream it?” + +“Positive. I know I heard it.” + +“Come along then,” said Grant. “We’ll go outside and get one of the +canoes and see what we can find. Maybe we’ll hear it again.” + +“I don’t know; it sounded to me as though it was the death cry of some +one. I never heard such a thing in all my life.” + +“Get your sweater and some trousers,” directed Grant. “Don’t wake Fred +and Pop yet. We’ll see what we can do first.” + +John and Grant rose carefully to their feet and laid aside their +blankets. Feeling their way, they soon located their clothes and a +moment later, partly dressed, they stepped forth from the tent. The +night was clear, and the moon, in its last quarter, lighted up the trees +and the water in a ghostly manner. + +“Are the paddles—” began Grant, when the cry was repeated. This time it +seemed only a short distance from their camp and out on the lake. +Perhaps some one had upset a boat and was struggling in the water. + +“There it is,” cried John, clutching Grant excitedly by the arm. “Did +you hear that? Isn’t that terrible?” + +“Is that what you heard before?” demanded Grant. + +“Yes, the same voice. Hurry! We mustn’t waste a second.” + +“Wait a minute, String,” and in Grant’s voice was the suggestion of a +laugh. + +“What’s the matter?” + +“Well, if that’s what you heard the other times, I wouldn’t be in a +great hurry if I were you.” + +“Why not? Are you crazy, Grant? Can’t you tell by that voice that some +one is in trouble? Aren’t you going to help him?” + +“Did you ask me if I was crazy?” + +“I did, and I think you are, too. Please hurry, Grant.” + +“Oh, no, I’m not crazy,” said Grant, and there was no mistaking the fact +that he was laughing now. “I’m not crazy, but you’re loony.” + +“What do you mean?” + +“That’s a loon you hear out there.” + +“A loon,” exclaimed John in amazement. “What are you talking about?” + +“I’m talking about a bird. That noise you hear is made by a bird named a +loon. Haven’t you ever heard one before?” + +“Never. I don’t see how a bird could sound so like a human being.” + +“That’s what it is just the same,” said Grant, and he was almost doubled +up with laughter now. “I think I’d better wake up Pop and Fred and tell +them about your friend that’s calling for help.” + +“Are you positive it’s a loon?” + +“Absolutely.” + +“Then don’t ever tell a soul,” begged John eagerly. “I’d never hear the +last of it as long as I lived. It would be awful if George ever knew.” + +“You’re not the first one who’s ever been fooled,” laughed Grant. “You +probably won’t be the last, either.” + +“Please don’t tell on me, though, Grant. Promise me you won’t.” + +“We’ll see,” said Grant evasively. “I can’t make any promises though.” + +“How should I know that it was a loon?” demanded John. “I never heard +one before and you yourself say that other people have been fooled the +same way.” + +“That’s true. Still it’s almost too good a joke on you to keep.” + +“What is a loon, anyway?” + +“It’s a bird; it belongs to the duck family, I guess. They live around +on lakes and ponds like this and spend their nights waking people up and +scaring them.” + +“I should say they did,” exclaimed John with a shudder. “I never heard +such a lonesome-sounding, terrible wail in all my life.” + +“There it is again,” said Grant laughingly, as once more the cry of the +loon came to their ears across the dark waters of the little lake. + +“Let’s go back to sleep,” exclaimed John earnestly. “That sound makes my +blood run cold, even though I know it is made by a bird.” + +“Don’t you think we ought to tell Fred and Pop about it?” inquired Grant +mischievously. “It seems to me they ought to be warned.” + +“You can tell them about it if you don’t mention my name in connection +with it,” said John. “If you tell on me though, I swear I’ll get even +with you if it takes me a year.” + +“All right,” laughed Grant, “I won’t say anything about it. At least, +not yet,” he added under his breath. + +“What did you say?” demanded John, not having caught the last sentence. + +“I said, ‘let’s go to bed.’” + +“That suits me,” exclaimed John, and a few moments later they had once +more crawled quietly over their sleeping comrades and again rolled in +their blankets, were sound asleep. + +The sun had not been up very long before the camp was astir. Sleepy-eyed +the boys emerged from the tent, blinking in the light of the new day. A +moment later, however, four white bodies were splashing and swimming +around in the cool waters of the lake, and all the cobwebs of sleep were +soon brushed away. + +“That’s what makes you feel fine,” exclaimed George when they had all +come out and were dressing preparatory to eating breakfast. “A swim like +that makes me feel as if I could lick my weight in wildcats.” + +“You must have slept pretty well last night, Pop,” remarked Grant. + +“I did. Never slept harder in my life.” + +“Well, I didn’t,” exclaimed Fred. “It seemed to me I was dreaming all +night long. Maybe my bed wasn’t fixed just right.” + +“What did you dream about, Fred?” asked Grant curiously. + +“Oh, all sorts of things. I thought I heard people calling for help. +That seemed to be my principal dream for some reason.” + +“That’s funny,” said Grant. “You didn’t dream anything like that, did +you, String?” + +“No, I didn’t,” said John shortly. + + + + +CHAPTER IV—SETTING SAIL + + +“What shall we do to-day?” exclaimed George when breakfast was over. + +“We might go fishing,” suggested Fred. “I want a big trout some time +this summer, you know.” + +“Oh, it’s too sunny for trout to-day,” Grant objected. + +“All right then,” said Fred. “What do you want to do?” + +“How about taking a sail?” + +“Is there enough wind?” + +“Of course there is, and unless I’m very much mistaken its going to get +stronger all the time.” + +“Suppose we take our lunch along,” said John. “We can be gone as long as +we want then and can go ashore and eat wherever we happen to be.” + +“Good idea, String,” cried George heartily. “I do believe you’re getting +smarter every day.” + +“What do you think of my scheme?” demanded John, completely ignoring his +friend’s sarcasm. + +“It’s all right,” said Grant. “I’m in favor of doing it.” + +“We can take a couple of rods with us, can’t we?” said Fred. “We might +get a few fish for dinner.” + +“That’s right,” agreed Grant. “We can anchor and fish from the boat if +we want.” + +“Let’s get started,” exclaimed John. + +A small catboat was a part of the equipment the boys had in order to +help them enjoy their summer more thoroughly. It now lay at anchor in a +little cove a short distance from the place where the tent was located. +It was a natural harbor and afforded excellent shelter for the boats +from the squalls and not infrequent storms that were apt to spring up +during this season of the year. The lake was between two and three miles +in length so that a comparatively heavy sea could be stirred up by the +winds. + +The island on which the four boys had pitched their tent was the only +one in the lake and it was very nearly in the center. It was owned by a +friend of John’s father who had obtained permission for his son and his +three friends to camp on it that summer. The sailboat and two canoes +were included with the island, so that there was no question but that +these four boys were very fortunate indeed to be able to enjoy it all. + +For months they had been looking forward to this summer and they had +planned innumerable excursions and expeditions as part of their camping +experiences. Now that the time was really at hand they meant to enjoy +every minute of it to the utmost. + +“Fred and I will get the boat ready,” exclaimed John. “You two can +collect the rods and fix up the lunch.” + +“Put me near the food and I’m satisfied,” said George. “Come on, Grant.” + +John and Fred made their way down to the spot where the canoes were +hauled up on the shore. The catboat lay moored at anchor some fifty or +sixty feet out from the bank so that it was necessary to paddle to reach +her. One of the canoes was selected and the two boys soon pushed off +from shore. + +“That’s a pretty good looking boat I should say,” remarked Fred as he +glanced approvingly at the little white catboat. “I wonder if she’s +fast.” + +“She looks so,” said John. + +“You can’t always tell by the looks though, you know.” + +“That’s true too. We ought to be able to tell pretty soon though.” + +“I wonder if they have water sports or anything like that up here in the +summer,” said Fred. “If they do it would be fun to enter.” + +“It certainly would,” agreed John. “I don’t believe there are enough +people on this lake though. As far as I can see we are about the only +people here.” + +“I thought you said there was another camp down at the north end of the +lake.” + +“That’s right, there is. I don’t know who’s in it though.” + +“We might sail down and find out.” + +“Let’s do that; it won’t take long.” + +They had now arrived alongside the catboat, which was named the Balsam, +and after having made fast the canoe, they quickly climbed on board. + +“Any water in her?” exclaimed John. + +“I don’t know. I was just going to look.” + +“Lift up the flooring there and you can tell. It must have rained since +she’s been out here and we’ll probably have to use the pump.” + +“We certainly shall,” said Fred, who had raised up the flooring +according to John’s suggestion. “Where is the pump anyway?” + +“Up there under the deck. You can pump while I get the cover off the +sail here and get things in shape a little, or would you rather have me +pump?” + +“No, I’ll do it. If I get tired, I’ll let you know.” + +It did not take long to bail out the boat, however, and before many +moments had elapsed the mainsail was hoisted and the Balsam was ready to +weigh her anchor and start. The sail flapped idly in the breeze which +seemed to be dying down instead of freshening as Grant had predicted. +The boom swung back and forth, the pulleys rattling violently as the +sheet dragged them first to one side and then the other. + +John and Fred sat on the bottom of the boat and waited for their +companions to appear with the luncheon. The two boys were dressed in +bathing jerseys and white duck trousers. At least they had formerly been +white, but constant contact with boats and rocks had colored them +considerably. The feet of the young campers were bare, they having +removed the moccasins which they usually wore. The day was warm and in +fact the sun was quite hot. The previous night had been so cool it did +not seem possible that it could be followed by a warm day, but such is +often the case in the Adirondacks. + +“Where do you suppose they are?” exclaimed Fred at length. “It seems to +me they ought to have been ready by this time.” + +“Here they come now,” said John. “Look at Pop; that basket is almost as +heavy as he is.” + +“He’s got lots of food in it, I guess. I’m glad too for I’m hungry +already.” + +“Why, you finished breakfast only about an hour ago.” + +“I can’t help that. I’m always hungry in this place.” + +“Ahoy there!” shouted George from the shore. “Come in and get us.” + +“The other canoe doesn’t leak you know,” replied John, neither he nor +Fred making any move to do as George had asked. + +“We know that,” called George. “What’s the use of taking them both out +there though?” + +“Why not?” demanded John. “The exercise will do you good.” + +“Are you coming after us?” asked Grant. + +“Not that we know,” laughed Fred. + +“I guess we paddle ourselves then, Pop,” said Grant to his companion. + +“All right,” agreed George. “I’ll get square with them though.” + +“How are you going to do it?” + +“You let me paddle and I’ll show you.” + +They spoke in a low tone of voice so that their friends on board the +Balsam could not hear them and in silence they embarked upon the second +canoe. Grant sat in the bow while George wielded the paddle in the +stern. They approached the catboat rapidly where John and Fred sat +waiting for them with broad grins upon their faces. + +“You must think we run a ferry,” exclaimed Fred as the canoe drew near. + +“Not at all,” said Grant. “We just thought that perhaps you’d be glad to +do a good turn for us.” + +“We’re tired,” grinned John. “Think how hard we had to work to get the +sail up and to pump out—” + +“Oh, look at that water bug,” cried George suddenly, striking at some +object in the water with his paddle. Whether he hit or even saw any bug +or not will always remain a mystery. One thing is sure, however, and +that is, that a great sheet of water shot up from under the blade of the +paddle and completely drenched both John and Fred. + +“What are you trying to do?” demanded Fred angrily. + +“He did that on purpose,” exclaimed John. “Soak him, Fred.” + +“Look out,” cried George, “you’ll get the lunch all wet.” + +“You meant to wet us,” Fred insisted. + +“Why, Fred,” said George innocently; “I just tried to hit that water +bug. How should I know that you would be splashed?” + +“Huh,” snorted John. “Just look at me.” + +“That’s too bad,” said George with a perfectly straight face. “If you +had come in after us we’d have all been in the same canoe and you +probably wouldn’t have gotten wet.” + +“You admit you did it on purpose then?” + +“I don’t at all. I just thought perhaps it was some sort of punishment +inflicted on you for being so lazy.” + +“Didn’t he do it on purpose, Grant?” demanded Fred. + +“I don’t know,” replied Grant, striving desperately to keep from +smiling. “I know he didn’t tell me he was going to do it.” + +“Well, it was just like him anyway,” said John. “He knew we couldn’t +splash him back because he had the lunch in the canoe with him.” + +“Take it, will you?” asked Grant, holding the basket up to John. “Here +are the fishing rods too.” + +George and Grant followed soon after and the second canoe was made fast +to one of the thwarts of the other. + +“I’ll put the lunch up here,” said Fred, at the same time depositing the +basket up forward under the protection of the deck. + +“Slide the rods in there too, will you?” exclaimed George. “Look out for +the reels that they don’t get caught under anything.” + +“Everything ready?” asked John. + +“Let ‘er go,” cried George enthusiastically. “I’m ready.” + +“Come and help me pull up the anchor then,” said John. + +“I’m your man,” cried George. “You know I’m always looking for work.” + +“I’ve noticed that,” laughed Grant. “You’re always looking for work so +that you’ll know what places to keep away from.” + +Four light hearted young campers were now on board the Balsam. In spite +of their words a few moments before not one of them had lost his temper. +They knew each other too well and were far too sensible not to be able +to take a joke. Outsiders, listening to their conversation, might have +thought them angry at times, but such was never the case. + +“Get your back in it there,” shouted Grant gayly to John and George who +were busily engaged in hauling in the anchor chain. George stood close +to the bow with John directly behind him as hand-over-hand they pulled +in the wet, cold chain. + +“This deck is getting slippery,” exclaimed George. “All this water that +has splashed up here from the chain has made it so I can scarcely keep +my feet.” + +“I should say so,” agreed John earnestly and as he spoke one foot slid +out from beneath him. He lurched heavily against his companion, and +George thrown completely off his balance, waved his arms violently about +his head in an effort to save himself, but all to no avail. He fell +backward and striking the water with a great splash disappeared from +sight. + + + + +CHAPTER V—THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS + + +“Man overboard!” shouted Grant, running forward as he called. He did not +know whether to laugh or to be worried. One thing was certain though and +that was that George like his three companions was perfectly at home in +the water. All four were expert swimmers so that barring accidents they +had little to fear from falling overboard. + +“He’s all right,” cried John. “Help me hold this anchor, somebody.” + +Grant grasped the chain and one more heave was sufficient to bring the +anchor up on the deck of the Balsam. Before this could be done, however, +George came to the surface choking and spluttering. + +“I’ll fix you for that, String,” he gasped, shaking his fist at John. + +“For what?” demanded John. + +“You know all right.” + +“Why, Pop,” said John reprovingly. + +“Keep her up into the wind, Fred,” shouted Grant who was seated at the +tiller. “Let your sheet run. Here, Pop, give me your hand.” + +“I’d better go down to the stern and get aboard there,” said George. “I +think it will be a little easier.” + +“All right; go ahead.” + +George floated alongside the Balsam until he came to the stern and a +moment later had swung himself on board the boat. He was drenched to the +skin but laughing in spite of himself. + +“Do you want to change your clothes, Pop?” asked Grant. + +“No, it’s hot to-day. They’ll dry out in no time.” + +“Ease her off then, Fred,” Grant directed. “We may as well get started.” + +Fred put the helm over, the sail filled and the Balsam began to slip +through the water at a good rate. The four boys sat around the tiny +cockpit, Fred at the tiller and Grant tending sheet. In a few moments +they had emerged from the little harbor and had entered upon the open +waters of the lake. + +“Well, String,” observed George who was busily engaged in wringing water +from the bottoms of his duck trousers, “you certainly did it well.” + +“Did what well?” demanded John. + +“Don’t pretend you don’t know.” + +“What are you talking about?” + +“You meant to shove me overboard and I know it so there’s no use in you +trying to bluff. You were very skillful about it and I guess you got +square with me all right. We’ll call it even and quit.” + +“I did do it pretty well, didn’t I?” grinned John. + +“Yes, you did, but I think the way I soaked you and Fred was just as +good.” + +“You didn’t see a water bug then?” + +“No, and you didn’t slip either.” + +“Yes, I did; on purpose though. Let’s call it off now.” + +“I’m agreeable,” laughed George, “even if you did get the better of me.” + +“How about me?” demanded Fred. “Pop wet me just as much as he did String +and I don’t see that I am even with him yet.” + +“You ‘tend to your sailing,” laughed George. “That’ll have to satisfy +you.” + +“I can steer you on a rock you know,” warned Fred. + +“Don’t do it though,” begged Grant. “I’m an innocent party and I’d +suffer just as much as the others.” + +“Where shall we sail?” asked George. + +“Fred and I thought we might go down to the other end of the lake,” said +John. “There’s a camp down there, I believe, and we might see who is in +it.” + +“Go ahead,” exclaimed George. “Meanwhile I think I’ll try to get my +clothes dry,” and suiting the action to the word he divested himself of +everything he had on, which was not much. The few articles of clothing +thus taken off he spread flat on the deck of the boat so that they might +get the full benefit of the sun’s rays. + +The day was bright and not a cloud appeared in the sky. A gentle breeze +blew across the lake barely ruffling the water. Consequently the Balsam +sailed on an even keel and scant attention was necessary to keep her +pointing in the right direction. + +“How about trolling?” exclaimed Fred all at once. + +“What do you mean by that?” asked George. + +“You mean to say you don’t know what trolling is?” + +“If I had I wouldn’t have asked you, would I?” laughed George. + +“Well, I’ll tell you,” said Fred. “Trolling is fishing in a certain way. +When you troll you sit in a moving boat and trail your line out behind +you. As a rule you use a spoon or live bait so that it gives the +appearance of swimming. People usually fish for pickerel that way.” + +“Let’s try it,” cried George enthusiastically. “Who’s got a spoon?” + +“I have,” said Grant. “Hold this sheet and I’ll put it on my line.” + +“Any pickerel in this lake, I wonder,” remarked John. + +“There ought to be lots of them,” said Fred. + +“Bass and perch too, I guess,” John added. + +“Perch are fine eating,” exclaimed George. “I’ve eaten them cooked in a +frying pan with lots of butter and bacon,” and he sighed blissfully at +the recollection. + +“Did you ever eat brook trout fried in bacon and rolled in corn meal?” +asked Fred. + +“Not yet,” laughed George. “I hope to before long, though.” + +“Well when you do you’ll know you’ve tasted the finest thing in the +world there is to eat,” said Fred with great conviction. + +“Is it better than musk melon?” + +“A thousand times.” + +“Whew!” whistled George. “Is it better than turkey?” + +“A million times.” + +“Say,” exclaimed George. “Is it better than ice cream?” + +“It’s better than anything, I tell you,” Fred insisted. + +“I’ll take your word for it,” laughed George. “I’d like to try it myself +pretty soon though.” + +“Here’s your spoon,” said Grant, holding out the rod to George. + +“You’re going to fish, yourself,” said George firmly. + +“Not at all. I got it for you.” + +“Why should I try it any more than you?” + +“Because I want you to. Go ahead.” + +“If you insist, I suppose I’ll have to,” laughed George and dropping the +spoon overboard he let the line run out. + +“How much line do I need?” he asked. + +“Oh, about fifty or sixty feet I should think,” said Grant. + +“Well, I don’t know much about it,” remarked John breaking in on the +conversation; “but it doesn’t seem to me that we are making enough +headway to keep that metal spoon from sinking.” + +“I’m afraid not myself,” agreed Grant. “The wind seems to be dying down +all the time and we’ll be becalmed if we’re not careful.” + +“I’ll try it a few minutes anyway,” said George. “I might get +something.” + +“All you’ll get is sunburned, I guess,” laughed Fred. “You’d better put +your clothes on or you’ll be blistered to-morrow.” + +“That’s right, Pop,” said Grant. “I’d get dressed if I were you.” + +“Perhaps you’re right,” George agreed. “Here, String, you take the rod.” + +Scarcely had John taken the rod in his hands when he felt a violent tug +at the line. The reel sang shrilly and then was still. + +“You’ve hooked one,” cried Fred excitedly. “Reel in as fast as you can.” + +“Bring the boat around, Fred,” shouted Grant. “Come up into the wind.” + +Fred did as he was directed, while John strove desperately to reel in +his line. At first there was no resistance and then all at once the rod +bent double. + +“Say!” exclaimed George, “it must be a whale!” + +“It’s bottom,” said John disgustedly. “The old spoon sank just as I said +it would and I’ve caught a log.” + +“Don’t break the line whatever you do,” warned Grant. “Swish your rod +back and forth.” + +“It’s caught fast,” said John, following Grant’s directions. + +“Keep it up, you’ll get it loose yet.” + +Suddenly the hook was released and as John reeled in there was no +resistance to be felt at all. A moment later the spoon appeared and +pierced by the hook was a small chip of water-soaked wood showing that +it was some sunken log that had deceived the boys at first. + +“That trolling business is great all right, isn’t it?” laughed George, +now completely dressed once more and ready for anything. + +“I’ll take you out in one of the canoes some day and prove to you that +it’s all right,” said Fred warmly. “You—” + +He suddenly stopped speaking and looked up. “I thought I felt a drop of +rain,” he remarked in surprise. + +“You did,” exclaimed Grant. “Just look there. Here comes a squall and +we’re in for it all right. This is no joke.” + + + + +CHAPTER VI—ADRIFT + + +“Quick, Fred!” cried Grant. “Bring her up into the wind. You help me let +down this sail, Pop.” + +An angry gust of wind scudding across the lake, caught the catboat and +made her heel far over. + +“Let go your sheet, Fred!” shouted Grant. “Quick or we’ll upset.” + +He and George sprang forward and feverishly tried to loosen the ropes +that held the sail aloft. The wind was increasing in strength now, +however, and the boat was becoming more difficult to manage every +moment. The sky was inky black and sharp flashes of lightning cut the +clouds from end to end. The thunder roared and echoed and reëchoed over +the wooded mountains round about. It was now raining hard. + +“Keep that sheet clear of everything,” cried Grant, who usually assumed +command in every crisis. “Let it run free whatever you do.” + +“You hurry with that sail,” retorted Fred. + +“They’re doing their best I guess,” said John. + +“If they don’t get it down soon we’ll go over,” cried Fried. “I can +hardly hold her now.” + +“Can I help you, Grant?” asked John, striving to make his way forward. +The boom, however, swung violently back and forth threatening to knock +him overboard every second. It was almost impossible to keep out of its +way in the tiny catboat. + +“Go sit down,” cried Grant. “We’ll get it down in a second.” + +The rain now fell in torrents. The wind whistled and shrieked all about +them and it seemed as if at any moment the sail must be torn to shreds +and the mast ripped from its socket. Lucky it was that Fred was an +experienced sailor and endowed with nerve as well. The squall drove the +boat backwards but Fred managed to keep her nose pointed straight into +the teeth of the gale. Otherwise the Balsam could not have lived two +minutes. + +“Why don’t they hurry with that sail?” exclaimed Fred peevishly. + +“They are hurrying,” said John. “The ropes are wet and they’re nervous.” + +“Ah, there it comes,” cried Fred suddenly. “Now we’ll stand a chance.” + +With a rush the sail came down, its folds almost completely covering the +four boys in the boat. The strain on the tiller was greatly relieved +however and the Balsam maintained a more even keel. + +“Whew!” exclaimed George, groping his way astern. “What a storm this +is!” + +“I never saw it rain so hard,” said John. “Just look; you can’t see more +than about ten feet.” + +“We’ll go aground if we’re not careful.” + +“How can we stop it?” demanded Fred. “We’re at the mercy of the storm.” + +“Throw the anchor overboard,” suggested George. + +“A good idea, Pop,” exclaimed Grant. “Come along and I’ll help you.” + +“You’ll get struck by lightning,” warned Fred, half seriously. The +flashes were blinding and almost continuous. The thunder ripped and +roared all around and so near at hand was the center of the storm that +sometimes the smell as of something burning could be detected in the +air. + +“That anchor will never hold us,” said John who sat in the stern, +huddled close to Fred. Grant and George were feeling their way forward. + +“Don’t throw the lunch basket over by mistake,” called Fred. + +“The lunch won’t be worth much now, I’m afraid,” said John ruefully. + +“Oh, I don’t know; it’s under the deck.” + +“I know, but the boat has a lot of water in her now and if it touches +that basket it will soon soak through.” + +“How deep is this lake?” + +“I’ve no idea. I don’t even know where we are.” + +“I’m afraid we’re going to run ashore all of a sudden somewhere.” + +“The anchor ought to catch before that happens,” said John. “It’s +trailing now you know.” + +“I know it is, but suppose we hit a lone rock.” + +“We’re running that chance. I don’t know what we can do about it.” + +“Are you trying to steer, Fred?” asked Grant who together with George +had now crawled back to the stern of the boat. + +“I’m trying to keep her headed with the waves; that’s all I can do.” + +“I know it. I think the squall’s letting up some though.” + +“Perhaps it is,” agreed John. “It does seem a little bit lighter.” + +“It isn’t raining so hard either,” observed Grant. “These squalls stop +just as quickly as they start sometimes.” + +“The lake must be deep here,” said Fred. “How long is that anchor +chain?” + +“About fifteen feet I guess,” said John. + +“That ought to keep us from going ashore anyway,” exclaimed Fred. “Who +said this storm was over?” + +“It must be coming back,” said Grant. “It certainly let up for awhile +though.” + +“But it’s making up for it now all right,” observed George. “I’m so glad +I took all that trouble to get my clothes dry.” + +The four boys looked at one another and could not help laughing. Every +one of them was drenched through to the skin and no one had a dry stitch +of clothes on. The rain pelted them mercilessly and the water ran off +their faces in streams. All huddled together, they made a forlorn +looking party. + +“This is what all campers get I suppose,” remarked George. + +“They certainly do,” agreed Grant. “Some of them get it worse than this +too.” + +“Do you suppose our tent is still there?” inquired John. + +“Let’s hope so,” exclaimed George fervently. “We’d be in a nice fix if +we found it blown away when we got back.” + +“If we do get back,” said Fred dolefully. + +“What’s the matter with you, Fred?” demanded Grant. “You don’t think +we’re all going to die or be killed, do you?” + +“I don’t know. This is a bad storm and we can’t see where we are.” + +“But the anch—” + +There was a sudden jolt. Every boy was almost thrown from his seat as +the boat came to a quick stop. Then the bow swung slowly around and a +moment later the Balsam was pointed straight into the wind, her anchor +chain taut. + +“We’re aground,” cried George. + +“Not at all,” corrected Grant. “The anchor chain has caught, that’s +all.” + +“Where are we?” + +“I can’t see.” + +“We must be somewhere near shore,” said John. + +“We might be on a shoal.” + +“No, there’s land,” cried John. “I can see it.” + +“Maybe it’s on our island,” said George. “Wouldn’t that be queer.” + +“Well, I wish the old storm would be over so we can see just where we +are located,” exclaimed Fred. “I’ve had enough of this.” + +“You’d better be thankful the anchor holds and not worry about anything +else,” observed Grant. “So far we can’t complain.” + +“It’s stopping,” said George suddenly. “The sun will be out in a +minute.” + +“If it comes out it had better bring an umbrella, that’s all I can say,” +observed John. + +“A pretty poor joke, String,” said George. “Try another one; it might be +better.” + +“The sun is coming out,” cried Grant. “The storm is almost over, I +guess.” + +“Thank goodness!” exclaimed Fred. “Now we can see where we are.” + +Little by little the rain abated, the wind died down and the thunder +melted away in the distance. Before many moments had passed the sun +broke forth from behind a cloud and blue sky appeared. + +“Do they have many of these squalls around here, I wonder?” said George. +“I don’t think very highly of them myself.” + +“Nor I,” agreed Grant. “Just look where it carried us.” + +“There’s our island,” exclaimed Fred. “I thought it was in the other +direction though.” + +“So it was,” said John. “We traveled the whole length of the lake, I +guess.” + +“Right past our camp?” + +“It looks so.” + +“Suppose we had hit one of those big rocks where I fell in,” said +George. “Our anchor wouldn’t have done us very much good there.” + +“I should say not,” agreed Grant. “Isn’t that a camp over there?” + +His three companions gazed in the direction he indicated and sure enough +a big white tent very similar to their own appeared on shore, a short +distance from the spot where the Balsam lay at anchor. + +“I don’t see anybody around,” remarked Fred. “Do you suppose they’re all +away?” + +“The best way to find out is to go and see for ourselves,” exclaimed +Grant. + +“That’s right,” observed George. “Let’s get the anchor up and sail in.” + +“There’s a dock there too, where we can land,” said Fred. “Perhaps the +people who are camping here have been caught out in the storm.” + +“We’ll soon know anyway,” said Grant, making his way forward to assist +George in getting up the anchor. + + + + +CHAPTER VII—AN UNEXPECTED MEETING + + +A few moments later the Balsam was making its way towards the tiny wharf +in the little harbor. Two canoes lay bottom up on the shore but no sign +of any living being appeared. + +“Perhaps they’ve gone to the ball game,” remarked George. + +“Ball game!” exclaimed Fred. “What are you talking about?” + +“I was just fooling and trying to get a rise out of somebody. Of course +I knew I could make somebody bite with you on board.” + +“Huh,” snorted Fred. “I thought you’d gone crazy, talking about ball +games up here in the woods.” + +“You two are always wrangling,” exclaimed Grant. “Stop it.” + +“I can’t resist trying to get rises out of Fred,” said George. “He’s so +easy.” + +“Leave him alone,” said Grant. “I wonder where the people are who own +this tent. There doesn’t seem to be a soul around.” + +“Let’s go up to the tent and peek in,” suggested John. + +“Do you think we ought to do that?” Fred protested. + +“Why not? We’re not going to steal anything are we?” + +“I’m not,” laughed Fred. “Of course I don’t know about you.” + +“Come ahead,” urged George. “We’ll just take one look.” + +They made their way up from the dock towards the tent. Still no sign of +life appeared and when John had stolen one hasty glance inside the tent +he reported that no one was in there either. + +“Let’s go back,” exclaimed Fred. “There’s no use in staying around here +any longer.” + +“Come on,” said Grant. “It’s time to eat too.” + +“We might eat our luncheon over on that point,” suggested George, +indicating a spot about a mile or so distant from the place where they +were. + +“Eating suits me all right,” exclaimed John. “I must say I’m hungry.” + +“And I’d like to get my clothes dry,” added Fred. “I’m sort of cold.” + +Once more they set sail on the Balsam without having caught sight of a +single occupant of the camp they had just visited. The sun was now +shining brightly and the sky was as blue as ever. No trace of the recent +storm remained to mar the beautiful day. It was not long before all four +boys were in excellent spirits again and their appetites became keener +with each passing moment. + +Landing on the point where they had decided to eat their luncheon, they +quickly set about making preparations for the meal. A fire was soon +started and with every one assisting, the meal was quickly under way. + +“How soon will it be ready, Grant?” asked George of the cook. + +“Oh, in half an hour.” + +“Come on then, String,” exclaimed George. “Let’s go back into the woods +here and see if we can’t find some berries or something.” + +“Don’t get lost,” warned Grant. “Fred and I are too hungry to spend a +lot of time looking for you, you know.” + +“Don’t worry about us,” laughed John. “We’ll be gone only a few +minutes.” + +Leaving Grant and Fred busy with the cooking the two boys plunged into +the woods and disappeared from view. The trees were still dripping from +the heavy rain, but the fragrant odor of spruce and balsam was stronger +than ever. The thick carpet of pine needles under their feet was wet, so +that their advance was noiseless. + +Suddenly, up from its hiding place almost under their feet, a grouse +arose with a roar and whirr of wings. Booming off through the trees it +quickly disappeared from view leaving the forest as silent as before. +The spell of it was on the two young campers as they stood still and +gazed all about them. The green leafy aisles of the woods stretched in +all directions around them most beautiful and inviting to the eye. A +catbird whined from a nearby tree, but otherwise all was still. + +“Did you ever see anything more beautiful?” asked John in a low voice. + +“I never did,” replied George solemnly. The beauty and the grandeur of +it all made them feel as though they really should not speak above a +whisper. + +“I don’t see any berries though,” continued John. + +“Nor I,” said George. “There’s an open space ahead of us though; perhaps +we’ll find some there.” + +“Some blueberries wouldn’t taste bad just now.” + +In silence they continued their walk, even taking care to step softly so +as not to disturb the solemnity of the woods. Ahead of them appeared a +break in the trees and an open space showed. Here was the place to find +blueberries if any grew in that neighborhood at all. A moment later the +two boys came to the edge of the clearing which was perhaps a hundred +yards square. + +As they were about to step out from the shelter of the trees George +suddenly clutched his companion by the arm. + +“Look there,” he whispered. + +Following George’s directions John saw something that caused his face to +grow white and his heart to jump. In the center of the clearing and +busily engaged in eating the blueberries which grew in abundance all +about was a large black bear. + +He seemed entirely oblivious to his surroundings and as the wind blew +from him towards the two boys he was not aware of their presence. With +one great paw he stripped the berries from the low-lying bushes and with +his long, eager tongue he licked them up greedily. That his ancient +enemy, man, might be lurking nearby apparently did not occur to him. The +two boys stood and watched him, fascinated, not knowing whether to run +or whether to hold their ground. The bear was scarcely a hundred feet +distant from the spot where they were standing. + +“What shall we do?” whispered George. + +“Wait.” + +“Suppose he comes after us.” + +“If he does we’ll run.” + +All at once the bear looked up. Perhaps some eddying current of wind had +betrayed the presence of the two boys to his sensitive nostrils. It is a +well known fact that the eyesight of most wild animals is comparatively +poor; their sense of smell, however, is correspondingly sharp and it is +on this that they must rely to a large extent for safety. + +All around him old bruin gazed while the hearts of the two young campers +almost stood still. There they were standing within plain sight, right +at the edge of the forest and they could not possibly escape being seen. +Anxiety as to what the bear would do made the next few moments very +nervous ones. + +Suddenly he saw them. George and John held their breath and waited. He +looked at them steadily for a moment, one paw held poised in the air. +Then he turned and with that clumsy lumbering gait common to his kind +ambled off across the clearing. Arriving at the opposite side he turned +his head and glanced back at the two boys, still standing in the shadow +of the trees. Then he continued his way once more and quickly +disappeared from sight. + +“Well,” exclaimed George. “What do you think about that?” + +“Suppose he’d chased us.” + +“He’d never have caught me,” said George grimly. “With a bear after me I +know I could at least equal the world’s record for the half-mile.” + +“Even so, you’d have finished second,” laughed John. + +“What do you mean?” + +“Why, I’d have beaten you out, of course.” + +“Maybe so,” said George laughingly. “At any rate I guess it would have +been a pretty close finish. Imagine what Grant and Fred would have +thought if they’d seen us coming, tearing out of the woods with a big +black bear after us.” + +“I’d have gone right on across the lake too,” said John. + +“Do you want some berries?” + +“It’s pretty late now I’m afraid. I think perhaps we’d better go back.” + +“Perhaps so. Let’s go anyway; we can come back here after luncheon.” + +“That bear might have the same idea.” + +“That’s true too,” admitted George. “We can bring Fred and Grant along +with us if they want to come.” + +The two boys made their way back through the forest towards the lake. +Knowing that there were such things as bears in the neighborhood they +kept a sharp watch all about them. If they had only realized it, no bear +was half as anxious to meet them as they were to meet a bear. Wild +animals seldom if ever seek trouble of their own accord. + +A few moments later George and John emerged from the woods and caught +sight of the fire and their two companions. + +“Hey, you two!” called Fred. “Where have you been?” + +“Are we late?” asked John. + +“I should say you were. Grant and I were just about to eat up all the +food and not save any for you at all.” + +“Thank goodness you didn’t,” exclaimed George, fervently. + +“Did you find any berries?” demanded Grant. + +“Lots of them. A good many of them are still on the bushes.” + +“Didn’t you bring any back?” + +“Not a single one.” + +“What do you think of that, Fred?” demanded Grant. “These fellows go +back in the woods and stuff themselves with a lot of berries and don’t +even bring one back to the two who are working hard to prepare food for +them.” + +“We didn’t eat any ourselves.” + +“You didn’t?” exclaimed Grant. “What was the matter with them; weren’t +they good?” + +“I guess they were,” said John. “We didn’t try any though.” + +“What’s the matter?” inquired Fred. “What are you two trying to say +anyway? You found a lot of berries but you didn’t bring any back and you +didn’t eat any yourself. What’s the reason you didn’t?” + +“Somebody was there ahead of us,” said George. + +“The owner you mean?” asked Grant. “Wouldn’t he give you any?” + +“It wasn’t the owner,” said George. “It was somebody else.” + +“I wish you’d stop talking in riddles,” exclaimed Grant impatiently. +“Why don’t you tell us what happened!” + +“There was a bear there,” said John. “He liked berries too.” + +“A bear!” cried Grant and Fred in one breath. “What do you mean?” + +“There was a big black bear eating the blueberries,” said George, “so we +just decided we didn’t care very much for berries ourselves.” + +“Tell us about it,” demanded Grant eagerly. + +“I can’t talk unless I have something to eat first,” replied George +firmly. + +“Nor I,” agreed John. + +“Come and eat then,” laughed Fred. “We too have got something to tell +you two when you’ve finished.” + + + + +CHAPTER VIII—A PREDICAMENT + + +While all four boys were doing full justice to the meal which Grant had +prepared, George and John related the story of their meeting with the +bear. + +“And now,” exclaimed John when he had finished, “you tell us what you +have to say. Fred said there was something.” + +“We had an idea while you were gone, that’s all,” said Grant. + +“Tell us what it was.” + +“Go ahead, Fred.” + +“No, you tell them,” urged Fred. + +“Well,” said Grant, “it was only this. Fred and I were talking things +over and we thought it might be good fun if we took the two canoes and +went off on a little trip for a couple of days. What do you think about +it?” + +“I think it would be great,” exclaimed John heartily. “How about you, +Pop?” + +“It suits me first rate,” said George eagerly. “Why can’t we start +to-night?” + +“That’s a little soon I should think,” laughed Grant. “We can go +to-morrow though if you say so.” + +“We can get some good trout fishing up these streams, you know,” said +Fred. “I want to get that big trout.” + +“If there’s any big trout caught I expect to be the one to do it,” said +George very pompously. + +“Huh,” snorted Fred disgustedly, “you couldn’t catch cold.” + +“You just wait and see,” muttered George under his breath. + +“Do you know anything about trout fishing?” insisted Fred. + +“I never did any in my life.” + +“And you expect to catch a big trout?” said Fred derisively. “Why, Pop, +you’re sort of out of your head, aren’t you?” + +“Wait and see,” repeated George confidently. + +“Do you know how hard it is to cast a trout fly when you’re standing in +the middle of a clump of bushes and the branches of trees are in your +way all around you?” continued Fred. “Don’t you know that it takes +almost years of practice to do it so that you are accurate and don’t +catch your hook on everything in sight?” + +“Wait and see,” insisted George. “I have a new system.” + +“Ha! ha! ha!” laughed Fred. “You’re a joke.” + +“Let’s go back to camp and stop these two arguing,” exclaimed Grant. +“They’re at it all day long.” + +“We like each other all the more because we do it, don’t we, Pop?” +demanded Fred laughingly. + +“Yes,” admitted George, “except that you’re awfully conceited at times.” + +“Come on,” urged Grant. “They’ll be at it again if we’re not careful.” + +Before many moments had passed the Balsam was once more sailing over the +clear waters of the lake and in a short time the four boys arrived back +at camp. The remainder of the day was spent in planning for the trip +they were about to take and in discussing just where they should go. At +length an agreement satisfactory to every one was reached, the +arrangements were all completed and there was nothing left to do but +wait for the morrow in order to start. + +The sun had been up but a short time before the camp was astir. Grant +set about preparing breakfast while his three companions packed supplies +into the two canoes. Food sufficient for three days was loaded on board; +blankets were taken along, and trout rods with numerous flies of course +were included. + +“Breakfast’s ready,” announced Grant as soon as the work of loading was +complete. + +“So am I,” exclaimed George heartily. “I’m always ready to eat up here.” + +“Not only ‘up here’ either,” muttered Fred. + +“What did you say?” demanded George, wheeling around so as to face the +speaker. + +“Nothing.” + +“As usual,” laughed George. “Where’s the food?” + +“Right here,” exclaimed Grant. “Let’s see you get rid of it.” + +No second invitation was needed and it was not long before every crumb +and morsel that Grant had prepared had disappeared. + +“Let’s get started,” exclaimed George. “All the food is gone so there is +no point in staying around here any longer.” + +“You’re right, Pop,” laughed John. “I say we go too.” + +A few moments later the two canoes emerged from the little harbor and +started out across the lake, headed northward. Grant and Fred occupied +one of them while George and John paddled the other. + +“I’m glad you’re not in my canoe, Fred,” called George gayly. “Small as +you are, I’d soon get tired of paddling you around all day.” + +“Is that so?” snorted Fred. “Well, you’re not half as glad as I am for I +know that I’d be the one that would have to do all the work and you’re +too big and fat to make the work pleasant.” + +“They’re at it again, String,” laughed Grant. “What shall we do with +them?” + +“Leave them home,” suggested John. + +“Oh, we couldn’t do that. They’d be like the Kilkenny cats.” + +“Who were they?” demanded Fred. + +“Didn’t you ever hear about them?” + +“No. Tell me who they were.” + +“I guess you mean _what_ they were.” + +“All right, what they were, then.” + +“Why,” said Grant, “they were a couple of cats that loved to fight. One +day somebody tied their tails together and hung them over a clothes +line. Of course they began to fight right away and they fought so +furiously that when it was all over there wasn’t a thing left of either +of them.” + +“I suppose you expect me to believe that story,” snorted Fred. + +“I don’t care whether you believe it or not,” laughed Grant. “You wanted +to hear it, so I told it to you.” + +“Grant says we’re like a couple of cats, Pop,” called Fred. + +“Tell him he’d better be careful,” replied George. “Just because we call +each other names doesn’t mean that we allow other people to do it.” + +“Excuse me for interrupting,” said John laughingly, “but does any one +know where we are going?” + +“I do,” replied Grant. “We’re going up that river you see straight +ahead.” + +“Do you know where that leads to?” inquired Fred. + +“Yes. We can paddle up it for about two miles and then we have to make a +carry over to another river.” + +“How long is the carry?” demanded George. + +“Oh, about half a mile, I guess.” + +“Whew!” exclaimed George; “that’s a long distance to carry canoes and +all the stuff we have in them.” + +“Getting ready to shirk already, are you?” demanded Fred teasingly. + +“Shirk nothing,” said George. “Wait and see if I don’t do my share.” + +“Yes and ‘wait and see’ if you don’t catch the biggest trout too,” +taunted Fred. “Why, Pop, you’ll be lucky if you catch your breath.” + +“Wait and see,” muttered George darkly. + +“Yes, ‘wait and see’,” echoed Fred. “If you don’t stop saying that we’ll +have to call you, ‘Wait and See.’” + +Just at this moment, however, they came to the mouth of the river and +the argument was abandoned, for the time being at least. + +“This is great!” exclaimed John. “I always did like paddling in a narrow +space rather than on a lake or some place like that.” + +“I do too,” agreed Grant. “You feel closer to things somehow.” + +“You’re no closer to the water, you know,” remarked George with a wink +at Fred. + +“Don’t pay any attention to him, Grant,” said John. “I think we ought to +throw both of them overboard anyway.” + +As they progressed, the stream became narrower and the current swifter. +Evidently they would be unable to paddle very much farther upstream and +the young campers began to keep a sharp lookout for the carry. + +“There it is,” exclaimed Fred, suddenly pointing to a small sandy beach +a short distance ahead of them. + +They soon landed and emptying the canoes, they started off through the +woods to transfer them to the next river. It was necessary to leave the +baggage behind to await their coming back for it. Two boys to each canoe +they set out, the light boats turned upside down and bearing them aloft +on their shoulders. In spite of many groanings from George they reached +their destination before much time had elapsed, and then resting the +canoes on the bank of the stream they returned for the baggage. This was +more quickly and more easily transferred so that a short time later they +were once more making their way by paddling. + +“Say, Grant,” exclaimed John when they had covered a few hundred yards, +“how do you know all about these rivers?” + +“Didn’t you see that map I have?” + +“No. I kept wondering how you knew so much about the country around +here. I didn’t know you had a map.” + +“Of course I have. I wouldn’t know anything any other way for I’ve never +been up here in my life before.” + +“String thought you guessed at it,” laughed George. + +“No, I didn’t at all,” protested John. “I just didn’t think about it.” + +“Does your map say that there are rapids ahead?” asked Fred. + +“I didn’t notice. Why?” + +“Because I think there are. It seems to me that the current is getting +swifter all the time and I think you’ll find that when we go around that +bend up yonder you’ll find rapids ahead of us.” + +“Shall we run them?” demanded George excitedly. + +“We’ll probably be wrecked if we try it,” said Grant. + +“We can see how bad they are, anyway,” John suggested. + +“Yes,” agreed Fred. “We’ll ‘wait and see.’” + +“‘Go ahead’ is my motto when rapids are concerned,” said George. + +Rounding the curve in the river they discovered that scarcely a hundred +yards farther was another bend in the stream. Meanwhile the current was +rapidly becoming swifter and stronger. + +“We can’t see yet,” exclaimed George. “We’ll have to go ahead.” + +All four boys were excited now, and there was an eager light in every +one’s eyes as they were carried along by the swiftly-flowing stream. + +Suddenly they came around the second bend, and spread out before their +eyes appeared a long stretch of white water. It foamed and danced, here +and there broken by a huge rock, black and ugly looking. + +“We can’t run those,” cried Grant. “We’ll drown sure.” + +“Go ashore then,” shouted Fred, and he drove his paddle desperately into +the water. John and George also fought valiantly to divert their course +and avoid the rapids. Too late, however, for the current was stronger +than they, and with ever increasing speed they were drawn swiftly +towards the foaming waters below. + + + + +CHAPTER IX—DANGER + + +“Work, Fred! Work!” urged Grant desperately. + +“I’m doing my best,” panted Fred, and from the way he drove his paddle +into the water it was evident that what he said was true. + +They made a little progress towards the shore. They moved still more +swiftly downstream, however, for the current was powerful here. For +every foot that they progressed towards shore they were drawn a yard +closer to the rapids. Unless they reached the bank very soon they were +certain to be forced to run the rapids whether they desired to or not. + +George and John in the other canoe were in the same predicament. The two +frail little craft seemed no stronger than shells and it was almost +unbelievable that they could traverse that foaming stretch of water in +safety. No one spoke now; every boy was too busily employed in the +desperate struggle he was waging against the river. + +The current eddied and swirled. From below came the roar of the water as +it raced along in its mad course. Beside them was the shore and safety; +below was danger, accident, and possible death. + +When the two canoes had rounded the bend in the river the one which John +and George occupied had been a trifle closer to shore. Consequently it +had just that much advantage over the other. The occupants of the two +canoes were too engrossed in their own struggles to take much notice of +their companions, but out of the corner of his eye Grant saw that the +other canoe had nearly reached its goal. + +A moment later he heard a call from the shore sounding above the roar of +the rapids below. It was George’s voice. + +“Keep it up, Grant!” he shouted. “You’ll make it yet.” + +“Stick to it, Fred!” cried Grant, encouraged by the knowledge that their +companions had reached safety. “We can make it.” + +“I’m sticking to it all right,” replied Fred grimly. + +Closer and closer to shore they came. Nearer and nearer sounded the +noise of the rapids. Could they win out? Certainly they could if nerve +and determination were to count for anything. + +Ahead of them Grant could see George frantically urging them on. He was +so excited that he had run down into the water, where he stood +knee-deep, begging and imploring his comrades to come to him. Inch by +inch they seemed to move towards shore. Their muscles were aching from +the strain now and it was agony for both boys to keep up the fight, but +neither one gave even the slightest thought to quitting. + +It almost seemed as if they were going to win out now. George was +scarcely ten feet distant; arms outstretched he eagerly awaited a chance +to seize the bow of the canoe and draw it and its occupants to safety. +His chance did not come, however. + +Just out of his eager reach a whirlpool caught the canoe. The bow swung +suddenly around and Fred’s paddle was almost wrested from his grasp. In +vain he and Grant fought. Twice the frail little boat spun around and +then seized by a sudden eddy in the current was borne swiftly and +relentlessly towards the rapids below. + +“We’re goners!” cried Fred. + +“Keep your nerve!” shouted Grant fiercely. “You do the steering from the +bow. You can see the rocks from there.” + +At racehorse speed the canoe shot forward. With every second its +momentum increased until it seemed fairly to fly over the water. +White-lipped and with jaws set the two boys sat and awaited their fate. +From the shore George and John watched with feverish anxiety. + +Now they were almost in the rapids. An eddy caught the canoe and it +nearly upset. It escaped, however, and again sped on. Around it the +water foamed white and hissed and snarled as it raced along. Black rocks +stood out along the treacherous pathway. It seemed as if the canoe must +surely come to grief on any one of a dozen of them. + +Seated on the bottom of the canoe and with his eyes riveted on the +rapids below, Fred wielded his paddle like a madman. First one side and +then the other he dipped it, changing so swiftly sometimes as almost to +bewilder the onlookers. + +They were half way through the dangerous passage now. Was it possible +that they could come through those angry waters untouched? It was out of +the question; they had merely been lucky so far. At least that was the +way George and John felt about it. Any moment they expected to see their +comrades upset and disappear from sight beneath those terrible foaming +waves. + +Still the canoe raced on. One moment it had the speed of a locomotive +and the next, caught by some eddying whirlpool, its momentum almost +ceased, only to shoot forward suddenly again at a bewildering pace an +instant later. + +“I believe they’ll get through,” exclaimed George excitedly. He and John +were standing on a large boulder which afforded them an excellent view +of the rapids. + +“Wait,” cautioned John quietly. + +“‘Wait and see,’” smiled George. + +“Please don’t joke,” muttered John. “I don’t feel like it.” + +The onrushing canoe was almost through the rapids now. Could it be that +two inexperienced boys were to come through that mad mill race alive? If +they could last a moment more they were safe, but ahead of them was the +most dangerous part of the rapids. Two huge rocks stood out in midstream +scarcely six feet apart. Between them the water rushed and roared like a +cataract. Below this spot the rapids ended and the current gradually +slowed down to its normal swiftness. + +Fred and Grant saw all this in the twinkling of an eye and they knew +that the test was now to come. Both boys braced themselves; so swiftly +did they move now that it almost seemed as if they were standing still +and that it was the two great rocks that were charging down upon them. +Closer and closer they came. With bated breath George and John watched +from the shore, realizing their companions’ peril. + +Fred, in the bow of the canoe, gripped his paddle with all his strength. +One moment more and their lot would be decided. The rocks looked like +mountains as they bore down upon them. Now they were just ahead, ugly +and bristling in their might; now they were alongside; now they were +past. Fred and Grant had run the rapids in safety. They could scarcely +realize it. The danger was over and they were alive. + +“Yea, Fred!” shouted Grant. “We’re through!” + +“Thank goodness,” sighed Fred, and he sank back limply against one of +the thwarts of the canoe. + +“You’re a wonder,” cried Grant. + +“It’s a wonder we’re alive, you mean.” + +“That’s true, too. But the way you steered!” + +“It wasn’t due to any skill on my part; we were just lucky.” + +“Anyway,” exclaimed Grant happily, “we ran the rapids and I wouldn’t +give up that experience for a million dollars now.” + +“Neither would I, _now_,” agreed Fred. “It would take a good deal more +than that to make me go through with it again, though.” + +They had now reached a point two or three hundred yards below the rapids +and decided to go ashore and wait for John and George. It was with a +very comfortable feeling that the two boys set their feet on solid +ground once more. + +“Just look back there and see what we came through,” exclaimed Grant. + +“I don’t see how we did it,” said Fred. “I wonder if we really did.” + +“You think you were dreaming, I suppose,” laughed Grant. “I can swear we +did do it, though, and I guess Pop and String will, too.” + +“It doesn’t seem possible.” + +“Here we are.” + +“I know it. Just look at those rapids, though. They look like Niagara +Falls from here.” + +“There ought to be good fishing along here,” remarked Grant. + +“I should think so. Perhaps Pop can catch his big trout here. The big +fellows usually stay in the deep pools below rapids like this.” + +“Here they come now,” exclaimed Grant, as John and George appeared, +carrying their canoe along the shore. + +“We’ll have some fun with them about it, anyway,” said Fred, in a low +voice. “Watch me get a rise out of them.” + +“Hey, you two,” shouted George, as he spied his friends. “What do you +mean by scaring String and me almost out of our wits?” + +“Do you suppose we did it on purpose?” laughed Grant. + +“Why, that was nothing at all for us,” said Fred, airily. + +“Oh, is that so?” demanded George, mimicking Fred’s tone. “Well, if that +was nothing, I’d hate to see what something was.” + +“That was no effort at all for us,” continued Fred, carelessly. + +“Put this canoe down quickly, String,” exclaimed George. “Let me get at +that fellow. He ought to be drowned.” + +With a sigh of relief John and George deposited their burden on the +ground and George immediately advanced threateningly towards Fred. + +“Let him alone, Pop,” laughed Grant. “He’s the best steersman this side +of the Canadian border.” + +“He was pretty good, wasn’t he?” exclaimed John. “How did you two +fellows like shooting the rapids?” + +“It was wonderful,” said Fred heartily. “I never had such a wonderful +sensation in all my life.” + +“I’ll bet you were both almost scared to death,” said George, shortly. + +“We were,” laughed Fred, “but now that it’s all over we’re glad we did +it.” + +“Fred thinks there ought to be some good fishing in these pools along +here,” said Grant. “What do you say to trying them?” + +“That suits me,” said George readily. “I’m hungry, too.” + +“We’ll have lunch right here then,” exclaimed Grant, “and afterwards +we’ll try our hands at the trout fishing.” + +“And Pop will catch the biggest trout that ever swam in the waters of +the Adirondacks,” added Fred, nudging John as he spoke. + +“Huh,” exclaimed George disgustedly. “I wish you’d stop that talk. I +suppose you’ll be worse than ever now that you’ve run these rapids.” + +“I didn’t say anything about myself,” smiled Fred. “I was talking about +the big trout you were going to catch.” + +“I suppose you think you’re the only one here who can shoot rapids or +catch fish or do anything at all.” + +“I told you I was talking about you, not about myself,” insisted Fred. +“I said you’d probably catch the biggest trout in the Adirondacks.” + +“You think you’re pretty funny,” snorted George. “You just wait and +see.” + + + + +CHAPTER X—WAIT AND SEE + + +When luncheon was over, the four young campers busied themselves with +preparations for the afternoon’s fishing. They sat around on the bank +joining the different sections of their trout rods and selecting the +flies which they considered would be most tempting to the speckled fish +they sought to catch. + +“We’ll fish from the shore, I suppose,” remarked John. + +“Of course,” exclaimed Fred. “The current is too strong here to try it +from a canoe.” + +“I’m not much good at this game, I’m afraid,” laughed John. “I don’t +expect to catch a thing.” + +“I don’t know anything about it, either,” said George, “but I certainly +expect to catch something just the same.” + +“Maybe you’ll have beginner’s luck,” said Grant. + +“I don’t care what it is,” laughed George. “I want some fish, though.” + +“Well, I’m ready,” said Fred, rising to his feet. “Where are we going?” + +“Suppose two of us go upstream and two down,” suggested Grant. + +“All right,” exclaimed Fred. “You and I will go up and the others the +other way. We’ll meet back here in time for supper.” + +“At the latest,” added John. + +Fred stepped to the shore and deftly cast his fly out on the waters. +Gradually lengthening the amount of line he had out, he kept casting and +then drawing the rod back over his head so that the line stretched far +behind him. Then, with a short snap of his wrist he would send the fly +floating out over the pool again. As it came to rest lightly on the +surface of the water he jerked it along for a few feet in imitation of +the struggles of a live insect and then he would repeat the performance +all over again. + +His three friends watched him with absorbing interest. + +“That’s a simple performance,” exclaimed George at length. “Why don’t +you leave the fly in the water for a second or two and give the fish +half a chance to swallow it? It would have to be an awfully quick trout +to take your hook.” + +“They’re quick enough; don’t worry about that,” smiled Fred. + +“But why don’t you let the hook sink a little below the surface?” + +“Did you ever see a moth or a bug of some sort light on the water?” Fred +inquired. + +“Yes. Lots of times.” + +“Did you ever see one sink?” + +“No, I don’t believe I ever did,” George admitted slowly. + +“That’s just it,” exclaimed Fred triumphantly. “If a real insect doesn’t +do it, why should an artificial one? The idea is to make the fly appear +just as much alive as possible.” + +“I haven’t seen you catch anything yet,” remarked George. + +Hardly had he spoken, however, when Fred had a strike. His fly had +settled like thistledown on the surface of the pool after an almost +perfect cast, when there was a rush and the line was drawn swiftly +across the pool. The light rod bent almost double and Fred’s three +companions jumped to their feet excitedly. + +“Yea, Fred!” shouted John. “You’ve hooked a big one. Stick to him.” + +“Big one nothing,” said Fred shortly. “It’s a little fellow.” + +“Bring him in anyway,” cried George. “The little ones are just as good +to eat as any kind.” + +The trout may have been small as Fred had predicted, but he put up a +valiant fight. After a very pretty struggle, however, he was gradually +brought in close to the bank, and with a quick, dexterous scoop of his +landing net Fred brought him to shore. + +“About ten inches,” he remarked as he held the gamey little fish up for +his friends to see. “He was fierce, though; look there,” and he showed +the side of the trout’s mouth all torn and bloody, so hard had he +attacked the hook. + +“Let’s go after some ourselves, String,” exclaimed George eagerly. “I’d +rather catch them myself than to watch others.” + +“Remember you’re going to get a big one,” reminded Fred. + +“Wait and see,” said George gruffly. + +Without wasting any more time he and John made their way downstream +while Fred and Grant worked slowly in the opposite direction. Fred was +the only one of the four who was at all skillful in handling a +trout-rod, and, as a consequence, he had the best luck at the start. +Grant, however, had captured one prize, and to his delight it proved to +be larger than any Fred had caught. + +They had progressed slowly towards the rapids, stopping at every pool +for a few casts, but both boys seemed to have the idea that their luck +would be better farther up. Consequently they did not linger long in any +one spot until they reached a point just below the rapids. Here there +were several large pools, and each boy selected one and prepared to make +a cast. + +Grant had experienced considerable difficulty in making his casts, for +the branches of the nearby trees and bushes seemed far easier to locate +than the spot for which he aimed. Time and again he had found his hook +entangled by the overhanging limb of some tree and he had spent many +moments in freeing it as a result. It was particularly exasperating to +him as he saw Fred with apparent ease drop his fly on any spot he cared +to hit. + +Grant had just succeeded in disentangling his hook for at least the +tenth time when he heard his name called. + +“Come over here, Grant!” shouted Fred excitedly. “I need help.” + +Grant immediately dropped his rod and started towards the spot where +Fred was standing. + +“What’s the matter?” he demanded, when he was only a few yards distant +from his companion. + +“Matter?” exclaimed Fred. “Look at that rod.” + +It was bent almost double, and the line whipped back and forth across +the pool as if it was possessed. + +“Zowie!” cried Grant eagerly. “You’ve hooked a good one this time.” + +“I should say I had.” + +“What do you want me to do?” + +“Take that landing net and stand ready to scoop him up in case I can +bring him close enough to shore, and don’t lose him beforehand.” + +“Don’t lose him,” begged Grant. “Look at him go.” + +The light rod was almost in the shape of a horseshoe and it scarcely +seemed possible that it could stand the strain. Back and forth and +around and across the pool the trout carried the hook. Fred strove to +keep a constant pressure on the line in order to tire the fish out; he +did not try to check his frequent bold rushes, however, but rather to +prevent the line from becoming slack at any time. + +One moment he would reel the line in swiftly and there would be almost +no resistance at all; the next moment, however, just as he and Grant had +come to the conclusion that the struggle was practically ended, off +would go the line again while the reel sang loudly. + +Fred was white-lipped, he was so excited. But who wouldn’t be, for there +is no more thrilling sport in the world than to fight a big trout with a +five-ounce rod? + +“I believe he’s tiring,” exclaimed Fred at length. + +“A little, perhaps,” agreed Fred. + +“I wish he’d jump so we could see him.” + +“If he does I’ll lose him. That’s one of the things I’m doing my best to +prevent.” + +“Why so?” demanded Grant in surprise. + +“If a fish can jump clear of the water he can very often shake the hook +out of his mouth. I’ve seen it happen too often.” + +“But I don’t see how you can prevent it.” + +“If I keep a steady strain on him all the time, he can’t jump. It’s only +when the line is slack that they have a chance to do that.” + +“Look at him go!” exclaimed Grant. “Wouldn’t you think he’d be getting +tired by this time?” + +“He is. His rushes aren’t as long as they were before.” + +“Does that mean you’ve got him?” + +“Not at all. You’ve never caught a trout until he is safely on the +shore.” + +Fred had not once taken his eyes from the line while he was talking with +Grant. Carefully, coolly and with great skill he played his fish. Never +once did he relax his caution, and little by little he seemed to be +gaining the mastery. Every rush was shorter than the one before, and +after every one he reeled in a bit more of line and brought the trout a +trifle nearer to the shore and the net. + +“Get ready, Grant,” said Fred in a tense voice. + +The handle of the net in his right hand, Grant knelt on the rocks on the +edge of the pool. He was just to the left of the spot where his comrade +was standing and he now watched the line just as closely as Fred. + +“Let me know when to scoop him,” he said. + +“You’ll know all right,” replied Fred. “You’ll see him in the water.” + +“You tell me, though.” + +“All right.” + +The plucky trout was tiring rapidly now. His struggles became weaker and +weaker. Fred had played him well, but he was too seasoned a fisherman to +feel that the fight was ended. Bitter experience had taught him that +there is many a slip. + +“Get the net ready,” exclaimed Fred after what seemed like a very long +time to Grant, who was not comfortable in the position he was in. + +Nearer and nearer Fred brought the trout. He still struggled weakly but +was practically exhausted now. Relentlessly Fred reeled in the line. +Once the trout broke the water with his tail not a dozen feet from shore +and Grant held his breath; he thought the fish had escaped. + +Not so, however, for a moment later he could see him in the water being +drawn remorselessly closer to the net. Grant was in a panic for fear he +should not do his part correctly. + +“Now, Grant!” cried Fred suddenly. + +The trout was in the water almost at Grant’s feet. His struggles were +very weak now and thanks to the way Fred handled the rod, was nearly +motionless. Carefully Grant lowered the net into the water and moved it +along until it was almost underneath the beaten fish; then with a quick +motion he raised the net and a moment later the trout lay upon the bank +enmeshed in its folds. + +“Nice work, Grant!” exclaimed Fred. “You did that like a veteran!” + +“Isn’t he a beauty!” cried Grant delightedly. + +“He surely is.” + +“How much do you suppose he weighs?” + +“Oh, I don’t know. I’d hate to say; two pounds and a half, I guess.” + +“That’s pretty big, isn’t it?” inquired Grant. + +“It is for this part of the country and it’s all I’d care to tackle with +a five-ounce rod.” + +Fred had removed the hook from the fish’s mouth now and he held him up +to view. + +“He’s all right,” said Grant admiringly. + +“What do you suppose Pop will say about him?” grinned Fred. “I don’t +believe he can match him, do you?” + +“I don’t know,” said Grant doubtfully. “I’d hate to bet on it. You can’t +ever be sure what he’ll do.” + +“Huh,” laughed Fred derisively. “He couldn’t catch a trout like that to +save his life.” + +“Wait and see,” cautioned Grant. + + + + +CHAPTER XI—WHAT GEORGE DID + + +“Well, I suppose we might as well go back now,” said Fred. “It’ll be +dark before long.” + +“All right,” agreed Grant, reluctantly. “I wish I might have caught a +trout like that one of yours though.” + +“I’ll stay if you want to.” + +“No, I guess not,” said Grant. “As you say it will be dark soon and we +might as well go back.” + +“Get your rod then and we’ll start.” + +Grant returned to the spot where he had been standing when Fred called +him, and picking up his rod soon joined his companion. Together they +made their way back to camp rehearsing the story of the big trout’s +capture time and again during the journey. + +“The others don’t seem to have returned yet,” remarked Grant when they +had arrived at their destination. “Shall we wait for them?” + +“I don’t see the use. Let’s clean some of the fish and get ready for +supper.” + +“You’re not going to eat that big one, are you?” + +“I’m not going to touch it yet, that’s sure. I want to show it to Pop +first.” + +“Aren’t you going to stuff it and take it home?” + +“I don’t believe I can,” said Fred. “I don’t know how to do it myself +and there isn’t any place around here where I can have it done.” + +“That’s too bad; still it will make good eating.” + +“After I’ve shown it to Pop,” grinned Fred. + +“Here they come now!” exclaimed Grant, and as he spoke John and George +appeared through the trees a short distance away. + +“What luck did you have?” demanded John as he and his comrade approached +the fire which Grant had started. + +“Pretty good,” replied Grant. “I caught only one myself but Fred got +eight.” + +“Good for him,” exclaimed John. “Did you get any big ones?” + +“Fred caught one beauty.” + +“Let’s see it.” + +Nothing loath Fred proudly produced his big trout and held it up for the +inspection of his friends. + +“Say,” exclaimed George, “that’s a good one all right!” + +“He certainly put up a game fight too,” said Grant. “You should have +seen it.” + +“I wish we had,” said George. “None of the ones we caught gave us any +trouble at all.” + +“Perhaps you didn’t catch any big enough,” said Fred, preparing to tease +George and remind him of his boasts. “How many did you get anyway?” + +“Only four all together,” replied George. “String caught three of +those.” + +He and John seemed unwilling for some reason to talk very much and they +had the appearance of holding something back. Perhaps if it had been +lighter it would have been possible to see a guilty look on the faces of +both boys. + +“Let’s see your fish,” urged Fred. “Don’t be afraid of them. I’m +surprised that you didn’t catch more than one, Pop. I expected that +you’d bring in at least a dozen and that you’d surely get one bigger +than mine; here you are with only four little ones between you. Bring +them out anyway.” + +John opened the creel and dipping his hand inside brought out a trout +about ten inches long and laid it on the mossy bank. + +“That’ll do for a start,” grinned Fred, who was thoroughly enjoying +himself. He knew that he had made good his boast about catching a larger +fish than George. He had been somewhat worried up to the present time +for as Grant had said it was never possible to say just what George +would do. Now, however, all doubts had been swept from his mind and he +was perfectly confident that he had beaten his rival. + +“There’s another,” said John, bringing out a second fish, if anything a +trifle smaller than the first. + +“Huh,” laughed Fred, “I’ll bet that’s the one Pop caught.” + +“No, it isn’t,” said John. “I caught those two and this one too,” and he +placed a third trout by the side of the other two. All three of them +were almost exactly the same size. + +“They’re not very large, are they?” said John dubiously. + +“Oh, they’ll make fine eating,” exclaimed Fred. “Where’s your other fish +though? I want to see the one that Pop caught.” + +John once more put his hand in the creel and felt all around. + +“I don’t feel it here,” he said anxiously. + +“Maybe it slipped through a crack in the basket,” said Fred gleefully. +“Are you sure you caught a fish, Pop?” + +“Why, I thought so,” said George. “Here, String, let me try to find it.” + +“Too bad we haven’t got a magnifying glass,” chuckled Fred as John +passed the creel over to George. “You know it’s against the law to catch +the little bits of ones anyway.” + +“Find it, Pop?” inquired John. + +“Here it is,” exclaimed George after a moment’s search and he drew forth +to the astonished gaze of Grant and Fred a trout that one glance showed +was easily larger than the one Fred had caught. + +“Where’d you get that fish?” demanded Fred in amazement. + +“I caught it.” + +“You did? How’d you do it?” + +“With a hook and line of course. I told you to ‘wait and see.’” + +“Well,” gasped Fred, and he stopped for lack of anything further to say. +His three companions, however, burst into gales of laughter all at his +expense and all seemed to enjoy the situation very much. + +“Let me see him,” demanded Fred, and George very willingly handed over +his prize to be inspected. + +“Why, look here,” exclaimed Fred. “There’s not a cut or a mark of any +kind around his mouth but his stomach has a big gash in it.” + +“Certainly,” said George. “That’s where I hooked him.” + +“In the stomach?” cried Fred. “What are you talking about?” + +“Tell him how you did it, Pop,” urged John gleefully. + +“Well,” said George, “it was like this. I tried to fish the way I saw +Fred doing it but I couldn’t to save my life. The old hook kept catching +on everything in sight.” + +“Just like mine,” interposed Grant. + +“I finally got disgusted,” continued George. “It didn’t seem to be any +use in my trying any longer and I thought that a trout would be an awful +fool to bite that silly looking fly anyway. I’ve always fished with +worms and I didn’t see why I couldn’t catch trout with worms for bait. I +decided to try it anyway, so I rolled over an old log and dug under it +with my knife. It wasn’t long before I had a couple of big fat fellows +and I soon put one on the hook and took the fly off. + +“Well, I fished with the worms for a while but nothing happened and I +began to get pretty well discouraged. I quit fishing and lay down on my +stomach to get a drink out of one of the pools. The water was just as +clear as crystal and just as I lay down I saw a big old trout shoot +under a big rock at the bottom of the pool. That proved there were trout +in there anyway. + +“The rock where he disappeared was right beneath me and I picked up my +line with the big worm still on the hook and let it down just as quietly +as I could until it was right in front of the rock. Nothing happened for +a long time and I thought the trout was gone, but all of a sudden I saw +him again.” + +“Were you holding the line in your hand?” inquired Grant. + +“Yes; it was just like a drop line. The rod was lying in back of me on +the ground and all I had done was to let out a lot of line. Well, the +old trout sort of poked his nose out and took a look around. He went up +to the worm and took a smell of it; at least that’s the way it looked. +He didn’t bite it though and a second later he went whizzing back +underneath the rock again. I thought he was gone for good but in a few +seconds back he came; the worm seemed to attract him even if he didn’t +try to eat it. He kept hanging around it all the time, sort of sniffing +at it first one side and then the other. + +“All of a sudden I had an idea.” + +“Whew,” whistled Fred softly. + +“I decided,” continued George paying no attention to the interruption, +“that I’d try to pull the line up all of a sudden and hook him in the +stomach. I didn’t see why such a thing wasn’t possible and I meant to +try it the first chance I had. Old Mr. Trout still hung around the worm +but it seemed as if he was never going to get right over the hook. +Finally he started to swim away slowly and I thought it was all over. He +only went a few feet though and then turned back. The worm seemed to +fascinate him. + +“He went right up to the hook and sort of looked it over again; then he +turned his back on it so to speak, and kept perfectly still, just +wiggling his fins. I lowered the hook a little and he never moved. I +lowered it a little more and held it there. All at once he turned +leisurely around and came right square over the hook. I yanked the line +with all my might and there he is.” + +George pointed proudly to the big trout lying at his feet. + +“That’s a great way to fish for trout,” exclaimed Fred in disgust. + +“That’s all right, Pop,” laughed Grant. “You caught him anyway, didn’t +you?” + +“I surely did. I told Fred I’d beat him out and I did it. Why, Fred, you +little shrimp, I’d have put salt on his tail and caught him that way if +it was necessary in order to take some of the conceit out of you.” + +“Bah!” exclaimed Fred in disgust. + + + + +CHAPTER XII—A CHALLENGE + + +Two more days the boys spent among the streams and the trout pools. At +the end of that time their supply of food was running low and they +decided to return to their island camp. + +The return trip was made without any mishap and when they entered the +little lake where their island was situated, their tent, standing out +prominently on the little bluff where it was pitched, was a welcome +sight to all. + +“It looks pretty good, doesn’t it?” exclaimed John proudly. + +“It certainly does,” agreed Fred. “I’m sort of glad to be back again.” + +“We had a great time though,” said George enthusiastically. “There’s one +more trip I want to take this summer too.” + +“What’s that?” inquired Fred. + +“I’d like to climb that mountain over there.” + +The four young campers turned their heads and gazed at the peak George +indicated, towering high over the lake. + +“That’s a go,” exclaimed Grant readily. “I think that it would be good +fun.” + +“So do I,” agreed John. “Let’s do it soon too.” + +“Do you suppose it will be very hard work?” asked Fred. + +“Of course it will,” said George. “You wouldn’t let that hold you back +though, would you?” + +“Not at all, but I don’t want you fellows to get the idea that it will +be any easy job. The mountain looks nice and green and smooth from here +because it’s all covered with trees, but when we get there we’ll find +it’s pretty rough going. Ravines and gullies and steep cliffs and +everything else like that will be there to hold us back.” + +“All the better,” exclaimed George. “Then when we reach the top we’ll +feel as if we had accomplished something.” + +“We’ll do it anyway,” said Grant and every one else agreed with him. + +Soon they reached their destination. The Balsam still rode at anchor in +the little harbor and everything seemed to be as the boys had left it. +In a few moments the canoes had been drawn up on shore and their +contents unloaded. Grant in the lead, they made their way towards the +tent. + +He disappeared inside the tent and before his companions had come up +with him, reappeared holding a paper in his hand. + +“What have you got there?” inquired George curiously. + +“I don’t know. I found it inside the tent.” + +“See what it is,” exclaimed George. + +“It’s a challenge of some kind, I think,” said Grant after a hasty +glance at the sheet which he held. + +“A challenge?” exclaimed John. “Not for a fight, I hope.” + +“Not as bad as that,” laughed Grant. “It’s an athletic challenge.” + +“Who from?” demanded Fred. + +“I don’t know yet,” said Grant. “Give me a chance.” + +“Read it out loud,” urged John. “That’s the best way.” + + “We, the undersigned,” read Grant, “hereby challenge the four + boys who are camping on the island in the middle of the lake to + a set of water sports. The events are to be decided upon by + mutual agreement and are to be as many in number as may be + agreed upon. We suggest that they include a sailing race, a + canoe race, and a swimming race. The day for the sports is to be + decided later and on Monday morning we will come over to see you + and arrange the details. + + Signed, Thomas Adams. + Franklin Dunbar. + Hugh McNeale. + Herbert Halsey.” + +“Who are they, do you suppose?” exclaimed John. + +“I don’t know,” said Fred. “I never heard of any of them before.” + +“They probably live in that camp down at the other end of the lake,” +said Grant. “The one we visited the other day, you know.” + +“And found nobody there,” added George. + +“That’s it. They must be the ones.” + +“I guess they are,” agreed John. “How do they know so much about us +though? I don’t see how they knew there were four of us.” + +“Probably they’ve seen us around,” suggested Grant. “That part of it is +easy enough.” + +“Well, what do you think of the challenge?” demanded Fred. + +“I say we accept it,” exclaimed George eagerly. + +“Of course we will,” said Grant. “I think it will be great sport.” + +“They may be a good deal older and bigger than we are,” suggested Fred. +“If they are we’ll sort of be outclassed.” + +“I don’t believe they are,” said Grant. “At any rate I don’t think we’ll +be outclassed.” + +“We’ll give them a good rub anyway,” exclaimed George. “What sort of +sailing and swimming and canoe races do you suppose they mean?” + +“They had a catboat like the Balsam,” said John. “Don’t you remember +seeing it down by their tent? We’ll use the catboats for the sailing +race.” + +“A relay swimming race would be a good stunt,” suggested Fred. “In that +way we could all be in it.” + +“When they come over here we can decide all the details,” said George. +“When was it that they said they were coming?” + +“Monday, I think,” said John. “Wasn’t it, Grant?” + +“Yes. That’s day after to-morrow.” + +“We ought to have some judges,” said Fred. + +“That’s true,” agreed Grant. “I don’t know where we’ll get any though.” + +“Maybe they’ll know somebody,” suggested George. + +“We’ll find out all about it on Monday anyway,” said Fred. “Let’s have a +little food now. I’ll faint unless I eat pretty soon.” + +“Poor little Freddy,” laughed George. “You need a nurse.” + +“Huh,” snorted Fred. “Ever since you hooked that trout by the tail you +have been too fresh to live. Your turn will come though.” + +“What do you mean by that?” demanded George. + +“Why, that the freshness will be taken out of you one of these days.” + +“Who’ll do it?” + +“I don’t know, but I have a sure feeling that something will happen to +you unless you mend your ways.” + +“Stop your arguing, you two,” exclaimed Grant. “You fight all day long.” + +“We’re not fighting,” laughed Fred. “That’s just the way we show how +fond we are of each other.” + +“Well, I must say you have a queer way of doing it,” said Grant. “I’d +hate to see what you’d do if you didn’t like each other.” + +“Such a thing could never happen, could it, Fred?” demanded George. + +“No, I guess not. I don’t know what I’d do if I didn’t have some one +like you around to make fun of,” responded Fred. + +“Who caught the big trout?” taunted George. + +“Will you keep quiet about that fish?” exclaimed Fred. “All you do is +talk about it from morning till night. I never want to hear of it +again.” + +“You will though,” grinned George. + +“Oh, I know that, but I wish something would happen to keep you quiet.” + +Such a thing was destined to come about before Fred dreamed it would and +it was also something he never would have thought of, possibly. + +“I need some wood for this fire,” remarked Grant, who was busied with +preparations for dinner. The sun was fast sinking in the west and the +light was commencing to fade. A lone kingfisher winged his way across +the lake returning to his home, a hole dug in some bank overlooking the +water. All was quiet and peaceful. + +“I need some wood for this fire,” Grant repeated, for no one had paid +any attention to his former statement of this fact. + +“You hear that, Pop?” inquired Fred. “Grant needs some wood.” + +“Yes, I heard him,” replied George. “What’s the matter with you; your +legs haven’t turned to stone, have they? Can’t you get it?” + +“I can, but I have to wash the dishes to-night. It seems to me that +that’s just about enough for me to do.” + +“All right,” sighed George, “I’ll get it. It strikes me, though, that I +do about all the work around here that there is to be done.” + +“Yes, it’s too bad about you,” jeered Fred. “Take the ax and get out of +here.” + +“It’s pretty dark,” said George as ax in hand he started for the clump +of trees in the rear of the tent. It was growing dark as George had said +and it was becoming more and more difficult to pick out the narrow +trail. He had advanced but a short distance when a little animal ran out +into the path and trotted along ahead of him. + +“Why, look at the cat,” exclaimed George half out loud. “I wonder how it +got on the island here.” + +As he spoke the little black and white animal left the path and entered +a clump of bushes on one side. George had always been extremely fond of +pets of all sort and he followed eagerly. + +“Here puss, puss, puss,” he called. “Here kitty, kitty, kitty.” + +There was no response and he called again. He used his most enticing +manner and did his best to coax the little animal out again. + +“Wouldn’t they be surprised back at camp,” he thought, “if I should +bring in a cat? It would make a fine mascot for us too.” + +He bent over the bushes where the cat had disappeared and called again; +no response came, however. He bent the twigs aside and stepped in, +looking carefully all about him as he went forward. Suddenly he uttered +a cry of surprise and started back. He thought he was choking, and +springing back into the narrow pathway he turned and ran for the tent as +fast as his legs would carry him. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII—THE OUTCAST + + +George’s one idea was to run away, but the remarkable part of the +adventure was that it seemed to be impossible to shake off that from +which he was trying to escape. + +A moment later he arrived at camp and spying his three friends seated +around the fire he made his way towards them. As soon as he reached the +spot where they were he threw himself upon the ground and commenced to +moan and groan violently. + +“Oh, dear, oh, dear,” he cried. “What have I done? What have I done?” + +“Why, Pop!” exclaimed Grant in alarm. “What’s the matter with—” + +He broke off suddenly in the midst of the sentence and looked at George +in horror. All sympathy for the sufferer quickly left him. + +“Get out of here!” he cried, but not waiting for George to leave he +departed quickly himself. He was accompanied by Fred and John who seemed +to be stricken with some strange malady, a mixture of anguish and +laughter. + +“What shall I do? What shall I do?” cried George as he saw his three +friends leaving him. + +“Do anything you want,” called Fred. “Drown yourself if you like, but +don’t come near me.” + +“Where’d you get it, Pop?” shouted John gleefully. “You’d better go soak +in the lake for a couple of days.” + +“Get away from that fire,” cried Grant. “Our supper is being cooked +there and we can’t come back until you leave.” + +“I’m not stopping you,” replied George. “Come back and tell me what to +do.” + +“I told you,” exclaimed Fred. “Go and drown yourself.” + +“Where’d you get it, Pop?” repeated John and immediately went off into +gales of laughter. + +“You caught the trout all right,” laughed Fred. “You caught something +else. Something a good deal bigger than that fish too.” + +“Isn’t it awful!” exclaimed John holding on to his nose. “I remember my +younger brother once ran across a skunk like this and he had to live in +the barn for two days.” + +“To think that Pop should be the one, too,” said Fred delightedly. “It +seems almost too good to be true.” + +“It’s true all right enough,” said Grant grimly. “Go up close to him if +you don’t believe it.” + +“What shall I do?” called George to his three unsympathetic companions. +He was standing near the fire, anguish depicted on his face. He was in a +sorry plight, for no matter where he went he could not escape the almost +overpowering odor that clung to him. + +“Take all your clothes off and throw them in the lake,” said Grant. +“Then go take a swim yourself. + +“After that we might let you come back,” added Fred. + +“But I can’t throw away perfectly good clothes,” protested George. + +“They’re not ‘good’ any more,” laughed John. “Throw them away.” + +“Burn them if you like,” suggested Fred. “Do anything you want with +them, only get rid of that smell. You can’t come near us until you do.” + +“Is that so?” demanded George and he took a few steps forward. “Who says +I can’t come near you?” + +“Don’t do it, Pop, don’t do it,” begged Grant. “If you only knew how you +smelled.” + +“I do know; don’t worry about that. It follows me wherever I go.” + +“Please don’t come near us,” exclaimed Grant as George still moved +towards them. + +“I thought I’d come over and hug Fred,” said George. “He’s so pleased +about it all that it seems only fair that I should share the smell with, +him.” + +“You stay away!” cried Fred in alarm. “Don’t you touch me. Don’t come +within forty rods of any of us.” + +“Oh, Fred,” grinned George mischievously, “don’t run away from me. I +just want to show you how fond of you I am.” + +As he spoke George walked slowly towards the group of three boys who +stood and watched him anxiously. They knew that George would stop at +nothing once he was started and his offer to share the smell of the +skunk with Fred gave them ample cause for alarm. Fred was the one most +worried and he really had good reason for his alarm, for he knew that +George would like nothing better than to rub up against him and inflict +the awful odor on him too. + +“You keep away from me, Pop!” cried Fred uneasily. + +“Don’t you like me?” grinned George. + +“Oh, yes, I love you,” exclaimed Fred, knowing well that whatever he +might say it would be exactly the wrong thing. + +“Then let me hug you,” urged George, advancing steadily nearer. + +“I’ll hit you over the head with this rock.” + +“Why, Fred, how unkind of you; I really am surprised.” + +“You’ll be worse than that if you don’t keep away,” warned Fred, but he +backed away a few feet as he saw George steadily approaching. + +“Let’s get out of here,” whispered John to Grant and unnoticed by George +they withdrew and made their way back to the fire. + +“Pop certainly has Fred worried now all right,” laughed John. + +“I should say so,” agreed Grant. “The joke was on Pop at first but it +certainly is on Fred now. Just look at them.” + +George still advanced slowly towards the spot where Fred was standing. +He held his arms out, entreating Fred to come to him, but Fred very +evidently had no intention of doing any such thing. He was slowly +retreating, threatening George meanwhile with all manner of punishment +if he was not left alone. + +“Come to me, Fred,” begged George, a wide smile on his face. He was +content to suffer the discomfort of the terrible odor himself as long as +he could worry his friend so effectively. + +“Keep away from me, I say!” threatened Fred, brandishing a stick in his +right hand. “I swear I’ll hit you over the head with this if you don’t.” + +“Oh, Fred, you wouldn’t do that, would you?” exclaimed George, +pretending great surprise. “You wouldn’t hit your old friend who only +wants to share something nice with you. You can’t be serious.” + +“You heard what I said.” + +“But Fred—” + +“Whew, what a smell!” cried Fred suddenly and he turned and fled as fast +as his legs could carry him. Close behind him followed George calling +out at every step for Fred to wait and share something nice with him. +These invitations however seemed to have no effect upon Fred, for he +merely increased his speed. + +Now it so happened that the course Fred followed in his flight led +behind the tent and down the same narrow trail where George had had his +disastrous encounter with Mr. Skunk only a short time before. It also +happened that Mr. Skunk had not left the neighborhood with such +eagerness as had George; indeed he had been inclined to linger around +the same spot where they had met before. + +As has been told the path was narrow and hard to follow and the night +was growing darker every moment. Unfortunately for Fred a vine stretched +across the path just before he came to the spot where George had +searched for the “cat.” This vine caught Fred’s toe and he sprawled at +full length on the ground; George, but a couple of steps in the rear of +him, had to jump over the prostrate body of his friend in order to save +himself from meeting the selfsame fate. + +When Fred fell he not only surprised but greatly annoyed Mr. Skunk who +was lurking only a few feet away. As a result Fred was treated to the +same dose that had made George so unpopular around the camp. + +Together the two boys returned to camp. They were fellow sufferers now. +Though nearly overcome by the powerful stench, they bore with it long +enough to walk arm in arm up to the fire and put Grant and John to +sudden flight. This provided them much amusement but the smell was too +strong to be borne any longer. + +“I guess we’ll have to do as Grant advised,” said George. + +“What was that?” + +“Throw our clothes away and take a swim.” + +“I guess you’re right,” said Fred and side by side the two boys made +their way down the water’s edge. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV—TALKING IT OVER + + +Monday morning came and found the four young campers eagerly awaiting +the arrival of their challengers. There was great speculation as to what +they would look like and whether or not any set of games between the two +camps would provide an equal contest. + +“I believe we can beat them,” exclaimed George confidently. + +“Don’t be so sure,” advised Grant. “You’d better wait until you see your +opponents before you begin to make any predictions.” + +“That’s right,” said Fred. “You’d better not talk too much about it +either, Pop. You’ll need all your wind for the swimming and canoe +races.” + +George gave the speaker a scornful glance but said nothing. The four +friends finished their breakfast and lolled about the camp waiting for +their rivals to appear. + +“There they come now,” exclaimed John after the lapse of about an hour. + +“Where?” demanded George. “I don’t see them.” + +“That tree is in your way, I guess,” said John. “You’ll see them in a +minute or two.” + +“There they are!” exclaimed George suddenly. “Their boat looks just like +the Balsam, doesn’t it?” + +“I think it is the same,” said John. “It seems to me my father told me +that there were two catboats on the lake made by the same man and made +exactly alike.” + +“That’ll be fine,” said Fred eagerly. “No one can claim any advantage +because of the boat then, and the best sailors will win.” + +“Let’s hope we’re the ones,” laughed Grant. “Come on, who’s coming down +to the wharf to meet our guests?” + +“We all are, I guess,” exclaimed John, and a moment later the four boys +were standing on the tiny dock waiting for the approaching catboat to +come into their little harbor. + +“They’re good sailors all right,” whispered Fred as he watched the boys +in the boat maneuver their craft. “We’ll have to be awfully good to beat +them.” + +“All the more credit if we do,” said Grant. + +“Ahoy, there!” he shouted a moment later. “You’d better anchor a little +way out from the dock here. We’ll come out in the canoes after you.” + +“All right,” came the reply. “Did you get our challenge?” + +“We certainly did,” said Grant. + +“Good. I hope you’ll accept it.” + +“Of course we will.” + +The boat swung around and one of the crew threw the anchor overboard. +The sail was quickly lowered and everything was done in a quiet +business-like way that instilled a great amount of respect into the +hearts of the boys who, from the dock, were watching the proceedings. + +A moment later Grant and John each took a canoe and set out from the +shore. They came alongside the catboat, which was named the Spruce, and +quickly transferred the crew to the canoes, and thence to the shore. One +of the boys, Thomas Adams by name, seemed to be the spokesman for the +party and he proceeded with Grant’s help to introduce everybody all +around. + +Much laughter and embarrassment followed but before long all of the boys +were quite at their ease. They left the dock and proceeded to the tent +and all sat down on the ground in front of it. It seemed that the camp +at the end of the lake was very much like the one on the island. It was +occupied by four boys of just about the same age as the others and +practically of the same size. + +“We thought it would be fun,” said Thomas Adams speaking for his three +friends as well as himself, “to challenge you fellows to a set of water +sports. We heard that there were to be four of you on this island this +summer and we saw you the other day just when you were leaving our camp; +right after that storm I mean. We were sorry to miss you.” + +“We were sorry, too,” said Grant. + +“You were away when we came to see you too,” said Thomas. + +“Yes,” said George, “we were off trout fishing for a few days.” + +“Have any luck?” asked Hugh McNeale one of the other visitors. + +“Pretty good,” said George. “We had a lot of fun too.” + +“Who caught the biggest fish?” + +“Ask Fred here,” grinned George. “He knows all about that.” + +Being urged to do so Fred proceeded to relate the story of how George +had carried off the prize. He did not spare himself in the telling +either and left out no detail of how disappointed he had been to find +that George had beaten him out. When he told how George had hooked his +trout the story was greeted with gales of laughter and congratulations +were showered upon the fortunate fisherman. + +“A fellow with schemes like that would be hard to beat in any sort of a +game,” laughed Hugh. + +“What sort of games are we going to have?” asked John. + +“We thought a sailing race would be fun,” said Hugh. + +“Yes, and so would swimming and canoe races,” exclaimed Grant. “Do you +think three events will be enough?” + +“How about a tilting contest?” said Thomas. + +“What’s a tilting contest?” asked Fred curiously. + +“Didn’t you ever hear of that?” + +“Never that I know of.” + +“Why, it’s like this,” explained Thomas. “Two fellows get into a canoe; +the one in the stern paddles and steers and the fellow in the bow has a +great long pole with one end of it all wrapped up with rags or something +like that. Another canoe fixed up the same way opposes them and the two +attack each other. The fellows with the poles jab at each other and try +to upset the other canoe or knock the bow man overboard; if he falls +overboard or the canoe upsets of course they lose the match.” + +“That sounds fine,” exclaimed George. “I say we include a tilting match +by all means.” + +“Two from our camp will take on two from yours,” suggested Thomas. + +“All right,” agreed Grant. “We’ll enter our star team.” + +“Entries will close one second before the match starts,” laughed +Franklin Dunbar, a fat, round-faced boy, who had spoken but little thus +far. + +“And probably our team will be upset and in the water one second after +the match starts,” laughed George. + +“It’ll be fun anyway,” said Thomas. “When shall we have the games?” + +“We were wondering about that too,” said Grant. “I guess almost any time +will suit us though.” + +“We’ll need some practice,” remarked Fred. “Don’t forget that.” + +“Not much,” said Grant. “I say not to practice too much. We don’t want +to make professional games out of them, you know.” + +“That’s all right, too,” objected Fred. “At the same time we want to +make them worth while and the better we all are the more fun they will +be too. Don’t you think so?” and he appealed to the four young visitors +for their opinion. + +“I agree with you,” said Thomas readily. “Our camp wants to beat yours +too, and if you fellows don’t take it seriously why there won’t be much +honor in it for us if we do win.” + +“There’d be plenty of disgrace if we lost under those conditions +though,” laughed Franklin Dunbar. + +“We don’t know anything about tilting either, Grant,” said George. “We +will need a lot of practice for that event.” + +“All right,” agreed Grant. “I guess we do need practice. As far as I’m +concerned, anything you fellows say suits me. How about a judge though? +Suppose we should have a close finish in one of the races, who would we +have to decide it for us?” + +“My uncle is coming to spend a week with us in camp,” said Hugh McNeale. +“He might act as judge if we wanted him.” + +“That would be fine,” exclaimed Grant. “When is he coming?” + +“Not till week after next.” + +“That’s all right,” said Fred. “That would be just about right.” + +“Suppose we set two weeks from Wednesday then,” suggested Thomas. “That +ought to give us plenty of time to get in shape.” + +“All right,” agreed Grant. “We ought to have some sort of name for our +teams too. Have you any name for your camp?” + +“No, we haven’t.” + +“Neither have we. Suppose you call yourselves the red team and we’ll be +the blue.” + +“Fine,” exclaimed Hugh. “I’ll write a letter to Uncle Jack and tell him +what he has ahead of him. I’ll tell him that he really is to be the +umpire and that he’ll get the same treatment an umpire does if he +doesn’t do his job well.” + +The remaining details were speedily arranged and then the four boys of +the red team sailed back to their camp, leaving the boys on the island +full of excitement and pleasure at the thought of the games ahead of +them. + + + + +CHAPTER XV—PREPARATION + + +The days intervening until the time came for the games were busy ones +for the boys in the island camp. The Balsam was thoroughly overhauled, +and everything removed from her that might tend in any way to retard her +speed. Frequent cruises were made and every boy was assigned to some +special duty on the boat so that when the race was held there would be +no confusion. None of the young campers had any desire to lose the race +through inefficiency. + +Long swims were indulged in to improve their wind and strengthen their +muscles. Canoe races were held and different combinations tried to +enable them to select the strongest team. A course a half-mile long was +marked out and time-trials held in an effort to decide upon the fastest +pair. All four boys were to be in the race but it had been decided that +the best policy was to put the best two paddlers in the same canoe. By +following this plan it was thought that their chances for winning would +be greatly improved. First place was to count two and second one in the +sailing and canoe races and in the tilting match. In the swimming race +three places were to count, the points to be scored being three for +first, two for second and one for third. The team scoring the greatest +number of points was to be declared the winner. + +Practice for the tilting match occupied very much of the boys’ time. Two +long poles had been cut and one end of each was wound with old rags and +blankets, thus forming a large soft knob. + +“If we’d only saved those clothes that we had on when the skunks got +after us,” remarked George, “we could have won a tilting contest from +anybody.” + +“What do you mean by that!” inquired Grant curiously. + +“Simply this. Instead of using rags to wind the poles with we could have +used those clothes.” + +“What advantage would that have been?” + +“Don’t you see?” demanded George. “All we’d have to do would be to point +the pole at our opponent. We wouldn’t have to touch him at all; as soon +as he got a whiff of that awful odor he’d simply faint and fall +overboard and we’d be the winners.” + +“A great idea, Pop,” laughed John. “Why didn’t you think of it at the +time?” + +“In the first place I didn’t know anything about this tilting match at +the time; in the second place, even if I had, I don’t believe I’d have +kept them. Whew, they were awful!” and George shuddered at the +recollection. + +“They certainly were,” agreed Fred. “Don’t talk to me about it; my +clothes were all in the same condition as yours.” + +The same system that was adopted for selecting a team for the canoe race +was used for the tilting match. Every possible combination of the four +young campers was tried in an effort to find the strongest competitors. +Grant and John had been selected for the canoe race, and Grant and +George were decided upon for the tilting contest. + +It had been taken for granted that Grant would be on both teams; he +outshone his companions in every form of game and sport just as he did +in his knowledge of books. He and George were heavier than the other two +boys and consequently made a more powerful team for the tilting match. +Weight would be an asset in that sport, for it is much easier to knock +down a light man than it is a heavy one; especially when a tricky and +shaky canoe is under your feet. + +“I seem to be out of it,” remarked Fred ruefully when the final +selections had been made. + +“Why are you?” demanded Grant. “You’re going to be in the canoe race +just as much as John and I?” + +“I know it, but I’m not on the first team.” + +“That’s all right, you and Pop might beat us out after all.” + +“Huh,” exclaimed Fred. “Pop doesn’t do any work; he just sits there and +expects me to do it all.” + +“You know that’s not so, Fred,” protested George warmly. “No one in the +world works harder than I do.” + +“Well, if that’s so,” returned Fred, “all I can say is that there are an +awful lot of loafers in the world.” + +“All four of us will be in every event except the tilting match,” said +John. “You and I are both out of that, Fred.” + +“You can save your strength while that’s going on for the swimming +race,” said Grant. “We’ll have to depend on you two to win first and +second in that.” + +“How long is it going to be?” asked George. + +“A hundred and seventy-five yards. Tom Adams was over here yesterday +while you were away and we decided on that distance.” + +“It seems to me like a queer distance though,” said George. “How did you +ever happen to hit on that?” + +“Why, we wanted to make it a hundred yards and they wanted a two-twenty. +We finally compromised on a hundred and seventy-five yards.” + +“That’s fair enough,” said George. “How are we going to measure off +these different distances?” + +“Guess at them, I suppose,” laughed John. “It won’t make any difference +whether they’re exact or not, I guess.” + +“No, I imagine we’re not going to break any time records so we needn’t +bother about such details,” agreed George. + +“We haven’t had any practice so far to-day,” remarked Fred. “What’s the +matter; are we afraid of getting over-trained?” + +“That can be done easily enough, all right,” said Grant. “Don’t you +remember what the track coach we had at school last year said?” + +“He said I’d never make a runner if that’s what you mean,” laughed +George. + +“No, not that. What he said about training.” + +“What was it?” asked Fred. “I don’t remember.” + +“Why, he said it was much better to be under-trained than over-trained. +Another thing, when a fellow was training for a certain event he’d never +let him run the full distance in practice.” + +“Is that so?” exclaimed George. “That doesn’t sound logical to me +though.” + +“All right,” said Grant, “but you know which school won all the meets +held anywhere around home, don’t you?” + +“We did,” said George. + +“That’s just it,” exclaimed Grant, “and yet you say that trainer was no +good.” + +“I didn’t mean to say that. All I said was that it didn’t seem +reasonable to me not to let a fellow run the full distance.” + +“Well, Mr. Smythe used to say that the great temptation for most fellows +was to do too much work. They’d go out and run all the afternoon and +hang around until they were tired out and then wonder why they felt +heavy in the legs and had no life in them.” + +“Sailing can’t hurt us anyway,” said John. + +“That’s right,” agreed Grant, “and I’m in favor of doing this: stop +training for the events to-morrow. That’ll leave us two days to rest up +before the games are held and we can devote those two days to learning +how little we know about sailing.” + +“I know that already,” laughed George. “I’m afraid we’re going to get a +good beating in that race.” + +“Oh, I don’t know,” Fred objected. “They might run on a rock or +something.” + +“That’s our best chance all right,” said George. “I have an idea that +those fellows are all awfully good sailors.” + +“I hope we have some wind,” said Grant hopefully. “We’ll never finish +the race unless we have a pretty stiff breeze. Personally I think the +course is too long.” + +“Twice around the lake,” said John. “That’s not so far.” + +“It’s pretty far,” insisted Grant. “Wait until you see the buoys out and +then you’ll realize it.” + +“Who’s going to put them out?” + +“The red team,” laughed Grant. + +“They’re doing most of the work, aren’t they?” inquired Fred. + +“Well, they wanted to; naturally I didn’t object.” + +“They’re going to get dinner over here, you know,” said George. “That’ll +give us something to do.” + +“Just think of it,” exclaimed John. “Won’t we be hungry that day? The +swimming and canoe races and the tilting contests all in the morning and +then food. You’ll have to cook a lot, Grant.” + +“I realize that,” said Grant grimly. “I guess we can feed them though.” + +“Suppose we’re all even at the end of the morning,” exclaimed George. +“That would certainly make the sailing race exciting, wouldn’t it?” + +“It sure would,” Fred agreed. “We’ll have plenty of time to sail it too, +Grant. All afternoon ought to be long enough.” + +“That’s right,” said Grant. “Yes, I hope we can get around twice in one +afternoon.” + +“This canoe race is what’s bothering me,” exclaimed George. “That’ll +take it out of us all right. It’s hard work paddling and as long as Fred +and I aren’t the first team I wonder if it wouldn’t be better if we +didn’t go in it at all. If we were fresh for the swimming race that +might increase our chances.” + +“I know,” said Grant, “but it seems to me that every fellow ought to be +in every event.” + +“But look here,” George objected. “You and String are a much better pair +than Fred and I. You simply walk away from us every time; we can’t +possibly beat you so what’s the use?” + +“You might get second, and that one point might win for us.” + +“I have an idea,” exclaimed John suddenly. “Why not make it a relay +race? We can race around the island and if we do that everybody can be +in it and it seems to me it would be a lot more fun that way.” + +“That’s fine,” exclaimed George warmly. “Fred and I can paddle the first +lap and you and Grant the second. Will those other fellows agree to it +though?” + +“I don’t see why they shouldn’t,” said Grant. “It’s just as fair as the +other way; fairer if anything because it gives every one a chance.” + +“We’ll have to ask them about it though,” said John. “Why can’t we sail +down there now and see them?” + +“We can,” said George springing to his feet. “Let’s do it, too.” + +A few moments later the Balsam was under way, headed for the end of the +lake and the camp of the enemy, the red team. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI—GRANT MISSES + + +The day set for the meet came at last. The first event, the tilting +contest, was scheduled for eleven o’clock and a half an hour before that +time the red team was on hand. The weather was ideal, bright and sunny +and warm, with not too much breeze. This was as the boys desired, for +they had hoped that the wind might not spring up until afternoon. At +least that is the way they would have arranged matters if they had any +power to do so. Strange to say it seemed as if the weather was to turn +out just as they had hoped. + +Hugh McNeale brought his Uncle Jack along and all the boys were +captivated by him at once. He was a big, jolly man, full of fun, and +with a laugh that made you feel as if you wanted to join in it every +time you heard it. He was enthusiastic over the idea of being the judge +and promised to do his very best. + +“I also have a trophy for the winning team,” he exclaimed. “It’s +something that you boys ought to have had in your camps anyway, but I +haven’t seen one in either and so I’m going to give it as a prize.” + +“What’s that?” inquired Hugh curiously. + +“See for yourself,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell, for that was the name of +Hugh’s uncle. He took a package from underneath his coat and unwrapping +it, spread before the admiring gaze of the eight boys a silk American +flag about three feet in length. + +“Say!” said George enthusiastically. “That’s worth working for, isn’t +it?” + +“It certainly is,” agreed the seven other boys, almost with one voice. + +“That’s the first prize,” said Mr. Maxwell, evidently greatly pleased +with the result the sight of the flag had produced. “Here’s the second,” +and from his pocket he drew another flag of the same quality as the +first but only half the size. + +“I’m ashamed of you boys,” he continued. “Both of these camps should +have had a great big American flag flying right out in front of the +tent. Let people see that you’re patriotic and be proud of it.” + +“We are proud of it,” objected Grant. + +“Of course you are,” said Mr. Maxwell readily. “I want you to show it +off though. Have a flag, and every time you look at it don’t think only +of how beautiful it is. Remember what it stands for and how much you owe +to it. Think of the country that stands back of that flag and of the +millions of others who along with you have it for their national emblem. +You’re all glad you’re Americans and you’re proud of the fact and I want +you never to be afraid to admit it. Be loyal to the flag, boys, and by +your actions prove that you’re worthy of the protection it affords you. +And don’t forget either that it’s your duty as real American citizens to +do your part. That’s what so many forget so easily. You can’t expect to +receive benefits all the time and not give anything in return, you +know.” + +“What can we do?” asked George, who along with all the others was deeply +impressed by Mr. Maxwell’s words. + +“Just this: be good citizens. A good citizen is a man who not only obeys +the laws of his country, but who is always working to make his country +better. He puts his country’s interests ahead of his own and that’s a +hard thing to do sometimes. A good citizen stands by the mayor of his +town, and the governor of his state, and the president of his country. +Instead of sitting home and criticising them he gets out and works to +help them in every way he can and he is loyal to them. Those men are +behind this flag and if you are loyal to the flag, prove it by being +loyal to the men behind it. Every man must do his part.” + +“I guess we’re careless at times and don’t think,” said Grant soberly. + +“That’s true,” agreed Mr. Maxwell. “That’s no excuse for us though.” + +“But I didn’t come here to make a speech,” he continued laughingly. “I +believe what I’ve just said with all my heart though. At present, +however, I know there is a tilting contest to be held and we’d better +start it at once. I’m anxious to see who gets the first two points +towards winning the big flag.” + +Without further delay the four boys who were to compete in this event +set about preparing themselves for it. Bathing suits were donned so that +an upset would not cause any worry and the two canoes were soon ready +for the fray. + +Grant and George represented the blue team and Thomas Adams and Franklin +Dunbar, the red. Grant was bow man, with George to handle the canoe; +Thomas was bow man, and Franklin paddled in the opposing boat. + +The contest was staged in the little harbor and the judge and spectators +took their positions on the tiny wharf. The canoes now faced each other +some fifty feet apart, waiting for the signal. + +“Not too fast now, Pop,” warned Grant. “I don’t want to fall out of the +canoe before we even reach the other one, you know.” + +“I know,” replied George. “I’ll be careful.” + +“I’m going to stay down on one knee like this, too.” + +“That’s a good scheme. Lock your feet around that thwart if you can. We +want to beat those fellows.” + +“All ready?” came the call from shore. + +“All ready,” answered Grant, and Thomas did the same. + +“Go,” shouted Mr. Maxwell, and the match was on. + +Franklin and George did not try to make speed however. In fact they were +both very cautious and as a consequence, the two canoes approached each +other slowly. Both pilots seemed willing to let the other man lead off +in the attack. + +“Careful, Pop,” said Grant, without relaxing his gaze from his +opponent’s face for one instant. + +“All right. I’m watching them.” + +Grant, crouched on one knee, was holding the pole as a mediæval knight +would have held his lance in a jousting tournament. Thomas however, +stood up in his canoe, gaining a little freedom of action perhaps, but +at the same time increasing his chances of going overboard. + +The canoes were only a few feet apart now and the bow men braced +themselves for the onslaught. + +“Let ’em have it now, Grant!” shouted John from the shore. Fred joined +him in his exhortations, while Hugh and Herbert Halsey were just as +noisy in their zeal to cheer their team on, and for the size of the +audience the amount of sound produced was marvelous. Mr. Maxwell was the +only one who was silent. + +Closer came the two canoes. Now they were within range and Thomas lunged +forward savagely at Grant. He ducked the blow and aiming one in return +caught his opponent full in the stomach. Thomas uttered a loud grunt and +fell backwards. As luck would have it however, he fell in the canoe. The +light craft rocked dangerously and narrowly missed upsetting. As it was, +some water was shipped and had it not been for the skill of the two +occupants it surely would have overturned. + +“Quick, Grant!” urged George. “Hit him again before he can get up.” + +“Bring me closer to them.” + +George thrust his paddle into the water and the canoe shot forward. +Franklin, however, with ready presence of mind had swung his canoe +around the minute it righted itself and Grant’s lunge at Thomas missed. +Before George could bring his boat within range again, their opponents +had recovered their balance and were prepared for the second attack. + +Once more the canoes approached each other. This time Thomas followed +Grant’s example and crouched on one knee. He had evidently learned a +lesson and had determined to be more wary. + +“Get him, Grant! Get him!” shouted John. + +“Careful, George; not too fast,” warned Grant. + +He held his pole back waiting an opportunity to strike. This time he was +determined that any blow he delivered would end the match; he had been +out-lucked before and did not want it to happen again. + +Thomas made a feint at him. Grant was anxious and struck back so eagerly +that he almost fell out of the canoe. + +“That’s the way, Tom,” called Hugh. “You’ll fix him this time.” + +Again Thomas feinted and again Grant lunged fiercely at his opponent. +Thomas then followed up his bluff with a quick stab that luckily only +struck Grant a glancing blow on the shoulder. Had it hit him squarely, +the match most certainly would have been ended then and there; as it was +only George’s quick action saved them from going over. + +“Don’t let him fool you, Grant,” he warned. “Wait for him.” + +Again they advanced and as they once more neared each other Thomas +repeated his former tactics. He made a feint to lunge at Grant, and as +before, Grant was unable to resist the temptation to strike back +quickly. This he did and Franklin in the stern of the opposing canoe, +anticipating this move, backed water and the blow missed Thomas’ head by +inches. + +The poles the boys were using were long and heavy. As a result, they +were somewhat clumsy and hard to handle. As Grant lunged forward at +Thomas, he leaned over the side of the canoe and the weight of his pole +prevented him from regaining his balance at once. + +Thomas and Franklin had evidently mapped out their plan of campaign +beforehand and apparently Grant had acted exactly as they wished him to. +Thomas held his pole with a shortened grip and before Grant could +recover his equilibrium, he jabbed at him with all his might. The great +wad on the end of the pole caught Grant squarely on the chest; he +dropped his pole and waved his arms violently about his head in an +effort to save himself. + +All his efforts were of no use, however. Undoubtedly he would have gone +overboard anyway, but just to make sure, Thomas gave him a gentle push +with the business end of the pole and over he went. As he disappeared +over the side he gave the canoe a shove with his feet and a moment later +George joined him in the water. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII—GEORGE’S STRATEGY + + +A moment later Grant and George came to the surface puffing and shaking +the water from their eyes and hair. Both boys were laughing. + +“Nice work,” said Grant to their two opponents, who sat in their canoe +nearby. + +“We were lucky,” protested Thomas. + +“Lucky, nothing,” exclaimed Grant. “You knew more about the game than we +did and you deserved to win.” + +The canoe belonging to the defeated boys floated close at hand, bottom +side up. The pole and the paddle were a short distance away. These were +soon rescued and the canoe being righted, the contestants made their way +to shore. John and Fred were the first to congratulate the winners. + +“We’ll have to win this canoe race,” exclaimed Fred. “You fellows have +two points to our one as it is now, and we can’t afford to let you get +twice as many again this time.” + +“We’re going to do our best to get twice as many though, you may be sure +of that,” laughed Hugh McNeale. “We want that big flag.” + +“If you win it, you’ll certainly be welcome to it,” exclaimed John. “We +want it ourselves though, I can tell you.” + +The best of feeling existed between the two camps, but this fact did not +serve to lessen the competition and rivalry. Good sportsmanship adds +zest to every game. + +“Where are the first pairs for this canoe race?” cried Mr. Maxwell. “We +mustn’t let these events lag, you know.” + +“We’ll be ready in a minute,” replied Grant. “We want to get all our +wind back and remove all the water from this canoe first.” + +“That’s right,” said Herbert Halsey. “You fellows take your time.” + +The suggestion of the blue team that the next event be made a relay race +around the island, had met with an enthusiastic response from their +rivals. Two teams from each camp were to compete and each team was to +paddle once around. The first pairs consisted of George and Fred, from +the blue team and opposed to them were Herbert Halsey and Franklin +Dunbar, from the red. Finishing the race were Grant and John, against +Hugh McNeale and Thomas Adams. Each camp had selected its strong team to +paddle last, hoping to win the race by a powerful finish. + +“I guess we’re all ready now,” said Grant, when a few moments had +elapsed. “We’ll go ahead any time you say.” + +“All right,” said Mr. Maxwell. “Now remember the rules; the starting +line is directly opposite this dock and I’ve got some string which we +will use for tape at the finish. Each team is to paddle once around the +island. When the second relay starts, the two canoes that have finished +will be stationed out here about twenty feet apart and this string will +be stretched between them; that will be the finish line. All four canoes +will be used of course and the second relay must not start until those +completing the first have touched the canoes with their paddles. Is it +all clear?” + +“All clear,” said Grant, and Thomas answered for his side. + +“Very well,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. “The first canoes may take their +places and the second relay had better be ready too.” + +George and Fred pushed out from the dock and paddled slowly to the +starting point; Herbert and Franklin followed close behind. + +When they were in position, and by the way the red team had drawn the +course nearest shore, Mr. Maxwell lifted his small megaphone and gave +his final instructions. + +“Remember,” he called, “once around, and the inside team this lap will +be the outside next. Don’t get mixed up.” + +“That’ll be a little help to us,” said John in a low voice to Grant. “I +hope Fred and Pop can give us a little lead to start out with.” + +“I hope so too,” replied Grant. + +“On your marks!” shouted Mr. Maxwell. + +Four boys sat up alert and eager for the final word. + +“Get set!” + +Four paddles were raised and held poised for instant action. + +“Go!” + +The blades were dipped deeply into the water and the race was on. Side +by side the two canoes sped along. + +“You fellows better go out there and take your places,” said Mr. +Maxwell, turning to the four boys who were to continue the race the next +relay. “We don’t want any mixup then, you know. It would be a shame to +have those boys paddle over half a mile for nothing.” + +In response to his suggestion, Grant and John, and Hugh and Thomas, +paddled slowly out to the starting line, there to await the arrival of +their respective team-mates. + +“Take it slow, Fred,” urged George from his position in the stern of the +racing canoe. “Don’t kill yourself right at the start.” + +They had covered about one hundred yards of their course and all four +boys were paddling with every ounce of strength they possessed. + +“Dip your paddle deep,” he continued. “Take a long easy stroke. A good +steady pace is what we want.” + +“They’ll get way ahead of us,” protested Fred. + +“What if they do? They’ll be all in at the finish and we’ll start a +sprint.” + +In response to George’s suggestion they eased up materially. As Fred had +predicted the other canoe immediately began to draw away, for its two +occupants did not relax their efforts for an instant. Wider and wider +the gap opened between them until thirty feet separated the two racers +when they came to the first turn. + +The island was oval in its shape, very much like an egg. The start had +been made from a point about midway between the two ends. The first +stretch, therefore, was half the length of the island, then the corner +was turned and the whole length of the island was covered, ending with +the home stretch, half the length of the island again. + +Steadily and strongly, George and Fred paddled. Herbert and Franklin +still worked desperately, taking nearly three strokes to the other boys’ +two, and as a result, the gap between the two boats continually widened. + +“Don’t let it worry you, Fred,” said George. “They can’t keep up that +pace very much longer.” + +“They’re not weakening yet though, Pop.” + +“I know it, but we’ve only covered half the course so far.” + +Steadily the red team’s canoe drew away. Forty, fifty feet, they were in +the lead now. If any one had been in a position to observe, however, he +would have seen that its occupants were beginning to show signs of +weakening. Their breath came faster and faster, the perspiration rolled +off their faces in streams, and their muscles began to ache and throb. + +Relentlessly George and Fred followed them. Not one bit did they +increase their efforts, though George had great difficulty in +restraining his companion. Powerful, even strokes urged their tiny craft +on and now they were holding their own. Just ahead of them was the last +turn which was to bring them into the home stretch. + +“How do you feel, Fred?” asked George. + +“Fine.” + +“Are you tired?” + +“Not very.” + +“I hope not. We’ll start a sprint the second we round that turn and +we’ll have to put all we’ve got into it.” + +The leading canoe was even now turning the point. The boys in it were +plainly tired as their frequent splashing showed. They still worked +desperately, however, and it would be no mean task to overtake them. + +Grant and John sat in their canoe at the starting point eagerly awaiting +the appearance of their team-mates. To their dismay, it was Franklin and +Herbert who first hove in sight and to the waiting boys it seemed as if +hours elapsed before George and Fred rounded the turn. At last they +appeared, however, over thirty yards in the rear. + +“Now, Fred!” urged George, as they started on the home stretch. “Let ’em +have it.” + +Like demons the two boys began to ply their paddles. The light canoe was +quick to respond and it fairly flew over the water. Foot by foot and +yard by yard they gained on their fast-tiring opponents. + +Franklin and Herbert paddled desperately. Their strength was gone +however; they had used it all up at the start of the race. Their arms +felt like great chunks of lead and it was all the two boys could do to +make them respond to the urging of their wills. + +At racehorse speed, George and Fred plowed along. The gap between the +two canoes began to disappear as if by magic. The steady pace they had +maintained had tired them, to be sure, but they still had plenty of +reserve strength left and they were using it now when it counted most. +The cheers of their team-mates waiting for them came faintly to their +ears, spurring them on. + +“We’ve got ’em, Fred! We’ve got ’em!” exclaimed George triumphantly. +“Stick to it.” + +Fifty yards away was the finish line and the canoes were almost on even +terms. Forty yards and George and Fred were in the lead. Their rivals +were beaten, dead tired, and possessed of scarcely the strength +necessary to urge their canoe across the line. + +Thirty yards from home and George and Fred enjoyed a lead of nearly five +yards. They were moving at easily twice the speed of their opponents +now. It seemed certain that Grant and John were to be handed a splendid +head-start for the last relay, when an unexpected and most disheartening +thing suddenly happened. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII—A CLOSE MATCH + + +Fifteen yards from the finish Fred’s paddle broke. It snapped off short +in his hand and as a result, the canoe almost upset. It seemed as if +their splendid effort was to go for nothing. Herbert and Franklin, +seeing the plight of their rivals, were endowed with new hope that they +might win their relay after all. The hope thus aroused gave them just +strength enough to urge their canoe forward across the line. Herbert +lifted his paddle and touched the canoe in which Hugh and Thomas waited +so impatiently, and then sank back against the thwart exhausted. + +The disaster to Fred was nearly fatal. The canoe rocked dangerously and +though it did not turn over, it lost every bit of its momentum. + +“Sit down, Fred!” shouted George. “I’ll paddle.” + +One man against two is a severe handicap, however, even if those two are +well nigh exhausted. It must be remembered also that George too, was +nearly fagged out. In spite of his usual lightheartedness, he had an +indomitable will, however, and not one of the boys had more nerve than +he. + +He dipped his blade deep into the water, brought the bow of the canoe +around so that it pointed in the proper direction, and urged it forward. +Meanwhile the other canoe had passed them and crossed the line at least +five yards in the lead. + +Grant and John were off like a flash, however, and the advantage the red +team enjoyed was not insurmountable by any means. + +“That was tough luck, boys,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell earnestly to Fred and +George. “You two certainly deserved to win that relay.” + +“You surely did,” echoed Franklin Dunbar. “That was about the toughest +luck I ever saw.” + +“Fred’s too strong,” laughed George. “It’s awfully hard to get any +paddle that he won’t break.” + +“Don’t pay any attention to what he says, Mr. Maxwell,” urged Fred. “He +thinks he can tease me; personally, I think he’s crazy.” + +“I hope not,” laughed Mr. Maxwell. + +“He’s fresh though,” insisted Fred. + +“Not now,” puffed George. “My breath’s gone and I’m all in.” + +“That was a great race,” insisted Mr. Maxwell. “I don’t remember ever +having seen a better one.” + +“We were about twenty-five yards ahead of them at one time, you know,” +said Herbert. “I thought we would win easily.” + +“So did I,” exclaimed Fred. “You kept drawing away from us all the time +and I thought we wouldn’t even be in it. I wanted to paddle harder all +the time but Pop here wouldn’t let me. He insisted that we keep up a +steady gait and sprint at the end.” + +“My system was all right, wasn’t it?” demanded George. + +“It surely was. You didn’t count on the paddle breaking, though.” + +“Oh, yes, I did. I knew that if you exerted all your strength that any +paddle would snap; that’s the reason I wanted you to save it until the +end. Suppose you’d cut loose over the other side of the island and the +paddle had broken there. We’d have been in a nice fix, wouldn’t we?” and +George winked solemnly at their three visitors who seemed much amused at +his efforts to secure a rise from his companion. + +“Oh, dry up!” exclaimed Fred shortly, and George laughed gleefully at +having accomplished his purpose. + +Meanwhile the two other canoes were rounding the first turn. + +“Sprint, John! Sprint!” Grant urged the moment they had started. “Catch +up to them and hang right on to them all the way around.” + +Paddling with all their strength Grant and John succeeded in catching up +with their opponents. When the bow of their canoe was within a few feet +of the stern of the other they eased up a bit and contenting themselves +with allowing their rivals to set the pace, they kept their position +with bulldog determination. + +Thomas and Hugh sprinted. Grant and John followed suit. If the leading +canoe slackened its pace the one behind did the same. Like a shadow the +two Go Ahead boys dogged their opponents’ course. + +Such a proceeding always worries the leader. To know that a step behind +him is some one who follows him like grim death and who cannot be shaken +off by any means whatsoever, is bound to have its effect in the long +run. The pace-maker is irritated and bewildered and sometimes +demoralization follows as a result. + +Grant was aware of this and he intended to make the most of it. He knew +that if Thomas and Hugh discovered that it was out of the question to +pull away from the pursuing canoe their confidence would be shaken and +once this quality is lost, a great asset is gone. + +It is easier to follow the pace than to make it. Another advantage is +that the one behind can watch his opponent and note everything that he +does. The leader, on the other hand, cannot tell what his rival intends +to do and must always be on his guard lest he be taken by surprise. + +Thomas and Hugh worked desperately. Evidently they had decided that +their best chance was to tire out the boys in the canoe that followed +them so relentlessly. With this object in view they started a sprint +when they had covered about one-third of the course and they kept it up. +Their team-mates had tried to sprint the entire distance, and failed. +Could these two do it? George and Fred had been content to allow their +rivals to gain on them, but not so Grant and John. Their one idea was to +hang on and hang on and hang on, until the time should come when an +opportunity offered itself for a quick dash into the lead. This chance +had not yet presented itself. + +The four boys worked like demons. Down the whole length of the island +they raced, neck and neck. The same amount of open water showed between +the two canoes all the way along. It almost looked as if the first canoe +was towing the other. Maintaining these same positions they approached +the last turn. + +“Now, String!” said Grant in a low voice. “When they take this curve, +I’m going to shoot in between them and the shore. Be ready.” + +“All right,” replied John, without looking up from his task for an +instant. + +The leading canoe now turned and began to round the point of the island. +Close behind them followed Grant and John. Thomas and Hugh were not far +from shore, so that Grant would not have much room to pass, if indeed +such a thing was possible. Just before the canoes entered the +straightaway leading to the finish line, the two Go Ahead boys made +their bid for the lead. + +Grant in the stern swung the canoe in between the other and the shore. +The space was limited but their chance had come. It was now or never. + +“Now, String!” cried Grant. “Let ’em have it!” + +It seemed impossible that the two boys could work any harder than they +had been. Every one seems to have some reserve strength, however, no +matter how much he may have used before, and it was this store that +Grant and John called upon now. + +Inch by inch they crept up. Soon Thomas from the stern of his canoe +could see out of the corner of his eye the bow of the blue team’s canoe. + +“Paddle, Hugh!” he cried. “Paddle for all you’re worth!” + +It was a desperate contest, but Grant and John were not to be denied. +The difference that setting the pace or following it made, was just +enough to give them a slight advantage. As far as skill and strength +were concerned, the four boys were remarkably well matched. + +Down the home stretch they dashed, and little by little Grant and John +gained. They gained steadily also, and it was evident that if the course +were long enough they would be returned winners. But could they catch +and pass their rivals before the finish line was reached? That was what +worried Fred and George, who screamed themselves hoarse in their +eagerness to spur their comrades on. + +No open water showed between the boats now. A few yards more and the red +team was but three-quarters of a length ahead. Soon this was reduced to +half a length and still Grant and John gained. The line was but a few +yards distant now however. Could they do it? + +The veins stood out on their foreheads. Between their clenched teeth +their breath came in gasps. Still they struggled on, still they gained +slowly, almost imperceptibly and nearer and nearer they came to the +finish. + +“If the course was only a few yards longer,” groaned George as he +watched the stirring finish from the canoe. + +A moment later and the two racers were almost on even terms. It was +nearly impossible to tell which one was in the lead now, so evenly were +they matched. The tape was only a few feet away. With one final effort +the four young racers urged their canoes forward; they broke the tape +and shot on past. The race was over. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX—A CLOSE SHAVE + + +“Well!” exclaimed George. “I never saw anything to beat that!” + +“Who won?” demanded Fred. + +“Don’t ask me. I’m not the judge.” + +The boys turned and looked at Mr. Maxwell who was seated in the other +canoe with Franklin and Herbert. His face was turned towards the two +canoes which had just flashed across the finish line. He wore a puzzled +expression and was evidently at a loss what to say. + +“Who won?” called George. + +Mr. Maxwell turned and looked at the speaker sorrowfully. “No one,” he +said. + +“No one,” exclaimed George. “Why, how can that be?” + +“Couldn’t it be a tie?” asked Fred quietly. + +“Why, yes, of course. I hadn’t planned for a tie though.” + +“I declare the race a tie,” announced the judge solemnly. “If either +boat was ahead of the other, I’m sure I didn’t see it, and I wouldn’t +dare call it anything else.” + +The racers had turned around and were now making their way slowly back. +All four of the boys were well nigh exhausted, but they were smiling +nevertheless. + +“Who won?” called Thomas, for they had not heard the judge’s verdict. + +“It was a tie,” said George. + +“A tie?” exclaimed Grant, his face falling. “That’s bad.” + +“Why is it?” demanded George. + +“Because we needed the points.” + +“By the way,” exclaimed Hugh, “how do we award the points?” + +“Split them, don’t we?” said Fred readily, appealing to Mr. Maxwell. + +“Each team gets one and a half. Two for first and one for second makes a +total of three, and a half of three is one and a half.” + +“Whew!” whistled George. “You certainly are quick at figures.” + +A general laugh went up at Fred’s expense but he did not seem to mind. + +“That’s the way it’s figured out anyway,” said Mr. Maxwell. “That makes +the total points three and a half for the red team and two and a half +for the blue.” + +“Still one point behind,” exclaimed Grant. “We’ll have to get that back +somehow.” + +“Well,” said Thomas, “the swimming race comes next and three places +count in that. Three for first, two for second, and one for third; +you’ll have a fine chance to catch us there.” + +“I was just thinking,” interrupted Mr. Maxwell, “that it might be a good +idea to reverse the order of these last two events. You boys are pretty +well tired out after that canoe race and to swim a hundred and +seventy-five yards now would be quite a severe strain. What do you say +to our having the sailing race next?” + +“Why,” said Grant slowly, “I don’t see any objection to that. What do +the rest of you fellows think about it?” + +“How about dinner?” exclaimed George. “We could never finish by the time +we had planned to eat and I must say I’m hungry right now.” + +“So am I,” said Hugh so earnestly that everyone laughed. + +“Why don’t we have dinner right now then?” suggested Mr. Maxwell. “As +soon as we are through we can start the sailing race.” + +“That’s a good scheme,” exclaimed Grant. “Let’s do that.” + +“And have the swimming race after the sailing?” queried Thomas. + +“That’s right,” said Grant. “The water’s more apt to be quiet later in +the day than it is now and that will make it better for swimming.” + +“Very true,” agreed Mr. Maxwell. “The wind often seems to go down with +the sun and if the wind goes down the water becomes still.” + +Without further delay they made their way ashore and preparations for +dinner were at once started. Grant usually did all the cooking, but +to-day he had an abundance of help. Wood was quickly gathered and a +blazing fire was soon under way. + +Two of the boys were set to work peeling potatoes which were to be fried +in the pan. Others made ready the dishes and collected the knives and +forks. Mr. Maxwell had several good sized bass he had caught before +breakfast, and, what was even better, he had brought along a dozen and a +half ears of green corn, two for everyone present. Was it any wonder +that the young campers’ eyes sparkled with anticipation as they saw the +dinner being prepared? + +Their appetites were keen as only those in the woods can understand. The +fragrant odor of sizzling bacon and roasting corn coming to their +nostrils only served to increase their eagerness. + +“Isn’t this great?” cried George enthusiastically, when at last dinner +was announced as ready and the pleasant task of disposing of it had +begun. “If anything can beat this, I’d like to know what it is.” + +“There is nothing that can tie it even,” laughed Mr. Maxwell, who seemed +to be enjoying himself as much as any of the boys. + +“I only hope Pop won’t eat so much, he’ll sink the Balsam,” said Fred +doubtfully. “We have plenty of ballast aboard as it is.” + +“You ‘tend to your own dinner,” advised George very promptly. “I’m too +busy to waste any time talking to you now.” + +At last the meal was over, and every one had had sufficient to eat. + +“All ready to start the race?” inquired Mr. Maxwell. + +“Oh,” groaned Franklin, “I don’t feel as if I could move. I’d rather +crawl off somewhere and go to sleep. I guess I ate too much.” + +“I _know_ I did,” laughed John. + +“We’d better start though, I guess,” urged Grant. “The course is long +and while there’s a good breeze now you can’t tell how long it will +last.” + +“That’s right,” agreed Mr. Maxwell. “You’d better get ready.” + +The boys at once made their way to their respective boats and made the +final preparations for the race. Both boats had had their sails up all +the morning in order to dry them out thoroughly and there was very +little left to be done. + +Mr. Maxwell sat in a canoe near at hand and watched the boys. + +“Remember,” he said, “twice around the course. The first lap you go one +way and the second in the opposite. Be very careful to round every +stake. The start is from the same spot as the canoe race and the finish +is there, too. I will fire this pistol as a warning gun, and three +minutes later I will fire it again for the start. Be sure not to cross +the starting line before I give the second signal.” + +“All right,” said Grant. “We’re all ready.” + +“So are we,” echoed Thomas from the Spruce. + +“Very well then,” said Mr. Maxwell. “Get your anchors up and move out by +the starting line.” + +This was soon done and a few moments later the two catboats were +jockeying back and forth off the entrance to the little harbor. Fred was +at the tiller of the Balsam and Hugh guided the Spruce. + +The sharp crack of the pistol announced that the race was about to +start. Grant had been waiting, watch in hand, for this signal. + +“Take a short tack out and back, Fred,” he urged. “I’ll watch the time.” + +“Hard-a-lea!” called Fred as he put the tiller over and the Balsam came +around into the wind. His crew quickly shifted sides, the sheet was +hauled taut, and the trim little boat scudded swiftly along before the +fresh breeze. + +“Better go back now,” advised Grant when they had covered fifteen or +twenty yards. He scarcely lifted his eyes from his watch which he still +held in his right hand. “We’ve got a minute and a half more.” + +Once more the Balsam came about and began to retrace its short course +towards the starting line. The Spruce was just off its starboard side, +with bow pointing directly into the wind and consequently was almost +stationary. + +“We’ll cross the line too soon,” exclaimed John nervously. “We’ll have +to come back if we do.” + +“Leave that to me,” said Grant confidently, his eyes still on the +second-hand of his watch. “I’ll look out for that.” + +“We’re not a dozen feet from the line now though,” cried John in alarm. +“You’d better come around, Fred.” + +“Don’t you do it,” exclaimed Grant sharply. + +Closer and closer to the line they came. John, and for that matter Fred +and George also were intensely nervous for fear they should cross the +line before the signal. Grant, however, seemed confident that they were +on the safe side. + +“We’ll have to turn around and start all—” began John, when Grant +suddenly interrupted him. + +“Now,” he cried, and barely the fraction of a second behind his voice +came the sound of the starting gun. Almost simultaneously the Balsam +crossed the line; away to a splendid start and with a good lead of at +least fifteen or twenty feet on the Spruce. + + + + +CHAPTER XX—GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS + + +“I take it all back, Grant,” exclaimed John. “You’re all right.” + +“It was certainly close though,” said Fred solemnly. + +“But ‘close’ doesn’t count in any game, you know,” laughed Grant. + +“How about quoits?” inquired George. + +“That’s right, Pop,” exclaimed Grant, “it does count in quoits, but I +don’t know of any other.” + +“We’d better attend to our sailing,” warned Fred. “Trim that sheet in a +little, String.” + +“That enough?” + +“All right,” said Fred. “My, I hope this breeze holds.” + +“It’s getting stronger, I think,” said George. + +“It does seem to be,” agreed Grant. “It’s dead ahead of us now, but if +it doesn’t change, it’ll be right behind us on the last leg of the race. +I think it’s always fun to be able to finish straight before the wind.” + +“That’s true,” exclaimed John. “We go in the opposite direction the +second round, don’t we?” + +The Balsam was skimming over the water rapidly on a long tack to +leeward. Behind her came the Spruce, also making good time and with +about the same distance between the two boats that had separated them at +the start. + +“They’re pointing up a little more than we are, I think,” remarked +Grant, after a glance at their rival. + +“We’re all right, though,” said Fred confidently. “I don’t believe in +sailing as close hauled as that.” + +“Perhaps not,” agreed Grant. “At any rate you know more about it than +the rest of us. We’ll have to do as you say whether we like it or not.” + +They rounded the first stake thirty yards ahead of the Spruce. Fred’s +tactics on the first leg had proved successful, anyway. + +“It’s easy,” exclaimed George confidently, as they slid past the stake +and settled back for the long reach to the next mark. + +“Don’t talk like that, Pop,” urged John earnestly. “Don’t ever boast or +get overconfident; you’re sure to regret it if you do.” + +“Knock on wood, Pop,” laughed Fred. “That’ll take away all the bad +effects.” + +The four friends were in excellent spirits, for they enjoyed a +comfortable lead which seemed to be steadily increasing. + +“There they come around the stake now,” exclaimed Grant, gazing behind +them. “They gave it a little more room than we did.” + +“And consequently sailed a little bit farther than necessary,” added +Fred. “A few feet doesn’t seem very much at the time but in the long run +it amounts to a good deal.” + +“On the other hand,” said John, “if you cut too close to the stake +you’re apt to foul it and then you’re disqualified.” + +“The answer to that is easy enough,” laughed Fred. “Don’t hit it.” + +“You fellows take more chances than I would,” said John doubtfully. “I +believe in playing safe.” + +Steadily the Balsam drew away from her rival. The wind was strong now +and the lake was dotted with white-caps. + +“Perhaps the Balsam is a rough-water sailor,” remarked Grant. “At any +rate she seems to be doing splendidly in this breeze.” + +“If the breeze should die down they’d probably catch right up to us,” +said Fred. “Let’s hope it doesn’t.” + +“What makes you think they’d catch us?” demanded John. + +“Nothing. Some boats sail better in one kind of a breeze than in others. +This seems to be suited to a strong wind and I thought it was possible +that the Spruce would do better in a light one.” + +“But they’re exactly alike,” objected John. + +“I know it,” replied Fred. “That doesn’t necessarily mean they’ll sail +just alike, though. I’ve seen ten boats all built on the same model, the +same size, and everything about them the same, and yet some of them seem +to be twice as fast as others.” + +“It must be in the one who handles the boat, then,” said George. + +“Not at all. I’ve seen them swap crews and the same boats win.” + +“How do you explain it?” inquired Grant, who always liked to have a +reason for everything. + +“I can’t, and I don’t believe any one else can, either. Some boats seem +to do well under certain conditions, and that’s all there is to it.” + +“Well, the present conditions seem to suit the Balsam pretty well,” +exclaimed George. “Let’s hope they continue.” + +The second stake was reached with the Balsam still farther in the lead +than before. The wind steadily increased in strength and forced the +sturdy little catboat through the water at an amazing speed. + +“I didn’t know she could go so fast,” exclaimed John enthusiastically. + +“None of us did, I guess,” said Grant. “She’s all right though, isn’t +she?” + +“I should say so,” cried George. “Say, just look at her go,” and he +scrambled over to the other side of the boat. The Balsam was heeled far +over and the lee rail was awash. Now and then a wave, a little larger +than its fellows, slapped lustily against the side and covered the crew +with spray. + +“We’ll have to reef her if this wind gets much stronger,” said Fred just +before they had completed the first round. + +“What’s the use?” demanded George. “It’s great this way, and we’re +certainly gaining on those fellows all the time.” + +“Yes,” said Fred, “but you don’t want to lose the mast, do you?” + +“Or we might upset,” added Grant. + +“Suppose we do,” cried George. “It won’t hurt us.” + +“But we’d lose the race just the same,” said Fred. “Let that sheet out a +little there, String. Whenever she heels over like that, give her a +little more rope and I’ll bring her up into the wind for a second.” + +“That makes us lose time, doesn’t it?” asked Grant. + +“I think so. It seems to me that if we stopped and put a reef in the +sail we’d sail more evenly and as a result we’d go faster.” + +“Those fellows in the Spruce don’t seem to be putting in any reefs, I +notice,” remarked George. “If they don’t need them I don’t see why we +do.” + +“But the breeze is getting so much stronger,” insisted Fred. “It really +seems to me that we should put in one reef anyway.” + +“How long will it take us?” + +“Not two minutes. We can do it in no time.” + +“We’d better wait until we round this next stake, I think,” said Grant. +“We can do it, then.” + +“All right,” agreed George. “I don’t believe in it, though. I love it +this way,” and he exclaimed delightedly as the Balsam heeled far over +and the spray from the crest of one of the white-caps drenched him from +head to foot. + +“It’s cold, though,” objected John. + +“Nonsense,” cried George. “If you were half a man you wouldn’t mind it.” + +John merely shivered, and placing Grant in temporary charge of the sheet +he crawled forward and drawing his sweater out from under the deck, he +put it on. + +“Get ready now,” warned Fred. “The stake is just ahead.” + +“And we’re going to take in a reef as soon as we round it. Is that +right?” inquired Grant. + +“That’s the idea,” said Fred. “Here we go,” and putting the tiller hard +over he brought the Balsam cleanly around the mark and headed her up +into the wind. + +“Let go that topping lift, Pop!” he cried. “Loose your halyards there, +Grant! Now, String, let’s get busy!” + +He left his post, and ordering and helping his comrades, he took charge +of the work of reefing. He had predicted two minutes for the work, but +it took at least five, and before they had finished the Spruce was +almost up to them. + +“Hurry, Fred, hurry!” urged George. “They’re catching us.” + +“All right,” cried Fred, springing back to the tiller. “Haul in your +sheet there, String!” + +The bow of the Balsam swung slowly around and as the sail filled she +began to slip through the water once more. Not twenty-five yards behind +them now came the Spruce, her full sail spread. Thomas waved his hand +and shouted something to the four Go Ahead boys but the wind blew the +sound away and the words were lost. + +“What did he say?” demanded John. + +“I didn’t hear,” said George. “He probably said they’d catch us in a few +minutes, and I guess they will, too.” + +“You’re a pessimist, Pop,” said Fred, but he looked back anxiously at +the Spruce plowing along behind them. + +“No, I’m not either,” exclaimed George. “I do think we made a mistake in +reefing that sail, though.” + +“Wait and see,” said Fred, but he himself appeared to be anxious. + +“If the wind should die down we’d be in a nice fix,” said George in a +discouraged tone of voice. + +“It doesn’t seem to be going down now, though,” said Grant. “Just see us +go! And look at all the white-caps. I really think we’re doing better +than we did before.” + +“But we’re not gaining on them any more,” insisted George gloomily. + +“We don’t need to,” laughed Grant. “All we have to do is to hold our +lead.” + +The relative position of the two boats was unchanged at the end of the +first leg on the second round. The Balsam still enjoyed her lead of +twenty-five yards over her rival. They had covered only a short distance +on the second leg when George suddenly remarked that the wind was dying +down. + +“I know it is,” he insisted. “Just look; we aren’t tipping half as much +as we were.” + +“I hope you’re wrong, Pop,” said Fred anxiously. + +“But I’m not. Can’t you see it yourself?” + +“Perhaps you’re right. At any rate it may only be a lull.” + +In silence the four young sailors watched the sail and looked out over +the water and gazed fearfully at the Spruce so close behind them now. + +“She’s gaining,” announced John. + +“No doubt of it,” said George. “What shall we do?” + +“What can we do?” demanded John in despair. + +“Can’t we take the reef out?” + +“If we did,” said Fred, “we’d have to stop, and they’d surely pass us, +and whether we’d ever catch them or not would be a question.” + +“But won’t they pass us if we don’t take the reef out?” demanded George. + +“I don’t know. We’ve got to take a chance either way.” + +“And no matter what we do,” added George, “we’re bound to lose.” + +“Cheer up, Pop,” urged Grant. “The wind hasn’t gone down very much and +they haven’t passed us yet.” + +“Can’t we take the reef out while we’re going like this?” demanded +George. + +“Oh, we can,” said Fred. “It would be awfully hard, though, and +dangerous, too; besides that, we might tear the sail.” + +“Let me try it,” begged George. “We mustn’t lose this race and that’s +all there is about it.” + +Working under Fred’s guidance, and taking desperate chances George +finally succeeded in shaking the reef out of the sail. The halyards were +tightened and once again the Balsam moved along under her full spread of +canvas. + +“Now I feel better,” sighed George, as he settled back in the cockpit +once more. “That short sail worried me.” + +“We certainly lost a lot of time fooling around there,” observed Fred. +“It was all my fault, too.” + +“Forget it,” exclaimed Grant. “We’re still ahead of them, aren’t we?” + +“But not much,” said Fred, and he glanced hastily around at the Spruce +not more than fifteen yards distant now. + +“I hope they don’t get our wind,” said George. “It’s certainly going +down and we need every bit of it we can get.” + +“You’re right, Pop,” said John. “The wind is lighter and you know what +Fred said about the Spruce probably doing better than the Balsam in a +light breeze.” + +Still maintaining their slight advantage the Balsam turned the last +stake and started down the home stretch. The wind was dead astern of +both boats now and the sails were stretched at right angles to the mast +in order to get the full benefit of the breeze. + +“They’ll blanket us, I’m afraid,” muttered Fred gloomily. + +“What do you mean by that?” asked George. + +“Why, they’ll get right behind us and shut off all our wind.” + +“Don’t let them do it, then.” + +“You don’t think I’d let them on purpose, do you?” + +“They’ll catch us on this straight away, I’m afraid,” said Grant in a +low voice. The boats were so close together now it was necessary to +speak softly to keep from being overheard. + +“Everybody move back towards the stern,” ordered Fred. “Perhaps if we +get her bow out of water a little she’ll do better.” + +They followed Fred’s directions, but little by little the Spruce crept +up on them. The wind was dropping rapidly; it seemed that on this +woodland lake storms and winds came and went with equal facility. + +The Spruce had blanketed their boat momentarily as Fred had predicted. +Drawing even, however, the Balsam once more caught the breeze and the +racers moved forward on even terms. + +“We certainly have some great finishes, don’t we?” called Hugh from the +other boat. + +“Well, I should say so!” exclaimed Grant. “They’re heartbreaking.” + +All at once George left his seat and moved forward. + +“Where are you going, Pop?” demanded Fred. “You’d better come back here +and sit down.” + +George, however, paid no attention to this advice nor did he deign any +answer. He continued serenely on his way until his reached the forward +deck. Straightening himself up, his amazed companions saw him place his +right hand on the mast and scratch it with his finger-nails. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI—HOW THE PLAN WORKED + + +“He’s gone crazy,” muttered Grant. “What does he think he’s doing?” + +George, having completed his strange performance, returned to the stern +of the Balsam and quietly resumed his seat. + +“What were you trying to do?” demanded John curiously. + +“I scratched the mast.” + +“I know you did. Why did you do it?” + +“To give us more breeze.” + +“I suppose scratching the mast is going to make the wind blow,” and John +laughed loudly. “I think you’re crazy, Pop.” + +“Wait and see,” said George calmly. “I remember that I once read +somewhere about sailors scratching the mast when they wanted a breeze, +so I thought I’d try it. We need to try everything if we want to win +this race. They’re ahead of us now.” + +“All right,” smiled John. “I guess you didn’t do any harm anyway.” + +“That’s the way I figured,” exclaimed George. “All sailors are +superstitious and they believe in those things. As long as we’re +sailing, why don’t we try them ourselves?” + +“Where’s your breeze?” demanded Grant. + +“There it comes,” said George, pointing astern of them. A puff of wind +was approaching and a patch of the water could be seen to be ruffled by +its breath. A moment later it struck the Balsam and in answer the little +catboat increased its speed. + +“Why won’t the breeze help them as much as it does us?” inquired Fred. + +“We’ll hope they won’t get any of it,” said George. “You notice that +that last puff didn’t hit them and that we gained a little by it.” + +“It’s certainly close,” said Grant. “We don’t want another tie, though, +and we don’t want second place, either.” + +“Only a quarter of a mile to go,” said Fred. “We’ll need more wind.” + +“Scratch the mast again, Pop,” urged John. + +George did so and another gust of wind caught them and drove them along +a little faster. + +“Isn’t that queer?” exclaimed Grant. “It seems to work though. Try it +again, Pop.” + +Again George scratched the mast and once more a puff of wind caught +their sail. The Balsam was now several feet ahead of her rival and +rapidly approaching the finish. + +“Don’t do it any more, Pop,” urged Fred. “At least don’t do it as long +as we are ahead. If they catch up to us try it again. Of course it’s all +luck, but it is certainly strange, isn’t it?” + +“It surely is,” agreed John. “How do you account for it?” + +“You can’t account for it,” exclaimed Grant. “You don’t suppose that +scratching the mast really makes the wind blow, do you? It has just +happened that way, that’s all.” + +Nearer and nearer the two boats came to the finish. Waiting for them was +Mr. Maxwell, seated in one of the canoes, on a line with the tape. + +“A little more sheet, String,” said Fred. “That’ll do.” + +“They’re almost up to us,” whispered John, doing as Fred had ordered. +“Let Pop scratch the mast again.” + +George was eagerly awaiting a signal to do this very thing. Fred nodded +to him, and using both hands this time George scratched the mast +lustily. Call it coincidence or luck or whatever you like, a strong puff +of wind struck the Balsam almost immediately. She heeled over and for +the first time in a half-hour made such speed that it was possible to +hear the water rippling under her bow. + +“Here we go!” cried George lustily, and with a rush the Balsam swept +forward and crossed the line a good six feet ahead of their rival. + +“Balsam wins!” shouted Mr. Maxwell, and a hearty cheer for the victor +was immediately given by the crew of the defeated boat. + +“How did you like my stunt?” grinned George proudly, addressing his +remarks to his three companions. “Any time you want to win a sailing +race just come to me and I’ll tell you how to do it.” + +“Huh!” snorted Fred, “I suppose you‘ll have a big head for the next year +on account of that.” + +“Look here, Fred,” exclaimed George, winking at his other friends. “I +wouldn’t say very much if I were you. You insisted upon reefing the sail +and as a result we nearly lost the race; if it hadn’t been for my great +brain and cleverness we surely would have been beaten. However, as long +as it turned out the way it did I will forgive you.” + +“I made an error of judgment and yours was nothing but luck,” retorted +Fred. “I want you to remember that, too.” + +The boats were now returning to their moorings and when they had been +made fast the crews went ashore and met on the dock to talk things over. + +“You boys certainly have the closest finishes I’ve ever seen,” exclaimed +Mr. Maxwell. “You don’t try to fix them that way, do you?” + +“Not if we can help it, I tell you,” said Thomas laughingly. “I thought +we were going to win this last race.” + +“So did we,” exclaimed Grant. “You would have won, too, if it hadn’t +been for George here. At least that’s what he says, anyway.” + +“What did he do?” inquired Mr. Maxwell curiously. + +“I scratched the mast,” said George. + +“‘Scratched the mast’!” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. “Why did you do that?” + +“To bring us more wind.” + +“You must be superstitious,” laughed Mr. Maxwell. + +“Well,” said George, “I never used to be, but I am sort of that way now; +it worked so beautifully.” + +“Where did you ever hear of such a thing?” + +“I read about it in some book and as things looked pretty desperate for +us I thought I’d try it.” + +“You mean to say that all you have to do when you want a breeze is to go +up and scratch the mast?” + +“Oh, I don’t think it would work every time,” laughed George. “I guess +it will give you help only when you need it very badly. If you tried it +all the time I suppose you’d soon wear out the charm.” + +“Well, you won, anyway,” said Mr. Maxwell laughingly. “That makes you +all tied with four and a half points for each team. The swimming race +will have to decide it.” + +“Is every one ready for that now?” asked Grant. + +“The red team is ready for anything,” laughed Thomas. + +“All right,” said Mr. Maxwell. “The race will start just as soon as +possible and remember that the points will be decided, three for first, +two for second, and one for third this time.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXII—A STRANGE PERFORMANCE + + +A course had been measured one hundred and seventy-five yards in length. +The start was from a large rock that stood out of the water some fifteen +yards off shore and the finish was at the dock. + +The contestants made their way to the starting point by way of the +shore; at least they walked until they came to a spot directly opposite +the big rock and then waded out as far as possible, swimming the last +few yards. Before many moments had elapsed the eight boys were lined up +in a row waiting for the signal. Mr. Maxwell stood on the dock, a pistol +in his hand. + +“We’re counting on you, Grant,” John had said as they walked along the +shore. “You’ve simply got to win.” + +“Suppose I do,” said Grant. “That’ll mean three points for us and unless +we take one of the other places, too, that’ll give the red team three +points. If that happens the meet will end in a tie.” + +“Maybe George can get a place. He’s not a bad swimmer, you know.” + +“I know he isn’t, but you’re just as good yourself.” + +“The trouble is we’ve never seen these other fellows swim and we have no +idea whether they’re any good or not.” + +“Well, if we do our best we shan’t have any reason to kick, I guess,” +laughed Grant. + +He was far and away the best swimmer of the four Go Ahead boys, and so +often had he proved his superiority over them that it was now taken for +granted. He was the only one who had mastered the crawl stroke. He knew +it so well that it was almost second nature to him now, but to his three +companions it still remained a mystery. That it is not an easy thing to +acquire will be vouched for by any one who has attempted it. Fred was a +wretched swimmer and knew perfectly well that he stood no chance in the +race; he entered merely because he did not wish to miss anything. John +and George were about on a par, both of them good average performers, +but nothing more. + +“All ready?” shouted Mr. Maxwell through his megaphone. + +“Everybody ready?” asked Thomas. + +Every one said he was and Thomas waved his hand to the judge. All eyes +were fixed upon the figure standing on the dock, his right arm upraised +with the pistol in his hand. + +They had not long to wait. A flash and then the sharp report of the +revolver, and almost together eight gleaming white bodies hit the water. +Fred was the one exception; his position had been next to George and +when the signal for the start was given he had been a trifle slow in +diving. + +A mad scramble ensued the moment all the contestants were in the water +together and there was much splashing and confusion. Fred was behind the +others and consequently bore the brunt of the whole mixup. He had not +taken two strokes when George, who was ahead of him, struck him +violently in the stomach with his foot. + +It was a powerful blow and well nigh knocked all the wind right out of +Fred’s body. “Ugh!” he groaned and sank from sight. + +George turned in alarm to see who it was that had been on the receiving +end of his effort and was just in time to see Fred reappear puffing and +gasping. This sight seemed to tickle George immensely and he began to +laugh. Fred choked and gargled and wheezed and try as he would, George +could not control his laughter. + +Meanwhile the other six contestants were far ahead and one glance +convinced George that he and Fred were hopelessly out of the race. + +“What’s the matter with you?” exclaimed Fred angrily. + +“I didn’t mean to kick you,” said George, and once more he burst into +loud and uncontrollable laughter. + +“I’m not talking about that,” cried Fred even more aroused by the +spectacle of his friend’s mirth. “Why did you drop out of the race?” + +“I got laughing so when I saw your face that I forgot all about the race +and everything else. I never saw such a funny sight in all my life.” + +“Huh,” snorted Fred. “You’re a nice one. We’ll probably lose the meet on +account of you.” + +“I couldn’t help it,” cried George, and once more he began to laugh. “I +just started laughing and I couldn’t stop.” + +“Come ashore before you drown, you idiot!” exclaimed Fred, and side by +side they made their way to land. + +The other contestants were now strung out in a long line. Grant was +easily in the lead and it seemed a foregone conclusion that he would win +the race. Like some great fish he plowed through the water. His feet +worked fast and evenly while his hands reached out with a great sweep +and drove him speedily along. His face was under water most of the time; +every few strokes he rolled over on one side, sucked in a great mouthful +of air and then continued as before. + +The real race was for second place and there were three in it. Hugh, +Thomas, and John went along almost abreast. John could see that Grant +would win the race easily enough, but he realized that in order to win +the meet it was necessary for him to finish at least third. He was a +good swimmer but was not a racer. Many times he had covered long +distances in the water but had paid scant attention to developing his +speed. + +He used a powerful overhand stroke and when he was moving slowly he was +practically tireless. He now was worried, however. He did not dare look +around to see where George was for fear he might lose a few precious +inches. He did not expect to see Fred, for he knew that his small +comrade was a very poor swimmer. He had considered himself and George +about on a par and he wondered how it could have happened that he had +outdistanced him so far. Had he known the truth undoubtedly he would +have been just as angry as Fred had been and his speed certainly would +not have been benefited as a result. + +Ahead of him he saw Grant and ahead of Grant he spied the dock and Mr. +Maxwell standing on it waiting. It seemed very far away. Beside him swam +Hugh and Thomas, one on his right and the other on his left. They were +breathing hard and splashing heavily, but still they did not seem to be +slowing up. + +John put forth every effort. He too was becoming short of wind and his +arms and legs began to feel the strain. It had been a hard day and this +last contest was a severe test for all the boys. + +“I must beat one of them! I must! I must!” John kept saying to himself +over and over again. Then the next time he saw his rivals Thomas was +several feet ahead of him and gaining. + +John groaned. Hugh still kept abreast of him and try as hard as he could +John seemed powerless to shake him off. He gritted his teeth and strove +desperately to make his arms go still faster. Nature could not be forced +however; his arms seemed made of lead and every time he raised them he +wondered if it would not be the last. + +Far ahead he saw Grant only a few feet from the dock. Thomas, too, was +many yards in advance of him now. “I simply can’t keep it up any +longer,” thought John, and the next instant, “Don’t quit,” he told +himself, and he forced his tired muscles to carry him along a few +strokes more. He set his jaw determinedly and decided he’d keep it up +till he reached the dock no matter what happened later. + +Suddenly an idea struck him. “Perhaps Hugh is just as tired as I am,” he +thought. “In that case all I have to do is to keep on swimming at a +moderate pace and I’ll beat him.” + +Hugh was certainly splashing more than he had been and evidently was in +trouble. “I’ll get him yet,” thought John and for a moment he felt +stronger. “I’ve forgotten the others though,” he suddenly realized and +the fear that some one would creep past him before the finish assailed +him all at once. He decided to roll over on his back and look. + +He did so and behind him he saw only two swimmers. They were not near +enough to be dangerous however and John did not even recognize them. +That two of the contestants were missing he did not notice at all. + +Often when swimming long distances he had turned over up on his back in +order to rest and now he was surprised to find how even a few strokes in +that position relieved his aching muscles. The finish was close at hand +now, however, and he dared not continue in that fashion any longer. He +rolled over and resumed his overhand stroke. + +Grant was already on the dock standing beside Mr. Maxwell. Thomas had +just reached the goal and was pulling himself up out of the water. To +his surprise John noticed that in spite of the fact that he had been +swimming on his back Hugh had not gained anything on him. His brief rest +had refreshed him considerably and with added confidence he struck out +for the finish. Without really noticing it he was aware that Hugh was +floundering more than ever. He did not turn to look, however, but +concentrated every effort on his swimming, and still struggled on +towards the goal. + +He lost sight of Hugh; he saw nothing but the dock ahead of him. His +lungs cried for mercy and his muscles ached, but vigorously he still +kept going. After what seemed centuries he reached the dock, not knowing +whether he had beaten Hugh out or not. In fact he did not care much now. +He had gained the dock at last and he was happy. + +He raised his eyes to look about him and what he saw was very strange +indeed. Mr. Maxwell, standing fully clothed on the dock, suddenly dove +right over his head into the water. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII—AN UNEXPECTED HONOR + + +Tired as he was John realized that this was strange proceeding. He tried +to pull himself up on the dock, but he was too weak and slipped back +into the water. + +“Grant,” he called, “give me a lift.” + +“Come ahead,” cried Grant, bending over and extending his hand to John. + +With this help the tired boy lifted himself out of the water and sank +down on the dock almost completely exhausted. He lay flat on his back, +his eyes closed. + +“Where’s Hugh?” he panted. “Did I beat him?” + +There was no answer. + +“Grant,” said John. “Did I beat Hugh?” + +Still no reply, and he opened his eyes to see what the reason for the +silence was. He slowly raised himself to one elbow and looked about him. +Black spots danced before his eyes and at first he saw nothing; then his +eyes suddenly became accustomed to the surroundings and he gasped. For +the moment he had forgotten that he had seen Mr. Maxwell jump into the +water but he remembered it now and he saw the reason for it. + +Grant had finished the race and not greatly tired had been standing +alongside Mr. Maxwell watching the others approach. The race between +John and Hugh was what interested them most for they saw that Thomas +would finish an easy second and so the final outcome of the meet +depended on these two. + +“A pretty tight race,” remarked Grant. + +“I should—” began Mr. Maxwell when he suddenly stopped and stared. + +John had just turned over on his stomach again for the final dash. Hugh +was at his shoulder and the onlookers were enjoying the close finish. +Suddenly, however, Hugh disappeared from sight. He simply sank beneath +the water with no warning whatsoever and John reached the dock alone. + +“He’s exhausted,” cried Mr. Maxwell, and without waiting an instant he +dived into the water, fully clothed as he was, to rescue his nephew. + +When John opened his eyes he saw Mr. Maxwell in the water, swimming for +the dock with one hand and holding Hugh by the hair of his head with the +other. + +“What’s the trouble, Grant?” demanded John. + +“Hugh sank.” + +“What was the matter with him?” + +“He was tired out, I guess. Here, let me have him now,” he said to Mr. +Maxwell and leaning out from the dock he seized Hugh by the arms. His +uncle gave the half-drowned boy a boost and he was soon stretched out at +full length on the little wharf. + +“That was a close call,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell grimly as he clambered +out after him. “It’s a lucky thing he was so near the dock. Where are +the rest of the boys?” + +“Here are two of them,” said Grant as Franklin and Herbert swam +leisurely up to the dock. Seeing that they were hopelessly beaten they +had not exerted themselves the last seventy-five yards of the race. + +“Where are the other two?” exclaimed John anxiously. He had recovered +most of his breath and strength now and not seeing George or Fred was +fearful lest the fate that Hugh had so narrowly escaped had befallen +them. + +“Turn around and you’ll see.” + +George and Fred came walking towards the dock. + +“Where did you two come from?” demanded John in surprise. “The last I +saw of you was when we all dived off that rock together. How did you get +up on shore that way?” + +“Have you ever been kicked by a mule?” asked Fred. + +“What are you talking about?” John was completely mystified. + +“I asked if you’d ever been kicked by a mule.” + +“What has that got to do with this race?” + +“Simply this,” said Fred. “A mule kicked me in the stomach at the start +of the race and I had to quit.” + +“I think you’re crazy,” exclaimed John. “What happened to you, Pop?” + +“He was the mule,” said Fred. “Who won the race anyway?” + +“Tell us what you’re talking about first,” said John, beginning to get a +little bit angry. “Stop talking in riddles.” + +Fred explained how his stomach had come in contact with George’s foot +and how, as a result, they had both been compelled to give up the race. +The tale provided much amusement to the listeners and even Hugh, who had +partly revived, joined in the laughter. + +“I’m no mule though,” insisted George. + +“You’ve got a kick like one just the same,” laughed Fred. “Tell me,” he +continued, “who won the race.” + +“Grant won,” replied Mr. Maxwell. + +“Good work, Grant,” cried Fred. “Who was second?” + +“Thomas.” + +“When you tell me who was third you’ll also tell me whether we won the +meet or not. Who was it?” + +“John was third,” said Grant. + +“John?” exclaimed George in mock surprise. “It can’t be possible.” + +“Don’t get so fresh,” said John and he gave George a violent push which +sent him flying off the end of the wharf into the water. + +“Serves him right,” said Fred approvingly. “He’s very much too fresh.” + +George came to the surface, gasping and choking. + +“Congratulations, String,” he cried as soon as he had shaken the water +out of his eyes. “Glad you got a place; I thought you would.” + +“You can’t keep that fellow down,” laughed Fred. “There’s no use in +trying. He’s fresh and he knows it, but no matter what you do to him he +keeps it up just the same.” + +“He’s not fresh,” laughed Mr. Maxwell. “He’s just full of spirits.” + +“I don’t know what we’d do without him anyway,” said Grant feelingly. +“There are not many dull moments when Pop is around.” + +“I would suggest,” said Mr. Maxwell, “that you boys go and put your +clothes on. The sun is beginning to go down and it’ll be cold soon.” + +“I’m cold now,” exclaimed John. “I’m going to get my clothes all right.” + +He hurried off towards the tent closely followed by the seven other +boys. A brisk rub down with heavy towels soon got their blood to +circulating once more and no one felt any ill effects from all their +exercises and exertion of the day. + +“Now I shall present the prizes,” said Mr. Maxwell when the boys were +assembled in front of the tent. “The blue team wins the meet by the +margin of eight points to six. I congratulate them and take great +pleasure in presenting to them the big American flag. They all know how +I feel about it and I expect them to treat it as it should be treated.” + +“Three cheers for the blue team,” cried Thomas lustily and they were +given with a will, as Grant stepped forward to receive the trophy. + +“And now the second prize,” said Mr. Maxwell. “It’s not as big as the +first but the size doesn’t count. Everything depends on whether our +hearts are with the flag or not. If I should happen to come back to this +lake unexpectedly any time this summer I shall expect to see both these +flags flying in front of their respective tents.” + +“We’ll promise that all right,” said Thomas readily, and as he took the +emblem from Mr. Maxwell’s hand, Grant led a cheer for the red team. + +“One more prize,” continued Mr. Maxwell. “I brought something which I +decided should go to the boy who in my judgment gave the best individual +performance. That is who in any one event showed the most nerve and +grit. Perhaps he didn’t win the event but he worked hardest and that is +what to my mind deserves the credit.” + +He produced a large four-bladed pocket knife and held it up for the +eight boys to see. This was a surprise to them all and they looked at +one another in amazement. They also cast many envious glances at the +knife which was certainly a beauty and one of which any boy could well +be proud. + +“It was an awful job deciding,” said Mr. Maxwell. “Every one did so well +I was almost in despair as to whom to give it to. I have finally +decided, however, and I feel sure you’ll all think the boy deserves it.” + +Not one of the boys had the least idea who was to become the fortunate +owner of the knife and in keen suspense they all waited. + +“I will now ask the winner to step forward,” continued Mr. Maxwell. “I +watched him closely in the contest which I think entitles him to the +prize and I don’t remember ever having seen a finer exhibition of pluck. +I know just how tired he was and how much nerve he required to keep +himself going. He didn’t win the race himself but he did win the meet +for his team and I think he should have the credit. John, here is your +knife. That was a great race you swam a few minutes ago.” + +John was completely taken by surprise. He had not for a moment expected +that he was to be the fortunate one and he was almost overcome. + +“Yea, String!” shouted George heartily. “Let’s give the old thin fellow +three cheers.” + +Congratulations were in order and there was much laughter and fun. Every +one was in excellent spirits and all pronounced the meet a decided +success. The day was fast waning now and the party of visitors prepared +to leave the island for their camp at the other end of the land. The +four Go Ahead boys escorted them to their boat and good-bys were said. +Promises that the eight boys would see one another soon were made and +the Spruce weighed anchor and glided out of the little harbor. + +“Well,” exclaimed Grant when their guests had gone, “I think we had a +pretty fine time to-day.” + +“We certainly did,” agreed Fred. “What we want now is a pole for our +flag. It ought to be set right up in front of the tent there.” + +“I’ll get the ax right now and we’ll go and cut one,” said George. “Come +along, Fred.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV—IN QUEST OF GAME + + +The days and weeks slipped by and still the life in the island camp did +not pall on on the four Go Ahead boys. They were busy every moment with +the thousand and one duties and pleasures of camp life and the summer +days drifted by like a succession of pleasant dreams. + +One of the boys’ favorite occupations was shooting at a target. Fred was +the owner of a little twenty-two caliber, hammerless rifle, and many an +hour was spent by the boys in practice with this small gun. It was +surprising how skillful they had become. + +Grant and John were lying on the wharf one afternoon trying to shoot the +heads off some water lilies that grew near the shore on the opposite +side of the harbor. + +“Now just suppose that one was an Indian,” exclaimed John, taking +careful aim at an unsuspecting lily bud. The sharp spit of the little +rifle followed and the bullet struck the water some two feet the other +side of the “Indian.” + +“You’ll have to do better than that,” laughed Grant. “We’ll all be +scalped in a minute unless you get him. Let me try.” + +John passed over the gun and on his first attempt Grant split the bulb +clearly in halves. + +“Good shot, Grant,” exclaimed John. “You saved our lives.” + +“Just suppose that had been a lion or a tiger or a rhinoceros or some +animal like that charging down upon us,” said Grant. “Suppose we were +caught in a little ravine and we either had to kill the animal or be +killed ourselves. What would you do?” + +“I’d probably be so scared I’d faint or something,” laughed John. + +“It would take nerve all right, wouldn’t it?” + +“More than I’ve got, I’m afraid.” + +“Oh, I don’t know. I think most people are brave when it comes right +down to the point.” + +“I hope I’d be, anyway,” exclaimed John. “I think a coward is about the +worst thing in the world.” + +“Some people that seem the most timid have the most nerve when it’s +really needed,” remarked Grant. “The ones that talk the loudest are not +always the bravest by a long shot. + +“Perhaps they try to make up by noise what they lack in nerve,” laughed +John. “I’ve noticed that too, and I’ve also discovered that it doesn’t +pay to make fun of anybody. Do you remember that boy at home? Everybody +used to call him a ‘sis’ and a ‘willie-boy’ but when Bob Jackson’s dog +fell into the mill-race he was the only one who had nerve enough to jump +in after him. That taught me a lesson, I can tell you.” + +“I wonder what animal is the most dangerous in the world.” + +“A lion is, I guess.” + +“I don’t think so. Lions are mostly scavengers they say and I’ve heard +that tigers are worse than they are. A tiger doesn’t give any warning at +all when he attacks.” + +“Well, I’d just as soon not meet either one of them on a lonely road,” +laughed John. + +“Nor I,” agreed Grant. “I’ve heard though that a rhinoceros or an +African buffalo is worse than either a lion or a tiger.” + +“How about a grizzly bear?” + +“They’re all pretty bad, I guess,” said Grant. “I wouldn’t stop to argue +with any one of them.” + +“Let me have that gun again,” exclaimed John. “If we’re going to meet +all these ferocious wild animals we’ll need more practice in shooting.” + +Just at this moment, however, George and Fred appeared. They came out of +the clump of trees behind the tent and seemed very much excited about +something. + +“Hey, Grant!” called Fred. “Where’s the gun?” + +“Right here. What’s the matter?” + +“Do you remember what you said about wanting to shoot one of those big +herons and have it stuffed?” + +“Yes. Why?” + +“Well, Pop and I discovered one just now in that little marsh over on +the other side of the island.” + +“Bring the gun along and maybe you’ll get a shot at it,” exclaimed +George. “You’d better hurry though.” + +“He won’t be there now,” said Grant. + +“Why won’t he?” demanded Fred. “You won’t get him if you sit there and +do nothing, like a great big galoot though. Let me have the gun if you +don’t want it yourself.” + +“Oh, I’ll go with you,” exclaimed Grant rising to his feet. “I don’t +think for a minute he’ll still be there though. What was he doing?” + +“Looking for fish, I guess,” said George. “He was wading around in the +swamp on those great long legs of his; he looked as if he was on +stilts.” + +“Grant doesn’t seem very eager, Pop,” remarked Fred. “I wish he’d give +us the gun.” + +“Come along,” cried Grant. “I’ve been waiting for you to start.” + +“Huh,” snorted Fred; “listen to that, I think we ought to have the bird +anyway; we discovered him.” + +“Did he see you?” asked John. The four boys were now hurrying along +guided by Fred who was slightly in the lead. + +“I can truthfully say that he did not,” said George decidedly and Fred +snickered. + +“What’s the matter?” inquired Grant suspiciously. “What are you laughing +at?” + +“Nothing,” said Fred quickly, but as he looked back at his companions +the suspicion of a smile lurked upon his countenance. + +“There’s something funny about this,” exclaimed Grant. “I tell you right +now that if you two are putting up a game on me there’ll be trouble.” + +“I don’t believe they saw a heron at all,” said John. + +“I tell you we did,” exclaimed Fred earnestly. “Pop and I will both +swear to it; we saw one in the swamp over here. Of course we can’t +guarantee that he’ll still be there when you slowpokes arrive.” + +“That’s right,” chimed in George. “We certainly did see one not five +minutes before we came back to the dock to tell you about it. I don’t +see why you need be so suspicious about it.” + +“Well, I wouldn’t trust you two,” said Grant. “You’ve acted sort of +funny about it too.” + +“You only think we have,” retorted Fred. “Careful now, the marsh is just +ahead of us.” + +“Why don’t we sneak up behind those bushes?” suggested George, pointing +to a clump of elderberries a few yards in front of them. + +“That’s a good scheme,” exclaimed Fred. “We can hide behind them and get +a good view of the marsh without being seen ourselves.” + +Stealthily the four boys made their way until they reached the spot +George had designated. On the other side of the bushes and extending for +a hundred yards or so was the swamp where the heron was reported to have +been seen. + +“Careful now,” whispered Fred as they crouched behind the clump of +elderberry bushes. “We don’t want to scare him away.” + +“If he’s still there,” muttered Grant. He had been suspicious of Fred +and George; their manner had seemed somewhat peculiar to him but they +were serious enough now and his doubts were removed. + +“Do you see him?” asked John eagerly, as Fred peered out through an +opening in the bushes. + +“Not yet.” + +“Where was he when you saw him before?” demanded Grant. + +“Down by that point. I don’t see him there now though.” + +“Let me look,” pleaded Grant excitedly. “I haven’t seen him yet.” + +“Look along the shore,” directed Fred, yielding his place to Grant. +“He’s more likely to be there than any place else I think.” + +As Grant searched the marsh George suddenly made a peculiar noise. It +might have passed for a sob or a chuckle or he could have even been +accused of choking. + +“Stop that,” cried Fred fiercely, hitting George sharply in the ribs +with his fist. + +“What’s the matter with you two?” exclaimed Grant. He turned quickly +around and eyed his two companions narrowly. + +“I choked,” stammered George. “I couldn’t help it.” + +“If you’ve been fooling me you’ll do worse than choke,” muttered Grant +fiercely. “You two are acting very queerly it seems to me.” + +“Because I choked?” demanded George. “I don’t see what there is queer +about that.” + +“Will you swear you saw a heron here?” demanded Grant. + +“I will,” exclaimed Fred. “I declare to you, Grant, there was one here. +We saw him first down by that point where I showed you.” + +“He’s not there now,” said Grant. “That much is sure.” + +“He may have moved along you know. Just because he isn’t in that same +spot doesn’t mean that he has left.” + +“Well, I don’t see him anyway.” + +“Let me look,” exclaimed George. “My eyes are better than yours.” + +Grant exchanged places with George who now seemed to have recovered from +his recent affliction; he scanned the nearby marsh eagerly and was quiet +and serious now. + +“Well?” demanded Grant after a moment had elapsed. + +George turned and looked at the speaker. “Come here,” he whispered, +crooking his finger mysteriously. + +Grant, much excited now, crowded up close beside George. Together they +peered out across the swamp. + +“See that dead log lying on the beach down there?” inquired George. + +“Yes.” + +“Do you see anything the other side of it?” + +“No.” + +“Not a thing?” + +“I don’t see anything but the old dead limb of a tree sticking up.” + +“That’s not a dead limb, Grant.” + +“Sure enough,” cried Grant excitedly. “Say,” he exclaimed, “I saw that +thing before but I thought it was a stick.” + +“It’s not though,” said George triumphantly. “It’s a heron and Fred and +I accept your apology for all you’ve thought about us.” + +“Why doesn’t it move?” demanded Grant. + +“Don’t you know that herons often stand like that for a long, long time? +If you’re going to shoot that fellow you’d better get a move on yourself +though.” + +“I can’t hit him from here.” + +“Don’t try. Sneak up closer.” + +“Give me the gun, Grant,” exclaimed Fred. “If you don’t care anything +about shooting him I’d like a try at it myself.” + +“No, you don’t,” said Grant quickly, and rising to his feet he crouched +low and began to run swiftly down towards the shore of the lake. + +“Follow those bushes along the shore,” directed George. “Don’t let him +see you, whatever you do.” + +“He’s all right so far,” said Fred. “He’s got good protection down as +far as the water anyway.” + +“I hope he gets it,” exclaimed John eagerly. “He’s certainly a good shot +and that ought to help some.” + +“Oh, he’ll get it all right,” said George. He and Fred looked at each +other for a moment and then both burst into silent but uncontrollable +laughter. + +“What’s the matter with you two?” demanded John, completely taken aback +by their strange behavior. + +“Oh, String,” said George. “If you only knew.” + +“Well, why don’t you tell me?” exclaimed John. “What sort of a game have +you put up on Grant anyway?” + +“Do you see that heron he’s after?” + +“Yes, of course I do.” + +“Well, it’s dead. Fred and I found it on the shore and stuck it up +behind that log. Just wait till Grant finds it out,” and the two +conspirators hugged each other delightedly. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV—THE WORM TURNS + + +Meanwhile Grant was stalking his game. He crouched low and making as +much speed as was consistent with quietness, he hurried along. + +“Just look at him!” cried George ecstatically, as now and again the +hunter could be seen to stop and peer cautiously in the direction of his +prey. + +“I should think the fact that it hasn’t moved would make him +suspicious,” remarked John. + +“He thinks herons always act that way,” chuckled Fred. “I can hardly +wait for him to shoot.” + +“You follows nearly queered your whole game a couple of times all +right,” said John. “We were both suspicious of you. Why, twice you had +grins on your faces so long you could almost pin them in the back.” + +“It was so funny,” laughed George. “To think how we planned the whole +thing and how easily he fell into it. Why, it was almost too easy.” + +“Don’t be too sure,” warned John. “He hasn’t fired yet, you know.” + +“He will all right,” said Fred confidently. “The old bird has been dead +for about a month and you just ought to smell it.” + +“Won’t he be mad?” exclaimed George. This thought seemed to give him +special pleasure. + +“He’ll probably shoot us,” laughed Fred. + +“Where is he now?” inquired John. “I don’t see him.” + +“He’s down behind that rock,” said George. “There he comes.” + +“He’d better shoot pretty soon,” chuckled Fred. “The bird will fly away +if he isn’t careful.” + +“Isn’t this rich?” exclaimed George. “Just think of putting up a game on +Grant like this.” + +“Look at him!” cried Fred. “He’s almost on his hands and knees now.” + +“Shoot, Grant, shoot!” urged George. + +Nearer and nearer to the heron Grant crept. He had his gun half raised +as he stole along, prepared to shoot at any moment. His three companions +intently watched him, thoroughly enjoying the whole affair. + +“If he doesn’t shoot pretty soon he’ll see that it’s dead,” said John. + +“He’s trying to get up behind that bush, I think,” said George. + +“He’s taking a chance,” laughed Fred. “The heron will see him and fly +away if he isn’t more careful.” + +“There he goes!” exclaimed George. “He’s going to shoot.” + +“And now for the fun,” cried Fred. “Won’t he be mad though?” + +Grant stopped and sinking to one knee he raised the little rifle to his +shoulder. + +“Don’t miss him, Grant,” chuckled Fred. + +The gun spoke, and a moment later the faint report came to the ears of +the three boys who watched from behind the elderberry bushes. + +“Did he hit him?” laughed George. “What’s he doing?” + +Grant had jumped to his feet after the first shot and started to run +along the shore. He came to the log where the dead heron had been +propped up but he did not stop there. He continued on past this spot and +the conspirators for the first time had an inkling that all was not +going as they had hoped. + +“What’s happened?” demanded John in surprise. “What’s he after?” + +“I’m sure I don’t know,” said Fred blankly. + +Some fifty or sixty feet beyond the spot where the dead log lay Grant +continued. Not one of his friends had been looking at this place for +their attention had been riveted on the dead heron. + +The grass grew level with Grant’s knees where he was now. He leaned over +and seemed to be looking down at something on the ground at his feet. + +“What do you suppose it is?” demanded George curiously. + +“Look,” exclaimed John and as he spoke Grant lifted from the grass a +great blue heron. He held it by the feet and turning towards the bush +where his companions were he waved his gun. Then he slung the big bird +over his shoulder and started to retrace his steps. + +George, Fred, and John had watched these proceedings in open-mouthed +amazement. + +“Well, what do you know about that?” exclaimed George limply. + +“I guess he’s got us all right,” sighed Fred. “Let’s skip back to camp +before he gets hold of us.” + +“We’d better stay and face the music,” said George with a sigh. “Doesn’t +that beat all? Just when we thought we had him good and fooled, he turns +around and puts the joke on us.” + +“I don’t see yet what happened,” exclaimed John. + +“Why, he saw another heron, that’s all,” said Fred. “It was a live one +too, I guess.” + +“Where’s the one you and Pop fixed up for him?” + +“Still there behind the log.” + +“Grant never even looked at it,” said George. “He’ll make our lives +miserable all the rest of the summer.” + +“It’s almost over now,” said Fred. “He can’t tease us long.” + +In silence the three boys sat and watched their comrade approach. John +did not dread the meeting so much, for he had not been one of the +original conspirators, but Fred and George looked forward to Grant’s +arrival with anything but pleasure. + +“What do you think of him?” cried Grant as he held up his prize for his +friends to see. “Isn’t he a beauty?” + +“He’s all right,” said George weakly. + +“What’s the matter, Pop?” demanded Grant. “You don’t seem very +enthusiastic. Don’t you like his looks?” + +“He’s fine,” replied George in a hollow voice. + +“Where did you find him?” demanded Fred bluntly. + +“Right where I shot him,” said Grant. “You saw the spot where I picked +him up, didn’t you?” + +“We saw it all right,” said Fred grimly. “We haven’t a word to say +either. You have the joke on us all right, Grant. All I ask is that you +don’t rub it in too much.” + +“I won’t,” laughed Grant. “It was awfully funny the way it turned out. I +never suspected at first that the heron you pointed out to me was dead. +I kept sneaking up as close as I dared and the thing never moved a bit +and it began to strike me as sort of queer. Then I remembered how you +fellows had snickered a couple of times and I felt pretty sure that +something was wrong. + +“All of a sudden I saw this bird just a few yards beyond the log. I knew +then that my chance had come to turn the joke on you, but I was so +anxious my arm was shaking like a leaf. I was afraid I surely would miss +and when I saw that I hadn’t, I can tell you I felt pretty good. Here’s +the heron and if you two fellows want yours you’ll find him down by that +log. He smells a little strong though.” + +“Let’s go back to camp,” exclaimed George. + +“All right,” laughed Grant. “As long as you don’t like the subject, I +won’t say too much about it.” + +Laughing and joking they made their way back towards their camp. George +and Fred realized how badly they had fared in their attempt to play a +practical joke, but they were good sports and consequently good losers. +They joined in the fun at their own expense, and were unstinted in their +praise of the prize Grant had gained. + +“We certainly got more than we were looking for that time,” said George +laughingly. “You are——” + +He suddenly ceased speaking and gazed in surprise in the direction of +the tent. + +“What’s the matter?” demanded John anxiously. + +“Some man with a big black beard just ran around the other side of the +tent,” exclaimed George. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI—AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER + + +“Are you sure you saw a man?” asked Grant skeptically. + +“I know I did,” replied George with the utmost conviction. + +“What did he look like?” + +“He looked like a tramp; a rough looking sort of a fellow with a black +beard and an old slouch hat.” + +“Only one man?” + +“That’s all I saw.” + +“What shall we do?” demanded Fred blankly. + +“We’ll go down and see what he wants,” said George in a matter of fact +tone. “What else is there to do?” + +“Suppose he’s looking for trouble?” suggested Fred. + +“Well then, he’ll find it,” said George grimly. “There are four of us to +his one.” + +“He may not be alone,” said Fred. “I think we’d better go slow.” + +“Grant has a gun.” + +“But he’s not going to use it,” said Grant quickly. “You don’t catch me +shooting at anybody, tramp or no tramp. I don’t want any blood on my +head.” + +“Suppose they attack us?” demanded George. + +“‘They,’” exclaimed Grant. “I thought you said you saw only one.” + +“That’s all I did see. There may be more of them though.” + +“Probably a couple of guides,” said John. “Let’s go find out anyway.” + +“I’d be careful,” warned Fred. “There’s no use in taking chances.” + +“What’s the matter with you, Fred?” demanded George. “What are you so +nervous about?” + +“I don’t know. It seems funny to me though that a man like that should +be hanging around our tent.” + +“He’s probably waiting for us to come back.” + +“Then why did he duck behind the tent the minute he saw us?” + +“Maybe he didn’t see us at all.” + +“The thing to do is to go down there and find out,” exclaimed Grant. +“Come on, Pop, you and I will go anyway.” + +“And so will I,” added John. + +“I’ll go myself,” said Fred. “I’m not afraid; all I said was that I +thought we ought to be careful.” + +“We’ll be careful,” George assured him. “Come along.” + +The little band once again started towards the tent. As Fred had +remarked it seemed a strange thing that any man like the one George had +seen should be loitering around their camp. They had had no visitors +that summer aside from their opponents in the water sports and Mr. +Maxwell, and the appearance of a stranger on the island was unusual +enough to cause them some alarm. + +Side by side they walked towards the spot where their tent was pitched. +No further sign of their visitor appeared and this in itself made the +four boys somewhat uneasy. + +“Where did he go, do you suppose?” whispered John. + +“Are you sure you saw a man, Pop?” demanded Grant. + +“Of course I did. Do you think I’m crazy?” + +“Where is he then? No one else saw him.” + +George made no reply to this remark and in complete silence they +continued on their way. At length they came to the tent itself but no +one was to be seen. They peered inside, but it was empty of any living +person. Grant turned to George triumphantly. + +“You’re seeing things to-day,” he laughed. He laid the heron on the +ground in front of the tent and placed his gun inside. + +“I saw a man,” insisted George. + +“And you tried to make me see a live heron that was dead,” said Grant. + +“It’s certainly strange,” muttered George. “I know I saw a man. I’d take +my dying oath on it.” + +“But where is he?” demanded Grant. + +“That’s just what I say,” rejoined George. “Where is he?” + +“He doesn’t seem to be—” began John, when he suddenly stopped. “Look,” +he cried and pointed towards the shore. + +Two men were seated under a small tree which grew half-way between the +wharf and the tent. Their backs were towards the boys so that it was +impossible to see who they were. The back view however was not very +reassuring. The strangers appeared to be rough and unkempt and were +busily engaged in eating some food they had evidently helped themselves +to from the stores of the four young campers. Both men seemed entirely +unaware that they were being watched. + +“How did they get there without our seeing them?” whispered John. “Pop +saw one of them up by the tent.” + +“The tent is between that tree and the place where we were standing,” +said George. “It shut off our view and they probably walked down there +while we were coming towards the tent.” + +“What shall we do?” whispered Fred. + +“Yell at them,” suggested John. + +“Don’t you do it,” cautioned Grant quickly. + +“For goodness’ sake,” exclaimed George suddenly in a low voice. “Don’t +any one of you fellows move,” he ordered them. “Just wait here for me.” + +He turned and darted quickly inside the tent while his three companions +were completely mystified by his strange behavior. They gazed after him +in amazement. + +“What’s he after?” asked John in a whisper. + +“Maybe he went for the gun,” suggested Fred. + +“I wonder if he did,” exclaimed Grant. “We mustn’t have that,” and he +started to follow George inside the tent. + +Just as he was about to lift the flap and enter, however, George +suddenly appeared. He held one of the young campers’ big balsam pillows +in each hand and he wore a queer expression on his face. His three +friends looked at him in amazement not unmixed with alarm. + +“What are you going to do?” demanded Grant. + +“Ssh!” hissed George. “Watch me.” + +He cautiously stole forward in the direction of the two men. His +companions were too surprised to make any effort to restrain him. +Open-mouthed they stood and watched him stealthily approach the tree +underneath which the two rough-looking men were seated. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION + + +“He’s gone crazy,” muttered Grant. “We should have held him back.” + +On tip-toe and evidently trying to make as little noise as possible, +George stole forward. Nearer and nearer he approached, the pillows still +held firmly in his hands. He slackened his pace as he came closer and +redoubled his efforts to move cautiously. + +“They’ll turn and see him in a second,” whispered Fred, as much to +himself as to anybody else. All three of the boys were tense with +excitement as they riveted their attention on their companion who to +them was doing such a remarkable thing. + +George was scarcely ten feet distant from the men now. All at once he +stopped. He slowly drew back his right arm and taking careful aim he let +fly the pillow which he held. True to its mark it sped. It struck the +larger of the two men squarely in the neck. The second pillow followed +the other an instant later and it too scored a hit. Both had been aimed +at the same man. + +No sooner had George completed his bombardment than he uttered a wild +whoop and rushed forward. He dashed straight towards the man he had been +so successful in hitting and threw both arms around him. + +Grant, Fred, and John were too taken aback to do more than stand and +gaze stupidly at the strange proceedings taking place before their eyes. +George’s actions to them were a complete mystery. + +Suddenly he ceased hugging the rough looking man he had pounced upon so +eagerly and turned to his three camp-mates. + +“Grant!” he cried. “John! Fred! Come here and see who this is.” + +“Who is it?” exclaimed John blankly. “Thomas and Hugh?” + +“Here’s your father, Fred,” called George loudly. “Don’t you want to see +him?” + +Fred started violently at these words. He stared ahead of him and then +suddenly gave vent to a wild shriek. + +“Dad!” he cried and rushing pell mell down the gradual incline he threw +himself upon the smaller of the two “tramps.” + +“Why it’s Mr. Button and Mr. Sanders,” exclaimed Grant in surprise. +“Where do you suppose they came from?” + +“All dressed up to look like tramps,” added John. “What do you suppose +they are trying to do?” + +“Play a joke on us, I guess,” laughed Grant. “Lets go down and see +them.” + +They soon joined the little group gathered underneath the tree and a +happy gathering it was. + +“What do you think of these two tramps, Grant?” inquired George when +greetings had been exchanged all around. + +“What do you think of a boy who would hit his poor old father in the +back of the neck with two big pillows?” laughed Mr. Sanders. “That +strikes me as pretty rough treatment.” + +“It surely is,” agreed Grant. “We usually take him down and duck him +when he gets fresh that way.” + +“I’m afraid I can’t do that,” said Mr. Sanders sorrowfully. “He has +gotten so husky this summer I’d hate to tackle him now.” + +“We didn’t know you were coming up here,” said Fred, addressing his +father and Mr. Sanders. + +“And we didn’t want you to know it either,” laughed Mr. Button. “We +planned a surprise for you.” + +“You gave it to us all right,” said John grimly. “We were sure you were +two thugs of some kind who had come up here to rob us.” + +“How do you like our costumes?” demanded Mr. Sanders jovially. “Do we +really look like a couple of desperate characters?” + +“You certainly do, Dad,” said George. “I never saw worse.” + +“How did you dare to throw those big heavy pillows at me then?” + +“I recognized you right away, even from the back. You need a pretty good +disguise to fool your son you know.” + +“So it seems,” admitted Mr. Sanders and he rubbed the back of his neck +ruefully. + +“Didn’t you see us coming?” asked John. + +“No,” said Mr. Button. “We arrived here about twenty minutes ago and +didn’t find a soul around anywhere. So we just made ourselves at home +and decided we’d have a little luncheon.” + +“I saw one of you duck behind the tent,” said George. “Then when we +didn’t see you again it sort of worried us. Imagine how we felt when we +saw these two rough looking men sitting under the tree here.” + +“Where had you boys been?” asked Mr. Sanders. + +“We went out to shoot a blue heron,” said Grant. “Ask George about it; +he’ll be glad to tell you all the details,” and he nudged John who was +standing next to him. + +“I was the goat all right,” laughed George, and he proceeded to recount +the story of how he and Fred had tried to put up a game on Grant but had +had the tables turned on them. + +The tale caused much merriment on the part of Mr. Button and Mr. +Sanders. Curiously enough these two men happened to be the fathers of +the boys who had been the victims of their own joke. + +“It served them right, Grant,” laughed Mr. Button. “I hate these +practical jokers and am always glad to see them fooled. I notice it +usually happens that way too.” + +The party had moved up to a spot directly in front of the tent now and +all were seated in a circle on the ground. The day was waning and the +sun was beginning to sink low in the western sky. A gray haze hung over +the surrounding hills and forests. A strong wind blew off the lake. + +“You know that breeze is cold,” exclaimed Mr. Button with a slight +shiver, and he drew his coat closer about him. + +“Why shouldn’t it be?” demanded Mr. Sanders. “It’s almost fall now and +the summer is practically over.” + +“I know it is,” exclaimed George. “I hate to think of it too.” + +“You’ve had a good time up here, have you?” inquired Mr. Button. + +“Wonderful,” replied all the young campers with one accord. + +“You certainly look so,” laughed Mr. Sanders. “You’re as tanned as a lot +of Indians and you look just about as wiry.” + +“It’s been great fun,” said John. “We’ve been out in the air all summer +and on the water so much we ought to be healthy.” + +“We’ll have to come back here again next summer,” exclaimed George. +“What do you say to that, Dad?” + +“Personally I should think you’d rather go to some other place next +time. I like different experiences myself.” + +“So do I,” agreed Grant. “There are so many wonderful places and things +in the world that it’s worth trying to visit and see all of them you +can, I think.” + +“That suits me,” exclaimed George. “What do you say, Dad? We’ll go to +some other place next time.” + +“As far as I’m concerned you may,” said Mr. Sanders. “Go ahead.” + + + THE END + + * * * * * + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES + +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN + +The Outdoor Chums + + On the Lake + In the Forest + On the Gulf + After Big Game + On A House Boat + In the Big Woods + At Cabin Point + +For lovers of the great outdoors (and what boy is not?) this “Outdoor +Chums” series will be a rare treat. After you have read the first book +and followed the fortunes of the “Chums,” you will realize the pleasure +the other seven volumes have in store for you. + +These rollicking lads know field, forest, mountain, sea and stream—and +the books contain much valuable information on woodcraft and the living +of an outdoor life. + +The Goldsmith Publishing Co. + +CLEVELAND, O. + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 35957-0.txt or 35957-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/9/5/35957/ + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/35957-0.zip b/35957-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d5ef94 --- /dev/null +++ b/35957-0.zip diff --git a/35957-8.txt b/35957-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0d6ecb --- /dev/null +++ b/35957-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6660 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp + +Author: Ross Kay + +Release Date: April 25, 2011 [EBook #35957] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + +[Image] + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + +BY ROSS KAY + +Author of "The Search for the Spy," "The Air Scout," "With Joffre +on the Battle Line," "Dodging the North Sea Mines," "The Go Ahead +Boys on Smugglers' Island," "The Go Ahead Boys and the Treasure +Cave," etc., etc. + + + + + PREFACE + +Every one who loves outdoor life knows the charm and the pleasures of +camping. To look back on the days passed in a tent by the shore of some +forest lake or stream is a source of never-ending enjoyment to those of +us who have had that experience. In this book I have tried to describe +the adventures of four boys who spent a vacation camping in the +Adirondacks, and who indulged in water sports of various kinds while +there. Many of the episodes are true or at least founded on the +experiences of former boys who enjoyed them. If the boys who may read +this tale will derive some of the pleasure in hearing about them that +the real boys did in participating in them I shall feel repaid. + +--Ross Kay + + + + +CONTENTS + + CHAPTER I--MAKING CAMP + CHAPTER II--A MISHAP + CHAPTER III--JOHN HEARS SOMETHING + CHAPTER IV--SETTING SAIL + CHAPTER V--THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS + CHAPTER VI--ADRIFT + CHAPTER VII--AN UNEXPECTED MEETING + CHAPTER VIII--A PREDICAMENT + CHAPTER IX--DANGER + CHAPTER X--WAIT AND SEE + CHAPTER XI--WHAT GEORGE DID + CHAPTER XII--A CHALLENGE + CHAPTER XIII--THE OUTCAST + CHAPTER XIV--TALKING IT OVER + CHAPTER XV--PREPARATION + CHAPTER XVI--GRANT MISSES + CHAPTER XVII--GEORGE'S STRATEGY + CHAPTER XVIII--A CLOSE MATCH + CHAPTER XIX--A CLOSE SHAVE + CHAPTER XX--GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS + CHAPTER XXI--HOW THE PLAN WORKED + CHAPTER XXII--A STRANGE PERFORMANCE + CHAPTER XXIII--AN UNEXPECTED HONOR + CHAPTER XXIV--IN QUEST OF GAME + CHAPTER XXV--THE WORM TURNS + CHAPTER XXVI--AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER + CHAPTER XXVII--CONCLUSION + + + + + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + + +CHAPTER I--MAKING CAMP + + +"Here is the place to put the tent, String." + +"I think this spot is better." + +"Not at all. It's higher over here and consequently we won't be flooded +by every rain that comes along and besides that, the flies won't be so +apt to bother us." + +"All right, just as you say." + +The boy addressed as "String" had been named John Clemens by his +parents. He was six feet three inches tall, however, and extremely thin +so that the nickname applied to him seemed quite appropriate. At any +rate his friends thought so and that was the name by which he usually +was called. + +Talking with him and arguing about the location of the tent was Fred +Button, a boy as short as John was tall. He was so small that the +nicknames of Stub, Pewee and Pygmy had all been applied to him, the last +one sometimes shortened to Pyg much to Fred's disgust. He had found out +long ago, however, that there was no use in showing his irritation at +this for it only served to increase the frequency with which the name +was applied to him. + +These two boys, together with two of their friends, were pitching camp +preparatory to spending a summer on one of the Adirondack lakes. Grant +Jones was one of these boys and the other was George Washington Sanders. +Grant was the most serious-minded of the four and everything he did he +did with all his heart. As a result he was a leader not only on the +athletic field but in his studies as well. The other boys usually came +to him for advice and looked up to him in many ways. The fact that he +was of a serious nature, however, did not mean that he was not +oftentimes just as full of fun as anybody. + +George Washington Sanders having been named after the father of his +country, had acquired the name of Pop. He was often in mischief and took +especial delight in teasing his three friends. It was almost out of the +question to be angry at him, however, for he never lost his temper for +more than a moment himself and was always bubbling over with spirits and +fun. He was the life of any crowd he was in. + +While the argument between John and Fred was in progress Grant and +George approached. + +"What are you two arguing about?" demanded Grant. + +"We're trying to decide where to put the tent," replied Fred. "What have +you two been doing all this time?" + +"Putting the canoes away," said Grant. "Where are you going to locate +the tent, anyway?" + +"Well," said Fred, "John wants it over in that hollow, but I say it +ought to be up on this little plateau." + +"I think you're right, Fred," said George. "We won't get so many flies +up there." + +"Just what I said," exclaimed Fred triumphantly. "What do you think +about it, Grant?" + +"I think your place is better," said Grant. "Besides everything else +we'll have a good view of the lake from there." + +"All right," said John, pretending to be very sad. "You all seem to be +against me so I guess I'll have to give in." + +"You see, String," exclaimed George with a sly twinkle in his eye, "we +all know so very much more about this business than you do that you +might just as well take our advice in everything." + +"You talk too much, Pop," said John shortly, which remark drew a laugh +of glee from George who had tried to irritate his friend and was +delighted at having succeeded. + +"I say we all stop talking and get to work on the tent," said Grant. "We +can do all the fooling we want later." + +"Great idea, Grant," exclaimed George, who was in excellent spirits at +the prospect of all the good times ahead of them. "You're a wonder." + +"You were right when you said Pop talked too much, String," laughed +Grant. "We'll put him to work now, though." + +In an incredibly short time the white tent was erected on the little +bluff overlooking the lake. It was spacious with plenty of room for the +four young campers and all their equipment, which was speedily stored +away inside. + +"How about a few fish for dinner?" exclaimed George, when the tent was +in place. "Personally I think they'd taste pretty good." + +"Go ahead and catch some, then," urged John. "I'll help you eat them." + +"Oh, I didn't worry about your not helping me out in that way," laughed +George. "That's the least of my troubles. What bothers me is who is to +clean the fish." + +"The man who catches them always cleans them," said Fred. + +"Oh, no, he doesn't," laughed George. "Not in this case, anyway." + +"How about the cook doing it?" inquired John. + +"As I am to do the cooking all summer I can't say I approve of that +plan," laughed Grant. "That seems a little bit too much." + +"Well, he hasn't caught any fish yet, anyway," said Fred. "Let him do +that first and we'll argue about them afterwards." + +"Where are you going to fish, Pop?" asked Grant. + +"I thought I'd try it off those rocks down on the point there," said +George. "That looks like a likely spot." + +"While you're fishing I'll cut some balsam boughs and make four beds in +the tent," said John. + +"And I'll get a place ready to make a fire in," said Grant. "That'll +take a little time." + +"How about you, Fred?" demanded George. "It looks as if you were about +the only loafer in the whole crowd." + +"I'll help String cut balsam." + +"Very good," said George haughtily. "You may go now." + +"I'll put you in the lake if you're not more careful," said John +threateningly, but he laughed in spite of himself. + +A few moments later every boy was busied with his appointed task. +George, armed with his fishing rod, made off for the end of the little +wooded island. John and Fred disappeared in search of balsam boughs, +while Grant remained behind to make a fireplace. This was an interesting +piece of work, the secret of which he had learned from a guide some few +summers before during a sojourn in the woods. + +First he selected eight or ten rocks as nearly the size and shape of +cobblestones as he could find. These he placed on the ground in two +parallel rows some twelve inches apart. Both little stone walls thus +formed he endeavored to make as nearly the same height as possible and +before long his fireplace was complete. Between the two rows of stones +the fire was to be made; pots and pans could thus be set over the fire +and rest upon the rocks which formed the walls of the fireplace; in this +way they could be kept from actual contact with the coals and at the +same time most of the heat from the fire was concentrated upon them. + +This is a very efficient method of making a camp-fire as Grant had +learned from previous experience. Of course, in the case of a temporary +camp or unless there are plenty of rocks close at hand, it is hardly +worth while and it is not the kind of a fire that campers like to sit +around in the evening. As a cooking fire, however, it is one of the +best. + +Grant had hardly finished this task when John and Fred returned to the +camp. They were loaded down with balsam boughs and staggered under the +weight of the loads they were carrying. With a sigh of relief each boy +dropped his bundle on the ground and sat down to regain his breath. + +"You fellows look as if you'd been working hard," laughed Grant. + +"We have," panted John. "Just carry a load like that for a while and see +what you think of it." + +"I'll take your word for it," said Grant. "Have you got all you want?" + +"All the balsam, you mean?" + +"Yes." + +"Well, I should hope so," exclaimed Fred. "At any rate I refuse to go +back after any more. My fingers are all gummy and sticky, too." + +"The boughs smell great, though," said Grant admiringly. + +"Don't they?" exclaimed John. "They'll be wonderful to sleep on." + +"You see, Grant," remarked Fred, "String here is so tall we had to cut +an extra supply to make a bed long enough for him. I'm really quite +worried, too, for fear his feet may stick out beyond the flap of the +tent, anyway." + +"I'm not as bad as that I hope," laughed John. "It would be awful, +wouldn't it, if I couldn't keep out of the rain?" + +"You might stand on your head," suggested Fred. "Your feet sticking +straight up in the air could take the place of umbrellas. They're big +enough so that they'd shelter you, all right." + +"Look here," exclaimed John, "that sounds like one of Pop's remarks. I +hope you're not getting as bad as he is." + +"By the way," said Fred, "where is he? He ought to be back pretty soon." + +"He's still fishing," said Grant. "I guess he hasn't had very good +luck." + +"He ought to have taken one of the canoes, anyway," said John. "He can't +catch anything just standing on the shore." + +"Oh, I don't know," said Grant. "He might get some small perch or bass." + +"What I want is a good big trout," exclaimed Fred. "I'll consider this +summer a failure unless I get one." + +"Maybe we'll each get one," said Grant. "They say there are lots of them +around here." + +"Not so much in the lake as in the streams running into it, I guess," +remarked John. "It seems to me that the big trout are always in small +pools." + +"Well, I'll try them all," said Fred eagerly. "I don't want just to +catch trout; any one can do that. What I want is a big one." + +"One you can take home stuffed, I suppose," suggested Grant. + +"That's it exactly. I mean to have one, too." + +"Well, we might fix up the beds first," said John. "It won't take long. +All we want is four piles and we can spread the blankets out on them +when we are ready to turn in. Just think of it; a nice soft +sweet-smelling bed to sleep on and we won't feel any of the rocks and +roots and bumps that may be under us." + +"It sounds fine all right," laughed Grant. "We'd better get to work +soon, too, for it'll be dark before long." + +"I should think Pop would be back by now, too," said John. "You don't +suppose anything could have happened to him, do you?" + +"Why, I don't see how--" began Fred, when he suddenly ceased speaking and +listened intently. + +"What's the matter?" demanded Grant. + +"Ssh," whispered Fred. "I thought I heard some one call." + + + + + + +CHAPTER II--A MISHAP + + + +All three boys bent their heads and listened intently. The only sound +that came to them, however, was the soft sighing of the breeze through +the treetops and the occasional call of some bird preparing to settle +down for the night. The sun was low in the west, just sinking below the +fringe of the forest which skirted the little lake. All seemed quiet and +serene. + +"What did you think you heard, Fred?" demanded Grant after the lapse of +several moments. + +"I thought I heard a call. In fact I was almost--" + +Once more he stopped suddenly and listened. "What was that?" he +exclaimed. + +"I heard something, too," whispered John excitedly. "Listen!" + +"I don't hear a thing," muttered Grant. "I must be deaf." + +"There it is again," cried Fred suddenly. + +"I heard it, too," exclaimed John. "It came from that end of the +island." + +"That's the direction Pop took," said Grant in alarm. "Perhaps there has +something happened to him." + +"We'll soon find out anyway," cried Fred. "Come along!" and he began to +run at top speed in the direction George had gone a short time before. + +Close behind him followed Grant and John. Every boy was worried and +beset with a thousand and one evil thoughts as to what might have +befallen their light-hearted and well-loved comrade. Almost everything +conceivable in the way of misfortune suggested itself to their anxious +minds. + +"Keep close to the shore, Fred," called Grant. "He was fishing, you +know." + +Fred did keep as close to the shore as possible, but it was no easy task +a great many times. The island was rough and rocky and heavily wooded, +the trees growing down to the water's edge in many places. Crashing +through the underbrush and making a great deal of noise the three boys +raced along. Whether or not the cry which John and Fred had heard was +repeated they could not say, for the tumult of their own mad course +drowned out all other noises. + +After what seemed a long time they came to the end of the island. Here +the forest gave way to the rocks which ran out a considerable distance, +forming a small peninsula. At the tip end were several big boulders +which had become separated from the main island after long years of +action by the water and in order to reach them it was necessary to jump +across several feet from one to the other. Towards these boulders the +three boys made their way. + +"I don't see anybody," panted John. + +"Nor I," agreed Fred. "I don't hear anything, either." + +"Listen," warned Grant, holding up his hand. + +"And look, too," murmured Fred under his breath. + +Suddenly John started forward excitedly. "Look," he cried, "there he +is." + +"Where? Where?" demanded Grant. + +"Down there in the water. Don't you see him?" + +"Help! Help!" came the call, and John, Fred and Grant sped to the +assistance of their comrade. His head showed above the water and he +splashed a great deal in an effort to remain afloat. That he was very +rapidly becoming weaker, however, was plain to be seen. + +"Give me a hand, somebody," cried George. + +"All right, Pop. We'll be right with you," Grant reassured him. + +George was struggling in the water close to one of the big boulders. Its +sides were so steep and high, however, that he was unable to climb out. +From his actions it also appeared as if he were keeping himself afloat +merely with his hands. + +"Get a stick, Grant," cried Fred. "You can hold it out for him to take +hold of." + +"Where is one? Find one, quick!" exclaimed Grant excitedly. + +"Here you are," said John. "This one will do. Take this." + +He held out a stick some six or eight feet long which had been lying on +the shore at his feet. Grant seized it eagerly and hastened to George's +assistance. + +"Hurry up, Grant!" called George. "I can't last much longer!" + +"Here you are!" cried Grant, leaning out from the shore as far as he +dared and holding the stick toward his friend. "Grab hold of this." + +After one or two unsuccessful attempts George succeeded in catching hold +of the stick. Grant drew him up as close to the rock as possible and +then Fred and John bending down over the edge seized him by his arms and +quickly pulled him out of the water and to safety. + +"How did you happen to--" began Fred, when John suddenly interrupted him. + +"What have you got around your legs?" he demanded in astonishment. + +"My fishing line," said George, smiling weakly. "It tripped me up." + +"Well, I should think it might," exclaimed John. "How in the world did +you ever get it wound around you like that?" + +"I had my rod in one hand," said George, "and I tried to jump from that +rock over there to this one. I landed here all right, but when I jumped +the line got twisted around my ankles and I lost my balance. It finally +tripped me up and I fell into the water. When I got there the line kept +getting more and more tangled up the harder I kicked, until finally I +could hardly move my feet at all. I had to keep afloat just by using my +hands." + +"That was certainly a bright trick," exclaimed Fred. "Why, you might +have drowned." + +"I thought I was going to be," said George grimly. "I was getting pretty +tired." + +"Where's your rod?" inquired Fred. + +"At the other end of the line. A steel rod doesn't float, you know." + +"That's true," laughed Fred. "Haul in that line, John." + +Of course all the line unrolled from the reel before the rod was rescued +but it was finally brought safely to shore. A large section of the line, +however, had to be sacrificed as it was found almost impossible to +untangle the mass that had wound itself around George's legs and ankles, +and a knife was necessary to free him. + +"Where are your fish, Pop?" inquired Fred. "I suppose you dropped them +all when you fell in," and he nudged Grant as he spoke. + +"I had only one," replied George ruefully. "He did fall in and I lost +him." + +"What kind was it?" + +"A black bass." + +"A big one, I suppose." + +"No, he wasn't either. He was pretty small. I didn't have any luck at +all." + +"You ought to have taken one of the canoes," said Grant. "You can't +expect to catch anything from the shore." + +"He'd probably upset the canoe," said Fred. "I don't think we should +allow him to do anything alone after this." + +"Huh!" was George's only reply to this sally. + +"Feel like walking, Pop?" asked Grant. "If you do we'd better go back to +camp and get some dry clothes for you." + +"I was just thinking that," said George. "I'm commencing to feel chilly. +These nights in the Adirondacks are pretty cool, I find." + +"They certainly are," John agreed. "Let's go back." + +"I could eat something, too," remarked Fred. "The cool air also seems to +give you an appetite." + +"Come on," cried Grant, and a moment later the four young campers were +retracing their steps to the tent. + +Arriving there, George made haste to change his wet garments for some +dry ones. Fred and John collected wood for the fire while Grant made +ready to cook the dinner. A short time later the odor of sizzling bacon +filled the air, lending an even keener edge to four appetites that were +sharp already. The first meal in camp was voted a great success by every +member of the party, and all agreed that Grant was a wonderful cook. + +"Isn't this great!" exclaimed George, when the dishes had all been +washed. + +The four young friends were seated around a camp-fire crowned by a great +birch log that blazed so brightly it lighted up everything for a +considerable distance round about them. + +"It surely is," agreed John. "I don't see how you could beat this." + +"Just think of it," said Fred. "We're here for all summer, too." + +"Oh, the summer will go fast enough. Don't worry about that," Grant +warned him. "It'll be over before we know it." + +At last the fire burned low until it was nothing but a mass of glowing +embers. John arose to his feet and yawned. "I'm going in and try those +new beds we made this afternoon," he said. "I'm tired." + +"I'm sleepy, too," exclaimed Grant. "Let's all turn in." + +The few remaining coals from the fire were carefully scattered so that +they could do no damage during the night. These four friends had had +enough experience in the woods to know what a forest fire means. They +also knew that all good woodsmen were careful about such things and +always had regard for the rights of others. + +Every one was sleepy and it was not long before four tired and happy +boys were stretched upon four sweet-smelling balsam beds, sound asleep. +How long he slept John could not tell when he suddenly awoke with the +feeling that he had heard a cry for help. + + + + + + +CHAPTER III--JOHN HEARS SOMETHING + + + +John sat upright and peered about him in the darkness, every nerve +alert. He heard nothing, however. Perhaps he had been mistaken after +all. George's mishap that afternoon had been on his mind and probably he +had dreamed of it. + +Somehow the feeling that he had heard a cry still seemed very distinct, +however, and it gave him a most unpleasant sensation. He listened +intently. He could hear the deep and steady breathing of his three +comrades lying asleep around him, and he heaved a sigh of relief. At +least nothing had happened to them. + +Not a sound came to break the silence of the night and John began to +feel sure that he had been deceived. He prepared himself to lie down +again and go to sleep. He must have had a nightmare, he thought. Who +could be in trouble on a calm, still night like this? At any rate it was +none of their party and undoubtedly was no one at all. It had all been a +dream, though a most unpleasant one, and John shivered unconsciously at +the recollection. His nerves had all been set on edge, but gradually he +quieted down and once more settled himself to rest. + +Barely had he closed his eyes, however, when the cry was repeated. There +was no mistaking it this time, and John instantly was wide awake once +more, the cold shivers dancing up and down his spine. Never had he heard +such a voice. Some one evidently was in terrible distress mingled with +fear with which hopelessness seemed combined. The voice trailed off in a +wail of despair that brought John's heart up into his mouth. + +It seemed to him that the cry must have awakened his companions as well, +but no, he could still hear their regular breathing even above the +violent pounding of his heart. What should he do? There was no question +about it this time; it had not been a dream. Some one was in trouble and +needed help, and evidently needed it badly. Consequently it was needed +quickly, too, and John was determined to do his best. + +He leaned over in the darkness and felt for the boy who was lying next +to him. + +"Grant," he whispered. "Grant, wake up." + +Grant merely groaned and stirred uneasily. + +"Wake up, Grant," he repeated, shaking his friend by his shoulder. "Wake +up, I tell you." + +"What do you want?" demanded Grant sleepily. "What's the matter?" + +"Matter enough," exclaimed John. "There's somebody in trouble out here +on the lake and he's calling for help." + +"Is that so?" cried Grant, now wide awake. "Are you sure?" + +"I heard him call twice." + +"Was it a man?" + +"I think so. I never heard such a voice. It was awful." + +"We'd better go see what we can do then," exclaimed Grant. "Which +direction did the voice come from?" + +"I couldn't say; it seemed to come from all over. Oh, Grant, it was +awful." + +"Sure you didn't dream it?" + +"Positive. I know I heard it." + +"Come along then," said Grant. "We'll go outside and get one of the +canoes and see what we can find. Maybe we'll hear it again." + +"I don't know; it sounded to me as though it was the death cry of some +one. I never heard such a thing in all my life." + +"Get your sweater and some trousers," directed Grant. "Don't wake Fred +and Pop yet. We'll see what we can do first." + +John and Grant rose carefully to their feet and laid aside their +blankets. Feeling their way, they soon located their clothes and a +moment later, partly dressed, they stepped forth from the tent. The +night was clear, and the moon, in its last quarter, lighted up the trees +and the water in a ghostly manner. + +"Are the paddles--" began Grant, when the cry was repeated. This time it +seemed only a short distance from their camp and out on the lake. +Perhaps some one had upset a boat and was struggling in the water. + +"There it is," cried John, clutching Grant excitedly by the arm. "Did +you hear that? Isn't that terrible?" + +"Is that what you heard before?" demanded Grant. + +"Yes, the same voice. Hurry! We mustn't waste a second." + +"Wait a minute, String," and in Grant's voice was the suggestion of a +laugh. + +"What's the matter?" + +"Well, if that's what you heard the other times, I wouldn't be in a +great hurry if I were you." + +"Why not? Are you crazy, Grant? Can't you tell by that voice that some +one is in trouble? Aren't you going to help him?" + +"Did you ask me if I was crazy?" + +"I did, and I think you are, too. Please hurry, Grant." + +"Oh, no, I'm not crazy," said Grant, and there was no mistaking the fact +that he was laughing now. "I'm not crazy, but you're loony." + +"What do you mean?" + +"That's a loon you hear out there." + +"A loon," exclaimed John in amazement. "What are you talking about?" + +"I'm talking about a bird. That noise you hear is made by a bird named a +loon. Haven't you ever heard one before?" + +"Never. I don't see how a bird could sound so like a human being." + +"That's what it is just the same," said Grant, and he was almost doubled +up with laughter now. "I think I'd better wake up Pop and Fred and tell +them about your friend that's calling for help." + +"Are you positive it's a loon?" + +"Absolutely." + +"Then don't ever tell a soul," begged John eagerly. "I'd never hear the +last of it as long as I lived. It would be awful if George ever knew." + +"You're not the first one who's ever been fooled," laughed Grant. "You +probably won't be the last, either." + +"Please don't tell on me, though, Grant. Promise me you won't." + +"We'll see," said Grant evasively. "I can't make any promises though." + +"How should I know that it was a loon?" demanded John. "I never heard +one before and you yourself say that other people have been fooled the +same way." + +"That's true. Still it's almost too good a joke on you to keep." + +"What is a loon, anyway?" + +"It's a bird; it belongs to the duck family, I guess. They live around +on lakes and ponds like this and spend their nights waking people up and +scaring them." + +"I should say they did," exclaimed John with a shudder. "I never heard +such a lonesome-sounding, terrible wail in all my life." + +"There it is again," said Grant laughingly, as once more the cry of the +loon came to their ears across the dark waters of the little lake. + +"Let's go back to sleep," exclaimed John earnestly. "That sound makes my +blood run cold, even though I know it is made by a bird." + +"Don't you think we ought to tell Fred and Pop about it?" inquired Grant +mischievously. "It seems to me they ought to be warned." + +"You can tell them about it if you don't mention my name in connection +with it," said John. "If you tell on me though, I swear I'll get even +with you if it takes me a year." + +"All right," laughed Grant, "I won't say anything about it. At least, +not yet," he added under his breath. + +"What did you say?" demanded John, not having caught the last sentence. + +"I said, 'let's go to bed.'" + +"That suits me," exclaimed John, and a few moments later they had once +more crawled quietly over their sleeping comrades and again rolled in +their blankets, were sound asleep. + +The sun had not been up very long before the camp was astir. Sleepy-eyed +the boys emerged from the tent, blinking in the light of the new day. A +moment later, however, four white bodies were splashing and swimming +around in the cool waters of the lake, and all the cobwebs of sleep were +soon brushed away. + +"That's what makes you feel fine," exclaimed George when they had all +come out and were dressing preparatory to eating breakfast. "A swim like +that makes me feel as if I could lick my weight in wildcats." + +"You must have slept pretty well last night, Pop," remarked Grant. + +"I did. Never slept harder in my life." + +"Well, I didn't," exclaimed Fred. "It seemed to me I was dreaming all +night long. Maybe my bed wasn't fixed just right." + +"What did you dream about, Fred?" asked Grant curiously. + +"Oh, all sorts of things. I thought I heard people calling for help. +That seemed to be my principal dream for some reason." + +"That's funny," said Grant. "You didn't dream anything like that, did +you, String?" + +"No, I didn't," said John shortly. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IV--SETTING SAIL + + + +"What shall we do to-day?" exclaimed George when breakfast was over. + +"We might go fishing," suggested Fred. "I want a big trout some time +this summer, you know." + +"Oh, it's too sunny for trout to-day," Grant objected. + +"All right then," said Fred. "What do you want to do?" + +"How about taking a sail?" + +"Is there enough wind?" + +"Of course there is, and unless I'm very much mistaken its going to get +stronger all the time." + +"Suppose we take our lunch along," said John. "We can be gone as long as +we want then and can go ashore and eat wherever we happen to be." + +"Good idea, String," cried George heartily. "I do believe you're getting +smarter every day." + +"What do you think of my scheme?" demanded John, completely ignoring his +friend's sarcasm. + +"It's all right," said Grant. "I'm in favor of doing it." + +"We can take a couple of rods with us, can't we?" said Fred. "We might +get a few fish for dinner." + +"That's right," agreed Grant. "We can anchor and fish from the boat if +we want." + +"Let's get started," exclaimed John. + +A small catboat was a part of the equipment the boys had in order to +help them enjoy their summer more thoroughly. It now lay at anchor in a +little cove a short distance from the place where the tent was located. +It was a natural harbor and afforded excellent shelter for the boats +from the squalls and not infrequent storms that were apt to spring up +during this season of the year. The lake was between two and three miles +in length so that a comparatively heavy sea could be stirred up by the +winds. + +The island on which the four boys had pitched their tent was the only +one in the lake and it was very nearly in the center. It was owned by a +friend of John's father who had obtained permission for his son and his +three friends to camp on it that summer. The sailboat and two canoes +were included with the island, so that there was no question but that +these four boys were very fortunate indeed to be able to enjoy it all. + +For months they had been looking forward to this summer and they had +planned innumerable excursions and expeditions as part of their camping +experiences. Now that the time was really at hand they meant to enjoy +every minute of it to the utmost. + +"Fred and I will get the boat ready," exclaimed John. "You two can +collect the rods and fix up the lunch." + +"Put me near the food and I'm satisfied," said George. "Come on, Grant." + +John and Fred made their way down to the spot where the canoes were +hauled up on the shore. The catboat lay moored at anchor some fifty or +sixty feet out from the bank so that it was necessary to paddle to reach +her. One of the canoes was selected and the two boys soon pushed off +from shore. + +"That's a pretty good looking boat I should say," remarked Fred as he +glanced approvingly at the little white catboat. "I wonder if she's +fast." + +"She looks so," said John. + +"You can't always tell by the looks though, you know." + +"That's true too. We ought to be able to tell pretty soon though." + +"I wonder if they have water sports or anything like that up here in the +summer," said Fred. "If they do it would be fun to enter." + +"It certainly would," agreed John. "I don't believe there are enough +people on this lake though. As far as I can see we are about the only +people here." + +"I thought you said there was another camp down at the north end of the +lake." + +"That's right, there is. I don't know who's in it though." + +"We might sail down and find out." + +"Let's do that; it won't take long." + +They had now arrived alongside the catboat, which was named the Balsam, +and after having made fast the canoe, they quickly climbed on board. + +"Any water in her?" exclaimed John. + +"I don't know. I was just going to look." + +"Lift up the flooring there and you can tell. It must have rained since +she's been out here and we'll probably have to use the pump." + +"We certainly shall," said Fred, who had raised up the flooring +according to John's suggestion. "Where is the pump anyway?" + +"Up there under the deck. You can pump while I get the cover off the +sail here and get things in shape a little, or would you rather have me +pump?" + +"No, I'll do it. If I get tired, I'll let you know." + +It did not take long to bail out the boat, however, and before many +moments had elapsed the mainsail was hoisted and the Balsam was ready to +weigh her anchor and start. The sail flapped idly in the breeze which +seemed to be dying down instead of freshening as Grant had predicted. +The boom swung back and forth, the pulleys rattling violently as the +sheet dragged them first to one side and then the other. + +John and Fred sat on the bottom of the boat and waited for their +companions to appear with the luncheon. The two boys were dressed in +bathing jerseys and white duck trousers. At least they had formerly been +white, but constant contact with boats and rocks had colored them +considerably. The feet of the young campers were bare, they having +removed the moccasins which they usually wore. The day was warm and in +fact the sun was quite hot. The previous night had been so cool it did +not seem possible that it could be followed by a warm day, but such is +often the case in the Adirondacks. + +"Where do you suppose they are?" exclaimed Fred at length. "It seems to +me they ought to have been ready by this time." + +"Here they come now," said John. "Look at Pop; that basket is almost as +heavy as he is." + +"He's got lots of food in it, I guess. I'm glad too for I'm hungry +already." + +"Why, you finished breakfast only about an hour ago." + +"I can't help that. I'm always hungry in this place." + +"Ahoy there!" shouted George from the shore. "Come in and get us." + +"The other canoe doesn't leak you know," replied John, neither he nor +Fred making any move to do as George had asked. + +"We know that," called George. "What's the use of taking them both out +there though?" + +"Why not?" demanded John. "The exercise will do you good." + +"Are you coming after us?" asked Grant. + +"Not that we know," laughed Fred. + +"I guess we paddle ourselves then, Pop," said Grant to his companion. + +"All right," agreed George. "I'll get square with them though." + +"How are you going to do it?" + +"You let me paddle and I'll show you." + +They spoke in a low tone of voice so that their friends on board the +Balsam could not hear them and in silence they embarked upon the second +canoe. Grant sat in the bow while George wielded the paddle in the +stern. They approached the catboat rapidly where John and Fred sat +waiting for them with broad grins upon their faces. + +"You must think we run a ferry," exclaimed Fred as the canoe drew near. + +"Not at all," said Grant. "We just thought that perhaps you'd be glad to +do a good turn for us." + +"We're tired," grinned John. "Think how hard we had to work to get the +sail up and to pump out--" + +"Oh, look at that water bug," cried George suddenly, striking at some +object in the water with his paddle. Whether he hit or even saw any bug +or not will always remain a mystery. One thing is sure, however, and +that is, that a great sheet of water shot up from under the blade of the +paddle and completely drenched both John and Fred. + +"What are you trying to do?" demanded Fred angrily. + +"He did that on purpose," exclaimed John. "Soak him, Fred." + +"Look out," cried George, "you'll get the lunch all wet." + +"You meant to wet us," Fred insisted. + +"Why, Fred," said George innocently; "I just tried to hit that water +bug. How should I know that you would be splashed?" + +"Huh," snorted John. "Just look at me." + +"That's too bad," said George with a perfectly straight face. "If you +had come in after us we'd have all been in the same canoe and you +probably wouldn't have gotten wet." + +"You admit you did it on purpose then?" + +"I don't at all. I just thought perhaps it was some sort of punishment +inflicted on you for being so lazy." + +"Didn't he do it on purpose, Grant?" demanded Fred. + +"I don't know," replied Grant, striving desperately to keep from +smiling. "I know he didn't tell me he was going to do it." + +"Well, it was just like him anyway," said John. "He knew we couldn't +splash him back because he had the lunch in the canoe with him." + +"Take it, will you?" asked Grant, holding the basket up to John. "Here +are the fishing rods too." + +George and Grant followed soon after and the second canoe was made fast +to one of the thwarts of the other. + +"I'll put the lunch up here," said Fred, at the same time depositing the +basket up forward under the protection of the deck. + +"Slide the rods in there too, will you?" exclaimed George. "Look out for +the reels that they don't get caught under anything." + +"Everything ready?" asked John. + +"Let 'er go," cried George enthusiastically. "I'm ready." + +"Come and help me pull up the anchor then," said John. + +"I'm your man," cried George. "You know I'm always looking for work." + +"I've noticed that," laughed Grant. "You're always looking for work so +that you'll know what places to keep away from." + +Four light hearted young campers were now on board the Balsam. In spite +of their words a few moments before not one of them had lost his temper. +They knew each other too well and were far too sensible not to be able +to take a joke. Outsiders, listening to their conversation, might have +thought them angry at times, but such was never the case. + +"Get your back in it there," shouted Grant gayly to John and George who +were busily engaged in hauling in the anchor chain. George stood close +to the bow with John directly behind him as hand-over-hand they pulled +in the wet, cold chain. + +"This deck is getting slippery," exclaimed George. "All this water that +has splashed up here from the chain has made it so I can scarcely keep +my feet." + +"I should say so," agreed John earnestly and as he spoke one foot slid +out from beneath him. He lurched heavily against his companion, and +George thrown completely off his balance, waved his arms violently about +his head in an effort to save himself, but all to no avail. He fell +backward and striking the water with a great splash disappeared from +sight. + + + + + + +CHAPTER V--THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS + + + +"Man overboard!" shouted Grant, running forward as he called. He did not +know whether to laugh or to be worried. One thing was certain though and +that was that George like his three companions was perfectly at home in +the water. All four were expert swimmers so that barring accidents they +had little to fear from falling overboard. + +"He's all right," cried John. "Help me hold this anchor, somebody." + +Grant grasped the chain and one more heave was sufficient to bring the +anchor up on the deck of the Balsam. Before this could be done, however, +George came to the surface choking and spluttering. + +"I'll fix you for that, String," he gasped, shaking his fist at John. + +"For what?" demanded John. + +"You know all right." + +"Why, Pop," said John reprovingly. + +"Keep her up into the wind, Fred," shouted Grant who was seated at the +tiller. "Let your sheet run. Here, Pop, give me your hand." + +"I'd better go down to the stern and get aboard there," said George. "I +think it will be a little easier." + +"All right; go ahead." + +George floated alongside the Balsam until he came to the stern and a +moment later had swung himself on board the boat. He was drenched to the +skin but laughing in spite of himself. + +"Do you want to change your clothes, Pop?" asked Grant. + +"No, it's hot to-day. They'll dry out in no time." + +"Ease her off then, Fred," Grant directed. "We may as well get started." + +Fred put the helm over, the sail filled and the Balsam began to slip +through the water at a good rate. The four boys sat around the tiny +cockpit, Fred at the tiller and Grant tending sheet. In a few moments +they had emerged from the little harbor and had entered upon the open +waters of the lake. + +"Well, String," observed George who was busily engaged in wringing water +from the bottoms of his duck trousers, "you certainly did it well." + +"Did what well?" demanded John. + +"Don't pretend you don't know." + +"What are you talking about?" + +"You meant to shove me overboard and I know it so there's no use in you +trying to bluff. You were very skillful about it and I guess you got +square with me all right. We'll call it even and quit." + +"I did do it pretty well, didn't I?" grinned John. + +"Yes, you did, but I think the way I soaked you and Fred was just as +good." + +"You didn't see a water bug then?" + +"No, and you didn't slip either." + +"Yes, I did; on purpose though. Let's call it off now." + +"I'm agreeable," laughed George, "even if you did get the better of me." + +"How about me?" demanded Fred. "Pop wet me just as much as he did String +and I don't see that I am even with him yet." + +"You 'tend to your sailing," laughed George. "That'll have to satisfy +you." + +"I can steer you on a rock you know," warned Fred. + +"Don't do it though," begged Grant. "I'm an innocent party and I'd +suffer just as much as the others." + +"Where shall we sail?" asked George. + +"Fred and I thought we might go down to the other end of the lake," said +John. "There's a camp down there, I believe, and we might see who is in +it." + +"Go ahead," exclaimed George. "Meanwhile I think I'll try to get my +clothes dry," and suiting the action to the word he divested himself of +everything he had on, which was not much. The few articles of clothing +thus taken off he spread flat on the deck of the boat so that they might +get the full benefit of the sun's rays. + +The day was bright and not a cloud appeared in the sky. A gentle breeze +blew across the lake barely ruffling the water. Consequently the Balsam +sailed on an even keel and scant attention was necessary to keep her +pointing in the right direction. + +"How about trolling?" exclaimed Fred all at once. + +"What do you mean by that?" asked George. + +"You mean to say you don't know what trolling is?" + +"If I had I wouldn't have asked you, would I?" laughed George. + +"Well, I'll tell you," said Fred. "Trolling is fishing in a certain way. +When you troll you sit in a moving boat and trail your line out behind +you. As a rule you use a spoon or live bait so that it gives the +appearance of swimming. People usually fish for pickerel that way." + +"Let's try it," cried George enthusiastically. "Who's got a spoon?" + +"I have," said Grant. "Hold this sheet and I'll put it on my line." + +"Any pickerel in this lake, I wonder," remarked John. + +"There ought to be lots of them," said Fred. + +"Bass and perch too, I guess," John added. + +"Perch are fine eating," exclaimed George. "I've eaten them cooked in a +frying pan with lots of butter and bacon," and he sighed blissfully at +the recollection. + +"Did you ever eat brook trout fried in bacon and rolled in corn meal?" +asked Fred. + +"Not yet," laughed George. "I hope to before long, though." + +"Well when you do you'll know you've tasted the finest thing in the +world there is to eat," said Fred with great conviction. + +"Is it better than musk melon?" + +"A thousand times." + +"Whew!" whistled George. "Is it better than turkey?" + +"A million times." + +"Say," exclaimed George. "Is it better than ice cream?" + +"It's better than anything, I tell you," Fred insisted. + +"I'll take your word for it," laughed George. "I'd like to try it myself +pretty soon though." + +"Here's your spoon," said Grant, holding out the rod to George. + +"You're going to fish, yourself," said George firmly. + +"Not at all. I got it for you." + +"Why should I try it any more than you?" + +"Because I want you to. Go ahead." + +"If you insist, I suppose I'll have to," laughed George and dropping the +spoon overboard he let the line run out. + +"How much line do I need?" he asked. + +"Oh, about fifty or sixty feet I should think," said Grant. + +"Well, I don't know much about it," remarked John breaking in on the +conversation; "but it doesn't seem to me that we are making enough +headway to keep that metal spoon from sinking." + +"I'm afraid not myself," agreed Grant. "The wind seems to be dying down +all the time and we'll be becalmed if we're not careful." + +"I'll try it a few minutes anyway," said George. "I might get +something." + +"All you'll get is sunburned, I guess," laughed Fred. "You'd better put +your clothes on or you'll be blistered to-morrow." + +"That's right, Pop," said Grant. "I'd get dressed if I were you." + +"Perhaps you're right," George agreed. "Here, String, you take the rod." + +Scarcely had John taken the rod in his hands when he felt a violent tug +at the line. The reel sang shrilly and then was still. + +"You've hooked one," cried Fred excitedly. "Reel in as fast as you can." + +"Bring the boat around, Fred," shouted Grant. "Come up into the wind." + +Fred did as he was directed, while John strove desperately to reel in +his line. At first there was no resistance and then all at once the rod +bent double. + +"Say!" exclaimed George, "it must be a whale!" + +"It's bottom," said John disgustedly. "The old spoon sank just as I said +it would and I've caught a log." + +"Don't break the line whatever you do," warned Grant. "Swish your rod +back and forth." + +"It's caught fast," said John, following Grant's directions. + +"Keep it up, you'll get it loose yet." + +Suddenly the hook was released and as John reeled in there was no +resistance to be felt at all. A moment later the spoon appeared and +pierced by the hook was a small chip of water-soaked wood showing that +it was some sunken log that had deceived the boys at first. + +"That trolling business is great all right, isn't it?" laughed George, +now completely dressed once more and ready for anything. + +"I'll take you out in one of the canoes some day and prove to you that +it's all right," said Fred warmly. "You--" + +He suddenly stopped speaking and looked up. "I thought I felt a drop of +rain," he remarked in surprise. + +"You did," exclaimed Grant. "Just look there. Here comes a squall and +we're in for it all right. This is no joke." + + + + + + +CHAPTER VI--ADRIFT + + + +"Quick, Fred!" cried Grant. "Bring her up into the wind. You help me let +down this sail, Pop." + +An angry gust of wind scudding across the lake, caught the catboat and +made her heel far over. + +"Let go your sheet, Fred!" shouted Grant. "Quick or we'll upset." + +He and George sprang forward and feverishly tried to loosen the ropes +that held the sail aloft. The wind was increasing in strength now, +however, and the boat was becoming more difficult to manage every +moment. The sky was inky black and sharp flashes of lightning cut the +clouds from end to end. The thunder roared and echoed and rechoed over +the wooded mountains round about. It was now raining hard. + +"Keep that sheet clear of everything," cried Grant, who usually assumed +command in every crisis. "Let it run free whatever you do." + +"You hurry with that sail," retorted Fred. + +"They're doing their best I guess," said John. + +"If they don't get it down soon we'll go over," cried Fried. "I can +hardly hold her now." + +"Can I help you, Grant?" asked John, striving to make his way forward. +The boom, however, swung violently back and forth threatening to knock +him overboard every second. It was almost impossible to keep out of its +way in the tiny catboat. + +"Go sit down," cried Grant. "We'll get it down in a second." + +The rain now fell in torrents. The wind whistled and shrieked all about +them and it seemed as if at any moment the sail must be torn to shreds +and the mast ripped from its socket. Lucky it was that Fred was an +experienced sailor and endowed with nerve as well. The squall drove the +boat backwards but Fred managed to keep her nose pointed straight into +the teeth of the gale. Otherwise the Balsam could not have lived two +minutes. + +"Why don't they hurry with that sail?" exclaimed Fred peevishly. + +"They are hurrying," said John. "The ropes are wet and they're nervous." + +"Ah, there it comes," cried Fred suddenly. "Now we'll stand a chance." + +With a rush the sail came down, its folds almost completely covering the +four boys in the boat. The strain on the tiller was greatly relieved +however and the Balsam maintained a more even keel. + +"Whew!" exclaimed George, groping his way astern. "What a storm this +is!" + +"I never saw it rain so hard," said John. "Just look; you can't see more +than about ten feet." + +"We'll go aground if we're not careful." + +"How can we stop it?" demanded Fred. "We're at the mercy of the storm." + +"Throw the anchor overboard," suggested George. + +"A good idea, Pop," exclaimed Grant. "Come along and I'll help you." + +"You'll get struck by lightning," warned Fred, half seriously. The +flashes were blinding and almost continuous. The thunder ripped and +roared all around and so near at hand was the center of the storm that +sometimes the smell as of something burning could be detected in the +air. + +"That anchor will never hold us," said John who sat in the stern, +huddled close to Fred. Grant and George were feeling their way forward. + +"Don't throw the lunch basket over by mistake," called Fred. + +"The lunch won't be worth much now, I'm afraid," said John ruefully. + +"Oh, I don't know; it's under the deck." + +"I know, but the boat has a lot of water in her now and if it touches +that basket it will soon soak through." + +"How deep is this lake?" + +"I've no idea. I don't even know where we are." + +"I'm afraid we're going to run ashore all of a sudden somewhere." + +"The anchor ought to catch before that happens," said John. "It's +trailing now you know." + +"I know it is, but suppose we hit a lone rock." + +"We're running that chance. I don't know what we can do about it." + +"Are you trying to steer, Fred?" asked Grant who together with George +had now crawled back to the stern of the boat. + +"I'm trying to keep her headed with the waves; that's all I can do." + +"I know it. I think the squall's letting up some though." + +"Perhaps it is," agreed John. "It does seem a little bit lighter." + +"It isn't raining so hard either," observed Grant. "These squalls stop +just as quickly as they start sometimes." + +"The lake must be deep here," said Fred. "How long is that anchor +chain?" + +"About fifteen feet I guess," said John. + +"That ought to keep us from going ashore anyway," exclaimed Fred. "Who +said this storm was over?" + +"It must be coming back," said Grant. "It certainly let up for awhile +though." + +"But it's making up for it now all right," observed George. "I'm so glad +I took all that trouble to get my clothes dry." + +The four boys looked at one another and could not help laughing. Every +one of them was drenched through to the skin and no one had a dry stitch +of clothes on. The rain pelted them mercilessly and the water ran off +their faces in streams. All huddled together, they made a forlorn +looking party. + +"This is what all campers get I suppose," remarked George. + +"They certainly do," agreed Grant. "Some of them get it worse than this +too." + +"Do you suppose our tent is still there?" inquired John. + +"Let's hope so," exclaimed George fervently. "We'd be in a nice fix if +we found it blown away when we got back." + +"If we do get back," said Fred dolefully. + +"What's the matter with you, Fred?" demanded Grant. "You don't think +we're all going to die or be killed, do you?" + +"I don't know. This is a bad storm and we can't see where we are." + +"But the anch--" + +There was a sudden jolt. Every boy was almost thrown from his seat as +the boat came to a quick stop. Then the bow swung slowly around and a +moment later the Balsam was pointed straight into the wind, her anchor +chain taut. + +"We're aground," cried George. + +"Not at all," corrected Grant. "The anchor chain has caught, that's +all." + +"Where are we?" + +"I can't see." + +"We must be somewhere near shore," said John. + +"We might be on a shoal." + +"No, there's land," cried John. "I can see it." + +"Maybe it's on our island," said George. "Wouldn't that be queer." + +"Well, I wish the old storm would be over so we can see just where we +are located," exclaimed Fred. "I've had enough of this." + +"You'd better be thankful the anchor holds and not worry about anything +else," observed Grant. "So far we can't complain." + +"It's stopping," said George suddenly. "The sun will be out in a +minute." + +"If it comes out it had better bring an umbrella, that's all I can say," +observed John. + +"A pretty poor joke, String," said George. "Try another one; it might be +better." + +"The sun is coming out," cried Grant. "The storm is almost over, I +guess." + +"Thank goodness!" exclaimed Fred. "Now we can see where we are." + +Little by little the rain abated, the wind died down and the thunder +melted away in the distance. Before many moments had passed the sun +broke forth from behind a cloud and blue sky appeared. + +"Do they have many of these squalls around here, I wonder?" said George. +"I don't think very highly of them myself." + +"Nor I," agreed Grant. "Just look where it carried us." + +"There's our island," exclaimed Fred. "I thought it was in the other +direction though." + +"So it was," said John. "We traveled the whole length of the lake, I +guess." + +"Right past our camp?" + +"It looks so." + +"Suppose we had hit one of those big rocks where I fell in," said +George. "Our anchor wouldn't have done us very much good there." + +"I should say not," agreed Grant. "Isn't that a camp over there?" + +His three companions gazed in the direction he indicated and sure enough +a big white tent very similar to their own appeared on shore, a short +distance from the spot where the Balsam lay at anchor. + +"I don't see anybody around," remarked Fred. "Do you suppose they're all +away?" + +"The best way to find out is to go and see for ourselves," exclaimed +Grant. + +"That's right," observed George. "Let's get the anchor up and sail in." + +"There's a dock there too, where we can land," said Fred. "Perhaps the +people who are camping here have been caught out in the storm." + +"We'll soon know anyway," said Grant, making his way forward to assist +George in getting up the anchor. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VII--AN UNEXPECTED MEETING + + + +A few moments later the Balsam was making its way towards the tiny wharf +in the little harbor. Two canoes lay bottom up on the shore but no sign +of any living being appeared. + +"Perhaps they've gone to the ball game," remarked George. + +"Ball game!" exclaimed Fred. "What are you talking about?" + +"I was just fooling and trying to get a rise out of somebody. Of course +I knew I could make somebody bite with you on board." + +"Huh," snorted Fred. "I thought you'd gone crazy, talking about ball +games up here in the woods." + +"You two are always wrangling," exclaimed Grant. "Stop it." + +"I can't resist trying to get rises out of Fred," said George. "He's so +easy." + +"Leave him alone," said Grant. "I wonder where the people are who own +this tent. There doesn't seem to be a soul around." + +"Let's go up to the tent and peek in," suggested John. + +"Do you think we ought to do that?" Fred protested. + +"Why not? We're not going to steal anything are we?" + +"I'm not," laughed Fred. "Of course I don't know about you." + +"Come ahead," urged George. "We'll just take one look." + +They made their way up from the dock towards the tent. Still no sign of +life appeared and when John had stolen one hasty glance inside the tent +he reported that no one was in there either. + +"Let's go back," exclaimed Fred. "There's no use in staying around here +any longer." + +"Come on," said Grant. "It's time to eat too." + +"We might eat our luncheon over on that point," suggested George, +indicating a spot about a mile or so distant from the place where they +were. + +"Eating suits me all right," exclaimed John. "I must say I'm hungry." + +"And I'd like to get my clothes dry," added Fred. "I'm sort of cold." + +Once more they set sail on the Balsam without having caught sight of a +single occupant of the camp they had just visited. The sun was now +shining brightly and the sky was as blue as ever. No trace of the recent +storm remained to mar the beautiful day. It was not long before all four +boys were in excellent spirits again and their appetites became keener +with each passing moment. + +Landing on the point where they had decided to eat their luncheon, they +quickly set about making preparations for the meal. A fire was soon +started and with every one assisting, the meal was quickly under way. + +"How soon will it be ready, Grant?" asked George of the cook. + +"Oh, in half an hour." + +"Come on then, String," exclaimed George. "Let's go back into the woods +here and see if we can't find some berries or something." + +"Don't get lost," warned Grant. "Fred and I are too hungry to spend a +lot of time looking for you, you know." + +"Don't worry about us," laughed John. "We'll be gone only a few +minutes." + +Leaving Grant and Fred busy with the cooking the two boys plunged into +the woods and disappeared from view. The trees were still dripping from +the heavy rain, but the fragrant odor of spruce and balsam was stronger +than ever. The thick carpet of pine needles under their feet was wet, so +that their advance was noiseless. + +Suddenly, up from its hiding place almost under their feet, a grouse +arose with a roar and whirr of wings. Booming off through the trees it +quickly disappeared from view leaving the forest as silent as before. +The spell of it was on the two young campers as they stood still and +gazed all about them. The green leafy aisles of the woods stretched in +all directions around them most beautiful and inviting to the eye. A +catbird whined from a nearby tree, but otherwise all was still. + +"Did you ever see anything more beautiful?" asked John in a low voice. + +"I never did," replied George solemnly. The beauty and the grandeur of +it all made them feel as though they really should not speak above a +whisper. + +"I don't see any berries though," continued John. + +"Nor I," said George. "There's an open space ahead of us though; perhaps +we'll find some there." + +"Some blueberries wouldn't taste bad just now." + +In silence they continued their walk, even taking care to step softly so +as not to disturb the solemnity of the woods. Ahead of them appeared a +break in the trees and an open space showed. Here was the place to find +blueberries if any grew in that neighborhood at all. A moment later the +two boys came to the edge of the clearing which was perhaps a hundred +yards square. + +As they were about to step out from the shelter of the trees George +suddenly clutched his companion by the arm. + +"Look there," he whispered. + +Following George's directions John saw something that caused his face to +grow white and his heart to jump. In the center of the clearing and +busily engaged in eating the blueberries which grew in abundance all +about was a large black bear. + +He seemed entirely oblivious to his surroundings and as the wind blew +from him towards the two boys he was not aware of their presence. With +one great paw he stripped the berries from the low-lying bushes and with +his long, eager tongue he licked them up greedily. That his ancient +enemy, man, might be lurking nearby apparently did not occur to him. The +two boys stood and watched him, fascinated, not knowing whether to run +or whether to hold their ground. The bear was scarcely a hundred feet +distant from the spot where they were standing. + +"What shall we do?" whispered George. + +"Wait." + +"Suppose he comes after us." + +"If he does we'll run." + +All at once the bear looked up. Perhaps some eddying current of wind had +betrayed the presence of the two boys to his sensitive nostrils. It is a +well known fact that the eyesight of most wild animals is comparatively +poor; their sense of smell, however, is correspondingly sharp and it is +on this that they must rely to a large extent for safety. + +All around him old bruin gazed while the hearts of the two young campers +almost stood still. There they were standing within plain sight, right +at the edge of the forest and they could not possibly escape being seen. +Anxiety as to what the bear would do made the next few moments very +nervous ones. + +Suddenly he saw them. George and John held their breath and waited. He +looked at them steadily for a moment, one paw held poised in the air. +Then he turned and with that clumsy lumbering gait common to his kind +ambled off across the clearing. Arriving at the opposite side he turned +his head and glanced back at the two boys, still standing in the shadow +of the trees. Then he continued his way once more and quickly +disappeared from sight. + +"Well," exclaimed George. "What do you think about that?" + +"Suppose he'd chased us." + +"He'd never have caught me," said George grimly. "With a bear after me I +know I could at least equal the world's record for the half-mile." + +"Even so, you'd have finished second," laughed John. + +"What do you mean?" + +"Why, I'd have beaten you out, of course." + +"Maybe so," said George laughingly. "At any rate I guess it would have +been a pretty close finish. Imagine what Grant and Fred would have +thought if they'd seen us coming, tearing out of the woods with a big +black bear after us." + +"I'd have gone right on across the lake too," said John. + +"Do you want some berries?" + +"It's pretty late now I'm afraid. I think perhaps we'd better go back." + +"Perhaps so. Let's go anyway; we can come back here after luncheon." + +"That bear might have the same idea." + +"That's true too," admitted George. "We can bring Fred and Grant along +with us if they want to come." + +The two boys made their way back through the forest towards the lake. +Knowing that there were such things as bears in the neighborhood they +kept a sharp watch all about them. If they had only realized it, no bear +was half as anxious to meet them as they were to meet a bear. Wild +animals seldom if ever seek trouble of their own accord. + +A few moments later George and John emerged from the woods and caught +sight of the fire and their two companions. + +"Hey, you two!" called Fred. "Where have you been?" + +"Are we late?" asked John. + +"I should say you were. Grant and I were just about to eat up all the +food and not save any for you at all." + +"Thank goodness you didn't," exclaimed George, fervently. + +"Did you find any berries?" demanded Grant. + +"Lots of them. A good many of them are still on the bushes." + +"Didn't you bring any back?" + +"Not a single one." + +"What do you think of that, Fred?" demanded Grant. "These fellows go +back in the woods and stuff themselves with a lot of berries and don't +even bring one back to the two who are working hard to prepare food for +them." + +"We didn't eat any ourselves." + +"You didn't?" exclaimed Grant. "What was the matter with them; weren't +they good?" + +"I guess they were," said John. "We didn't try any though." + +"What's the matter?" inquired Fred. "What are you two trying to say +anyway? You found a lot of berries but you didn't bring any back and you +didn't eat any yourself. What's the reason you didn't?" + +"Somebody was there ahead of us," said George. + +"The owner you mean?" asked Grant. "Wouldn't he give you any?" + +"It wasn't the owner," said George. "It was somebody else." + +"I wish you'd stop talking in riddles," exclaimed Grant impatiently. +"Why don't you tell us what happened!" + +"There was a bear there," said John. "He liked berries too." + +"A bear!" cried Grant and Fred in one breath. "What do you mean?" + +"There was a big black bear eating the blueberries," said George, "so we +just decided we didn't care very much for berries ourselves." + +"Tell us about it," demanded Grant eagerly. + +"I can't talk unless I have something to eat first," replied George +firmly. + +"Nor I," agreed John. + +"Come and eat then," laughed Fred. "We too have got something to tell +you two when you've finished." + + + + + + +CHAPTER VIII--A PREDICAMENT + + + +While all four boys were doing full justice to the meal which Grant had +prepared, George and John related the story of their meeting with the +bear. + +"And now," exclaimed John when he had finished, "you tell us what you +have to say. Fred said there was something." + +"We had an idea while you were gone, that's all," said Grant. + +"Tell us what it was." + +"Go ahead, Fred." + +"No, you tell them," urged Fred. + +"Well," said Grant, "it was only this. Fred and I were talking things +over and we thought it might be good fun if we took the two canoes and +went off on a little trip for a couple of days. What do you think about +it?" + +"I think it would be great," exclaimed John heartily. "How about you, +Pop?" + +"It suits me first rate," said George eagerly. "Why can't we start +to-night?" + +"That's a little soon I should think," laughed Grant. "We can go +to-morrow though if you say so." + +"We can get some good trout fishing up these streams, you know," said +Fred. "I want to get that big trout." + +"If there's any big trout caught I expect to be the one to do it," said +George very pompously. + +"Huh," snorted Fred disgustedly, "you couldn't catch cold." + +"You just wait and see," muttered George under his breath. + +"Do you know anything about trout fishing?" insisted Fred. + +"I never did any in my life." + +"And you expect to catch a big trout?" said Fred derisively. "Why, Pop, +you're sort of out of your head, aren't you?" + +"Wait and see," repeated George confidently. + +"Do you know how hard it is to cast a trout fly when you're standing in +the middle of a clump of bushes and the branches of trees are in your +way all around you?" continued Fred. "Don't you know that it takes +almost years of practice to do it so that you are accurate and don't +catch your hook on everything in sight?" + +"Wait and see," insisted George. "I have a new system." + +"Ha! ha! ha!" laughed Fred. "You're a joke." + +"Let's go back to camp and stop these two arguing," exclaimed Grant. +"They're at it all day long." + +"We like each other all the more because we do it, don't we, Pop?" +demanded Fred laughingly. + +"Yes," admitted George, "except that you're awfully conceited at times." + +"Come on," urged Grant. "They'll be at it again if we're not careful." + +Before many moments had passed the Balsam was once more sailing over the +clear waters of the lake and in a short time the four boys arrived back +at camp. The remainder of the day was spent in planning for the trip +they were about to take and in discussing just where they should go. At +length an agreement satisfactory to every one was reached, the +arrangements were all completed and there was nothing left to do but +wait for the morrow in order to start. + +The sun had been up but a short time before the camp was astir. Grant +set about preparing breakfast while his three companions packed supplies +into the two canoes. Food sufficient for three days was loaded on board; +blankets were taken along, and trout rods with numerous flies of course +were included. + +"Breakfast's ready," announced Grant as soon as the work of loading was +complete. + +"So am I," exclaimed George heartily. "I'm always ready to eat up here." + +"Not only 'up here' either," muttered Fred. + +"What did you say?" demanded George, wheeling around so as to face the +speaker. + +"Nothing." + +"As usual," laughed George. "Where's the food?" + +"Right here," exclaimed Grant. "Let's see you get rid of it." + +No second invitation was needed and it was not long before every crumb +and morsel that Grant had prepared had disappeared. + +"Let's get started," exclaimed George. "All the food is gone so there is +no point in staying around here any longer." + +"You're right, Pop," laughed John. "I say we go too." + +A few moments later the two canoes emerged from the little harbor and +started out across the lake, headed northward. Grant and Fred occupied +one of them while George and John paddled the other. + +"I'm glad you're not in my canoe, Fred," called George gayly. "Small as +you are, I'd soon get tired of paddling you around all day." + +"Is that so?" snorted Fred. "Well, you're not half as glad as I am for I +know that I'd be the one that would have to do all the work and you're +too big and fat to make the work pleasant." + +"They're at it again, String," laughed Grant. "What shall we do with +them?" + +"Leave them home," suggested John. + +"Oh, we couldn't do that. They'd be like the Kilkenny cats." + +"Who were they?" demanded Fred. + +"Didn't you ever hear about them?" + +"No. Tell me who they were." + +"I guess you mean _what_ they were." + +"All right, what they were, then." + +"Why," said Grant, "they were a couple of cats that loved to fight. One +day somebody tied their tails together and hung them over a clothes +line. Of course they began to fight right away and they fought so +furiously that when it was all over there wasn't a thing left of either +of them." + +"I suppose you expect me to believe that story," snorted Fred. + +"I don't care whether you believe it or not," laughed Grant. "You wanted +to hear it, so I told it to you." + +"Grant says we're like a couple of cats, Pop," called Fred. + +"Tell him he'd better be careful," replied George. "Just because we call +each other names doesn't mean that we allow other people to do it." + +"Excuse me for interrupting," said John laughingly, "but does any one +know where we are going?" + +"I do," replied Grant. "We're going up that river you see straight +ahead." + +"Do you know where that leads to?" inquired Fred. + +"Yes. We can paddle up it for about two miles and then we have to make a +carry over to another river." + +"How long is the carry?" demanded George. + +"Oh, about half a mile, I guess." + +"Whew!" exclaimed George; "that's a long distance to carry canoes and +all the stuff we have in them." + +"Getting ready to shirk already, are you?" demanded Fred teasingly. + +"Shirk nothing," said George. "Wait and see if I don't do my share." + +"Yes and 'wait and see' if you don't catch the biggest trout too," +taunted Fred. "Why, Pop, you'll be lucky if you catch your breath." + +"Wait and see," muttered George darkly. + +"Yes, 'wait and see'," echoed Fred. "If you don't stop saying that we'll +have to call you, 'Wait and See.'" + +Just at this moment, however, they came to the mouth of the river and +the argument was abandoned, for the time being at least. + +"This is great!" exclaimed John. "I always did like paddling in a narrow +space rather than on a lake or some place like that." + +"I do too," agreed Grant. "You feel closer to things somehow." + +"You're no closer to the water, you know," remarked George with a wink +at Fred. + +"Don't pay any attention to him, Grant," said John. "I think we ought to +throw both of them overboard anyway." + +As they progressed, the stream became narrower and the current swifter. +Evidently they would be unable to paddle very much farther upstream and +the young campers began to keep a sharp lookout for the carry. + +"There it is," exclaimed Fred, suddenly pointing to a small sandy beach +a short distance ahead of them. + +They soon landed and emptying the canoes, they started off through the +woods to transfer them to the next river. It was necessary to leave the +baggage behind to await their coming back for it. Two boys to each canoe +they set out, the light boats turned upside down and bearing them aloft +on their shoulders. In spite of many groanings from George they reached +their destination before much time had elapsed, and then resting the +canoes on the bank of the stream they returned for the baggage. This was +more quickly and more easily transferred so that a short time later they +were once more making their way by paddling. + +"Say, Grant," exclaimed John when they had covered a few hundred yards, +"how do you know all about these rivers?" + +"Didn't you see that map I have?" + +"No. I kept wondering how you knew so much about the country around +here. I didn't know you had a map." + +"Of course I have. I wouldn't know anything any other way for I've never +been up here in my life before." + +"String thought you guessed at it," laughed George. + +"No, I didn't at all," protested John. "I just didn't think about it." + +"Does your map say that there are rapids ahead?" asked Fred. + +"I didn't notice. Why?" + +"Because I think there are. It seems to me that the current is getting +swifter all the time and I think you'll find that when we go around that +bend up yonder you'll find rapids ahead of us." + +"Shall we run them?" demanded George excitedly. + +"We'll probably be wrecked if we try it," said Grant. + +"We can see how bad they are, anyway," John suggested. + +"Yes," agreed Fred. "We'll 'wait and see.'" + +"'Go ahead' is my motto when rapids are concerned," said George. + +Rounding the curve in the river they discovered that scarcely a hundred +yards farther was another bend in the stream. Meanwhile the current was +rapidly becoming swifter and stronger. + +"We can't see yet," exclaimed George. "We'll have to go ahead." + +All four boys were excited now, and there was an eager light in every +one's eyes as they were carried along by the swiftly-flowing stream. + +Suddenly they came around the second bend, and spread out before their +eyes appeared a long stretch of white water. It foamed and danced, here +and there broken by a huge rock, black and ugly looking. + +"We can't run those," cried Grant. "We'll drown sure." + +"Go ashore then," shouted Fred, and he drove his paddle desperately into +the water. John and George also fought valiantly to divert their course +and avoid the rapids. Too late, however, for the current was stronger +than they, and with ever increasing speed they were drawn swiftly +towards the foaming waters below. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IX--DANGER + + + +"Work, Fred! Work!" urged Grant desperately. + +"I'm doing my best," panted Fred, and from the way he drove his paddle +into the water it was evident that what he said was true. + +They made a little progress towards the shore. They moved still more +swiftly downstream, however, for the current was powerful here. For +every foot that they progressed towards shore they were drawn a yard +closer to the rapids. Unless they reached the bank very soon they were +certain to be forced to run the rapids whether they desired to or not. + +George and John in the other canoe were in the same predicament. The two +frail little craft seemed no stronger than shells and it was almost +unbelievable that they could traverse that foaming stretch of water in +safety. No one spoke now; every boy was too busily employed in the +desperate struggle he was waging against the river. + +The current eddied and swirled. From below came the roar of the water as +it raced along in its mad course. Beside them was the shore and safety; +below was danger, accident, and possible death. + +When the two canoes had rounded the bend in the river the one which John +and George occupied had been a trifle closer to shore. Consequently it +had just that much advantage over the other. The occupants of the two +canoes were too engrossed in their own struggles to take much notice of +their companions, but out of the corner of his eye Grant saw that the +other canoe had nearly reached its goal. + +A moment later he heard a call from the shore sounding above the roar of +the rapids below. It was George's voice. + +"Keep it up, Grant!" he shouted. "You'll make it yet." + +"Stick to it, Fred!" cried Grant, encouraged by the knowledge that their +companions had reached safety. "We can make it." + +"I'm sticking to it all right," replied Fred grimly. + +Closer and closer to shore they came. Nearer and nearer sounded the +noise of the rapids. Could they win out? Certainly they could if nerve +and determination were to count for anything. + +Ahead of them Grant could see George frantically urging them on. He was +so excited that he had run down into the water, where he stood +knee-deep, begging and imploring his comrades to come to him. Inch by +inch they seemed to move towards shore. Their muscles were aching from +the strain now and it was agony for both boys to keep up the fight, but +neither one gave even the slightest thought to quitting. + +It almost seemed as if they were going to win out now. George was +scarcely ten feet distant; arms outstretched he eagerly awaited a chance +to seize the bow of the canoe and draw it and its occupants to safety. +His chance did not come, however. + +Just out of his eager reach a whirlpool caught the canoe. The bow swung +suddenly around and Fred's paddle was almost wrested from his grasp. In +vain he and Grant fought. Twice the frail little boat spun around and +then seized by a sudden eddy in the current was borne swiftly and +relentlessly towards the rapids below. + +"We're goners!" cried Fred. + +"Keep your nerve!" shouted Grant fiercely. "You do the steering from the +bow. You can see the rocks from there." + +At racehorse speed the canoe shot forward. With every second its +momentum increased until it seemed fairly to fly over the water. +White-lipped and with jaws set the two boys sat and awaited their fate. +From the shore George and John watched with feverish anxiety. + +Now they were almost in the rapids. An eddy caught the canoe and it +nearly upset. It escaped, however, and again sped on. Around it the +water foamed white and hissed and snarled as it raced along. Black rocks +stood out along the treacherous pathway. It seemed as if the canoe must +surely come to grief on any one of a dozen of them. + +Seated on the bottom of the canoe and with his eyes riveted on the +rapids below, Fred wielded his paddle like a madman. First one side and +then the other he dipped it, changing so swiftly sometimes as almost to +bewilder the onlookers. + +They were half way through the dangerous passage now. Was it possible +that they could come through those angry waters untouched? It was out of +the question; they had merely been lucky so far. At least that was the +way George and John felt about it. Any moment they expected to see their +comrades upset and disappear from sight beneath those terrible foaming +waves. + +Still the canoe raced on. One moment it had the speed of a locomotive +and the next, caught by some eddying whirlpool, its momentum almost +ceased, only to shoot forward suddenly again at a bewildering pace an +instant later. + +"I believe they'll get through," exclaimed George excitedly. He and John +were standing on a large boulder which afforded them an excellent view +of the rapids. + +"Wait," cautioned John quietly. + +"'Wait and see,'" smiled George. + +"Please don't joke," muttered John. "I don't feel like it." + +The onrushing canoe was almost through the rapids now. Could it be that +two inexperienced boys were to come through that mad mill race alive? If +they could last a moment more they were safe, but ahead of them was the +most dangerous part of the rapids. Two huge rocks stood out in midstream +scarcely six feet apart. Between them the water rushed and roared like a +cataract. Below this spot the rapids ended and the current gradually +slowed down to its normal swiftness. + +Fred and Grant saw all this in the twinkling of an eye and they knew +that the test was now to come. Both boys braced themselves; so swiftly +did they move now that it almost seemed as if they were standing still +and that it was the two great rocks that were charging down upon them. +Closer and closer they came. With bated breath George and John watched +from the shore, realizing their companions' peril. + +Fred, in the bow of the canoe, gripped his paddle with all his strength. +One moment more and their lot would be decided. The rocks looked like +mountains as they bore down upon them. Now they were just ahead, ugly +and bristling in their might; now they were alongside; now they were +past. Fred and Grant had run the rapids in safety. They could scarcely +realize it. The danger was over and they were alive. + +"Yea, Fred!" shouted Grant. "We're through!" + +"Thank goodness," sighed Fred, and he sank back limply against one of +the thwarts of the canoe. + +"You're a wonder," cried Grant. + +"It's a wonder we're alive, you mean." + +"That's true, too. But the way you steered!" + +"It wasn't due to any skill on my part; we were just lucky." + +"Anyway," exclaimed Grant happily, "we ran the rapids and I wouldn't +give up that experience for a million dollars now." + +"Neither would I, _now_," agreed Fred. "It would take a good deal more +than that to make me go through with it again, though." + +They had now reached a point two or three hundred yards below the rapids +and decided to go ashore and wait for John and George. It was with a +very comfortable feeling that the two boys set their feet on solid +ground once more. + +"Just look back there and see what we came through," exclaimed Grant. + +"I don't see how we did it," said Fred. "I wonder if we really did." + +"You think you were dreaming, I suppose," laughed Grant. "I can swear we +did do it, though, and I guess Pop and String will, too." + +"It doesn't seem possible." + +"Here we are." + +"I know it. Just look at those rapids, though. They look like Niagara +Falls from here." + +"There ought to be good fishing along here," remarked Grant. + +"I should think so. Perhaps Pop can catch his big trout here. The big +fellows usually stay in the deep pools below rapids like this." + +"Here they come now," exclaimed Grant, as John and George appeared, +carrying their canoe along the shore. + +"We'll have some fun with them about it, anyway," said Fred, in a low +voice. "Watch me get a rise out of them." + +"Hey, you two," shouted George, as he spied his friends. "What do you +mean by scaring String and me almost out of our wits?" + +"Do you suppose we did it on purpose?" laughed Grant. + +"Why, that was nothing at all for us," said Fred, airily. + +"Oh, is that so?" demanded George, mimicking Fred's tone. "Well, if that +was nothing, I'd hate to see what something was." + +"That was no effort at all for us," continued Fred, carelessly. + +"Put this canoe down quickly, String," exclaimed George. "Let me get at +that fellow. He ought to be drowned." + +With a sigh of relief John and George deposited their burden on the +ground and George immediately advanced threateningly towards Fred. + +"Let him alone, Pop," laughed Grant. "He's the best steersman this side +of the Canadian border." + +"He was pretty good, wasn't he?" exclaimed John. "How did you two +fellows like shooting the rapids?" + +"It was wonderful," said Fred heartily. "I never had such a wonderful +sensation in all my life." + +"I'll bet you were both almost scared to death," said George, shortly. + +"We were," laughed Fred, "but now that it's all over we're glad we did +it." + +"Fred thinks there ought to be some good fishing in these pools along +here," said Grant. "What do you say to trying them?" + +"That suits me," said George readily. "I'm hungry, too." + +"We'll have lunch right here then," exclaimed Grant, "and afterwards +we'll try our hands at the trout fishing." + +"And Pop will catch the biggest trout that ever swam in the waters of +the Adirondacks," added Fred, nudging John as he spoke. + +"Huh," exclaimed George disgustedly. "I wish you'd stop that talk. I +suppose you'll be worse than ever now that you've run these rapids." + +"I didn't say anything about myself," smiled Fred. "I was talking about +the big trout you were going to catch." + +"I suppose you think you're the only one here who can shoot rapids or +catch fish or do anything at all." + +"I told you I was talking about you, not about myself," insisted Fred. +"I said you'd probably catch the biggest trout in the Adirondacks." + +"You think you're pretty funny," snorted George. "You just wait and +see." + + + + + + +CHAPTER X--WAIT AND SEE + + + +When luncheon was over, the four young campers busied themselves with +preparations for the afternoon's fishing. They sat around on the bank +joining the different sections of their trout rods and selecting the +flies which they considered would be most tempting to the speckled fish +they sought to catch. + +"We'll fish from the shore, I suppose," remarked John. + +"Of course," exclaimed Fred. "The current is too strong here to try it +from a canoe." + +"I'm not much good at this game, I'm afraid," laughed John. "I don't +expect to catch a thing." + +"I don't know anything about it, either," said George, "but I certainly +expect to catch something just the same." + +"Maybe you'll have beginner's luck," said Grant. + +"I don't care what it is," laughed George. "I want some fish, though." + +"Well, I'm ready," said Fred, rising to his feet. "Where are we going?" + +"Suppose two of us go upstream and two down," suggested Grant. + +"All right," exclaimed Fred. "You and I will go up and the others the +other way. We'll meet back here in time for supper." + +"At the latest," added John. + +Fred stepped to the shore and deftly cast his fly out on the waters. +Gradually lengthening the amount of line he had out, he kept casting and +then drawing the rod back over his head so that the line stretched far +behind him. Then, with a short snap of his wrist he would send the fly +floating out over the pool again. As it came to rest lightly on the +surface of the water he jerked it along for a few feet in imitation of +the struggles of a live insect and then he would repeat the performance +all over again. + +His three friends watched him with absorbing interest. + +"That's a simple performance," exclaimed George at length. "Why don't +you leave the fly in the water for a second or two and give the fish +half a chance to swallow it? It would have to be an awfully quick trout +to take your hook." + +"They're quick enough; don't worry about that," smiled Fred. + +"But why don't you let the hook sink a little below the surface?" + +"Did you ever see a moth or a bug of some sort light on the water?" Fred +inquired. + +"Yes. Lots of times." + +"Did you ever see one sink?" + +"No, I don't believe I ever did," George admitted slowly. + +"That's just it," exclaimed Fred triumphantly. "If a real insect doesn't +do it, why should an artificial one? The idea is to make the fly appear +just as much alive as possible." + +"I haven't seen you catch anything yet," remarked George. + +Hardly had he spoken, however, when Fred had a strike. His fly had +settled like thistledown on the surface of the pool after an almost +perfect cast, when there was a rush and the line was drawn swiftly +across the pool. The light rod bent almost double and Fred's three +companions jumped to their feet excitedly. + +"Yea, Fred!" shouted John. "You've hooked a big one. Stick to him." + +"Big one nothing," said Fred shortly. "It's a little fellow." + +"Bring him in anyway," cried George. "The little ones are just as good +to eat as any kind." + +The trout may have been small as Fred had predicted, but he put up a +valiant fight. After a very pretty struggle, however, he was gradually +brought in close to the bank, and with a quick, dexterous scoop of his +landing net Fred brought him to shore. + +"About ten inches," he remarked as he held the gamey little fish up for +his friends to see. "He was fierce, though; look there," and he showed +the side of the trout's mouth all torn and bloody, so hard had he +attacked the hook. + +"Let's go after some ourselves, String," exclaimed George eagerly. "I'd +rather catch them myself than to watch others." + +"Remember you're going to get a big one," reminded Fred. + +"Wait and see," said George gruffly. + +Without wasting any more time he and John made their way downstream +while Fred and Grant worked slowly in the opposite direction. Fred was +the only one of the four who was at all skillful in handling a +trout-rod, and, as a consequence, he had the best luck at the start. +Grant, however, had captured one prize, and to his delight it proved to +be larger than any Fred had caught. + +They had progressed slowly towards the rapids, stopping at every pool +for a few casts, but both boys seemed to have the idea that their luck +would be better farther up. Consequently they did not linger long in any +one spot until they reached a point just below the rapids. Here there +were several large pools, and each boy selected one and prepared to make +a cast. + +Grant had experienced considerable difficulty in making his casts, for +the branches of the nearby trees and bushes seemed far easier to locate +than the spot for which he aimed. Time and again he had found his hook +entangled by the overhanging limb of some tree and he had spent many +moments in freeing it as a result. It was particularly exasperating to +him as he saw Fred with apparent ease drop his fly on any spot he cared +to hit. + +Grant had just succeeded in disentangling his hook for at least the +tenth time when he heard his name called. + +"Come over here, Grant!" shouted Fred excitedly. "I need help." + +Grant immediately dropped his rod and started towards the spot where +Fred was standing. + +"What's the matter?" he demanded, when he was only a few yards distant +from his companion. + +"Matter?" exclaimed Fred. "Look at that rod." + +It was bent almost double, and the line whipped back and forth across +the pool as if it was possessed. + +"Zowie!" cried Grant eagerly. "You've hooked a good one this time." + +"I should say I had." + +"What do you want me to do?" + +"Take that landing net and stand ready to scoop him up in case I can +bring him close enough to shore, and don't lose him beforehand." + +"Don't lose him," begged Grant. "Look at him go." + +The light rod was almost in the shape of a horseshoe and it scarcely +seemed possible that it could stand the strain. Back and forth and +around and across the pool the trout carried the hook. Fred strove to +keep a constant pressure on the line in order to tire the fish out; he +did not try to check his frequent bold rushes, however, but rather to +prevent the line from becoming slack at any time. + +One moment he would reel the line in swiftly and there would be almost +no resistance at all; the next moment, however, just as he and Grant had +come to the conclusion that the struggle was practically ended, off +would go the line again while the reel sang loudly. + +Fred was white-lipped, he was so excited. But who wouldn't be, for there +is no more thrilling sport in the world than to fight a big trout with a +five-ounce rod? + +"I believe he's tiring," exclaimed Fred at length. + +"A little, perhaps," agreed Fred. + +"I wish he'd jump so we could see him." + +"If he does I'll lose him. That's one of the things I'm doing my best to +prevent." + +"Why so?" demanded Grant in surprise. + +"If a fish can jump clear of the water he can very often shake the hook +out of his mouth. I've seen it happen too often." + +"But I don't see how you can prevent it." + +"If I keep a steady strain on him all the time, he can't jump. It's only +when the line is slack that they have a chance to do that." + +"Look at him go!" exclaimed Grant. "Wouldn't you think he'd be getting +tired by this time?" + +"He is. His rushes aren't as long as they were before." + +"Does that mean you've got him?" + +"Not at all. You've never caught a trout until he is safely on the +shore." + +Fred had not once taken his eyes from the line while he was talking with +Grant. Carefully, coolly and with great skill he played his fish. Never +once did he relax his caution, and little by little he seemed to be +gaining the mastery. Every rush was shorter than the one before, and +after every one he reeled in a bit more of line and brought the trout a +trifle nearer to the shore and the net. + +"Get ready, Grant," said Fred in a tense voice. + +The handle of the net in his right hand, Grant knelt on the rocks on the +edge of the pool. He was just to the left of the spot where his comrade +was standing and he now watched the line just as closely as Fred. + +"Let me know when to scoop him," he said. + +"You'll know all right," replied Fred. "You'll see him in the water." + +"You tell me, though." + +"All right." + +The plucky trout was tiring rapidly now. His struggles became weaker and +weaker. Fred had played him well, but he was too seasoned a fisherman to +feel that the fight was ended. Bitter experience had taught him that +there is many a slip. + +"Get the net ready," exclaimed Fred after what seemed like a very long +time to Grant, who was not comfortable in the position he was in. + +Nearer and nearer Fred brought the trout. He still struggled weakly but +was practically exhausted now. Relentlessly Fred reeled in the line. +Once the trout broke the water with his tail not a dozen feet from shore +and Grant held his breath; he thought the fish had escaped. + +Not so, however, for a moment later he could see him in the water being +drawn remorselessly closer to the net. Grant was in a panic for fear he +should not do his part correctly. + +"Now, Grant!" cried Fred suddenly. + +The trout was in the water almost at Grant's feet. His struggles were +very weak now and thanks to the way Fred handled the rod, was nearly +motionless. Carefully Grant lowered the net into the water and moved it +along until it was almost underneath the beaten fish; then with a quick +motion he raised the net and a moment later the trout lay upon the bank +enmeshed in its folds. + +"Nice work, Grant!" exclaimed Fred. "You did that like a veteran!" + +"Isn't he a beauty!" cried Grant delightedly. + +"He surely is." + +"How much do you suppose he weighs?" + +"Oh, I don't know. I'd hate to say; two pounds and a half, I guess." + +"That's pretty big, isn't it?" inquired Grant. + +"It is for this part of the country and it's all I'd care to tackle with +a five-ounce rod." + +Fred had removed the hook from the fish's mouth now and he held him up +to view. + +"He's all right," said Grant admiringly. + +"What do you suppose Pop will say about him?" grinned Fred. "I don't +believe he can match him, do you?" + +"I don't know," said Grant doubtfully. "I'd hate to bet on it. You can't +ever be sure what he'll do." + +"Huh," laughed Fred derisively. "He couldn't catch a trout like that to +save his life." + +"Wait and see," cautioned Grant. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XI--WHAT GEORGE DID + + + +"Well, I suppose we might as well go back now," said Fred. "It'll be +dark before long." + +"All right," agreed Grant, reluctantly. "I wish I might have caught a +trout like that one of yours though." + +"I'll stay if you want to." + +"No, I guess not," said Grant. "As you say it will be dark soon and we +might as well go back." + +"Get your rod then and we'll start." + +Grant returned to the spot where he had been standing when Fred called +him, and picking up his rod soon joined his companion. Together they +made their way back to camp rehearsing the story of the big trout's +capture time and again during the journey. + +"The others don't seem to have returned yet," remarked Grant when they +had arrived at their destination. "Shall we wait for them?" + +"I don't see the use. Let's clean some of the fish and get ready for +supper." + +"You're not going to eat that big one, are you?" + +"I'm not going to touch it yet, that's sure. I want to show it to Pop +first." + +"Aren't you going to stuff it and take it home?" + +"I don't believe I can," said Fred. "I don't know how to do it myself +and there isn't any place around here where I can have it done." + +"That's too bad; still it will make good eating." + +"After I've shown it to Pop," grinned Fred. + +"Here they come now!" exclaimed Grant, and as he spoke John and George +appeared through the trees a short distance away. + +"What luck did you have?" demanded John as he and his comrade approached +the fire which Grant had started. + +"Pretty good," replied Grant. "I caught only one myself but Fred got +eight." + +"Good for him," exclaimed John. "Did you get any big ones?" + +"Fred caught one beauty." + +"Let's see it." + +Nothing loath Fred proudly produced his big trout and held it up for the +inspection of his friends. + +"Say," exclaimed George, "that's a good one all right!" + +"He certainly put up a game fight too," said Grant. "You should have +seen it." + +"I wish we had," said George. "None of the ones we caught gave us any +trouble at all." + +"Perhaps you didn't catch any big enough," said Fred, preparing to tease +George and remind him of his boasts. "How many did you get anyway?" + +"Only four all together," replied George. "String caught three of +those." + +He and John seemed unwilling for some reason to talk very much and they +had the appearance of holding something back. Perhaps if it had been +lighter it would have been possible to see a guilty look on the faces of +both boys. + +"Let's see your fish," urged Fred. "Don't be afraid of them. I'm +surprised that you didn't catch more than one, Pop. I expected that +you'd bring in at least a dozen and that you'd surely get one bigger +than mine; here you are with only four little ones between you. Bring +them out anyway." + +John opened the creel and dipping his hand inside brought out a trout +about ten inches long and laid it on the mossy bank. + +"That'll do for a start," grinned Fred, who was thoroughly enjoying +himself. He knew that he had made good his boast about catching a larger +fish than George. He had been somewhat worried up to the present time +for as Grant had said it was never possible to say just what George +would do. Now, however, all doubts had been swept from his mind and he +was perfectly confident that he had beaten his rival. + +"There's another," said John, bringing out a second fish, if anything a +trifle smaller than the first. + +"Huh," laughed Fred, "I'll bet that's the one Pop caught." + +"No, it isn't," said John. "I caught those two and this one too," and he +placed a third trout by the side of the other two. All three of them +were almost exactly the same size. + +"They're not very large, are they?" said John dubiously. + +"Oh, they'll make fine eating," exclaimed Fred. "Where's your other fish +though? I want to see the one that Pop caught." + +John once more put his hand in the creel and felt all around. + +"I don't feel it here," he said anxiously. + +"Maybe it slipped through a crack in the basket," said Fred gleefully. +"Are you sure you caught a fish, Pop?" + +"Why, I thought so," said George. "Here, String, let me try to find it." + +"Too bad we haven't got a magnifying glass," chuckled Fred as John +passed the creel over to George. "You know it's against the law to catch +the little bits of ones anyway." + +"Find it, Pop?" inquired John. + +"Here it is," exclaimed George after a moment's search and he drew forth +to the astonished gaze of Grant and Fred a trout that one glance showed +was easily larger than the one Fred had caught. + +"Where'd you get that fish?" demanded Fred in amazement. + +"I caught it." + +"You did? How'd you do it?" + +"With a hook and line of course. I told you to 'wait and see.'" + +"Well," gasped Fred, and he stopped for lack of anything further to say. +His three companions, however, burst into gales of laughter all at his +expense and all seemed to enjoy the situation very much. + +"Let me see him," demanded Fred, and George very willingly handed over +his prize to be inspected. + +"Why, look here," exclaimed Fred. "There's not a cut or a mark of any +kind around his mouth but his stomach has a big gash in it." + +"Certainly," said George. "That's where I hooked him." + +"In the stomach?" cried Fred. "What are you talking about?" + +"Tell him how you did it, Pop," urged John gleefully. + +"Well," said George, "it was like this. I tried to fish the way I saw +Fred doing it but I couldn't to save my life. The old hook kept catching +on everything in sight." + +"Just like mine," interposed Grant. + +"I finally got disgusted," continued George. "It didn't seem to be any +use in my trying any longer and I thought that a trout would be an awful +fool to bite that silly looking fly anyway. I've always fished with +worms and I didn't see why I couldn't catch trout with worms for bait. I +decided to try it anyway, so I rolled over an old log and dug under it +with my knife. It wasn't long before I had a couple of big fat fellows +and I soon put one on the hook and took the fly off. + +"Well, I fished with the worms for a while but nothing happened and I +began to get pretty well discouraged. I quit fishing and lay down on my +stomach to get a drink out of one of the pools. The water was just as +clear as crystal and just as I lay down I saw a big old trout shoot +under a big rock at the bottom of the pool. That proved there were trout +in there anyway. + +"The rock where he disappeared was right beneath me and I picked up my +line with the big worm still on the hook and let it down just as quietly +as I could until it was right in front of the rock. Nothing happened for +a long time and I thought the trout was gone, but all of a sudden I saw +him again." + +"Were you holding the line in your hand?" inquired Grant. + +"Yes; it was just like a drop line. The rod was lying in back of me on +the ground and all I had done was to let out a lot of line. Well, the +old trout sort of poked his nose out and took a look around. He went up +to the worm and took a smell of it; at least that's the way it looked. +He didn't bite it though and a second later he went whizzing back +underneath the rock again. I thought he was gone for good but in a few +seconds back he came; the worm seemed to attract him even if he didn't +try to eat it. He kept hanging around it all the time, sort of sniffing +at it first one side and then the other. + +"All of a sudden I had an idea." + +"Whew," whistled Fred softly. + +"I decided," continued George paying no attention to the interruption, +"that I'd try to pull the line up all of a sudden and hook him in the +stomach. I didn't see why such a thing wasn't possible and I meant to +try it the first chance I had. Old Mr. Trout still hung around the worm +but it seemed as if he was never going to get right over the hook. +Finally he started to swim away slowly and I thought it was all over. He +only went a few feet though and then turned back. The worm seemed to +fascinate him. + +"He went right up to the hook and sort of looked it over again; then he +turned his back on it so to speak, and kept perfectly still, just +wiggling his fins. I lowered the hook a little and he never moved. I +lowered it a little more and held it there. All at once he turned +leisurely around and came right square over the hook. I yanked the line +with all my might and there he is." + +George pointed proudly to the big trout lying at his feet. + +"That's a great way to fish for trout," exclaimed Fred in disgust. + +"That's all right, Pop," laughed Grant. "You caught him anyway, didn't +you?" + +"I surely did. I told Fred I'd beat him out and I did it. Why, Fred, you +little shrimp, I'd have put salt on his tail and caught him that way if +it was necessary in order to take some of the conceit out of you." + +"Bah!" exclaimed Fred in disgust. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XII--A CHALLENGE + + + +Two more days the boys spent among the streams and the trout pools. At +the end of that time their supply of food was running low and they +decided to return to their island camp. + +The return trip was made without any mishap and when they entered the +little lake where their island was situated, their tent, standing out +prominently on the little bluff where it was pitched, was a welcome +sight to all. + +"It looks pretty good, doesn't it?" exclaimed John proudly. + +"It certainly does," agreed Fred. "I'm sort of glad to be back again." + +"We had a great time though," said George enthusiastically. "There's one +more trip I want to take this summer too." + +"What's that?" inquired Fred. + +"I'd like to climb that mountain over there." + +The four young campers turned their heads and gazed at the peak George +indicated, towering high over the lake. + +"That's a go," exclaimed Grant readily. "I think that it would be good +fun." + +"So do I," agreed John. "Let's do it soon too." + +"Do you suppose it will be very hard work?" asked Fred. + +"Of course it will," said George. "You wouldn't let that hold you back +though, would you?" + +"Not at all, but I don't want you fellows to get the idea that it will +be any easy job. The mountain looks nice and green and smooth from here +because it's all covered with trees, but when we get there we'll find +it's pretty rough going. Ravines and gullies and steep cliffs and +everything else like that will be there to hold us back." + +"All the better," exclaimed George. "Then when we reach the top we'll +feel as if we had accomplished something." + +"We'll do it anyway," said Grant and every one else agreed with him. + +Soon they reached their destination. The Balsam still rode at anchor in +the little harbor and everything seemed to be as the boys had left it. +In a few moments the canoes had been drawn up on shore and their +contents unloaded. Grant in the lead, they made their way towards the +tent. + +He disappeared inside the tent and before his companions had come up +with him, reappeared holding a paper in his hand. + +"What have you got there?" inquired George curiously. + +"I don't know. I found it inside the tent." + +"See what it is," exclaimed George. + +"It's a challenge of some kind, I think," said Grant after a hasty +glance at the sheet which he held. + +"A challenge?" exclaimed John. "Not for a fight, I hope." + +"Not as bad as that," laughed Grant. "It's an athletic challenge." + +"Who from?" demanded Fred. + +"I don't know yet," said Grant. "Give me a chance." + +"Read it out loud," urged John. "That's the best way." + + "We, the undersigned," read Grant, "hereby challenge the four + boys who are camping on the island in the middle of the lake to + a set of water sports. The events are to be decided upon by + mutual agreement and are to be as many in number as may be + agreed upon. We suggest that they include a sailing race, a + canoe race, and a swimming race. The day for the sports is to be + decided later and on Monday morning we will come over to see you + and arrange the details. + + Signed, Thomas Adams. + Franklin Dunbar. + Hugh McNeale. + Herbert Halsey." + +"Who are they, do you suppose?" exclaimed John. + +"I don't know," said Fred. "I never heard of any of them before." + +"They probably live in that camp down at the other end of the lake," +said Grant. "The one we visited the other day, you know." + +"And found nobody there," added George. + +"That's it. They must be the ones." + +"I guess they are," agreed John. "How do they know so much about us +though? I don't see how they knew there were four of us." + +"Probably they've seen us around," suggested Grant. "That part of it is +easy enough." + +"Well, what do you think of the challenge?" demanded Fred. + +"I say we accept it," exclaimed George eagerly. + +"Of course we will," said Grant. "I think it will be great sport." + +"They may be a good deal older and bigger than we are," suggested Fred. +"If they are we'll sort of be outclassed." + +"I don't believe they are," said Grant. "At any rate I don't think we'll +be outclassed." + +"We'll give them a good rub anyway," exclaimed George. "What sort of +sailing and swimming and canoe races do you suppose they mean?" + +"They had a catboat like the Balsam," said John. "Don't you remember +seeing it down by their tent? We'll use the catboats for the sailing +race." + +"A relay swimming race would be a good stunt," suggested Fred. "In that +way we could all be in it." + +"When they come over here we can decide all the details," said George. +"When was it that they said they were coming?" + +"Monday, I think," said John. "Wasn't it, Grant?" + +"Yes. That's day after to-morrow." + +"We ought to have some judges," said Fred. + +"That's true," agreed Grant. "I don't know where we'll get any though." + +"Maybe they'll know somebody," suggested George. + +"We'll find out all about it on Monday anyway," said Fred. "Let's have a +little food now. I'll faint unless I eat pretty soon." + +"Poor little Freddy," laughed George. "You need a nurse." + +"Huh," snorted Fred. "Ever since you hooked that trout by the tail you +have been too fresh to live. Your turn will come though." + +"What do you mean by that?" demanded George. + +"Why, that the freshness will be taken out of you one of these days." + +"Who'll do it?" + +"I don't know, but I have a sure feeling that something will happen to +you unless you mend your ways." + +"Stop your arguing, you two," exclaimed Grant. "You fight all day long." + +"We're not fighting," laughed Fred. "That's just the way we show how +fond we are of each other." + +"Well, I must say you have a queer way of doing it," said Grant. "I'd +hate to see what you'd do if you didn't like each other." + +"Such a thing could never happen, could it, Fred?" demanded George. + +"No, I guess not. I don't know what I'd do if I didn't have some one +like you around to make fun of," responded Fred. + +"Who caught the big trout?" taunted George. + +"Will you keep quiet about that fish?" exclaimed Fred. "All you do is +talk about it from morning till night. I never want to hear of it +again." + +"You will though," grinned George. + +"Oh, I know that, but I wish something would happen to keep you quiet." + +Such a thing was destined to come about before Fred dreamed it would and +it was also something he never would have thought of, possibly. + +"I need some wood for this fire," remarked Grant, who was busied with +preparations for dinner. The sun was fast sinking in the west and the +light was commencing to fade. A lone kingfisher winged his way across +the lake returning to his home, a hole dug in some bank overlooking the +water. All was quiet and peaceful. + +"I need some wood for this fire," Grant repeated, for no one had paid +any attention to his former statement of this fact. + +"You hear that, Pop?" inquired Fred. "Grant needs some wood." + +"Yes, I heard him," replied George. "What's the matter with you; your +legs haven't turned to stone, have they? Can't you get it?" + +"I can, but I have to wash the dishes to-night. It seems to me that +that's just about enough for me to do." + +"All right," sighed George, "I'll get it. It strikes me, though, that I +do about all the work around here that there is to be done." + +"Yes, it's too bad about you," jeered Fred. "Take the ax and get out of +here." + +"It's pretty dark," said George as ax in hand he started for the clump +of trees in the rear of the tent. It was growing dark as George had said +and it was becoming more and more difficult to pick out the narrow +trail. He had advanced but a short distance when a little animal ran out +into the path and trotted along ahead of him. + +"Why, look at the cat," exclaimed George half out loud. "I wonder how it +got on the island here." + +As he spoke the little black and white animal left the path and entered +a clump of bushes on one side. George had always been extremely fond of +pets of all sort and he followed eagerly. + +"Here puss, puss, puss," he called. "Here kitty, kitty, kitty." + +There was no response and he called again. He used his most enticing +manner and did his best to coax the little animal out again. + +"Wouldn't they be surprised back at camp," he thought, "if I should +bring in a cat? It would make a fine mascot for us too." + +He bent over the bushes where the cat had disappeared and called again; +no response came, however. He bent the twigs aside and stepped in, +looking carefully all about him as he went forward. Suddenly he uttered +a cry of surprise and started back. He thought he was choking, and +springing back into the narrow pathway he turned and ran for the tent as +fast as his legs would carry him. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIII--THE OUTCAST + + + +George's one idea was to run away, but the remarkable part of the +adventure was that it seemed to be impossible to shake off that from +which he was trying to escape. + +A moment later he arrived at camp and spying his three friends seated +around the fire he made his way towards them. As soon as he reached the +spot where they were he threw himself upon the ground and commenced to +moan and groan violently. + +"Oh, dear, oh, dear," he cried. "What have I done? What have I done?" + +"Why, Pop!" exclaimed Grant in alarm. "What's the matter with--" + +He broke off suddenly in the midst of the sentence and looked at George +in horror. All sympathy for the sufferer quickly left him. + +"Get out of here!" he cried, but not waiting for George to leave he +departed quickly himself. He was accompanied by Fred and John who seemed +to be stricken with some strange malady, a mixture of anguish and +laughter. + +"What shall I do? What shall I do?" cried George as he saw his three +friends leaving him. + +"Do anything you want," called Fred. "Drown yourself if you like, but +don't come near me." + +"Where'd you get it, Pop?" shouted John gleefully. "You'd better go soak +in the lake for a couple of days." + +"Get away from that fire," cried Grant. "Our supper is being cooked +there and we can't come back until you leave." + +"I'm not stopping you," replied George. "Come back and tell me what to +do." + +"I told you," exclaimed Fred. "Go and drown yourself." + +"Where'd you get it, Pop?" repeated John and immediately went off into +gales of laughter. + +"You caught the trout all right," laughed Fred. "You caught something +else. Something a good deal bigger than that fish too." + +"Isn't it awful!" exclaimed John holding on to his nose. "I remember my +younger brother once ran across a skunk like this and he had to live in +the barn for two days." + +"To think that Pop should be the one, too," said Fred delightedly. "It +seems almost too good to be true." + +"It's true all right enough," said Grant grimly. "Go up close to him if +you don't believe it." + +"What shall I do?" called George to his three unsympathetic companions. +He was standing near the fire, anguish depicted on his face. He was in a +sorry plight, for no matter where he went he could not escape the almost +overpowering odor that clung to him. + +"Take all your clothes off and throw them in the lake," said Grant. +"Then go take a swim yourself. + +"After that we might let you come back," added Fred. + +"But I can't throw away perfectly good clothes," protested George. + +"They're not 'good' any more," laughed John. "Throw them away." + +"Burn them if you like," suggested Fred. "Do anything you want with +them, only get rid of that smell. You can't come near us until you do." + +"Is that so?" demanded George and he took a few steps forward. "Who says +I can't come near you?" + +"Don't do it, Pop, don't do it," begged Grant. "If you only knew how you +smelled." + +"I do know; don't worry about that. It follows me wherever I go." + +"Please don't come near us," exclaimed Grant as George still moved +towards them. + +"I thought I'd come over and hug Fred," said George. "He's so pleased +about it all that it seems only fair that I should share the smell with, +him." + +"You stay away!" cried Fred in alarm. "Don't you touch me. Don't come +within forty rods of any of us." + +"Oh, Fred," grinned George mischievously, "don't run away from me. I +just want to show you how fond of you I am." + +As he spoke George walked slowly towards the group of three boys who +stood and watched him anxiously. They knew that George would stop at +nothing once he was started and his offer to share the smell of the +skunk with Fred gave them ample cause for alarm. Fred was the one most +worried and he really had good reason for his alarm, for he knew that +George would like nothing better than to rub up against him and inflict +the awful odor on him too. + +"You keep away from me, Pop!" cried Fred uneasily. + +"Don't you like me?" grinned George. + +"Oh, yes, I love you," exclaimed Fred, knowing well that whatever he +might say it would be exactly the wrong thing. + +"Then let me hug you," urged George, advancing steadily nearer. + +"I'll hit you over the head with this rock." + +"Why, Fred, how unkind of you; I really am surprised." + +"You'll be worse than that if you don't keep away," warned Fred, but he +backed away a few feet as he saw George steadily approaching. + +"Let's get out of here," whispered John to Grant and unnoticed by George +they withdrew and made their way back to the fire. + +"Pop certainly has Fred worried now all right," laughed John. + +"I should say so," agreed Grant. "The joke was on Pop at first but it +certainly is on Fred now. Just look at them." + +George still advanced slowly towards the spot where Fred was standing. +He held his arms out, entreating Fred to come to him, but Fred very +evidently had no intention of doing any such thing. He was slowly +retreating, threatening George meanwhile with all manner of punishment +if he was not left alone. + +"Come to me, Fred," begged George, a wide smile on his face. He was +content to suffer the discomfort of the terrible odor himself as long as +he could worry his friend so effectively. + +"Keep away from me, I say!" threatened Fred, brandishing a stick in his +right hand. "I swear I'll hit you over the head with this if you don't." + +"Oh, Fred, you wouldn't do that, would you?" exclaimed George, +pretending great surprise. "You wouldn't hit your old friend who only +wants to share something nice with you. You can't be serious." + +"You heard what I said." + +"But Fred--" + +"Whew, what a smell!" cried Fred suddenly and he turned and fled as fast +as his legs could carry him. Close behind him followed George calling +out at every step for Fred to wait and share something nice with him. +These invitations however seemed to have no effect upon Fred, for he +merely increased his speed. + +Now it so happened that the course Fred followed in his flight led +behind the tent and down the same narrow trail where George had had his +disastrous encounter with Mr. Skunk only a short time before. It also +happened that Mr. Skunk had not left the neighborhood with such +eagerness as had George; indeed he had been inclined to linger around +the same spot where they had met before. + +As has been told the path was narrow and hard to follow and the night +was growing darker every moment. Unfortunately for Fred a vine stretched +across the path just before he came to the spot where George had +searched for the "cat." This vine caught Fred's toe and he sprawled at +full length on the ground; George, but a couple of steps in the rear of +him, had to jump over the prostrate body of his friend in order to save +himself from meeting the selfsame fate. + +When Fred fell he not only surprised but greatly annoyed Mr. Skunk who +was lurking only a few feet away. As a result Fred was treated to the +same dose that had made George so unpopular around the camp. + +Together the two boys returned to camp. They were fellow sufferers now. +Though nearly overcome by the powerful stench, they bore with it long +enough to walk arm in arm up to the fire and put Grant and John to +sudden flight. This provided them much amusement but the smell was too +strong to be borne any longer. + +"I guess we'll have to do as Grant advised," said George. + +"What was that?" + +"Throw our clothes away and take a swim." + +"I guess you're right," said Fred and side by side the two boys made +their way down the water's edge. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIV--TALKING IT OVER + + + +Monday morning came and found the four young campers eagerly awaiting +the arrival of their challengers. There was great speculation as to what +they would look like and whether or not any set of games between the two +camps would provide an equal contest. + +"I believe we can beat them," exclaimed George confidently. + +"Don't be so sure," advised Grant. "You'd better wait until you see your +opponents before you begin to make any predictions." + +"That's right," said Fred. "You'd better not talk too much about it +either, Pop. You'll need all your wind for the swimming and canoe +races." + +George gave the speaker a scornful glance but said nothing. The four +friends finished their breakfast and lolled about the camp waiting for +their rivals to appear. + +"There they come now," exclaimed John after the lapse of about an hour. + +"Where?" demanded George. "I don't see them." + +"That tree is in your way, I guess," said John. "You'll see them in a +minute or two." + +"There they are!" exclaimed George suddenly. "Their boat looks just like +the Balsam, doesn't it?" + +"I think it is the same," said John. "It seems to me my father told me +that there were two catboats on the lake made by the same man and made +exactly alike." + +"That'll be fine," said Fred eagerly. "No one can claim any advantage +because of the boat then, and the best sailors will win." + +"Let's hope we're the ones," laughed Grant. "Come on, who's coming down +to the wharf to meet our guests?" + +"We all are, I guess," exclaimed John, and a moment later the four boys +were standing on the tiny dock waiting for the approaching catboat to +come into their little harbor. + +"They're good sailors all right," whispered Fred as he watched the boys +in the boat maneuver their craft. "We'll have to be awfully good to beat +them." + +"All the more credit if we do," said Grant. + +"Ahoy, there!" he shouted a moment later. "You'd better anchor a little +way out from the dock here. We'll come out in the canoes after you." + +"All right," came the reply. "Did you get our challenge?" + +"We certainly did," said Grant. + +"Good. I hope you'll accept it." + +"Of course we will." + +The boat swung around and one of the crew threw the anchor overboard. +The sail was quickly lowered and everything was done in a quiet +business-like way that instilled a great amount of respect into the +hearts of the boys who, from the dock, were watching the proceedings. + +A moment later Grant and John each took a canoe and set out from the +shore. They came alongside the catboat, which was named the Spruce, and +quickly transferred the crew to the canoes, and thence to the shore. One +of the boys, Thomas Adams by name, seemed to be the spokesman for the +party and he proceeded with Grant's help to introduce everybody all +around. + +Much laughter and embarrassment followed but before long all of the boys +were quite at their ease. They left the dock and proceeded to the tent +and all sat down on the ground in front of it. It seemed that the camp +at the end of the lake was very much like the one on the island. It was +occupied by four boys of just about the same age as the others and +practically of the same size. + +"We thought it would be fun," said Thomas Adams speaking for his three +friends as well as himself, "to challenge you fellows to a set of water +sports. We heard that there were to be four of you on this island this +summer and we saw you the other day just when you were leaving our camp; +right after that storm I mean. We were sorry to miss you." + +"We were sorry, too," said Grant. + +"You were away when we came to see you too," said Thomas. + +"Yes," said George, "we were off trout fishing for a few days." + +"Have any luck?" asked Hugh McNeale one of the other visitors. + +"Pretty good," said George. "We had a lot of fun too." + +"Who caught the biggest fish?" + +"Ask Fred here," grinned George. "He knows all about that." + +Being urged to do so Fred proceeded to relate the story of how George +had carried off the prize. He did not spare himself in the telling +either and left out no detail of how disappointed he had been to find +that George had beaten him out. When he told how George had hooked his +trout the story was greeted with gales of laughter and congratulations +were showered upon the fortunate fisherman. + +"A fellow with schemes like that would be hard to beat in any sort of a +game," laughed Hugh. + +"What sort of games are we going to have?" asked John. + +"We thought a sailing race would be fun," said Hugh. + +"Yes, and so would swimming and canoe races," exclaimed Grant. "Do you +think three events will be enough?" + +"How about a tilting contest?" said Thomas. + +"What's a tilting contest?" asked Fred curiously. + +"Didn't you ever hear of that?" + +"Never that I know of." + +"Why, it's like this," explained Thomas. "Two fellows get into a canoe; +the one in the stern paddles and steers and the fellow in the bow has a +great long pole with one end of it all wrapped up with rags or something +like that. Another canoe fixed up the same way opposes them and the two +attack each other. The fellows with the poles jab at each other and try +to upset the other canoe or knock the bow man overboard; if he falls +overboard or the canoe upsets of course they lose the match." + +"That sounds fine," exclaimed George. "I say we include a tilting match +by all means." + +"Two from our camp will take on two from yours," suggested Thomas. + +"All right," agreed Grant. "We'll enter our star team." + +"Entries will close one second before the match starts," laughed +Franklin Dunbar, a fat, round-faced boy, who had spoken but little thus +far. + +"And probably our team will be upset and in the water one second after +the match starts," laughed George. + +"It'll be fun anyway," said Thomas. "When shall we have the games?" + +"We were wondering about that too," said Grant. "I guess almost any time +will suit us though." + +"We'll need some practice," remarked Fred. "Don't forget that." + +"Not much," said Grant. "I say not to practice too much. We don't want +to make professional games out of them, you know." + +"That's all right, too," objected Fred. "At the same time we want to +make them worth while and the better we all are the more fun they will +be too. Don't you think so?" and he appealed to the four young visitors +for their opinion. + +"I agree with you," said Thomas readily. "Our camp wants to beat yours +too, and if you fellows don't take it seriously why there won't be much +honor in it for us if we do win." + +"There'd be plenty of disgrace if we lost under those conditions +though," laughed Franklin Dunbar. + +"We don't know anything about tilting either, Grant," said George. "We +will need a lot of practice for that event." + +"All right," agreed Grant. "I guess we do need practice. As far as I'm +concerned, anything you fellows say suits me. How about a judge though? +Suppose we should have a close finish in one of the races, who would we +have to decide it for us?" + +"My uncle is coming to spend a week with us in camp," said Hugh McNeale. +"He might act as judge if we wanted him." + +"That would be fine," exclaimed Grant. "When is he coming?" + +"Not till week after next." + +"That's all right," said Fred. "That would be just about right." + +"Suppose we set two weeks from Wednesday then," suggested Thomas. "That +ought to give us plenty of time to get in shape." + +"All right," agreed Grant. "We ought to have some sort of name for our +teams too. Have you any name for your camp?" + +"No, we haven't." + +"Neither have we. Suppose you call yourselves the red team and we'll be +the blue." + +"Fine," exclaimed Hugh. "I'll write a letter to Uncle Jack and tell him +what he has ahead of him. I'll tell him that he really is to be the +umpire and that he'll get the same treatment an umpire does if he +doesn't do his job well." + +The remaining details were speedily arranged and then the four boys of +the red team sailed back to their camp, leaving the boys on the island +full of excitement and pleasure at the thought of the games ahead of +them. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XV--PREPARATION + + + +The days intervening until the time came for the games were busy ones +for the boys in the island camp. The Balsam was thoroughly overhauled, +and everything removed from her that might tend in any way to retard her +speed. Frequent cruises were made and every boy was assigned to some +special duty on the boat so that when the race was held there would be +no confusion. None of the young campers had any desire to lose the race +through inefficiency. + +Long swims were indulged in to improve their wind and strengthen their +muscles. Canoe races were held and different combinations tried to +enable them to select the strongest team. A course a half-mile long was +marked out and time-trials held in an effort to decide upon the fastest +pair. All four boys were to be in the race but it had been decided that +the best policy was to put the best two paddlers in the same canoe. By +following this plan it was thought that their chances for winning would +be greatly improved. First place was to count two and second one in the +sailing and canoe races and in the tilting match. In the swimming race +three places were to count, the points to be scored being three for +first, two for second and one for third. The team scoring the greatest +number of points was to be declared the winner. + +Practice for the tilting match occupied very much of the boys' time. Two +long poles had been cut and one end of each was wound with old rags and +blankets, thus forming a large soft knob. + +"If we'd only saved those clothes that we had on when the skunks got +after us," remarked George, "we could have won a tilting contest from +anybody." + +"What do you mean by that!" inquired Grant curiously. + +"Simply this. Instead of using rags to wind the poles with we could have +used those clothes." + +"What advantage would that have been?" + +"Don't you see?" demanded George. "All we'd have to do would be to point +the pole at our opponent. We wouldn't have to touch him at all; as soon +as he got a whiff of that awful odor he'd simply faint and fall +overboard and we'd be the winners." + +"A great idea, Pop," laughed John. "Why didn't you think of it at the +time?" + +"In the first place I didn't know anything about this tilting match at +the time; in the second place, even if I had, I don't believe I'd have +kept them. Whew, they were awful!" and George shuddered at the +recollection. + +"They certainly were," agreed Fred. "Don't talk to me about it; my +clothes were all in the same condition as yours." + +The same system that was adopted for selecting a team for the canoe race +was used for the tilting match. Every possible combination of the four +young campers was tried in an effort to find the strongest competitors. +Grant and John had been selected for the canoe race, and Grant and +George were decided upon for the tilting contest. + +It had been taken for granted that Grant would be on both teams; he +outshone his companions in every form of game and sport just as he did +in his knowledge of books. He and George were heavier than the other two +boys and consequently made a more powerful team for the tilting match. +Weight would be an asset in that sport, for it is much easier to knock +down a light man than it is a heavy one; especially when a tricky and +shaky canoe is under your feet. + +"I seem to be out of it," remarked Fred ruefully when the final +selections had been made. + +"Why are you?" demanded Grant. "You're going to be in the canoe race +just as much as John and I?" + +"I know it, but I'm not on the first team." + +"That's all right, you and Pop might beat us out after all." + +"Huh," exclaimed Fred. "Pop doesn't do any work; he just sits there and +expects me to do it all." + +"You know that's not so, Fred," protested George warmly. "No one in the +world works harder than I do." + +"Well, if that's so," returned Fred, "all I can say is that there are an +awful lot of loafers in the world." + +"All four of us will be in every event except the tilting match," said +John. "You and I are both out of that, Fred." + +"You can save your strength while that's going on for the swimming +race," said Grant. "We'll have to depend on you two to win first and +second in that." + +"How long is it going to be?" asked George. + +"A hundred and seventy-five yards. Tom Adams was over here yesterday +while you were away and we decided on that distance." + +"It seems to me like a queer distance though," said George. "How did you +ever happen to hit on that?" + +"Why, we wanted to make it a hundred yards and they wanted a two-twenty. +We finally compromised on a hundred and seventy-five yards." + +"That's fair enough," said George. "How are we going to measure off +these different distances?" + +"Guess at them, I suppose," laughed John. "It won't make any difference +whether they're exact or not, I guess." + +"No, I imagine we're not going to break any time records so we needn't +bother about such details," agreed George. + +"We haven't had any practice so far to-day," remarked Fred. "What's the +matter; are we afraid of getting over-trained?" + +"That can be done easily enough, all right," said Grant. "Don't you +remember what the track coach we had at school last year said?" + +"He said I'd never make a runner if that's what you mean," laughed +George. + +"No, not that. What he said about training." + +"What was it?" asked Fred. "I don't remember." + +"Why, he said it was much better to be under-trained than over-trained. +Another thing, when a fellow was training for a certain event he'd never +let him run the full distance in practice." + +"Is that so?" exclaimed George. "That doesn't sound logical to me +though." + +"All right," said Grant, "but you know which school won all the meets +held anywhere around home, don't you?" + +"We did," said George. + +"That's just it," exclaimed Grant, "and yet you say that trainer was no +good." + +"I didn't mean to say that. All I said was that it didn't seem +reasonable to me not to let a fellow run the full distance." + +"Well, Mr. Smythe used to say that the great temptation for most fellows +was to do too much work. They'd go out and run all the afternoon and +hang around until they were tired out and then wonder why they felt +heavy in the legs and had no life in them." + +"Sailing can't hurt us anyway," said John. + +"That's right," agreed Grant, "and I'm in favor of doing this: stop +training for the events to-morrow. That'll leave us two days to rest up +before the games are held and we can devote those two days to learning +how little we know about sailing." + +"I know that already," laughed George. "I'm afraid we're going to get a +good beating in that race." + +"Oh, I don't know," Fred objected. "They might run on a rock or +something." + +"That's our best chance all right," said George. "I have an idea that +those fellows are all awfully good sailors." + +"I hope we have some wind," said Grant hopefully. "We'll never finish +the race unless we have a pretty stiff breeze. Personally I think the +course is too long." + +"Twice around the lake," said John. "That's not so far." + +"It's pretty far," insisted Grant. "Wait until you see the buoys out and +then you'll realize it." + +"Who's going to put them out?" + +"The red team," laughed Grant. + +"They're doing most of the work, aren't they?" inquired Fred. + +"Well, they wanted to; naturally I didn't object." + +"They're going to get dinner over here, you know," said George. "That'll +give us something to do." + +"Just think of it," exclaimed John. "Won't we be hungry that day? The +swimming and canoe races and the tilting contests all in the morning and +then food. You'll have to cook a lot, Grant." + +"I realize that," said Grant grimly. "I guess we can feed them though." + +"Suppose we're all even at the end of the morning," exclaimed George. +"That would certainly make the sailing race exciting, wouldn't it?" + +"It sure would," Fred agreed. "We'll have plenty of time to sail it too, +Grant. All afternoon ought to be long enough." + +"That's right," said Grant. "Yes, I hope we can get around twice in one +afternoon." + +"This canoe race is what's bothering me," exclaimed George. "That'll +take it out of us all right. It's hard work paddling and as long as Fred +and I aren't the first team I wonder if it wouldn't be better if we +didn't go in it at all. If we were fresh for the swimming race that +might increase our chances." + +"I know," said Grant, "but it seems to me that every fellow ought to be +in every event." + +"But look here," George objected. "You and String are a much better pair +than Fred and I. You simply walk away from us every time; we can't +possibly beat you so what's the use?" + +"You might get second, and that one point might win for us." + +"I have an idea," exclaimed John suddenly. "Why not make it a relay +race? We can race around the island and if we do that everybody can be +in it and it seems to me it would be a lot more fun that way." + +"That's fine," exclaimed George warmly. "Fred and I can paddle the first +lap and you and Grant the second. Will those other fellows agree to it +though?" + +"I don't see why they shouldn't," said Grant. "It's just as fair as the +other way; fairer if anything because it gives every one a chance." + +"We'll have to ask them about it though," said John. "Why can't we sail +down there now and see them?" + +"We can," said George springing to his feet. "Let's do it, too." + +A few moments later the Balsam was under way, headed for the end of the +lake and the camp of the enemy, the red team. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVI--GRANT MISSES + + + +The day set for the meet came at last. The first event, the tilting +contest, was scheduled for eleven o'clock and a half an hour before that +time the red team was on hand. The weather was ideal, bright and sunny +and warm, with not too much breeze. This was as the boys desired, for +they had hoped that the wind might not spring up until afternoon. At +least that is the way they would have arranged matters if they had any +power to do so. Strange to say it seemed as if the weather was to turn +out just as they had hoped. + +Hugh McNeale brought his Uncle Jack along and all the boys were +captivated by him at once. He was a big, jolly man, full of fun, and +with a laugh that made you feel as if you wanted to join in it every +time you heard it. He was enthusiastic over the idea of being the judge +and promised to do his very best. + +"I also have a trophy for the winning team," he exclaimed. "It's +something that you boys ought to have had in your camps anyway, but I +haven't seen one in either and so I'm going to give it as a prize." + +"What's that?" inquired Hugh curiously. + +"See for yourself," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell, for that was the name of +Hugh's uncle. He took a package from underneath his coat and unwrapping +it, spread before the admiring gaze of the eight boys a silk American +flag about three feet in length. + +"Say!" said George enthusiastically. "That's worth working for, isn't +it?" + +"It certainly is," agreed the seven other boys, almost with one voice. + +"That's the first prize," said Mr. Maxwell, evidently greatly pleased +with the result the sight of the flag had produced. "Here's the second," +and from his pocket he drew another flag of the same quality as the +first but only half the size. + +"I'm ashamed of you boys," he continued. "Both of these camps should +have had a great big American flag flying right out in front of the +tent. Let people see that you're patriotic and be proud of it." + +"We are proud of it," objected Grant. + +"Of course you are," said Mr. Maxwell readily. "I want you to show it +off though. Have a flag, and every time you look at it don't think only +of how beautiful it is. Remember what it stands for and how much you owe +to it. Think of the country that stands back of that flag and of the +millions of others who along with you have it for their national emblem. +You're all glad you're Americans and you're proud of the fact and I want +you never to be afraid to admit it. Be loyal to the flag, boys, and by +your actions prove that you're worthy of the protection it affords you. +And don't forget either that it's your duty as real American citizens to +do your part. That's what so many forget so easily. You can't expect to +receive benefits all the time and not give anything in return, you +know." + +"What can we do?" asked George, who along with all the others was deeply +impressed by Mr. Maxwell's words. + +"Just this: be good citizens. A good citizen is a man who not only obeys +the laws of his country, but who is always working to make his country +better. He puts his country's interests ahead of his own and that's a +hard thing to do sometimes. A good citizen stands by the mayor of his +town, and the governor of his state, and the president of his country. +Instead of sitting home and criticising them he gets out and works to +help them in every way he can and he is loyal to them. Those men are +behind this flag and if you are loyal to the flag, prove it by being +loyal to the men behind it. Every man must do his part." + +"I guess we're careless at times and don't think," said Grant soberly. + +"That's true," agreed Mr. Maxwell. "That's no excuse for us though." + +"But I didn't come here to make a speech," he continued laughingly. "I +believe what I've just said with all my heart though. At present, +however, I know there is a tilting contest to be held and we'd better +start it at once. I'm anxious to see who gets the first two points +towards winning the big flag." + +Without further delay the four boys who were to compete in this event +set about preparing themselves for it. Bathing suits were donned so that +an upset would not cause any worry and the two canoes were soon ready +for the fray. + +Grant and George represented the blue team and Thomas Adams and Franklin +Dunbar, the red. Grant was bow man, with George to handle the canoe; +Thomas was bow man, and Franklin paddled in the opposing boat. + +The contest was staged in the little harbor and the judge and spectators +took their positions on the tiny wharf. The canoes now faced each other +some fifty feet apart, waiting for the signal. + +"Not too fast now, Pop," warned Grant. "I don't want to fall out of the +canoe before we even reach the other one, you know." + +"I know," replied George. "I'll be careful." + +"I'm going to stay down on one knee like this, too." + +"That's a good scheme. Lock your feet around that thwart if you can. We +want to beat those fellows." + +"All ready?" came the call from shore. + +"All ready," answered Grant, and Thomas did the same. + +"Go," shouted Mr. Maxwell, and the match was on. + +Franklin and George did not try to make speed however. In fact they were +both very cautious and as a consequence, the two canoes approached each +other slowly. Both pilots seemed willing to let the other man lead off +in the attack. + +"Careful, Pop," said Grant, without relaxing his gaze from his +opponent's face for one instant. + +"All right. I'm watching them." + +Grant, crouched on one knee, was holding the pole as a medival knight +would have held his lance in a jousting tournament. Thomas however, +stood up in his canoe, gaining a little freedom of action perhaps, but +at the same time increasing his chances of going overboard. + +The canoes were only a few feet apart now and the bow men braced +themselves for the onslaught. + +"Let 'em have it now, Grant!" shouted John from the shore. Fred joined +him in his exhortations, while Hugh and Herbert Halsey were just as +noisy in their zeal to cheer their team on, and for the size of the +audience the amount of sound produced was marvelous. Mr. Maxwell was the +only one who was silent. + +Closer came the two canoes. Now they were within range and Thomas lunged +forward savagely at Grant. He ducked the blow and aiming one in return +caught his opponent full in the stomach. Thomas uttered a loud grunt and +fell backwards. As luck would have it however, he fell in the canoe. The +light craft rocked dangerously and narrowly missed upsetting. As it was, +some water was shipped and had it not been for the skill of the two +occupants it surely would have overturned. + +"Quick, Grant!" urged George. "Hit him again before he can get up." + +"Bring me closer to them." + +George thrust his paddle into the water and the canoe shot forward. +Franklin, however, with ready presence of mind had swung his canoe +around the minute it righted itself and Grant's lunge at Thomas missed. +Before George could bring his boat within range again, their opponents +had recovered their balance and were prepared for the second attack. + +Once more the canoes approached each other. This time Thomas followed +Grant's example and crouched on one knee. He had evidently learned a +lesson and had determined to be more wary. + +"Get him, Grant! Get him!" shouted John. + +"Careful, George; not too fast," warned Grant. + +He held his pole back waiting an opportunity to strike. This time he was +determined that any blow he delivered would end the match; he had been +out-lucked before and did not want it to happen again. + +Thomas made a feint at him. Grant was anxious and struck back so eagerly +that he almost fell out of the canoe. + +"That's the way, Tom," called Hugh. "You'll fix him this time." + +Again Thomas feinted and again Grant lunged fiercely at his opponent. +Thomas then followed up his bluff with a quick stab that luckily only +struck Grant a glancing blow on the shoulder. Had it hit him squarely, +the match most certainly would have been ended then and there; as it was +only George's quick action saved them from going over. + +"Don't let him fool you, Grant," he warned. "Wait for him." + +Again they advanced and as they once more neared each other Thomas +repeated his former tactics. He made a feint to lunge at Grant, and as +before, Grant was unable to resist the temptation to strike back +quickly. This he did and Franklin in the stern of the opposing canoe, +anticipating this move, backed water and the blow missed Thomas' head by +inches. + +The poles the boys were using were long and heavy. As a result, they +were somewhat clumsy and hard to handle. As Grant lunged forward at +Thomas, he leaned over the side of the canoe and the weight of his pole +prevented him from regaining his balance at once. + +Thomas and Franklin had evidently mapped out their plan of campaign +beforehand and apparently Grant had acted exactly as they wished him to. +Thomas held his pole with a shortened grip and before Grant could +recover his equilibrium, he jabbed at him with all his might. The great +wad on the end of the pole caught Grant squarely on the chest; he +dropped his pole and waved his arms violently about his head in an +effort to save himself. + +All his efforts were of no use, however. Undoubtedly he would have gone +overboard anyway, but just to make sure, Thomas gave him a gentle push +with the business end of the pole and over he went. As he disappeared +over the side he gave the canoe a shove with his feet and a moment later +George joined him in the water. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVII--GEORGE'S STRATEGY + + + +A moment later Grant and George came to the surface puffing and shaking +the water from their eyes and hair. Both boys were laughing. + +"Nice work," said Grant to their two opponents, who sat in their canoe +nearby. + +"We were lucky," protested Thomas. + +"Lucky, nothing," exclaimed Grant. "You knew more about the game than we +did and you deserved to win." + +The canoe belonging to the defeated boys floated close at hand, bottom +side up. The pole and the paddle were a short distance away. These were +soon rescued and the canoe being righted, the contestants made their way +to shore. John and Fred were the first to congratulate the winners. + +"We'll have to win this canoe race," exclaimed Fred. "You fellows have +two points to our one as it is now, and we can't afford to let you get +twice as many again this time." + +"We're going to do our best to get twice as many though, you may be sure +of that," laughed Hugh McNeale. "We want that big flag." + +"If you win it, you'll certainly be welcome to it," exclaimed John. "We +want it ourselves though, I can tell you." + +The best of feeling existed between the two camps, but this fact did not +serve to lessen the competition and rivalry. Good sportsmanship adds +zest to every game. + +"Where are the first pairs for this canoe race?" cried Mr. Maxwell. "We +mustn't let these events lag, you know." + +"We'll be ready in a minute," replied Grant. "We want to get all our +wind back and remove all the water from this canoe first." + +"That's right," said Herbert Halsey. "You fellows take your time." + +The suggestion of the blue team that the next event be made a relay race +around the island, had met with an enthusiastic response from their +rivals. Two teams from each camp were to compete and each team was to +paddle once around. The first pairs consisted of George and Fred, from +the blue team and opposed to them were Herbert Halsey and Franklin +Dunbar, from the red. Finishing the race were Grant and John, against +Hugh McNeale and Thomas Adams. Each camp had selected its strong team to +paddle last, hoping to win the race by a powerful finish. + +"I guess we're all ready now," said Grant, when a few moments had +elapsed. "We'll go ahead any time you say." + +"All right," said Mr. Maxwell. "Now remember the rules; the starting +line is directly opposite this dock and I've got some string which we +will use for tape at the finish. Each team is to paddle once around the +island. When the second relay starts, the two canoes that have finished +will be stationed out here about twenty feet apart and this string will +be stretched between them; that will be the finish line. All four canoes +will be used of course and the second relay must not start until those +completing the first have touched the canoes with their paddles. Is it +all clear?" + +"All clear," said Grant, and Thomas answered for his side. + +"Very well," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. "The first canoes may take their +places and the second relay had better be ready too." + +George and Fred pushed out from the dock and paddled slowly to the +starting point; Herbert and Franklin followed close behind. + +When they were in position, and by the way the red team had drawn the +course nearest shore, Mr. Maxwell lifted his small megaphone and gave +his final instructions. + +"Remember," he called, "once around, and the inside team this lap will +be the outside next. Don't get mixed up." + +"That'll be a little help to us," said John in a low voice to Grant. "I +hope Fred and Pop can give us a little lead to start out with." + +"I hope so too," replied Grant. + +"On your marks!" shouted Mr. Maxwell. + +Four boys sat up alert and eager for the final word. + +"Get set!" + +Four paddles were raised and held poised for instant action. + +"Go!" + +The blades were dipped deeply into the water and the race was on. Side +by side the two canoes sped along. + +"You fellows better go out there and take your places," said Mr. +Maxwell, turning to the four boys who were to continue the race the next +relay. "We don't want any mixup then, you know. It would be a shame to +have those boys paddle over half a mile for nothing." + +In response to his suggestion, Grant and John, and Hugh and Thomas, +paddled slowly out to the starting line, there to await the arrival of +their respective team-mates. + +"Take it slow, Fred," urged George from his position in the stern of the +racing canoe. "Don't kill yourself right at the start." + +They had covered about one hundred yards of their course and all four +boys were paddling with every ounce of strength they possessed. + +"Dip your paddle deep," he continued. "Take a long easy stroke. A good +steady pace is what we want." + +"They'll get way ahead of us," protested Fred. + +"What if they do? They'll be all in at the finish and we'll start a +sprint." + +In response to George's suggestion they eased up materially. As Fred had +predicted the other canoe immediately began to draw away, for its two +occupants did not relax their efforts for an instant. Wider and wider +the gap opened between them until thirty feet separated the two racers +when they came to the first turn. + +The island was oval in its shape, very much like an egg. The start had +been made from a point about midway between the two ends. The first +stretch, therefore, was half the length of the island, then the corner +was turned and the whole length of the island was covered, ending with +the home stretch, half the length of the island again. + +Steadily and strongly, George and Fred paddled. Herbert and Franklin +still worked desperately, taking nearly three strokes to the other boys' +two, and as a result, the gap between the two boats continually widened. + +"Don't let it worry you, Fred," said George. "They can't keep up that +pace very much longer." + +"They're not weakening yet though, Pop." + +"I know it, but we've only covered half the course so far." + +Steadily the red team's canoe drew away. Forty, fifty feet, they were in +the lead now. If any one had been in a position to observe, however, he +would have seen that its occupants were beginning to show signs of +weakening. Their breath came faster and faster, the perspiration rolled +off their faces in streams, and their muscles began to ache and throb. + +Relentlessly George and Fred followed them. Not one bit did they +increase their efforts, though George had great difficulty in +restraining his companion. Powerful, even strokes urged their tiny craft +on and now they were holding their own. Just ahead of them was the last +turn which was to bring them into the home stretch. + +"How do you feel, Fred?" asked George. + +"Fine." + +"Are you tired?" + +"Not very." + +"I hope not. We'll start a sprint the second we round that turn and +we'll have to put all we've got into it." + +The leading canoe was even now turning the point. The boys in it were +plainly tired as their frequent splashing showed. They still worked +desperately, however, and it would be no mean task to overtake them. + +Grant and John sat in their canoe at the starting point eagerly awaiting +the appearance of their team-mates. To their dismay, it was Franklin and +Herbert who first hove in sight and to the waiting boys it seemed as if +hours elapsed before George and Fred rounded the turn. At last they +appeared, however, over thirty yards in the rear. + +"Now, Fred!" urged George, as they started on the home stretch. "Let 'em +have it." + +Like demons the two boys began to ply their paddles. The light canoe was +quick to respond and it fairly flew over the water. Foot by foot and +yard by yard they gained on their fast-tiring opponents. + +Franklin and Herbert paddled desperately. Their strength was gone +however; they had used it all up at the start of the race. Their arms +felt like great chunks of lead and it was all the two boys could do to +make them respond to the urging of their wills. + +At racehorse speed, George and Fred plowed along. The gap between the +two canoes began to disappear as if by magic. The steady pace they had +maintained had tired them, to be sure, but they still had plenty of +reserve strength left and they were using it now when it counted most. +The cheers of their team-mates waiting for them came faintly to their +ears, spurring them on. + +"We've got 'em, Fred! We've got 'em!" exclaimed George triumphantly. +"Stick to it." + +Fifty yards away was the finish line and the canoes were almost on even +terms. Forty yards and George and Fred were in the lead. Their rivals +were beaten, dead tired, and possessed of scarcely the strength +necessary to urge their canoe across the line. + +Thirty yards from home and George and Fred enjoyed a lead of nearly five +yards. They were moving at easily twice the speed of their opponents +now. It seemed certain that Grant and John were to be handed a splendid +head-start for the last relay, when an unexpected and most disheartening +thing suddenly happened. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII--A CLOSE MATCH + + + +Fifteen yards from the finish Fred's paddle broke. It snapped off short +in his hand and as a result, the canoe almost upset. It seemed as if +their splendid effort was to go for nothing. Herbert and Franklin, +seeing the plight of their rivals, were endowed with new hope that they +might win their relay after all. The hope thus aroused gave them just +strength enough to urge their canoe forward across the line. Herbert +lifted his paddle and touched the canoe in which Hugh and Thomas waited +so impatiently, and then sank back against the thwart exhausted. + +The disaster to Fred was nearly fatal. The canoe rocked dangerously and +though it did not turn over, it lost every bit of its momentum. + +"Sit down, Fred!" shouted George. "I'll paddle." + +One man against two is a severe handicap, however, even if those two are +well nigh exhausted. It must be remembered also that George too, was +nearly fagged out. In spite of his usual lightheartedness, he had an +indomitable will, however, and not one of the boys had more nerve than +he. + +He dipped his blade deep into the water, brought the bow of the canoe +around so that it pointed in the proper direction, and urged it forward. +Meanwhile the other canoe had passed them and crossed the line at least +five yards in the lead. + +Grant and John were off like a flash, however, and the advantage the red +team enjoyed was not insurmountable by any means. + +"That was tough luck, boys," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell earnestly to Fred and +George. "You two certainly deserved to win that relay." + +"You surely did," echoed Franklin Dunbar. "That was about the toughest +luck I ever saw." + +"Fred's too strong," laughed George. "It's awfully hard to get any +paddle that he won't break." + +"Don't pay any attention to what he says, Mr. Maxwell," urged Fred. "He +thinks he can tease me; personally, I think he's crazy." + +"I hope not," laughed Mr. Maxwell. + +"He's fresh though," insisted Fred. + +"Not now," puffed George. "My breath's gone and I'm all in." + +"That was a great race," insisted Mr. Maxwell. "I don't remember ever +having seen a better one." + +"We were about twenty-five yards ahead of them at one time, you know," +said Herbert. "I thought we would win easily." + +"So did I," exclaimed Fred. "You kept drawing away from us all the time +and I thought we wouldn't even be in it. I wanted to paddle harder all +the time but Pop here wouldn't let me. He insisted that we keep up a +steady gait and sprint at the end." + +"My system was all right, wasn't it?" demanded George. + +"It surely was. You didn't count on the paddle breaking, though." + +"Oh, yes, I did. I knew that if you exerted all your strength that any +paddle would snap; that's the reason I wanted you to save it until the +end. Suppose you'd cut loose over the other side of the island and the +paddle had broken there. We'd have been in a nice fix, wouldn't we?" and +George winked solemnly at their three visitors who seemed much amused at +his efforts to secure a rise from his companion. + +"Oh, dry up!" exclaimed Fred shortly, and George laughed gleefully at +having accomplished his purpose. + +Meanwhile the two other canoes were rounding the first turn. + +"Sprint, John! Sprint!" Grant urged the moment they had started. "Catch +up to them and hang right on to them all the way around." + +Paddling with all their strength Grant and John succeeded in catching up +with their opponents. When the bow of their canoe was within a few feet +of the stern of the other they eased up a bit and contenting themselves +with allowing their rivals to set the pace, they kept their position +with bulldog determination. + +Thomas and Hugh sprinted. Grant and John followed suit. If the leading +canoe slackened its pace the one behind did the same. Like a shadow the +two Go Ahead boys dogged their opponents' course. + +Such a proceeding always worries the leader. To know that a step behind +him is some one who follows him like grim death and who cannot be shaken +off by any means whatsoever, is bound to have its effect in the long +run. The pace-maker is irritated and bewildered and sometimes +demoralization follows as a result. + +Grant was aware of this and he intended to make the most of it. He knew +that if Thomas and Hugh discovered that it was out of the question to +pull away from the pursuing canoe their confidence would be shaken and +once this quality is lost, a great asset is gone. + +It is easier to follow the pace than to make it. Another advantage is +that the one behind can watch his opponent and note everything that he +does. The leader, on the other hand, cannot tell what his rival intends +to do and must always be on his guard lest he be taken by surprise. + +Thomas and Hugh worked desperately. Evidently they had decided that +their best chance was to tire out the boys in the canoe that followed +them so relentlessly. With this object in view they started a sprint +when they had covered about one-third of the course and they kept it up. +Their team-mates had tried to sprint the entire distance, and failed. +Could these two do it? George and Fred had been content to allow their +rivals to gain on them, but not so Grant and John. Their one idea was to +hang on and hang on and hang on, until the time should come when an +opportunity offered itself for a quick dash into the lead. This chance +had not yet presented itself. + +The four boys worked like demons. Down the whole length of the island +they raced, neck and neck. The same amount of open water showed between +the two canoes all the way along. It almost looked as if the first canoe +was towing the other. Maintaining these same positions they approached +the last turn. + +"Now, String!" said Grant in a low voice. "When they take this curve, +I'm going to shoot in between them and the shore. Be ready." + +"All right," replied John, without looking up from his task for an +instant. + +The leading canoe now turned and began to round the point of the island. +Close behind them followed Grant and John. Thomas and Hugh were not far +from shore, so that Grant would not have much room to pass, if indeed +such a thing was possible. Just before the canoes entered the +straightaway leading to the finish line, the two Go Ahead boys made +their bid for the lead. + +Grant in the stern swung the canoe in between the other and the shore. +The space was limited but their chance had come. It was now or never. + +"Now, String!" cried Grant. "Let 'em have it!" + +It seemed impossible that the two boys could work any harder than they +had been. Every one seems to have some reserve strength, however, no +matter how much he may have used before, and it was this store that +Grant and John called upon now. + +Inch by inch they crept up. Soon Thomas from the stern of his canoe +could see out of the corner of his eye the bow of the blue team's canoe. + +"Paddle, Hugh!" he cried. "Paddle for all you're worth!" + +It was a desperate contest, but Grant and John were not to be denied. +The difference that setting the pace or following it made, was just +enough to give them a slight advantage. As far as skill and strength +were concerned, the four boys were remarkably well matched. + +Down the home stretch they dashed, and little by little Grant and John +gained. They gained steadily also, and it was evident that if the course +were long enough they would be returned winners. But could they catch +and pass their rivals before the finish line was reached? That was what +worried Fred and George, who screamed themselves hoarse in their +eagerness to spur their comrades on. + +No open water showed between the boats now. A few yards more and the red +team was but three-quarters of a length ahead. Soon this was reduced to +half a length and still Grant and John gained. The line was but a few +yards distant now however. Could they do it? + +The veins stood out on their foreheads. Between their clenched teeth +their breath came in gasps. Still they struggled on, still they gained +slowly, almost imperceptibly and nearer and nearer they came to the +finish. + +"If the course was only a few yards longer," groaned George as he +watched the stirring finish from the canoe. + +A moment later and the two racers were almost on even terms. It was +nearly impossible to tell which one was in the lead now, so evenly were +they matched. The tape was only a few feet away. With one final effort +the four young racers urged their canoes forward; they broke the tape +and shot on past. The race was over. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIX--A CLOSE SHAVE + + + +"Well!" exclaimed George. "I never saw anything to beat that!" + +"Who won?" demanded Fred. + +"Don't ask me. I'm not the judge." + +The boys turned and looked at Mr. Maxwell who was seated in the other +canoe with Franklin and Herbert. His face was turned towards the two +canoes which had just flashed across the finish line. He wore a puzzled +expression and was evidently at a loss what to say. + +"Who won?" called George. + +Mr. Maxwell turned and looked at the speaker sorrowfully. "No one," he +said. + +"No one," exclaimed George. "Why, how can that be?" + +"Couldn't it be a tie?" asked Fred quietly. + +"Why, yes, of course. I hadn't planned for a tie though." + +"I declare the race a tie," announced the judge solemnly. "If either +boat was ahead of the other, I'm sure I didn't see it, and I wouldn't +dare call it anything else." + +The racers had turned around and were now making their way slowly back. +All four of the boys were well nigh exhausted, but they were smiling +nevertheless. + +"Who won?" called Thomas, for they had not heard the judge's verdict. + +"It was a tie," said George. + +"A tie?" exclaimed Grant, his face falling. "That's bad." + +"Why is it?" demanded George. + +"Because we needed the points." + +"By the way," exclaimed Hugh, "how do we award the points?" + +"Split them, don't we?" said Fred readily, appealing to Mr. Maxwell. + +"Each team gets one and a half. Two for first and one for second makes a +total of three, and a half of three is one and a half." + +"Whew!" whistled George. "You certainly are quick at figures." + +A general laugh went up at Fred's expense but he did not seem to mind. + +"That's the way it's figured out anyway," said Mr. Maxwell. "That makes +the total points three and a half for the red team and two and a half +for the blue." + +"Still one point behind," exclaimed Grant. "We'll have to get that back +somehow." + +"Well," said Thomas, "the swimming race comes next and three places +count in that. Three for first, two for second, and one for third; +you'll have a fine chance to catch us there." + +"I was just thinking," interrupted Mr. Maxwell, "that it might be a good +idea to reverse the order of these last two events. You boys are pretty +well tired out after that canoe race and to swim a hundred and +seventy-five yards now would be quite a severe strain. What do you say +to our having the sailing race next?" + +"Why," said Grant slowly, "I don't see any objection to that. What do +the rest of you fellows think about it?" + +"How about dinner?" exclaimed George. "We could never finish by the time +we had planned to eat and I must say I'm hungry right now." + +"So am I," said Hugh so earnestly that everyone laughed. + +"Why don't we have dinner right now then?" suggested Mr. Maxwell. "As +soon as we are through we can start the sailing race." + +"That's a good scheme," exclaimed Grant. "Let's do that." + +"And have the swimming race after the sailing?" queried Thomas. + +"That's right," said Grant. "The water's more apt to be quiet later in +the day than it is now and that will make it better for swimming." + +"Very true," agreed Mr. Maxwell. "The wind often seems to go down with +the sun and if the wind goes down the water becomes still." + +Without further delay they made their way ashore and preparations for +dinner were at once started. Grant usually did all the cooking, but +to-day he had an abundance of help. Wood was quickly gathered and a +blazing fire was soon under way. + +Two of the boys were set to work peeling potatoes which were to be fried +in the pan. Others made ready the dishes and collected the knives and +forks. Mr. Maxwell had several good sized bass he had caught before +breakfast, and, what was even better, he had brought along a dozen and a +half ears of green corn, two for everyone present. Was it any wonder +that the young campers' eyes sparkled with anticipation as they saw the +dinner being prepared? + +Their appetites were keen as only those in the woods can understand. The +fragrant odor of sizzling bacon and roasting corn coming to their +nostrils only served to increase their eagerness. + +"Isn't this great?" cried George enthusiastically, when at last dinner +was announced as ready and the pleasant task of disposing of it had +begun. "If anything can beat this, I'd like to know what it is." + +"There is nothing that can tie it even," laughed Mr. Maxwell, who seemed +to be enjoying himself as much as any of the boys. + +"I only hope Pop won't eat so much, he'll sink the Balsam," said Fred +doubtfully. "We have plenty of ballast aboard as it is." + +"You 'tend to your own dinner," advised George very promptly. "I'm too +busy to waste any time talking to you now." + +At last the meal was over, and every one had had sufficient to eat. + +"All ready to start the race?" inquired Mr. Maxwell. + +"Oh," groaned Franklin, "I don't feel as if I could move. I'd rather +crawl off somewhere and go to sleep. I guess I ate too much." + +"I _know_ I did," laughed John. + +"We'd better start though, I guess," urged Grant. "The course is long +and while there's a good breeze now you can't tell how long it will +last." + +"That's right," agreed Mr. Maxwell. "You'd better get ready." + +The boys at once made their way to their respective boats and made the +final preparations for the race. Both boats had had their sails up all +the morning in order to dry them out thoroughly and there was very +little left to be done. + +Mr. Maxwell sat in a canoe near at hand and watched the boys. + +"Remember," he said, "twice around the course. The first lap you go one +way and the second in the opposite. Be very careful to round every +stake. The start is from the same spot as the canoe race and the finish +is there, too. I will fire this pistol as a warning gun, and three +minutes later I will fire it again for the start. Be sure not to cross +the starting line before I give the second signal." + +"All right," said Grant. "We're all ready." + +"So are we," echoed Thomas from the Spruce. + +"Very well then," said Mr. Maxwell. "Get your anchors up and move out by +the starting line." + +This was soon done and a few moments later the two catboats were +jockeying back and forth off the entrance to the little harbor. Fred was +at the tiller of the Balsam and Hugh guided the Spruce. + +The sharp crack of the pistol announced that the race was about to +start. Grant had been waiting, watch in hand, for this signal. + +"Take a short tack out and back, Fred," he urged. "I'll watch the time." + +"Hard-a-lea!" called Fred as he put the tiller over and the Balsam came +around into the wind. His crew quickly shifted sides, the sheet was +hauled taut, and the trim little boat scudded swiftly along before the +fresh breeze. + +"Better go back now," advised Grant when they had covered fifteen or +twenty yards. He scarcely lifted his eyes from his watch which he still +held in his right hand. "We've got a minute and a half more." + +Once more the Balsam came about and began to retrace its short course +towards the starting line. The Spruce was just off its starboard side, +with bow pointing directly into the wind and consequently was almost +stationary. + +"We'll cross the line too soon," exclaimed John nervously. "We'll have +to come back if we do." + +"Leave that to me," said Grant confidently, his eyes still on the +second-hand of his watch. "I'll look out for that." + +"We're not a dozen feet from the line now though," cried John in alarm. +"You'd better come around, Fred." + +"Don't you do it," exclaimed Grant sharply. + +Closer and closer to the line they came. John, and for that matter Fred +and George also were intensely nervous for fear they should cross the +line before the signal. Grant, however, seemed confident that they were +on the safe side. + +"We'll have to turn around and start all--" began John, when Grant +suddenly interrupted him. + +"Now," he cried, and barely the fraction of a second behind his voice +came the sound of the starting gun. Almost simultaneously the Balsam +crossed the line; away to a splendid start and with a good lead of at +least fifteen or twenty feet on the Spruce. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XX--GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS + + + +"I take it all back, Grant," exclaimed John. "You're all right." + +"It was certainly close though," said Fred solemnly. + +"But 'close' doesn't count in any game, you know," laughed Grant. + +"How about quoits?" inquired George. + +"That's right, Pop," exclaimed Grant, "it does count in quoits, but I +don't know of any other." + +"We'd better attend to our sailing," warned Fred. "Trim that sheet in a +little, String." + +"That enough?" + +"All right," said Fred. "My, I hope this breeze holds." + +"It's getting stronger, I think," said George. + +"It does seem to be," agreed Grant. "It's dead ahead of us now, but if +it doesn't change, it'll be right behind us on the last leg of the race. +I think it's always fun to be able to finish straight before the wind." + +"That's true," exclaimed John. "We go in the opposite direction the +second round, don't we?" + +The Balsam was skimming over the water rapidly on a long tack to +leeward. Behind her came the Spruce, also making good time and with +about the same distance between the two boats that had separated them at +the start. + +"They're pointing up a little more than we are, I think," remarked +Grant, after a glance at their rival. + +"We're all right, though," said Fred confidently. "I don't believe in +sailing as close hauled as that." + +"Perhaps not," agreed Grant. "At any rate you know more about it than +the rest of us. We'll have to do as you say whether we like it or not." + +They rounded the first stake thirty yards ahead of the Spruce. Fred's +tactics on the first leg had proved successful, anyway. + +"It's easy," exclaimed George confidently, as they slid past the stake +and settled back for the long reach to the next mark. + +"Don't talk like that, Pop," urged John earnestly. "Don't ever boast or +get overconfident; you're sure to regret it if you do." + +"Knock on wood, Pop," laughed Fred. "That'll take away all the bad +effects." + +The four friends were in excellent spirits, for they enjoyed a +comfortable lead which seemed to be steadily increasing. + +"There they come around the stake now," exclaimed Grant, gazing behind +them. "They gave it a little more room than we did." + +"And consequently sailed a little bit farther than necessary," added +Fred. "A few feet doesn't seem very much at the time but in the long run +it amounts to a good deal." + +"On the other hand," said John, "if you cut too close to the stake +you're apt to foul it and then you're disqualified." + +"The answer to that is easy enough," laughed Fred. "Don't hit it." + +"You fellows take more chances than I would," said John doubtfully. "I +believe in playing safe." + +Steadily the Balsam drew away from her rival. The wind was strong now +and the lake was dotted with white-caps. + +"Perhaps the Balsam is a rough-water sailor," remarked Grant. "At any +rate she seems to be doing splendidly in this breeze." + +"If the breeze should die down they'd probably catch right up to us," +said Fred. "Let's hope it doesn't." + +"What makes you think they'd catch us?" demanded John. + +"Nothing. Some boats sail better in one kind of a breeze than in others. +This seems to be suited to a strong wind and I thought it was possible +that the Spruce would do better in a light one." + +"But they're exactly alike," objected John. + +"I know it," replied Fred. "That doesn't necessarily mean they'll sail +just alike, though. I've seen ten boats all built on the same model, the +same size, and everything about them the same, and yet some of them seem +to be twice as fast as others." + +"It must be in the one who handles the boat, then," said George. + +"Not at all. I've seen them swap crews and the same boats win." + +"How do you explain it?" inquired Grant, who always liked to have a +reason for everything. + +"I can't, and I don't believe any one else can, either. Some boats seem +to do well under certain conditions, and that's all there is to it." + +"Well, the present conditions seem to suit the Balsam pretty well," +exclaimed George. "Let's hope they continue." + +The second stake was reached with the Balsam still farther in the lead +than before. The wind steadily increased in strength and forced the +sturdy little catboat through the water at an amazing speed. + +"I didn't know she could go so fast," exclaimed John enthusiastically. + +"None of us did, I guess," said Grant. "She's all right though, isn't +she?" + +"I should say so," cried George. "Say, just look at her go," and he +scrambled over to the other side of the boat. The Balsam was heeled far +over and the lee rail was awash. Now and then a wave, a little larger +than its fellows, slapped lustily against the side and covered the crew +with spray. + +"We'll have to reef her if this wind gets much stronger," said Fred just +before they had completed the first round. + +"What's the use?" demanded George. "It's great this way, and we're +certainly gaining on those fellows all the time." + +"Yes," said Fred, "but you don't want to lose the mast, do you?" + +"Or we might upset," added Grant. + +"Suppose we do," cried George. "It won't hurt us." + +"But we'd lose the race just the same," said Fred. "Let that sheet out a +little there, String. Whenever she heels over like that, give her a +little more rope and I'll bring her up into the wind for a second." + +"That makes us lose time, doesn't it?" asked Grant. + +"I think so. It seems to me that if we stopped and put a reef in the +sail we'd sail more evenly and as a result we'd go faster." + +"Those fellows in the Spruce don't seem to be putting in any reefs, I +notice," remarked George. "If they don't need them I don't see why we +do." + +"But the breeze is getting so much stronger," insisted Fred. "It really +seems to me that we should put in one reef anyway." + +"How long will it take us?" + +"Not two minutes. We can do it in no time." + +"We'd better wait until we round this next stake, I think," said Grant. +"We can do it, then." + +"All right," agreed George. "I don't believe in it, though. I love it +this way," and he exclaimed delightedly as the Balsam heeled far over +and the spray from the crest of one of the white-caps drenched him from +head to foot. + +"It's cold, though," objected John. + +"Nonsense," cried George. "If you were half a man you wouldn't mind it." + +John merely shivered, and placing Grant in temporary charge of the sheet +he crawled forward and drawing his sweater out from under the deck, he +put it on. + +"Get ready now," warned Fred. "The stake is just ahead." + +"And we're going to take in a reef as soon as we round it. Is that +right?" inquired Grant. + +"That's the idea," said Fred. "Here we go," and putting the tiller hard +over he brought the Balsam cleanly around the mark and headed her up +into the wind. + +"Let go that topping lift, Pop!" he cried. "Loose your halyards there, +Grant! Now, String, let's get busy!" + +He left his post, and ordering and helping his comrades, he took charge +of the work of reefing. He had predicted two minutes for the work, but +it took at least five, and before they had finished the Spruce was +almost up to them. + +"Hurry, Fred, hurry!" urged George. "They're catching us." + +"All right," cried Fred, springing back to the tiller. "Haul in your +sheet there, String!" + +The bow of the Balsam swung slowly around and as the sail filled she +began to slip through the water once more. Not twenty-five yards behind +them now came the Spruce, her full sail spread. Thomas waved his hand +and shouted something to the four Go Ahead boys but the wind blew the +sound away and the words were lost. + +"What did he say?" demanded John. + +"I didn't hear," said George. "He probably said they'd catch us in a few +minutes, and I guess they will, too." + +"You're a pessimist, Pop," said Fred, but he looked back anxiously at +the Spruce plowing along behind them. + +"No, I'm not either," exclaimed George. "I do think we made a mistake in +reefing that sail, though." + +"Wait and see," said Fred, but he himself appeared to be anxious. + +"If the wind should die down we'd be in a nice fix," said George in a +discouraged tone of voice. + +"It doesn't seem to be going down now, though," said Grant. "Just see us +go! And look at all the white-caps. I really think we're doing better +than we did before." + +"But we're not gaining on them any more," insisted George gloomily. + +"We don't need to," laughed Grant. "All we have to do is to hold our +lead." + +The relative position of the two boats was unchanged at the end of the +first leg on the second round. The Balsam still enjoyed her lead of +twenty-five yards over her rival. They had covered only a short distance +on the second leg when George suddenly remarked that the wind was dying +down. + +"I know it is," he insisted. "Just look; we aren't tipping half as much +as we were." + +"I hope you're wrong, Pop," said Fred anxiously. + +"But I'm not. Can't you see it yourself?" + +"Perhaps you're right. At any rate it may only be a lull." + +In silence the four young sailors watched the sail and looked out over +the water and gazed fearfully at the Spruce so close behind them now. + +"She's gaining," announced John. + +"No doubt of it," said George. "What shall we do?" + +"What can we do?" demanded John in despair. + +"Can't we take the reef out?" + +"If we did," said Fred, "we'd have to stop, and they'd surely pass us, +and whether we'd ever catch them or not would be a question." + +"But won't they pass us if we don't take the reef out?" demanded George. + +"I don't know. We've got to take a chance either way." + +"And no matter what we do," added George, "we're bound to lose." + +"Cheer up, Pop," urged Grant. "The wind hasn't gone down very much and +they haven't passed us yet." + +"Can't we take the reef out while we're going like this?" demanded +George. + +"Oh, we can," said Fred. "It would be awfully hard, though, and +dangerous, too; besides that, we might tear the sail." + +"Let me try it," begged George. "We mustn't lose this race and that's +all there is about it." + +Working under Fred's guidance, and taking desperate chances George +finally succeeded in shaking the reef out of the sail. The halyards were +tightened and once again the Balsam moved along under her full spread of +canvas. + +"Now I feel better," sighed George, as he settled back in the cockpit +once more. "That short sail worried me." + +"We certainly lost a lot of time fooling around there," observed Fred. +"It was all my fault, too." + +"Forget it," exclaimed Grant. "We're still ahead of them, aren't we?" + +"But not much," said Fred, and he glanced hastily around at the Spruce +not more than fifteen yards distant now. + +"I hope they don't get our wind," said George. "It's certainly going +down and we need every bit of it we can get." + +"You're right, Pop," said John. "The wind is lighter and you know what +Fred said about the Spruce probably doing better than the Balsam in a +light breeze." + +Still maintaining their slight advantage the Balsam turned the last +stake and started down the home stretch. The wind was dead astern of +both boats now and the sails were stretched at right angles to the mast +in order to get the full benefit of the breeze. + +"They'll blanket us, I'm afraid," muttered Fred gloomily. + +"What do you mean by that?" asked George. + +"Why, they'll get right behind us and shut off all our wind." + +"Don't let them do it, then." + +"You don't think I'd let them on purpose, do you?" + +"They'll catch us on this straight away, I'm afraid," said Grant in a +low voice. The boats were so close together now it was necessary to +speak softly to keep from being overheard. + +"Everybody move back towards the stern," ordered Fred. "Perhaps if we +get her bow out of water a little she'll do better." + +They followed Fred's directions, but little by little the Spruce crept +up on them. The wind was dropping rapidly; it seemed that on this +woodland lake storms and winds came and went with equal facility. + +The Spruce had blanketed their boat momentarily as Fred had predicted. +Drawing even, however, the Balsam once more caught the breeze and the +racers moved forward on even terms. + +"We certainly have some great finishes, don't we?" called Hugh from the +other boat. + +"Well, I should say so!" exclaimed Grant. "They're heartbreaking." + +All at once George left his seat and moved forward. + +"Where are you going, Pop?" demanded Fred. "You'd better come back here +and sit down." + +George, however, paid no attention to this advice nor did he deign any +answer. He continued serenely on his way until his reached the forward +deck. Straightening himself up, his amazed companions saw him place his +right hand on the mast and scratch it with his finger-nails. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXI--HOW THE PLAN WORKED + + + +"He's gone crazy," muttered Grant. "What does he think he's doing?" + +George, having completed his strange performance, returned to the stern +of the Balsam and quietly resumed his seat. + +"What were you trying to do?" demanded John curiously. + +"I scratched the mast." + +"I know you did. Why did you do it?" + +"To give us more breeze." + +"I suppose scratching the mast is going to make the wind blow," and John +laughed loudly. "I think you're crazy, Pop." + +"Wait and see," said George calmly. "I remember that I once read +somewhere about sailors scratching the mast when they wanted a breeze, +so I thought I'd try it. We need to try everything if we want to win +this race. They're ahead of us now." + +"All right," smiled John. "I guess you didn't do any harm anyway." + +"That's the way I figured," exclaimed George. "All sailors are +superstitious and they believe in those things. As long as we're +sailing, why don't we try them ourselves?" + +"Where's your breeze?" demanded Grant. + +"There it comes," said George, pointing astern of them. A puff of wind +was approaching and a patch of the water could be seen to be ruffled by +its breath. A moment later it struck the Balsam and in answer the little +catboat increased its speed. + +"Why won't the breeze help them as much as it does us?" inquired Fred. + +"We'll hope they won't get any of it," said George. "You notice that +that last puff didn't hit them and that we gained a little by it." + +"It's certainly close," said Grant. "We don't want another tie, though, +and we don't want second place, either." + +"Only a quarter of a mile to go," said Fred. "We'll need more wind." + +"Scratch the mast again, Pop," urged John. + +George did so and another gust of wind caught them and drove them along +a little faster. + +"Isn't that queer?" exclaimed Grant. "It seems to work though. Try it +again, Pop." + +Again George scratched the mast and once more a puff of wind caught +their sail. The Balsam was now several feet ahead of her rival and +rapidly approaching the finish. + +"Don't do it any more, Pop," urged Fred. "At least don't do it as long +as we are ahead. If they catch up to us try it again. Of course it's all +luck, but it is certainly strange, isn't it?" + +"It surely is," agreed John. "How do you account for it?" + +"You can't account for it," exclaimed Grant. "You don't suppose that +scratching the mast really makes the wind blow, do you? It has just +happened that way, that's all." + +Nearer and nearer the two boats came to the finish. Waiting for them was +Mr. Maxwell, seated in one of the canoes, on a line with the tape. + +"A little more sheet, String," said Fred. "That'll do." + +"They're almost up to us," whispered John, doing as Fred had ordered. +"Let Pop scratch the mast again." + +George was eagerly awaiting a signal to do this very thing. Fred nodded +to him, and using both hands this time George scratched the mast +lustily. Call it coincidence or luck or whatever you like, a strong puff +of wind struck the Balsam almost immediately. She heeled over and for +the first time in a half-hour made such speed that it was possible to +hear the water rippling under her bow. + +"Here we go!" cried George lustily, and with a rush the Balsam swept +forward and crossed the line a good six feet ahead of their rival. + +"Balsam wins!" shouted Mr. Maxwell, and a hearty cheer for the victor +was immediately given by the crew of the defeated boat. + +"How did you like my stunt?" grinned George proudly, addressing his +remarks to his three companions. "Any time you want to win a sailing +race just come to me and I'll tell you how to do it." + +"Huh!" snorted Fred, "I suppose you'll have a big head for the next year +on account of that." + +"Look here, Fred," exclaimed George, winking at his other friends. "I +wouldn't say very much if I were you. You insisted upon reefing the sail +and as a result we nearly lost the race; if it hadn't been for my great +brain and cleverness we surely would have been beaten. However, as long +as it turned out the way it did I will forgive you." + +"I made an error of judgment and yours was nothing but luck," retorted +Fred. "I want you to remember that, too." + +The boats were now returning to their moorings and when they had been +made fast the crews went ashore and met on the dock to talk things over. + +"You boys certainly have the closest finishes I've ever seen," exclaimed +Mr. Maxwell. "You don't try to fix them that way, do you?" + +"Not if we can help it, I tell you," said Thomas laughingly. "I thought +we were going to win this last race." + +"So did we," exclaimed Grant. "You would have won, too, if it hadn't +been for George here. At least that's what he says, anyway." + +"What did he do?" inquired Mr. Maxwell curiously. + +"I scratched the mast," said George. + +"'Scratched the mast'!" exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. "Why did you do that?" + +"To bring us more wind." + +"You must be superstitious," laughed Mr. Maxwell. + +"Well," said George, "I never used to be, but I am sort of that way now; +it worked so beautifully." + +"Where did you ever hear of such a thing?" + +"I read about it in some book and as things looked pretty desperate for +us I thought I'd try it." + +"You mean to say that all you have to do when you want a breeze is to go +up and scratch the mast?" + +"Oh, I don't think it would work every time," laughed George. "I guess +it will give you help only when you need it very badly. If you tried it +all the time I suppose you'd soon wear out the charm." + +"Well, you won, anyway," said Mr. Maxwell laughingly. "That makes you +all tied with four and a half points for each team. The swimming race +will have to decide it." + +"Is every one ready for that now?" asked Grant. + +"The red team is ready for anything," laughed Thomas. + +"All right," said Mr. Maxwell. "The race will start just as soon as +possible and remember that the points will be decided, three for first, +two for second, and one for third this time." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXII--A STRANGE PERFORMANCE + + + +A course had been measured one hundred and seventy-five yards in length. +The start was from a large rock that stood out of the water some fifteen +yards off shore and the finish was at the dock. + +The contestants made their way to the starting point by way of the +shore; at least they walked until they came to a spot directly opposite +the big rock and then waded out as far as possible, swimming the last +few yards. Before many moments had elapsed the eight boys were lined up +in a row waiting for the signal. Mr. Maxwell stood on the dock, a pistol +in his hand. + +"We're counting on you, Grant," John had said as they walked along the +shore. "You've simply got to win." + +"Suppose I do," said Grant. "That'll mean three points for us and unless +we take one of the other places, too, that'll give the red team three +points. If that happens the meet will end in a tie." + +"Maybe George can get a place. He's not a bad swimmer, you know." + +"I know he isn't, but you're just as good yourself." + +"The trouble is we've never seen these other fellows swim and we have no +idea whether they're any good or not." + +"Well, if we do our best we shan't have any reason to kick, I guess," +laughed Grant. + +He was far and away the best swimmer of the four Go Ahead boys, and so +often had he proved his superiority over them that it was now taken for +granted. He was the only one who had mastered the crawl stroke. He knew +it so well that it was almost second nature to him now, but to his three +companions it still remained a mystery. That it is not an easy thing to +acquire will be vouched for by any one who has attempted it. Fred was a +wretched swimmer and knew perfectly well that he stood no chance in the +race; he entered merely because he did not wish to miss anything. John +and George were about on a par, both of them good average performers, +but nothing more. + +"All ready?" shouted Mr. Maxwell through his megaphone. + +"Everybody ready?" asked Thomas. + +Every one said he was and Thomas waved his hand to the judge. All eyes +were fixed upon the figure standing on the dock, his right arm upraised +with the pistol in his hand. + +They had not long to wait. A flash and then the sharp report of the +revolver, and almost together eight gleaming white bodies hit the water. +Fred was the one exception; his position had been next to George and +when the signal for the start was given he had been a trifle slow in +diving. + +A mad scramble ensued the moment all the contestants were in the water +together and there was much splashing and confusion. Fred was behind the +others and consequently bore the brunt of the whole mixup. He had not +taken two strokes when George, who was ahead of him, struck him +violently in the stomach with his foot. + +It was a powerful blow and well nigh knocked all the wind right out of +Fred's body. "Ugh!" he groaned and sank from sight. + +George turned in alarm to see who it was that had been on the receiving +end of his effort and was just in time to see Fred reappear puffing and +gasping. This sight seemed to tickle George immensely and he began to +laugh. Fred choked and gargled and wheezed and try as he would, George +could not control his laughter. + +Meanwhile the other six contestants were far ahead and one glance +convinced George that he and Fred were hopelessly out of the race. + +"What's the matter with you?" exclaimed Fred angrily. + +"I didn't mean to kick you," said George, and once more he burst into +loud and uncontrollable laughter. + +"I'm not talking about that," cried Fred even more aroused by the +spectacle of his friend's mirth. "Why did you drop out of the race?" + +"I got laughing so when I saw your face that I forgot all about the race +and everything else. I never saw such a funny sight in all my life." + +"Huh," snorted Fred. "You're a nice one. We'll probably lose the meet on +account of you." + +"I couldn't help it," cried George, and once more he began to laugh. "I +just started laughing and I couldn't stop." + +"Come ashore before you drown, you idiot!" exclaimed Fred, and side by +side they made their way to land. + +The other contestants were now strung out in a long line. Grant was +easily in the lead and it seemed a foregone conclusion that he would win +the race. Like some great fish he plowed through the water. His feet +worked fast and evenly while his hands reached out with a great sweep +and drove him speedily along. His face was under water most of the time; +every few strokes he rolled over on one side, sucked in a great mouthful +of air and then continued as before. + +The real race was for second place and there were three in it. Hugh, +Thomas, and John went along almost abreast. John could see that Grant +would win the race easily enough, but he realized that in order to win +the meet it was necessary for him to finish at least third. He was a +good swimmer but was not a racer. Many times he had covered long +distances in the water but had paid scant attention to developing his +speed. + +He used a powerful overhand stroke and when he was moving slowly he was +practically tireless. He now was worried, however. He did not dare look +around to see where George was for fear he might lose a few precious +inches. He did not expect to see Fred, for he knew that his small +comrade was a very poor swimmer. He had considered himself and George +about on a par and he wondered how it could have happened that he had +outdistanced him so far. Had he known the truth undoubtedly he would +have been just as angry as Fred had been and his speed certainly would +not have been benefited as a result. + +Ahead of him he saw Grant and ahead of Grant he spied the dock and Mr. +Maxwell standing on it waiting. It seemed very far away. Beside him swam +Hugh and Thomas, one on his right and the other on his left. They were +breathing hard and splashing heavily, but still they did not seem to be +slowing up. + +John put forth every effort. He too was becoming short of wind and his +arms and legs began to feel the strain. It had been a hard day and this +last contest was a severe test for all the boys. + +"I must beat one of them! I must! I must!" John kept saying to himself +over and over again. Then the next time he saw his rivals Thomas was +several feet ahead of him and gaining. + +John groaned. Hugh still kept abreast of him and try as hard as he could +John seemed powerless to shake him off. He gritted his teeth and strove +desperately to make his arms go still faster. Nature could not be forced +however; his arms seemed made of lead and every time he raised them he +wondered if it would not be the last. + +Far ahead he saw Grant only a few feet from the dock. Thomas, too, was +many yards in advance of him now. "I simply can't keep it up any +longer," thought John, and the next instant, "Don't quit," he told +himself, and he forced his tired muscles to carry him along a few +strokes more. He set his jaw determinedly and decided he'd keep it up +till he reached the dock no matter what happened later. + +Suddenly an idea struck him. "Perhaps Hugh is just as tired as I am," he +thought. "In that case all I have to do is to keep on swimming at a +moderate pace and I'll beat him." + +Hugh was certainly splashing more than he had been and evidently was in +trouble. "I'll get him yet," thought John and for a moment he felt +stronger. "I've forgotten the others though," he suddenly realized and +the fear that some one would creep past him before the finish assailed +him all at once. He decided to roll over on his back and look. + +He did so and behind him he saw only two swimmers. They were not near +enough to be dangerous however and John did not even recognize them. +That two of the contestants were missing he did not notice at all. + +Often when swimming long distances he had turned over up on his back in +order to rest and now he was surprised to find how even a few strokes in +that position relieved his aching muscles. The finish was close at hand +now, however, and he dared not continue in that fashion any longer. He +rolled over and resumed his overhand stroke. + +Grant was already on the dock standing beside Mr. Maxwell. Thomas had +just reached the goal and was pulling himself up out of the water. To +his surprise John noticed that in spite of the fact that he had been +swimming on his back Hugh had not gained anything on him. His brief rest +had refreshed him considerably and with added confidence he struck out +for the finish. Without really noticing it he was aware that Hugh was +floundering more than ever. He did not turn to look, however, but +concentrated every effort on his swimming, and still struggled on +towards the goal. + +He lost sight of Hugh; he saw nothing but the dock ahead of him. His +lungs cried for mercy and his muscles ached, but vigorously he still +kept going. After what seemed centuries he reached the dock, not knowing +whether he had beaten Hugh out or not. In fact he did not care much now. +He had gained the dock at last and he was happy. + +He raised his eyes to look about him and what he saw was very strange +indeed. Mr. Maxwell, standing fully clothed on the dock, suddenly dove +right over his head into the water. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII--AN UNEXPECTED HONOR + + + +Tired as he was John realized that this was strange proceeding. He tried +to pull himself up on the dock, but he was too weak and slipped back +into the water. + +"Grant," he called, "give me a lift." + +"Come ahead," cried Grant, bending over and extending his hand to John. + +With this help the tired boy lifted himself out of the water and sank +down on the dock almost completely exhausted. He lay flat on his back, +his eyes closed. + +"Where's Hugh?" he panted. "Did I beat him?" + +There was no answer. + +"Grant," said John. "Did I beat Hugh?" + +Still no reply, and he opened his eyes to see what the reason for the +silence was. He slowly raised himself to one elbow and looked about him. +Black spots danced before his eyes and at first he saw nothing; then his +eyes suddenly became accustomed to the surroundings and he gasped. For +the moment he had forgotten that he had seen Mr. Maxwell jump into the +water but he remembered it now and he saw the reason for it. + +Grant had finished the race and not greatly tired had been standing +alongside Mr. Maxwell watching the others approach. The race between +John and Hugh was what interested them most for they saw that Thomas +would finish an easy second and so the final outcome of the meet +depended on these two. + +"A pretty tight race," remarked Grant. + +"I should--" began Mr. Maxwell when he suddenly stopped and stared. + +John had just turned over on his stomach again for the final dash. Hugh +was at his shoulder and the onlookers were enjoying the close finish. +Suddenly, however, Hugh disappeared from sight. He simply sank beneath +the water with no warning whatsoever and John reached the dock alone. + +"He's exhausted," cried Mr. Maxwell, and without waiting an instant he +dived into the water, fully clothed as he was, to rescue his nephew. + +When John opened his eyes he saw Mr. Maxwell in the water, swimming for +the dock with one hand and holding Hugh by the hair of his head with the +other. + +"What's the trouble, Grant?" demanded John. + +"Hugh sank." + +"What was the matter with him?" + +"He was tired out, I guess. Here, let me have him now," he said to Mr. +Maxwell and leaning out from the dock he seized Hugh by the arms. His +uncle gave the half-drowned boy a boost and he was soon stretched out at +full length on the little wharf. + +"That was a close call," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell grimly as he clambered +out after him. "It's a lucky thing he was so near the dock. Where are +the rest of the boys?" + +"Here are two of them," said Grant as Franklin and Herbert swam +leisurely up to the dock. Seeing that they were hopelessly beaten they +had not exerted themselves the last seventy-five yards of the race. + +"Where are the other two?" exclaimed John anxiously. He had recovered +most of his breath and strength now and not seeing George or Fred was +fearful lest the fate that Hugh had so narrowly escaped had befallen +them. + +"Turn around and you'll see." + +George and Fred came walking towards the dock. + +"Where did you two come from?" demanded John in surprise. "The last I +saw of you was when we all dived off that rock together. How did you get +up on shore that way?" + +"Have you ever been kicked by a mule?" asked Fred. + +"What are you talking about?" John was completely mystified. + +"I asked if you'd ever been kicked by a mule." + +"What has that got to do with this race?" + +"Simply this," said Fred. "A mule kicked me in the stomach at the start +of the race and I had to quit." + +"I think you're crazy," exclaimed John. "What happened to you, Pop?" + +"He was the mule," said Fred. "Who won the race anyway?" + +"Tell us what you're talking about first," said John, beginning to get a +little bit angry. "Stop talking in riddles." + +Fred explained how his stomach had come in contact with George's foot +and how, as a result, they had both been compelled to give up the race. +The tale provided much amusement to the listeners and even Hugh, who had +partly revived, joined in the laughter. + +"I'm no mule though," insisted George. + +"You've got a kick like one just the same," laughed Fred. "Tell me," he +continued, "who won the race." + +"Grant won," replied Mr. Maxwell. + +"Good work, Grant," cried Fred. "Who was second?" + +"Thomas." + +"When you tell me who was third you'll also tell me whether we won the +meet or not. Who was it?" + +"John was third," said Grant. + +"John?" exclaimed George in mock surprise. "It can't be possible." + +"Don't get so fresh," said John and he gave George a violent push which +sent him flying off the end of the wharf into the water. + +"Serves him right," said Fred approvingly. "He's very much too fresh." + +George came to the surface, gasping and choking. + +"Congratulations, String," he cried as soon as he had shaken the water +out of his eyes. "Glad you got a place; I thought you would." + +"You can't keep that fellow down," laughed Fred. "There's no use in +trying. He's fresh and he knows it, but no matter what you do to him he +keeps it up just the same." + +"He's not fresh," laughed Mr. Maxwell. "He's just full of spirits." + +"I don't know what we'd do without him anyway," said Grant feelingly. +"There are not many dull moments when Pop is around." + +"I would suggest," said Mr. Maxwell, "that you boys go and put your +clothes on. The sun is beginning to go down and it'll be cold soon." + +"I'm cold now," exclaimed John. "I'm going to get my clothes all right." + +He hurried off towards the tent closely followed by the seven other +boys. A brisk rub down with heavy towels soon got their blood to +circulating once more and no one felt any ill effects from all their +exercises and exertion of the day. + +"Now I shall present the prizes," said Mr. Maxwell when the boys were +assembled in front of the tent. "The blue team wins the meet by the +margin of eight points to six. I congratulate them and take great +pleasure in presenting to them the big American flag. They all know how +I feel about it and I expect them to treat it as it should be treated." + +"Three cheers for the blue team," cried Thomas lustily and they were +given with a will, as Grant stepped forward to receive the trophy. + +"And now the second prize," said Mr. Maxwell. "It's not as big as the +first but the size doesn't count. Everything depends on whether our +hearts are with the flag or not. If I should happen to come back to this +lake unexpectedly any time this summer I shall expect to see both these +flags flying in front of their respective tents." + +"We'll promise that all right," said Thomas readily, and as he took the +emblem from Mr. Maxwell's hand, Grant led a cheer for the red team. + +"One more prize," continued Mr. Maxwell. "I brought something which I +decided should go to the boy who in my judgment gave the best individual +performance. That is who in any one event showed the most nerve and +grit. Perhaps he didn't win the event but he worked hardest and that is +what to my mind deserves the credit." + +He produced a large four-bladed pocket knife and held it up for the +eight boys to see. This was a surprise to them all and they looked at +one another in amazement. They also cast many envious glances at the +knife which was certainly a beauty and one of which any boy could well +be proud. + +"It was an awful job deciding," said Mr. Maxwell. "Every one did so well +I was almost in despair as to whom to give it to. I have finally +decided, however, and I feel sure you'll all think the boy deserves it." + +Not one of the boys had the least idea who was to become the fortunate +owner of the knife and in keen suspense they all waited. + +"I will now ask the winner to step forward," continued Mr. Maxwell. "I +watched him closely in the contest which I think entitles him to the +prize and I don't remember ever having seen a finer exhibition of pluck. +I know just how tired he was and how much nerve he required to keep +himself going. He didn't win the race himself but he did win the meet +for his team and I think he should have the credit. John, here is your +knife. That was a great race you swam a few minutes ago." + +John was completely taken by surprise. He had not for a moment expected +that he was to be the fortunate one and he was almost overcome. + +"Yea, String!" shouted George heartily. "Let's give the old thin fellow +three cheers." + +Congratulations were in order and there was much laughter and fun. Every +one was in excellent spirits and all pronounced the meet a decided +success. The day was fast waning now and the party of visitors prepared +to leave the island for their camp at the other end of the land. The +four Go Ahead boys escorted them to their boat and good-bys were said. +Promises that the eight boys would see one another soon were made and +the Spruce weighed anchor and glided out of the little harbor. + +"Well," exclaimed Grant when their guests had gone, "I think we had a +pretty fine time to-day." + +"We certainly did," agreed Fred. "What we want now is a pole for our +flag. It ought to be set right up in front of the tent there." + +"I'll get the ax right now and we'll go and cut one," said George. "Come +along, Fred." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV--IN QUEST OF GAME + + + +The days and weeks slipped by and still the life in the island camp did +not pall on on the four Go Ahead boys. They were busy every moment with +the thousand and one duties and pleasures of camp life and the summer +days drifted by like a succession of pleasant dreams. + +One of the boys' favorite occupations was shooting at a target. Fred was +the owner of a little twenty-two caliber, hammerless rifle, and many an +hour was spent by the boys in practice with this small gun. It was +surprising how skillful they had become. + +Grant and John were lying on the wharf one afternoon trying to shoot the +heads off some water lilies that grew near the shore on the opposite +side of the harbor. + +"Now just suppose that one was an Indian," exclaimed John, taking +careful aim at an unsuspecting lily bud. The sharp spit of the little +rifle followed and the bullet struck the water some two feet the other +side of the "Indian." + +"You'll have to do better than that," laughed Grant. "We'll all be +scalped in a minute unless you get him. Let me try." + +John passed over the gun and on his first attempt Grant split the bulb +clearly in halves. + +"Good shot, Grant," exclaimed John. "You saved our lives." + +"Just suppose that had been a lion or a tiger or a rhinoceros or some +animal like that charging down upon us," said Grant. "Suppose we were +caught in a little ravine and we either had to kill the animal or be +killed ourselves. What would you do?" + +"I'd probably be so scared I'd faint or something," laughed John. + +"It would take nerve all right, wouldn't it?" + +"More than I've got, I'm afraid." + +"Oh, I don't know. I think most people are brave when it comes right +down to the point." + +"I hope I'd be, anyway," exclaimed John. "I think a coward is about the +worst thing in the world." + +"Some people that seem the most timid have the most nerve when it's +really needed," remarked Grant. "The ones that talk the loudest are not +always the bravest by a long shot. + +"Perhaps they try to make up by noise what they lack in nerve," laughed +John. "I've noticed that too, and I've also discovered that it doesn't +pay to make fun of anybody. Do you remember that boy at home? Everybody +used to call him a 'sis' and a 'willie-boy' but when Bob Jackson's dog +fell into the mill-race he was the only one who had nerve enough to jump +in after him. That taught me a lesson, I can tell you." + +"I wonder what animal is the most dangerous in the world." + +"A lion is, I guess." + +"I don't think so. Lions are mostly scavengers they say and I've heard +that tigers are worse than they are. A tiger doesn't give any warning at +all when he attacks." + +"Well, I'd just as soon not meet either one of them on a lonely road," +laughed John. + +"Nor I," agreed Grant. "I've heard though that a rhinoceros or an +African buffalo is worse than either a lion or a tiger." + +"How about a grizzly bear?" + +"They're all pretty bad, I guess," said Grant. "I wouldn't stop to argue +with any one of them." + +"Let me have that gun again," exclaimed John. "If we're going to meet +all these ferocious wild animals we'll need more practice in shooting." + +Just at this moment, however, George and Fred appeared. They came out of +the clump of trees behind the tent and seemed very much excited about +something. + +"Hey, Grant!" called Fred. "Where's the gun?" + +"Right here. What's the matter?" + +"Do you remember what you said about wanting to shoot one of those big +herons and have it stuffed?" + +"Yes. Why?" + +"Well, Pop and I discovered one just now in that little marsh over on +the other side of the island." + +"Bring the gun along and maybe you'll get a shot at it," exclaimed +George. "You'd better hurry though." + +"He won't be there now," said Grant. + +"Why won't he?" demanded Fred. "You won't get him if you sit there and +do nothing, like a great big galoot though. Let me have the gun if you +don't want it yourself." + +"Oh, I'll go with you," exclaimed Grant rising to his feet. "I don't +think for a minute he'll still be there though. What was he doing?" + +"Looking for fish, I guess," said George. "He was wading around in the +swamp on those great long legs of his; he looked as if he was on +stilts." + +"Grant doesn't seem very eager, Pop," remarked Fred. "I wish he'd give +us the gun." + +"Come along," cried Grant. "I've been waiting for you to start." + +"Huh," snorted Fred; "listen to that, I think we ought to have the bird +anyway; we discovered him." + +"Did he see you?" asked John. The four boys were now hurrying along +guided by Fred who was slightly in the lead. + +"I can truthfully say that he did not," said George decidedly and Fred +snickered. + +"What's the matter?" inquired Grant suspiciously. "What are you laughing +at?" + +"Nothing," said Fred quickly, but as he looked back at his companions +the suspicion of a smile lurked upon his countenance. + +"There's something funny about this," exclaimed Grant. "I tell you right +now that if you two are putting up a game on me there'll be trouble." + +"I don't believe they saw a heron at all," said John. + +"I tell you we did," exclaimed Fred earnestly. "Pop and I will both +swear to it; we saw one in the swamp over here. Of course we can't +guarantee that he'll still be there when you slowpokes arrive." + +"That's right," chimed in George. "We certainly did see one not five +minutes before we came back to the dock to tell you about it. I don't +see why you need be so suspicious about it." + +"Well, I wouldn't trust you two," said Grant. "You've acted sort of +funny about it too." + +"You only think we have," retorted Fred. "Careful now, the marsh is just +ahead of us." + +"Why don't we sneak up behind those bushes?" suggested George, pointing +to a clump of elderberries a few yards in front of them. + +"That's a good scheme," exclaimed Fred. "We can hide behind them and get +a good view of the marsh without being seen ourselves." + +Stealthily the four boys made their way until they reached the spot +George had designated. On the other side of the bushes and extending for +a hundred yards or so was the swamp where the heron was reported to have +been seen. + +"Careful now," whispered Fred as they crouched behind the clump of +elderberry bushes. "We don't want to scare him away." + +"If he's still there," muttered Grant. He had been suspicious of Fred +and George; their manner had seemed somewhat peculiar to him but they +were serious enough now and his doubts were removed. + +"Do you see him?" asked John eagerly, as Fred peered out through an +opening in the bushes. + +"Not yet." + +"Where was he when you saw him before?" demanded Grant. + +"Down by that point. I don't see him there now though." + +"Let me look," pleaded Grant excitedly. "I haven't seen him yet." + +"Look along the shore," directed Fred, yielding his place to Grant. +"He's more likely to be there than any place else I think." + +As Grant searched the marsh George suddenly made a peculiar noise. It +might have passed for a sob or a chuckle or he could have even been +accused of choking. + +"Stop that," cried Fred fiercely, hitting George sharply in the ribs +with his fist. + +"What's the matter with you two?" exclaimed Grant. He turned quickly +around and eyed his two companions narrowly. + +"I choked," stammered George. "I couldn't help it." + +"If you've been fooling me you'll do worse than choke," muttered Grant +fiercely. "You two are acting very queerly it seems to me." + +"Because I choked?" demanded George. "I don't see what there is queer +about that." + +"Will you swear you saw a heron here?" demanded Grant. + +"I will," exclaimed Fred. "I declare to you, Grant, there was one here. +We saw him first down by that point where I showed you." + +"He's not there now," said Grant. "That much is sure." + +"He may have moved along you know. Just because he isn't in that same +spot doesn't mean that he has left." + +"Well, I don't see him anyway." + +"Let me look," exclaimed George. "My eyes are better than yours." + +Grant exchanged places with George who now seemed to have recovered from +his recent affliction; he scanned the nearby marsh eagerly and was quiet +and serious now. + +"Well?" demanded Grant after a moment had elapsed. + +George turned and looked at the speaker. "Come here," he whispered, +crooking his finger mysteriously. + +Grant, much excited now, crowded up close beside George. Together they +peered out across the swamp. + +"See that dead log lying on the beach down there?" inquired George. + +"Yes." + +"Do you see anything the other side of it?" + +"No." + +"Not a thing?" + +"I don't see anything but the old dead limb of a tree sticking up." + +"That's not a dead limb, Grant." + +"Sure enough," cried Grant excitedly. "Say," he exclaimed, "I saw that +thing before but I thought it was a stick." + +"It's not though," said George triumphantly. "It's a heron and Fred and +I accept your apology for all you've thought about us." + +"Why doesn't it move?" demanded Grant. + +"Don't you know that herons often stand like that for a long, long time? +If you're going to shoot that fellow you'd better get a move on yourself +though." + +"I can't hit him from here." + +"Don't try. Sneak up closer." + +"Give me the gun, Grant," exclaimed Fred. "If you don't care anything +about shooting him I'd like a try at it myself." + +"No, you don't," said Grant quickly, and rising to his feet he crouched +low and began to run swiftly down towards the shore of the lake. + +"Follow those bushes along the shore," directed George. "Don't let him +see you, whatever you do." + +"He's all right so far," said Fred. "He's got good protection down as +far as the water anyway." + +"I hope he gets it," exclaimed John eagerly. "He's certainly a good shot +and that ought to help some." + +"Oh, he'll get it all right," said George. He and Fred looked at each +other for a moment and then both burst into silent but uncontrollable +laughter. + +"What's the matter with you two?" demanded John, completely taken aback +by their strange behavior. + +"Oh, String," said George. "If you only knew." + +"Well, why don't you tell me?" exclaimed John. "What sort of a game have +you put up on Grant anyway?" + +"Do you see that heron he's after?" + +"Yes, of course I do." + +"Well, it's dead. Fred and I found it on the shore and stuck it up +behind that log. Just wait till Grant finds it out," and the two +conspirators hugged each other delightedly. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXV--THE WORM TURNS + + + +Meanwhile Grant was stalking his game. He crouched low and making as +much speed as was consistent with quietness, he hurried along. + +"Just look at him!" cried George ecstatically, as now and again the +hunter could be seen to stop and peer cautiously in the direction of his +prey. + +"I should think the fact that it hasn't moved would make him +suspicious," remarked John. + +"He thinks herons always act that way," chuckled Fred. "I can hardly +wait for him to shoot." + +"You follows nearly queered your whole game a couple of times all +right," said John. "We were both suspicious of you. Why, twice you had +grins on your faces so long you could almost pin them in the back." + +"It was so funny," laughed George. "To think how we planned the whole +thing and how easily he fell into it. Why, it was almost too easy." + +"Don't be too sure," warned John. "He hasn't fired yet, you know." + +"He will all right," said Fred confidently. "The old bird has been dead +for about a month and you just ought to smell it." + +"Won't he be mad?" exclaimed George. This thought seemed to give him +special pleasure. + +"He'll probably shoot us," laughed Fred. + +"Where is he now?" inquired John. "I don't see him." + +"He's down behind that rock," said George. "There he comes." + +"He'd better shoot pretty soon," chuckled Fred. "The bird will fly away +if he isn't careful." + +"Isn't this rich?" exclaimed George. "Just think of putting up a game on +Grant like this." + +"Look at him!" cried Fred. "He's almost on his hands and knees now." + +"Shoot, Grant, shoot!" urged George. + +Nearer and nearer to the heron Grant crept. He had his gun half raised +as he stole along, prepared to shoot at any moment. His three companions +intently watched him, thoroughly enjoying the whole affair. + +"If he doesn't shoot pretty soon he'll see that it's dead," said John. + +"He's trying to get up behind that bush, I think," said George. + +"He's taking a chance," laughed Fred. "The heron will see him and fly +away if he isn't more careful." + +"There he goes!" exclaimed George. "He's going to shoot." + +"And now for the fun," cried Fred. "Won't he be mad though?" + +Grant stopped and sinking to one knee he raised the little rifle to his +shoulder. + +"Don't miss him, Grant," chuckled Fred. + +The gun spoke, and a moment later the faint report came to the ears of +the three boys who watched from behind the elderberry bushes. + +"Did he hit him?" laughed George. "What's he doing?" + +Grant had jumped to his feet after the first shot and started to run +along the shore. He came to the log where the dead heron had been +propped up but he did not stop there. He continued on past this spot and +the conspirators for the first time had an inkling that all was not +going as they had hoped. + +"What's happened?" demanded John in surprise. "What's he after?" + +"I'm sure I don't know," said Fred blankly. + +Some fifty or sixty feet beyond the spot where the dead log lay Grant +continued. Not one of his friends had been looking at this place for +their attention had been riveted on the dead heron. + +The grass grew level with Grant's knees where he was now. He leaned over +and seemed to be looking down at something on the ground at his feet. + +"What do you suppose it is?" demanded George curiously. + +"Look," exclaimed John and as he spoke Grant lifted from the grass a +great blue heron. He held it by the feet and turning towards the bush +where his companions were he waved his gun. Then he slung the big bird +over his shoulder and started to retrace his steps. + +George, Fred, and John had watched these proceedings in open-mouthed +amazement. + +"Well, what do you know about that?" exclaimed George limply. + +"I guess he's got us all right," sighed Fred. "Let's skip back to camp +before he gets hold of us." + +"We'd better stay and face the music," said George with a sigh. "Doesn't +that beat all? Just when we thought we had him good and fooled, he turns +around and puts the joke on us." + +"I don't see yet what happened," exclaimed John. + +"Why, he saw another heron, that's all," said Fred. "It was a live one +too, I guess." + +"Where's the one you and Pop fixed up for him?" + +"Still there behind the log." + +"Grant never even looked at it," said George. "He'll make our lives +miserable all the rest of the summer." + +"It's almost over now," said Fred. "He can't tease us long." + +In silence the three boys sat and watched their comrade approach. John +did not dread the meeting so much, for he had not been one of the +original conspirators, but Fred and George looked forward to Grant's +arrival with anything but pleasure. + +"What do you think of him?" cried Grant as he held up his prize for his +friends to see. "Isn't he a beauty?" + +"He's all right," said George weakly. + +"What's the matter, Pop?" demanded Grant. "You don't seem very +enthusiastic. Don't you like his looks?" + +"He's fine," replied George in a hollow voice. + +"Where did you find him?" demanded Fred bluntly. + +"Right where I shot him," said Grant. "You saw the spot where I picked +him up, didn't you?" + +"We saw it all right," said Fred grimly. "We haven't a word to say +either. You have the joke on us all right, Grant. All I ask is that you +don't rub it in too much." + +"I won't," laughed Grant. "It was awfully funny the way it turned out. I +never suspected at first that the heron you pointed out to me was dead. +I kept sneaking up as close as I dared and the thing never moved a bit +and it began to strike me as sort of queer. Then I remembered how you +fellows had snickered a couple of times and I felt pretty sure that +something was wrong. + +"All of a sudden I saw this bird just a few yards beyond the log. I knew +then that my chance had come to turn the joke on you, but I was so +anxious my arm was shaking like a leaf. I was afraid I surely would miss +and when I saw that I hadn't, I can tell you I felt pretty good. Here's +the heron and if you two fellows want yours you'll find him down by that +log. He smells a little strong though." + +"Let's go back to camp," exclaimed George. + +"All right," laughed Grant. "As long as you don't like the subject, I +won't say too much about it." + +Laughing and joking they made their way back towards their camp. George +and Fred realized how badly they had fared in their attempt to play a +practical joke, but they were good sports and consequently good losers. +They joined in the fun at their own expense, and were unstinted in their +praise of the prize Grant had gained. + +"We certainly got more than we were looking for that time," said George +laughingly. "You are----" + +He suddenly ceased speaking and gazed in surprise in the direction of +the tent. + +"What's the matter?" demanded John anxiously. + +"Some man with a big black beard just ran around the other side of the +tent," exclaimed George. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI--AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER + + + +"Are you sure you saw a man?" asked Grant skeptically. + +"I know I did," replied George with the utmost conviction. + +"What did he look like?" + +"He looked like a tramp; a rough looking sort of a fellow with a black +beard and an old slouch hat." + +"Only one man?" + +"That's all I saw." + +"What shall we do?" demanded Fred blankly. + +"We'll go down and see what he wants," said George in a matter of fact +tone. "What else is there to do?" + +"Suppose he's looking for trouble?" suggested Fred. + +"Well then, he'll find it," said George grimly. "There are four of us to +his one." + +"He may not be alone," said Fred. "I think we'd better go slow." + +"Grant has a gun." + +"But he's not going to use it," said Grant quickly. "You don't catch me +shooting at anybody, tramp or no tramp. I don't want any blood on my +head." + +"Suppose they attack us?" demanded George. + +"'They,'" exclaimed Grant. "I thought you said you saw only one." + +"That's all I did see. There may be more of them though." + +"Probably a couple of guides," said John. "Let's go find out anyway." + +"I'd be careful," warned Fred. "There's no use in taking chances." + +"What's the matter with you, Fred?" demanded George. "What are you so +nervous about?" + +"I don't know. It seems funny to me though that a man like that should +be hanging around our tent." + +"He's probably waiting for us to come back." + +"Then why did he duck behind the tent the minute he saw us?" + +"Maybe he didn't see us at all." + +"The thing to do is to go down there and find out," exclaimed Grant. +"Come on, Pop, you and I will go anyway." + +"And so will I," added John. + +"I'll go myself," said Fred. "I'm not afraid; all I said was that I +thought we ought to be careful." + +"We'll be careful," George assured him. "Come along." + +The little band once again started towards the tent. As Fred had +remarked it seemed a strange thing that any man like the one George had +seen should be loitering around their camp. They had had no visitors +that summer aside from their opponents in the water sports and Mr. +Maxwell, and the appearance of a stranger on the island was unusual +enough to cause them some alarm. + +Side by side they walked towards the spot where their tent was pitched. +No further sign of their visitor appeared and this in itself made the +four boys somewhat uneasy. + +"Where did he go, do you suppose?" whispered John. + +"Are you sure you saw a man, Pop?" demanded Grant. + +"Of course I did. Do you think I'm crazy?" + +"Where is he then? No one else saw him." + +George made no reply to this remark and in complete silence they +continued on their way. At length they came to the tent itself but no +one was to be seen. They peered inside, but it was empty of any living +person. Grant turned to George triumphantly. + +"You're seeing things to-day," he laughed. He laid the heron on the +ground in front of the tent and placed his gun inside. + +"I saw a man," insisted George. + +"And you tried to make me see a live heron that was dead," said Grant. + +"It's certainly strange," muttered George. "I know I saw a man. I'd take +my dying oath on it." + +"But where is he?" demanded Grant. + +"That's just what I say," rejoined George. "Where is he?" + +"He doesn't seem to be--" began John, when he suddenly stopped. "Look," +he cried and pointed towards the shore. + +Two men were seated under a small tree which grew half-way between the +wharf and the tent. Their backs were towards the boys so that it was +impossible to see who they were. The back view however was not very +reassuring. The strangers appeared to be rough and unkempt and were +busily engaged in eating some food they had evidently helped themselves +to from the stores of the four young campers. Both men seemed entirely +unaware that they were being watched. + +"How did they get there without our seeing them?" whispered John. "Pop +saw one of them up by the tent." + +"The tent is between that tree and the place where we were standing," +said George. "It shut off our view and they probably walked down there +while we were coming towards the tent." + +"What shall we do?" whispered Fred. + +"Yell at them," suggested John. + +"Don't you do it," cautioned Grant quickly. + +"For goodness' sake," exclaimed George suddenly in a low voice. "Don't +any one of you fellows move," he ordered them. "Just wait here for me." + +He turned and darted quickly inside the tent while his three companions +were completely mystified by his strange behavior. They gazed after him +in amazement. + +"What's he after?" asked John in a whisper. + +"Maybe he went for the gun," suggested Fred. + +"I wonder if he did," exclaimed Grant. "We mustn't have that," and he +started to follow George inside the tent. + +Just as he was about to lift the flap and enter, however, George +suddenly appeared. He held one of the young campers' big balsam pillows +in each hand and he wore a queer expression on his face. His three +friends looked at him in amazement not unmixed with alarm. + +"What are you going to do?" demanded Grant. + +"Ssh!" hissed George. "Watch me." + +He cautiously stole forward in the direction of the two men. His +companions were too surprised to make any effort to restrain him. +Open-mouthed they stood and watched him stealthily approach the tree +underneath which the two rough-looking men were seated. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII--CONCLUSION + + + +"He's gone crazy," muttered Grant. "We should have held him back." + +On tip-toe and evidently trying to make as little noise as possible, +George stole forward. Nearer and nearer he approached, the pillows still +held firmly in his hands. He slackened his pace as he came closer and +redoubled his efforts to move cautiously. + +"They'll turn and see him in a second," whispered Fred, as much to +himself as to anybody else. All three of the boys were tense with +excitement as they riveted their attention on their companion who to +them was doing such a remarkable thing. + +George was scarcely ten feet distant from the men now. All at once he +stopped. He slowly drew back his right arm and taking careful aim he let +fly the pillow which he held. True to its mark it sped. It struck the +larger of the two men squarely in the neck. The second pillow followed +the other an instant later and it too scored a hit. Both had been aimed +at the same man. + +No sooner had George completed his bombardment than he uttered a wild +whoop and rushed forward. He dashed straight towards the man he had been +so successful in hitting and threw both arms around him. + +Grant, Fred, and John were too taken aback to do more than stand and +gaze stupidly at the strange proceedings taking place before their eyes. +George's actions to them were a complete mystery. + +Suddenly he ceased hugging the rough looking man he had pounced upon so +eagerly and turned to his three camp-mates. + +"Grant!" he cried. "John! Fred! Come here and see who this is." + +"Who is it?" exclaimed John blankly. "Thomas and Hugh?" + +"Here's your father, Fred," called George loudly. "Don't you want to see +him?" + +Fred started violently at these words. He stared ahead of him and then +suddenly gave vent to a wild shriek. + +"Dad!" he cried and rushing pell mell down the gradual incline he threw +himself upon the smaller of the two "tramps." + +"Why it's Mr. Button and Mr. Sanders," exclaimed Grant in surprise. +"Where do you suppose they came from?" + +"All dressed up to look like tramps," added John. "What do you suppose +they are trying to do?" + +"Play a joke on us, I guess," laughed Grant. "Lets go down and see +them." + +They soon joined the little group gathered underneath the tree and a +happy gathering it was. + +"What do you think of these two tramps, Grant?" inquired George when +greetings had been exchanged all around. + +"What do you think of a boy who would hit his poor old father in the +back of the neck with two big pillows?" laughed Mr. Sanders. "That +strikes me as pretty rough treatment." + +"It surely is," agreed Grant. "We usually take him down and duck him +when he gets fresh that way." + +"I'm afraid I can't do that," said Mr. Sanders sorrowfully. "He has +gotten so husky this summer I'd hate to tackle him now." + +"We didn't know you were coming up here," said Fred, addressing his +father and Mr. Sanders. + +"And we didn't want you to know it either," laughed Mr. Button. "We +planned a surprise for you." + +"You gave it to us all right," said John grimly. "We were sure you were +two thugs of some kind who had come up here to rob us." + +"How do you like our costumes?" demanded Mr. Sanders jovially. "Do we +really look like a couple of desperate characters?" + +"You certainly do, Dad," said George. "I never saw worse." + +"How did you dare to throw those big heavy pillows at me then?" + +"I recognized you right away, even from the back. You need a pretty good +disguise to fool your son you know." + +"So it seems," admitted Mr. Sanders and he rubbed the back of his neck +ruefully. + +"Didn't you see us coming?" asked John. + +"No," said Mr. Button. "We arrived here about twenty minutes ago and +didn't find a soul around anywhere. So we just made ourselves at home +and decided we'd have a little luncheon." + +"I saw one of you duck behind the tent," said George. "Then when we +didn't see you again it sort of worried us. Imagine how we felt when we +saw these two rough looking men sitting under the tree here." + +"Where had you boys been?" asked Mr. Sanders. + +"We went out to shoot a blue heron," said Grant. "Ask George about it; +he'll be glad to tell you all the details," and he nudged John who was +standing next to him. + +"I was the goat all right," laughed George, and he proceeded to recount +the story of how he and Fred had tried to put up a game on Grant but had +had the tables turned on them. + +The tale caused much merriment on the part of Mr. Button and Mr. +Sanders. Curiously enough these two men happened to be the fathers of +the boys who had been the victims of their own joke. + +"It served them right, Grant," laughed Mr. Button. "I hate these +practical jokers and am always glad to see them fooled. I notice it +usually happens that way too." + +The party had moved up to a spot directly in front of the tent now and +all were seated in a circle on the ground. The day was waning and the +sun was beginning to sink low in the western sky. A gray haze hung over +the surrounding hills and forests. A strong wind blew off the lake. + +"You know that breeze is cold," exclaimed Mr. Button with a slight +shiver, and he drew his coat closer about him. + +"Why shouldn't it be?" demanded Mr. Sanders. "It's almost fall now and +the summer is practically over." + +"I know it is," exclaimed George. "I hate to think of it too." + +"You've had a good time up here, have you?" inquired Mr. Button. + +"Wonderful," replied all the young campers with one accord. + +"You certainly look so," laughed Mr. Sanders. "You're as tanned as a lot +of Indians and you look just about as wiry." + +"It's been great fun," said John. "We've been out in the air all summer +and on the water so much we ought to be healthy." + +"We'll have to come back here again next summer," exclaimed George. +"What do you say to that, Dad?" + +"Personally I should think you'd rather go to some other place next +time. I like different experiences myself." + +"So do I," agreed Grant. "There are so many wonderful places and things +in the world that it's worth trying to visit and see all of them you +can, I think." + +"That suits me," exclaimed George. "What do you say, Dad? We'll go to +some other place next time." + +"As far as I'm concerned you may," said Mr. Sanders. "Go ahead." + + + THE END + + * * * * * + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES + +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN + +The Outdoor Chums + + On the Lake + In the Forest + On the Gulf + After Big Game + On A House Boat + In the Big Woods + At Cabin Point + +For lovers of the great outdoors (and what boy is not?) this "Outdoor +Chums" series will be a rare treat. After you have read the first book +and followed the fortunes of the "Chums," you will realize the pleasure +the other seven volumes have in store for you. + +These rollicking lads know field, forest, mountain, sea and stream--and +the books contain much valuable information on woodcraft and the living +of an outdoor life. + +The Goldsmith Publishing Co. + +CLEVELAND, O. + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 35957-8.txt or 35957-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/9/5/35957/ + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/35957-8.zip b/35957-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3bf699d --- /dev/null +++ b/35957-8.zip diff --git a/35957-h.zip b/35957-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a942d6d --- /dev/null +++ b/35957-h.zip diff --git a/35957-h/35957-h.htm b/35957-h/35957-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0d1e72 --- /dev/null +++ b/35957-h/35957-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8635 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" > +<head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> + <meta content="The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp" name="DC.Title"/> + <meta content="Ross Kay" name="DC.Creator"/> + <meta content="en" name="DC.Language"/> + <meta content="1916" name="DC.Created"/> + <meta name="generator" content="ppgen (0.82) generated Apr 25, 2011 07:50 AM" /> + <title>The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp</title> + <style type="text/css"> + body {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%;} + p {margin-top:1ex; margin-bottom:0; text-align:justify;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size:x-small; text-align:right; text-indent:0; + position:absolute; right:2%; padding:1px 3px; font-style:normal; + font-variant:normal; font-weight:normal; text-decoration:none; + background-color:inherit; border:1px solid #eee;} + .pncolor {color:silver;} + h1 {text-align:center; font-weight:normal;} + h2 {text-align:left; font-weight:normal;} + h1 {font-size:1.4em; margin-top:4ex; margin-bottom:2ex;} + h2 {font-size:1.2em; margin-top:4ex; margin-bottom:2ex;} + hr.pb {margin:30px 0; width:100%; border:none; border-top:thin dashed silver; clear:both;} + .sc {font-variant: small-caps;} + div.center p {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;} + .caption {font-size: 80%;} + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + </style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp + +Author: Ross Kay + +Release Date: April 25, 2011 [EBook #35957] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + +</pre> + +<p style='text-align:center;font-size:1.4em;margin:2em auto 2em auto;'>THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP</p> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i001' id='i001'></a> +<img src='images/cover.jpg' alt='' width='60%' title=''/><br /> +</div> +<p style='text-align:center;font-size:1.4em;margin:2em auto 2em auto;'>THE GO AHEAD BOYS<br/>IN<br/>THE ISLAND CAMP</p> + +<p style='text-align:center;'>BY</p> +<p style='text-align:center;font-size:1.2em;margin-bottom:1em;'>ROSS KAY</p> + +<p style='text-align:center'>Author of “The Search for the Spy,” “The Air Scout,”<br/> +“With Joffre on the Battle Line,” “Dodging the<br/> +North Sea Mines,” “The Go Ahead Boys<br/> +on Smugglers’ Island,” “The Go<br/> +Ahead Boys and the<br/> +Treasure Cave,”<br/> +etc., etc.</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +PREFACE +</p> +<p> +Every one who loves outdoor life knows the charm and the +pleasures of camping. To look back on the days passed in a tent +by the shore of some forest lake or stream is a source of +never-ending enjoyment to those of us who have had that +experience. In this book I have tried to describe the adventures +of four boys who spent a vacation camping in the Adirondacks, +and who indulged in water sports of various kinds while there. +Many of the episodes are true or at least founded on the +experiences of former boys who enjoyed them. If the boys who may +read this tale will derive some of the pleasure in hearing about +them that the real boys did in participating in them I shall +feel repaid. +</p> +<p style='text-align: right;'>—Ross Kay</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +CONTENTS +</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em'><a href="#chI">CHAPTER I—MAKING CAMP</a><br /> +<a href="#chII">CHAPTER II—A MISHAP</a><br /> +<a href="#chIII">CHAPTER III—JOHN HEARS SOMETHING</a><br /> +<a href="#chIV">CHAPTER IV—SETTING SAIL</a><br /> +<a href="#chV">CHAPTER V—THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS</a><br /> +<a href="#chVI">CHAPTER VI—ADRIFT</a><br /> +<a href="#chVII">CHAPTER VII—AN UNEXPECTED MEETING</a><br /> +<a href="#chVIII">CHAPTER VIII—A PREDICAMENT</a><br /> +<a href="#chIX">CHAPTER IX—DANGER</a><br /> +<a href="#chX">CHAPTER X—WAIT AND SEE</a><br /> +<a href="#chXI">CHAPTER XI—WHAT GEORGE DID</a><br /> +<a href="#chXII">CHAPTER XII—A CHALLENGE</a><br /> +<a href="#chXIII">CHAPTER XIII—THE OUTCAST</a><br /> +<a href="#chXIV">CHAPTER XIV—TALKING IT OVER</a><br /> +<a href="#chXV">CHAPTER XV—PREPARATION</a><br /> +<a href="#chXVI">CHAPTER XVI—GRANT MISSES</a><br /> +<a href="#chXVII">CHAPTER XVII—GEORGE’S STRATEGY</a><br /> +<a href="#chXVIII">CHAPTER XVIII—A CLOSE MATCH</a><br /> +<a href="#chXIX">CHAPTER XIX—A CLOSE SHAVE</a><br /> +<a href="#chXX">CHAPTER XX—GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS</a><br /> +<a href="#chXXI">CHAPTER XXI—HOW THE PLAN WORKED</a><br /> +<a href="#chXXII">CHAPTER XXII—A STRANGE PERFORMANCE</a><br /> +<a href="#chXXIII">CHAPTER XXIII—AN UNEXPECTED HONOR</a><br /> +<a href="#chXXIV">CHAPTER XXIV—IN QUEST OF GAME</a><br /> +<a href="#chXXV">CHAPTER XXV—THE WORM TURNS</a><br /> +<a href="#chXXVI">CHAPTER XXVI—AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER</a><br /> +<a href="#chXXVII">CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION</a></p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<p style='font-size:1.4em; text-align: center; margin-top: 2em;'>THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chI' id='chI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER I—MAKING CAMP</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Here is the place to put the tent, String.” +</p> +<p> +“I think this spot is better.” +</p> +<p> +“Not at all. It’s higher over here and consequently we won’t be flooded +by every rain that comes along and besides that, the flies won’t be so +apt to bother us.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, just as you say.” +</p> +<p> +The boy addressed as “String” had been named John Clemens by his +parents. He was six feet three inches tall, however, and extremely thin +so that the nickname applied to him seemed quite appropriate. At any +rate his friends thought so and that was the name by which he usually +was called. +</p> +<p> +Talking with him and arguing about the location of the tent was Fred +Button, a boy as short as John was tall. He was so small that the +nicknames of Stub, Pewee and Pygmy had all been applied to him, the last +one sometimes shortened to Pyg much to Fred’s disgust. He had found out +long ago, however, that there was no use in showing his irritation at +this for it only served to increase the frequency with which the name +was applied to him. +</p> +<p> +These two boys, together with two of their friends, were pitching camp +preparatory to spending a summer on one of the Adirondack lakes. Grant +Jones was one of these boys and the other was George Washington Sanders. +Grant was the most serious-minded of the four and everything he did he +did with all his heart. As a result he was a leader not only on the +athletic field but in his studies as well. The other boys usually came +to him for advice and looked up to him in many ways. The fact that he +was of a serious nature, however, did not mean that he was not +oftentimes just as full of fun as anybody. +</p> +<p> +George Washington Sanders having been named after the father of his +country, had acquired the name of Pop. He was often in mischief and took +especial delight in teasing his three friends. It was almost out of the +question to be angry at him, however, for he never lost his temper for +more than a moment himself and was always bubbling over with spirits and +fun. He was the life of any crowd he was in. +</p> +<p> +While the argument between John and Fred was in progress Grant and +George approached. +</p> +<p> +“What are you two arguing about?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“We’re trying to decide where to put the tent,” replied Fred. “What have +you two been doing all this time?” +</p> +<p> +“Putting the canoes away,” said Grant. “Where are you going to locate +the tent, anyway?” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said Fred, “John wants it over in that hollow, but I say it +ought to be up on this little plateau.” +</p> +<p> +“I think you’re right, Fred,” said George. “We won’t get so many flies +up there.” +</p> +<p> +“Just what I said,” exclaimed Fred triumphantly. “What do you think +about it, Grant?” +</p> +<p> +“I think your place is better,” said Grant. “Besides everything else +we’ll have a good view of the lake from there.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said John, pretending to be very sad. “You all seem to be +against me so I guess I’ll have to give in.” +</p> +<p> +“You see, String,” exclaimed George with a sly twinkle in his eye, “we +all know so very much more about this business than you do that you +might just as well take our advice in everything.” +</p> +<p> +“You talk too much, Pop,” said John shortly, which remark drew a laugh +of glee from George who had tried to irritate his friend and was +delighted at having succeeded. +</p> +<p> +“I say we all stop talking and get to work on the tent,” said Grant. “We +can do all the fooling we want later.” +</p> +<p> +“Great idea, Grant,” exclaimed George, who was in excellent spirits at +the prospect of all the good times ahead of them. “You’re a wonder.” +</p> +<p> +“You were right when you said Pop talked too much, String,” laughed +Grant. “We’ll put him to work now, though.” +</p> +<p> +In an incredibly short time the white tent was erected on the little +bluff overlooking the lake. It was spacious with plenty of room for the +four young campers and all their equipment, which was speedily stored +away inside. +</p> +<p> +“How about a few fish for dinner?” exclaimed George, when the tent was +in place. “Personally I think they’d taste pretty good.” +</p> +<p> +“Go ahead and catch some, then,” urged John. “I’ll help you eat them.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I didn’t worry about your not helping me out in that way,” laughed +George. “That’s the least of my troubles. What bothers me is who is to +clean the fish.” +</p> +<p> +“The man who catches them always cleans them,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, no, he doesn’t,” laughed George. “Not in this case, anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“How about the cook doing it?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“As I am to do the cooking all summer I can’t say I approve of that +plan,” laughed Grant. “That seems a little bit too much.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, he hasn’t caught any fish yet, anyway,” said Fred. “Let him do +that first and we’ll argue about them afterwards.” +</p> +<p> +“Where are you going to fish, Pop?” asked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I thought I’d try it off those rocks down on the point there,” said +George. “That looks like a likely spot.” +</p> +<p> +“While you’re fishing I’ll cut some balsam boughs and make four beds in +the tent,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“And I’ll get a place ready to make a fire in,” said Grant. “That’ll +take a little time.” +</p> +<p> +“How about you, Fred?” demanded George. “It looks as if you were about +the only loafer in the whole crowd.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll help String cut balsam.” +</p> +<p> +“Very good,” said George haughtily. “You may go now.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll put you in the lake if you’re not more careful,” said John +threateningly, but he laughed in spite of himself. +</p> +<p> +A few moments later every boy was busied with his appointed task. +George, armed with his fishing rod, made off for the end of the little +wooded island. John and Fred disappeared in search of balsam boughs, +while Grant remained behind to make a fireplace. This was an interesting +piece of work, the secret of which he had learned from a guide some few +summers before during a sojourn in the woods. +</p> +<p> +First he selected eight or ten rocks as nearly the size and shape of +cobblestones as he could find. These he placed on the ground in two +parallel rows some twelve inches apart. Both little stone walls thus +formed he endeavored to make as nearly the same height as possible and +before long his fireplace was complete. Between the two rows of stones +the fire was to be made; pots and pans could thus be set over the fire +and rest upon the rocks which formed the walls of the fireplace; in this +way they could be kept from actual contact with the coals and at the +same time most of the heat from the fire was concentrated upon them. +</p> +<p> +This is a very efficient method of making a camp-fire as Grant had +learned from previous experience. Of course, in the case of a temporary +camp or unless there are plenty of rocks close at hand, it is hardly +worth while and it is not the kind of a fire that campers like to sit +around in the evening. As a cooking fire, however, it is one of the +best. +</p> +<p> +Grant had hardly finished this task when John and Fred returned to the +camp. They were loaded down with balsam boughs and staggered under the +weight of the loads they were carrying. With a sigh of relief each boy +dropped his bundle on the ground and sat down to regain his breath. +</p> +<p> +“You fellows look as if you’d been working hard,” laughed Grant. +</p> +<p> +“We have,” panted John. “Just carry a load like that for a while and see +what you think of it.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll take your word for it,” said Grant. “Have you got all you want?” +</p> +<p> +“All the balsam, you mean?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I should hope so,” exclaimed Fred. “At any rate I refuse to go +back after any more. My fingers are all gummy and sticky, too.” +</p> +<p> +“The boughs smell great, though,” said Grant admiringly. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t they?” exclaimed John. “They’ll be wonderful to sleep on.” +</p> +<p> +“You see, Grant,” remarked Fred, “String here is so tall we had to cut +an extra supply to make a bed long enough for him. I’m really quite +worried, too, for fear his feet may stick out beyond the flap of the +tent, anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not as bad as that I hope,” laughed John. “It would be awful, +wouldn’t it, if I couldn’t keep out of the rain?” +</p> +<p> +“You might stand on your head,” suggested Fred. “Your feet sticking +straight up in the air could take the place of umbrellas. They’re big +enough so that they’d shelter you, all right.” +</p> +<p> +“Look here,” exclaimed John, “that sounds like one of Pop’s remarks. I +hope you’re not getting as bad as he is.” +</p> +<p> +“By the way,” said Fred, “where is he? He ought to be back pretty soon.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s still fishing,” said Grant. “I guess he hasn’t had very good +luck.” +</p> +<p> +“He ought to have taken one of the canoes, anyway,” said John. “He can’t +catch anything just standing on the shore.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t know,” said Grant. “He might get some small perch or bass.” +</p> +<p> +“What I want is a good big trout,” exclaimed Fred. “I’ll consider this +summer a failure unless I get one.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe we’ll each get one,” said Grant. “They say there are lots of them +around here.” +</p> +<p> +“Not so much in the lake as in the streams running into it, I guess,” +remarked John. “It seems to me that the big trout are always in small +pools.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’ll try them all,” said Fred eagerly. “I don’t want just to +catch trout; any one can do that. What I want is a big one.” +</p> +<p> +“One you can take home stuffed, I suppose,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“That’s it exactly. I mean to have one, too.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, we might fix up the beds first,” said John. “It won’t take long. +All we want is four piles and we can spread the blankets out on them +when we are ready to turn in. Just think of it; a nice soft +sweet-smelling bed to sleep on and we won’t feel any of the rocks and +roots and bumps that may be under us.” +</p> +<p> +“It sounds fine all right,” laughed Grant. “We’d better get to work +soon, too, for it’ll be dark before long.” +</p> +<p> +“I should think Pop would be back by now, too,” said John. “You don’t +suppose anything could have happened to him, do you?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, I don’t see how—” began Fred, when he suddenly ceased speaking and +listened intently. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Ssh,” whispered Fred. “I thought I heard some one call.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chII' id='chII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER II—A MISHAP</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +All three boys bent their heads and listened intently. The only sound +that came to them, however, was the soft sighing of the breeze through +the treetops and the occasional call of some bird preparing to settle +down for the night. The sun was low in the west, just sinking below the +fringe of the forest which skirted the little lake. All seemed quiet and +serene. +</p> +<p> +“What did you think you heard, Fred?” demanded Grant after the lapse of +several moments. +</p> +<p> +“I thought I heard a call. In fact I was almost—” +</p> +<p> +Once more he stopped suddenly and listened. “What was that?” he +exclaimed. +</p> +<p> +“I heard something, too,” whispered John excitedly. “Listen!” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t hear a thing,” muttered Grant. “I must be deaf.” +</p> +<p> +“There it is again,” cried Fred suddenly. +</p> +<p> +“I heard it, too,” exclaimed John. “It came from that end of the +island.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s the direction Pop took,” said Grant in alarm. “Perhaps there has +something happened to him.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll soon find out anyway,” cried Fred. “Come along!” and he began to +run at top speed in the direction George had gone a short time before. +</p> +<p> +Close behind him followed Grant and John. Every boy was worried and +beset with a thousand and one evil thoughts as to what might have +befallen their light-hearted and well-loved comrade. Almost everything +conceivable in the way of misfortune suggested itself to their anxious +minds. +</p> +<p> +“Keep close to the shore, Fred,” called Grant. “He was fishing, you +know.” +</p> +<p> +Fred did keep as close to the shore as possible, but it was no easy task +a great many times. The island was rough and rocky and heavily wooded, +the trees growing down to the water’s edge in many places. Crashing +through the underbrush and making a great deal of noise the three boys +raced along. Whether or not the cry which John and Fred had heard was +repeated they could not say, for the tumult of their own mad course +drowned out all other noises. +</p> +<p> +After what seemed a long time they came to the end of the island. Here +the forest gave way to the rocks which ran out a considerable distance, +forming a small peninsula. At the tip end were several big boulders +which had become separated from the main island after long years of +action by the water and in order to reach them it was necessary to jump +across several feet from one to the other. Towards these boulders the +three boys made their way. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see anybody,” panted John. +</p> +<p> +“Nor I,” agreed Fred. “I don’t hear anything, either.” +</p> +<p> +“Listen,” warned Grant, holding up his hand. +</p> +<p> +“And look, too,” murmured Fred under his breath. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly John started forward excitedly. “Look,” he cried, “there he +is.” +</p> +<p> +“Where? Where?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Down there in the water. Don’t you see him?” +</p> +<p> +“Help! Help!” came the call, and John, Fred and Grant sped to the +assistance of their comrade. His head showed above the water and he +splashed a great deal in an effort to remain afloat. That he was very +rapidly becoming weaker, however, was plain to be seen. +</p> +<p> +“Give me a hand, somebody,” cried George. +</p> +<p> +“All right, Pop. We’ll be right with you,” Grant reassured him. +</p> +<p> +George was struggling in the water close to one of the big boulders. Its +sides were so steep and high, however, that he was unable to climb out. +From his actions it also appeared as if he were keeping himself afloat +merely with his hands. +</p> +<p> +“Get a stick, Grant,” cried Fred. “You can hold it out for him to take +hold of.” +</p> +<p> +“Where is one? Find one, quick!” exclaimed Grant excitedly. +</p> +<p> +“Here you are,” said John. “This one will do. Take this.” +</p> +<p> +He held out a stick some six or eight feet long which had been lying on +the shore at his feet. Grant seized it eagerly and hastened to George’s +assistance. +</p> +<p> +“Hurry up, Grant!” called George. “I can’t last much longer!” +</p> +<p> +“Here you are!” cried Grant, leaning out from the shore as far as he +dared and holding the stick toward his friend. “Grab hold of this.” +</p> +<p> +After one or two unsuccessful attempts George succeeded in catching hold +of the stick. Grant drew him up as close to the rock as possible and +then Fred and John bending down over the edge seized him by his arms and +quickly pulled him out of the water and to safety. +</p> +<p> +“How did you happen to—” began Fred, when John suddenly interrupted him. +</p> +<p> +“What have you got around your legs?” he demanded in astonishment. +</p> +<p> +“My fishing line,” said George, smiling weakly. “It tripped me up.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I should think it might,” exclaimed John. “How in the world did +you ever get it wound around you like that?” +</p> +<p> +“I had my rod in one hand,” said George, “and I tried to jump from that +rock over there to this one. I landed here all right, but when I jumped +the line got twisted around my ankles and I lost my balance. It finally +tripped me up and I fell into the water. When I got there the line kept +getting more and more tangled up the harder I kicked, until finally I +could hardly move my feet at all. I had to keep afloat just by using my +hands.” +</p> +<p> +“That was certainly a bright trick,” exclaimed Fred. “Why, you might +have drowned.” +</p> +<p> +“I thought I was going to be,” said George grimly. “I was getting pretty +tired.” +</p> +<p> +“Where’s your rod?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“At the other end of the line. A steel rod doesn’t float, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s true,” laughed Fred. “Haul in that line, John.” +</p> +<p> +Of course all the line unrolled from the reel before the rod was rescued +but it was finally brought safely to shore. A large section of the line, +however, had to be sacrificed as it was found almost impossible to +untangle the mass that had wound itself around George’s legs and ankles, +and a knife was necessary to free him. +</p> +<p> +“Where are your fish, Pop?” inquired Fred. “I suppose you dropped them +all when you fell in,” and he nudged Grant as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“I had only one,” replied George ruefully. “He did fall in and I lost +him.” +</p> +<p> +“What kind was it?” +</p> +<p> +“A black bass.” +</p> +<p> +“A big one, I suppose.” +</p> +<p> +“No, he wasn’t either. He was pretty small. I didn’t have any luck at +all.” +</p> +<p> +“You ought to have taken one of the canoes,” said Grant. “You can’t +expect to catch anything from the shore.” +</p> +<p> +“He’d probably upset the canoe,” said Fred. “I don’t think we should +allow him to do anything alone after this.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh!” was George’s only reply to this sally. +</p> +<p> +“Feel like walking, Pop?” asked Grant. “If you do we’d better go back to +camp and get some dry clothes for you.” +</p> +<p> +“I was just thinking that,” said George. “I’m commencing to feel chilly. +These nights in the Adirondacks are pretty cool, I find.” +</p> +<p> +“They certainly are,” John agreed. “Let’s go back.” +</p> +<p> +“I could eat something, too,” remarked Fred. “The cool air also seems to +give you an appetite.” +</p> +<p> +“Come on,” cried Grant, and a moment later the four young campers were +retracing their steps to the tent. +</p> +<p> +Arriving there, George made haste to change his wet garments for some +dry ones. Fred and John collected wood for the fire while Grant made +ready to cook the dinner. A short time later the odor of sizzling bacon +filled the air, lending an even keener edge to four appetites that were +sharp already. The first meal in camp was voted a great success by every +member of the party, and all agreed that Grant was a wonderful cook. +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t this great!” exclaimed George, when the dishes had all been +washed. +</p> +<p> +The four young friends were seated around a camp-fire crowned by a great +birch log that blazed so brightly it lighted up everything for a +considerable distance round about them. +</p> +<p> +“It surely is,” agreed John. “I don’t see how you could beat this.” +</p> +<p> +“Just think of it,” said Fred. “We’re here for all summer, too.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, the summer will go fast enough. Don’t worry about that,” Grant +warned him. “It’ll be over before we know it.” +</p> +<p> +At last the fire burned low until it was nothing but a mass of glowing +embers. John arose to his feet and yawned. “I’m going in and try those +new beds we made this afternoon,” he said. “I’m tired.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m sleepy, too,” exclaimed Grant. “Let’s all turn in.” +</p> +<p> +The few remaining coals from the fire were carefully scattered so that +they could do no damage during the night. These four friends had had +enough experience in the woods to know what a forest fire means. They +also knew that all good woodsmen were careful about such things and +always had regard for the rights of others. +</p> +<p> +Every one was sleepy and it was not long before four tired and happy +boys were stretched upon four sweet-smelling balsam beds, sound asleep. +How long he slept John could not tell when he suddenly awoke with the +feeling that he had heard a cry for help. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chIII' id='chIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER III—JOHN HEARS SOMETHING</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +John sat upright and peered about him in the darkness, every nerve +alert. He heard nothing, however. Perhaps he had been mistaken after +all. George’s mishap that afternoon had been on his mind and probably he +had dreamed of it. +</p> +<p> +Somehow the feeling that he had heard a cry still seemed very distinct, +however, and it gave him a most unpleasant sensation. He listened +intently. He could hear the deep and steady breathing of his three +comrades lying asleep around him, and he heaved a sigh of relief. At +least nothing had happened to them. +</p> +<p> +Not a sound came to break the silence of the night and John began to +feel sure that he had been deceived. He prepared himself to lie down +again and go to sleep. He must have had a nightmare, he thought. Who +could be in trouble on a calm, still night like this? At any rate it was +none of their party and undoubtedly was no one at all. It had all been a +dream, though a most unpleasant one, and John shivered unconsciously at +the recollection. His nerves had all been set on edge, but gradually he +quieted down and once more settled himself to rest. +</p> +<p> +Barely had he closed his eyes, however, when the cry was repeated. There +was no mistaking it this time, and John instantly was wide awake once +more, the cold shivers dancing up and down his spine. Never had he heard +such a voice. Some one evidently was in terrible distress mingled with +fear with which hopelessness seemed combined. The voice trailed off in a +wail of despair that brought John’s heart up into his mouth. +</p> +<p> +It seemed to him that the cry must have awakened his companions as well, +but no, he could still hear their regular breathing even above the +violent pounding of his heart. What should he do? There was no question +about it this time; it had not been a dream. Some one was in trouble and +needed help, and evidently needed it badly. Consequently it was needed +quickly, too, and John was determined to do his best. +</p> +<p> +He leaned over in the darkness and felt for the boy who was lying next +to him. +</p> +<p> +“Grant,” he whispered. “Grant, wake up.” +</p> +<p> +Grant merely groaned and stirred uneasily. +</p> +<p> +“Wake up, Grant,” he repeated, shaking his friend by his shoulder. “Wake +up, I tell you.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you want?” demanded Grant sleepily. “What’s the matter?” +</p> +<p> +“Matter enough,” exclaimed John. “There’s somebody in trouble out here +on the lake and he’s calling for help.” +</p> +<p> +“Is that so?” cried Grant, now wide awake. “Are you sure?” +</p> +<p> +“I heard him call twice.” +</p> +<p> +“Was it a man?” +</p> +<p> +“I think so. I never heard such a voice. It was awful.” +</p> +<p> +“We’d better go see what we can do then,” exclaimed Grant. “Which +direction did the voice come from?” +</p> +<p> +“I couldn’t say; it seemed to come from all over. Oh, Grant, it was +awful.” +</p> +<p> +“Sure you didn’t dream it?” +</p> +<p> +“Positive. I know I heard it.” +</p> +<p> +“Come along then,” said Grant. “We’ll go outside and get one of the +canoes and see what we can find. Maybe we’ll hear it again.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know; it sounded to me as though it was the death cry of some +one. I never heard such a thing in all my life.” +</p> +<p> +“Get your sweater and some trousers,” directed Grant. “Don’t wake Fred +and Pop yet. We’ll see what we can do first.” +</p> +<p> +John and Grant rose carefully to their feet and laid aside their +blankets. Feeling their way, they soon located their clothes and a +moment later, partly dressed, they stepped forth from the tent. The +night was clear, and the moon, in its last quarter, lighted up the trees +and the water in a ghostly manner. +</p> +<p> +“Are the paddles—” began Grant, when the cry was repeated. This time it +seemed only a short distance from their camp and out on the lake. +Perhaps some one had upset a boat and was struggling in the water. +</p> +<p> +“There it is,” cried John, clutching Grant excitedly by the arm. “Did +you hear that? Isn’t that terrible?” +</p> +<p> +“Is that what you heard before?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, the same voice. Hurry! We mustn’t waste a second.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait a minute, String,” and in Grant’s voice was the suggestion of a +laugh. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, if that’s what you heard the other times, I wouldn’t be in a +great hurry if I were you.” +</p> +<p> +“Why not? Are you crazy, Grant? Can’t you tell by that voice that some +one is in trouble? Aren’t you going to help him?” +</p> +<p> +“Did you ask me if I was crazy?” +</p> +<p> +“I did, and I think you are, too. Please hurry, Grant.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, no, I’m not crazy,” said Grant, and there was no mistaking the fact +that he was laughing now. “I’m not crazy, but you’re loony.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a loon you hear out there.” +</p> +<p> +“A loon,” exclaimed John in amazement. “What are you talking about?” +</p> +<p> +“I’m talking about a bird. That noise you hear is made by a bird named a +loon. Haven’t you ever heard one before?” +</p> +<p> +“Never. I don’t see how a bird could sound so like a human being.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what it is just the same,” said Grant, and he was almost doubled +up with laughter now. “I think I’d better wake up Pop and Fred and tell +them about your friend that’s calling for help.” +</p> +<p> +“Are you positive it’s a loon?” +</p> +<p> +“Absolutely.” +</p> +<p> +“Then don’t ever tell a soul,” begged John eagerly. “I’d never hear the +last of it as long as I lived. It would be awful if George ever knew.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re not the first one who’s ever been fooled,” laughed Grant. “You +probably won’t be the last, either.” +</p> +<p> +“Please don’t tell on me, though, Grant. Promise me you won’t.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll see,” said Grant evasively. “I can’t make any promises though.” +</p> +<p> +“How should I know that it was a loon?” demanded John. “I never heard +one before and you yourself say that other people have been fooled the +same way.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s true. Still it’s almost too good a joke on you to keep.” +</p> +<p> +“What is a loon, anyway?” +</p> +<p> +“It’s a bird; it belongs to the duck family, I guess. They live around +on lakes and ponds like this and spend their nights waking people up and +scaring them.” +</p> +<p> +“I should say they did,” exclaimed John with a shudder. “I never heard +such a lonesome-sounding, terrible wail in all my life.” +</p> +<p> +“There it is again,” said Grant laughingly, as once more the cry of the +loon came to their ears across the dark waters of the little lake. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s go back to sleep,” exclaimed John earnestly. “That sound makes my +blood run cold, even though I know it is made by a bird.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you think we ought to tell Fred and Pop about it?” inquired Grant +mischievously. “It seems to me they ought to be warned.” +</p> +<p> +“You can tell them about it if you don’t mention my name in connection +with it,” said John. “If you tell on me though, I swear I’ll get even +with you if it takes me a year.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” laughed Grant, “I won’t say anything about it. At least, +not yet,” he added under his breath. +</p> +<p> +“What did you say?” demanded John, not having caught the last sentence. +</p> +<p> +“I said, ‘let’s go to bed.’” +</p> +<p> +“That suits me,” exclaimed John, and a few moments later they had once +more crawled quietly over their sleeping comrades and again rolled in +their blankets, were sound asleep. +</p> +<p> +The sun had not been up very long before the camp was astir. Sleepy-eyed +the boys emerged from the tent, blinking in the light of the new day. A +moment later, however, four white bodies were splashing and swimming +around in the cool waters of the lake, and all the cobwebs of sleep were +soon brushed away. +</p> +<p> +“That’s what makes you feel fine,” exclaimed George when they had all +come out and were dressing preparatory to eating breakfast. “A swim like +that makes me feel as if I could lick my weight in wildcats.” +</p> +<p> +“You must have slept pretty well last night, Pop,” remarked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I did. Never slept harder in my life.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I didn’t,” exclaimed Fred. “It seemed to me I was dreaming all +night long. Maybe my bed wasn’t fixed just right.” +</p> +<p> +“What did you dream about, Fred?” asked Grant curiously. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, all sorts of things. I thought I heard people calling for help. +That seemed to be my principal dream for some reason.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s funny,” said Grant. “You didn’t dream anything like that, did +you, String?” +</p> +<p> +“No, I didn’t,” said John shortly. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chIV' id='chIV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER IV—SETTING SAIL</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“What shall we do to-day?” exclaimed George when breakfast was over. +</p> +<p> +“We might go fishing,” suggested Fred. “I want a big trout some time +this summer, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, it’s too sunny for trout to-day,” Grant objected. +</p> +<p> +“All right then,” said Fred. “What do you want to do?” +</p> +<p> +“How about taking a sail?” +</p> +<p> +“Is there enough wind?” +</p> +<p> +“Of course there is, and unless I’m very much mistaken its going to get +stronger all the time.” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose we take our lunch along,” said John. “We can be gone as long as +we want then and can go ashore and eat wherever we happen to be.” +</p> +<p> +“Good idea, String,” cried George heartily. “I do believe you’re getting +smarter every day.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you think of my scheme?” demanded John, completely ignoring his +friend’s sarcasm. +</p> +<p> +“It’s all right,” said Grant. “I’m in favor of doing it.” +</p> +<p> +“We can take a couple of rods with us, can’t we?” said Fred. “We might +get a few fish for dinner.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” agreed Grant. “We can anchor and fish from the boat if +we want.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s get started,” exclaimed John. +</p> +<p> +A small catboat was a part of the equipment the boys had in order to +help them enjoy their summer more thoroughly. It now lay at anchor in a +little cove a short distance from the place where the tent was located. +It was a natural harbor and afforded excellent shelter for the boats +from the squalls and not infrequent storms that were apt to spring up +during this season of the year. The lake was between two and three miles +in length so that a comparatively heavy sea could be stirred up by the +winds. +</p> +<p> +The island on which the four boys had pitched their tent was the only +one in the lake and it was very nearly in the center. It was owned by a +friend of John’s father who had obtained permission for his son and his +three friends to camp on it that summer. The sailboat and two canoes +were included with the island, so that there was no question but that +these four boys were very fortunate indeed to be able to enjoy it all. +</p> +<p> +For months they had been looking forward to this summer and they had +planned innumerable excursions and expeditions as part of their camping +experiences. Now that the time was really at hand they meant to enjoy +every minute of it to the utmost. +</p> +<p> +“Fred and I will get the boat ready,” exclaimed John. “You two can +collect the rods and fix up the lunch.” +</p> +<p> +“Put me near the food and I’m satisfied,” said George. “Come on, Grant.” +</p> +<p> +John and Fred made their way down to the spot where the canoes were +hauled up on the shore. The catboat lay moored at anchor some fifty or +sixty feet out from the bank so that it was necessary to paddle to reach +her. One of the canoes was selected and the two boys soon pushed off +from shore. +</p> +<p> +“That’s a pretty good looking boat I should say,” remarked Fred as he +glanced approvingly at the little white catboat. “I wonder if she’s +fast.” +</p> +<p> +“She looks so,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“You can’t always tell by the looks though, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s true too. We ought to be able to tell pretty soon though.” +</p> +<p> +“I wonder if they have water sports or anything like that up here in the +summer,” said Fred. “If they do it would be fun to enter.” +</p> +<p> +“It certainly would,” agreed John. “I don’t believe there are enough +people on this lake though. As far as I can see we are about the only +people here.” +</p> +<p> +“I thought you said there was another camp down at the north end of the +lake.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right, there is. I don’t know who’s in it though.” +</p> +<p> +“We might sail down and find out.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s do that; it won’t take long.” +</p> +<p> +They had now arrived alongside the catboat, which was named the +<i>Balsam</i>, and after having made fast the canoe, they quickly climbed on +board. +</p> +<p> +“Any water in her?” exclaimed John. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. I was just going to look.” +</p> +<p> +“Lift up the flooring there and you can tell. It must have rained since +she’s been out here and we’ll probably have to use the pump.” +</p> +<p> +“We certainly shall,” said Fred, who had raised up the flooring +according to John’s suggestion. “Where is the pump anyway?” +</p> +<p> +“Up there under the deck. You can pump while I get the cover off the +sail here and get things in shape a little, or would you rather have me +pump?” +</p> +<p> +“No, I’ll do it. If I get tired, I’ll let you know.” +</p> +<p> +It did not take long to bail out the boat, however, and before many +moments had elapsed the mainsail was hoisted and the <i>Balsam</i> was ready +to weigh her anchor and start. The sail flapped idly in the breeze which +seemed to be dying down instead of freshening as Grant had predicted. +The boom swung back and forth, the pulleys rattling violently as the +sheet dragged them first to one side and then the other. +</p> +<p> +John and Fred sat on the bottom of the boat and waited for their +companions to appear with the luncheon. The two boys were dressed in +bathing jerseys and white duck trousers. At least they had formerly been +white, but constant contact with boats and rocks had colored them +considerably. The feet of the young campers were bare, they having +removed the moccasins which they usually wore. The day was warm and in +fact the sun was quite hot. The previous night had been so cool it did +not seem possible that it could be followed by a warm day, but such is +often the case in the Adirondacks. +</p> +<p> +“Where do you suppose they are?” exclaimed Fred at length. “It seems to +me they ought to have been ready by this time.” +</p> +<p> +“Here they come now,” said John. “Look at Pop; that basket is almost as +heavy as he is.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s got lots of food in it, I guess. I’m glad too for I’m hungry +already.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, you finished breakfast only about an hour ago.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t help that. I’m always hungry in this place.” +</p> +<p> +“Ahoy there!” shouted George from the shore. “Come in and get us.” +</p> +<p> +“The other canoe doesn’t leak you know,” replied John, neither he nor +Fred making any move to do as George had asked. +</p> +<p> +“We know that,” called George. “What’s the use of taking them both out +there though?” +</p> +<p> +“Why not?” demanded John. “The exercise will do you good.” +</p> +<p> +“Are you coming after us?” asked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Not that we know,” laughed Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I guess we paddle ourselves then, Pop,” said Grant to his companion. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” agreed George. “I’ll get square with them though.” +</p> +<p> +“How are you going to do it?” +</p> +<p> +“You let me paddle and I’ll show you.” +</p> +<p> +They spoke in a low tone of voice so that their friends on board the +<i>Balsam</i> could not hear them and in silence they embarked upon the +second canoe. Grant sat in the bow while George wielded the paddle in +the stern. They approached the catboat rapidly where John and Fred sat +waiting for them with broad grins upon their faces. +</p> +<p> +“You must think we run a ferry,” exclaimed Fred as the canoe drew near. +</p> +<p> +“Not at all,” said Grant. “We just thought that perhaps you’d be glad to +do a good turn for us.” +</p> +<p> +“We’re tired,” grinned John. “Think how hard we had to work to get the +sail up and to pump out—” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, look at that water bug,” cried George suddenly, striking at some +object in the water with his paddle. Whether he hit or even saw any bug +or not will always remain a mystery. One thing is sure, however, and +that is, that a great sheet of water shot up from under the blade of the +paddle and completely drenched both John and Fred. +</p> +<p> +“What are you trying to do?” demanded Fred angrily. +</p> +<p> +“He did that on purpose,” exclaimed John. “Soak him, Fred.” +</p> +<p> +“Look out,” cried George, “you’ll get the lunch all wet.” +</p> +<p> +“You meant to wet us,” Fred insisted. +</p> +<p> +“Why, Fred,” said George innocently; “I just tried to hit that water +bug. How should I know that you would be splashed?” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” snorted John. “Just look at me.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s too bad,” said George with a perfectly straight face. “If you +had come in after us we’d have all been in the same canoe and you +probably wouldn’t have gotten wet.” +</p> +<p> +“You admit you did it on purpose then?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t at all. I just thought perhaps it was some sort of punishment +inflicted on you for being so lazy.” +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t he do it on purpose, Grant?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” replied Grant, striving desperately to keep from +smiling. “I know he didn’t tell me he was going to do it.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, it was just like him anyway,” said John. “He knew we couldn’t +splash him back because he had the lunch in the canoe with him.” +</p> +<p> +“Take it, will you?” asked Grant, holding the basket up to John. “Here +are the fishing rods too.” +</p> +<p> +George and Grant followed soon after and the second canoe was made fast +to one of the thwarts of the other. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll put the lunch up here,” said Fred, at the same time depositing the +basket up forward under the protection of the deck. +</p> +<p> +“Slide the rods in there too, will you?” exclaimed George. “Look out for +the reels that they don’t get caught under anything.” +</p> +<p> +“Everything ready?” asked John. +</p> +<p> +“Let ‘er go,” cried George enthusiastically. “I’m ready.” +</p> +<p> +“Come and help me pull up the anchor then,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“I’m your man,” cried George. “You know I’m always looking for work.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ve noticed that,” laughed Grant. “You’re always looking for work so +that you’ll know what places to keep away from.” +</p> +<p> +Four light hearted young campers were now on board the <i>Balsam</i>. In +spite of their words a few moments before not one of them had lost his +temper. They knew each other too well and were far too sensible not to +be able to take a joke. Outsiders, listening to their conversation, +might have thought them angry at times, but such was never the case. +</p> +<p> +“Get your back in it there,” shouted Grant gayly to John and George who +were busily engaged in hauling in the anchor chain. George stood close +to the bow with John directly behind him as hand-over-hand they pulled +in the wet, cold chain. +</p> +<p> +“This deck is getting slippery,” exclaimed George. “All this water that +has splashed up here from the chain has made it so I can scarcely keep +my feet.” +</p> +<p> +“I should say so,” agreed John earnestly and as he spoke one foot slid +out from beneath him. He lurched heavily against his companion, and +George thrown completely off his balance, waved his arms violently about +his head in an effort to save himself, but all to no avail. He fell +backward and striking the water with a great splash disappeared from +sight. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chV' id='chV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER V—THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Man overboard!” shouted Grant, running forward as he called. He did not +know whether to laugh or to be worried. One thing was certain though and +that was that George like his three companions was perfectly at home in +the water. All four were expert swimmers so that barring accidents they +had little to fear from falling overboard. +</p> +<p> +“He’s all right,” cried John. “Help me hold this anchor, somebody.” +</p> +<p> +Grant grasped the chain and one more heave was sufficient to bring the +anchor up on the deck of the <i>Balsam</i>. Before this could be done, +however, George came to the surface choking and spluttering. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll fix you for that, String,” he gasped, shaking his fist at John. +</p> +<p> +“For what?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“You know all right.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, Pop,” said John reprovingly. +</p> +<p> +“Keep her up into the wind, Fred,” shouted Grant who was seated at the +tiller. “Let your sheet run. Here, Pop, give me your hand.” +</p> +<p> +“I’d better go down to the stern and get aboard there,” said George. “I +think it will be a little easier.” +</p> +<p> +“All right; go ahead.” +</p> +<p> +George floated alongside the <i>Balsam</i> until he came to the stern and a +moment later had swung himself on board the boat. He was drenched to the +skin but laughing in spite of himself. +</p> +<p> +“Do you want to change your clothes, Pop?” asked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“No, it’s hot to-day. They’ll dry out in no time.” +</p> +<p> +“Ease her off then, Fred,” Grant directed. “We may as well get started.” +</p> +<p> +Fred put the helm over, the sail filled and the <i>Balsam</i> began to slip +through the water at a good rate. The four boys sat around the tiny +cockpit, Fred at the tiller and Grant tending sheet. In a few moments +they had emerged from the little harbor and had entered upon the open +waters of the lake. +</p> +<p> +“Well, String,” observed George who was busily engaged in wringing water +from the bottoms of his duck trousers, “you certainly did it well.” +</p> +<p> +“Did what well?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t pretend you don’t know.” +</p> +<p> +“What are you talking about?” +</p> +<p> +“You meant to shove me overboard and I know it so there’s no use in you +trying to bluff. You were very skillful about it and I guess you got +square with me all right. We’ll call it even and quit.” +</p> +<p> +“I did do it pretty well, didn’t I?” grinned John. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, you did, but I think the way I soaked you and Fred was just as +good.” +</p> +<p> +“You didn’t see a water bug then?” +</p> +<p> +“No, and you didn’t slip either.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I did; on purpose though. Let’s call it off now.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m agreeable,” laughed George, “even if you did get the better of me.” +</p> +<p> +“How about me?” demanded Fred. “Pop wet me just as much as he did String +and I don’t see that I am even with him yet.” +</p> +<p> +“You ‘tend to your sailing,” laughed George. “That’ll have to satisfy +you.” +</p> +<p> +“I can steer you on a rock you know,” warned Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t do it though,” begged Grant. “I’m an innocent party and I’d +suffer just as much as the others.” +</p> +<p> +“Where shall we sail?” asked George. +</p> +<p> +“Fred and I thought we might go down to the other end of the lake,” said +John. “There’s a camp down there, I believe, and we might see who is in +it.” +</p> +<p> +“Go ahead,” exclaimed George. “Meanwhile I think I’ll try to get my +clothes dry,” and suiting the action to the word he divested himself of +everything he had on, which was not much. The few articles of clothing +thus taken off he spread flat on the deck of the boat so that they might +get the full benefit of the sun’s rays. +</p> +<p> +The day was bright and not a cloud appeared in the sky. A gentle breeze +blew across the lake barely ruffling the water. Consequently the +<i>Balsam</i> sailed on an even keel and scant attention was necessary to +keep her pointing in the right direction. +</p> +<p> +“How about trolling?” exclaimed Fred all at once. +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean by that?” asked George. +</p> +<p> +“You mean to say you don’t know what trolling is?” +</p> +<p> +“If I had I wouldn’t have asked you, would I?” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’ll tell you,” said Fred. “Trolling is fishing in a certain way. +When you troll you sit in a moving boat and trail your line out behind +you. As a rule you use a spoon or live bait so that it gives the +appearance of swimming. People usually fish for pickerel that way.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s try it,” cried George enthusiastically. “Who’s got a spoon?” +</p> +<p> +“I have,” said Grant. “Hold this sheet and I’ll put it on my line.” +</p> +<p> +“Any pickerel in this lake, I wonder,” remarked John. +</p> +<p> +“There ought to be lots of them,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Bass and perch too, I guess,” John added. +</p> +<p> +“Perch are fine eating,” exclaimed George. “I’ve eaten them cooked in a +frying pan with lots of butter and bacon,” and he sighed blissfully at +the recollection. +</p> +<p> +“Did you ever eat brook trout fried in bacon and rolled in corn meal?” +asked Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Not yet,” laughed George. “I hope to before long, though.” +</p> +<p> +“Well when you do you’ll know you’ve tasted the finest thing in the +world there is to eat,” said Fred with great conviction. +</p> +<p> +“Is it better than musk melon?” +</p> +<p> +“A thousand times.” +</p> +<p> +“Whew!” whistled George. “Is it better than turkey?” +</p> +<p> +“A million times.” +</p> +<p> +“Say,” exclaimed George. “Is it better than ice cream?” +</p> +<p> +“It’s better than anything, I tell you,” Fred insisted. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll take your word for it,” laughed George. “I’d like to try it myself +pretty soon though.” +</p> +<p> +“Here’s your spoon,” said Grant, holding out the rod to George. +</p> +<p> +“You’re going to fish, yourself,” said George firmly. +</p> +<p> +“Not at all. I got it for you.” +</p> +<p> +“Why should I try it any more than you?” +</p> +<p> +“Because I want you to. Go ahead.” +</p> +<p> +“If you insist, I suppose I’ll have to,” laughed George and dropping the +spoon overboard he let the line run out. +</p> +<p> +“How much line do I need?” he asked. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, about fifty or sixty feet I should think,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I don’t know much about it,” remarked John breaking in on the +conversation; “but it doesn’t seem to me that we are making enough +headway to keep that metal spoon from sinking.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m afraid not myself,” agreed Grant. “The wind seems to be dying down +all the time and we’ll be becalmed if we’re not careful.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll try it a few minutes anyway,” said George. “I might get +something.” +</p> +<p> +“All you’ll get is sunburned, I guess,” laughed Fred. “You’d better put +your clothes on or you’ll be blistered to-morrow.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right, Pop,” said Grant. “I’d get dressed if I were you.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps you’re right,” George agreed. “Here, String, you take the rod.” +</p> +<p> +Scarcely had John taken the rod in his hands when he felt a violent tug +at the line. The reel sang shrilly and then was still. +</p> +<p> +“You’ve hooked one,” cried Fred excitedly. “Reel in as fast as you can.” +</p> +<p> +“Bring the boat around, Fred,” shouted Grant. “Come up into the wind.” +</p> +<p> +Fred did as he was directed, while John strove desperately to reel in +his line. At first there was no resistance and then all at once the rod +bent double. +</p> +<p> +“Say!” exclaimed George, “it must be a whale!” +</p> +<p> +“It’s bottom,” said John disgustedly. “The old spoon sank just as I said +it would and I’ve caught a log.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t break the line whatever you do,” warned Grant. “Swish your rod +back and forth.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s caught fast,” said John, following Grant’s directions. +</p> +<p> +“Keep it up, you’ll get it loose yet.” +</p> +<p> +Suddenly the hook was released and as John reeled in there was no +resistance to be felt at all. A moment later the spoon appeared and +pierced by the hook was a small chip of water-soaked wood showing that +it was some sunken log that had deceived the boys at first. +</p> +<p> +“That trolling business is great all right, isn’t it?” laughed George, +now completely dressed once more and ready for anything. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll take you out in one of the canoes some day and prove to you that +it’s all right,” said Fred warmly. “You—” +</p> +<p> +He suddenly stopped speaking and looked up. “I thought I felt a drop of +rain,” he remarked in surprise. +</p> +<p> +“You did,” exclaimed Grant. “Just look there. Here comes a squall and +we’re in for it all right. This is no joke.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chVI' id='chVI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER VI—ADRIFT</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Quick, Fred!” cried Grant. “Bring her up into the wind. You help me let +down this sail, Pop.” +</p> +<p> +An angry gust of wind scudding across the lake, caught the catboat and +made her heel far over. +</p> +<p> +“Let go your sheet, Fred!” shouted Grant. “Quick or we’ll upset.” +</p> +<p> +He and George sprang forward and feverishly tried to loosen the ropes +that held the sail aloft. The wind was increasing in strength now, +however, and the boat was becoming more difficult to manage every +moment. The sky was inky black and sharp flashes of lightning cut the +clouds from end to end. The thunder roared and echoed and reëchoed over +the wooded mountains round about. It was now raining hard. +</p> +<p> +“Keep that sheet clear of everything,” cried Grant, who usually assumed +command in every crisis. “Let it run free whatever you do.” +</p> +<p> +“You hurry with that sail,” retorted Fred. +</p> +<p> +“They’re doing their best I guess,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“If they don’t get it down soon we’ll go over,” cried Fried. “I can +hardly hold her now.” +</p> +<p> +“Can I help you, Grant?” asked John, striving to make his way forward. +The boom, however, swung violently back and forth threatening to knock +him overboard every second. It was almost impossible to keep out of its +way in the tiny catboat. +</p> +<p> +“Go sit down,” cried Grant. “We’ll get it down in a second.” +</p> +<p> +The rain now fell in torrents. The wind whistled and shrieked all about +them and it seemed as if at any moment the sail must be torn to shreds +and the mast ripped from its socket. Lucky it was that Fred was an +experienced sailor and endowed with nerve as well. The squall drove the +boat backwards but Fred managed to keep her nose pointed straight into +the teeth of the gale. Otherwise the <i>Balsam</i> could not have lived two +minutes. +</p> +<p> +“Why don’t they hurry with that sail?” exclaimed Fred peevishly. +</p> +<p> +“They are hurrying,” said John. “The ropes are wet and they’re nervous.” +</p> +<p> +“Ah, there it comes,” cried Fred suddenly. “Now we’ll stand a chance.” +</p> +<p> +With a rush the sail came down, its folds almost completely covering the +four boys in the boat. The strain on the tiller was greatly relieved +however and the <i>Balsam</i> maintained a more even keel. +</p> +<p> +“Whew!” exclaimed George, groping his way astern. “What a storm this +is!” +</p> +<p> +“I never saw it rain so hard,” said John. “Just look; you can’t see more +than about ten feet.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll go aground if we’re not careful.” +</p> +<p> +“How can we stop it?” demanded Fred. “We’re at the mercy of the storm.” +</p> +<p> +“Throw the anchor overboard,” suggested George. +</p> +<p> +“A good idea, Pop,” exclaimed Grant. “Come along and I’ll help you.” +</p> +<p> +“You’ll get struck by lightning,” warned Fred, half seriously. The +flashes were blinding and almost continuous. The thunder ripped and +roared all around and so near at hand was the center of the storm that +sometimes the smell as of something burning could be detected in the +air. +</p> +<p> +“That anchor will never hold us,” said John who sat in the stern, +huddled close to Fred. Grant and George were feeling their way forward. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t throw the lunch basket over by mistake,” called Fred. +</p> +<p> +“The lunch won’t be worth much now, I’m afraid,” said John ruefully. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t know; it’s under the deck.” +</p> +<p> +“I know, but the boat has a lot of water in her now and if it touches +that basket it will soon soak through.” +</p> +<p> +“How deep is this lake?” +</p> +<p> +“I’ve no idea. I don’t even know where we are.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m afraid we’re going to run ashore all of a sudden somewhere.” +</p> +<p> +“The anchor ought to catch before that happens,” said John. “It’s +trailing now you know.” +</p> +<p> +“I know it is, but suppose we hit a lone rock.” +</p> +<p> +“We’re running that chance. I don’t know what we can do about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Are you trying to steer, Fred?” asked Grant who together with George +had now crawled back to the stern of the boat. +</p> +<p> +“I’m trying to keep her headed with the waves; that’s all I can do.” +</p> +<p> +“I know it. I think the squall’s letting up some though.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps it is,” agreed John. “It does seem a little bit lighter.” +</p> +<p> +“It isn’t raining so hard either,” observed Grant. “These squalls stop +just as quickly as they start sometimes.” +</p> +<p> +“The lake must be deep here,” said Fred. “How long is that anchor +chain?” +</p> +<p> +“About fifteen feet I guess,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“That ought to keep us from going ashore anyway,” exclaimed Fred. “Who +said this storm was over?” +</p> +<p> +“It must be coming back,” said Grant. “It certainly let up for awhile +though.” +</p> +<p> +“But it’s making up for it now all right,” observed George. “I’m so glad +I took all that trouble to get my clothes dry.” +</p> +<p> +The four boys looked at one another and could not help laughing. Every +one of them was drenched through to the skin and no one had a dry stitch +of clothes on. The rain pelted them mercilessly and the water ran off +their faces in streams. All huddled together, they made a forlorn +looking party. +</p> +<p> +“This is what all campers get I suppose,” remarked George. +</p> +<p> +“They certainly do,” agreed Grant. “Some of them get it worse than this +too.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you suppose our tent is still there?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s hope so,” exclaimed George fervently. “We’d be in a nice fix if +we found it blown away when we got back.” +</p> +<p> +“If we do get back,” said Fred dolefully. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter with you, Fred?” demanded Grant. “You don’t think +we’re all going to die or be killed, do you?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. This is a bad storm and we can’t see where we are.” +</p> +<p> +“But the anch—” +</p> +<p> +There was a sudden jolt. Every boy was almost thrown from his seat as +the boat came to a quick stop. Then the bow swung slowly around and a +moment later the <i>Balsam</i> was pointed straight into the wind, her anchor +chain taut. +</p> +<p> +“We’re aground,” cried George. +</p> +<p> +“Not at all,” corrected Grant. “The anchor chain has caught, that’s +all.” +</p> +<p> +“Where are we?” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t see.” +</p> +<p> +“We must be somewhere near shore,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“We might be on a shoal.” +</p> +<p> +“No, there’s land,” cried John. “I can see it.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe it’s on our island,” said George. “Wouldn’t that be queer.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I wish the old storm would be over so we can see just where we +are located,” exclaimed Fred. “I’ve had enough of this.” +</p> +<p> +“You’d better be thankful the anchor holds and not worry about anything +else,” observed Grant. “So far we can’t complain.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s stopping,” said George suddenly. “The sun will be out in a +minute.” +</p> +<p> +“If it comes out it had better bring an umbrella, that’s all I can say,” +observed John. +</p> +<p> +“A pretty poor joke, String,” said George. “Try another one; it might be +better.” +</p> +<p> +“The sun is coming out,” cried Grant. “The storm is almost over, I +guess.” +</p> +<p> +“Thank goodness!” exclaimed Fred. “Now we can see where we are.” +</p> +<p> +Little by little the rain abated, the wind died down and the thunder +melted away in the distance. Before many moments had passed the sun +broke forth from behind a cloud and blue sky appeared. +</p> +<p> +“Do they have many of these squalls around here, I wonder?” said George. +“I don’t think very highly of them myself.” +</p> +<p> +“Nor I,” agreed Grant. “Just look where it carried us.” +</p> +<p> +“There’s our island,” exclaimed Fred. “I thought it was in the other +direction though.” +</p> +<p> +“So it was,” said John. “We traveled the whole length of the lake, I +guess.” +</p> +<p> +“Right past our camp?” +</p> +<p> +“It looks so.” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose we had hit one of those big rocks where I fell in,” said +George. “Our anchor wouldn’t have done us very much good there.” +</p> +<p> +“I should say not,” agreed Grant. “Isn’t that a camp over there?” +</p> +<p> +His three companions gazed in the direction he indicated and sure enough +a big white tent very similar to their own appeared on shore, a short +distance from the spot where the <i>Balsam</i> lay at anchor. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see anybody around,” remarked Fred. “Do you suppose they’re all +away?” +</p> +<p> +“The best way to find out is to go and see for ourselves,” exclaimed +Grant. +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” observed George. “Let’s get the anchor up and sail in.” +</p> +<p> +“There’s a dock there too, where we can land,” said Fred. “Perhaps the +people who are camping here have been caught out in the storm.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll soon know anyway,” said Grant, making his way forward to assist +George in getting up the anchor. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chVII' id='chVII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER VII—AN UNEXPECTED MEETING</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +A few moments later the <i>Balsam</i> was making its way towards the tiny +wharf in the little harbor. Two canoes lay bottom up on the shore but no +sign of any living being appeared. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps they’ve gone to the ball game,” remarked George. +</p> +<p> +“Ball game!” exclaimed Fred. “What are you talking about?” +</p> +<p> +“I was just fooling and trying to get a rise out of somebody. Of course +I knew I could make somebody bite with you on board.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” snorted Fred. “I thought you’d gone crazy, talking about ball +games up here in the woods.” +</p> +<p> +“You two are always wrangling,” exclaimed Grant. “Stop it.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t resist trying to get rises out of Fred,” said George. “He’s so +easy.” +</p> +<p> +“Leave him alone,” said Grant. “I wonder where the people are who own +this tent. There doesn’t seem to be a soul around.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s go up to the tent and peek in,” suggested John. +</p> +<p> +“Do you think we ought to do that?” Fred protested. +</p> +<p> +“Why not? We’re not going to steal anything are we?” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not,” laughed Fred. “Of course I don’t know about you.” +</p> +<p> +“Come ahead,” urged George. “We’ll just take one look.” +</p> +<p> +They made their way up from the dock towards the tent. Still no sign of +life appeared and when John had stolen one hasty glance inside the tent +he reported that no one was in there either. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s go back,” exclaimed Fred. “There’s no use in staying around here +any longer.” +</p> +<p> +“Come on,” said Grant. “It’s time to eat too.” +</p> +<p> +“We might eat our luncheon over on that point,” suggested George, +indicating a spot about a mile or so distant from the place where they +were. +</p> +<p> +“Eating suits me all right,” exclaimed John. “I must say I’m hungry.” +</p> +<p> +“And I’d like to get my clothes dry,” added Fred. “I’m sort of cold.” +</p> +<p> +Once more they set sail on the <i>Balsam</i> without having caught sight of a +single occupant of the camp they had just visited. The sun was now +shining brightly and the sky was as blue as ever. No trace of the recent +storm remained to mar the beautiful day. It was not long before all four +boys were in excellent spirits again and their appetites became keener +with each passing moment. +</p> +<p> +Landing on the point where they had decided to eat their luncheon, they +quickly set about making preparations for the meal. A fire was soon +started and with every one assisting, the meal was quickly under way. +</p> +<p> +“How soon will it be ready, Grant?” asked George of the cook. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, in half an hour.” +</p> +<p> +“Come on then, String,” exclaimed George. “Let’s go back into the woods +here and see if we can’t find some berries or something.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t get lost,” warned Grant. “Fred and I are too hungry to spend a +lot of time looking for you, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t worry about us,” laughed John. “We’ll be gone only a few +minutes.” +</p> +<p> +Leaving Grant and Fred busy with the cooking the two boys plunged into +the woods and disappeared from view. The trees were still dripping from +the heavy rain, but the fragrant odor of spruce and balsam was stronger +than ever. The thick carpet of pine needles under their feet was wet, so +that their advance was noiseless. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly, up from its hiding place almost under their feet, a grouse +arose with a roar and whirr of wings. Booming off through the trees it +quickly disappeared from view leaving the forest as silent as before. +The spell of it was on the two young campers as they stood still and +gazed all about them. The green leafy aisles of the woods stretched in +all directions around them most beautiful and inviting to the eye. A +catbird whined from a nearby tree, but otherwise all was still. +</p> +<p> +“Did you ever see anything more beautiful?” asked John in a low voice. +</p> +<p> +“I never did,” replied George solemnly. The beauty and the grandeur of +it all made them feel as though they really should not speak above a +whisper. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see any berries though,” continued John. +</p> +<p> +“Nor I,” said George. “There’s an open space ahead of us though; perhaps +we’ll find some there.” +</p> +<p> +“Some blueberries wouldn’t taste bad just now.” +</p> +<p> +In silence they continued their walk, even taking care to step softly so +as not to disturb the solemnity of the woods. Ahead of them appeared a +break in the trees and an open space showed. Here was the place to find +blueberries if any grew in that neighborhood at all. A moment later the +two boys came to the edge of the clearing which was perhaps a hundred +yards square. +</p> +<p> +As they were about to step out from the shelter of the trees George +suddenly clutched his companion by the arm. +</p> +<p> +“Look there,” he whispered. +</p> +<p> +Following George’s directions John saw something that caused his face to +grow white and his heart to jump. In the center of the clearing and +busily engaged in eating the blueberries which grew in abundance all +about was a large black bear. +</p> +<p> +He seemed entirely oblivious to his surroundings and as the wind blew +from him towards the two boys he was not aware of their presence. With +one great paw he stripped the berries from the low-lying bushes and with +his long, eager tongue he licked them up greedily. That his ancient +enemy, man, might be lurking nearby apparently did not occur to him. The +two boys stood and watched him, fascinated, not knowing whether to run +or whether to hold their ground. The bear was scarcely a hundred feet +distant from the spot where they were standing. +</p> +<p> +“What shall we do?” whispered George. +</p> +<p> +“Wait.” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose he comes after us.” +</p> +<p> +“If he does we’ll run.” +</p> +<p> +All at once the bear looked up. Perhaps some eddying current of wind had +betrayed the presence of the two boys to his sensitive nostrils. It is a +well known fact that the eyesight of most wild animals is comparatively +poor; their sense of smell, however, is correspondingly sharp and it is +on this that they must rely to a large extent for safety. +</p> +<p> +All around him old bruin gazed while the hearts of the two young campers +almost stood still. There they were standing within plain sight, right +at the edge of the forest and they could not possibly escape being seen. +Anxiety as to what the bear would do made the next few moments very +nervous ones. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly he saw them. George and John held their breath and waited. He +looked at them steadily for a moment, one paw held poised in the air. +Then he turned and with that clumsy lumbering gait common to his kind +ambled off across the clearing. Arriving at the opposite side he turned +his head and glanced back at the two boys, still standing in the shadow +of the trees. Then he continued his way once more and quickly +disappeared from sight. +</p> +<p> +“Well,” exclaimed George. “What do you think about that?” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose he’d chased us.” +</p> +<p> +“He’d never have caught me,” said George grimly. “With a bear after me I +know I could at least equal the world’s record for the half-mile.” +</p> +<p> +“Even so, you’d have finished second,” laughed John. +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, I’d have beaten you out, of course.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe so,” said George laughingly. “At any rate I guess it would have +been a pretty close finish. Imagine what Grant and Fred would have +thought if they’d seen us coming, tearing out of the woods with a big +black bear after us.” +</p> +<p> +“I’d have gone right on across the lake too,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“Do you want some berries?” +</p> +<p> +“It’s pretty late now I’m afraid. I think perhaps we’d better go back.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps so. Let’s go anyway; we can come back here after luncheon.” +</p> +<p> +“That bear might have the same idea.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s true too,” admitted George. “We can bring Fred and Grant along +with us if they want to come.” +</p> +<p> +The two boys made their way back through the forest towards the lake. +Knowing that there were such things as bears in the neighborhood they +kept a sharp watch all about them. If they had only realized it, no bear +was half as anxious to meet them as they were to meet a bear. Wild +animals seldom if ever seek trouble of their own accord. +</p> +<p> +A few moments later George and John emerged from the woods and caught +sight of the fire and their two companions. +</p> +<p> +“Hey, you two!” called Fred. “Where have you been?” +</p> +<p> +“Are we late?” asked John. +</p> +<p> +“I should say you were. Grant and I were just about to eat up all the +food and not save any for you at all.” +</p> +<p> +“Thank goodness you didn’t,” exclaimed George, fervently. +</p> +<p> +“Did you find any berries?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Lots of them. A good many of them are still on the bushes.” +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t you bring any back?” +</p> +<p> +“Not a single one.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you think of that, Fred?” demanded Grant. “These fellows go +back in the woods and stuff themselves with a lot of berries and don’t +even bring one back to the two who are working hard to prepare food for +them.” +</p> +<p> +“We didn’t eat any ourselves.” +</p> +<p> +“You didn’t?” exclaimed Grant. “What was the matter with them; weren’t +they good?” +</p> +<p> +“I guess they were,” said John. “We didn’t try any though.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter?” inquired Fred. “What are you two trying to say +anyway? You found a lot of berries but you didn’t bring any back and you +didn’t eat any yourself. What’s the reason you didn’t?” +</p> +<p> +“Somebody was there ahead of us,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“The owner you mean?” asked Grant. “Wouldn’t he give you any?” +</p> +<p> +“It wasn’t the owner,” said George. “It was somebody else.” +</p> +<p> +“I wish you’d stop talking in riddles,” exclaimed Grant impatiently. +“Why don’t you tell us what happened!” +</p> +<p> +“There was a bear there,” said John. “He liked berries too.” +</p> +<p> +“A bear!” cried Grant and Fred in one breath. “What do you mean?” +</p> +<p> +“There was a big black bear eating the blueberries,” said George, “so we +just decided we didn’t care very much for berries ourselves.” +</p> +<p> +“Tell us about it,” demanded Grant eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“I can’t talk unless I have something to eat first,” replied George +firmly. +</p> +<p> +“Nor I,” agreed John. +</p> +<p> +“Come and eat then,” laughed Fred. “We too have got something to tell +you two when you’ve finished.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chVIII' id='chVIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER VIII—A PREDICAMENT</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +While all four boys were doing full justice to the meal which Grant had +prepared, George and John related the story of their meeting with the +bear. +</p> +<p> +“And now,” exclaimed John when he had finished, “you tell us what you +have to say. Fred said there was something.” +</p> +<p> +“We had an idea while you were gone, that’s all,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Tell us what it was.” +</p> +<p> +“Go ahead, Fred.” +</p> +<p> +“No, you tell them,” urged Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said Grant, “it was only this. Fred and I were talking things +over and we thought it might be good fun if we took the two canoes and +went off on a little trip for a couple of days. What do you think about +it?” +</p> +<p> +“I think it would be great,” exclaimed John heartily. “How about you, +Pop?” +</p> +<p> +“It suits me first rate,” said George eagerly. “Why can’t we start +to-night?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a little soon I should think,” laughed Grant. “We can go +to-morrow though if you say so.” +</p> +<p> +“We can get some good trout fishing up these streams, you know,” said +Fred. “I want to get that big trout.” +</p> +<p> +“If there’s any big trout caught I expect to be the one to do it,” said +George very pompously. +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” snorted Fred disgustedly, “you couldn’t catch cold.” +</p> +<p> +“You just wait and see,” muttered George under his breath. +</p> +<p> +“Do you know anything about trout fishing?” insisted Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I never did any in my life.” +</p> +<p> +“And you expect to catch a big trout?” said Fred derisively. “Why, Pop, +you’re sort of out of your head, aren’t you?” +</p> +<p> +“Wait and see,” repeated George confidently. +</p> +<p> +“Do you know how hard it is to cast a trout fly when you’re standing in +the middle of a clump of bushes and the branches of trees are in your +way all around you?” continued Fred. “Don’t you know that it takes +almost years of practice to do it so that you are accurate and don’t +catch your hook on everything in sight?” +</p> +<p> +“Wait and see,” insisted George. “I have a new system.” +</p> +<p> +“Ha! ha! ha!” laughed Fred. “You’re a joke.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s go back to camp and stop these two arguing,” exclaimed Grant. +“They’re at it all day long.” +</p> +<p> +“We like each other all the more because we do it, don’t we, Pop?” +demanded Fred laughingly. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” admitted George, “except that you’re awfully conceited at times.” +</p> +<p> +“Come on,” urged Grant. “They’ll be at it again if we’re not careful.” +</p> +<p> +Before many moments had passed the <i>Balsam</i> was once more sailing over +the clear waters of the lake and in a short time the four boys arrived +back at camp. The remainder of the day was spent in planning for the +trip they were about to take and in discussing just where they should +go. At length an agreement satisfactory to every one was reached, the +arrangements were all completed and there was nothing left to do but +wait for the morrow in order to start. +</p> +<p> +The sun had been up but a short time before the camp was astir. Grant +set about preparing breakfast while his three companions packed supplies +into the two canoes. Food sufficient for three days was loaded on board; +blankets were taken along, and trout rods with numerous flies of course +were included. +</p> +<p> +“Breakfast’s ready,” announced Grant as soon as the work of loading was +complete. +</p> +<p> +“So am I,” exclaimed George heartily. “I’m always ready to eat up here.” +</p> +<p> +“Not only ‘up here’ either,” muttered Fred. +</p> +<p> +“What did you say?” demanded George, wheeling around so as to face the +speaker. +</p> +<p> +“Nothing.” +</p> +<p> +“As usual,” laughed George. “Where’s the food?” +</p> +<p> +“Right here,” exclaimed Grant. “Let’s see you get rid of it.” +</p> +<p> +No second invitation was needed and it was not long before every crumb +and morsel that Grant had prepared had disappeared. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s get started,” exclaimed George. “All the food is gone so there is +no point in staying around here any longer.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re right, Pop,” laughed John. “I say we go too.” +</p> +<p> +A few moments later the two canoes emerged from the little harbor and +started out across the lake, headed northward. Grant and Fred occupied +one of them while George and John paddled the other. +</p> +<p> +“I’m glad you’re not in my canoe, Fred,” called George gayly. “Small as +you are, I’d soon get tired of paddling you around all day.” +</p> +<p> +“Is that so?” snorted Fred. “Well, you’re not half as glad as I am for I +know that I’d be the one that would have to do all the work and you’re +too big and fat to make the work pleasant.” +</p> +<p> +“They’re at it again, String,” laughed Grant. “What shall we do with +them?” +</p> +<p> +“Leave them home,” suggested John. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we couldn’t do that. They’d be like the Kilkenny cats.” +</p> +<p> +“Who were they?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t you ever hear about them?” +</p> +<p> +“No. Tell me who they were.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess you mean <em>what</em> they were.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, what they were, then.” +</p> +<p> +“Why,” said Grant, “they were a couple of cats that loved to fight. One +day somebody tied their tails together and hung them over a clothes +line. Of course they began to fight right away and they fought so +furiously that when it was all over there wasn’t a thing left of either +of them.” +</p> +<p> +“I suppose you expect me to believe that story,” snorted Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t care whether you believe it or not,” laughed Grant. “You wanted +to hear it, so I told it to you.” +</p> +<p> +“Grant says we’re like a couple of cats, Pop,” called Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Tell him he’d better be careful,” replied George. “Just because we call +each other names doesn’t mean that we allow other people to do it.” +</p> +<p> +“Excuse me for interrupting,” said John laughingly, “but does any one +know where we are going?” +</p> +<p> +“I do,” replied Grant. “We’re going up that river you see straight +ahead.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know where that leads to?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Yes. We can paddle up it for about two miles and then we have to make a +carry over to another river.” +</p> +<p> +“How long is the carry?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, about half a mile, I guess.” +</p> +<p> +“Whew!” exclaimed George; “that’s a long distance to carry canoes and +all the stuff we have in them.” +</p> +<p> +“Getting ready to shirk already, are you?” demanded Fred teasingly. +</p> +<p> +“Shirk nothing,” said George. “Wait and see if I don’t do my share.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes and ‘wait and see’ if you don’t catch the biggest trout too,” +taunted Fred. “Why, Pop, you’ll be lucky if you catch your breath.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait and see,” muttered George darkly. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, ‘wait and see’,” echoed Fred. “If you don’t stop saying that we’ll +have to call you, ‘Wait and See.’” +</p> +<p> +Just at this moment, however, they came to the mouth of the river and +the argument was abandoned, for the time being at least. +</p> +<p> +“This is great!” exclaimed John. “I always did like paddling in a narrow +space rather than on a lake or some place like that.” +</p> +<p> +“I do too,” agreed Grant. “You feel closer to things somehow.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re no closer to the water, you know,” remarked George with a wink +at Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t pay any attention to him, Grant,” said John. “I think we ought to +throw both of them overboard anyway.” +</p> +<p> +As they progressed, the stream became narrower and the current swifter. +Evidently they would be unable to paddle very much farther upstream and +the young campers began to keep a sharp lookout for the carry. +</p> +<p> +“There it is,” exclaimed Fred, suddenly pointing to a small sandy beach +a short distance ahead of them. +</p> +<p> +They soon landed and emptying the canoes, they started off through the +woods to transfer them to the next river. It was necessary to leave the +baggage behind to await their coming back for it. Two boys to each canoe +they set out, the light boats turned upside down and bearing them aloft +on their shoulders. In spite of many groanings from George they reached +their destination before much time had elapsed, and then resting the +canoes on the bank of the stream they returned for the baggage. This was +more quickly and more easily transferred so that a short time later they +were once more making their way by paddling. +</p> +<p> +“Say, Grant,” exclaimed John when they had covered a few hundred yards, +“how do you know all about these rivers?” +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t you see that map I have?” +</p> +<p> +“No. I kept wondering how you knew so much about the country around +here. I didn’t know you had a map.” +</p> +<p> +“Of course I have. I wouldn’t know anything any other way for I’ve never +been up here in my life before.” +</p> +<p> +“String thought you guessed at it,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“No, I didn’t at all,” protested John. “I just didn’t think about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Does your map say that there are rapids ahead?” asked Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t notice. Why?” +</p> +<p> +“Because I think there are. It seems to me that the current is getting +swifter all the time and I think you’ll find that when we go around that +bend up yonder you’ll find rapids ahead of us.” +</p> +<p> +“Shall we run them?” demanded George excitedly. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll probably be wrecked if we try it,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“We can see how bad they are, anyway,” John suggested. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” agreed Fred. “We’ll ‘wait and see.’” +</p> +<p> +“‘Go ahead’ is my motto when rapids are concerned,” said George. +</p> +<p> +Rounding the curve in the river they discovered that scarcely a hundred +yards farther was another bend in the stream. Meanwhile the current was +rapidly becoming swifter and stronger. +</p> +<p> +“We can’t see yet,” exclaimed George. “We’ll have to go ahead.” +</p> +<p> +All four boys were excited now, and there was an eager light in every +one’s eyes as they were carried along by the swiftly-flowing stream. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly they came around the second bend, and spread out before their +eyes appeared a long stretch of white water. It foamed and danced, here +and there broken by a huge rock, black and ugly looking. +</p> +<p> +“We can’t run those,” cried Grant. “We’ll drown sure.” +</p> +<p> +“Go ashore then,” shouted Fred, and he drove his paddle desperately into +the water. John and George also fought valiantly to divert their course +and avoid the rapids. Too late, however, for the current was stronger +than they, and with ever increasing speed they were drawn swiftly +towards the foaming waters below. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chIX' id='chIX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER IX—DANGER</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Work, Fred! Work!” urged Grant desperately. +</p> +<p> +“I’m doing my best,” panted Fred, and from the way he drove his paddle +into the water it was evident that what he said was true. +</p> +<p> +They made a little progress towards the shore. They moved still more +swiftly downstream, however, for the current was powerful here. For +every foot that they progressed towards shore they were drawn a yard +closer to the rapids. Unless they reached the bank very soon they were +certain to be forced to run the rapids whether they desired to or not. +</p> +<p> +George and John in the other canoe were in the same predicament. The two +frail little craft seemed no stronger than shells and it was almost +unbelievable that they could traverse that foaming stretch of water in +safety. No one spoke now; every boy was too busily employed in the +desperate struggle he was waging against the river. +</p> +<p> +The current eddied and swirled. From below came the roar of the water as +it raced along in its mad course. Beside them was the shore and safety; +below was danger, accident, and possible death. +</p> +<p> +When the two canoes had rounded the bend in the river the one which John +and George occupied had been a trifle closer to shore. Consequently it +had just that much advantage over the other. The occupants of the two +canoes were too engrossed in their own struggles to take much notice of +their companions, but out of the corner of his eye Grant saw that the +other canoe had nearly reached its goal. +</p> +<p> +A moment later he heard a call from the shore sounding above the roar of +the rapids below. It was George’s voice. +</p> +<p> +“Keep it up, Grant!” he shouted. “You’ll make it yet.” +</p> +<p> +“Stick to it, Fred!” cried Grant, encouraged by the knowledge that their +companions had reached safety. “We can make it.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m sticking to it all right,” replied Fred grimly. +</p> +<p> +Closer and closer to shore they came. Nearer and nearer sounded the +noise of the rapids. Could they win out? Certainly they could if nerve +and determination were to count for anything. +</p> +<p> +Ahead of them Grant could see George frantically urging them on. He was +so excited that he had run down into the water, where he stood +knee-deep, begging and imploring his comrades to come to him. Inch by +inch they seemed to move towards shore. Their muscles were aching from +the strain now and it was agony for both boys to keep up the fight, but +neither one gave even the slightest thought to quitting. +</p> +<p> +It almost seemed as if they were going to win out now. George was +scarcely ten feet distant; arms outstretched he eagerly awaited a chance +to seize the bow of the canoe and draw it and its occupants to safety. +His chance did not come, however. +</p> +<p> +Just out of his eager reach a whirlpool caught the canoe. The bow swung +suddenly around and Fred’s paddle was almost wrested from his grasp. In +vain he and Grant fought. Twice the frail little boat spun around and +then seized by a sudden eddy in the current was borne swiftly and +relentlessly towards the rapids below. +</p> +<p> +“We’re goners!” cried Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Keep your nerve!” shouted Grant fiercely. “You do the steering from the +bow. You can see the rocks from there.” +</p> +<p> +At racehorse speed the canoe shot forward. With every second its +momentum increased until it seemed fairly to fly over the water. +White-lipped and with jaws set the two boys sat and awaited their fate. +From the shore George and John watched with feverish anxiety. +</p> +<p> +Now they were almost in the rapids. An eddy caught the canoe and it +nearly upset. It escaped, however, and again sped on. Around it the +water foamed white and hissed and snarled as it raced along. Black rocks +stood out along the treacherous pathway. It seemed as if the canoe must +surely come to grief on any one of a dozen of them. +</p> +<p> +Seated on the bottom of the canoe and with his eyes riveted on the +rapids below, Fred wielded his paddle like a madman. First one side and +then the other he dipped it, changing so swiftly sometimes as almost to +bewilder the onlookers. +</p> +<p> +They were half way through the dangerous passage now. Was it possible +that they could come through those angry waters untouched? It was out of +the question; they had merely been lucky so far. At least that was the +way George and John felt about it. Any moment they expected to see their +comrades upset and disappear from sight beneath those terrible foaming +waves. +</p> +<p> +Still the canoe raced on. One moment it had the speed of a locomotive +and the next, caught by some eddying whirlpool, its momentum almost +ceased, only to shoot forward suddenly again at a bewildering pace an +instant later. +</p> +<p> +“I believe they’ll get through,” exclaimed George excitedly. He and John +were standing on a large boulder which afforded them an excellent view +of the rapids. +</p> +<p> +“Wait,” cautioned John quietly. +</p> +<p> +“‘Wait and see,’” smiled George. +</p> +<p> +“Please don’t joke,” muttered John. “I don’t feel like it.” +</p> +<p> +The onrushing canoe was almost through the rapids now. Could it be that +two inexperienced boys were to come through that mad mill race alive? If +they could last a moment more they were safe, but ahead of them was the +most dangerous part of the rapids. Two huge rocks stood out in midstream +scarcely six feet apart. Between them the water rushed and roared like a +cataract. Below this spot the rapids ended and the current gradually +slowed down to its normal swiftness. +</p> +<p> +Fred and Grant saw all this in the twinkling of an eye and they knew +that the test was now to come. Both boys braced themselves; so swiftly +did they move now that it almost seemed as if they were standing still +and that it was the two great rocks that were charging down upon them. +Closer and closer they came. With bated breath George and John watched +from the shore, realizing their companions’ peril. +</p> +<p> +Fred, in the bow of the canoe, gripped his paddle with all his strength. +One moment more and their lot would be decided. The rocks looked like +mountains as they bore down upon them. Now they were just ahead, ugly +and bristling in their might; now they were alongside; now they were +past. Fred and Grant had run the rapids in safety. They could scarcely +realize it. The danger was over and they were alive. +</p> +<p> +“Yea, Fred!” shouted Grant. “We’re through!” +</p> +<p> +“Thank goodness,” sighed Fred, and he sank back limply against one of +the thwarts of the canoe. +</p> +<p> +“You’re a wonder,” cried Grant. +</p> +<p> +“It’s a wonder we’re alive, you mean.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s true, too. But the way you steered!” +</p> +<p> +“It wasn’t due to any skill on my part; we were just lucky.” +</p> +<p> +“Anyway,” exclaimed Grant happily, “we ran the rapids and I wouldn’t +give up that experience for a million dollars now.” +</p> +<p> +“Neither would I, <em>now</em>,” agreed Fred. “It would take a good deal more +than that to make me go through with it again, though.” +</p> +<p> +They had now reached a point two or three hundred yards below the rapids +and decided to go ashore and wait for John and George. It was with a +very comfortable feeling that the two boys set their feet on solid +ground once more. +</p> +<p> +“Just look back there and see what we came through,” exclaimed Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see how we did it,” said Fred. “I wonder if we really did.” +</p> +<p> +“You think you were dreaming, I suppose,” laughed Grant. “I can swear we +did do it, though, and I guess Pop and String will, too.” +</p> +<p> +“It doesn’t seem possible.” +</p> +<p> +“Here we are.” +</p> +<p> +“I know it. Just look at those rapids, though. They look like Niagara +Falls from here.” +</p> +<p> +“There ought to be good fishing along here,” remarked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I should think so. Perhaps Pop can catch his big trout here. The big +fellows usually stay in the deep pools below rapids like this.” +</p> +<p> +“Here they come now,” exclaimed Grant, as John and George appeared, +carrying their canoe along the shore. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have some fun with them about it, anyway,” said Fred, in a low +voice. “Watch me get a rise out of them.” +</p> +<p> +“Hey, you two,” shouted George, as he spied his friends. “What do you +mean by scaring String and me almost out of our wits?” +</p> +<p> +“Do you suppose we did it on purpose?” laughed Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Why, that was nothing at all for us,” said Fred, airily. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, is that so?” demanded George, mimicking Fred’s tone. “Well, if that +was nothing, I’d hate to see what something was.” +</p> +<p> +“That was no effort at all for us,” continued Fred, carelessly. +</p> +<p> +“Put this canoe down quickly, String,” exclaimed George. “Let me get at +that fellow. He ought to be drowned.” +</p> +<p> +With a sigh of relief John and George deposited their burden on the +ground and George immediately advanced threateningly towards Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Let him alone, Pop,” laughed Grant. “He’s the best steersman this side +of the Canadian border.” +</p> +<p> +“He was pretty good, wasn’t he?” exclaimed John. “How did you two +fellows like shooting the rapids?” +</p> +<p> +“It was wonderful,” said Fred heartily. “I never had such a wonderful +sensation in all my life.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll bet you were both almost scared to death,” said George, shortly. +</p> +<p> +“We were,” laughed Fred, “but now that it’s all over we’re glad we did +it.” +</p> +<p> +“Fred thinks there ought to be some good fishing in these pools along +here,” said Grant. “What do you say to trying them?” +</p> +<p> +“That suits me,” said George readily. “I’m hungry, too.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have lunch right here then,” exclaimed Grant, “and afterwards +we’ll try our hands at the trout fishing.” +</p> +<p> +“And Pop will catch the biggest trout that ever swam in the waters of +the Adirondacks,” added Fred, nudging John as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” exclaimed George disgustedly. “I wish you’d stop that talk. I +suppose you’ll be worse than ever now that you’ve run these rapids.” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t say anything about myself,” smiled Fred. “I was talking about +the big trout you were going to catch.” +</p> +<p> +“I suppose you think you’re the only one here who can shoot rapids or +catch fish or do anything at all.” +</p> +<p> +“I told you I was talking about you, not about myself,” insisted Fred. +“I said you’d probably catch the biggest trout in the Adirondacks.” +</p> +<p> +“You think you’re pretty funny,” snorted George. “You just wait and +see.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chX' id='chX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER X—WAIT AND SEE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +When luncheon was over, the four young campers busied themselves with +preparations for the afternoon’s fishing. They sat around on the bank +joining the different sections of their trout rods and selecting the +flies which they considered would be most tempting to the speckled fish +they sought to catch. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll fish from the shore, I suppose,” remarked John. +</p> +<p> +“Of course,” exclaimed Fred. “The current is too strong here to try it +from a canoe.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not much good at this game, I’m afraid,” laughed John. “I don’t +expect to catch a thing.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know anything about it, either,” said George, “but I certainly +expect to catch something just the same.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe you’ll have beginner’s luck,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t care what it is,” laughed George. “I want some fish, though.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’m ready,” said Fred, rising to his feet. “Where are we going?” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose two of us go upstream and two down,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” exclaimed Fred. “You and I will go up and the others the +other way. We’ll meet back here in time for supper.” +</p> +<p> +“At the latest,” added John. +</p> +<p> +Fred stepped to the shore and deftly cast his fly out on the waters. +Gradually lengthening the amount of line he had out, he kept casting and +then drawing the rod back over his head so that the line stretched far +behind him. Then, with a short snap of his wrist he would send the fly +floating out over the pool again. As it came to rest lightly on the +surface of the water he jerked it along for a few feet in imitation of +the struggles of a live insect and then he would repeat the performance +all over again. +</p> +<p> +His three friends watched him with absorbing interest. +</p> +<p> +“That’s a simple performance,” exclaimed George at length. “Why don’t +you leave the fly in the water for a second or two and give the fish +half a chance to swallow it? It would have to be an awfully quick trout +to take your hook.” +</p> +<p> +“They’re quick enough; don’t worry about that,” smiled Fred. +</p> +<p> +“But why don’t you let the hook sink a little below the surface?” +</p> +<p> +“Did you ever see a moth or a bug of some sort light on the water?” Fred +inquired. +</p> +<p> +“Yes. Lots of times.” +</p> +<p> +“Did you ever see one sink?” +</p> +<p> +“No, I don’t believe I ever did,” George admitted slowly. +</p> +<p> +“That’s just it,” exclaimed Fred triumphantly. “If a real insect doesn’t +do it, why should an artificial one? The idea is to make the fly appear +just as much alive as possible.” +</p> +<p> +“I haven’t seen you catch anything yet,” remarked George. +</p> +<p> +Hardly had he spoken, however, when Fred had a strike. His fly had +settled like thistledown on the surface of the pool after an almost +perfect cast, when there was a rush and the line was drawn swiftly +across the pool. The light rod bent almost double and Fred’s three +companions jumped to their feet excitedly. +</p> +<p> +“Yea, Fred!” shouted John. “You’ve hooked a big one. Stick to him.” +</p> +<p> +“Big one nothing,” said Fred shortly. “It’s a little fellow.” +</p> +<p> +“Bring him in anyway,” cried George. “The little ones are just as good +to eat as any kind.” +</p> +<p> +The trout may have been small as Fred had predicted, but he put up a +valiant fight. After a very pretty struggle, however, he was gradually +brought in close to the bank, and with a quick, dexterous scoop of his +landing net Fred brought him to shore. +</p> +<p> +“About ten inches,” he remarked as he held the gamey little fish up for +his friends to see. “He was fierce, though; look there,” and he showed +the side of the trout’s mouth all torn and bloody, so hard had he +attacked the hook. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s go after some ourselves, String,” exclaimed George eagerly. “I’d +rather catch them myself than to watch others.” +</p> +<p> +“Remember you’re going to get a big one,” reminded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Wait and see,” said George gruffly. +</p> +<p> +Without wasting any more time he and John made their way downstream +while Fred and Grant worked slowly in the opposite direction. Fred was +the only one of the four who was at all skillful in handling a +trout-rod, and, as a consequence, he had the best luck at the start. +Grant, however, had captured one prize, and to his delight it proved to +be larger than any Fred had caught. +</p> +<p> +They had progressed slowly towards the rapids, stopping at every pool +for a few casts, but both boys seemed to have the idea that their luck +would be better farther up. Consequently they did not linger long in any +one spot until they reached a point just below the rapids. Here there +were several large pools, and each boy selected one and prepared to make +a cast. +</p> +<p> +Grant had experienced considerable difficulty in making his casts, for +the branches of the nearby trees and bushes seemed far easier to locate +than the spot for which he aimed. Time and again he had found his hook +entangled by the overhanging limb of some tree and he had spent many +moments in freeing it as a result. It was particularly exasperating to +him as he saw Fred with apparent ease drop his fly on any spot he cared +to hit. +</p> +<p> +Grant had just succeeded in disentangling his hook for at least the +tenth time when he heard his name called. +</p> +<p> +“Come over here, Grant!” shouted Fred excitedly. “I need help.” +</p> +<p> +Grant immediately dropped his rod and started towards the spot where +Fred was standing. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter?” he demanded, when he was only a few yards distant +from his companion. +</p> +<p> +“Matter?” exclaimed Fred. “Look at that rod.” +</p> +<p> +It was bent almost double, and the line whipped back and forth across +the pool as if it was possessed. +</p> +<p> +“Zowie!” cried Grant eagerly. “You’ve hooked a good one this time.” +</p> +<p> +“I should say I had.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you want me to do?” +</p> +<p> +“Take that landing net and stand ready to scoop him up in case I can +bring him close enough to shore, and don’t lose him beforehand.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t lose him,” begged Grant. “Look at him go.” +</p> +<p> +The light rod was almost in the shape of a horseshoe and it scarcely +seemed possible that it could stand the strain. Back and forth and +around and across the pool the trout carried the hook. Fred strove to +keep a constant pressure on the line in order to tire the fish out; he +did not try to check his frequent bold rushes, however, but rather to +prevent the line from becoming slack at any time. +</p> +<p> +One moment he would reel the line in swiftly and there would be almost +no resistance at all; the next moment, however, just as he and Grant had +come to the conclusion that the struggle was practically ended, off +would go the line again while the reel sang loudly. +</p> +<p> +Fred was white-lipped, he was so excited. But who wouldn’t be, for there +is no more thrilling sport in the world than to fight a big trout with a +five-ounce rod? +</p> +<p> +“I believe he’s tiring,” exclaimed Fred at length. +</p> +<p> +“A little, perhaps,” agreed Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I wish he’d jump so we could see him.” +</p> +<p> +“If he does I’ll lose him. That’s one of the things I’m doing my best to +prevent.” +</p> +<p> +“Why so?” demanded Grant in surprise. +</p> +<p> +“If a fish can jump clear of the water he can very often shake the hook +out of his mouth. I’ve seen it happen too often.” +</p> +<p> +“But I don’t see how you can prevent it.” +</p> +<p> +“If I keep a steady strain on him all the time, he can’t jump. It’s only +when the line is slack that they have a chance to do that.” +</p> +<p> +“Look at him go!” exclaimed Grant. “Wouldn’t you think he’d be getting +tired by this time?” +</p> +<p> +“He is. His rushes aren’t as long as they were before.” +</p> +<p> +“Does that mean you’ve got him?” +</p> +<p> +“Not at all. You’ve never caught a trout until he is safely on the +shore.” +</p> +<p> +Fred had not once taken his eyes from the line while he was talking with +Grant. Carefully, coolly and with great skill he played his fish. Never +once did he relax his caution, and little by little he seemed to be +gaining the mastery. Every rush was shorter than the one before, and +after every one he reeled in a bit more of line and brought the trout a +trifle nearer to the shore and the net. +</p> +<p> +“Get ready, Grant,” said Fred in a tense voice. +</p> +<p> +The handle of the net in his right hand, Grant knelt on the rocks on the +edge of the pool. He was just to the left of the spot where his comrade +was standing and he now watched the line just as closely as Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Let me know when to scoop him,” he said. +</p> +<p> +“You’ll know all right,” replied Fred. “You’ll see him in the water.” +</p> +<p> +“You tell me, though.” +</p> +<p> +“All right.” +</p> +<p> +The plucky trout was tiring rapidly now. His struggles became weaker and +weaker. Fred had played him well, but he was too seasoned a fisherman to +feel that the fight was ended. Bitter experience had taught him that +there is many a slip. +</p> +<p> +“Get the net ready,” exclaimed Fred after what seemed like a very long +time to Grant, who was not comfortable in the position he was in. +</p> +<p> +Nearer and nearer Fred brought the trout. He still struggled weakly but +was practically exhausted now. Relentlessly Fred reeled in the line. +Once the trout broke the water with his tail not a dozen feet from shore +and Grant held his breath; he thought the fish had escaped. +</p> +<p> +Not so, however, for a moment later he could see him in the water being +drawn remorselessly closer to the net. Grant was in a panic for fear he +should not do his part correctly. +</p> +<p> +“Now, Grant!” cried Fred suddenly. +</p> +<p> +The trout was in the water almost at Grant’s feet. His struggles were +very weak now and thanks to the way Fred handled the rod, was nearly +motionless. Carefully Grant lowered the net into the water and moved it +along until it was almost underneath the beaten fish; then with a quick +motion he raised the net and a moment later the trout lay upon the bank +enmeshed in its folds. +</p> +<p> +“Nice work, Grant!” exclaimed Fred. “You did that like a veteran!” +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t he a beauty!” cried Grant delightedly. +</p> +<p> +“He surely is.” +</p> +<p> +“How much do you suppose he weighs?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t know. I’d hate to say; two pounds and a half, I guess.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s pretty big, isn’t it?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“It is for this part of the country and it’s all I’d care to tackle with +a five-ounce rod.” +</p> +<p> +Fred had removed the hook from the fish’s mouth now and he held him up +to view. +</p> +<p> +“He’s all right,” said Grant admiringly. +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose Pop will say about him?” grinned Fred. “I don’t +believe he can match him, do you?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” said Grant doubtfully. “I’d hate to bet on it. You can’t +ever be sure what he’ll do.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” laughed Fred derisively. “He couldn’t catch a trout like that to +save his life.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait and see,” cautioned Grant. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXI' id='chXI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XI—WHAT GEORGE DID</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Well, I suppose we might as well go back now,” said Fred. “It’ll be +dark before long.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” agreed Grant, reluctantly. “I wish I might have caught a +trout like that one of yours though.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll stay if you want to.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I guess not,” said Grant. “As you say it will be dark soon and we +might as well go back.” +</p> +<p> +“Get your rod then and we’ll start.” +</p> +<p> +Grant returned to the spot where he had been standing when Fred called +him, and picking up his rod soon joined his companion. Together they +made their way back to camp rehearsing the story of the big trout’s +capture time and again during the journey. +</p> +<p> +“The others don’t seem to have returned yet,” remarked Grant when they +had arrived at their destination. “Shall we wait for them?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see the use. Let’s clean some of the fish and get ready for +supper.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re not going to eat that big one, are you?” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not going to touch it yet, that’s sure. I want to show it to Pop +first.” +</p> +<p> +“Aren’t you going to stuff it and take it home?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe I can,” said Fred. “I don’t know how to do it myself +and there isn’t any place around here where I can have it done.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s too bad; still it will make good eating.” +</p> +<p> +“After I’ve shown it to Pop,” grinned Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Here they come now!” exclaimed Grant, and as he spoke John and George +appeared through the trees a short distance away. +</p> +<p> +“What luck did you have?” demanded John as he and his comrade approached +the fire which Grant had started. +</p> +<p> +“Pretty good,” replied Grant. “I caught only one myself but Fred got +eight.” +</p> +<p> +“Good for him,” exclaimed John. “Did you get any big ones?” +</p> +<p> +“Fred caught one beauty.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s see it.” +</p> +<p> +Nothing loath Fred proudly produced his big trout and held it up for the +inspection of his friends. +</p> +<p> +“Say,” exclaimed George, “that’s a good one all right!” +</p> +<p> +“He certainly put up a game fight too,” said Grant. “You should have +seen it.” +</p> +<p> +“I wish we had,” said George. “None of the ones we caught gave us any +trouble at all.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps you didn’t catch any big enough,” said Fred, preparing to tease +George and remind him of his boasts. “How many did you get anyway?” +</p> +<p> +“Only four all together,” replied George. “String caught three of +those.” +</p> +<p> +He and John seemed unwilling for some reason to talk very much and they +had the appearance of holding something back. Perhaps if it had been +lighter it would have been possible to see a guilty look on the faces of +both boys. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s see your fish,” urged Fred. “Don’t be afraid of them. I’m +surprised that you didn’t catch more than one, Pop. I expected that +you’d bring in at least a dozen and that you’d surely get one bigger +than mine; here you are with only four little ones between you. Bring +them out anyway.” +</p> +<p> +John opened the creel and dipping his hand inside brought out a trout +about ten inches long and laid it on the mossy bank. +</p> +<p> +“That’ll do for a start,” grinned Fred, who was thoroughly enjoying +himself. He knew that he had made good his boast about catching a larger +fish than George. He had been somewhat worried up to the present time +for as Grant had said it was never possible to say just what George +would do. Now, however, all doubts had been swept from his mind and he +was perfectly confident that he had beaten his rival. +</p> +<p> +“There’s another,” said John, bringing out a second fish, if anything a +trifle smaller than the first. +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” laughed Fred, “I’ll bet that’s the one Pop caught.” +</p> +<p> +“No, it isn’t,” said John. “I caught those two and this one too,” and he +placed a third trout by the side of the other two. All three of them +were almost exactly the same size. +</p> +<p> +“They’re not very large, are they?” said John dubiously. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, they’ll make fine eating,” exclaimed Fred. “Where’s your other fish +though? I want to see the one that Pop caught.” +</p> +<p> +John once more put his hand in the creel and felt all around. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t feel it here,” he said anxiously. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe it slipped through a crack in the basket,” said Fred gleefully. +“Are you sure you caught a fish, Pop?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, I thought so,” said George. “Here, String, let me try to find it.” +</p> +<p> +“Too bad we haven’t got a magnifying glass,” chuckled Fred as John +passed the creel over to George. “You know it’s against the law to catch +the little bits of ones anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“Find it, Pop?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Here it is,” exclaimed George after a moment’s search and he drew forth +to the astonished gaze of Grant and Fred a trout that one glance showed +was easily larger than the one Fred had caught. +</p> +<p> +“Where’d you get that fish?” demanded Fred in amazement. +</p> +<p> +“I caught it.” +</p> +<p> +“You did? How’d you do it?” +</p> +<p> +“With a hook and line of course. I told you to ‘wait and see.’” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” gasped Fred, and he stopped for lack of anything further to say. +His three companions, however, burst into gales of laughter all at his +expense and all seemed to enjoy the situation very much. +</p> +<p> +“Let me see him,” demanded Fred, and George very willingly handed over +his prize to be inspected. +</p> +<p> +“Why, look here,” exclaimed Fred. “There’s not a cut or a mark of any +kind around his mouth but his stomach has a big gash in it.” +</p> +<p> +“Certainly,” said George. “That’s where I hooked him.” +</p> +<p> +“In the stomach?” cried Fred. “What are you talking about?” +</p> +<p> +“Tell him how you did it, Pop,” urged John gleefully. +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said George, “it was like this. I tried to fish the way I saw +Fred doing it but I couldn’t to save my life. The old hook kept catching +on everything in sight.” +</p> +<p> +“Just like mine,” interposed Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I finally got disgusted,” continued George. “It didn’t seem to be any +use in my trying any longer and I thought that a trout would be an awful +fool to bite that silly looking fly anyway. I’ve always fished with +worms and I didn’t see why I couldn’t catch trout with worms for bait. I +decided to try it anyway, so I rolled over an old log and dug under it +with my knife. It wasn’t long before I had a couple of big fat fellows +and I soon put one on the hook and took the fly off. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I fished with the worms for a while but nothing happened and I +began to get pretty well discouraged. I quit fishing and lay down on my +stomach to get a drink out of one of the pools. The water was just as +clear as crystal and just as I lay down I saw a big old trout shoot +under a big rock at the bottom of the pool. That proved there were trout +in there anyway. +</p> +<p> +“The rock where he disappeared was right beneath me and I picked up my +line with the big worm still on the hook and let it down just as quietly +as I could until it was right in front of the rock. Nothing happened for +a long time and I thought the trout was gone, but all of a sudden I saw +him again.” +</p> +<p> +“Were you holding the line in your hand?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Yes; it was just like a drop line. The rod was lying in back of me on +the ground and all I had done was to let out a lot of line. Well, the +old trout sort of poked his nose out and took a look around. He went up +to the worm and took a smell of it; at least that’s the way it looked. +He didn’t bite it though and a second later he went whizzing back +underneath the rock again. I thought he was gone for good but in a few +seconds back he came; the worm seemed to attract him even if he didn’t +try to eat it. He kept hanging around it all the time, sort of sniffing +at it first one side and then the other. +</p> +<p> +“All of a sudden I had an idea.” +</p> +<p> +“Whew,” whistled Fred softly. +</p> +<p> +“I decided,” continued George paying no attention to the interruption, +“that I’d try to pull the line up all of a sudden and hook him in the +stomach. I didn’t see why such a thing wasn’t possible and I meant to +try it the first chance I had. Old Mr. Trout still hung around the worm +but it seemed as if he was never going to get right over the hook. +Finally he started to swim away slowly and I thought it was all over. He +only went a few feet though and then turned back. The worm seemed to +fascinate him. +</p> +<p> +“He went right up to the hook and sort of looked it over again; then he +turned his back on it so to speak, and kept perfectly still, just +wiggling his fins. I lowered the hook a little and he never moved. I +lowered it a little more and held it there. All at once he turned +leisurely around and came right square over the hook. I yanked the line +with all my might and there he is.” +</p> +<p> +George pointed proudly to the big trout lying at his feet. +</p> +<p> +“That’s a great way to fish for trout,” exclaimed Fred in disgust. +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right, Pop,” laughed Grant. “You caught him anyway, didn’t +you?” +</p> +<p> +“I surely did. I told Fred I’d beat him out and I did it. Why, Fred, you +little shrimp, I’d have put salt on his tail and caught him that way if +it was necessary in order to take some of the conceit out of you.” +</p> +<p> +“Bah!” exclaimed Fred in disgust. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXII' id='chXII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XII—A CHALLENGE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Two more days the boys spent among the streams and the trout pools. At +the end of that time their supply of food was running low and they +decided to return to their island camp. +</p> +<p> +The return trip was made without any mishap and when they entered the +little lake where their island was situated, their tent, standing out +prominently on the little bluff where it was pitched, was a welcome +sight to all. +</p> +<p> +“It looks pretty good, doesn’t it?” exclaimed John proudly. +</p> +<p> +“It certainly does,” agreed Fred. “I’m sort of glad to be back again.” +</p> +<p> +“We had a great time though,” said George enthusiastically. “There’s one +more trip I want to take this summer too.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I’d like to climb that mountain over there.” +</p> +<p> +The four young campers turned their heads and gazed at the peak George +indicated, towering high over the lake. +</p> +<p> +“That’s a go,” exclaimed Grant readily. “I think that it would be good +fun.” +</p> +<p> +“So do I,” agreed John. “Let’s do it soon too.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you suppose it will be very hard work?” asked Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Of course it will,” said George. “You wouldn’t let that hold you back +though, would you?” +</p> +<p> +“Not at all, but I don’t want you fellows to get the idea that it will +be any easy job. The mountain looks nice and green and smooth from here +because it’s all covered with trees, but when we get there we’ll find +it’s pretty rough going. Ravines and gullies and steep cliffs and +everything else like that will be there to hold us back.” +</p> +<p> +“All the better,” exclaimed George. “Then when we reach the top we’ll +feel as if we had accomplished something.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll do it anyway,” said Grant and every one else agreed with him. +</p> +<p> +Soon they reached their destination. The <i>Balsam</i> still rode at anchor +in the little harbor and everything seemed to be as the boys had left +it. In a few moments the canoes had been drawn up on shore and their +contents unloaded. Grant in the lead, they made their way towards the +tent. +</p> +<p> +He disappeared inside the tent and before his companions had come up +with him, reappeared holding a paper in his hand. +</p> +<p> +“What have you got there?” inquired George curiously. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. I found it inside the tent.” +</p> +<p> +“See what it is,” exclaimed George. +</p> +<p> +“It’s a challenge of some kind, I think,” said Grant after a hasty +glance at the sheet which he held. +</p> +<p> +“A challenge?” exclaimed John. “Not for a fight, I hope.” +</p> +<p> +“Not as bad as that,” laughed Grant. “It’s an athletic challenge.” +</p> +<p> +“Who from?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know yet,” said Grant. “Give me a chance.” +</p> +<p> +“Read it out loud,” urged John. “That’s the best way.” +</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em; margin-right:2em'>“We, the undersigned,” +read Grant, “hereby challenge the four +boys who are camping on the island in the middle of the lake to +a set of water sports. The events are to be decided upon by +mutual agreement and are to be as many in number as may be +agreed upon. We suggest that they include a sailing race, a +canoe race, and a swimming race. The day for the sports is to be +decided later and on Monday morning we will come over to see you +and arrange the details.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:60%'>Signed, </p> +<p style='margin-left:70%'>Thomas Adams.<br/> +Franklin Dunbar.<br/> +Hugh McNeale.<br/> +Herbert Halsey.”</p> +<p> +“Who are they, do you suppose?” exclaimed John. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” said Fred. “I never heard of any of them before.” +</p> +<p> +“They probably live in that camp down at the other end of the lake,” +said Grant. “The one we visited the other day, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“And found nobody there,” added George. +</p> +<p> +“That’s it. They must be the ones.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess they are,” agreed John. “How do they know so much about us +though? I don’t see how they knew there were four of us.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably they’ve seen us around,” suggested Grant. “That part of it is +easy enough.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, what do you think of the challenge?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I say we accept it,” exclaimed George eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“Of course we will,” said Grant. “I think it will be great sport.” +</p> +<p> +“They may be a good deal older and bigger than we are,” suggested Fred. +“If they are we’ll sort of be outclassed.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe they are,” said Grant. “At any rate I don’t think we’ll +be outclassed.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll give them a good rub anyway,” exclaimed George. “What sort of +sailing and swimming and canoe races do you suppose they mean?” +</p> +<p> +“They had a catboat like the <i>Balsam</i>,” said John. “Don’t you remember +seeing it down by their tent? We’ll use the catboats for the sailing +race.” +</p> +<p> +“A relay swimming race would be a good stunt,” suggested Fred. “In that +way we could all be in it.” +</p> +<p> +“When they come over here we can decide all the details,” said George. +“When was it that they said they were coming?” +</p> +<p> +“Monday, I think,” said John. “Wasn’t it, Grant?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes. That’s day after to-morrow.” +</p> +<p> +“We ought to have some judges,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +“That’s true,” agreed Grant. “I don’t know where we’ll get any though.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe they’ll know somebody,” suggested George. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll find out all about it on Monday anyway,” said Fred. “Let’s have a +little food now. I’ll faint unless I eat pretty soon.” +</p> +<p> +“Poor little Freddy,” laughed George. “You need a nurse.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” snorted Fred. “Ever since you hooked that trout by the tail you +have been too fresh to live. Your turn will come though.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean by that?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“Why, that the freshness will be taken out of you one of these days.” +</p> +<p> +“Who’ll do it?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know, but I have a sure feeling that something will happen to +you unless you mend your ways.” +</p> +<p> +“Stop your arguing, you two,” exclaimed Grant. “You fight all day long.” +</p> +<p> +“We’re not fighting,” laughed Fred. “That’s just the way we show how +fond we are of each other.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I must say you have a queer way of doing it,” said Grant. “I’d +hate to see what you’d do if you didn’t like each other.” +</p> +<p> +“Such a thing could never happen, could it, Fred?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“No, I guess not. I don’t know what I’d do if I didn’t have some one +like you around to make fun of,” responded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Who caught the big trout?” taunted George. +</p> +<p> +“Will you keep quiet about that fish?” exclaimed Fred. “All you do is +talk about it from morning till night. I never want to hear of it +again.” +</p> +<p> +“You will though,” grinned George. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I know that, but I wish something would happen to keep you quiet.” +</p> +<p> +Such a thing was destined to come about before Fred dreamed it would and +it was also something he never would have thought of, possibly. +</p> +<p> +“I need some wood for this fire,” remarked Grant, who was busied with +preparations for dinner. The sun was fast sinking in the west and the +light was commencing to fade. A lone kingfisher winged his way across +the lake returning to his home, a hole dug in some bank overlooking the +water. All was quiet and peaceful. +</p> +<p> +“I need some wood for this fire,” Grant repeated, for no one had paid +any attention to his former statement of this fact. +</p> +<p> +“You hear that, Pop?” inquired Fred. “Grant needs some wood.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I heard him,” replied George. “What’s the matter with you; your +legs haven’t turned to stone, have they? Can’t you get it?” +</p> +<p> +“I can, but I have to wash the dishes to-night. It seems to me that +that’s just about enough for me to do.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” sighed George, “I’ll get it. It strikes me, though, that I +do about all the work around here that there is to be done.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, it’s too bad about you,” jeered Fred. “Take the ax and get out of +here.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s pretty dark,” said George as ax in hand he started for the clump +of trees in the rear of the tent. It was growing dark as George had said +and it was becoming more and more difficult to pick out the narrow +trail. He had advanced but a short distance when a little animal ran out +into the path and trotted along ahead of him. +</p> +<p> +“Why, look at the cat,” exclaimed George half out loud. “I wonder how it +got on the island here.” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke the little black and white animal left the path and entered +a clump of bushes on one side. George had always been extremely fond of +pets of all sort and he followed eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“Here puss, puss, puss,” he called. “Here kitty, kitty, kitty.” +</p> +<p> +There was no response and he called again. He used his most enticing +manner and did his best to coax the little animal out again. +</p> +<p> +“Wouldn’t they be surprised back at camp,” he thought, “if I should +bring in a cat? It would make a fine mascot for us too.” +</p> +<p> +He bent over the bushes where the cat had disappeared and called again; +no response came, however. He bent the twigs aside and stepped in, +looking carefully all about him as he went forward. Suddenly he uttered +a cry of surprise and started back. He thought he was choking, and +springing back into the narrow pathway he turned and ran for the tent as +fast as his legs would carry him. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXIII' id='chXIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XIII—THE OUTCAST</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +George’s one idea was to run away, but the remarkable part of the +adventure was that it seemed to be impossible to shake off that from +which he was trying to escape. +</p> +<p> +A moment later he arrived at camp and spying his three friends seated +around the fire he made his way towards them. As soon as he reached the +spot where they were he threw himself upon the ground and commenced to +moan and groan violently. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, dear, oh, dear,” he cried. “What have I done? What have I done?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, Pop!” exclaimed Grant in alarm. “What’s the matter with—” +</p> +<p> +He broke off suddenly in the midst of the sentence and looked at George +in horror. All sympathy for the sufferer quickly left him. +</p> +<p> +“Get out of here!” he cried, but not waiting for George to leave he +departed quickly himself. He was accompanied by Fred and John who seemed +to be stricken with some strange malady, a mixture of anguish and +laughter. +</p> +<p> +“What shall I do? What shall I do?” cried George as he saw his three +friends leaving him. +</p> +<p> +“Do anything you want,” called Fred. “Drown yourself if you like, but +don’t come near me.” +</p> +<p> +“Where’d you get it, Pop?” shouted John gleefully. “You’d better go soak +in the lake for a couple of days.” +</p> +<p> +“Get away from that fire,” cried Grant. “Our supper is being cooked +there and we can’t come back until you leave.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not stopping you,” replied George. “Come back and tell me what to +do.” +</p> +<p> +“I told you,” exclaimed Fred. “Go and drown yourself.” +</p> +<p> +“Where’d you get it, Pop?” repeated John and immediately went off into +gales of laughter. +</p> +<p> +“You caught the trout all right,” laughed Fred. “You caught something +else. Something a good deal bigger than that fish too.” +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t it awful!” exclaimed John holding on to his nose. “I remember my +younger brother once ran across a skunk like this and he had to live in +the barn for two days.” +</p> +<p> +“To think that Pop should be the one, too,” said Fred delightedly. “It +seems almost too good to be true.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s true all right enough,” said Grant grimly. “Go up close to him if +you don’t believe it.” +</p> +<p> +“What shall I do?” called George to his three unsympathetic companions. +He was standing near the fire, anguish depicted on his face. He was in a +sorry plight, for no matter where he went he could not escape the almost +overpowering odor that clung to him. +</p> +<p> +“Take all your clothes off and throw them in the lake,” said Grant. +“Then go take a swim yourself. +</p> +<p> +“After that we might let you come back,” added Fred. +</p> +<p> +“But I can’t throw away perfectly good clothes,” protested George. +</p> +<p> +“They’re not ‘good’ any more,” laughed John. “Throw them away.” +</p> +<p> +“Burn them if you like,” suggested Fred. “Do anything you want with +them, only get rid of that smell. You can’t come near us until you do.” +</p> +<p> +“Is that so?” demanded George and he took a few steps forward. “Who says +I can’t come near you?” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t do it, Pop, don’t do it,” begged Grant. “If you only knew how you +smelled.” +</p> +<p> +“I do know; don’t worry about that. It follows me wherever I go.” +</p> +<p> +“Please don’t come near us,” exclaimed Grant as George still moved +towards them. +</p> +<p> +“I thought I’d come over and hug Fred,” said George. “He’s so pleased +about it all that it seems only fair that I should share the smell with, +him.” +</p> +<p> +“You stay away!” cried Fred in alarm. “Don’t you touch me. Don’t come +within forty rods of any of us.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Fred,” grinned George mischievously, “don’t run away from me. I +just want to show you how fond of you I am.” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke George walked slowly towards the group of three boys who +stood and watched him anxiously. They knew that George would stop at +nothing once he was started and his offer to share the smell of the +skunk with Fred gave them ample cause for alarm. Fred was the one most +worried and he really had good reason for his alarm, for he knew that +George would like nothing better than to rub up against him and inflict +the awful odor on him too. +</p> +<p> +“You keep away from me, Pop!” cried Fred uneasily. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you like me?” grinned George. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, yes, I love you,” exclaimed Fred, knowing well that whatever he +might say it would be exactly the wrong thing. +</p> +<p> +“Then let me hug you,” urged George, advancing steadily nearer. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll hit you over the head with this rock.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, Fred, how unkind of you; I really am surprised.” +</p> +<p> +“You’ll be worse than that if you don’t keep away,” warned Fred, but he +backed away a few feet as he saw George steadily approaching. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s get out of here,” whispered John to Grant and unnoticed by George +they withdrew and made their way back to the fire. +</p> +<p> +“Pop certainly has Fred worried now all right,” laughed John. +</p> +<p> +“I should say so,” agreed Grant. “The joke was on Pop at first but it +certainly is on Fred now. Just look at them.” +</p> +<p> +George still advanced slowly towards the spot where Fred was standing. +He held his arms out, entreating Fred to come to him, but Fred very +evidently had no intention of doing any such thing. He was slowly +retreating, threatening George meanwhile with all manner of punishment +if he was not left alone. +</p> +<p> +“Come to me, Fred,” begged George, a wide smile on his face. He was +content to suffer the discomfort of the terrible odor himself as long as +he could worry his friend so effectively. +</p> +<p> +“Keep away from me, I say!” threatened Fred, brandishing a stick in his +right hand. “I swear I’ll hit you over the head with this if you don’t.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Fred, you wouldn’t do that, would you?” exclaimed George, +pretending great surprise. “You wouldn’t hit your old friend who only +wants to share something nice with you. You can’t be serious.” +</p> +<p> +“You heard what I said.” +</p> +<p> +“But Fred—” +</p> +<p> +“Whew, what a smell!” cried Fred suddenly and he turned and fled as fast +as his legs could carry him. Close behind him followed George calling +out at every step for Fred to wait and share something nice with him. +These invitations however seemed to have no effect upon Fred, for he +merely increased his speed. +</p> +<p> +Now it so happened that the course Fred followed in his flight led +behind the tent and down the same narrow trail where George had had his +disastrous encounter with Mr. Skunk only a short time before. It also +happened that Mr. Skunk had not left the neighborhood with such +eagerness as had George; indeed he had been inclined to linger around +the same spot where they had met before. +</p> +<p> +As has been told the path was narrow and hard to follow and the night +was growing darker every moment. Unfortunately for Fred a vine stretched +across the path just before he came to the spot where George had +searched for the “cat.” This vine caught Fred’s toe and he sprawled at +full length on the ground; George, but a couple of steps in the rear of +him, had to jump over the prostrate body of his friend in order to save +himself from meeting the selfsame fate. +</p> +<p> +When Fred fell he not only surprised but greatly annoyed Mr. Skunk who +was lurking only a few feet away. As a result Fred was treated to the +same dose that had made George so unpopular around the camp. +</p> +<p> +Together the two boys returned to camp. They were fellow sufferers now. +Though nearly overcome by the powerful stench, they bore with it long +enough to walk arm in arm up to the fire and put Grant and John to +sudden flight. This provided them much amusement but the smell was too +strong to be borne any longer. +</p> +<p> +“I guess we’ll have to do as Grant advised,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“What was that?” +</p> +<p> +“Throw our clothes away and take a swim.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess you’re right,” said Fred and side by side the two boys made +their way down the water’s edge. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXIV' id='chXIV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XIV—TALKING IT OVER</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Monday morning came and found the four young campers eagerly awaiting +the arrival of their challengers. There was great speculation as to what +they would look like and whether or not any set of games between the two +camps would provide an equal contest. +</p> +<p> +“I believe we can beat them,” exclaimed George confidently. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t be so sure,” advised Grant. “You’d better wait until you see your +opponents before you begin to make any predictions.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” said Fred. “You’d better not talk too much about it +either, Pop. You’ll need all your wind for the swimming and canoe +races.” +</p> +<p> +George gave the speaker a scornful glance but said nothing. The four +friends finished their breakfast and lolled about the camp waiting for +their rivals to appear. +</p> +<p> +“There they come now,” exclaimed John after the lapse of about an hour. +</p> +<p> +“Where?” demanded George. “I don’t see them.” +</p> +<p> +“That tree is in your way, I guess,” said John. “You’ll see them in a +minute or two.” +</p> +<p> +“There they are!” exclaimed George suddenly. “Their boat looks just like +the <i>Balsam</i>, doesn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“I think it is the same,” said John. “It seems to me my father told me +that there were two catboats on the lake made by the same man and made +exactly alike.” +</p> +<p> +“That’ll be fine,” said Fred eagerly. “No one can claim any advantage +because of the boat then, and the best sailors will win.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s hope we’re the ones,” laughed Grant. “Come on, who’s coming down +to the wharf to meet our guests?” +</p> +<p> +“We all are, I guess,” exclaimed John, and a moment later the four boys +were standing on the tiny dock waiting for the approaching catboat to +come into their little harbor. +</p> +<p> +“They’re good sailors all right,” whispered Fred as he watched the boys +in the boat maneuver their craft. “We’ll have to be awfully good to beat +them.” +</p> +<p> +“All the more credit if we do,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Ahoy, there!” he shouted a moment later. “You’d better anchor a little +way out from the dock here. We’ll come out in the canoes after you.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” came the reply. “Did you get our challenge?” +</p> +<p> +“We certainly did,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Good. I hope you’ll accept it.” +</p> +<p> +“Of course we will.” +</p> +<p> +The boat swung around and one of the crew threw the anchor overboard. +The sail was quickly lowered and everything was done in a quiet +business-like way that instilled a great amount of respect into the +hearts of the boys who, from the dock, were watching the proceedings. +</p> +<p> +A moment later Grant and John each took a canoe and set out from the +shore. They came alongside the catboat, which was named the <i>Spruce</i>, +and quickly transferred the crew to the canoes, and thence to the shore. +One of the boys, Thomas Adams by name, seemed to be the spokesman for +the party and he proceeded with Grant’s help to introduce everybody all +around. +</p> +<p> +Much laughter and embarrassment followed but before long all of the boys +were quite at their ease. They left the dock and proceeded to the tent +and all sat down on the ground in front of it. It seemed that the camp +at the end of the lake was very much like the one on the island. It was +occupied by four boys of just about the same age as the others and +practically of the same size. +</p> +<p> +“We thought it would be fun,” said Thomas Adams speaking for his three +friends as well as himself, “to challenge you fellows to a set of water +sports. We heard that there were to be four of you on this island this +summer and we saw you the other day just when you were leaving our camp; +right after that storm I mean. We were sorry to miss you.” +</p> +<p> +“We were sorry, too,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“You were away when we came to see you too,” said Thomas. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said George, “we were off trout fishing for a few days.” +</p> +<p> +“Have any luck?” asked Hugh McNeale one of the other visitors. +</p> +<p> +“Pretty good,” said George. “We had a lot of fun too.” +</p> +<p> +“Who caught the biggest fish?” +</p> +<p> +“Ask Fred here,” grinned George. “He knows all about that.” +</p> +<p> +Being urged to do so Fred proceeded to relate the story of how George +had carried off the prize. He did not spare himself in the telling +either and left out no detail of how disappointed he had been to find +that George had beaten him out. When he told how George had hooked his +trout the story was greeted with gales of laughter and congratulations +were showered upon the fortunate fisherman. +</p> +<p> +“A fellow with schemes like that would be hard to beat in any sort of a +game,” laughed Hugh. +</p> +<p> +“What sort of games are we going to have?” asked John. +</p> +<p> +“We thought a sailing race would be fun,” said Hugh. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and so would swimming and canoe races,” exclaimed Grant. “Do you +think three events will be enough?” +</p> +<p> +“How about a tilting contest?” said Thomas. +</p> +<p> +“What’s a tilting contest?” asked Fred curiously. +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t you ever hear of that?” +</p> +<p> +“Never that I know of.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, it’s like this,” explained Thomas. “Two fellows get into a canoe; +the one in the stern paddles and steers and the fellow in the bow has a +great long pole with one end of it all wrapped up with rags or something +like that. Another canoe fixed up the same way opposes them and the two +attack each other. The fellows with the poles jab at each other and try +to upset the other canoe or knock the bow man overboard; if he falls +overboard or the canoe upsets of course they lose the match.” +</p> +<p> +“That sounds fine,” exclaimed George. “I say we include a tilting match +by all means.” +</p> +<p> +“Two from our camp will take on two from yours,” suggested Thomas. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” agreed Grant. “We’ll enter our star team.” +</p> +<p> +“Entries will close one second before the match starts,” laughed +Franklin Dunbar, a fat, round-faced boy, who had spoken but little thus +far. +</p> +<p> +“And probably our team will be upset and in the water one second after +the match starts,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“It’ll be fun anyway,” said Thomas. “When shall we have the games?” +</p> +<p> +“We were wondering about that too,” said Grant. “I guess almost any time +will suit us though.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll need some practice,” remarked Fred. “Don’t forget that.” +</p> +<p> +“Not much,” said Grant. “I say not to practice too much. We don’t want +to make professional games out of them, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right, too,” objected Fred. “At the same time we want to +make them worth while and the better we all are the more fun they will +be too. Don’t you think so?” and he appealed to the four young visitors +for their opinion. +</p> +<p> +“I agree with you,” said Thomas readily. “Our camp wants to beat yours +too, and if you fellows don’t take it seriously why there won’t be much +honor in it for us if we do win.” +</p> +<p> +“There’d be plenty of disgrace if we lost under those conditions +though,” laughed Franklin Dunbar. +</p> +<p> +“We don’t know anything about tilting either, Grant,” said George. “We +will need a lot of practice for that event.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” agreed Grant. “I guess we do need practice. As far as I’m +concerned, anything you fellows say suits me. How about a judge though? +Suppose we should have a close finish in one of the races, who would we +have to decide it for us?” +</p> +<p> +“My uncle is coming to spend a week with us in camp,” said Hugh McNeale. +“He might act as judge if we wanted him.” +</p> +<p> +“That would be fine,” exclaimed Grant. “When is he coming?” +</p> +<p> +“Not till week after next.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” said Fred. “That would be just about right.” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose we set two weeks from Wednesday then,” suggested Thomas. “That +ought to give us plenty of time to get in shape.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” agreed Grant. “We ought to have some sort of name for our +teams too. Have you any name for your camp?” +</p> +<p> +“No, we haven’t.” +</p> +<p> +“Neither have we. Suppose you call yourselves the red team and we’ll be +the blue.” +</p> +<p> +“Fine,” exclaimed Hugh. “I’ll write a letter to Uncle Jack and tell him +what he has ahead of him. I’ll tell him that he really is to be the +umpire and that he’ll get the same treatment an umpire does if he +doesn’t do his job well.” +</p> +<p> +The remaining details were speedily arranged and then the four boys of +the red team sailed back to their camp, leaving the boys on the island +full of excitement and pleasure at the thought of the games ahead of +them. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXV' id='chXV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XV—PREPARATION</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +The days intervening until the time came for the games were busy ones +for the boys in the island camp. The <i>Balsam</i> was thoroughly overhauled, +and everything removed from her that might tend in any way to retard her +speed. Frequent cruises were made and every boy was assigned to some +special duty on the boat so that when the race was held there would be +no confusion. None of the young campers had any desire to lose the race +through inefficiency. +</p> +<p> +Long swims were indulged in to improve their wind and strengthen their +muscles. Canoe races were held and different combinations tried to +enable them to select the strongest team. A course a half-mile long was +marked out and time-trials held in an effort to decide upon the fastest +pair. All four boys were to be in the race but it had been decided that +the best policy was to put the best two paddlers in the same canoe. By +following this plan it was thought that their chances for winning would +be greatly improved. First place was to count two and second one in the +sailing and canoe races and in the tilting match. In the swimming race +three places were to count, the points to be scored being three for +first, two for second and one for third. The team scoring the greatest +number of points was to be declared the winner. +</p> +<p> +Practice for the tilting match occupied very much of the boys’ time. Two +long poles had been cut and one end of each was wound with old rags and +blankets, thus forming a large soft knob. +</p> +<p> +“If we’d only saved those clothes that we had on when the skunks got +after us,” remarked George, “we could have won a tilting contest from +anybody.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean by that!” inquired Grant curiously. +</p> +<p> +“Simply this. Instead of using rags to wind the poles with we could have +used those clothes.” +</p> +<p> +“What advantage would that have been?” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you see?” demanded George. “All we’d have to do would be to point +the pole at our opponent. We wouldn’t have to touch him at all; as soon +as he got a whiff of that awful odor he’d simply faint and fall +overboard and we’d be the winners.” +</p> +<p> +“A great idea, Pop,” laughed John. “Why didn’t you think of it at the +time?” +</p> +<p> +“In the first place I didn’t know anything about this tilting match at +the time; in the second place, even if I had, I don’t believe I’d have +kept them. Whew, they were awful!” and George shuddered at the +recollection. +</p> +<p> +“They certainly were,” agreed Fred. “Don’t talk to me about it; my +clothes were all in the same condition as yours.” +</p> +<p> +The same system that was adopted for selecting a team for the canoe race +was used for the tilting match. Every possible combination of the four +young campers was tried in an effort to find the strongest competitors. +Grant and John had been selected for the canoe race, and Grant and +George were decided upon for the tilting contest. +</p> +<p> +It had been taken for granted that Grant would be on both teams; he +outshone his companions in every form of game and sport just as he did +in his knowledge of books. He and George were heavier than the other two +boys and consequently made a more powerful team for the tilting match. +Weight would be an asset in that sport, for it is much easier to knock +down a light man than it is a heavy one; especially when a tricky and +shaky canoe is under your feet. +</p> +<p> +“I seem to be out of it,” remarked Fred ruefully when the final +selections had been made. +</p> +<p> +“Why are you?” demanded Grant. “You’re going to be in the canoe race +just as much as John and I?” +</p> +<p> +“I know it, but I’m not on the first team.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right, you and Pop might beat us out after all.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” exclaimed Fred. “Pop doesn’t do any work; he just sits there and +expects me to do it all.” +</p> +<p> +“You know that’s not so, Fred,” protested George warmly. “No one in the +world works harder than I do.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, if that’s so,” returned Fred, “all I can say is that there are an +awful lot of loafers in the world.” +</p> +<p> +“All four of us will be in every event except the tilting match,” said +John. “You and I are both out of that, Fred.” +</p> +<p> +“You can save your strength while that’s going on for the swimming +race,” said Grant. “We’ll have to depend on you two to win first and +second in that.” +</p> +<p> +“How long is it going to be?” asked George. +</p> +<p> +“A hundred and seventy-five yards. Tom Adams was over here yesterday +while you were away and we decided on that distance.” +</p> +<p> +“It seems to me like a queer distance though,” said George. “How did you +ever happen to hit on that?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, we wanted to make it a hundred yards and they wanted a two-twenty. +We finally compromised on a hundred and seventy-five yards.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s fair enough,” said George. “How are we going to measure off +these different distances?” +</p> +<p> +“Guess at them, I suppose,” laughed John. “It won’t make any difference +whether they’re exact or not, I guess.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I imagine we’re not going to break any time records so we needn’t +bother about such details,” agreed George. +</p> +<p> +“We haven’t had any practice so far to-day,” remarked Fred. “What’s the +matter; are we afraid of getting over-trained?” +</p> +<p> +“That can be done easily enough, all right,” said Grant. “Don’t you +remember what the track coach we had at school last year said?” +</p> +<p> +“He said I’d never make a runner if that’s what you mean,” laughed +George. +</p> +<p> +“No, not that. What he said about training.” +</p> +<p> +“What was it?” asked Fred. “I don’t remember.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, he said it was much better to be under-trained than over-trained. +Another thing, when a fellow was training for a certain event he’d never +let him run the full distance in practice.” +</p> +<p> +“Is that so?” exclaimed George. “That doesn’t sound logical to me +though.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said Grant, “but you know which school won all the meets +held anywhere around home, don’t you?” +</p> +<p> +“We did,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“That’s just it,” exclaimed Grant, “and yet you say that trainer was no +good.” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t mean to say that. All I said was that it didn’t seem +reasonable to me not to let a fellow run the full distance.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, Mr. Smythe used to say that the great temptation for most fellows +was to do too much work. They’d go out and run all the afternoon and +hang around until they were tired out and then wonder why they felt +heavy in the legs and had no life in them.” +</p> +<p> +“Sailing can’t hurt us anyway,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” agreed Grant, “and I’m in favor of doing this: stop +training for the events to-morrow. That’ll leave us two days to rest up +before the games are held and we can devote those two days to learning +how little we know about sailing.” +</p> +<p> +“I know that already,” laughed George. “I’m afraid we’re going to get a +good beating in that race.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t know,” Fred objected. “They might run on a rock or +something.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s our best chance all right,” said George. “I have an idea that +those fellows are all awfully good sailors.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope we have some wind,” said Grant hopefully. “We’ll never finish +the race unless we have a pretty stiff breeze. Personally I think the +course is too long.” +</p> +<p> +“Twice around the lake,” said John. “That’s not so far.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s pretty far,” insisted Grant. “Wait until you see the buoys out and +then you’ll realize it.” +</p> +<p> +“Who’s going to put them out?” +</p> +<p> +“The red team,” laughed Grant. +</p> +<p> +“They’re doing most of the work, aren’t they?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Well, they wanted to; naturally I didn’t object.” +</p> +<p> +“They’re going to get dinner over here, you know,” said George. “That’ll +give us something to do.” +</p> +<p> +“Just think of it,” exclaimed John. “Won’t we be hungry that day? The +swimming and canoe races and the tilting contests all in the morning and +then food. You’ll have to cook a lot, Grant.” +</p> +<p> +“I realize that,” said Grant grimly. “I guess we can feed them though.” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose we’re all even at the end of the morning,” exclaimed George. +“That would certainly make the sailing race exciting, wouldn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“It sure would,” Fred agreed. “We’ll have plenty of time to sail it too, +Grant. All afternoon ought to be long enough.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” said Grant. “Yes, I hope we can get around twice in one +afternoon.” +</p> +<p> +“This canoe race is what’s bothering me,” exclaimed George. “That’ll +take it out of us all right. It’s hard work paddling and as long as Fred +and I aren’t the first team I wonder if it wouldn’t be better if we +didn’t go in it at all. If we were fresh for the swimming race that +might increase our chances.” +</p> +<p> +“I know,” said Grant, “but it seems to me that every fellow ought to be +in every event.” +</p> +<p> +“But look here,” George objected. “You and String are a much better pair +than Fred and I. You simply walk away from us every time; we can’t +possibly beat you so what’s the use?” +</p> +<p> +“You might get second, and that one point might win for us.” +</p> +<p> +“I have an idea,” exclaimed John suddenly. “Why not make it a relay +race? We can race around the island and if we do that everybody can be +in it and it seems to me it would be a lot more fun that way.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s fine,” exclaimed George warmly. “Fred and I can paddle the first +lap and you and Grant the second. Will those other fellows agree to it +though?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see why they shouldn’t,” said Grant. “It’s just as fair as the +other way; fairer if anything because it gives every one a chance.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have to ask them about it though,” said John. “Why can’t we sail +down there now and see them?” +</p> +<p> +“We can,” said George springing to his feet. “Let’s do it, too.” +</p> +<p> +A few moments later the <i>Balsam</i> was under way, headed for the end of +the lake and the camp of the enemy, the red team. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXVI' id='chXVI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XVI—GRANT MISSES</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +The day set for the meet came at last. The first event, the tilting +contest, was scheduled for eleven o’clock and a half an hour before that +time the red team was on hand. The weather was ideal, bright and sunny +and warm, with not too much breeze. This was as the boys desired, for +they had hoped that the wind might not spring up until afternoon. At +least that is the way they would have arranged matters if they had any +power to do so. Strange to say it seemed as if the weather was to turn +out just as they had hoped. +</p> +<p> +Hugh McNeale brought his Uncle Jack along and all the boys were +captivated by him at once. He was a big, jolly man, full of fun, and +with a laugh that made you feel as if you wanted to join in it every +time you heard it. He was enthusiastic over the idea of being the judge +and promised to do his very best. +</p> +<p> +“I also have a trophy for the winning team,” he exclaimed. “It’s +something that you boys ought to have had in your camps anyway, but I +haven’t seen one in either and so I’m going to give it as a prize.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” inquired Hugh curiously. +</p> +<p> +“See for yourself,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell, for that was the name of +Hugh’s uncle. He took a package from underneath his coat and unwrapping +it, spread before the admiring gaze of the eight boys a silk American +flag about three feet in length. +</p> +<p> +“Say!” said George enthusiastically. “That’s worth working for, isn’t +it?” +</p> +<p> +“It certainly is,” agreed the seven other boys, almost with one voice. +</p> +<p> +“That’s the first prize,” said Mr. Maxwell, evidently greatly pleased +with the result the sight of the flag had produced. “Here’s the second,” +and from his pocket he drew another flag of the same quality as the +first but only half the size. +</p> +<p> +“I’m ashamed of you boys,” he continued. “Both of these camps should +have had a great big American flag flying right out in front of the +tent. Let people see that you’re patriotic and be proud of it.” +</p> +<p> +“We are proud of it,” objected Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Of course you are,” said Mr. Maxwell readily. “I want you to show it +off though. Have a flag, and every time you look at it don’t think only +of how beautiful it is. Remember what it stands for and how much you owe +to it. Think of the country that stands back of that flag and of the +millions of others who along with you have it for their national emblem. +You’re all glad you’re Americans and you’re proud of the fact and I want +you never to be afraid to admit it. Be loyal to the flag, boys, and by +your actions prove that you’re worthy of the protection it affords you. +And don’t forget either that it’s your duty as real American citizens to +do your part. That’s what so many forget so easily. You can’t expect to +receive benefits all the time and not give anything in return, you +know.” +</p> +<p> +“What can we do?” asked George, who along with all the others was deeply +impressed by Mr. Maxwell’s words. +</p> +<p> +“Just this: be good citizens. A good citizen is a man who not only obeys +the laws of his country, but who is always working to make his country +better. He puts his country’s interests ahead of his own and that’s a +hard thing to do sometimes. A good citizen stands by the mayor of his +town, and the governor of his state, and the president of his country. +Instead of sitting home and criticising them he gets out and works to +help them in every way he can and he is loyal to them. Those men are +behind this flag and if you are loyal to the flag, prove it by being +loyal to the men behind it. Every man must do his part.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess we’re careless at times and don’t think,” said Grant soberly. +</p> +<p> +“That’s true,” agreed Mr. Maxwell. “That’s no excuse for us though.” +</p> +<p> +“But I didn’t come here to make a speech,” he continued laughingly. “I +believe what I’ve just said with all my heart though. At present, +however, I know there is a tilting contest to be held and we’d better +start it at once. I’m anxious to see who gets the first two points +towards winning the big flag.” +</p> +<p> +Without further delay the four boys who were to compete in this event +set about preparing themselves for it. Bathing suits were donned so that +an upset would not cause any worry and the two canoes were soon ready +for the fray. +</p> +<p> +Grant and George represented the blue team and Thomas Adams and Franklin +Dunbar, the red. Grant was bow man, with George to handle the canoe; +Thomas was bow man, and Franklin paddled in the opposing boat. +</p> +<p> +The contest was staged in the little harbor and the judge and spectators +took their positions on the tiny wharf. The canoes now faced each other +some fifty feet apart, waiting for the signal. +</p> +<p> +“Not too fast now, Pop,” warned Grant. “I don’t want to fall out of the +canoe before we even reach the other one, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“I know,” replied George. “I’ll be careful.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m going to stay down on one knee like this, too.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a good scheme. Lock your feet around that thwart if you can. We +want to beat those fellows.” +</p> +<p> +“All ready?” came the call from shore. +</p> +<p> +“All ready,” answered Grant, and Thomas did the same. +</p> +<p> +“Go,” shouted Mr. Maxwell, and the match was on. +</p> +<p> +Franklin and George did not try to make speed however. In fact they were +both very cautious and as a consequence, the two canoes approached each +other slowly. Both pilots seemed willing to let the other man lead off +in the attack. +</p> +<p> +“Careful, Pop,” said Grant, without relaxing his gaze from his +opponent’s face for one instant. +</p> +<p> +“All right. I’m watching them.” +</p> +<p> +Grant, crouched on one knee, was holding the pole as a mediæval knight +would have held his lance in a jousting tournament. Thomas however, +stood up in his canoe, gaining a little freedom of action perhaps, but +at the same time increasing his chances of going overboard. +</p> +<p> +The canoes were only a few feet apart now and the bow men braced +themselves for the onslaught. +</p> +<p> +“Let ’em have it now, Grant!” shouted John from the shore. Fred joined +him in his exhortations, while Hugh and Herbert Halsey were just as +noisy in their zeal to cheer their team on, and for the size of the +audience the amount of sound produced was marvelous. Mr. Maxwell was the +only one who was silent. +</p> +<p> +Closer came the two canoes. Now they were within range and Thomas lunged +forward savagely at Grant. He ducked the blow and aiming one in return +caught his opponent full in the stomach. Thomas uttered a loud grunt and +fell backwards. As luck would have it however, he fell in the canoe. The +light craft rocked dangerously and narrowly missed upsetting. As it was, +some water was shipped and had it not been for the skill of the two +occupants it surely would have overturned. +</p> +<p> +“Quick, Grant!” urged George. “Hit him again before he can get up.” +</p> +<p> +“Bring me closer to them.” +</p> +<p> +George thrust his paddle into the water and the canoe shot forward. +Franklin, however, with ready presence of mind had swung his canoe +around the minute it righted itself and Grant’s lunge at Thomas missed. +Before George could bring his boat within range again, their opponents +had recovered their balance and were prepared for the second attack. +</p> +<p> +Once more the canoes approached each other. This time Thomas followed +Grant’s example and crouched on one knee. He had evidently learned a +lesson and had determined to be more wary. +</p> +<p> +“Get him, Grant! Get him!” shouted John. +</p> +<p> +“Careful, George; not too fast,” warned Grant. +</p> +<p> +He held his pole back waiting an opportunity to strike. This time he was +determined that any blow he delivered would end the match; he had been +out-lucked before and did not want it to happen again. +</p> +<p> +Thomas made a feint at him. Grant was anxious and struck back so eagerly +that he almost fell out of the canoe. +</p> +<p> +“That’s the way, Tom,” called Hugh. “You’ll fix him this time.” +</p> +<p> +Again Thomas feinted and again Grant lunged fiercely at his opponent. +Thomas then followed up his bluff with a quick stab that luckily only +struck Grant a glancing blow on the shoulder. Had it hit him squarely, +the match most certainly would have been ended then and there; as it was +only George’s quick action saved them from going over. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t let him fool you, Grant,” he warned. “Wait for him.” +</p> +<p> +Again they advanced and as they once more neared each other Thomas +repeated his former tactics. He made a feint to lunge at Grant, and as +before, Grant was unable to resist the temptation to strike back +quickly. This he did and Franklin in the stern of the opposing canoe, +anticipating this move, backed water and the blow missed Thomas’ head by +inches. +</p> +<p> +The poles the boys were using were long and heavy. As a result, they +were somewhat clumsy and hard to handle. As Grant lunged forward at +Thomas, he leaned over the side of the canoe and the weight of his pole +prevented him from regaining his balance at once. +</p> +<p> +Thomas and Franklin had evidently mapped out their plan of campaign +beforehand and apparently Grant had acted exactly as they wished him to. +Thomas held his pole with a shortened grip and before Grant could +recover his equilibrium, he jabbed at him with all his might. The great +wad on the end of the pole caught Grant squarely on the chest; he +dropped his pole and waved his arms violently about his head in an +effort to save himself. +</p> +<p> +All his efforts were of no use, however. Undoubtedly he would have gone +overboard anyway, but just to make sure, Thomas gave him a gentle push +with the business end of the pole and over he went. As he disappeared +over the side he gave the canoe a shove with his feet and a moment later +George joined him in the water. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXVII' id='chXVII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XVII—GEORGE’S STRATEGY</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +A moment later Grant and George came to the surface puffing and shaking +the water from their eyes and hair. Both boys were laughing. +</p> +<p> +“Nice work,” said Grant to their two opponents, who sat in their canoe +nearby. +</p> +<p> +“We were lucky,” protested Thomas. +</p> +<p> +“Lucky, nothing,” exclaimed Grant. “You knew more about the game than we +did and you deserved to win.” +</p> +<p> +The canoe belonging to the defeated boys floated close at hand, bottom +side up. The pole and the paddle were a short distance away. These were +soon rescued and the canoe being righted, the contestants made their way +to shore. John and Fred were the first to congratulate the winners. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have to win this canoe race,” exclaimed Fred. “You fellows have +two points to our one as it is now, and we can’t afford to let you get +twice as many again this time.” +</p> +<p> +“We’re going to do our best to get twice as many though, you may be sure +of that,” laughed Hugh McNeale. “We want that big flag.” +</p> +<p> +“If you win it, you’ll certainly be welcome to it,” exclaimed John. “We +want it ourselves though, I can tell you.” +</p> +<p> +The best of feeling existed between the two camps, but this fact did not +serve to lessen the competition and rivalry. Good sportsmanship adds +zest to every game. +</p> +<p> +“Where are the first pairs for this canoe race?” cried Mr. Maxwell. “We +mustn’t let these events lag, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll be ready in a minute,” replied Grant. “We want to get all our +wind back and remove all the water from this canoe first.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” said Herbert Halsey. “You fellows take your time.” +</p> +<p> +The suggestion of the blue team that the next event be made a relay race +around the island, had met with an enthusiastic response from their +rivals. Two teams from each camp were to compete and each team was to +paddle once around. The first pairs consisted of George and Fred, from +the blue team and opposed to them were Herbert Halsey and Franklin +Dunbar, from the red. Finishing the race were Grant and John, against +Hugh McNeale and Thomas Adams. Each camp had selected its strong team to +paddle last, hoping to win the race by a powerful finish. +</p> +<p> +“I guess we’re all ready now,” said Grant, when a few moments had +elapsed. “We’ll go ahead any time you say.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said Mr. Maxwell. “Now remember the rules; the starting +line is directly opposite this dock and I’ve got some string which we +will use for tape at the finish. Each team is to paddle once around the +island. When the second relay starts, the two canoes that have finished +will be stationed out here about twenty feet apart and this string will +be stretched between them; that will be the finish line. All four canoes +will be used of course and the second relay must not start until those +completing the first have touched the canoes with their paddles. Is it +all clear?” +</p> +<p> +“All clear,” said Grant, and Thomas answered for his side. +</p> +<p> +“Very well,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. “The first canoes may take their +places and the second relay had better be ready too.” +</p> +<p> +George and Fred pushed out from the dock and paddled slowly to the +starting point; Herbert and Franklin followed close behind. +</p> +<p> +When they were in position, and by the way the red team had drawn the +course nearest shore, Mr. Maxwell lifted his small megaphone and gave +his final instructions. +</p> +<p> +“Remember,” he called, “once around, and the inside team this lap will +be the outside next. Don’t get mixed up.” +</p> +<p> +“That’ll be a little help to us,” said John in a low voice to Grant. “I +hope Fred and Pop can give us a little lead to start out with.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope so too,” replied Grant. +</p> +<p> +“On your marks!” shouted Mr. Maxwell. +</p> +<p> +Four boys sat up alert and eager for the final word. +</p> +<p> +“Get set!” +</p> +<p> +Four paddles were raised and held poised for instant action. +</p> +<p> +“Go!” +</p> +<p> +The blades were dipped deeply into the water and the race was on. Side +by side the two canoes sped along. +</p> +<p> +“You fellows better go out there and take your places,” said Mr. +Maxwell, turning to the four boys who were to continue the race the next +relay. “We don’t want any mixup then, you know. It would be a shame to +have those boys paddle over half a mile for nothing.” +</p> +<p> +In response to his suggestion, Grant and John, and Hugh and Thomas, +paddled slowly out to the starting line, there to await the arrival of +their respective team-mates. +</p> +<p> +“Take it slow, Fred,” urged George from his position in the stern of the +racing canoe. “Don’t kill yourself right at the start.” +</p> +<p> +They had covered about one hundred yards of their course and all four +boys were paddling with every ounce of strength they possessed. +</p> +<p> +“Dip your paddle deep,” he continued. “Take a long easy stroke. A good +steady pace is what we want.” +</p> +<p> +“They’ll get way ahead of us,” protested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“What if they do? They’ll be all in at the finish and we’ll start a +sprint.” +</p> +<p> +In response to George’s suggestion they eased up materially. As Fred had +predicted the other canoe immediately began to draw away, for its two +occupants did not relax their efforts for an instant. Wider and wider +the gap opened between them until thirty feet separated the two racers +when they came to the first turn. +</p> +<p> +The island was oval in its shape, very much like an egg. The start had +been made from a point about midway between the two ends. The first +stretch, therefore, was half the length of the island, then the corner +was turned and the whole length of the island was covered, ending with +the home stretch, half the length of the island again. +</p> +<p> +Steadily and strongly, George and Fred paddled. Herbert and Franklin +still worked desperately, taking nearly three strokes to the other boys’ +two, and as a result, the gap between the two boats continually widened. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t let it worry you, Fred,” said George. “They can’t keep up that +pace very much longer.” +</p> +<p> +“They’re not weakening yet though, Pop.” +</p> +<p> +“I know it, but we’ve only covered half the course so far.” +</p> +<p> +Steadily the red team’s canoe drew away. Forty, fifty feet, they were in +the lead now. If any one had been in a position to observe, however, he +would have seen that its occupants were beginning to show signs of +weakening. Their breath came faster and faster, the perspiration rolled +off their faces in streams, and their muscles began to ache and throb. +</p> +<p> +Relentlessly George and Fred followed them. Not one bit did they +increase their efforts, though George had great difficulty in +restraining his companion. Powerful, even strokes urged their tiny craft +on and now they were holding their own. Just ahead of them was the last +turn which was to bring them into the home stretch. +</p> +<p> +“How do you feel, Fred?” asked George. +</p> +<p> +“Fine.” +</p> +<p> +“Are you tired?” +</p> +<p> +“Not very.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope not. We’ll start a sprint the second we round that turn and +we’ll have to put all we’ve got into it.” +</p> +<p> +The leading canoe was even now turning the point. The boys in it were +plainly tired as their frequent splashing showed. They still worked +desperately, however, and it would be no mean task to overtake them. +</p> +<p> +Grant and John sat in their canoe at the starting point eagerly awaiting +the appearance of their team-mates. To their dismay, it was Franklin and +Herbert who first hove in sight and to the waiting boys it seemed as if +hours elapsed before George and Fred rounded the turn. At last they +appeared, however, over thirty yards in the rear. +</p> +<p> +“Now, Fred!” urged George, as they started on the home stretch. “Let ’em +have it.” +</p> +<p> +Like demons the two boys began to ply their paddles. The light canoe was +quick to respond and it fairly flew over the water. Foot by foot and +yard by yard they gained on their fast-tiring opponents. +</p> +<p> +Franklin and Herbert paddled desperately. Their strength was gone +however; they had used it all up at the start of the race. Their arms +felt like great chunks of lead and it was all the two boys could do to +make them respond to the urging of their wills. +</p> +<p> +At racehorse speed, George and Fred plowed along. The gap between the +two canoes began to disappear as if by magic. The steady pace they had +maintained had tired them, to be sure, but they still had plenty of +reserve strength left and they were using it now when it counted most. +The cheers of their team-mates waiting for them came faintly to their +ears, spurring them on. +</p> +<p> +“We’ve got ’em, Fred! We’ve got ’em!” exclaimed George triumphantly. +“Stick to it.” +</p> +<p> +Fifty yards away was the finish line and the canoes were almost on even +terms. Forty yards and George and Fred were in the lead. Their rivals +were beaten, dead tired, and possessed of scarcely the strength +necessary to urge their canoe across the line. +</p> +<p> +Thirty yards from home and George and Fred enjoyed a lead of nearly five +yards. They were moving at easily twice the speed of their opponents +now. It seemed certain that Grant and John were to be handed a splendid +head-start for the last relay, when an unexpected and most disheartening +thing suddenly happened. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXVIII' id='chXVIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII—A CLOSE MATCH</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Fifteen yards from the finish Fred’s paddle broke. It snapped off short +in his hand and as a result, the canoe almost upset. It seemed as if +their splendid effort was to go for nothing. Herbert and Franklin, +seeing the plight of their rivals, were endowed with new hope that they +might win their relay after all. The hope thus aroused gave them just +strength enough to urge their canoe forward across the line. Herbert +lifted his paddle and touched the canoe in which Hugh and Thomas waited +so impatiently, and then sank back against the thwart exhausted. +</p> +<p> +The disaster to Fred was nearly fatal. The canoe rocked dangerously and +though it did not turn over, it lost every bit of its momentum. +</p> +<p> +“Sit down, Fred!” shouted George. “I’ll paddle.” +</p> +<p> +One man against two is a severe handicap, however, even if those two are +well nigh exhausted. It must be remembered also that George too, was +nearly fagged out. In spite of his usual lightheartedness, he had an +indomitable will, however, and not one of the boys had more nerve than +he. +</p> +<p> +He dipped his blade deep into the water, brought the bow of the canoe +around so that it pointed in the proper direction, and urged it forward. +Meanwhile the other canoe had passed them and crossed the line at least +five yards in the lead. +</p> +<p> +Grant and John were off like a flash, however, and the advantage the red +team enjoyed was not insurmountable by any means. +</p> +<p> +“That was tough luck, boys,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell earnestly to Fred and +George. “You two certainly deserved to win that relay.” +</p> +<p> +“You surely did,” echoed Franklin Dunbar. “That was about the toughest +luck I ever saw.” +</p> +<p> +“Fred’s too strong,” laughed George. “It’s awfully hard to get any +paddle that he won’t break.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t pay any attention to what he says, Mr. Maxwell,” urged Fred. “He +thinks he can tease me; personally, I think he’s crazy.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope not,” laughed Mr. Maxwell. +</p> +<p> +“He’s fresh though,” insisted Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Not now,” puffed George. “My breath’s gone and I’m all in.” +</p> +<p> +“That was a great race,” insisted Mr. Maxwell. “I don’t remember ever +having seen a better one.” +</p> +<p> +“We were about twenty-five yards ahead of them at one time, you know,” +said Herbert. “I thought we would win easily.” +</p> +<p> +“So did I,” exclaimed Fred. “You kept drawing away from us all the time +and I thought we wouldn’t even be in it. I wanted to paddle harder all +the time but Pop here wouldn’t let me. He insisted that we keep up a +steady gait and sprint at the end.” +</p> +<p> +“My system was all right, wasn’t it?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“It surely was. You didn’t count on the paddle breaking, though.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, yes, I did. I knew that if you exerted all your strength that any +paddle would snap; that’s the reason I wanted you to save it until the +end. Suppose you’d cut loose over the other side of the island and the +paddle had broken there. We’d have been in a nice fix, wouldn’t we?” and +George winked solemnly at their three visitors who seemed much amused at +his efforts to secure a rise from his companion. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, dry up!” exclaimed Fred shortly, and George laughed gleefully at +having accomplished his purpose. +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile the two other canoes were rounding the first turn. +</p> +<p> +“Sprint, John! Sprint!” Grant urged the moment they had started. “Catch +up to them and hang right on to them all the way around.” +</p> +<p> +Paddling with all their strength Grant and John succeeded in catching up +with their opponents. When the bow of their canoe was within a few feet +of the stern of the other they eased up a bit and contenting themselves +with allowing their rivals to set the pace, they kept their position +with bulldog determination. +</p> +<p> +Thomas and Hugh sprinted. Grant and John followed suit. If the leading +canoe slackened its pace the one behind did the same. Like a shadow the +two Go Ahead boys dogged their opponents’ course. +</p> +<p> +Such a proceeding always worries the leader. To know that a step behind +him is some one who follows him like grim death and who cannot be shaken +off by any means whatsoever, is bound to have its effect in the long +run. The pace-maker is irritated and bewildered and sometimes +demoralization follows as a result. +</p> +<p> +Grant was aware of this and he intended to make the most of it. He knew +that if Thomas and Hugh discovered that it was out of the question to +pull away from the pursuing canoe their confidence would be shaken and +once this quality is lost, a great asset is gone. +</p> +<p> +It is easier to follow the pace than to make it. Another advantage is +that the one behind can watch his opponent and note everything that he +does. The leader, on the other hand, cannot tell what his rival intends +to do and must always be on his guard lest he be taken by surprise. +</p> +<p> +Thomas and Hugh worked desperately. Evidently they had decided that +their best chance was to tire out the boys in the canoe that followed +them so relentlessly. With this object in view they started a sprint +when they had covered about one-third of the course and they kept it up. +Their team-mates had tried to sprint the entire distance, and failed. +Could these two do it? George and Fred had been content to allow their +rivals to gain on them, but not so Grant and John. Their one idea was to +hang on and hang on and hang on, until the time should come when an +opportunity offered itself for a quick dash into the lead. This chance +had not yet presented itself. +</p> +<p> +The four boys worked like demons. Down the whole length of the island +they raced, neck and neck. The same amount of open water showed between +the two canoes all the way along. It almost looked as if the first canoe +was towing the other. Maintaining these same positions they approached +the last turn. +</p> +<p> +“Now, String!” said Grant in a low voice. “When they take this curve, +I’m going to shoot in between them and the shore. Be ready.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” replied John, without looking up from his task for an +instant. +</p> +<p> +The leading canoe now turned and began to round the point of the island. +Close behind them followed Grant and John. Thomas and Hugh were not far +from shore, so that Grant would not have much room to pass, if indeed +such a thing was possible. Just before the canoes entered the +straightaway leading to the finish line, the two Go Ahead boys made +their bid for the lead. +</p> +<p> +Grant in the stern swung the canoe in between the other and the shore. +The space was limited but their chance had come. It was now or never. +</p> +<p> +“Now, String!” cried Grant. “Let ’em have it!” +</p> +<p> +It seemed impossible that the two boys could work any harder than they +had been. Every one seems to have some reserve strength, however, no +matter how much he may have used before, and it was this store that +Grant and John called upon now. +</p> +<p> +Inch by inch they crept up. Soon Thomas from the stern of his canoe +could see out of the corner of his eye the bow of the blue team’s canoe. +</p> +<p> +“Paddle, Hugh!” he cried. “Paddle for all you’re worth!” +</p> +<p> +It was a desperate contest, but Grant and John were not to be denied. +The difference that setting the pace or following it made, was just +enough to give them a slight advantage. As far as skill and strength +were concerned, the four boys were remarkably well matched. +</p> +<p> +Down the home stretch they dashed, and little by little Grant and John +gained. They gained steadily also, and it was evident that if the course +were long enough they would be returned winners. But could they catch +and pass their rivals before the finish line was reached? That was what +worried Fred and George, who screamed themselves hoarse in their +eagerness to spur their comrades on. +</p> +<p> +No open water showed between the boats now. A few yards more and the red +team was but three-quarters of a length ahead. Soon this was reduced to +half a length and still Grant and John gained. The line was but a few +yards distant now however. Could they do it? +</p> +<p> +The veins stood out on their foreheads. Between their clenched teeth +their breath came in gasps. Still they struggled on, still they gained +slowly, almost imperceptibly and nearer and nearer they came to the +finish. +</p> +<p> +“If the course was only a few yards longer,” groaned George as he +watched the stirring finish from the canoe. +</p> +<p> +A moment later and the two racers were almost on even terms. It was +nearly impossible to tell which one was in the lead now, so evenly were +they matched. The tape was only a few feet away. With one final effort +the four young racers urged their canoes forward; they broke the tape +and shot on past. The race was over. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXIX' id='chXIX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XIX—A CLOSE SHAVE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Well!” exclaimed George. “I never saw anything to beat that!” +</p> +<p> +“Who won?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t ask me. I’m not the judge.” +</p> +<p> +The boys turned and looked at Mr. Maxwell who was seated in the other +canoe with Franklin and Herbert. His face was turned towards the two +canoes which had just flashed across the finish line. He wore a puzzled +expression and was evidently at a loss what to say. +</p> +<p> +“Who won?” called George. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Maxwell turned and looked at the speaker sorrowfully. “No one,” he +said. +</p> +<p> +“No one,” exclaimed George. “Why, how can that be?” +</p> +<p> +“Couldn’t it be a tie?” asked Fred quietly. +</p> +<p> +“Why, yes, of course. I hadn’t planned for a tie though.” +</p> +<p> +“I declare the race a tie,” announced the judge solemnly. “If either +boat was ahead of the other, I’m sure I didn’t see it, and I wouldn’t +dare call it anything else.” +</p> +<p> +The racers had turned around and were now making their way slowly back. +All four of the boys were well nigh exhausted, but they were smiling +nevertheless. +</p> +<p> +“Who won?” called Thomas, for they had not heard the judge’s verdict. +</p> +<p> +“It was a tie,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“A tie?” exclaimed Grant, his face falling. “That’s bad.” +</p> +<p> +“Why is it?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“Because we needed the points.” +</p> +<p> +“By the way,” exclaimed Hugh, “how do we award the points?” +</p> +<p> +“Split them, don’t we?” said Fred readily, appealing to Mr. Maxwell. +</p> +<p> +“Each team gets one and a half. Two for first and one for second makes a +total of three, and a half of three is one and a half.” +</p> +<p> +“Whew!” whistled George. “You certainly are quick at figures.” +</p> +<p> +A general laugh went up at Fred’s expense but he did not seem to mind. +</p> +<p> +“That’s the way it’s figured out anyway,” said Mr. Maxwell. “That makes +the total points three and a half for the red team and two and a half +for the blue.” +</p> +<p> +“Still one point behind,” exclaimed Grant. “We’ll have to get that back +somehow.” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said Thomas, “the swimming race comes next and three places +count in that. Three for first, two for second, and one for third; +you’ll have a fine chance to catch us there.” +</p> +<p> +“I was just thinking,” interrupted Mr. Maxwell, “that it might be a good +idea to reverse the order of these last two events. You boys are pretty +well tired out after that canoe race and to swim a hundred and +seventy-five yards now would be quite a severe strain. What do you say +to our having the sailing race next?” +</p> +<p> +“Why,” said Grant slowly, “I don’t see any objection to that. What do +the rest of you fellows think about it?” +</p> +<p> +“How about dinner?” exclaimed George. “We could never finish by the time +we had planned to eat and I must say I’m hungry right now.” +</p> +<p> +“So am I,” said Hugh so earnestly that everyone laughed. +</p> +<p> +“Why don’t we have dinner right now then?” suggested Mr. Maxwell. “As +soon as we are through we can start the sailing race.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a good scheme,” exclaimed Grant. “Let’s do that.” +</p> +<p> +“And have the swimming race after the sailing?” queried Thomas. +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” said Grant. “The water’s more apt to be quiet later in +the day than it is now and that will make it better for swimming.” +</p> +<p> +“Very true,” agreed Mr. Maxwell. “The wind often seems to go down with +the sun and if the wind goes down the water becomes still.” +</p> +<p> +Without further delay they made their way ashore and preparations for +dinner were at once started. Grant usually did all the cooking, but +to-day he had an abundance of help. Wood was quickly gathered and a +blazing fire was soon under way. +</p> +<p> +Two of the boys were set to work peeling potatoes which were to be fried +in the pan. Others made ready the dishes and collected the knives and +forks. Mr. Maxwell had several good sized bass he had caught before +breakfast, and, what was even better, he had brought along a dozen and a +half ears of green corn, two for everyone present. Was it any wonder +that the young campers’ eyes sparkled with anticipation as they saw the +dinner being prepared? +</p> +<p> +Their appetites were keen as only those in the woods can understand. The +fragrant odor of sizzling bacon and roasting corn coming to their +nostrils only served to increase their eagerness. +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t this great?” cried George enthusiastically, when at last dinner +was announced as ready and the pleasant task of disposing of it had +begun. “If anything can beat this, I’d like to know what it is.” +</p> +<p> +“There is nothing that can tie it even,” laughed Mr. Maxwell, who seemed +to be enjoying himself as much as any of the boys. +</p> +<p> +“I only hope Pop won’t eat so much, he’ll sink the <i>Balsam</i>,” said Fred +doubtfully. “We have plenty of ballast aboard as it is.” +</p> +<p> +“You ‘tend to your own dinner,” advised George very promptly. “I’m too +busy to waste any time talking to you now.” +</p> +<p> +At last the meal was over, and every one had had sufficient to eat. +</p> +<p> +“All ready to start the race?” inquired Mr. Maxwell. +</p> +<p> +“Oh,” groaned Franklin, “I don’t feel as if I could move. I’d rather +crawl off somewhere and go to sleep. I guess I ate too much.” +</p> +<p> +“I <em>know</em> I did,” laughed John. +</p> +<p> +“We’d better start though, I guess,” urged Grant. “The course is long +and while there’s a good breeze now you can’t tell how long it will +last.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” agreed Mr. Maxwell. “You’d better get ready.” +</p> +<p> +The boys at once made their way to their respective boats and made the +final preparations for the race. Both boats had had their sails up all +the morning in order to dry them out thoroughly and there was very +little left to be done. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Maxwell sat in a canoe near at hand and watched the boys. +</p> +<p> +“Remember,” he said, “twice around the course. The first lap you go one +way and the second in the opposite. Be very careful to round every +stake. The start is from the same spot as the canoe race and the finish +is there, too. I will fire this pistol as a warning gun, and three +minutes later I will fire it again for the start. Be sure not to cross +the starting line before I give the second signal.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said Grant. “We’re all ready.” +</p> +<p> +“So are we,” echoed Thomas from the <i>Spruce</i>. +</p> +<p> +“Very well then,” said Mr. Maxwell. “Get your anchors up and move out by +the starting line.” +</p> +<p> +This was soon done and a few moments later the two catboats were +jockeying back and forth off the entrance to the little harbor. Fred was +at the tiller of the <i>Balsam</i> and Hugh guided the <i>Spruce</i>. +</p> +<p> +The sharp crack of the pistol announced that the race was about to +start. Grant had been waiting, watch in hand, for this signal. +</p> +<p> +“Take a short tack out and back, Fred,” he urged. “I’ll watch the time.” +</p> +<p> +“Hard-a-lea!” called Fred as he put the tiller over and the <i>Balsam</i> +came around into the wind. His crew quickly shifted sides, the sheet was +hauled taut, and the trim little boat scudded swiftly along before the +fresh breeze. +</p> +<p> +“Better go back now,” advised Grant when they had covered fifteen or +twenty yards. He scarcely lifted his eyes from his watch which he still +held in his right hand. “We’ve got a minute and a half more.” +</p> +<p> +Once more the <i>Balsam</i> came about and began to retrace its short course +towards the starting line. The <i>Spruce</i> was just off its starboard side, +with bow pointing directly into the wind and consequently was almost +stationary. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll cross the line too soon,” exclaimed John nervously. “We’ll have +to come back if we do.” +</p> +<p> +“Leave that to me,” said Grant confidently, his eyes still on the +second-hand of his watch. “I’ll look out for that.” +</p> +<p> +“We’re not a dozen feet from the line now though,” cried John in alarm. +“You’d better come around, Fred.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you do it,” exclaimed Grant sharply. +</p> +<p> +Closer and closer to the line they came. John, and for that matter Fred +and George also were intensely nervous for fear they should cross the +line before the signal. Grant, however, seemed confident that they were +on the safe side. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have to turn around and start all—” began John, when Grant +suddenly interrupted him. +</p> +<p> +“Now,” he cried, and barely the fraction of a second behind his voice +came the sound of the starting gun. Almost simultaneously the <i>Balsam</i> +crossed the line; away to a splendid start and with a good lead of at +least fifteen or twenty feet on the <i>Spruce</i>. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXX' id='chXX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XX—GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“I take it all back, Grant,” exclaimed John. “You’re all right.” +</p> +<p> +“It was certainly close though,” said Fred solemnly. +</p> +<p> +“But ‘close’ doesn’t count in any game, you know,” laughed Grant. +</p> +<p> +“How about quoits?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“That’s right, Pop,” exclaimed Grant, “it does count in quoits, but I +don’t know of any other.” +</p> +<p> +“We’d better attend to our sailing,” warned Fred. “Trim that sheet in a +little, String.” +</p> +<p> +“That enough?” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said Fred. “My, I hope this breeze holds.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s getting stronger, I think,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“It does seem to be,” agreed Grant. “It’s dead ahead of us now, but if +it doesn’t change, it’ll be right behind us on the last leg of the race. +I think it’s always fun to be able to finish straight before the wind.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s true,” exclaimed John. “We go in the opposite direction the +second round, don’t we?” +</p> +<p> +The <i>Balsam</i> was skimming over the water rapidly on a long tack to +leeward. Behind her came the <i>Spruce</i>, also making good time and with +about the same distance between the two boats that had separated them at +the start. +</p> +<p> +“They’re pointing up a little more than we are, I think,” remarked +Grant, after a glance at their rival. +</p> +<p> +“We’re all right, though,” said Fred confidently. “I don’t believe in +sailing as close hauled as that.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps not,” agreed Grant. “At any rate you know more about it than +the rest of us. We’ll have to do as you say whether we like it or not.” +</p> +<p> +They rounded the first stake thirty yards ahead of the <i>Spruce</i>. Fred’s +tactics on the first leg had proved successful, anyway. +</p> +<p> +“It’s easy,” exclaimed George confidently, as they slid past the stake +and settled back for the long reach to the next mark. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t talk like that, Pop,” urged John earnestly. “Don’t ever boast or +get overconfident; you’re sure to regret it if you do.” +</p> +<p> +“Knock on wood, Pop,” laughed Fred. “That’ll take away all the bad +effects.” +</p> +<p> +The four friends were in excellent spirits, for they enjoyed a +comfortable lead which seemed to be steadily increasing. +</p> +<p> +“There they come around the stake now,” exclaimed Grant, gazing behind +them. “They gave it a little more room than we did.” +</p> +<p> +“And consequently sailed a little bit farther than necessary,” added +Fred. “A few feet doesn’t seem very much at the time but in the long run +it amounts to a good deal.” +</p> +<p> +“On the other hand,” said John, “if you cut too close to the stake +you’re apt to foul it and then you’re disqualified.” +</p> +<p> +“The answer to that is easy enough,” laughed Fred. “Don’t hit it.” +</p> +<p> +“You fellows take more chances than I would,” said John doubtfully. “I +believe in playing safe.” +</p> +<p> +Steadily the <i>Balsam</i> drew away from her rival. The wind was strong now +and the lake was dotted with white-caps. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps the <i>Balsam</i> is a rough-water sailor,” remarked Grant. “At any +rate she seems to be doing splendidly in this breeze.” +</p> +<p> +“If the breeze should die down they’d probably catch right up to us,” +said Fred. “Let’s hope it doesn’t.” +</p> +<p> +“What makes you think they’d catch us?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Nothing. Some boats sail better in one kind of a breeze than in others. +This seems to be suited to a strong wind and I thought it was possible +that the <i>Spruce</i> would do better in a light one.” +</p> +<p> +“But they’re exactly alike,” objected John. +</p> +<p> +“I know it,” replied Fred. “That doesn’t necessarily mean they’ll sail +just alike, though. I’ve seen ten boats all built on the same model, the +same size, and everything about them the same, and yet some of them seem +to be twice as fast as others.” +</p> +<p> +“It must be in the one who handles the boat, then,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“Not at all. I’ve seen them swap crews and the same boats win.” +</p> +<p> +“How do you explain it?” inquired Grant, who always liked to have a +reason for everything. +</p> +<p> +“I can’t, and I don’t believe any one else can, either. Some boats seem +to do well under certain conditions, and that’s all there is to it.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, the present conditions seem to suit the <i>Balsam</i> pretty well,” +exclaimed George. “Let’s hope they continue.” +</p> +<p> +The second stake was reached with the <i>Balsam</i> still farther in the lead +than before. The wind steadily increased in strength and forced the +sturdy little catboat through the water at an amazing speed. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t know she could go so fast,” exclaimed John enthusiastically. +</p> +<p> +“None of us did, I guess,” said Grant. “She’s all right though, isn’t +she?” +</p> +<p> +“I should say so,” cried George. “Say, just look at her go,” and he +scrambled over to the other side of the boat. The <i>Balsam</i> was heeled +far over and the lee rail was awash. Now and then a wave, a little +larger than its fellows, slapped lustily against the side and covered +the crew with spray. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have to reef her if this wind gets much stronger,” said Fred just +before they had completed the first round. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the use?” demanded George. “It’s great this way, and we’re +certainly gaining on those fellows all the time.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Fred, “but you don’t want to lose the mast, do you?” +</p> +<p> +“Or we might upset,” added Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Suppose we do,” cried George. “It won’t hurt us.” +</p> +<p> +“But we’d lose the race just the same,” said Fred. “Let that sheet out a +little there, String. Whenever she heels over like that, give her a +little more rope and I’ll bring her up into the wind for a second.” +</p> +<p> +“That makes us lose time, doesn’t it?” asked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I think so. It seems to me that if we stopped and put a reef in the +sail we’d sail more evenly and as a result we’d go faster.” +</p> +<p> +“Those fellows in the <i>Spruce</i> don’t seem to be putting in any reefs, I +notice,” remarked George. “If they don’t need them I don’t see why we +do.” +</p> +<p> +“But the breeze is getting so much stronger,” insisted Fred. “It really +seems to me that we should put in one reef anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“How long will it take us?” +</p> +<p> +“Not two minutes. We can do it in no time.” +</p> +<p> +“We’d better wait until we round this next stake, I think,” said Grant. +“We can do it, then.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” agreed George. “I don’t believe in it, though. I love it +this way,” and he exclaimed delightedly as the <i>Balsam</i> heeled far over +and the spray from the crest of one of the white-caps drenched him from +head to foot. +</p> +<p> +“It’s cold, though,” objected John. +</p> +<p> +“Nonsense,” cried George. “If you were half a man you wouldn’t mind it.” +</p> +<p> +John merely shivered, and placing Grant in temporary charge of the sheet +he crawled forward and drawing his sweater out from under the deck, he +put it on. +</p> +<p> +“Get ready now,” warned Fred. “The stake is just ahead.” +</p> +<p> +“And we’re going to take in a reef as soon as we round it. Is that +right?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“That’s the idea,” said Fred. “Here we go,” and putting the tiller hard +over he brought the <i>Balsam</i> cleanly around the mark and headed her up +into the wind. +</p> +<p> +“Let go that topping lift, Pop!” he cried. “Loose your halyards there, +Grant! Now, String, let’s get busy!” +</p> +<p> +He left his post, and ordering and helping his comrades, he took charge +of the work of reefing. He had predicted two minutes for the work, but +it took at least five, and before they had finished the <i>Spruce</i> was +almost up to them. +</p> +<p> +“Hurry, Fred, hurry!” urged George. “They’re catching us.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” cried Fred, springing back to the tiller. “Haul in your +sheet there, String!” +</p> +<p> +The bow of the <i>Balsam</i> swung slowly around and as the sail filled she +began to slip through the water once more. Not twenty-five yards behind +them now came the <i>Spruce</i>, her full sail spread. Thomas waved his hand +and shouted something to the four Go Ahead boys but the wind blew the +sound away and the words were lost. +</p> +<p> +“What did he say?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t hear,” said George. “He probably said they’d catch us in a few +minutes, and I guess they will, too.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re a pessimist, Pop,” said Fred, but he looked back anxiously at +the <i>Spruce</i> plowing along behind them. +</p> +<p> +“No, I’m not either,” exclaimed George. “I do think we made a mistake in +reefing that sail, though.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait and see,” said Fred, but he himself appeared to be anxious. +</p> +<p> +“If the wind should die down we’d be in a nice fix,” said George in a +discouraged tone of voice. +</p> +<p> +“It doesn’t seem to be going down now, though,” said Grant. “Just see us +go! And look at all the white-caps. I really think we’re doing better +than we did before.” +</p> +<p> +“But we’re not gaining on them any more,” insisted George gloomily. +</p> +<p> +“We don’t need to,” laughed Grant. “All we have to do is to hold our +lead.” +</p> +<p> +The relative position of the two boats was unchanged at the end of the +first leg on the second round. The <i>Balsam</i> still enjoyed her lead of +twenty-five yards over her rival. They had covered only a short distance +on the second leg when George suddenly remarked that the wind was dying +down. +</p> +<p> +“I know it is,” he insisted. “Just look; we aren’t tipping half as much +as we were.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope you’re wrong, Pop,” said Fred anxiously. +</p> +<p> +“But I’m not. Can’t you see it yourself?” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps you’re right. At any rate it may only be a lull.” +</p> +<p> +In silence the four young sailors watched the sail and looked out over +the water and gazed fearfully at the <i>Spruce</i> so close behind them now. +</p> +<p> +“She’s gaining,” announced John. +</p> +<p> +“No doubt of it,” said George. “What shall we do?” +</p> +<p> +“What can we do?” demanded John in despair. +</p> +<p> +“Can’t we take the reef out?” +</p> +<p> +“If we did,” said Fred, “we’d have to stop, and they’d surely pass us, +and whether we’d ever catch them or not would be a question.” +</p> +<p> +“But won’t they pass us if we don’t take the reef out?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. We’ve got to take a chance either way.” +</p> +<p> +“And no matter what we do,” added George, “we’re bound to lose.” +</p> +<p> +“Cheer up, Pop,” urged Grant. “The wind hasn’t gone down very much and +they haven’t passed us yet.” +</p> +<p> +“Can’t we take the reef out while we’re going like this?” demanded +George. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we can,” said Fred. “It would be awfully hard, though, and +dangerous, too; besides that, we might tear the sail.” +</p> +<p> +“Let me try it,” begged George. “We mustn’t lose this race and that’s +all there is about it.” +</p> +<p> +Working under Fred’s guidance, and taking desperate chances George +finally succeeded in shaking the reef out of the sail. The halyards were +tightened and once again the <i>Balsam</i> moved along under her full spread +of canvas. +</p> +<p> +“Now I feel better,” sighed George, as he settled back in the cockpit +once more. “That short sail worried me.” +</p> +<p> +“We certainly lost a lot of time fooling around there,” observed Fred. +“It was all my fault, too.” +</p> +<p> +“Forget it,” exclaimed Grant. “We’re still ahead of them, aren’t we?” +</p> +<p> +“But not much,” said Fred, and he glanced hastily around at the <i>Spruce</i> +not more than fifteen yards distant now. +</p> +<p> +“I hope they don’t get our wind,” said George. “It’s certainly going +down and we need every bit of it we can get.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re right, Pop,” said John. “The wind is lighter and you know what +Fred said about the <i>Spruce</i> probably doing better than the <i>Balsam</i> in +a light breeze.” +</p> +<p> +Still maintaining their slight advantage the <i>Balsam</i> turned the last +stake and started down the home stretch. The wind was dead astern of +both boats now and the sails were stretched at right angles to the mast +in order to get the full benefit of the breeze. +</p> +<p> +“They’ll blanket us, I’m afraid,” muttered Fred gloomily. +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean by that?” asked George. +</p> +<p> +“Why, they’ll get right behind us and shut off all our wind.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t let them do it, then.” +</p> +<p> +“You don’t think I’d let them on purpose, do you?” +</p> +<p> +“They’ll catch us on this straight away, I’m afraid,” said Grant in a +low voice. The boats were so close together now it was necessary to +speak softly to keep from being overheard. +</p> +<p> +“Everybody move back towards the stern,” ordered Fred. “Perhaps if we +get her bow out of water a little she’ll do better.” +</p> +<p> +They followed Fred’s directions, but little by little the <i>Spruce</i> crept +up on them. The wind was dropping rapidly; it seemed that on this +woodland lake storms and winds came and went with equal facility. +</p> +<p> +The <i>Spruce</i> had blanketed their boat momentarily as Fred had predicted. +Drawing even, however, the <i>Balsam</i> once more caught the breeze and the +racers moved forward on even terms. +</p> +<p> +“We certainly have some great finishes, don’t we?” called Hugh from the +other boat. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I should say so!” exclaimed Grant. “They’re heartbreaking.” +</p> +<p> +All at once George left his seat and moved forward. +</p> +<p> +“Where are you going, Pop?” demanded Fred. “You’d better come back here +and sit down.” +</p> +<p> +George, however, paid no attention to this advice nor did he deign any +answer. He continued serenely on his way until his reached the forward +deck. Straightening himself up, his amazed companions saw him place his +right hand on the mast and scratch it with his finger-nails. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXI' id='chXXI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXI—HOW THE PLAN WORKED</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“He’s gone crazy,” muttered Grant. “What does he think he’s doing?” +</p> +<p> +George, having completed his strange performance, returned to the stern +of the <i>Balsam</i> and quietly resumed his seat. +</p> +<p> +“What were you trying to do?” demanded John curiously. +</p> +<p> +“I scratched the mast.” +</p> +<p> +“I know you did. Why did you do it?” +</p> +<p> +“To give us more breeze.” +</p> +<p> +“I suppose scratching the mast is going to make the wind blow,” and John +laughed loudly. “I think you’re crazy, Pop.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait and see,” said George calmly. “I remember that I once read +somewhere about sailors scratching the mast when they wanted a breeze, +so I thought I’d try it. We need to try everything if we want to win +this race. They’re ahead of us now.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” smiled John. “I guess you didn’t do any harm anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s the way I figured,” exclaimed George. “All sailors are +superstitious and they believe in those things. As long as we’re +sailing, why don’t we try them ourselves?” +</p> +<p> +“Where’s your breeze?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“There it comes,” said George, pointing astern of them. A puff of wind +was approaching and a patch of the water could be seen to be ruffled by +its breath. A moment later it struck the <i>Balsam</i> and in answer the +little catboat increased its speed. +</p> +<p> +“Why won’t the breeze help them as much as it does us?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll hope they won’t get any of it,” said George. “You notice that +that last puff didn’t hit them and that we gained a little by it.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s certainly close,” said Grant. “We don’t want another tie, though, +and we don’t want second place, either.” +</p> +<p> +“Only a quarter of a mile to go,” said Fred. “We’ll need more wind.” +</p> +<p> +“Scratch the mast again, Pop,” urged John. +</p> +<p> +George did so and another gust of wind caught them and drove them along +a little faster. +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t that queer?” exclaimed Grant. “It seems to work though. Try it +again, Pop.” +</p> +<p> +Again George scratched the mast and once more a puff of wind caught +their sail. The <i>Balsam</i> was now several feet ahead of her rival and +rapidly approaching the finish. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t do it any more, Pop,” urged Fred. “At least don’t do it as long +as we are ahead. If they catch up to us try it again. Of course it’s all +luck, but it is certainly strange, isn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“It surely is,” agreed John. “How do you account for it?” +</p> +<p> +“You can’t account for it,” exclaimed Grant. “You don’t suppose that +scratching the mast really makes the wind blow, do you? It has just +happened that way, that’s all.” +</p> +<p> +Nearer and nearer the two boats came to the finish. Waiting for them was +Mr. Maxwell, seated in one of the canoes, on a line with the tape. +</p> +<p> +“A little more sheet, String,” said Fred. “That’ll do.” +</p> +<p> +“They’re almost up to us,” whispered John, doing as Fred had ordered. +“Let Pop scratch the mast again.” +</p> +<p> +George was eagerly awaiting a signal to do this very thing. Fred nodded +to him, and using both hands this time George scratched the mast +lustily. Call it coincidence or luck or whatever you like, a strong puff +of wind struck the <i>Balsam</i> almost immediately. She heeled over and for +the first time in a half-hour made such speed that it was possible to +hear the water rippling under her bow. +</p> +<p> +“Here we go!” cried George lustily, and with a rush the <i>Balsam</i> swept +forward and crossed the line a good six feet ahead of their rival. +</p> +<p> +“<i>Balsam</i> wins!” shouted Mr. Maxwell, and a hearty cheer for the victor +was immediately given by the crew of the defeated boat. +</p> +<p> +“How did you like my stunt?” grinned George proudly, addressing his +remarks to his three companions. “Any time you want to win a sailing +race just come to me and I’ll tell you how to do it.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh!” snorted Fred, “I suppose you‘ll have a big head for the next year +on account of that.” +</p> +<p> +“Look here, Fred,” exclaimed George, winking at his other friends. “I +wouldn’t say very much if I were you. You insisted upon reefing the sail +and as a result we nearly lost the race; if it hadn’t been for my great +brain and cleverness we surely would have been beaten. However, as long +as it turned out the way it did I will forgive you.” +</p> +<p> +“I made an error of judgment and yours was nothing but luck,” retorted +Fred. “I want you to remember that, too.” +</p> +<p> +The boats were now returning to their moorings and when they had been +made fast the crews went ashore and met on the dock to talk things over. +</p> +<p> +“You boys certainly have the closest finishes I’ve ever seen,” exclaimed +Mr. Maxwell. “You don’t try to fix them that way, do you?” +</p> +<p> +“Not if we can help it, I tell you,” said Thomas laughingly. “I thought +we were going to win this last race.” +</p> +<p> +“So did we,” exclaimed Grant. “You would have won, too, if it hadn’t +been for George here. At least that’s what he says, anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“What did he do?” inquired Mr. Maxwell curiously. +</p> +<p> +“I scratched the mast,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“‘Scratched the mast’!” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. “Why did you do that?” +</p> +<p> +“To bring us more wind.” +</p> +<p> +“You must be superstitious,” laughed Mr. Maxwell. +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said George, “I never used to be, but I am sort of that way now; +it worked so beautifully.” +</p> +<p> +“Where did you ever hear of such a thing?” +</p> +<p> +“I read about it in some book and as things looked pretty desperate for +us I thought I’d try it.” +</p> +<p> +“You mean to say that all you have to do when you want a breeze is to go +up and scratch the mast?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t think it would work every time,” laughed George. “I guess +it will give you help only when you need it very badly. If you tried it +all the time I suppose you’d soon wear out the charm.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, you won, anyway,” said Mr. Maxwell laughingly. “That makes you +all tied with four and a half points for each team. The swimming race +will have to decide it.” +</p> +<p> +“Is every one ready for that now?” asked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“The red team is ready for anything,” laughed Thomas. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said Mr. Maxwell. “The race will start just as soon as +possible and remember that the points will be decided, three for first, +two for second, and one for third this time.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXII' id='chXXII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXII—A STRANGE PERFORMANCE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +A course had been measured one hundred and seventy-five yards in length. +The start was from a large rock that stood out of the water some fifteen +yards off shore and the finish was at the dock. +</p> +<p> +The contestants made their way to the starting point by way of the +shore; at least they walked until they came to a spot directly opposite +the big rock and then waded out as far as possible, swimming the last +few yards. Before many moments had elapsed the eight boys were lined up +in a row waiting for the signal. Mr. Maxwell stood on the dock, a pistol +in his hand. +</p> +<p> +“We’re counting on you, Grant,” John had said as they walked along the +shore. “You’ve simply got to win.” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose I do,” said Grant. “That’ll mean three points for us and unless +we take one of the other places, too, that’ll give the red team three +points. If that happens the meet will end in a tie.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe George can get a place. He’s not a bad swimmer, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“I know he isn’t, but you’re just as good yourself.” +</p> +<p> +“The trouble is we’ve never seen these other fellows swim and we have no +idea whether they’re any good or not.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, if we do our best we shan’t have any reason to kick, I guess,” +laughed Grant. +</p> +<p> +He was far and away the best swimmer of the four Go Ahead boys, and so +often had he proved his superiority over them that it was now taken for +granted. He was the only one who had mastered the crawl stroke. He knew +it so well that it was almost second nature to him now, but to his three +companions it still remained a mystery. That it is not an easy thing to +acquire will be vouched for by any one who has attempted it. Fred was a +wretched swimmer and knew perfectly well that he stood no chance in the +race; he entered merely because he did not wish to miss anything. John +and George were about on a par, both of them good average performers, +but nothing more. +</p> +<p> +“All ready?” shouted Mr. Maxwell through his megaphone. +</p> +<p> +“Everybody ready?” asked Thomas. +</p> +<p> +Every one said he was and Thomas waved his hand to the judge. All eyes +were fixed upon the figure standing on the dock, his right arm upraised +with the pistol in his hand. +</p> +<p> +They had not long to wait. A flash and then the sharp report of the +revolver, and almost together eight gleaming white bodies hit the water. +Fred was the one exception; his position had been next to George and +when the signal for the start was given he had been a trifle slow in +diving. +</p> +<p> +A mad scramble ensued the moment all the contestants were in the water +together and there was much splashing and confusion. Fred was behind the +others and consequently bore the brunt of the whole mixup. He had not +taken two strokes when George, who was ahead of him, struck him +violently in the stomach with his foot. +</p> +<p> +It was a powerful blow and well nigh knocked all the wind right out of +Fred’s body. “Ugh!” he groaned and sank from sight. +</p> +<p> +George turned in alarm to see who it was that had been on the receiving +end of his effort and was just in time to see Fred reappear puffing and +gasping. This sight seemed to tickle George immensely and he began to +laugh. Fred choked and gargled and wheezed and try as he would, George +could not control his laughter. +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile the other six contestants were far ahead and one glance +convinced George that he and Fred were hopelessly out of the race. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter with you?” exclaimed Fred angrily. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t mean to kick you,” said George, and once more he burst into +loud and uncontrollable laughter. +</p> +<p> +“I’m not talking about that,” cried Fred even more aroused by the +spectacle of his friend’s mirth. “Why did you drop out of the race?” +</p> +<p> +“I got laughing so when I saw your face that I forgot all about the race +and everything else. I never saw such a funny sight in all my life.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” snorted Fred. “You’re a nice one. We’ll probably lose the meet on +account of you.” +</p> +<p> +“I couldn’t help it,” cried George, and once more he began to laugh. “I +just started laughing and I couldn’t stop.” +</p> +<p> +“Come ashore before you drown, you idiot!” exclaimed Fred, and side by +side they made their way to land. +</p> +<p> +The other contestants were now strung out in a long line. Grant was +easily in the lead and it seemed a foregone conclusion that he would win +the race. Like some great fish he plowed through the water. His feet +worked fast and evenly while his hands reached out with a great sweep +and drove him speedily along. His face was under water most of the time; +every few strokes he rolled over on one side, sucked in a great mouthful +of air and then continued as before. +</p> +<p> +The real race was for second place and there were three in it. Hugh, +Thomas, and John went along almost abreast. John could see that Grant +would win the race easily enough, but he realized that in order to win +the meet it was necessary for him to finish at least third. He was a +good swimmer but was not a racer. Many times he had covered long +distances in the water but had paid scant attention to developing his +speed. +</p> +<p> +He used a powerful overhand stroke and when he was moving slowly he was +practically tireless. He now was worried, however. He did not dare look +around to see where George was for fear he might lose a few precious +inches. He did not expect to see Fred, for he knew that his small +comrade was a very poor swimmer. He had considered himself and George +about on a par and he wondered how it could have happened that he had +outdistanced him so far. Had he known the truth undoubtedly he would +have been just as angry as Fred had been and his speed certainly would +not have been benefited as a result. +</p> +<p> +Ahead of him he saw Grant and ahead of Grant he spied the dock and Mr. +Maxwell standing on it waiting. It seemed very far away. Beside him swam +Hugh and Thomas, one on his right and the other on his left. They were +breathing hard and splashing heavily, but still they did not seem to be +slowing up. +</p> +<p> +John put forth every effort. He too was becoming short of wind and his +arms and legs began to feel the strain. It had been a hard day and this +last contest was a severe test for all the boys. +</p> +<p> +“I must beat one of them! I must! I must!” John kept saying to himself +over and over again. Then the next time he saw his rivals Thomas was +several feet ahead of him and gaining. +</p> +<p> +John groaned. Hugh still kept abreast of him and try as hard as he could +John seemed powerless to shake him off. He gritted his teeth and strove +desperately to make his arms go still faster. Nature could not be forced +however; his arms seemed made of lead and every time he raised them he +wondered if it would not be the last. +</p> +<p> +Far ahead he saw Grant only a few feet from the dock. Thomas, too, was +many yards in advance of him now. “I simply can’t keep it up any +longer,” thought John, and the next instant, “Don’t quit,” he told +himself, and he forced his tired muscles to carry him along a few +strokes more. He set his jaw determinedly and decided he’d keep it up +till he reached the dock no matter what happened later. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly an idea struck him. “Perhaps Hugh is just as tired as I am,” he +thought. “In that case all I have to do is to keep on swimming at a +moderate pace and I’ll beat him.” +</p> +<p> +Hugh was certainly splashing more than he had been and evidently was in +trouble. “I’ll get him yet,” thought John and for a moment he felt +stronger. “I’ve forgotten the others though,” he suddenly realized and +the fear that some one would creep past him before the finish assailed +him all at once. He decided to roll over on his back and look. +</p> +<p> +He did so and behind him he saw only two swimmers. They were not near +enough to be dangerous however and John did not even recognize them. +That two of the contestants were missing he did not notice at all. +</p> +<p> +Often when swimming long distances he had turned over up on his back in +order to rest and now he was surprised to find how even a few strokes in +that position relieved his aching muscles. The finish was close at hand +now, however, and he dared not continue in that fashion any longer. He +rolled over and resumed his overhand stroke. +</p> +<p> +Grant was already on the dock standing beside Mr. Maxwell. Thomas had +just reached the goal and was pulling himself up out of the water. To +his surprise John noticed that in spite of the fact that he had been +swimming on his back Hugh had not gained anything on him. His brief rest +had refreshed him considerably and with added confidence he struck out +for the finish. Without really noticing it he was aware that Hugh was +floundering more than ever. He did not turn to look, however, but +concentrated every effort on his swimming, and still struggled on +towards the goal. +</p> +<p> +He lost sight of Hugh; he saw nothing but the dock ahead of him. His +lungs cried for mercy and his muscles ached, but vigorously he still +kept going. After what seemed centuries he reached the dock, not knowing +whether he had beaten Hugh out or not. In fact he did not care much now. +He had gained the dock at last and he was happy. +</p> +<p> +He raised his eyes to look about him and what he saw was very strange +indeed. Mr. Maxwell, standing fully clothed on the dock, suddenly dove +right over his head into the water. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXIII' id='chXXIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII—AN UNEXPECTED HONOR</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Tired as he was John realized that this was strange proceeding. He tried +to pull himself up on the dock, but he was too weak and slipped back +into the water. +</p> +<p> +“Grant,” he called, “give me a lift.” +</p> +<p> +“Come ahead,” cried Grant, bending over and extending his hand to John. +</p> +<p> +With this help the tired boy lifted himself out of the water and sank +down on the dock almost completely exhausted. He lay flat on his back, +his eyes closed. +</p> +<p> +“Where’s Hugh?” he panted. “Did I beat him?” +</p> +<p> +There was no answer. +</p> +<p> +“Grant,” said John. “Did I beat Hugh?” +</p> +<p> +Still no reply, and he opened his eyes to see what the reason for the +silence was. He slowly raised himself to one elbow and looked about him. +Black spots danced before his eyes and at first he saw nothing; then his +eyes suddenly became accustomed to the surroundings and he gasped. For +the moment he had forgotten that he had seen Mr. Maxwell jump into the +water but he remembered it now and he saw the reason for it. +</p> +<p> +Grant had finished the race and not greatly tired had been standing +alongside Mr. Maxwell watching the others approach. The race between +John and Hugh was what interested them most for they saw that Thomas +would finish an easy second and so the final outcome of the meet +depended on these two. +</p> +<p> +“A pretty tight race,” remarked Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I should—” began Mr. Maxwell when he suddenly stopped and stared. +</p> +<p> +John had just turned over on his stomach again for the final dash. Hugh +was at his shoulder and the onlookers were enjoying the close finish. +Suddenly, however, Hugh disappeared from sight. He simply sank beneath +the water with no warning whatsoever and John reached the dock alone. +</p> +<p> +“He’s exhausted,” cried Mr. Maxwell, and without waiting an instant he +dived into the water, fully clothed as he was, to rescue his nephew. +</p> +<p> +When John opened his eyes he saw Mr. Maxwell in the water, swimming for +the dock with one hand and holding Hugh by the hair of his head with the +other. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the trouble, Grant?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Hugh sank.” +</p> +<p> +“What was the matter with him?” +</p> +<p> +“He was tired out, I guess. Here, let me have him now,” he said to Mr. +Maxwell and leaning out from the dock he seized Hugh by the arms. His +uncle gave the half-drowned boy a boost and he was soon stretched out at +full length on the little wharf. +</p> +<p> +“That was a close call,” exclaimed Mr. Maxwell grimly as he clambered +out after him. “It’s a lucky thing he was so near the dock. Where are +the rest of the boys?” +</p> +<p> +“Here are two of them,” said Grant as Franklin and Herbert swam +leisurely up to the dock. Seeing that they were hopelessly beaten they +had not exerted themselves the last seventy-five yards of the race. +</p> +<p> +“Where are the other two?” exclaimed John anxiously. He had recovered +most of his breath and strength now and not seeing George or Fred was +fearful lest the fate that Hugh had so narrowly escaped had befallen +them. +</p> +<p> +“Turn around and you’ll see.” +</p> +<p> +George and Fred came walking towards the dock. +</p> +<p> +“Where did you two come from?” demanded John in surprise. “The last I +saw of you was when we all dived off that rock together. How did you get +up on shore that way?” +</p> +<p> +“Have you ever been kicked by a mule?” asked Fred. +</p> +<p> +“What are you talking about?” John was completely mystified. +</p> +<p> +“I asked if you’d ever been kicked by a mule.” +</p> +<p> +“What has that got to do with this race?” +</p> +<p> +“Simply this,” said Fred. “A mule kicked me in the stomach at the start +of the race and I had to quit.” +</p> +<p> +“I think you’re crazy,” exclaimed John. “What happened to you, Pop?” +</p> +<p> +“He was the mule,” said Fred. “Who won the race anyway?” +</p> +<p> +“Tell us what you’re talking about first,” said John, beginning to get a +little bit angry. “Stop talking in riddles.” +</p> +<p> +Fred explained how his stomach had come in contact with George’s foot +and how, as a result, they had both been compelled to give up the race. +The tale provided much amusement to the listeners and even Hugh, who had +partly revived, joined in the laughter. +</p> +<p> +“I’m no mule though,” insisted George. +</p> +<p> +“You’ve got a kick like one just the same,” laughed Fred. “Tell me,” he +continued, “who won the race.” +</p> +<p> +“Grant won,” replied Mr. Maxwell. +</p> +<p> +“Good work, Grant,” cried Fred. “Who was second?” +</p> +<p> +“Thomas.” +</p> +<p> +“When you tell me who was third you’ll also tell me whether we won the +meet or not. Who was it?” +</p> +<p> +“John was third,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“John?” exclaimed George in mock surprise. “It can’t be possible.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t get so fresh,” said John and he gave George a violent push which +sent him flying off the end of the wharf into the water. +</p> +<p> +“Serves him right,” said Fred approvingly. “He’s very much too fresh.” +</p> +<p> +George came to the surface, gasping and choking. +</p> +<p> +“Congratulations, String,” he cried as soon as he had shaken the water +out of his eyes. “Glad you got a place; I thought you would.” +</p> +<p> +“You can’t keep that fellow down,” laughed Fred. “There’s no use in +trying. He’s fresh and he knows it, but no matter what you do to him he +keeps it up just the same.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s not fresh,” laughed Mr. Maxwell. “He’s just full of spirits.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know what we’d do without him anyway,” said Grant feelingly. +“There are not many dull moments when Pop is around.” +</p> +<p> +“I would suggest,” said Mr. Maxwell, “that you boys go and put your +clothes on. The sun is beginning to go down and it’ll be cold soon.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m cold now,” exclaimed John. “I’m going to get my clothes all right.” +</p> +<p> +He hurried off towards the tent closely followed by the seven other +boys. A brisk rub down with heavy towels soon got their blood to +circulating once more and no one felt any ill effects from all their +exercises and exertion of the day. +</p> +<p> +“Now I shall present the prizes,” said Mr. Maxwell when the boys were +assembled in front of the tent. “The blue team wins the meet by the +margin of eight points to six. I congratulate them and take great +pleasure in presenting to them the big American flag. They all know how +I feel about it and I expect them to treat it as it should be treated.” +</p> +<p> +“Three cheers for the blue team,” cried Thomas lustily and they were +given with a will, as Grant stepped forward to receive the trophy. +</p> +<p> +“And now the second prize,” said Mr. Maxwell. “It’s not as big as the +first but the size doesn’t count. Everything depends on whether our +hearts are with the flag or not. If I should happen to come back to this +lake unexpectedly any time this summer I shall expect to see both these +flags flying in front of their respective tents.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll promise that all right,” said Thomas readily, and as he took the +emblem from Mr. Maxwell’s hand, Grant led a cheer for the red team. +</p> +<p> +“One more prize,” continued Mr. Maxwell. “I brought something which I +decided should go to the boy who in my judgment gave the best individual +performance. That is who in any one event showed the most nerve and +grit. Perhaps he didn’t win the event but he worked hardest and that is +what to my mind deserves the credit.” +</p> +<p> +He produced a large four-bladed pocket knife and held it up for the +eight boys to see. This was a surprise to them all and they looked at +one another in amazement. They also cast many envious glances at the +knife which was certainly a beauty and one of which any boy could well +be proud. +</p> +<p> +“It was an awful job deciding,” said Mr. Maxwell. “Every one did so well +I was almost in despair as to whom to give it to. I have finally +decided, however, and I feel sure you’ll all think the boy deserves it.” +</p> +<p> +Not one of the boys had the least idea who was to become the fortunate +owner of the knife and in keen suspense they all waited. +</p> +<p> +“I will now ask the winner to step forward,” continued Mr. Maxwell. “I +watched him closely in the contest which I think entitles him to the +prize and I don’t remember ever having seen a finer exhibition of pluck. +I know just how tired he was and how much nerve he required to keep +himself going. He didn’t win the race himself but he did win the meet +for his team and I think he should have the credit. John, here is your +knife. That was a great race you swam a few minutes ago.” +</p> +<p> +John was completely taken by surprise. He had not for a moment expected +that he was to be the fortunate one and he was almost overcome. +</p> +<p> +“Yea, String!” shouted George heartily. “Let’s give the old thin fellow +three cheers.” +</p> +<p> +Congratulations were in order and there was much laughter and fun. Every +one was in excellent spirits and all pronounced the meet a decided +success. The day was fast waning now and the party of visitors prepared +to leave the island for their camp at the other end of the land. The +four Go Ahead boys escorted them to their boat and good-bys were said. +Promises that the eight boys would see one another soon were made and +the <i>Spruce</i> weighed anchor and glided out of the little harbor. +</p> +<p> +“Well,” exclaimed Grant when their guests had gone, “I think we had a +pretty fine time to-day.” +</p> +<p> +“We certainly did,” agreed Fred. “What we want now is a pole for our +flag. It ought to be set right up in front of the tent there.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll get the ax right now and we’ll go and cut one,” said George. “Come +along, Fred.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXIV' id='chXXIV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV—IN QUEST OF GAME</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +The days and weeks slipped by and still the life in the island camp did +not pall on on the four Go Ahead boys. They were busy every moment with +the thousand and one duties and pleasures of camp life and the summer +days drifted by like a succession of pleasant dreams. +</p> +<p> +One of the boys’ favorite occupations was shooting at a target. Fred was +the owner of a little twenty-two caliber, hammerless rifle, and many an +hour was spent by the boys in practice with this small gun. It was +surprising how skillful they had become. +</p> +<p> +Grant and John were lying on the wharf one afternoon trying to shoot the +heads off some water lilies that grew near the shore on the opposite +side of the harbor. +</p> +<p> +“Now just suppose that one was an Indian,” exclaimed John, taking +careful aim at an unsuspecting lily bud. The sharp spit of the little +rifle followed and the bullet struck the water some two feet the other +side of the “Indian.” +</p> +<p> +“You’ll have to do better than that,” laughed Grant. “We’ll all be +scalped in a minute unless you get him. Let me try.” +</p> +<p> +John passed over the gun and on his first attempt Grant split the bulb +clearly in halves. +</p> +<p> +“Good shot, Grant,” exclaimed John. “You saved our lives.” +</p> +<p> +“Just suppose that had been a lion or a tiger or a rhinoceros or some +animal like that charging down upon us,” said Grant. “Suppose we were +caught in a little ravine and we either had to kill the animal or be +killed ourselves. What would you do?” +</p> +<p> +“I’d probably be so scared I’d faint or something,” laughed John. +</p> +<p> +“It would take nerve all right, wouldn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“More than I’ve got, I’m afraid.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t know. I think most people are brave when it comes right +down to the point.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope I’d be, anyway,” exclaimed John. “I think a coward is about the +worst thing in the world.” +</p> +<p> +“Some people that seem the most timid have the most nerve when it’s +really needed,” remarked Grant. “The ones that talk the loudest are not +always the bravest by a long shot. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps they try to make up by noise what they lack in nerve,” laughed +John. “I’ve noticed that too, and I’ve also discovered that it doesn’t +pay to make fun of anybody. Do you remember that boy at home? Everybody +used to call him a ‘sis’ and a ‘willie-boy’ but when Bob Jackson’s dog +fell into the mill-race he was the only one who had nerve enough to jump +in after him. That taught me a lesson, I can tell you.” +</p> +<p> +“I wonder what animal is the most dangerous in the world.” +</p> +<p> +“A lion is, I guess.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think so. Lions are mostly scavengers they say and I’ve heard +that tigers are worse than they are. A tiger doesn’t give any warning at +all when he attacks.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’d just as soon not meet either one of them on a lonely road,” +laughed John. +</p> +<p> +“Nor I,” agreed Grant. “I’ve heard though that a rhinoceros or an +African buffalo is worse than either a lion or a tiger.” +</p> +<p> +“How about a grizzly bear?” +</p> +<p> +“They’re all pretty bad, I guess,” said Grant. “I wouldn’t stop to argue +with any one of them.” +</p> +<p> +“Let me have that gun again,” exclaimed John. “If we’re going to meet +all these ferocious wild animals we’ll need more practice in shooting.” +</p> +<p> +Just at this moment, however, George and Fred appeared. They came out of +the clump of trees behind the tent and seemed very much excited about +something. +</p> +<p> +“Hey, Grant!” called Fred. “Where’s the gun?” +</p> +<p> +“Right here. What’s the matter?” +</p> +<p> +“Do you remember what you said about wanting to shoot one of those big +herons and have it stuffed?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes. Why?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, Pop and I discovered one just now in that little marsh over on +the other side of the island.” +</p> +<p> +“Bring the gun along and maybe you’ll get a shot at it,” exclaimed +George. “You’d better hurry though.” +</p> +<p> +“He won’t be there now,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Why won’t he?” demanded Fred. “You won’t get him if you sit there and +do nothing, like a great big galoot though. Let me have the gun if you +don’t want it yourself.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I’ll go with you,” exclaimed Grant rising to his feet. “I don’t +think for a minute he’ll still be there though. What was he doing?” +</p> +<p> +“Looking for fish, I guess,” said George. “He was wading around in the +swamp on those great long legs of his; he looked as if he was on +stilts.” +</p> +<p> +“Grant doesn’t seem very eager, Pop,” remarked Fred. “I wish he’d give +us the gun.” +</p> +<p> +“Come along,” cried Grant. “I’ve been waiting for you to start.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” snorted Fred; “listen to that, I think we ought to have the bird +anyway; we discovered him.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he see you?” asked John. The four boys were now hurrying along +guided by Fred who was slightly in the lead. +</p> +<p> +“I can truthfully say that he did not,” said George decidedly and Fred +snickered. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter?” inquired Grant suspiciously. “What are you laughing +at?” +</p> +<p> +“Nothing,” said Fred quickly, but as he looked back at his companions +the suspicion of a smile lurked upon his countenance. +</p> +<p> +“There’s something funny about this,” exclaimed Grant. “I tell you right +now that if you two are putting up a game on me there’ll be trouble.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe they saw a heron at all,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“I tell you we did,” exclaimed Fred earnestly. “Pop and I will both +swear to it; we saw one in the swamp over here. Of course we can’t +guarantee that he’ll still be there when you slowpokes arrive.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” chimed in George. “We certainly did see one not five +minutes before we came back to the dock to tell you about it. I don’t +see why you need be so suspicious about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I wouldn’t trust you two,” said Grant. “You’ve acted sort of +funny about it too.” +</p> +<p> +“You only think we have,” retorted Fred. “Careful now, the marsh is just +ahead of us.” +</p> +<p> +“Why don’t we sneak up behind those bushes?” suggested George, pointing +to a clump of elderberries a few yards in front of them. +</p> +<p> +“That’s a good scheme,” exclaimed Fred. “We can hide behind them and get +a good view of the marsh without being seen ourselves.” +</p> +<p> +Stealthily the four boys made their way until they reached the spot +George had designated. On the other side of the bushes and extending for +a hundred yards or so was the swamp where the heron was reported to have +been seen. +</p> +<p> +“Careful now,” whispered Fred as they crouched behind the clump of +elderberry bushes. “We don’t want to scare him away.” +</p> +<p> +“If he’s still there,” muttered Grant. He had been suspicious of Fred +and George; their manner had seemed somewhat peculiar to him but they +were serious enough now and his doubts were removed. +</p> +<p> +“Do you see him?” asked John eagerly, as Fred peered out through an +opening in the bushes. +</p> +<p> +“Not yet.” +</p> +<p> +“Where was he when you saw him before?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Down by that point. I don’t see him there now though.” +</p> +<p> +“Let me look,” pleaded Grant excitedly. “I haven’t seen him yet.” +</p> +<p> +“Look along the shore,” directed Fred, yielding his place to Grant. +“He’s more likely to be there than any place else I think.” +</p> +<p> +As Grant searched the marsh George suddenly made a peculiar noise. It +might have passed for a sob or a chuckle or he could have even been +accused of choking. +</p> +<p> +“Stop that,” cried Fred fiercely, hitting George sharply in the ribs +with his fist. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter with you two?” exclaimed Grant. He turned quickly +around and eyed his two companions narrowly. +</p> +<p> +“I choked,” stammered George. “I couldn’t help it.” +</p> +<p> +“If you’ve been fooling me you’ll do worse than choke,” muttered Grant +fiercely. “You two are acting very queerly it seems to me.” +</p> +<p> +“Because I choked?” demanded George. “I don’t see what there is queer +about that.” +</p> +<p> +“Will you swear you saw a heron here?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I will,” exclaimed Fred. “I declare to you, Grant, there was one here. +We saw him first down by that point where I showed you.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s not there now,” said Grant. “That much is sure.” +</p> +<p> +“He may have moved along you know. Just because he isn’t in that same +spot doesn’t mean that he has left.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I don’t see him anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“Let me look,” exclaimed George. “My eyes are better than yours.” +</p> +<p> +Grant exchanged places with George who now seemed to have recovered from +his recent affliction; he scanned the nearby marsh eagerly and was quiet +and serious now. +</p> +<p> +“Well?” demanded Grant after a moment had elapsed. +</p> +<p> +George turned and looked at the speaker. “Come here,” he whispered, +crooking his finger mysteriously. +</p> +<p> +Grant, much excited now, crowded up close beside George. Together they +peered out across the swamp. +</p> +<p> +“See that dead log lying on the beach down there?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you see anything the other side of it?” +</p> +<p> +“No.” +</p> +<p> +“Not a thing?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see anything but the old dead limb of a tree sticking up.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s not a dead limb, Grant.” +</p> +<p> +“Sure enough,” cried Grant excitedly. “Say,” he exclaimed, “I saw that +thing before but I thought it was a stick.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s not though,” said George triumphantly. “It’s a heron and Fred and +I accept your apology for all you’ve thought about us.” +</p> +<p> +“Why doesn’t it move?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you know that herons often stand like that for a long, long time? +If you’re going to shoot that fellow you’d better get a move on yourself +though.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t hit him from here.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t try. Sneak up closer.” +</p> +<p> +“Give me the gun, Grant,” exclaimed Fred. “If you don’t care anything +about shooting him I’d like a try at it myself.” +</p> +<p> +“No, you don’t,” said Grant quickly, and rising to his feet he crouched +low and began to run swiftly down towards the shore of the lake. +</p> +<p> +“Follow those bushes along the shore,” directed George. “Don’t let him +see you, whatever you do.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s all right so far,” said Fred. “He’s got good protection down as +far as the water anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope he gets it,” exclaimed John eagerly. “He’s certainly a good shot +and that ought to help some.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, he’ll get it all right,” said George. He and Fred looked at each +other for a moment and then both burst into silent but uncontrollable +laughter. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter with you two?” demanded John, completely taken aback +by their strange behavior. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, String,” said George. “If you only knew.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, why don’t you tell me?” exclaimed John. “What sort of a game have +you put up on Grant anyway?” +</p> +<p> +“Do you see that heron he’s after?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, of course I do.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, it’s dead. Fred and I found it on the shore and stuck it up +behind that log. Just wait till Grant finds it out,” and the two +conspirators hugged each other delightedly. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXV' id='chXXV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXV—THE WORM TURNS</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile Grant was stalking his game. He crouched low and making as +much speed as was consistent with quietness, he hurried along. +</p> +<p> +“Just look at him!” cried George ecstatically, as now and again the +hunter could be seen to stop and peer cautiously in the direction of his +prey. +</p> +<p> +“I should think the fact that it hasn’t moved would make him +suspicious,” remarked John. +</p> +<p> +“He thinks herons always act that way,” chuckled Fred. “I can hardly +wait for him to shoot.” +</p> +<p> +“You follows nearly queered your whole game a couple of times all +right,” said John. “We were both suspicious of you. Why, twice you had +grins on your faces so long you could almost pin them in the back.” +</p> +<p> +“It was so funny,” laughed George. “To think how we planned the whole +thing and how easily he fell into it. Why, it was almost too easy.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t be too sure,” warned John. “He hasn’t fired yet, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“He will all right,” said Fred confidently. “The old bird has been dead +for about a month and you just ought to smell it.” +</p> +<p> +“Won’t he be mad?” exclaimed George. This thought seemed to give him +special pleasure. +</p> +<p> +“He’ll probably shoot us,” laughed Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Where is he now?” inquired John. “I don’t see him.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s down behind that rock,” said George. “There he comes.” +</p> +<p> +“He’d better shoot pretty soon,” chuckled Fred. “The bird will fly away +if he isn’t careful.” +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t this rich?” exclaimed George. “Just think of putting up a game on +Grant like this.” +</p> +<p> +“Look at him!” cried Fred. “He’s almost on his hands and knees now.” +</p> +<p> +“Shoot, Grant, shoot!” urged George. +</p> +<p> +Nearer and nearer to the heron Grant crept. He had his gun half raised +as he stole along, prepared to shoot at any moment. His three companions +intently watched him, thoroughly enjoying the whole affair. +</p> +<p> +“If he doesn’t shoot pretty soon he’ll see that it’s dead,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“He’s trying to get up behind that bush, I think,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“He’s taking a chance,” laughed Fred. “The heron will see him and fly +away if he isn’t more careful.” +</p> +<p> +“There he goes!” exclaimed George. “He’s going to shoot.” +</p> +<p> +“And now for the fun,” cried Fred. “Won’t he be mad though?” +</p> +<p> +Grant stopped and sinking to one knee he raised the little rifle to his +shoulder. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t miss him, Grant,” chuckled Fred. +</p> +<p> +The gun spoke, and a moment later the faint report came to the ears of +the three boys who watched from behind the elderberry bushes. +</p> +<p> +“Did he hit him?” laughed George. “What’s he doing?” +</p> +<p> +Grant had jumped to his feet after the first shot and started to run +along the shore. He came to the log where the dead heron had been +propped up but he did not stop there. He continued on past this spot and +the conspirators for the first time had an inkling that all was not +going as they had hoped. +</p> +<p> +“What’s happened?” demanded John in surprise. “What’s he after?” +</p> +<p> +“I’m sure I don’t know,” said Fred blankly. +</p> +<p> +Some fifty or sixty feet beyond the spot where the dead log lay Grant +continued. Not one of his friends had been looking at this place for +their attention had been riveted on the dead heron. +</p> +<p> +The grass grew level with Grant’s knees where he was now. He leaned over +and seemed to be looking down at something on the ground at his feet. +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose it is?” demanded George curiously. +</p> +<p> +“Look,” exclaimed John and as he spoke Grant lifted from the grass a +great blue heron. He held it by the feet and turning towards the bush +where his companions were he waved his gun. Then he slung the big bird +over his shoulder and started to retrace his steps. +</p> +<p> +George, Fred, and John had watched these proceedings in open-mouthed +amazement. +</p> +<p> +“Well, what do you know about that?” exclaimed George limply. +</p> +<p> +“I guess he’s got us all right,” sighed Fred. “Let’s skip back to camp +before he gets hold of us.” +</p> +<p> +“We’d better stay and face the music,” said George with a sigh. “Doesn’t +that beat all? Just when we thought we had him good and fooled, he turns +around and puts the joke on us.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see yet what happened,” exclaimed John. +</p> +<p> +“Why, he saw another heron, that’s all,” said Fred. “It was a live one +too, I guess.” +</p> +<p> +“Where’s the one you and Pop fixed up for him?” +</p> +<p> +“Still there behind the log.” +</p> +<p> +“Grant never even looked at it,” said George. “He’ll make our lives +miserable all the rest of the summer.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s almost over now,” said Fred. “He can’t tease us long.” +</p> +<p> +In silence the three boys sat and watched their comrade approach. John +did not dread the meeting so much, for he had not been one of the +original conspirators, but Fred and George looked forward to Grant’s +arrival with anything but pleasure. +</p> +<p> +“What do you think of him?” cried Grant as he held up his prize for his +friends to see. “Isn’t he a beauty?” +</p> +<p> +“He’s all right,” said George weakly. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter, Pop?” demanded Grant. “You don’t seem very +enthusiastic. Don’t you like his looks?” +</p> +<p> +“He’s fine,” replied George in a hollow voice. +</p> +<p> +“Where did you find him?” demanded Fred bluntly. +</p> +<p> +“Right where I shot him,” said Grant. “You saw the spot where I picked +him up, didn’t you?” +</p> +<p> +“We saw it all right,” said Fred grimly. “We haven’t a word to say +either. You have the joke on us all right, Grant. All I ask is that you +don’t rub it in too much.” +</p> +<p> +“I won’t,” laughed Grant. “It was awfully funny the way it turned out. I +never suspected at first that the heron you pointed out to me was dead. +I kept sneaking up as close as I dared and the thing never moved a bit +and it began to strike me as sort of queer. Then I remembered how you +fellows had snickered a couple of times and I felt pretty sure that +something was wrong. +</p> +<p> +“All of a sudden I saw this bird just a few yards beyond the log. I knew +then that my chance had come to turn the joke on you, but I was so +anxious my arm was shaking like a leaf. I was afraid I surely would miss +and when I saw that I hadn’t, I can tell you I felt pretty good. Here’s +the heron and if you two fellows want yours you’ll find him down by that +log. He smells a little strong though.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s go back to camp,” exclaimed George. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” laughed Grant. “As long as you don’t like the subject, I +won’t say too much about it.” +</p> +<p> +Laughing and joking they made their way back towards their camp. George +and Fred realized how badly they had fared in their attempt to play a +practical joke, but they were good sports and consequently good losers. +They joined in the fun at their own expense, and were unstinted in their +praise of the prize Grant had gained. +</p> +<p> +“We certainly got more than we were looking for that time,” said George +laughingly. “You are——” +</p> +<p> +He suddenly ceased speaking and gazed in surprise in the direction of +the tent. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter?” demanded John anxiously. +</p> +<p> +“Some man with a big black beard just ran around the other side of the +tent,” exclaimed George. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXVI' id='chXXVI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI—AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Are you sure you saw a man?” asked Grant skeptically. +</p> +<p> +“I know I did,” replied George with the utmost conviction. +</p> +<p> +“What did he look like?” +</p> +<p> +“He looked like a tramp; a rough looking sort of a fellow with a black +beard and an old slouch hat.” +</p> +<p> +“Only one man?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all I saw.” +</p> +<p> +“What shall we do?” demanded Fred blankly. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll go down and see what he wants,” said George in a matter of fact +tone. “What else is there to do?” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose he’s looking for trouble?” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Well then, he’ll find it,” said George grimly. “There are four of us to +his one.” +</p> +<p> +“He may not be alone,” said Fred. “I think we’d better go slow.” +</p> +<p> +“Grant has a gun.” +</p> +<p> +“But he’s not going to use it,” said Grant quickly. “You don’t catch me +shooting at anybody, tramp or no tramp. I don’t want any blood on my +head.” +</p> +<p> +“Suppose they attack us?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“‘They,’” exclaimed Grant. “I thought you said you saw only one.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all I did see. There may be more of them though.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably a couple of guides,” said John. “Let’s go find out anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“I’d be careful,” warned Fred. “There’s no use in taking chances.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter with you, Fred?” demanded George. “What are you so +nervous about?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. It seems funny to me though that a man like that should +be hanging around our tent.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s probably waiting for us to come back.” +</p> +<p> +“Then why did he duck behind the tent the minute he saw us?” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe he didn’t see us at all.” +</p> +<p> +“The thing to do is to go down there and find out,” exclaimed Grant. +“Come on, Pop, you and I will go anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“And so will I,” added John. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll go myself,” said Fred. “I’m not afraid; all I said was that I +thought we ought to be careful.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll be careful,” George assured him. “Come along.” +</p> +<p> +The little band once again started towards the tent. As Fred had +remarked it seemed a strange thing that any man like the one George had +seen should be loitering around their camp. They had had no visitors +that summer aside from their opponents in the water sports and Mr. +Maxwell, and the appearance of a stranger on the island was unusual +enough to cause them some alarm. +</p> +<p> +Side by side they walked towards the spot where their tent was pitched. +No further sign of their visitor appeared and this in itself made the +four boys somewhat uneasy. +</p> +<p> +“Where did he go, do you suppose?” whispered John. +</p> +<p> +“Are you sure you saw a man, Pop?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Of course I did. Do you think I’m crazy?” +</p> +<p> +“Where is he then? No one else saw him.” +</p> +<p> +George made no reply to this remark and in complete silence they +continued on their way. At length they came to the tent itself but no +one was to be seen. They peered inside, but it was empty of any living +person. Grant turned to George triumphantly. +</p> +<p> +“You’re seeing things to-day,” he laughed. He laid the heron on the +ground in front of the tent and placed his gun inside. +</p> +<p> +“I saw a man,” insisted George. +</p> +<p> +“And you tried to make me see a live heron that was dead,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“It’s certainly strange,” muttered George. “I know I saw a man. I’d take +my dying oath on it.” +</p> +<p> +“But where is he?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“That’s just what I say,” rejoined George. “Where is he?” +</p> +<p> +“He doesn’t seem to be—” began John, when he suddenly stopped. “Look,” +he cried and pointed towards the shore. +</p> +<p> +Two men were seated under a small tree which grew half-way between the +wharf and the tent. Their backs were towards the boys so that it was +impossible to see who they were. The back view however was not very +reassuring. The strangers appeared to be rough and unkempt and were +busily engaged in eating some food they had evidently helped themselves +to from the stores of the four young campers. Both men seemed entirely +unaware that they were being watched. +</p> +<p> +“How did they get there without our seeing them?” whispered John. “Pop +saw one of them up by the tent.” +</p> +<p> +“The tent is between that tree and the place where we were standing,” +said George. “It shut off our view and they probably walked down there +while we were coming towards the tent.” +</p> +<p> +“What shall we do?” whispered Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Yell at them,” suggested John. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you do it,” cautioned Grant quickly. +</p> +<p> +“For goodness’ sake,” exclaimed George suddenly in a low voice. “Don’t +any one of you fellows move,” he ordered them. “Just wait here for me.” +</p> +<p> +He turned and darted quickly inside the tent while his three companions +were completely mystified by his strange behavior. They gazed after him +in amazement. +</p> +<p> +“What’s he after?” asked John in a whisper. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe he went for the gun,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I wonder if he did,” exclaimed Grant. “We mustn’t have that,” and he +started to follow George inside the tent. +</p> +<p> +Just as he was about to lift the flap and enter, however, George +suddenly appeared. He held one of the young campers’ big balsam pillows +in each hand and he wore a queer expression on his face. His three +friends looked at him in amazement not unmixed with alarm. +</p> +<p> +“What are you going to do?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Ssh!” hissed George. “Watch me.” +</p> +<p> +He cautiously stole forward in the direction of the two men. His +companions were too surprised to make any effort to restrain him. +Open-mouthed they stood and watched him stealthily approach the tree +underneath which the two rough-looking men were seated. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXVII' id='chXXVII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“He’s gone crazy,” muttered Grant. “We should have held him back.” +</p> +<p> +On tip-toe and evidently trying to make as little noise as possible, +George stole forward. Nearer and nearer he approached, the pillows still +held firmly in his hands. He slackened his pace as he came closer and +redoubled his efforts to move cautiously. +</p> +<p> +“They’ll turn and see him in a second,” whispered Fred, as much to +himself as to anybody else. All three of the boys were tense with +excitement as they riveted their attention on their companion who to +them was doing such a remarkable thing. +</p> +<p> +George was scarcely ten feet distant from the men now. All at once he +stopped. He slowly drew back his right arm and taking careful aim he let +fly the pillow which he held. True to its mark it sped. It struck the +larger of the two men squarely in the neck. The second pillow followed +the other an instant later and it too scored a hit. Both had been aimed +at the same man. +</p> +<p> +No sooner had George completed his bombardment than he uttered a wild +whoop and rushed forward. He dashed straight towards the man he had been +so successful in hitting and threw both arms around him. +</p> +<p> +Grant, Fred, and John were too taken aback to do more than stand and +gaze stupidly at the strange proceedings taking place before their eyes. +George’s actions to them were a complete mystery. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly he ceased hugging the rough looking man he had pounced upon so +eagerly and turned to his three camp-mates. +</p> +<p> +“Grant!” he cried. “John! Fred! Come here and see who this is.” +</p> +<p> +“Who is it?” exclaimed John blankly. “Thomas and Hugh?” +</p> +<p> +“Here’s your father, Fred,” called George loudly. “Don’t you want to see +him?” +</p> +<p> +Fred started violently at these words. He stared ahead of him and then +suddenly gave vent to a wild shriek. +</p> +<p> +“Dad!” he cried and rushing pell mell down the gradual incline he threw +himself upon the smaller of the two “tramps.” +</p> +<p> +“Why it’s Mr. Button and Mr. Sanders,” exclaimed Grant in surprise. +“Where do you suppose they came from?” +</p> +<p> +“All dressed up to look like tramps,” added John. “What do you suppose +they are trying to do?” +</p> +<p> +“Play a joke on us, I guess,” laughed Grant. “Lets go down and see +them.” +</p> +<p> +They soon joined the little group gathered underneath the tree and a +happy gathering it was. +</p> +<p> +“What do you think of these two tramps, Grant?” inquired George when +greetings had been exchanged all around. +</p> +<p> +“What do you think of a boy who would hit his poor old father in the +back of the neck with two big pillows?” laughed Mr. Sanders. “That +strikes me as pretty rough treatment.” +</p> +<p> +“It surely is,” agreed Grant. “We usually take him down and duck him +when he gets fresh that way.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m afraid I can’t do that,” said Mr. Sanders sorrowfully. “He has +gotten so husky this summer I’d hate to tackle him now.” +</p> +<p> +“We didn’t know you were coming up here,” said Fred, addressing his +father and Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“And we didn’t want you to know it either,” laughed Mr. Button. “We +planned a surprise for you.” +</p> +<p> +“You gave it to us all right,” said John grimly. “We were sure you were +two thugs of some kind who had come up here to rob us.” +</p> +<p> +“How do you like our costumes?” demanded Mr. Sanders jovially. “Do we +really look like a couple of desperate characters?” +</p> +<p> +“You certainly do, Dad,” said George. “I never saw worse.” +</p> +<p> +“How did you dare to throw those big heavy pillows at me then?” +</p> +<p> +“I recognized you right away, even from the back. You need a pretty good +disguise to fool your son you know.” +</p> +<p> +“So it seems,” admitted Mr. Sanders and he rubbed the back of his neck +ruefully. +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t you see us coming?” asked John. +</p> +<p> +“No,” said Mr. Button. “We arrived here about twenty minutes ago and +didn’t find a soul around anywhere. So we just made ourselves at home +and decided we’d have a little luncheon.” +</p> +<p> +“I saw one of you duck behind the tent,” said George. “Then when we +didn’t see you again it sort of worried us. Imagine how we felt when we +saw these two rough looking men sitting under the tree here.” +</p> +<p> +“Where had you boys been?” asked Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“We went out to shoot a blue heron,” said Grant. “Ask George about it; +he’ll be glad to tell you all the details,” and he nudged John who was +standing next to him. +</p> +<p> +“I was the goat all right,” laughed George, and he proceeded to recount +the story of how he and Fred had tried to put up a game on Grant but had +had the tables turned on them. +</p> +<p> +The tale caused much merriment on the part of Mr. Button and Mr. +Sanders. Curiously enough these two men happened to be the fathers of +the boys who had been the victims of their own joke. +</p> +<p> +“It served them right, Grant,” laughed Mr. Button. “I hate these +practical jokers and am always glad to see them fooled. I notice it +usually happens that way too.” +</p> +<p> +The party had moved up to a spot directly in front of the tent now and +all were seated in a circle on the ground. The day was waning and the +sun was beginning to sink low in the western sky. A gray haze hung over +the surrounding hills and forests. A strong wind blew off the lake. +</p> +<p> +“You know that breeze is cold,” exclaimed Mr. Button with a slight +shiver, and he drew his coat closer about him. +</p> +<p> +“Why shouldn’t it be?” demanded Mr. Sanders. “It’s almost fall now and +the summer is practically over.” +</p> +<p> +“I know it is,” exclaimed George. “I hate to think of it too.” +</p> +<p> +“You’ve had a good time up here, have you?” inquired Mr. Button. +</p> +<p> +“Wonderful,” replied all the young campers with one accord. +</p> +<p> +“You certainly look so,” laughed Mr. Sanders. “You’re as tanned as a lot +of Indians and you look just about as wiry.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s been great fun,” said John. “We’ve been out in the air all summer +and on the water so much we ought to be healthy.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have to come back here again next summer,” exclaimed George. +“What do you say to that, Dad?” +</p> +<p> +“Personally I should think you’d rather go to some other place next +time. I like different experiences myself.” +</p> +<p> +“So do I,” agreed Grant. “There are so many wonderful places and things +in the world that it’s worth trying to visit and see all of them you +can, I think.” +</p> +<p> +“That suits me,” exclaimed George. “What do you say, Dad? We’ll go to +some other place next time.” +</p> +<p> +“As far as I’m concerned you may,” said Mr. Sanders. “Go ahead.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p>THE END</p> +</div> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid black; width:70%;margin:3em auto'/> +<p> +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES +</p> +<p> +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN +</p> +<p> +The Outdoor Chums +</p> +<p> +On the Lake<br /> +In the Forest<br /> +On the Gulf<br /> +After Big Game<br /> +On A House Boat<br /> +In the Big Woods<br /> +At Cabin Point<br /> +</p> +<p> +For lovers of the great outdoors (and what boy is not?) this “Outdoor +Chums” series will be a rare treat. After you have read the first book +and followed the fortunes of the “Chums,” you will realize the pleasure +the other seven volumes have in store for you. +</p> +<p> +These rollicking lads know field, forest, mountain, sea and stream—and +the books contain much valuable information on woodcraft and the living +of an outdoor life. +</p> +<p> +The Goldsmith Publishing Co. +</p> +<p> +CLEVELAND, O. +</p> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 35957-h.htm or 35957-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/9/5/35957/ + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/35957-h/images/cover.jpg b/35957-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b54f0ed --- /dev/null +++ b/35957-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/35957.txt b/35957.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..991f7f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/35957.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6660 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp + +Author: Ross Kay + +Release Date: April 25, 2011 [EBook #35957] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + +[Image] + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + +BY ROSS KAY + +Author of "The Search for the Spy," "The Air Scout," "With Joffre +on the Battle Line," "Dodging the North Sea Mines," "The Go Ahead +Boys on Smugglers' Island," "The Go Ahead Boys and the Treasure +Cave," etc., etc. + + + + + PREFACE + +Every one who loves outdoor life knows the charm and the pleasures of +camping. To look back on the days passed in a tent by the shore of some +forest lake or stream is a source of never-ending enjoyment to those of +us who have had that experience. In this book I have tried to describe +the adventures of four boys who spent a vacation camping in the +Adirondacks, and who indulged in water sports of various kinds while +there. Many of the episodes are true or at least founded on the +experiences of former boys who enjoyed them. If the boys who may read +this tale will derive some of the pleasure in hearing about them that +the real boys did in participating in them I shall feel repaid. + +--Ross Kay + + + + +CONTENTS + + . CHAPTER I--MAKING CAMP + . CHAPTER II--A MISHAP + . CHAPTER III--JOHN HEARS SOMETHING + . CHAPTER IV--SETTING SAIL + . CHAPTER V--THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS + . CHAPTER VI--ADRIFT + . CHAPTER VII--AN UNEXPECTED MEETING + . CHAPTER VIII--A PREDICAMENT + . CHAPTER IX--DANGER + . CHAPTER X--WAIT AND SEE + . CHAPTER XI--WHAT GEORGE DID + . CHAPTER XII--A CHALLENGE + . CHAPTER XIII--THE OUTCAST + . CHAPTER XIV--TALKING IT OVER + . CHAPTER XV--PREPARATION + . CHAPTER XVI--GRANT MISSES + . CHAPTER XVII--GEORGE'S STRATEGY + . CHAPTER XVIII--A CLOSE MATCH + . CHAPTER XIX--A CLOSE SHAVE + . CHAPTER XX--GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS + . CHAPTER XXI--HOW THE PLAN WORKED + . CHAPTER XXII--A STRANGE PERFORMANCE + . CHAPTER XXIII--AN UNEXPECTED HONOR + . CHAPTER XXIV--IN QUEST OF GAME + . CHAPTER XXV--THE WORM TURNS + . CHAPTER XXVI--AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER + . CHAPTER XXVII--CONCLUSION + + + + + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS IN THE ISLAND CAMP + + +CHAPTER I--MAKING CAMP + + +"Here is the place to put the tent, String." + +"I think this spot is better." + +"Not at all. It's higher over here and consequently we won't be flooded +by every rain that comes along and besides that, the flies won't be so +apt to bother us." + +"All right, just as you say." + +The boy addressed as "String" had been named John Clemens by his +parents. He was six feet three inches tall, however, and extremely thin +so that the nickname applied to him seemed quite appropriate. At any +rate his friends thought so and that was the name by which he usually +was called. + +Talking with him and arguing about the location of the tent was Fred +Button, a boy as short as John was tall. He was so small that the +nicknames of Stub, Pewee and Pygmy had all been applied to him, the last +one sometimes shortened to Pyg much to Fred's disgust. He had found out +long ago, however, that there was no use in showing his irritation at +this for it only served to increase the frequency with which the name +was applied to him. + +These two boys, together with two of their friends, were pitching camp +preparatory to spending a summer on one of the Adirondack lakes. Grant +Jones was one of these boys and the other was George Washington Sanders. +Grant was the most serious-minded of the four and everything he did he +did with all his heart. As a result he was a leader not only on the +athletic field but in his studies as well. The other boys usually came +to him for advice and looked up to him in many ways. The fact that he +was of a serious nature, however, did not mean that he was not +oftentimes just as full of fun as anybody. + +George Washington Sanders having been named after the father of his +country, had acquired the name of Pop. He was often in mischief and took +especial delight in teasing his three friends. It was almost out of the +question to be angry at him, however, for he never lost his temper for +more than a moment himself and was always bubbling over with spirits and +fun. He was the life of any crowd he was in. + +While the argument between John and Fred was in progress Grant and +George approached. + +"What are you two arguing about?" demanded Grant. + +"We're trying to decide where to put the tent," replied Fred. "What have +you two been doing all this time?" + +"Putting the canoes away," said Grant. "Where are you going to locate +the tent, anyway?" + +"Well," said Fred, "John wants it over in that hollow, but I say it +ought to be up on this little plateau." + +"I think you're right, Fred," said George. "We won't get so many flies +up there." + +"Just what I said," exclaimed Fred triumphantly. "What do you think +about it, Grant?" + +"I think your place is better," said Grant. "Besides everything else +we'll have a good view of the lake from there." + +"All right," said John, pretending to be very sad. "You all seem to be +against me so I guess I'll have to give in." + +"You see, String," exclaimed George with a sly twinkle in his eye, "we +all know so very much more about this business than you do that you +might just as well take our advice in everything." + +"You talk too much, Pop," said John shortly, which remark drew a laugh +of glee from George who had tried to irritate his friend and was +delighted at having succeeded. + +"I say we all stop talking and get to work on the tent," said Grant. "We +can do all the fooling we want later." + +"Great idea, Grant," exclaimed George, who was in excellent spirits at +the prospect of all the good times ahead of them. "You're a wonder." + +"You were right when you said Pop talked too much, String," laughed +Grant. "We'll put him to work now, though." + +In an incredibly short time the white tent was erected on the little +bluff overlooking the lake. It was spacious with plenty of room for the +four young campers and all their equipment, which was speedily stored +away inside. + +"How about a few fish for dinner?" exclaimed George, when the tent was +in place. "Personally I think they'd taste pretty good." + +"Go ahead and catch some, then," urged John. "I'll help you eat them." + +"Oh, I didn't worry about your not helping me out in that way," laughed +George. "That's the least of my troubles. What bothers me is who is to +clean the fish." + +"The man who catches them always cleans them," said Fred. + +"Oh, no, he doesn't," laughed George. "Not in this case, anyway." + +"How about the cook doing it?" inquired John. + +"As I am to do the cooking all summer I can't say I approve of that +plan," laughed Grant. "That seems a little bit too much." + +"Well, he hasn't caught any fish yet, anyway," said Fred. "Let him do +that first and we'll argue about them afterwards." + +"Where are you going to fish, Pop?" asked Grant. + +"I thought I'd try it off those rocks down on the point there," said +George. "That looks like a likely spot." + +"While you're fishing I'll cut some balsam boughs and make four beds in +the tent," said John. + +"And I'll get a place ready to make a fire in," said Grant. "That'll +take a little time." + +"How about you, Fred?" demanded George. "It looks as if you were about +the only loafer in the whole crowd." + +"I'll help String cut balsam." + +"Very good," said George haughtily. "You may go now." + +"I'll put you in the lake if you're not more careful," said John +threateningly, but he laughed in spite of himself. + +A few moments later every boy was busied with his appointed task. +George, armed with his fishing rod, made off for the end of the little +wooded island. John and Fred disappeared in search of balsam boughs, +while Grant remained behind to make a fireplace. This was an interesting +piece of work, the secret of which he had learned from a guide some few +summers before during a sojourn in the woods. + +First he selected eight or ten rocks as nearly the size and shape of +cobblestones as he could find. These he placed on the ground in two +parallel rows some twelve inches apart. Both little stone walls thus +formed he endeavored to make as nearly the same height as possible and +before long his fireplace was complete. Between the two rows of stones +the fire was to be made; pots and pans could thus be set over the fire +and rest upon the rocks which formed the walls of the fireplace; in this +way they could be kept from actual contact with the coals and at the +same time most of the heat from the fire was concentrated upon them. + +This is a very efficient method of making a camp-fire as Grant had +learned from previous experience. Of course, in the case of a temporary +camp or unless there are plenty of rocks close at hand, it is hardly +worth while and it is not the kind of a fire that campers like to sit +around in the evening. As a cooking fire, however, it is one of the +best. + +Grant had hardly finished this task when John and Fred returned to the +camp. They were loaded down with balsam boughs and staggered under the +weight of the loads they were carrying. With a sigh of relief each boy +dropped his bundle on the ground and sat down to regain his breath. + +"You fellows look as if you'd been working hard," laughed Grant. + +"We have," panted John. "Just carry a load like that for a while and see +what you think of it." + +"I'll take your word for it," said Grant. "Have you got all you want?" + +"All the balsam, you mean?" + +"Yes." + +"Well, I should hope so," exclaimed Fred. "At any rate I refuse to go +back after any more. My fingers are all gummy and sticky, too." + +"The boughs smell great, though," said Grant admiringly. + +"Don't they?" exclaimed John. "They'll be wonderful to sleep on." + +"You see, Grant," remarked Fred, "String here is so tall we had to cut +an extra supply to make a bed long enough for him. I'm really quite +worried, too, for fear his feet may stick out beyond the flap of the +tent, anyway." + +"I'm not as bad as that I hope," laughed John. "It would be awful, +wouldn't it, if I couldn't keep out of the rain?" + +"You might stand on your head," suggested Fred. "Your feet sticking +straight up in the air could take the place of umbrellas. They're big +enough so that they'd shelter you, all right." + +"Look here," exclaimed John, "that sounds like one of Pop's remarks. I +hope you're not getting as bad as he is." + +"By the way," said Fred, "where is he? He ought to be back pretty soon." + +"He's still fishing," said Grant. "I guess he hasn't had very good +luck." + +"He ought to have taken one of the canoes, anyway," said John. "He can't +catch anything just standing on the shore." + +"Oh, I don't know," said Grant. "He might get some small perch or bass." + +"What I want is a good big trout," exclaimed Fred. "I'll consider this +summer a failure unless I get one." + +"Maybe we'll each get one," said Grant. "They say there are lots of them +around here." + +"Not so much in the lake as in the streams running into it, I guess," +remarked John. "It seems to me that the big trout are always in small +pools." + +"Well, I'll try them all," said Fred eagerly. "I don't want just to +catch trout; any one can do that. What I want is a big one." + +"One you can take home stuffed, I suppose," suggested Grant. + +"That's it exactly. I mean to have one, too." + +"Well, we might fix up the beds first," said John. "It won't take long. +All we want is four piles and we can spread the blankets out on them +when we are ready to turn in. Just think of it; a nice soft +sweet-smelling bed to sleep on and we won't feel any of the rocks and +roots and bumps that may be under us." + +"It sounds fine all right," laughed Grant. "We'd better get to work +soon, too, for it'll be dark before long." + +"I should think Pop would be back by now, too," said John. "You don't +suppose anything could have happened to him, do you?" + +"Why, I don't see how--" began Fred, when he suddenly ceased speaking and +listened intently. + +"What's the matter?" demanded Grant. + +"Ssh," whispered Fred. "I thought I heard some one call." + + + + + + +CHAPTER II--A MISHAP + + + +All three boys bent their heads and listened intently. The only sound +that came to them, however, was the soft sighing of the breeze through +the treetops and the occasional call of some bird preparing to settle +down for the night. The sun was low in the west, just sinking below the +fringe of the forest which skirted the little lake. All seemed quiet and +serene. + +"What did you think you heard, Fred?" demanded Grant after the lapse of +several moments. + +"I thought I heard a call. In fact I was almost--" + +Once more he stopped suddenly and listened. "What was that?" he +exclaimed. + +"I heard something, too," whispered John excitedly. "Listen!" + +"I don't hear a thing," muttered Grant. "I must be deaf." + +"There it is again," cried Fred suddenly. + +"I heard it, too," exclaimed John. "It came from that end of the +island." + +"That's the direction Pop took," said Grant in alarm. "Perhaps there has +something happened to him." + +"We'll soon find out anyway," cried Fred. "Come along!" and he began to +run at top speed in the direction George had gone a short time before. + +Close behind him followed Grant and John. Every boy was worried and +beset with a thousand and one evil thoughts as to what might have +befallen their light-hearted and well-loved comrade. Almost everything +conceivable in the way of misfortune suggested itself to their anxious +minds. + +"Keep close to the shore, Fred," called Grant. "He was fishing, you +know." + +Fred did keep as close to the shore as possible, but it was no easy task +a great many times. The island was rough and rocky and heavily wooded, +the trees growing down to the water's edge in many places. Crashing +through the underbrush and making a great deal of noise the three boys +raced along. Whether or not the cry which John and Fred had heard was +repeated they could not say, for the tumult of their own mad course +drowned out all other noises. + +After what seemed a long time they came to the end of the island. Here +the forest gave way to the rocks which ran out a considerable distance, +forming a small peninsula. At the tip end were several big boulders +which had become separated from the main island after long years of +action by the water and in order to reach them it was necessary to jump +across several feet from one to the other. Towards these boulders the +three boys made their way. + +"I don't see anybody," panted John. + +"Nor I," agreed Fred. "I don't hear anything, either." + +"Listen," warned Grant, holding up his hand. + +"And look, too," murmured Fred under his breath. + +Suddenly John started forward excitedly. "Look," he cried, "there he +is." + +"Where? Where?" demanded Grant. + +"Down there in the water. Don't you see him?" + +"Help! Help!" came the call, and John, Fred and Grant sped to the +assistance of their comrade. His head showed above the water and he +splashed a great deal in an effort to remain afloat. That he was very +rapidly becoming weaker, however, was plain to be seen. + +"Give me a hand, somebody," cried George. + +"All right, Pop. We'll be right with you," Grant reassured him. + +George was struggling in the water close to one of the big boulders. Its +sides were so steep and high, however, that he was unable to climb out. +From his actions it also appeared as if he were keeping himself afloat +merely with his hands. + +"Get a stick, Grant," cried Fred. "You can hold it out for him to take +hold of." + +"Where is one? Find one, quick!" exclaimed Grant excitedly. + +"Here you are," said John. "This one will do. Take this." + +He held out a stick some six or eight feet long which had been lying on +the shore at his feet. Grant seized it eagerly and hastened to George's +assistance. + +"Hurry up, Grant!" called George. "I can't last much longer!" + +"Here you are!" cried Grant, leaning out from the shore as far as he +dared and holding the stick toward his friend. "Grab hold of this." + +After one or two unsuccessful attempts George succeeded in catching hold +of the stick. Grant drew him up as close to the rock as possible and +then Fred and John bending down over the edge seized him by his arms and +quickly pulled him out of the water and to safety. + +"How did you happen to--" began Fred, when John suddenly interrupted him. + +"What have you got around your legs?" he demanded in astonishment. + +"My fishing line," said George, smiling weakly. "It tripped me up." + +"Well, I should think it might," exclaimed John. "How in the world did +you ever get it wound around you like that?" + +"I had my rod in one hand," said George, "and I tried to jump from that +rock over there to this one. I landed here all right, but when I jumped +the line got twisted around my ankles and I lost my balance. It finally +tripped me up and I fell into the water. When I got there the line kept +getting more and more tangled up the harder I kicked, until finally I +could hardly move my feet at all. I had to keep afloat just by using my +hands." + +"That was certainly a bright trick," exclaimed Fred. "Why, you might +have drowned." + +"I thought I was going to be," said George grimly. "I was getting pretty +tired." + +"Where's your rod?" inquired Fred. + +"At the other end of the line. A steel rod doesn't float, you know." + +"That's true," laughed Fred. "Haul in that line, John." + +Of course all the line unrolled from the reel before the rod was rescued +but it was finally brought safely to shore. A large section of the line, +however, had to be sacrificed as it was found almost impossible to +untangle the mass that had wound itself around George's legs and ankles, +and a knife was necessary to free him. + +"Where are your fish, Pop?" inquired Fred. "I suppose you dropped them +all when you fell in," and he nudged Grant as he spoke. + +"I had only one," replied George ruefully. "He did fall in and I lost +him." + +"What kind was it?" + +"A black bass." + +"A big one, I suppose." + +"No, he wasn't either. He was pretty small. I didn't have any luck at +all." + +"You ought to have taken one of the canoes," said Grant. "You can't +expect to catch anything from the shore." + +"He'd probably upset the canoe," said Fred. "I don't think we should +allow him to do anything alone after this." + +"Huh!" was George's only reply to this sally. + +"Feel like walking, Pop?" asked Grant. "If you do we'd better go back to +camp and get some dry clothes for you." + +"I was just thinking that," said George. "I'm commencing to feel chilly. +These nights in the Adirondacks are pretty cool, I find." + +"They certainly are," John agreed. "Let's go back." + +"I could eat something, too," remarked Fred. "The cool air also seems to +give you an appetite." + +"Come on," cried Grant, and a moment later the four young campers were +retracing their steps to the tent. + +Arriving there, George made haste to change his wet garments for some +dry ones. Fred and John collected wood for the fire while Grant made +ready to cook the dinner. A short time later the odor of sizzling bacon +filled the air, lending an even keener edge to four appetites that were +sharp already. The first meal in camp was voted a great success by every +member of the party, and all agreed that Grant was a wonderful cook. + +"Isn't this great!" exclaimed George, when the dishes had all been +washed. + +The four young friends were seated around a camp-fire crowned by a great +birch log that blazed so brightly it lighted up everything for a +considerable distance round about them. + +"It surely is," agreed John. "I don't see how you could beat this." + +"Just think of it," said Fred. "We're here for all summer, too." + +"Oh, the summer will go fast enough. Don't worry about that," Grant +warned him. "It'll be over before we know it." + +At last the fire burned low until it was nothing but a mass of glowing +embers. John arose to his feet and yawned. "I'm going in and try those +new beds we made this afternoon," he said. "I'm tired." + +"I'm sleepy, too," exclaimed Grant. "Let's all turn in." + +The few remaining coals from the fire were carefully scattered so that +they could do no damage during the night. These four friends had had +enough experience in the woods to know what a forest fire means. They +also knew that all good woodsmen were careful about such things and +always had regard for the rights of others. + +Every one was sleepy and it was not long before four tired and happy +boys were stretched upon four sweet-smelling balsam beds, sound asleep. +How long he slept John could not tell when he suddenly awoke with the +feeling that he had heard a cry for help. + + + + + + +CHAPTER III--JOHN HEARS SOMETHING + + + +John sat upright and peered about him in the darkness, every nerve +alert. He heard nothing, however. Perhaps he had been mistaken after +all. George's mishap that afternoon had been on his mind and probably he +had dreamed of it. + +Somehow the feeling that he had heard a cry still seemed very distinct, +however, and it gave him a most unpleasant sensation. He listened +intently. He could hear the deep and steady breathing of his three +comrades lying asleep around him, and he heaved a sigh of relief. At +least nothing had happened to them. + +Not a sound came to break the silence of the night and John began to +feel sure that he had been deceived. He prepared himself to lie down +again and go to sleep. He must have had a nightmare, he thought. Who +could be in trouble on a calm, still night like this? At any rate it was +none of their party and undoubtedly was no one at all. It had all been a +dream, though a most unpleasant one, and John shivered unconsciously at +the recollection. His nerves had all been set on edge, but gradually he +quieted down and once more settled himself to rest. + +Barely had he closed his eyes, however, when the cry was repeated. There +was no mistaking it this time, and John instantly was wide awake once +more, the cold shivers dancing up and down his spine. Never had he heard +such a voice. Some one evidently was in terrible distress mingled with +fear with which hopelessness seemed combined. The voice trailed off in a +wail of despair that brought John's heart up into his mouth. + +It seemed to him that the cry must have awakened his companions as well, +but no, he could still hear their regular breathing even above the +violent pounding of his heart. What should he do? There was no question +about it this time; it had not been a dream. Some one was in trouble and +needed help, and evidently needed it badly. Consequently it was needed +quickly, too, and John was determined to do his best. + +He leaned over in the darkness and felt for the boy who was lying next +to him. + +"Grant," he whispered. "Grant, wake up." + +Grant merely groaned and stirred uneasily. + +"Wake up, Grant," he repeated, shaking his friend by his shoulder. "Wake +up, I tell you." + +"What do you want?" demanded Grant sleepily. "What's the matter?" + +"Matter enough," exclaimed John. "There's somebody in trouble out here +on the lake and he's calling for help." + +"Is that so?" cried Grant, now wide awake. "Are you sure?" + +"I heard him call twice." + +"Was it a man?" + +"I think so. I never heard such a voice. It was awful." + +"We'd better go see what we can do then," exclaimed Grant. "Which +direction did the voice come from?" + +"I couldn't say; it seemed to come from all over. Oh, Grant, it was +awful." + +"Sure you didn't dream it?" + +"Positive. I know I heard it." + +"Come along then," said Grant. "We'll go outside and get one of the +canoes and see what we can find. Maybe we'll hear it again." + +"I don't know; it sounded to me as though it was the death cry of some +one. I never heard such a thing in all my life." + +"Get your sweater and some trousers," directed Grant. "Don't wake Fred +and Pop yet. We'll see what we can do first." + +John and Grant rose carefully to their feet and laid aside their +blankets. Feeling their way, they soon located their clothes and a +moment later, partly dressed, they stepped forth from the tent. The +night was clear, and the moon, in its last quarter, lighted up the trees +and the water in a ghostly manner. + +"Are the paddles--" began Grant, when the cry was repeated. This time it +seemed only a short distance from their camp and out on the lake. +Perhaps some one had upset a boat and was struggling in the water. + +"There it is," cried John, clutching Grant excitedly by the arm. "Did +you hear that? Isn't that terrible?" + +"Is that what you heard before?" demanded Grant. + +"Yes, the same voice. Hurry! We mustn't waste a second." + +"Wait a minute, String," and in Grant's voice was the suggestion of a +laugh. + +"What's the matter?" + +"Well, if that's what you heard the other times, I wouldn't be in a +great hurry if I were you." + +"Why not? Are you crazy, Grant? Can't you tell by that voice that some +one is in trouble? Aren't you going to help him?" + +"Did you ask me if I was crazy?" + +"I did, and I think you are, too. Please hurry, Grant." + +"Oh, no, I'm not crazy," said Grant, and there was no mistaking the fact +that he was laughing now. "I'm not crazy, but you're loony." + +"What do you mean?" + +"That's a loon you hear out there." + +"A loon," exclaimed John in amazement. "What are you talking about?" + +"I'm talking about a bird. That noise you hear is made by a bird named a +loon. Haven't you ever heard one before?" + +"Never. I don't see how a bird could sound so like a human being." + +"That's what it is just the same," said Grant, and he was almost doubled +up with laughter now. "I think I'd better wake up Pop and Fred and tell +them about your friend that's calling for help." + +"Are you positive it's a loon?" + +"Absolutely." + +"Then don't ever tell a soul," begged John eagerly. "I'd never hear the +last of it as long as I lived. It would be awful if George ever knew." + +"You're not the first one who's ever been fooled," laughed Grant. "You +probably won't be the last, either." + +"Please don't tell on me, though, Grant. Promise me you won't." + +"We'll see," said Grant evasively. "I can't make any promises though." + +"How should I know that it was a loon?" demanded John. "I never heard +one before and you yourself say that other people have been fooled the +same way." + +"That's true. Still it's almost too good a joke on you to keep." + +"What is a loon, anyway?" + +"It's a bird; it belongs to the duck family, I guess. They live around +on lakes and ponds like this and spend their nights waking people up and +scaring them." + +"I should say they did," exclaimed John with a shudder. "I never heard +such a lonesome-sounding, terrible wail in all my life." + +"There it is again," said Grant laughingly, as once more the cry of the +loon came to their ears across the dark waters of the little lake. + +"Let's go back to sleep," exclaimed John earnestly. "That sound makes my +blood run cold, even though I know it is made by a bird." + +"Don't you think we ought to tell Fred and Pop about it?" inquired Grant +mischievously. "It seems to me they ought to be warned." + +"You can tell them about it if you don't mention my name in connection +with it," said John. "If you tell on me though, I swear I'll get even +with you if it takes me a year." + +"All right," laughed Grant, "I won't say anything about it. At least, +not yet," he added under his breath. + +"What did you say?" demanded John, not having caught the last sentence. + +"I said, 'let's go to bed.'" + +"That suits me," exclaimed John, and a few moments later they had once +more crawled quietly over their sleeping comrades and again rolled in +their blankets, were sound asleep. + +The sun had not been up very long before the camp was astir. Sleepy-eyed +the boys emerged from the tent, blinking in the light of the new day. A +moment later, however, four white bodies were splashing and swimming +around in the cool waters of the lake, and all the cobwebs of sleep were +soon brushed away. + +"That's what makes you feel fine," exclaimed George when they had all +come out and were dressing preparatory to eating breakfast. "A swim like +that makes me feel as if I could lick my weight in wildcats." + +"You must have slept pretty well last night, Pop," remarked Grant. + +"I did. Never slept harder in my life." + +"Well, I didn't," exclaimed Fred. "It seemed to me I was dreaming all +night long. Maybe my bed wasn't fixed just right." + +"What did you dream about, Fred?" asked Grant curiously. + +"Oh, all sorts of things. I thought I heard people calling for help. +That seemed to be my principal dream for some reason." + +"That's funny," said Grant. "You didn't dream anything like that, did +you, String?" + +"No, I didn't," said John shortly. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IV--SETTING SAIL + + + +"What shall we do to-day?" exclaimed George when breakfast was over. + +"We might go fishing," suggested Fred. "I want a big trout some time +this summer, you know." + +"Oh, it's too sunny for trout to-day," Grant objected. + +"All right then," said Fred. "What do you want to do?" + +"How about taking a sail?" + +"Is there enough wind?" + +"Of course there is, and unless I'm very much mistaken its going to get +stronger all the time." + +"Suppose we take our lunch along," said John. "We can be gone as long as +we want then and can go ashore and eat wherever we happen to be." + +"Good idea, String," cried George heartily. "I do believe you're getting +smarter every day." + +"What do you think of my scheme?" demanded John, completely ignoring his +friend's sarcasm. + +"It's all right," said Grant. "I'm in favor of doing it." + +"We can take a couple of rods with us, can't we?" said Fred. "We might +get a few fish for dinner." + +"That's right," agreed Grant. "We can anchor and fish from the boat if +we want." + +"Let's get started," exclaimed John. + +A small catboat was a part of the equipment the boys had in order to +help them enjoy their summer more thoroughly. It now lay at anchor in a +little cove a short distance from the place where the tent was located. +It was a natural harbor and afforded excellent shelter for the boats +from the squalls and not infrequent storms that were apt to spring up +during this season of the year. The lake was between two and three miles +in length so that a comparatively heavy sea could be stirred up by the +winds. + +The island on which the four boys had pitched their tent was the only +one in the lake and it was very nearly in the center. It was owned by a +friend of John's father who had obtained permission for his son and his +three friends to camp on it that summer. The sailboat and two canoes +were included with the island, so that there was no question but that +these four boys were very fortunate indeed to be able to enjoy it all. + +For months they had been looking forward to this summer and they had +planned innumerable excursions and expeditions as part of their camping +experiences. Now that the time was really at hand they meant to enjoy +every minute of it to the utmost. + +"Fred and I will get the boat ready," exclaimed John. "You two can +collect the rods and fix up the lunch." + +"Put me near the food and I'm satisfied," said George. "Come on, Grant." + +John and Fred made their way down to the spot where the canoes were +hauled up on the shore. The catboat lay moored at anchor some fifty or +sixty feet out from the bank so that it was necessary to paddle to reach +her. One of the canoes was selected and the two boys soon pushed off +from shore. + +"That's a pretty good looking boat I should say," remarked Fred as he +glanced approvingly at the little white catboat. "I wonder if she's +fast." + +"She looks so," said John. + +"You can't always tell by the looks though, you know." + +"That's true too. We ought to be able to tell pretty soon though." + +"I wonder if they have water sports or anything like that up here in the +summer," said Fred. "If they do it would be fun to enter." + +"It certainly would," agreed John. "I don't believe there are enough +people on this lake though. As far as I can see we are about the only +people here." + +"I thought you said there was another camp down at the north end of the +lake." + +"That's right, there is. I don't know who's in it though." + +"We might sail down and find out." + +"Let's do that; it won't take long." + +They had now arrived alongside the catboat, which was named the Balsam, +and after having made fast the canoe, they quickly climbed on board. + +"Any water in her?" exclaimed John. + +"I don't know. I was just going to look." + +"Lift up the flooring there and you can tell. It must have rained since +she's been out here and we'll probably have to use the pump." + +"We certainly shall," said Fred, who had raised up the flooring +according to John's suggestion. "Where is the pump anyway?" + +"Up there under the deck. You can pump while I get the cover off the +sail here and get things in shape a little, or would you rather have me +pump?" + +"No, I'll do it. If I get tired, I'll let you know." + +It did not take long to bail out the boat, however, and before many +moments had elapsed the mainsail was hoisted and the Balsam was ready to +weigh her anchor and start. The sail flapped idly in the breeze which +seemed to be dying down instead of freshening as Grant had predicted. +The boom swung back and forth, the pulleys rattling violently as the +sheet dragged them first to one side and then the other. + +John and Fred sat on the bottom of the boat and waited for their +companions to appear with the luncheon. The two boys were dressed in +bathing jerseys and white duck trousers. At least they had formerly been +white, but constant contact with boats and rocks had colored them +considerably. The feet of the young campers were bare, they having +removed the moccasins which they usually wore. The day was warm and in +fact the sun was quite hot. The previous night had been so cool it did +not seem possible that it could be followed by a warm day, but such is +often the case in the Adirondacks. + +"Where do you suppose they are?" exclaimed Fred at length. "It seems to +me they ought to have been ready by this time." + +"Here they come now," said John. "Look at Pop; that basket is almost as +heavy as he is." + +"He's got lots of food in it, I guess. I'm glad too for I'm hungry +already." + +"Why, you finished breakfast only about an hour ago." + +"I can't help that. I'm always hungry in this place." + +"Ahoy there!" shouted George from the shore. "Come in and get us." + +"The other canoe doesn't leak you know," replied John, neither he nor +Fred making any move to do as George had asked. + +"We know that," called George. "What's the use of taking them both out +there though?" + +"Why not?" demanded John. "The exercise will do you good." + +"Are you coming after us?" asked Grant. + +"Not that we know," laughed Fred. + +"I guess we paddle ourselves then, Pop," said Grant to his companion. + +"All right," agreed George. "I'll get square with them though." + +"How are you going to do it?" + +"You let me paddle and I'll show you." + +They spoke in a low tone of voice so that their friends on board the +Balsam could not hear them and in silence they embarked upon the second +canoe. Grant sat in the bow while George wielded the paddle in the +stern. They approached the catboat rapidly where John and Fred sat +waiting for them with broad grins upon their faces. + +"You must think we run a ferry," exclaimed Fred as the canoe drew near. + +"Not at all," said Grant. "We just thought that perhaps you'd be glad to +do a good turn for us." + +"We're tired," grinned John. "Think how hard we had to work to get the +sail up and to pump out--" + +"Oh, look at that water bug," cried George suddenly, striking at some +object in the water with his paddle. Whether he hit or even saw any bug +or not will always remain a mystery. One thing is sure, however, and +that is, that a great sheet of water shot up from under the blade of the +paddle and completely drenched both John and Fred. + +"What are you trying to do?" demanded Fred angrily. + +"He did that on purpose," exclaimed John. "Soak him, Fred." + +"Look out," cried George, "you'll get the lunch all wet." + +"You meant to wet us," Fred insisted. + +"Why, Fred," said George innocently; "I just tried to hit that water +bug. How should I know that you would be splashed?" + +"Huh," snorted John. "Just look at me." + +"That's too bad," said George with a perfectly straight face. "If you +had come in after us we'd have all been in the same canoe and you +probably wouldn't have gotten wet." + +"You admit you did it on purpose then?" + +"I don't at all. I just thought perhaps it was some sort of punishment +inflicted on you for being so lazy." + +"Didn't he do it on purpose, Grant?" demanded Fred. + +"I don't know," replied Grant, striving desperately to keep from +smiling. "I know he didn't tell me he was going to do it." + +"Well, it was just like him anyway," said John. "He knew we couldn't +splash him back because he had the lunch in the canoe with him." + +"Take it, will you?" asked Grant, holding the basket up to John. "Here +are the fishing rods too." + +George and Grant followed soon after and the second canoe was made fast +to one of the thwarts of the other. + +"I'll put the lunch up here," said Fred, at the same time depositing the +basket up forward under the protection of the deck. + +"Slide the rods in there too, will you?" exclaimed George. "Look out for +the reels that they don't get caught under anything." + +"Everything ready?" asked John. + +"Let 'er go," cried George enthusiastically. "I'm ready." + +"Come and help me pull up the anchor then," said John. + +"I'm your man," cried George. "You know I'm always looking for work." + +"I've noticed that," laughed Grant. "You're always looking for work so +that you'll know what places to keep away from." + +Four light hearted young campers were now on board the Balsam. In spite +of their words a few moments before not one of them had lost his temper. +They knew each other too well and were far too sensible not to be able +to take a joke. Outsiders, listening to their conversation, might have +thought them angry at times, but such was never the case. + +"Get your back in it there," shouted Grant gayly to John and George who +were busily engaged in hauling in the anchor chain. George stood close +to the bow with John directly behind him as hand-over-hand they pulled +in the wet, cold chain. + +"This deck is getting slippery," exclaimed George. "All this water that +has splashed up here from the chain has made it so I can scarcely keep +my feet." + +"I should say so," agreed John earnestly and as he spoke one foot slid +out from beneath him. He lurched heavily against his companion, and +George thrown completely off his balance, waved his arms violently about +his head in an effort to save himself, but all to no avail. He fell +backward and striking the water with a great splash disappeared from +sight. + + + + + + +CHAPTER V--THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS + + + +"Man overboard!" shouted Grant, running forward as he called. He did not +know whether to laugh or to be worried. One thing was certain though and +that was that George like his three companions was perfectly at home in +the water. All four were expert swimmers so that barring accidents they +had little to fear from falling overboard. + +"He's all right," cried John. "Help me hold this anchor, somebody." + +Grant grasped the chain and one more heave was sufficient to bring the +anchor up on the deck of the Balsam. Before this could be done, however, +George came to the surface choking and spluttering. + +"I'll fix you for that, String," he gasped, shaking his fist at John. + +"For what?" demanded John. + +"You know all right." + +"Why, Pop," said John reprovingly. + +"Keep her up into the wind, Fred," shouted Grant who was seated at the +tiller. "Let your sheet run. Here, Pop, give me your hand." + +"I'd better go down to the stern and get aboard there," said George. "I +think it will be a little easier." + +"All right; go ahead." + +George floated alongside the Balsam until he came to the stern and a +moment later had swung himself on board the boat. He was drenched to the +skin but laughing in spite of himself. + +"Do you want to change your clothes, Pop?" asked Grant. + +"No, it's hot to-day. They'll dry out in no time." + +"Ease her off then, Fred," Grant directed. "We may as well get started." + +Fred put the helm over, the sail filled and the Balsam began to slip +through the water at a good rate. The four boys sat around the tiny +cockpit, Fred at the tiller and Grant tending sheet. In a few moments +they had emerged from the little harbor and had entered upon the open +waters of the lake. + +"Well, String," observed George who was busily engaged in wringing water +from the bottoms of his duck trousers, "you certainly did it well." + +"Did what well?" demanded John. + +"Don't pretend you don't know." + +"What are you talking about?" + +"You meant to shove me overboard and I know it so there's no use in you +trying to bluff. You were very skillful about it and I guess you got +square with me all right. We'll call it even and quit." + +"I did do it pretty well, didn't I?" grinned John. + +"Yes, you did, but I think the way I soaked you and Fred was just as +good." + +"You didn't see a water bug then?" + +"No, and you didn't slip either." + +"Yes, I did; on purpose though. Let's call it off now." + +"I'm agreeable," laughed George, "even if you did get the better of me." + +"How about me?" demanded Fred. "Pop wet me just as much as he did String +and I don't see that I am even with him yet." + +"You 'tend to your sailing," laughed George. "That'll have to satisfy +you." + +"I can steer you on a rock you know," warned Fred. + +"Don't do it though," begged Grant. "I'm an innocent party and I'd +suffer just as much as the others." + +"Where shall we sail?" asked George. + +"Fred and I thought we might go down to the other end of the lake," said +John. "There's a camp down there, I believe, and we might see who is in +it." + +"Go ahead," exclaimed George. "Meanwhile I think I'll try to get my +clothes dry," and suiting the action to the word he divested himself of +everything he had on, which was not much. The few articles of clothing +thus taken off he spread flat on the deck of the boat so that they might +get the full benefit of the sun's rays. + +The day was bright and not a cloud appeared in the sky. A gentle breeze +blew across the lake barely ruffling the water. Consequently the Balsam +sailed on an even keel and scant attention was necessary to keep her +pointing in the right direction. + +"How about trolling?" exclaimed Fred all at once. + +"What do you mean by that?" asked George. + +"You mean to say you don't know what trolling is?" + +"If I had I wouldn't have asked you, would I?" laughed George. + +"Well, I'll tell you," said Fred. "Trolling is fishing in a certain way. +When you troll you sit in a moving boat and trail your line out behind +you. As a rule you use a spoon or live bait so that it gives the +appearance of swimming. People usually fish for pickerel that way." + +"Let's try it," cried George enthusiastically. "Who's got a spoon?" + +"I have," said Grant. "Hold this sheet and I'll put it on my line." + +"Any pickerel in this lake, I wonder," remarked John. + +"There ought to be lots of them," said Fred. + +"Bass and perch too, I guess," John added. + +"Perch are fine eating," exclaimed George. "I've eaten them cooked in a +frying pan with lots of butter and bacon," and he sighed blissfully at +the recollection. + +"Did you ever eat brook trout fried in bacon and rolled in corn meal?" +asked Fred. + +"Not yet," laughed George. "I hope to before long, though." + +"Well when you do you'll know you've tasted the finest thing in the +world there is to eat," said Fred with great conviction. + +"Is it better than musk melon?" + +"A thousand times." + +"Whew!" whistled George. "Is it better than turkey?" + +"A million times." + +"Say," exclaimed George. "Is it better than ice cream?" + +"It's better than anything, I tell you," Fred insisted. + +"I'll take your word for it," laughed George. "I'd like to try it myself +pretty soon though." + +"Here's your spoon," said Grant, holding out the rod to George. + +"You're going to fish, yourself," said George firmly. + +"Not at all. I got it for you." + +"Why should I try it any more than you?" + +"Because I want you to. Go ahead." + +"If you insist, I suppose I'll have to," laughed George and dropping the +spoon overboard he let the line run out. + +"How much line do I need?" he asked. + +"Oh, about fifty or sixty feet I should think," said Grant. + +"Well, I don't know much about it," remarked John breaking in on the +conversation; "but it doesn't seem to me that we are making enough +headway to keep that metal spoon from sinking." + +"I'm afraid not myself," agreed Grant. "The wind seems to be dying down +all the time and we'll be becalmed if we're not careful." + +"I'll try it a few minutes anyway," said George. "I might get +something." + +"All you'll get is sunburned, I guess," laughed Fred. "You'd better put +your clothes on or you'll be blistered to-morrow." + +"That's right, Pop," said Grant. "I'd get dressed if I were you." + +"Perhaps you're right," George agreed. "Here, String, you take the rod." + +Scarcely had John taken the rod in his hands when he felt a violent tug +at the line. The reel sang shrilly and then was still. + +"You've hooked one," cried Fred excitedly. "Reel in as fast as you can." + +"Bring the boat around, Fred," shouted Grant. "Come up into the wind." + +Fred did as he was directed, while John strove desperately to reel in +his line. At first there was no resistance and then all at once the rod +bent double. + +"Say!" exclaimed George, "it must be a whale!" + +"It's bottom," said John disgustedly. "The old spoon sank just as I said +it would and I've caught a log." + +"Don't break the line whatever you do," warned Grant. "Swish your rod +back and forth." + +"It's caught fast," said John, following Grant's directions. + +"Keep it up, you'll get it loose yet." + +Suddenly the hook was released and as John reeled in there was no +resistance to be felt at all. A moment later the spoon appeared and +pierced by the hook was a small chip of water-soaked wood showing that +it was some sunken log that had deceived the boys at first. + +"That trolling business is great all right, isn't it?" laughed George, +now completely dressed once more and ready for anything. + +"I'll take you out in one of the canoes some day and prove to you that +it's all right," said Fred warmly. "You--" + +He suddenly stopped speaking and looked up. "I thought I felt a drop of +rain," he remarked in surprise. + +"You did," exclaimed Grant. "Just look there. Here comes a squall and +we're in for it all right. This is no joke." + + + + + + +CHAPTER VI--ADRIFT + + + +"Quick, Fred!" cried Grant. "Bring her up into the wind. You help me let +down this sail, Pop." + +An angry gust of wind scudding across the lake, caught the catboat and +made her heel far over. + +"Let go your sheet, Fred!" shouted Grant. "Quick or we'll upset." + +He and George sprang forward and feverishly tried to loosen the ropes +that held the sail aloft. The wind was increasing in strength now, +however, and the boat was becoming more difficult to manage every +moment. The sky was inky black and sharp flashes of lightning cut the +clouds from end to end. The thunder roared and echoed and reechoed over +the wooded mountains round about. It was now raining hard. + +"Keep that sheet clear of everything," cried Grant, who usually assumed +command in every crisis. "Let it run free whatever you do." + +"You hurry with that sail," retorted Fred. + +"They're doing their best I guess," said John. + +"If they don't get it down soon we'll go over," cried Fried. "I can +hardly hold her now." + +"Can I help you, Grant?" asked John, striving to make his way forward. +The boom, however, swung violently back and forth threatening to knock +him overboard every second. It was almost impossible to keep out of its +way in the tiny catboat. + +"Go sit down," cried Grant. "We'll get it down in a second." + +The rain now fell in torrents. The wind whistled and shrieked all about +them and it seemed as if at any moment the sail must be torn to shreds +and the mast ripped from its socket. Lucky it was that Fred was an +experienced sailor and endowed with nerve as well. The squall drove the +boat backwards but Fred managed to keep her nose pointed straight into +the teeth of the gale. Otherwise the Balsam could not have lived two +minutes. + +"Why don't they hurry with that sail?" exclaimed Fred peevishly. + +"They are hurrying," said John. "The ropes are wet and they're nervous." + +"Ah, there it comes," cried Fred suddenly. "Now we'll stand a chance." + +With a rush the sail came down, its folds almost completely covering the +four boys in the boat. The strain on the tiller was greatly relieved +however and the Balsam maintained a more even keel. + +"Whew!" exclaimed George, groping his way astern. "What a storm this +is!" + +"I never saw it rain so hard," said John. "Just look; you can't see more +than about ten feet." + +"We'll go aground if we're not careful." + +"How can we stop it?" demanded Fred. "We're at the mercy of the storm." + +"Throw the anchor overboard," suggested George. + +"A good idea, Pop," exclaimed Grant. "Come along and I'll help you." + +"You'll get struck by lightning," warned Fred, half seriously. The +flashes were blinding and almost continuous. The thunder ripped and +roared all around and so near at hand was the center of the storm that +sometimes the smell as of something burning could be detected in the +air. + +"That anchor will never hold us," said John who sat in the stern, +huddled close to Fred. Grant and George were feeling their way forward. + +"Don't throw the lunch basket over by mistake," called Fred. + +"The lunch won't be worth much now, I'm afraid," said John ruefully. + +"Oh, I don't know; it's under the deck." + +"I know, but the boat has a lot of water in her now and if it touches +that basket it will soon soak through." + +"How deep is this lake?" + +"I've no idea. I don't even know where we are." + +"I'm afraid we're going to run ashore all of a sudden somewhere." + +"The anchor ought to catch before that happens," said John. "It's +trailing now you know." + +"I know it is, but suppose we hit a lone rock." + +"We're running that chance. I don't know what we can do about it." + +"Are you trying to steer, Fred?" asked Grant who together with George +had now crawled back to the stern of the boat. + +"I'm trying to keep her headed with the waves; that's all I can do." + +"I know it. I think the squall's letting up some though." + +"Perhaps it is," agreed John. "It does seem a little bit lighter." + +"It isn't raining so hard either," observed Grant. "These squalls stop +just as quickly as they start sometimes." + +"The lake must be deep here," said Fred. "How long is that anchor +chain?" + +"About fifteen feet I guess," said John. + +"That ought to keep us from going ashore anyway," exclaimed Fred. "Who +said this storm was over?" + +"It must be coming back," said Grant. "It certainly let up for awhile +though." + +"But it's making up for it now all right," observed George. "I'm so glad +I took all that trouble to get my clothes dry." + +The four boys looked at one another and could not help laughing. Every +one of them was drenched through to the skin and no one had a dry stitch +of clothes on. The rain pelted them mercilessly and the water ran off +their faces in streams. All huddled together, they made a forlorn +looking party. + +"This is what all campers get I suppose," remarked George. + +"They certainly do," agreed Grant. "Some of them get it worse than this +too." + +"Do you suppose our tent is still there?" inquired John. + +"Let's hope so," exclaimed George fervently. "We'd be in a nice fix if +we found it blown away when we got back." + +"If we do get back," said Fred dolefully. + +"What's the matter with you, Fred?" demanded Grant. "You don't think +we're all going to die or be killed, do you?" + +"I don't know. This is a bad storm and we can't see where we are." + +"But the anch--" + +There was a sudden jolt. Every boy was almost thrown from his seat as +the boat came to a quick stop. Then the bow swung slowly around and a +moment later the Balsam was pointed straight into the wind, her anchor +chain taut. + +"We're aground," cried George. + +"Not at all," corrected Grant. "The anchor chain has caught, that's +all." + +"Where are we?" + +"I can't see." + +"We must be somewhere near shore," said John. + +"We might be on a shoal." + +"No, there's land," cried John. "I can see it." + +"Maybe it's on our island," said George. "Wouldn't that be queer." + +"Well, I wish the old storm would be over so we can see just where we +are located," exclaimed Fred. "I've had enough of this." + +"You'd better be thankful the anchor holds and not worry about anything +else," observed Grant. "So far we can't complain." + +"It's stopping," said George suddenly. "The sun will be out in a +minute." + +"If it comes out it had better bring an umbrella, that's all I can say," +observed John. + +"A pretty poor joke, String," said George. "Try another one; it might be +better." + +"The sun is coming out," cried Grant. "The storm is almost over, I +guess." + +"Thank goodness!" exclaimed Fred. "Now we can see where we are." + +Little by little the rain abated, the wind died down and the thunder +melted away in the distance. Before many moments had passed the sun +broke forth from behind a cloud and blue sky appeared. + +"Do they have many of these squalls around here, I wonder?" said George. +"I don't think very highly of them myself." + +"Nor I," agreed Grant. "Just look where it carried us." + +"There's our island," exclaimed Fred. "I thought it was in the other +direction though." + +"So it was," said John. "We traveled the whole length of the lake, I +guess." + +"Right past our camp?" + +"It looks so." + +"Suppose we had hit one of those big rocks where I fell in," said +George. "Our anchor wouldn't have done us very much good there." + +"I should say not," agreed Grant. "Isn't that a camp over there?" + +His three companions gazed in the direction he indicated and sure enough +a big white tent very similar to their own appeared on shore, a short +distance from the spot where the Balsam lay at anchor. + +"I don't see anybody around," remarked Fred. "Do you suppose they're all +away?" + +"The best way to find out is to go and see for ourselves," exclaimed +Grant. + +"That's right," observed George. "Let's get the anchor up and sail in." + +"There's a dock there too, where we can land," said Fred. "Perhaps the +people who are camping here have been caught out in the storm." + +"We'll soon know anyway," said Grant, making his way forward to assist +George in getting up the anchor. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VII--AN UNEXPECTED MEETING + + + +A few moments later the Balsam was making its way towards the tiny wharf +in the little harbor. Two canoes lay bottom up on the shore but no sign +of any living being appeared. + +"Perhaps they've gone to the ball game," remarked George. + +"Ball game!" exclaimed Fred. "What are you talking about?" + +"I was just fooling and trying to get a rise out of somebody. Of course +I knew I could make somebody bite with you on board." + +"Huh," snorted Fred. "I thought you'd gone crazy, talking about ball +games up here in the woods." + +"You two are always wrangling," exclaimed Grant. "Stop it." + +"I can't resist trying to get rises out of Fred," said George. "He's so +easy." + +"Leave him alone," said Grant. "I wonder where the people are who own +this tent. There doesn't seem to be a soul around." + +"Let's go up to the tent and peek in," suggested John. + +"Do you think we ought to do that?" Fred protested. + +"Why not? We're not going to steal anything are we?" + +"I'm not," laughed Fred. "Of course I don't know about you." + +"Come ahead," urged George. "We'll just take one look." + +They made their way up from the dock towards the tent. Still no sign of +life appeared and when John had stolen one hasty glance inside the tent +he reported that no one was in there either. + +"Let's go back," exclaimed Fred. "There's no use in staying around here +any longer." + +"Come on," said Grant. "It's time to eat too." + +"We might eat our luncheon over on that point," suggested George, +indicating a spot about a mile or so distant from the place where they +were. + +"Eating suits me all right," exclaimed John. "I must say I'm hungry." + +"And I'd like to get my clothes dry," added Fred. "I'm sort of cold." + +Once more they set sail on the Balsam without having caught sight of a +single occupant of the camp they had just visited. The sun was now +shining brightly and the sky was as blue as ever. No trace of the recent +storm remained to mar the beautiful day. It was not long before all four +boys were in excellent spirits again and their appetites became keener +with each passing moment. + +Landing on the point where they had decided to eat their luncheon, they +quickly set about making preparations for the meal. A fire was soon +started and with every one assisting, the meal was quickly under way. + +"How soon will it be ready, Grant?" asked George of the cook. + +"Oh, in half an hour." + +"Come on then, String," exclaimed George. "Let's go back into the woods +here and see if we can't find some berries or something." + +"Don't get lost," warned Grant. "Fred and I are too hungry to spend a +lot of time looking for you, you know." + +"Don't worry about us," laughed John. "We'll be gone only a few +minutes." + +Leaving Grant and Fred busy with the cooking the two boys plunged into +the woods and disappeared from view. The trees were still dripping from +the heavy rain, but the fragrant odor of spruce and balsam was stronger +than ever. The thick carpet of pine needles under their feet was wet, so +that their advance was noiseless. + +Suddenly, up from its hiding place almost under their feet, a grouse +arose with a roar and whirr of wings. Booming off through the trees it +quickly disappeared from view leaving the forest as silent as before. +The spell of it was on the two young campers as they stood still and +gazed all about them. The green leafy aisles of the woods stretched in +all directions around them most beautiful and inviting to the eye. A +catbird whined from a nearby tree, but otherwise all was still. + +"Did you ever see anything more beautiful?" asked John in a low voice. + +"I never did," replied George solemnly. The beauty and the grandeur of +it all made them feel as though they really should not speak above a +whisper. + +"I don't see any berries though," continued John. + +"Nor I," said George. "There's an open space ahead of us though; perhaps +we'll find some there." + +"Some blueberries wouldn't taste bad just now." + +In silence they continued their walk, even taking care to step softly so +as not to disturb the solemnity of the woods. Ahead of them appeared a +break in the trees and an open space showed. Here was the place to find +blueberries if any grew in that neighborhood at all. A moment later the +two boys came to the edge of the clearing which was perhaps a hundred +yards square. + +As they were about to step out from the shelter of the trees George +suddenly clutched his companion by the arm. + +"Look there," he whispered. + +Following George's directions John saw something that caused his face to +grow white and his heart to jump. In the center of the clearing and +busily engaged in eating the blueberries which grew in abundance all +about was a large black bear. + +He seemed entirely oblivious to his surroundings and as the wind blew +from him towards the two boys he was not aware of their presence. With +one great paw he stripped the berries from the low-lying bushes and with +his long, eager tongue he licked them up greedily. That his ancient +enemy, man, might be lurking nearby apparently did not occur to him. The +two boys stood and watched him, fascinated, not knowing whether to run +or whether to hold their ground. The bear was scarcely a hundred feet +distant from the spot where they were standing. + +"What shall we do?" whispered George. + +"Wait." + +"Suppose he comes after us." + +"If he does we'll run." + +All at once the bear looked up. Perhaps some eddying current of wind had +betrayed the presence of the two boys to his sensitive nostrils. It is a +well known fact that the eyesight of most wild animals is comparatively +poor; their sense of smell, however, is correspondingly sharp and it is +on this that they must rely to a large extent for safety. + +All around him old bruin gazed while the hearts of the two young campers +almost stood still. There they were standing within plain sight, right +at the edge of the forest and they could not possibly escape being seen. +Anxiety as to what the bear would do made the next few moments very +nervous ones. + +Suddenly he saw them. George and John held their breath and waited. He +looked at them steadily for a moment, one paw held poised in the air. +Then he turned and with that clumsy lumbering gait common to his kind +ambled off across the clearing. Arriving at the opposite side he turned +his head and glanced back at the two boys, still standing in the shadow +of the trees. Then he continued his way once more and quickly +disappeared from sight. + +"Well," exclaimed George. "What do you think about that?" + +"Suppose he'd chased us." + +"He'd never have caught me," said George grimly. "With a bear after me I +know I could at least equal the world's record for the half-mile." + +"Even so, you'd have finished second," laughed John. + +"What do you mean?" + +"Why, I'd have beaten you out, of course." + +"Maybe so," said George laughingly. "At any rate I guess it would have +been a pretty close finish. Imagine what Grant and Fred would have +thought if they'd seen us coming, tearing out of the woods with a big +black bear after us." + +"I'd have gone right on across the lake too," said John. + +"Do you want some berries?" + +"It's pretty late now I'm afraid. I think perhaps we'd better go back." + +"Perhaps so. Let's go anyway; we can come back here after luncheon." + +"That bear might have the same idea." + +"That's true too," admitted George. "We can bring Fred and Grant along +with us if they want to come." + +The two boys made their way back through the forest towards the lake. +Knowing that there were such things as bears in the neighborhood they +kept a sharp watch all about them. If they had only realized it, no bear +was half as anxious to meet them as they were to meet a bear. Wild +animals seldom if ever seek trouble of their own accord. + +A few moments later George and John emerged from the woods and caught +sight of the fire and their two companions. + +"Hey, you two!" called Fred. "Where have you been?" + +"Are we late?" asked John. + +"I should say you were. Grant and I were just about to eat up all the +food and not save any for you at all." + +"Thank goodness you didn't," exclaimed George, fervently. + +"Did you find any berries?" demanded Grant. + +"Lots of them. A good many of them are still on the bushes." + +"Didn't you bring any back?" + +"Not a single one." + +"What do you think of that, Fred?" demanded Grant. "These fellows go +back in the woods and stuff themselves with a lot of berries and don't +even bring one back to the two who are working hard to prepare food for +them." + +"We didn't eat any ourselves." + +"You didn't?" exclaimed Grant. "What was the matter with them; weren't +they good?" + +"I guess they were," said John. "We didn't try any though." + +"What's the matter?" inquired Fred. "What are you two trying to say +anyway? You found a lot of berries but you didn't bring any back and you +didn't eat any yourself. What's the reason you didn't?" + +"Somebody was there ahead of us," said George. + +"The owner you mean?" asked Grant. "Wouldn't he give you any?" + +"It wasn't the owner," said George. "It was somebody else." + +"I wish you'd stop talking in riddles," exclaimed Grant impatiently. +"Why don't you tell us what happened!" + +"There was a bear there," said John. "He liked berries too." + +"A bear!" cried Grant and Fred in one breath. "What do you mean?" + +"There was a big black bear eating the blueberries," said George, "so we +just decided we didn't care very much for berries ourselves." + +"Tell us about it," demanded Grant eagerly. + +"I can't talk unless I have something to eat first," replied George +firmly. + +"Nor I," agreed John. + +"Come and eat then," laughed Fred. "We too have got something to tell +you two when you've finished." + + + + + + +CHAPTER VIII--A PREDICAMENT + + + +While all four boys were doing full justice to the meal which Grant had +prepared, George and John related the story of their meeting with the +bear. + +"And now," exclaimed John when he had finished, "you tell us what you +have to say. Fred said there was something." + +"We had an idea while you were gone, that's all," said Grant. + +"Tell us what it was." + +"Go ahead, Fred." + +"No, you tell them," urged Fred. + +"Well," said Grant, "it was only this. Fred and I were talking things +over and we thought it might be good fun if we took the two canoes and +went off on a little trip for a couple of days. What do you think about +it?" + +"I think it would be great," exclaimed John heartily. "How about you, +Pop?" + +"It suits me first rate," said George eagerly. "Why can't we start +to-night?" + +"That's a little soon I should think," laughed Grant. "We can go +to-morrow though if you say so." + +"We can get some good trout fishing up these streams, you know," said +Fred. "I want to get that big trout." + +"If there's any big trout caught I expect to be the one to do it," said +George very pompously. + +"Huh," snorted Fred disgustedly, "you couldn't catch cold." + +"You just wait and see," muttered George under his breath. + +"Do you know anything about trout fishing?" insisted Fred. + +"I never did any in my life." + +"And you expect to catch a big trout?" said Fred derisively. "Why, Pop, +you're sort of out of your head, aren't you?" + +"Wait and see," repeated George confidently. + +"Do you know how hard it is to cast a trout fly when you're standing in +the middle of a clump of bushes and the branches of trees are in your +way all around you?" continued Fred. "Don't you know that it takes +almost years of practice to do it so that you are accurate and don't +catch your hook on everything in sight?" + +"Wait and see," insisted George. "I have a new system." + +"Ha! ha! ha!" laughed Fred. "You're a joke." + +"Let's go back to camp and stop these two arguing," exclaimed Grant. +"They're at it all day long." + +"We like each other all the more because we do it, don't we, Pop?" +demanded Fred laughingly. + +"Yes," admitted George, "except that you're awfully conceited at times." + +"Come on," urged Grant. "They'll be at it again if we're not careful." + +Before many moments had passed the Balsam was once more sailing over the +clear waters of the lake and in a short time the four boys arrived back +at camp. The remainder of the day was spent in planning for the trip +they were about to take and in discussing just where they should go. At +length an agreement satisfactory to every one was reached, the +arrangements were all completed and there was nothing left to do but +wait for the morrow in order to start. + +The sun had been up but a short time before the camp was astir. Grant +set about preparing breakfast while his three companions packed supplies +into the two canoes. Food sufficient for three days was loaded on board; +blankets were taken along, and trout rods with numerous flies of course +were included. + +"Breakfast's ready," announced Grant as soon as the work of loading was +complete. + +"So am I," exclaimed George heartily. "I'm always ready to eat up here." + +"Not only 'up here' either," muttered Fred. + +"What did you say?" demanded George, wheeling around so as to face the +speaker. + +"Nothing." + +"As usual," laughed George. "Where's the food?" + +"Right here," exclaimed Grant. "Let's see you get rid of it." + +No second invitation was needed and it was not long before every crumb +and morsel that Grant had prepared had disappeared. + +"Let's get started," exclaimed George. "All the food is gone so there is +no point in staying around here any longer." + +"You're right, Pop," laughed John. "I say we go too." + +A few moments later the two canoes emerged from the little harbor and +started out across the lake, headed northward. Grant and Fred occupied +one of them while George and John paddled the other. + +"I'm glad you're not in my canoe, Fred," called George gayly. "Small as +you are, I'd soon get tired of paddling you around all day." + +"Is that so?" snorted Fred. "Well, you're not half as glad as I am for I +know that I'd be the one that would have to do all the work and you're +too big and fat to make the work pleasant." + +"They're at it again, String," laughed Grant. "What shall we do with +them?" + +"Leave them home," suggested John. + +"Oh, we couldn't do that. They'd be like the Kilkenny cats." + +"Who were they?" demanded Fred. + +"Didn't you ever hear about them?" + +"No. Tell me who they were." + +"I guess you mean _what_ they were." + +"All right, what they were, then." + +"Why," said Grant, "they were a couple of cats that loved to fight. One +day somebody tied their tails together and hung them over a clothes +line. Of course they began to fight right away and they fought so +furiously that when it was all over there wasn't a thing left of either +of them." + +"I suppose you expect me to believe that story," snorted Fred. + +"I don't care whether you believe it or not," laughed Grant. "You wanted +to hear it, so I told it to you." + +"Grant says we're like a couple of cats, Pop," called Fred. + +"Tell him he'd better be careful," replied George. "Just because we call +each other names doesn't mean that we allow other people to do it." + +"Excuse me for interrupting," said John laughingly, "but does any one +know where we are going?" + +"I do," replied Grant. "We're going up that river you see straight +ahead." + +"Do you know where that leads to?" inquired Fred. + +"Yes. We can paddle up it for about two miles and then we have to make a +carry over to another river." + +"How long is the carry?" demanded George. + +"Oh, about half a mile, I guess." + +"Whew!" exclaimed George; "that's a long distance to carry canoes and +all the stuff we have in them." + +"Getting ready to shirk already, are you?" demanded Fred teasingly. + +"Shirk nothing," said George. "Wait and see if I don't do my share." + +"Yes and 'wait and see' if you don't catch the biggest trout too," +taunted Fred. "Why, Pop, you'll be lucky if you catch your breath." + +"Wait and see," muttered George darkly. + +"Yes, 'wait and see'," echoed Fred. "If you don't stop saying that we'll +have to call you, 'Wait and See.'" + +Just at this moment, however, they came to the mouth of the river and +the argument was abandoned, for the time being at least. + +"This is great!" exclaimed John. "I always did like paddling in a narrow +space rather than on a lake or some place like that." + +"I do too," agreed Grant. "You feel closer to things somehow." + +"You're no closer to the water, you know," remarked George with a wink +at Fred. + +"Don't pay any attention to him, Grant," said John. "I think we ought to +throw both of them overboard anyway." + +As they progressed, the stream became narrower and the current swifter. +Evidently they would be unable to paddle very much farther upstream and +the young campers began to keep a sharp lookout for the carry. + +"There it is," exclaimed Fred, suddenly pointing to a small sandy beach +a short distance ahead of them. + +They soon landed and emptying the canoes, they started off through the +woods to transfer them to the next river. It was necessary to leave the +baggage behind to await their coming back for it. Two boys to each canoe +they set out, the light boats turned upside down and bearing them aloft +on their shoulders. In spite of many groanings from George they reached +their destination before much time had elapsed, and then resting the +canoes on the bank of the stream they returned for the baggage. This was +more quickly and more easily transferred so that a short time later they +were once more making their way by paddling. + +"Say, Grant," exclaimed John when they had covered a few hundred yards, +"how do you know all about these rivers?" + +"Didn't you see that map I have?" + +"No. I kept wondering how you knew so much about the country around +here. I didn't know you had a map." + +"Of course I have. I wouldn't know anything any other way for I've never +been up here in my life before." + +"String thought you guessed at it," laughed George. + +"No, I didn't at all," protested John. "I just didn't think about it." + +"Does your map say that there are rapids ahead?" asked Fred. + +"I didn't notice. Why?" + +"Because I think there are. It seems to me that the current is getting +swifter all the time and I think you'll find that when we go around that +bend up yonder you'll find rapids ahead of us." + +"Shall we run them?" demanded George excitedly. + +"We'll probably be wrecked if we try it," said Grant. + +"We can see how bad they are, anyway," John suggested. + +"Yes," agreed Fred. "We'll 'wait and see.'" + +"'Go ahead' is my motto when rapids are concerned," said George. + +Rounding the curve in the river they discovered that scarcely a hundred +yards farther was another bend in the stream. Meanwhile the current was +rapidly becoming swifter and stronger. + +"We can't see yet," exclaimed George. "We'll have to go ahead." + +All four boys were excited now, and there was an eager light in every +one's eyes as they were carried along by the swiftly-flowing stream. + +Suddenly they came around the second bend, and spread out before their +eyes appeared a long stretch of white water. It foamed and danced, here +and there broken by a huge rock, black and ugly looking. + +"We can't run those," cried Grant. "We'll drown sure." + +"Go ashore then," shouted Fred, and he drove his paddle desperately into +the water. John and George also fought valiantly to divert their course +and avoid the rapids. Too late, however, for the current was stronger +than they, and with ever increasing speed they were drawn swiftly +towards the foaming waters below. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IX--DANGER + + + +"Work, Fred! Work!" urged Grant desperately. + +"I'm doing my best," panted Fred, and from the way he drove his paddle +into the water it was evident that what he said was true. + +They made a little progress towards the shore. They moved still more +swiftly downstream, however, for the current was powerful here. For +every foot that they progressed towards shore they were drawn a yard +closer to the rapids. Unless they reached the bank very soon they were +certain to be forced to run the rapids whether they desired to or not. + +George and John in the other canoe were in the same predicament. The two +frail little craft seemed no stronger than shells and it was almost +unbelievable that they could traverse that foaming stretch of water in +safety. No one spoke now; every boy was too busily employed in the +desperate struggle he was waging against the river. + +The current eddied and swirled. From below came the roar of the water as +it raced along in its mad course. Beside them was the shore and safety; +below was danger, accident, and possible death. + +When the two canoes had rounded the bend in the river the one which John +and George occupied had been a trifle closer to shore. Consequently it +had just that much advantage over the other. The occupants of the two +canoes were too engrossed in their own struggles to take much notice of +their companions, but out of the corner of his eye Grant saw that the +other canoe had nearly reached its goal. + +A moment later he heard a call from the shore sounding above the roar of +the rapids below. It was George's voice. + +"Keep it up, Grant!" he shouted. "You'll make it yet." + +"Stick to it, Fred!" cried Grant, encouraged by the knowledge that their +companions had reached safety. "We can make it." + +"I'm sticking to it all right," replied Fred grimly. + +Closer and closer to shore they came. Nearer and nearer sounded the +noise of the rapids. Could they win out? Certainly they could if nerve +and determination were to count for anything. + +Ahead of them Grant could see George frantically urging them on. He was +so excited that he had run down into the water, where he stood +knee-deep, begging and imploring his comrades to come to him. Inch by +inch they seemed to move towards shore. Their muscles were aching from +the strain now and it was agony for both boys to keep up the fight, but +neither one gave even the slightest thought to quitting. + +It almost seemed as if they were going to win out now. George was +scarcely ten feet distant; arms outstretched he eagerly awaited a chance +to seize the bow of the canoe and draw it and its occupants to safety. +His chance did not come, however. + +Just out of his eager reach a whirlpool caught the canoe. The bow swung +suddenly around and Fred's paddle was almost wrested from his grasp. In +vain he and Grant fought. Twice the frail little boat spun around and +then seized by a sudden eddy in the current was borne swiftly and +relentlessly towards the rapids below. + +"We're goners!" cried Fred. + +"Keep your nerve!" shouted Grant fiercely. "You do the steering from the +bow. You can see the rocks from there." + +At racehorse speed the canoe shot forward. With every second its +momentum increased until it seemed fairly to fly over the water. +White-lipped and with jaws set the two boys sat and awaited their fate. +From the shore George and John watched with feverish anxiety. + +Now they were almost in the rapids. An eddy caught the canoe and it +nearly upset. It escaped, however, and again sped on. Around it the +water foamed white and hissed and snarled as it raced along. Black rocks +stood out along the treacherous pathway. It seemed as if the canoe must +surely come to grief on any one of a dozen of them. + +Seated on the bottom of the canoe and with his eyes riveted on the +rapids below, Fred wielded his paddle like a madman. First one side and +then the other he dipped it, changing so swiftly sometimes as almost to +bewilder the onlookers. + +They were half way through the dangerous passage now. Was it possible +that they could come through those angry waters untouched? It was out of +the question; they had merely been lucky so far. At least that was the +way George and John felt about it. Any moment they expected to see their +comrades upset and disappear from sight beneath those terrible foaming +waves. + +Still the canoe raced on. One moment it had the speed of a locomotive +and the next, caught by some eddying whirlpool, its momentum almost +ceased, only to shoot forward suddenly again at a bewildering pace an +instant later. + +"I believe they'll get through," exclaimed George excitedly. He and John +were standing on a large boulder which afforded them an excellent view +of the rapids. + +"Wait," cautioned John quietly. + +"'Wait and see,'" smiled George. + +"Please don't joke," muttered John. "I don't feel like it." + +The onrushing canoe was almost through the rapids now. Could it be that +two inexperienced boys were to come through that mad mill race alive? If +they could last a moment more they were safe, but ahead of them was the +most dangerous part of the rapids. Two huge rocks stood out in midstream +scarcely six feet apart. Between them the water rushed and roared like a +cataract. Below this spot the rapids ended and the current gradually +slowed down to its normal swiftness. + +Fred and Grant saw all this in the twinkling of an eye and they knew +that the test was now to come. Both boys braced themselves; so swiftly +did they move now that it almost seemed as if they were standing still +and that it was the two great rocks that were charging down upon them. +Closer and closer they came. With bated breath George and John watched +from the shore, realizing their companions' peril. + +Fred, in the bow of the canoe, gripped his paddle with all his strength. +One moment more and their lot would be decided. The rocks looked like +mountains as they bore down upon them. Now they were just ahead, ugly +and bristling in their might; now they were alongside; now they were +past. Fred and Grant had run the rapids in safety. They could scarcely +realize it. The danger was over and they were alive. + +"Yea, Fred!" shouted Grant. "We're through!" + +"Thank goodness," sighed Fred, and he sank back limply against one of +the thwarts of the canoe. + +"You're a wonder," cried Grant. + +"It's a wonder we're alive, you mean." + +"That's true, too. But the way you steered!" + +"It wasn't due to any skill on my part; we were just lucky." + +"Anyway," exclaimed Grant happily, "we ran the rapids and I wouldn't +give up that experience for a million dollars now." + +"Neither would I, _now_," agreed Fred. "It would take a good deal more +than that to make me go through with it again, though." + +They had now reached a point two or three hundred yards below the rapids +and decided to go ashore and wait for John and George. It was with a +very comfortable feeling that the two boys set their feet on solid +ground once more. + +"Just look back there and see what we came through," exclaimed Grant. + +"I don't see how we did it," said Fred. "I wonder if we really did." + +"You think you were dreaming, I suppose," laughed Grant. "I can swear we +did do it, though, and I guess Pop and String will, too." + +"It doesn't seem possible." + +"Here we are." + +"I know it. Just look at those rapids, though. They look like Niagara +Falls from here." + +"There ought to be good fishing along here," remarked Grant. + +"I should think so. Perhaps Pop can catch his big trout here. The big +fellows usually stay in the deep pools below rapids like this." + +"Here they come now," exclaimed Grant, as John and George appeared, +carrying their canoe along the shore. + +"We'll have some fun with them about it, anyway," said Fred, in a low +voice. "Watch me get a rise out of them." + +"Hey, you two," shouted George, as he spied his friends. "What do you +mean by scaring String and me almost out of our wits?" + +"Do you suppose we did it on purpose?" laughed Grant. + +"Why, that was nothing at all for us," said Fred, airily. + +"Oh, is that so?" demanded George, mimicking Fred's tone. "Well, if that +was nothing, I'd hate to see what something was." + +"That was no effort at all for us," continued Fred, carelessly. + +"Put this canoe down quickly, String," exclaimed George. "Let me get at +that fellow. He ought to be drowned." + +With a sigh of relief John and George deposited their burden on the +ground and George immediately advanced threateningly towards Fred. + +"Let him alone, Pop," laughed Grant. "He's the best steersman this side +of the Canadian border." + +"He was pretty good, wasn't he?" exclaimed John. "How did you two +fellows like shooting the rapids?" + +"It was wonderful," said Fred heartily. "I never had such a wonderful +sensation in all my life." + +"I'll bet you were both almost scared to death," said George, shortly. + +"We were," laughed Fred, "but now that it's all over we're glad we did +it." + +"Fred thinks there ought to be some good fishing in these pools along +here," said Grant. "What do you say to trying them?" + +"That suits me," said George readily. "I'm hungry, too." + +"We'll have lunch right here then," exclaimed Grant, "and afterwards +we'll try our hands at the trout fishing." + +"And Pop will catch the biggest trout that ever swam in the waters of +the Adirondacks," added Fred, nudging John as he spoke. + +"Huh," exclaimed George disgustedly. "I wish you'd stop that talk. I +suppose you'll be worse than ever now that you've run these rapids." + +"I didn't say anything about myself," smiled Fred. "I was talking about +the big trout you were going to catch." + +"I suppose you think you're the only one here who can shoot rapids or +catch fish or do anything at all." + +"I told you I was talking about you, not about myself," insisted Fred. +"I said you'd probably catch the biggest trout in the Adirondacks." + +"You think you're pretty funny," snorted George. "You just wait and +see." + + + + + + +CHAPTER X--WAIT AND SEE + + + +When luncheon was over, the four young campers busied themselves with +preparations for the afternoon's fishing. They sat around on the bank +joining the different sections of their trout rods and selecting the +flies which they considered would be most tempting to the speckled fish +they sought to catch. + +"We'll fish from the shore, I suppose," remarked John. + +"Of course," exclaimed Fred. "The current is too strong here to try it +from a canoe." + +"I'm not much good at this game, I'm afraid," laughed John. "I don't +expect to catch a thing." + +"I don't know anything about it, either," said George, "but I certainly +expect to catch something just the same." + +"Maybe you'll have beginner's luck," said Grant. + +"I don't care what it is," laughed George. "I want some fish, though." + +"Well, I'm ready," said Fred, rising to his feet. "Where are we going?" + +"Suppose two of us go upstream and two down," suggested Grant. + +"All right," exclaimed Fred. "You and I will go up and the others the +other way. We'll meet back here in time for supper." + +"At the latest," added John. + +Fred stepped to the shore and deftly cast his fly out on the waters. +Gradually lengthening the amount of line he had out, he kept casting and +then drawing the rod back over his head so that the line stretched far +behind him. Then, with a short snap of his wrist he would send the fly +floating out over the pool again. As it came to rest lightly on the +surface of the water he jerked it along for a few feet in imitation of +the struggles of a live insect and then he would repeat the performance +all over again. + +His three friends watched him with absorbing interest. + +"That's a simple performance," exclaimed George at length. "Why don't +you leave the fly in the water for a second or two and give the fish +half a chance to swallow it? It would have to be an awfully quick trout +to take your hook." + +"They're quick enough; don't worry about that," smiled Fred. + +"But why don't you let the hook sink a little below the surface?" + +"Did you ever see a moth or a bug of some sort light on the water?" Fred +inquired. + +"Yes. Lots of times." + +"Did you ever see one sink?" + +"No, I don't believe I ever did," George admitted slowly. + +"That's just it," exclaimed Fred triumphantly. "If a real insect doesn't +do it, why should an artificial one? The idea is to make the fly appear +just as much alive as possible." + +"I haven't seen you catch anything yet," remarked George. + +Hardly had he spoken, however, when Fred had a strike. His fly had +settled like thistledown on the surface of the pool after an almost +perfect cast, when there was a rush and the line was drawn swiftly +across the pool. The light rod bent almost double and Fred's three +companions jumped to their feet excitedly. + +"Yea, Fred!" shouted John. "You've hooked a big one. Stick to him." + +"Big one nothing," said Fred shortly. "It's a little fellow." + +"Bring him in anyway," cried George. "The little ones are just as good +to eat as any kind." + +The trout may have been small as Fred had predicted, but he put up a +valiant fight. After a very pretty struggle, however, he was gradually +brought in close to the bank, and with a quick, dexterous scoop of his +landing net Fred brought him to shore. + +"About ten inches," he remarked as he held the gamey little fish up for +his friends to see. "He was fierce, though; look there," and he showed +the side of the trout's mouth all torn and bloody, so hard had he +attacked the hook. + +"Let's go after some ourselves, String," exclaimed George eagerly. "I'd +rather catch them myself than to watch others." + +"Remember you're going to get a big one," reminded Fred. + +"Wait and see," said George gruffly. + +Without wasting any more time he and John made their way downstream +while Fred and Grant worked slowly in the opposite direction. Fred was +the only one of the four who was at all skillful in handling a +trout-rod, and, as a consequence, he had the best luck at the start. +Grant, however, had captured one prize, and to his delight it proved to +be larger than any Fred had caught. + +They had progressed slowly towards the rapids, stopping at every pool +for a few casts, but both boys seemed to have the idea that their luck +would be better farther up. Consequently they did not linger long in any +one spot until they reached a point just below the rapids. Here there +were several large pools, and each boy selected one and prepared to make +a cast. + +Grant had experienced considerable difficulty in making his casts, for +the branches of the nearby trees and bushes seemed far easier to locate +than the spot for which he aimed. Time and again he had found his hook +entangled by the overhanging limb of some tree and he had spent many +moments in freeing it as a result. It was particularly exasperating to +him as he saw Fred with apparent ease drop his fly on any spot he cared +to hit. + +Grant had just succeeded in disentangling his hook for at least the +tenth time when he heard his name called. + +"Come over here, Grant!" shouted Fred excitedly. "I need help." + +Grant immediately dropped his rod and started towards the spot where +Fred was standing. + +"What's the matter?" he demanded, when he was only a few yards distant +from his companion. + +"Matter?" exclaimed Fred. "Look at that rod." + +It was bent almost double, and the line whipped back and forth across +the pool as if it was possessed. + +"Zowie!" cried Grant eagerly. "You've hooked a good one this time." + +"I should say I had." + +"What do you want me to do?" + +"Take that landing net and stand ready to scoop him up in case I can +bring him close enough to shore, and don't lose him beforehand." + +"Don't lose him," begged Grant. "Look at him go." + +The light rod was almost in the shape of a horseshoe and it scarcely +seemed possible that it could stand the strain. Back and forth and +around and across the pool the trout carried the hook. Fred strove to +keep a constant pressure on the line in order to tire the fish out; he +did not try to check his frequent bold rushes, however, but rather to +prevent the line from becoming slack at any time. + +One moment he would reel the line in swiftly and there would be almost +no resistance at all; the next moment, however, just as he and Grant had +come to the conclusion that the struggle was practically ended, off +would go the line again while the reel sang loudly. + +Fred was white-lipped, he was so excited. But who wouldn't be, for there +is no more thrilling sport in the world than to fight a big trout with a +five-ounce rod? + +"I believe he's tiring," exclaimed Fred at length. + +"A little, perhaps," agreed Fred. + +"I wish he'd jump so we could see him." + +"If he does I'll lose him. That's one of the things I'm doing my best to +prevent." + +"Why so?" demanded Grant in surprise. + +"If a fish can jump clear of the water he can very often shake the hook +out of his mouth. I've seen it happen too often." + +"But I don't see how you can prevent it." + +"If I keep a steady strain on him all the time, he can't jump. It's only +when the line is slack that they have a chance to do that." + +"Look at him go!" exclaimed Grant. "Wouldn't you think he'd be getting +tired by this time?" + +"He is. His rushes aren't as long as they were before." + +"Does that mean you've got him?" + +"Not at all. You've never caught a trout until he is safely on the +shore." + +Fred had not once taken his eyes from the line while he was talking with +Grant. Carefully, coolly and with great skill he played his fish. Never +once did he relax his caution, and little by little he seemed to be +gaining the mastery. Every rush was shorter than the one before, and +after every one he reeled in a bit more of line and brought the trout a +trifle nearer to the shore and the net. + +"Get ready, Grant," said Fred in a tense voice. + +The handle of the net in his right hand, Grant knelt on the rocks on the +edge of the pool. He was just to the left of the spot where his comrade +was standing and he now watched the line just as closely as Fred. + +"Let me know when to scoop him," he said. + +"You'll know all right," replied Fred. "You'll see him in the water." + +"You tell me, though." + +"All right." + +The plucky trout was tiring rapidly now. His struggles became weaker and +weaker. Fred had played him well, but he was too seasoned a fisherman to +feel that the fight was ended. Bitter experience had taught him that +there is many a slip. + +"Get the net ready," exclaimed Fred after what seemed like a very long +time to Grant, who was not comfortable in the position he was in. + +Nearer and nearer Fred brought the trout. He still struggled weakly but +was practically exhausted now. Relentlessly Fred reeled in the line. +Once the trout broke the water with his tail not a dozen feet from shore +and Grant held his breath; he thought the fish had escaped. + +Not so, however, for a moment later he could see him in the water being +drawn remorselessly closer to the net. Grant was in a panic for fear he +should not do his part correctly. + +"Now, Grant!" cried Fred suddenly. + +The trout was in the water almost at Grant's feet. His struggles were +very weak now and thanks to the way Fred handled the rod, was nearly +motionless. Carefully Grant lowered the net into the water and moved it +along until it was almost underneath the beaten fish; then with a quick +motion he raised the net and a moment later the trout lay upon the bank +enmeshed in its folds. + +"Nice work, Grant!" exclaimed Fred. "You did that like a veteran!" + +"Isn't he a beauty!" cried Grant delightedly. + +"He surely is." + +"How much do you suppose he weighs?" + +"Oh, I don't know. I'd hate to say; two pounds and a half, I guess." + +"That's pretty big, isn't it?" inquired Grant. + +"It is for this part of the country and it's all I'd care to tackle with +a five-ounce rod." + +Fred had removed the hook from the fish's mouth now and he held him up +to view. + +"He's all right," said Grant admiringly. + +"What do you suppose Pop will say about him?" grinned Fred. "I don't +believe he can match him, do you?" + +"I don't know," said Grant doubtfully. "I'd hate to bet on it. You can't +ever be sure what he'll do." + +"Huh," laughed Fred derisively. "He couldn't catch a trout like that to +save his life." + +"Wait and see," cautioned Grant. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XI--WHAT GEORGE DID + + + +"Well, I suppose we might as well go back now," said Fred. "It'll be +dark before long." + +"All right," agreed Grant, reluctantly. "I wish I might have caught a +trout like that one of yours though." + +"I'll stay if you want to." + +"No, I guess not," said Grant. "As you say it will be dark soon and we +might as well go back." + +"Get your rod then and we'll start." + +Grant returned to the spot where he had been standing when Fred called +him, and picking up his rod soon joined his companion. Together they +made their way back to camp rehearsing the story of the big trout's +capture time and again during the journey. + +"The others don't seem to have returned yet," remarked Grant when they +had arrived at their destination. "Shall we wait for them?" + +"I don't see the use. Let's clean some of the fish and get ready for +supper." + +"You're not going to eat that big one, are you?" + +"I'm not going to touch it yet, that's sure. I want to show it to Pop +first." + +"Aren't you going to stuff it and take it home?" + +"I don't believe I can," said Fred. "I don't know how to do it myself +and there isn't any place around here where I can have it done." + +"That's too bad; still it will make good eating." + +"After I've shown it to Pop," grinned Fred. + +"Here they come now!" exclaimed Grant, and as he spoke John and George +appeared through the trees a short distance away. + +"What luck did you have?" demanded John as he and his comrade approached +the fire which Grant had started. + +"Pretty good," replied Grant. "I caught only one myself but Fred got +eight." + +"Good for him," exclaimed John. "Did you get any big ones?" + +"Fred caught one beauty." + +"Let's see it." + +Nothing loath Fred proudly produced his big trout and held it up for the +inspection of his friends. + +"Say," exclaimed George, "that's a good one all right!" + +"He certainly put up a game fight too," said Grant. "You should have +seen it." + +"I wish we had," said George. "None of the ones we caught gave us any +trouble at all." + +"Perhaps you didn't catch any big enough," said Fred, preparing to tease +George and remind him of his boasts. "How many did you get anyway?" + +"Only four all together," replied George. "String caught three of +those." + +He and John seemed unwilling for some reason to talk very much and they +had the appearance of holding something back. Perhaps if it had been +lighter it would have been possible to see a guilty look on the faces of +both boys. + +"Let's see your fish," urged Fred. "Don't be afraid of them. I'm +surprised that you didn't catch more than one, Pop. I expected that +you'd bring in at least a dozen and that you'd surely get one bigger +than mine; here you are with only four little ones between you. Bring +them out anyway." + +John opened the creel and dipping his hand inside brought out a trout +about ten inches long and laid it on the mossy bank. + +"That'll do for a start," grinned Fred, who was thoroughly enjoying +himself. He knew that he had made good his boast about catching a larger +fish than George. He had been somewhat worried up to the present time +for as Grant had said it was never possible to say just what George +would do. Now, however, all doubts had been swept from his mind and he +was perfectly confident that he had beaten his rival. + +"There's another," said John, bringing out a second fish, if anything a +trifle smaller than the first. + +"Huh," laughed Fred, "I'll bet that's the one Pop caught." + +"No, it isn't," said John. "I caught those two and this one too," and he +placed a third trout by the side of the other two. All three of them +were almost exactly the same size. + +"They're not very large, are they?" said John dubiously. + +"Oh, they'll make fine eating," exclaimed Fred. "Where's your other fish +though? I want to see the one that Pop caught." + +John once more put his hand in the creel and felt all around. + +"I don't feel it here," he said anxiously. + +"Maybe it slipped through a crack in the basket," said Fred gleefully. +"Are you sure you caught a fish, Pop?" + +"Why, I thought so," said George. "Here, String, let me try to find it." + +"Too bad we haven't got a magnifying glass," chuckled Fred as John +passed the creel over to George. "You know it's against the law to catch +the little bits of ones anyway." + +"Find it, Pop?" inquired John. + +"Here it is," exclaimed George after a moment's search and he drew forth +to the astonished gaze of Grant and Fred a trout that one glance showed +was easily larger than the one Fred had caught. + +"Where'd you get that fish?" demanded Fred in amazement. + +"I caught it." + +"You did? How'd you do it?" + +"With a hook and line of course. I told you to 'wait and see.'" + +"Well," gasped Fred, and he stopped for lack of anything further to say. +His three companions, however, burst into gales of laughter all at his +expense and all seemed to enjoy the situation very much. + +"Let me see him," demanded Fred, and George very willingly handed over +his prize to be inspected. + +"Why, look here," exclaimed Fred. "There's not a cut or a mark of any +kind around his mouth but his stomach has a big gash in it." + +"Certainly," said George. "That's where I hooked him." + +"In the stomach?" cried Fred. "What are you talking about?" + +"Tell him how you did it, Pop," urged John gleefully. + +"Well," said George, "it was like this. I tried to fish the way I saw +Fred doing it but I couldn't to save my life. The old hook kept catching +on everything in sight." + +"Just like mine," interposed Grant. + +"I finally got disgusted," continued George. "It didn't seem to be any +use in my trying any longer and I thought that a trout would be an awful +fool to bite that silly looking fly anyway. I've always fished with +worms and I didn't see why I couldn't catch trout with worms for bait. I +decided to try it anyway, so I rolled over an old log and dug under it +with my knife. It wasn't long before I had a couple of big fat fellows +and I soon put one on the hook and took the fly off. + +"Well, I fished with the worms for a while but nothing happened and I +began to get pretty well discouraged. I quit fishing and lay down on my +stomach to get a drink out of one of the pools. The water was just as +clear as crystal and just as I lay down I saw a big old trout shoot +under a big rock at the bottom of the pool. That proved there were trout +in there anyway. + +"The rock where he disappeared was right beneath me and I picked up my +line with the big worm still on the hook and let it down just as quietly +as I could until it was right in front of the rock. Nothing happened for +a long time and I thought the trout was gone, but all of a sudden I saw +him again." + +"Were you holding the line in your hand?" inquired Grant. + +"Yes; it was just like a drop line. The rod was lying in back of me on +the ground and all I had done was to let out a lot of line. Well, the +old trout sort of poked his nose out and took a look around. He went up +to the worm and took a smell of it; at least that's the way it looked. +He didn't bite it though and a second later he went whizzing back +underneath the rock again. I thought he was gone for good but in a few +seconds back he came; the worm seemed to attract him even if he didn't +try to eat it. He kept hanging around it all the time, sort of sniffing +at it first one side and then the other. + +"All of a sudden I had an idea." + +"Whew," whistled Fred softly. + +"I decided," continued George paying no attention to the interruption, +"that I'd try to pull the line up all of a sudden and hook him in the +stomach. I didn't see why such a thing wasn't possible and I meant to +try it the first chance I had. Old Mr. Trout still hung around the worm +but it seemed as if he was never going to get right over the hook. +Finally he started to swim away slowly and I thought it was all over. He +only went a few feet though and then turned back. The worm seemed to +fascinate him. + +"He went right up to the hook and sort of looked it over again; then he +turned his back on it so to speak, and kept perfectly still, just +wiggling his fins. I lowered the hook a little and he never moved. I +lowered it a little more and held it there. All at once he turned +leisurely around and came right square over the hook. I yanked the line +with all my might and there he is." + +George pointed proudly to the big trout lying at his feet. + +"That's a great way to fish for trout," exclaimed Fred in disgust. + +"That's all right, Pop," laughed Grant. "You caught him anyway, didn't +you?" + +"I surely did. I told Fred I'd beat him out and I did it. Why, Fred, you +little shrimp, I'd have put salt on his tail and caught him that way if +it was necessary in order to take some of the conceit out of you." + +"Bah!" exclaimed Fred in disgust. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XII--A CHALLENGE + + + +Two more days the boys spent among the streams and the trout pools. At +the end of that time their supply of food was running low and they +decided to return to their island camp. + +The return trip was made without any mishap and when they entered the +little lake where their island was situated, their tent, standing out +prominently on the little bluff where it was pitched, was a welcome +sight to all. + +"It looks pretty good, doesn't it?" exclaimed John proudly. + +"It certainly does," agreed Fred. "I'm sort of glad to be back again." + +"We had a great time though," said George enthusiastically. "There's one +more trip I want to take this summer too." + +"What's that?" inquired Fred. + +"I'd like to climb that mountain over there." + +The four young campers turned their heads and gazed at the peak George +indicated, towering high over the lake. + +"That's a go," exclaimed Grant readily. "I think that it would be good +fun." + +"So do I," agreed John. "Let's do it soon too." + +"Do you suppose it will be very hard work?" asked Fred. + +"Of course it will," said George. "You wouldn't let that hold you back +though, would you?" + +"Not at all, but I don't want you fellows to get the idea that it will +be any easy job. The mountain looks nice and green and smooth from here +because it's all covered with trees, but when we get there we'll find +it's pretty rough going. Ravines and gullies and steep cliffs and +everything else like that will be there to hold us back." + +"All the better," exclaimed George. "Then when we reach the top we'll +feel as if we had accomplished something." + +"We'll do it anyway," said Grant and every one else agreed with him. + +Soon they reached their destination. The Balsam still rode at anchor in +the little harbor and everything seemed to be as the boys had left it. +In a few moments the canoes had been drawn up on shore and their +contents unloaded. Grant in the lead, they made their way towards the +tent. + +He disappeared inside the tent and before his companions had come up +with him, reappeared holding a paper in his hand. + +"What have you got there?" inquired George curiously. + +"I don't know. I found it inside the tent." + +"See what it is," exclaimed George. + +"It's a challenge of some kind, I think," said Grant after a hasty +glance at the sheet which he held. + +"A challenge?" exclaimed John. "Not for a fight, I hope." + +"Not as bad as that," laughed Grant. "It's an athletic challenge." + +"Who from?" demanded Fred. + +"I don't know yet," said Grant. "Give me a chance." + +"Read it out loud," urged John. "That's the best way." + + "We, the undersigned," read Grant, "hereby challenge the four + boys who are camping on the island in the middle of the lake to + a set of water sports. The events are to be decided upon by + mutual agreement and are to be as many in number as may be + agreed upon. We suggest that they include a sailing race, a + canoe race, and a swimming race. The day for the sports is to be + decided later and on Monday morning we will come over to see you + and arrange the details. + + Signed, Thomas Adams. + Franklin Dunbar. + Hugh McNeale. + Herbert Halsey." + +"Who are they, do you suppose?" exclaimed John. + +"I don't know," said Fred. "I never heard of any of them before." + +"They probably live in that camp down at the other end of the lake," +said Grant. "The one we visited the other day, you know." + +"And found nobody there," added George. + +"That's it. They must be the ones." + +"I guess they are," agreed John. "How do they know so much about us +though? I don't see how they knew there were four of us." + +"Probably they've seen us around," suggested Grant. "That part of it is +easy enough." + +"Well, what do you think of the challenge?" demanded Fred. + +"I say we accept it," exclaimed George eagerly. + +"Of course we will," said Grant. "I think it will be great sport." + +"They may be a good deal older and bigger than we are," suggested Fred. +"If they are we'll sort of be outclassed." + +"I don't believe they are," said Grant. "At any rate I don't think we'll +be outclassed." + +"We'll give them a good rub anyway," exclaimed George. "What sort of +sailing and swimming and canoe races do you suppose they mean?" + +"They had a catboat like the Balsam," said John. "Don't you remember +seeing it down by their tent? We'll use the catboats for the sailing +race." + +"A relay swimming race would be a good stunt," suggested Fred. "In that +way we could all be in it." + +"When they come over here we can decide all the details," said George. +"When was it that they said they were coming?" + +"Monday, I think," said John. "Wasn't it, Grant?" + +"Yes. That's day after to-morrow." + +"We ought to have some judges," said Fred. + +"That's true," agreed Grant. "I don't know where we'll get any though." + +"Maybe they'll know somebody," suggested George. + +"We'll find out all about it on Monday anyway," said Fred. "Let's have a +little food now. I'll faint unless I eat pretty soon." + +"Poor little Freddy," laughed George. "You need a nurse." + +"Huh," snorted Fred. "Ever since you hooked that trout by the tail you +have been too fresh to live. Your turn will come though." + +"What do you mean by that?" demanded George. + +"Why, that the freshness will be taken out of you one of these days." + +"Who'll do it?" + +"I don't know, but I have a sure feeling that something will happen to +you unless you mend your ways." + +"Stop your arguing, you two," exclaimed Grant. "You fight all day long." + +"We're not fighting," laughed Fred. "That's just the way we show how +fond we are of each other." + +"Well, I must say you have a queer way of doing it," said Grant. "I'd +hate to see what you'd do if you didn't like each other." + +"Such a thing could never happen, could it, Fred?" demanded George. + +"No, I guess not. I don't know what I'd do if I didn't have some one +like you around to make fun of," responded Fred. + +"Who caught the big trout?" taunted George. + +"Will you keep quiet about that fish?" exclaimed Fred. "All you do is +talk about it from morning till night. I never want to hear of it +again." + +"You will though," grinned George. + +"Oh, I know that, but I wish something would happen to keep you quiet." + +Such a thing was destined to come about before Fred dreamed it would and +it was also something he never would have thought of, possibly. + +"I need some wood for this fire," remarked Grant, who was busied with +preparations for dinner. The sun was fast sinking in the west and the +light was commencing to fade. A lone kingfisher winged his way across +the lake returning to his home, a hole dug in some bank overlooking the +water. All was quiet and peaceful. + +"I need some wood for this fire," Grant repeated, for no one had paid +any attention to his former statement of this fact. + +"You hear that, Pop?" inquired Fred. "Grant needs some wood." + +"Yes, I heard him," replied George. "What's the matter with you; your +legs haven't turned to stone, have they? Can't you get it?" + +"I can, but I have to wash the dishes to-night. It seems to me that +that's just about enough for me to do." + +"All right," sighed George, "I'll get it. It strikes me, though, that I +do about all the work around here that there is to be done." + +"Yes, it's too bad about you," jeered Fred. "Take the ax and get out of +here." + +"It's pretty dark," said George as ax in hand he started for the clump +of trees in the rear of the tent. It was growing dark as George had said +and it was becoming more and more difficult to pick out the narrow +trail. He had advanced but a short distance when a little animal ran out +into the path and trotted along ahead of him. + +"Why, look at the cat," exclaimed George half out loud. "I wonder how it +got on the island here." + +As he spoke the little black and white animal left the path and entered +a clump of bushes on one side. George had always been extremely fond of +pets of all sort and he followed eagerly. + +"Here puss, puss, puss," he called. "Here kitty, kitty, kitty." + +There was no response and he called again. He used his most enticing +manner and did his best to coax the little animal out again. + +"Wouldn't they be surprised back at camp," he thought, "if I should +bring in a cat? It would make a fine mascot for us too." + +He bent over the bushes where the cat had disappeared and called again; +no response came, however. He bent the twigs aside and stepped in, +looking carefully all about him as he went forward. Suddenly he uttered +a cry of surprise and started back. He thought he was choking, and +springing back into the narrow pathway he turned and ran for the tent as +fast as his legs would carry him. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIII--THE OUTCAST + + + +George's one idea was to run away, but the remarkable part of the +adventure was that it seemed to be impossible to shake off that from +which he was trying to escape. + +A moment later he arrived at camp and spying his three friends seated +around the fire he made his way towards them. As soon as he reached the +spot where they were he threw himself upon the ground and commenced to +moan and groan violently. + +"Oh, dear, oh, dear," he cried. "What have I done? What have I done?" + +"Why, Pop!" exclaimed Grant in alarm. "What's the matter with--" + +He broke off suddenly in the midst of the sentence and looked at George +in horror. All sympathy for the sufferer quickly left him. + +"Get out of here!" he cried, but not waiting for George to leave he +departed quickly himself. He was accompanied by Fred and John who seemed +to be stricken with some strange malady, a mixture of anguish and +laughter. + +"What shall I do? What shall I do?" cried George as he saw his three +friends leaving him. + +"Do anything you want," called Fred. "Drown yourself if you like, but +don't come near me." + +"Where'd you get it, Pop?" shouted John gleefully. "You'd better go soak +in the lake for a couple of days." + +"Get away from that fire," cried Grant. "Our supper is being cooked +there and we can't come back until you leave." + +"I'm not stopping you," replied George. "Come back and tell me what to +do." + +"I told you," exclaimed Fred. "Go and drown yourself." + +"Where'd you get it, Pop?" repeated John and immediately went off into +gales of laughter. + +"You caught the trout all right," laughed Fred. "You caught something +else. Something a good deal bigger than that fish too." + +"Isn't it awful!" exclaimed John holding on to his nose. "I remember my +younger brother once ran across a skunk like this and he had to live in +the barn for two days." + +"To think that Pop should be the one, too," said Fred delightedly. "It +seems almost too good to be true." + +"It's true all right enough," said Grant grimly. "Go up close to him if +you don't believe it." + +"What shall I do?" called George to his three unsympathetic companions. +He was standing near the fire, anguish depicted on his face. He was in a +sorry plight, for no matter where he went he could not escape the almost +overpowering odor that clung to him. + +"Take all your clothes off and throw them in the lake," said Grant. +"Then go take a swim yourself. + +"After that we might let you come back," added Fred. + +"But I can't throw away perfectly good clothes," protested George. + +"They're not 'good' any more," laughed John. "Throw them away." + +"Burn them if you like," suggested Fred. "Do anything you want with +them, only get rid of that smell. You can't come near us until you do." + +"Is that so?" demanded George and he took a few steps forward. "Who says +I can't come near you?" + +"Don't do it, Pop, don't do it," begged Grant. "If you only knew how you +smelled." + +"I do know; don't worry about that. It follows me wherever I go." + +"Please don't come near us," exclaimed Grant as George still moved +towards them. + +"I thought I'd come over and hug Fred," said George. "He's so pleased +about it all that it seems only fair that I should share the smell with, +him." + +"You stay away!" cried Fred in alarm. "Don't you touch me. Don't come +within forty rods of any of us." + +"Oh, Fred," grinned George mischievously, "don't run away from me. I +just want to show you how fond of you I am." + +As he spoke George walked slowly towards the group of three boys who +stood and watched him anxiously. They knew that George would stop at +nothing once he was started and his offer to share the smell of the +skunk with Fred gave them ample cause for alarm. Fred was the one most +worried and he really had good reason for his alarm, for he knew that +George would like nothing better than to rub up against him and inflict +the awful odor on him too. + +"You keep away from me, Pop!" cried Fred uneasily. + +"Don't you like me?" grinned George. + +"Oh, yes, I love you," exclaimed Fred, knowing well that whatever he +might say it would be exactly the wrong thing. + +"Then let me hug you," urged George, advancing steadily nearer. + +"I'll hit you over the head with this rock." + +"Why, Fred, how unkind of you; I really am surprised." + +"You'll be worse than that if you don't keep away," warned Fred, but he +backed away a few feet as he saw George steadily approaching. + +"Let's get out of here," whispered John to Grant and unnoticed by George +they withdrew and made their way back to the fire. + +"Pop certainly has Fred worried now all right," laughed John. + +"I should say so," agreed Grant. "The joke was on Pop at first but it +certainly is on Fred now. Just look at them." + +George still advanced slowly towards the spot where Fred was standing. +He held his arms out, entreating Fred to come to him, but Fred very +evidently had no intention of doing any such thing. He was slowly +retreating, threatening George meanwhile with all manner of punishment +if he was not left alone. + +"Come to me, Fred," begged George, a wide smile on his face. He was +content to suffer the discomfort of the terrible odor himself as long as +he could worry his friend so effectively. + +"Keep away from me, I say!" threatened Fred, brandishing a stick in his +right hand. "I swear I'll hit you over the head with this if you don't." + +"Oh, Fred, you wouldn't do that, would you?" exclaimed George, +pretending great surprise. "You wouldn't hit your old friend who only +wants to share something nice with you. You can't be serious." + +"You heard what I said." + +"But Fred--" + +"Whew, what a smell!" cried Fred suddenly and he turned and fled as fast +as his legs could carry him. Close behind him followed George calling +out at every step for Fred to wait and share something nice with him. +These invitations however seemed to have no effect upon Fred, for he +merely increased his speed. + +Now it so happened that the course Fred followed in his flight led +behind the tent and down the same narrow trail where George had had his +disastrous encounter with Mr. Skunk only a short time before. It also +happened that Mr. Skunk had not left the neighborhood with such +eagerness as had George; indeed he had been inclined to linger around +the same spot where they had met before. + +As has been told the path was narrow and hard to follow and the night +was growing darker every moment. Unfortunately for Fred a vine stretched +across the path just before he came to the spot where George had +searched for the "cat." This vine caught Fred's toe and he sprawled at +full length on the ground; George, but a couple of steps in the rear of +him, had to jump over the prostrate body of his friend in order to save +himself from meeting the selfsame fate. + +When Fred fell he not only surprised but greatly annoyed Mr. Skunk who +was lurking only a few feet away. As a result Fred was treated to the +same dose that had made George so unpopular around the camp. + +Together the two boys returned to camp. They were fellow sufferers now. +Though nearly overcome by the powerful stench, they bore with it long +enough to walk arm in arm up to the fire and put Grant and John to +sudden flight. This provided them much amusement but the smell was too +strong to be borne any longer. + +"I guess we'll have to do as Grant advised," said George. + +"What was that?" + +"Throw our clothes away and take a swim." + +"I guess you're right," said Fred and side by side the two boys made +their way down the water's edge. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIV--TALKING IT OVER + + + +Monday morning came and found the four young campers eagerly awaiting +the arrival of their challengers. There was great speculation as to what +they would look like and whether or not any set of games between the two +camps would provide an equal contest. + +"I believe we can beat them," exclaimed George confidently. + +"Don't be so sure," advised Grant. "You'd better wait until you see your +opponents before you begin to make any predictions." + +"That's right," said Fred. "You'd better not talk too much about it +either, Pop. You'll need all your wind for the swimming and canoe +races." + +George gave the speaker a scornful glance but said nothing. The four +friends finished their breakfast and lolled about the camp waiting for +their rivals to appear. + +"There they come now," exclaimed John after the lapse of about an hour. + +"Where?" demanded George. "I don't see them." + +"That tree is in your way, I guess," said John. "You'll see them in a +minute or two." + +"There they are!" exclaimed George suddenly. "Their boat looks just like +the Balsam, doesn't it?" + +"I think it is the same," said John. "It seems to me my father told me +that there were two catboats on the lake made by the same man and made +exactly alike." + +"That'll be fine," said Fred eagerly. "No one can claim any advantage +because of the boat then, and the best sailors will win." + +"Let's hope we're the ones," laughed Grant. "Come on, who's coming down +to the wharf to meet our guests?" + +"We all are, I guess," exclaimed John, and a moment later the four boys +were standing on the tiny dock waiting for the approaching catboat to +come into their little harbor. + +"They're good sailors all right," whispered Fred as he watched the boys +in the boat maneuver their craft. "We'll have to be awfully good to beat +them." + +"All the more credit if we do," said Grant. + +"Ahoy, there!" he shouted a moment later. "You'd better anchor a little +way out from the dock here. We'll come out in the canoes after you." + +"All right," came the reply. "Did you get our challenge?" + +"We certainly did," said Grant. + +"Good. I hope you'll accept it." + +"Of course we will." + +The boat swung around and one of the crew threw the anchor overboard. +The sail was quickly lowered and everything was done in a quiet +business-like way that instilled a great amount of respect into the +hearts of the boys who, from the dock, were watching the proceedings. + +A moment later Grant and John each took a canoe and set out from the +shore. They came alongside the catboat, which was named the Spruce, and +quickly transferred the crew to the canoes, and thence to the shore. One +of the boys, Thomas Adams by name, seemed to be the spokesman for the +party and he proceeded with Grant's help to introduce everybody all +around. + +Much laughter and embarrassment followed but before long all of the boys +were quite at their ease. They left the dock and proceeded to the tent +and all sat down on the ground in front of it. It seemed that the camp +at the end of the lake was very much like the one on the island. It was +occupied by four boys of just about the same age as the others and +practically of the same size. + +"We thought it would be fun," said Thomas Adams speaking for his three +friends as well as himself, "to challenge you fellows to a set of water +sports. We heard that there were to be four of you on this island this +summer and we saw you the other day just when you were leaving our camp; +right after that storm I mean. We were sorry to miss you." + +"We were sorry, too," said Grant. + +"You were away when we came to see you too," said Thomas. + +"Yes," said George, "we were off trout fishing for a few days." + +"Have any luck?" asked Hugh McNeale one of the other visitors. + +"Pretty good," said George. "We had a lot of fun too." + +"Who caught the biggest fish?" + +"Ask Fred here," grinned George. "He knows all about that." + +Being urged to do so Fred proceeded to relate the story of how George +had carried off the prize. He did not spare himself in the telling +either and left out no detail of how disappointed he had been to find +that George had beaten him out. When he told how George had hooked his +trout the story was greeted with gales of laughter and congratulations +were showered upon the fortunate fisherman. + +"A fellow with schemes like that would be hard to beat in any sort of a +game," laughed Hugh. + +"What sort of games are we going to have?" asked John. + +"We thought a sailing race would be fun," said Hugh. + +"Yes, and so would swimming and canoe races," exclaimed Grant. "Do you +think three events will be enough?" + +"How about a tilting contest?" said Thomas. + +"What's a tilting contest?" asked Fred curiously. + +"Didn't you ever hear of that?" + +"Never that I know of." + +"Why, it's like this," explained Thomas. "Two fellows get into a canoe; +the one in the stern paddles and steers and the fellow in the bow has a +great long pole with one end of it all wrapped up with rags or something +like that. Another canoe fixed up the same way opposes them and the two +attack each other. The fellows with the poles jab at each other and try +to upset the other canoe or knock the bow man overboard; if he falls +overboard or the canoe upsets of course they lose the match." + +"That sounds fine," exclaimed George. "I say we include a tilting match +by all means." + +"Two from our camp will take on two from yours," suggested Thomas. + +"All right," agreed Grant. "We'll enter our star team." + +"Entries will close one second before the match starts," laughed +Franklin Dunbar, a fat, round-faced boy, who had spoken but little thus +far. + +"And probably our team will be upset and in the water one second after +the match starts," laughed George. + +"It'll be fun anyway," said Thomas. "When shall we have the games?" + +"We were wondering about that too," said Grant. "I guess almost any time +will suit us though." + +"We'll need some practice," remarked Fred. "Don't forget that." + +"Not much," said Grant. "I say not to practice too much. We don't want +to make professional games out of them, you know." + +"That's all right, too," objected Fred. "At the same time we want to +make them worth while and the better we all are the more fun they will +be too. Don't you think so?" and he appealed to the four young visitors +for their opinion. + +"I agree with you," said Thomas readily. "Our camp wants to beat yours +too, and if you fellows don't take it seriously why there won't be much +honor in it for us if we do win." + +"There'd be plenty of disgrace if we lost under those conditions +though," laughed Franklin Dunbar. + +"We don't know anything about tilting either, Grant," said George. "We +will need a lot of practice for that event." + +"All right," agreed Grant. "I guess we do need practice. As far as I'm +concerned, anything you fellows say suits me. How about a judge though? +Suppose we should have a close finish in one of the races, who would we +have to decide it for us?" + +"My uncle is coming to spend a week with us in camp," said Hugh McNeale. +"He might act as judge if we wanted him." + +"That would be fine," exclaimed Grant. "When is he coming?" + +"Not till week after next." + +"That's all right," said Fred. "That would be just about right." + +"Suppose we set two weeks from Wednesday then," suggested Thomas. "That +ought to give us plenty of time to get in shape." + +"All right," agreed Grant. "We ought to have some sort of name for our +teams too. Have you any name for your camp?" + +"No, we haven't." + +"Neither have we. Suppose you call yourselves the red team and we'll be +the blue." + +"Fine," exclaimed Hugh. "I'll write a letter to Uncle Jack and tell him +what he has ahead of him. I'll tell him that he really is to be the +umpire and that he'll get the same treatment an umpire does if he +doesn't do his job well." + +The remaining details were speedily arranged and then the four boys of +the red team sailed back to their camp, leaving the boys on the island +full of excitement and pleasure at the thought of the games ahead of +them. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XV--PREPARATION + + + +The days intervening until the time came for the games were busy ones +for the boys in the island camp. The Balsam was thoroughly overhauled, +and everything removed from her that might tend in any way to retard her +speed. Frequent cruises were made and every boy was assigned to some +special duty on the boat so that when the race was held there would be +no confusion. None of the young campers had any desire to lose the race +through inefficiency. + +Long swims were indulged in to improve their wind and strengthen their +muscles. Canoe races were held and different combinations tried to +enable them to select the strongest team. A course a half-mile long was +marked out and time-trials held in an effort to decide upon the fastest +pair. All four boys were to be in the race but it had been decided that +the best policy was to put the best two paddlers in the same canoe. By +following this plan it was thought that their chances for winning would +be greatly improved. First place was to count two and second one in the +sailing and canoe races and in the tilting match. In the swimming race +three places were to count, the points to be scored being three for +first, two for second and one for third. The team scoring the greatest +number of points was to be declared the winner. + +Practice for the tilting match occupied very much of the boys' time. Two +long poles had been cut and one end of each was wound with old rags and +blankets, thus forming a large soft knob. + +"If we'd only saved those clothes that we had on when the skunks got +after us," remarked George, "we could have won a tilting contest from +anybody." + +"What do you mean by that!" inquired Grant curiously. + +"Simply this. Instead of using rags to wind the poles with we could have +used those clothes." + +"What advantage would that have been?" + +"Don't you see?" demanded George. "All we'd have to do would be to point +the pole at our opponent. We wouldn't have to touch him at all; as soon +as he got a whiff of that awful odor he'd simply faint and fall +overboard and we'd be the winners." + +"A great idea, Pop," laughed John. "Why didn't you think of it at the +time?" + +"In the first place I didn't know anything about this tilting match at +the time; in the second place, even if I had, I don't believe I'd have +kept them. Whew, they were awful!" and George shuddered at the +recollection. + +"They certainly were," agreed Fred. "Don't talk to me about it; my +clothes were all in the same condition as yours." + +The same system that was adopted for selecting a team for the canoe race +was used for the tilting match. Every possible combination of the four +young campers was tried in an effort to find the strongest competitors. +Grant and John had been selected for the canoe race, and Grant and +George were decided upon for the tilting contest. + +It had been taken for granted that Grant would be on both teams; he +outshone his companions in every form of game and sport just as he did +in his knowledge of books. He and George were heavier than the other two +boys and consequently made a more powerful team for the tilting match. +Weight would be an asset in that sport, for it is much easier to knock +down a light man than it is a heavy one; especially when a tricky and +shaky canoe is under your feet. + +"I seem to be out of it," remarked Fred ruefully when the final +selections had been made. + +"Why are you?" demanded Grant. "You're going to be in the canoe race +just as much as John and I?" + +"I know it, but I'm not on the first team." + +"That's all right, you and Pop might beat us out after all." + +"Huh," exclaimed Fred. "Pop doesn't do any work; he just sits there and +expects me to do it all." + +"You know that's not so, Fred," protested George warmly. "No one in the +world works harder than I do." + +"Well, if that's so," returned Fred, "all I can say is that there are an +awful lot of loafers in the world." + +"All four of us will be in every event except the tilting match," said +John. "You and I are both out of that, Fred." + +"You can save your strength while that's going on for the swimming +race," said Grant. "We'll have to depend on you two to win first and +second in that." + +"How long is it going to be?" asked George. + +"A hundred and seventy-five yards. Tom Adams was over here yesterday +while you were away and we decided on that distance." + +"It seems to me like a queer distance though," said George. "How did you +ever happen to hit on that?" + +"Why, we wanted to make it a hundred yards and they wanted a two-twenty. +We finally compromised on a hundred and seventy-five yards." + +"That's fair enough," said George. "How are we going to measure off +these different distances?" + +"Guess at them, I suppose," laughed John. "It won't make any difference +whether they're exact or not, I guess." + +"No, I imagine we're not going to break any time records so we needn't +bother about such details," agreed George. + +"We haven't had any practice so far to-day," remarked Fred. "What's the +matter; are we afraid of getting over-trained?" + +"That can be done easily enough, all right," said Grant. "Don't you +remember what the track coach we had at school last year said?" + +"He said I'd never make a runner if that's what you mean," laughed +George. + +"No, not that. What he said about training." + +"What was it?" asked Fred. "I don't remember." + +"Why, he said it was much better to be under-trained than over-trained. +Another thing, when a fellow was training for a certain event he'd never +let him run the full distance in practice." + +"Is that so?" exclaimed George. "That doesn't sound logical to me +though." + +"All right," said Grant, "but you know which school won all the meets +held anywhere around home, don't you?" + +"We did," said George. + +"That's just it," exclaimed Grant, "and yet you say that trainer was no +good." + +"I didn't mean to say that. All I said was that it didn't seem +reasonable to me not to let a fellow run the full distance." + +"Well, Mr. Smythe used to say that the great temptation for most fellows +was to do too much work. They'd go out and run all the afternoon and +hang around until they were tired out and then wonder why they felt +heavy in the legs and had no life in them." + +"Sailing can't hurt us anyway," said John. + +"That's right," agreed Grant, "and I'm in favor of doing this: stop +training for the events to-morrow. That'll leave us two days to rest up +before the games are held and we can devote those two days to learning +how little we know about sailing." + +"I know that already," laughed George. "I'm afraid we're going to get a +good beating in that race." + +"Oh, I don't know," Fred objected. "They might run on a rock or +something." + +"That's our best chance all right," said George. "I have an idea that +those fellows are all awfully good sailors." + +"I hope we have some wind," said Grant hopefully. "We'll never finish +the race unless we have a pretty stiff breeze. Personally I think the +course is too long." + +"Twice around the lake," said John. "That's not so far." + +"It's pretty far," insisted Grant. "Wait until you see the buoys out and +then you'll realize it." + +"Who's going to put them out?" + +"The red team," laughed Grant. + +"They're doing most of the work, aren't they?" inquired Fred. + +"Well, they wanted to; naturally I didn't object." + +"They're going to get dinner over here, you know," said George. "That'll +give us something to do." + +"Just think of it," exclaimed John. "Won't we be hungry that day? The +swimming and canoe races and the tilting contests all in the morning and +then food. You'll have to cook a lot, Grant." + +"I realize that," said Grant grimly. "I guess we can feed them though." + +"Suppose we're all even at the end of the morning," exclaimed George. +"That would certainly make the sailing race exciting, wouldn't it?" + +"It sure would," Fred agreed. "We'll have plenty of time to sail it too, +Grant. All afternoon ought to be long enough." + +"That's right," said Grant. "Yes, I hope we can get around twice in one +afternoon." + +"This canoe race is what's bothering me," exclaimed George. "That'll +take it out of us all right. It's hard work paddling and as long as Fred +and I aren't the first team I wonder if it wouldn't be better if we +didn't go in it at all. If we were fresh for the swimming race that +might increase our chances." + +"I know," said Grant, "but it seems to me that every fellow ought to be +in every event." + +"But look here," George objected. "You and String are a much better pair +than Fred and I. You simply walk away from us every time; we can't +possibly beat you so what's the use?" + +"You might get second, and that one point might win for us." + +"I have an idea," exclaimed John suddenly. "Why not make it a relay +race? We can race around the island and if we do that everybody can be +in it and it seems to me it would be a lot more fun that way." + +"That's fine," exclaimed George warmly. "Fred and I can paddle the first +lap and you and Grant the second. Will those other fellows agree to it +though?" + +"I don't see why they shouldn't," said Grant. "It's just as fair as the +other way; fairer if anything because it gives every one a chance." + +"We'll have to ask them about it though," said John. "Why can't we sail +down there now and see them?" + +"We can," said George springing to his feet. "Let's do it, too." + +A few moments later the Balsam was under way, headed for the end of the +lake and the camp of the enemy, the red team. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVI--GRANT MISSES + + + +The day set for the meet came at last. The first event, the tilting +contest, was scheduled for eleven o'clock and a half an hour before that +time the red team was on hand. The weather was ideal, bright and sunny +and warm, with not too much breeze. This was as the boys desired, for +they had hoped that the wind might not spring up until afternoon. At +least that is the way they would have arranged matters if they had any +power to do so. Strange to say it seemed as if the weather was to turn +out just as they had hoped. + +Hugh McNeale brought his Uncle Jack along and all the boys were +captivated by him at once. He was a big, jolly man, full of fun, and +with a laugh that made you feel as if you wanted to join in it every +time you heard it. He was enthusiastic over the idea of being the judge +and promised to do his very best. + +"I also have a trophy for the winning team," he exclaimed. "It's +something that you boys ought to have had in your camps anyway, but I +haven't seen one in either and so I'm going to give it as a prize." + +"What's that?" inquired Hugh curiously. + +"See for yourself," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell, for that was the name of +Hugh's uncle. He took a package from underneath his coat and unwrapping +it, spread before the admiring gaze of the eight boys a silk American +flag about three feet in length. + +"Say!" said George enthusiastically. "That's worth working for, isn't +it?" + +"It certainly is," agreed the seven other boys, almost with one voice. + +"That's the first prize," said Mr. Maxwell, evidently greatly pleased +with the result the sight of the flag had produced. "Here's the second," +and from his pocket he drew another flag of the same quality as the +first but only half the size. + +"I'm ashamed of you boys," he continued. "Both of these camps should +have had a great big American flag flying right out in front of the +tent. Let people see that you're patriotic and be proud of it." + +"We are proud of it," objected Grant. + +"Of course you are," said Mr. Maxwell readily. "I want you to show it +off though. Have a flag, and every time you look at it don't think only +of how beautiful it is. Remember what it stands for and how much you owe +to it. Think of the country that stands back of that flag and of the +millions of others who along with you have it for their national emblem. +You're all glad you're Americans and you're proud of the fact and I want +you never to be afraid to admit it. Be loyal to the flag, boys, and by +your actions prove that you're worthy of the protection it affords you. +And don't forget either that it's your duty as real American citizens to +do your part. That's what so many forget so easily. You can't expect to +receive benefits all the time and not give anything in return, you +know." + +"What can we do?" asked George, who along with all the others was deeply +impressed by Mr. Maxwell's words. + +"Just this: be good citizens. A good citizen is a man who not only obeys +the laws of his country, but who is always working to make his country +better. He puts his country's interests ahead of his own and that's a +hard thing to do sometimes. A good citizen stands by the mayor of his +town, and the governor of his state, and the president of his country. +Instead of sitting home and criticising them he gets out and works to +help them in every way he can and he is loyal to them. Those men are +behind this flag and if you are loyal to the flag, prove it by being +loyal to the men behind it. Every man must do his part." + +"I guess we're careless at times and don't think," said Grant soberly. + +"That's true," agreed Mr. Maxwell. "That's no excuse for us though." + +"But I didn't come here to make a speech," he continued laughingly. "I +believe what I've just said with all my heart though. At present, +however, I know there is a tilting contest to be held and we'd better +start it at once. I'm anxious to see who gets the first two points +towards winning the big flag." + +Without further delay the four boys who were to compete in this event +set about preparing themselves for it. Bathing suits were donned so that +an upset would not cause any worry and the two canoes were soon ready +for the fray. + +Grant and George represented the blue team and Thomas Adams and Franklin +Dunbar, the red. Grant was bow man, with George to handle the canoe; +Thomas was bow man, and Franklin paddled in the opposing boat. + +The contest was staged in the little harbor and the judge and spectators +took their positions on the tiny wharf. The canoes now faced each other +some fifty feet apart, waiting for the signal. + +"Not too fast now, Pop," warned Grant. "I don't want to fall out of the +canoe before we even reach the other one, you know." + +"I know," replied George. "I'll be careful." + +"I'm going to stay down on one knee like this, too." + +"That's a good scheme. Lock your feet around that thwart if you can. We +want to beat those fellows." + +"All ready?" came the call from shore. + +"All ready," answered Grant, and Thomas did the same. + +"Go," shouted Mr. Maxwell, and the match was on. + +Franklin and George did not try to make speed however. In fact they were +both very cautious and as a consequence, the two canoes approached each +other slowly. Both pilots seemed willing to let the other man lead off +in the attack. + +"Careful, Pop," said Grant, without relaxing his gaze from his +opponent's face for one instant. + +"All right. I'm watching them." + +Grant, crouched on one knee, was holding the pole as a mediaeval knight +would have held his lance in a jousting tournament. Thomas however, +stood up in his canoe, gaining a little freedom of action perhaps, but +at the same time increasing his chances of going overboard. + +The canoes were only a few feet apart now and the bow men braced +themselves for the onslaught. + +"Let 'em have it now, Grant!" shouted John from the shore. Fred joined +him in his exhortations, while Hugh and Herbert Halsey were just as +noisy in their zeal to cheer their team on, and for the size of the +audience the amount of sound produced was marvelous. Mr. Maxwell was the +only one who was silent. + +Closer came the two canoes. Now they were within range and Thomas lunged +forward savagely at Grant. He ducked the blow and aiming one in return +caught his opponent full in the stomach. Thomas uttered a loud grunt and +fell backwards. As luck would have it however, he fell in the canoe. The +light craft rocked dangerously and narrowly missed upsetting. As it was, +some water was shipped and had it not been for the skill of the two +occupants it surely would have overturned. + +"Quick, Grant!" urged George. "Hit him again before he can get up." + +"Bring me closer to them." + +George thrust his paddle into the water and the canoe shot forward. +Franklin, however, with ready presence of mind had swung his canoe +around the minute it righted itself and Grant's lunge at Thomas missed. +Before George could bring his boat within range again, their opponents +had recovered their balance and were prepared for the second attack. + +Once more the canoes approached each other. This time Thomas followed +Grant's example and crouched on one knee. He had evidently learned a +lesson and had determined to be more wary. + +"Get him, Grant! Get him!" shouted John. + +"Careful, George; not too fast," warned Grant. + +He held his pole back waiting an opportunity to strike. This time he was +determined that any blow he delivered would end the match; he had been +out-lucked before and did not want it to happen again. + +Thomas made a feint at him. Grant was anxious and struck back so eagerly +that he almost fell out of the canoe. + +"That's the way, Tom," called Hugh. "You'll fix him this time." + +Again Thomas feinted and again Grant lunged fiercely at his opponent. +Thomas then followed up his bluff with a quick stab that luckily only +struck Grant a glancing blow on the shoulder. Had it hit him squarely, +the match most certainly would have been ended then and there; as it was +only George's quick action saved them from going over. + +"Don't let him fool you, Grant," he warned. "Wait for him." + +Again they advanced and as they once more neared each other Thomas +repeated his former tactics. He made a feint to lunge at Grant, and as +before, Grant was unable to resist the temptation to strike back +quickly. This he did and Franklin in the stern of the opposing canoe, +anticipating this move, backed water and the blow missed Thomas' head by +inches. + +The poles the boys were using were long and heavy. As a result, they +were somewhat clumsy and hard to handle. As Grant lunged forward at +Thomas, he leaned over the side of the canoe and the weight of his pole +prevented him from regaining his balance at once. + +Thomas and Franklin had evidently mapped out their plan of campaign +beforehand and apparently Grant had acted exactly as they wished him to. +Thomas held his pole with a shortened grip and before Grant could +recover his equilibrium, he jabbed at him with all his might. The great +wad on the end of the pole caught Grant squarely on the chest; he +dropped his pole and waved his arms violently about his head in an +effort to save himself. + +All his efforts were of no use, however. Undoubtedly he would have gone +overboard anyway, but just to make sure, Thomas gave him a gentle push +with the business end of the pole and over he went. As he disappeared +over the side he gave the canoe a shove with his feet and a moment later +George joined him in the water. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVII--GEORGE'S STRATEGY + + + +A moment later Grant and George came to the surface puffing and shaking +the water from their eyes and hair. Both boys were laughing. + +"Nice work," said Grant to their two opponents, who sat in their canoe +nearby. + +"We were lucky," protested Thomas. + +"Lucky, nothing," exclaimed Grant. "You knew more about the game than we +did and you deserved to win." + +The canoe belonging to the defeated boys floated close at hand, bottom +side up. The pole and the paddle were a short distance away. These were +soon rescued and the canoe being righted, the contestants made their way +to shore. John and Fred were the first to congratulate the winners. + +"We'll have to win this canoe race," exclaimed Fred. "You fellows have +two points to our one as it is now, and we can't afford to let you get +twice as many again this time." + +"We're going to do our best to get twice as many though, you may be sure +of that," laughed Hugh McNeale. "We want that big flag." + +"If you win it, you'll certainly be welcome to it," exclaimed John. "We +want it ourselves though, I can tell you." + +The best of feeling existed between the two camps, but this fact did not +serve to lessen the competition and rivalry. Good sportsmanship adds +zest to every game. + +"Where are the first pairs for this canoe race?" cried Mr. Maxwell. "We +mustn't let these events lag, you know." + +"We'll be ready in a minute," replied Grant. "We want to get all our +wind back and remove all the water from this canoe first." + +"That's right," said Herbert Halsey. "You fellows take your time." + +The suggestion of the blue team that the next event be made a relay race +around the island, had met with an enthusiastic response from their +rivals. Two teams from each camp were to compete and each team was to +paddle once around. The first pairs consisted of George and Fred, from +the blue team and opposed to them were Herbert Halsey and Franklin +Dunbar, from the red. Finishing the race were Grant and John, against +Hugh McNeale and Thomas Adams. Each camp had selected its strong team to +paddle last, hoping to win the race by a powerful finish. + +"I guess we're all ready now," said Grant, when a few moments had +elapsed. "We'll go ahead any time you say." + +"All right," said Mr. Maxwell. "Now remember the rules; the starting +line is directly opposite this dock and I've got some string which we +will use for tape at the finish. Each team is to paddle once around the +island. When the second relay starts, the two canoes that have finished +will be stationed out here about twenty feet apart and this string will +be stretched between them; that will be the finish line. All four canoes +will be used of course and the second relay must not start until those +completing the first have touched the canoes with their paddles. Is it +all clear?" + +"All clear," said Grant, and Thomas answered for his side. + +"Very well," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. "The first canoes may take their +places and the second relay had better be ready too." + +George and Fred pushed out from the dock and paddled slowly to the +starting point; Herbert and Franklin followed close behind. + +When they were in position, and by the way the red team had drawn the +course nearest shore, Mr. Maxwell lifted his small megaphone and gave +his final instructions. + +"Remember," he called, "once around, and the inside team this lap will +be the outside next. Don't get mixed up." + +"That'll be a little help to us," said John in a low voice to Grant. "I +hope Fred and Pop can give us a little lead to start out with." + +"I hope so too," replied Grant. + +"On your marks!" shouted Mr. Maxwell. + +Four boys sat up alert and eager for the final word. + +"Get set!" + +Four paddles were raised and held poised for instant action. + +"Go!" + +The blades were dipped deeply into the water and the race was on. Side +by side the two canoes sped along. + +"You fellows better go out there and take your places," said Mr. +Maxwell, turning to the four boys who were to continue the race the next +relay. "We don't want any mixup then, you know. It would be a shame to +have those boys paddle over half a mile for nothing." + +In response to his suggestion, Grant and John, and Hugh and Thomas, +paddled slowly out to the starting line, there to await the arrival of +their respective team-mates. + +"Take it slow, Fred," urged George from his position in the stern of the +racing canoe. "Don't kill yourself right at the start." + +They had covered about one hundred yards of their course and all four +boys were paddling with every ounce of strength they possessed. + +"Dip your paddle deep," he continued. "Take a long easy stroke. A good +steady pace is what we want." + +"They'll get way ahead of us," protested Fred. + +"What if they do? They'll be all in at the finish and we'll start a +sprint." + +In response to George's suggestion they eased up materially. As Fred had +predicted the other canoe immediately began to draw away, for its two +occupants did not relax their efforts for an instant. Wider and wider +the gap opened between them until thirty feet separated the two racers +when they came to the first turn. + +The island was oval in its shape, very much like an egg. The start had +been made from a point about midway between the two ends. The first +stretch, therefore, was half the length of the island, then the corner +was turned and the whole length of the island was covered, ending with +the home stretch, half the length of the island again. + +Steadily and strongly, George and Fred paddled. Herbert and Franklin +still worked desperately, taking nearly three strokes to the other boys' +two, and as a result, the gap between the two boats continually widened. + +"Don't let it worry you, Fred," said George. "They can't keep up that +pace very much longer." + +"They're not weakening yet though, Pop." + +"I know it, but we've only covered half the course so far." + +Steadily the red team's canoe drew away. Forty, fifty feet, they were in +the lead now. If any one had been in a position to observe, however, he +would have seen that its occupants were beginning to show signs of +weakening. Their breath came faster and faster, the perspiration rolled +off their faces in streams, and their muscles began to ache and throb. + +Relentlessly George and Fred followed them. Not one bit did they +increase their efforts, though George had great difficulty in +restraining his companion. Powerful, even strokes urged their tiny craft +on and now they were holding their own. Just ahead of them was the last +turn which was to bring them into the home stretch. + +"How do you feel, Fred?" asked George. + +"Fine." + +"Are you tired?" + +"Not very." + +"I hope not. We'll start a sprint the second we round that turn and +we'll have to put all we've got into it." + +The leading canoe was even now turning the point. The boys in it were +plainly tired as their frequent splashing showed. They still worked +desperately, however, and it would be no mean task to overtake them. + +Grant and John sat in their canoe at the starting point eagerly awaiting +the appearance of their team-mates. To their dismay, it was Franklin and +Herbert who first hove in sight and to the waiting boys it seemed as if +hours elapsed before George and Fred rounded the turn. At last they +appeared, however, over thirty yards in the rear. + +"Now, Fred!" urged George, as they started on the home stretch. "Let 'em +have it." + +Like demons the two boys began to ply their paddles. The light canoe was +quick to respond and it fairly flew over the water. Foot by foot and +yard by yard they gained on their fast-tiring opponents. + +Franklin and Herbert paddled desperately. Their strength was gone +however; they had used it all up at the start of the race. Their arms +felt like great chunks of lead and it was all the two boys could do to +make them respond to the urging of their wills. + +At racehorse speed, George and Fred plowed along. The gap between the +two canoes began to disappear as if by magic. The steady pace they had +maintained had tired them, to be sure, but they still had plenty of +reserve strength left and they were using it now when it counted most. +The cheers of their team-mates waiting for them came faintly to their +ears, spurring them on. + +"We've got 'em, Fred! We've got 'em!" exclaimed George triumphantly. +"Stick to it." + +Fifty yards away was the finish line and the canoes were almost on even +terms. Forty yards and George and Fred were in the lead. Their rivals +were beaten, dead tired, and possessed of scarcely the strength +necessary to urge their canoe across the line. + +Thirty yards from home and George and Fred enjoyed a lead of nearly five +yards. They were moving at easily twice the speed of their opponents +now. It seemed certain that Grant and John were to be handed a splendid +head-start for the last relay, when an unexpected and most disheartening +thing suddenly happened. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII--A CLOSE MATCH + + + +Fifteen yards from the finish Fred's paddle broke. It snapped off short +in his hand and as a result, the canoe almost upset. It seemed as if +their splendid effort was to go for nothing. Herbert and Franklin, +seeing the plight of their rivals, were endowed with new hope that they +might win their relay after all. The hope thus aroused gave them just +strength enough to urge their canoe forward across the line. Herbert +lifted his paddle and touched the canoe in which Hugh and Thomas waited +so impatiently, and then sank back against the thwart exhausted. + +The disaster to Fred was nearly fatal. The canoe rocked dangerously and +though it did not turn over, it lost every bit of its momentum. + +"Sit down, Fred!" shouted George. "I'll paddle." + +One man against two is a severe handicap, however, even if those two are +well nigh exhausted. It must be remembered also that George too, was +nearly fagged out. In spite of his usual lightheartedness, he had an +indomitable will, however, and not one of the boys had more nerve than +he. + +He dipped his blade deep into the water, brought the bow of the canoe +around so that it pointed in the proper direction, and urged it forward. +Meanwhile the other canoe had passed them and crossed the line at least +five yards in the lead. + +Grant and John were off like a flash, however, and the advantage the red +team enjoyed was not insurmountable by any means. + +"That was tough luck, boys," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell earnestly to Fred and +George. "You two certainly deserved to win that relay." + +"You surely did," echoed Franklin Dunbar. "That was about the toughest +luck I ever saw." + +"Fred's too strong," laughed George. "It's awfully hard to get any +paddle that he won't break." + +"Don't pay any attention to what he says, Mr. Maxwell," urged Fred. "He +thinks he can tease me; personally, I think he's crazy." + +"I hope not," laughed Mr. Maxwell. + +"He's fresh though," insisted Fred. + +"Not now," puffed George. "My breath's gone and I'm all in." + +"That was a great race," insisted Mr. Maxwell. "I don't remember ever +having seen a better one." + +"We were about twenty-five yards ahead of them at one time, you know," +said Herbert. "I thought we would win easily." + +"So did I," exclaimed Fred. "You kept drawing away from us all the time +and I thought we wouldn't even be in it. I wanted to paddle harder all +the time but Pop here wouldn't let me. He insisted that we keep up a +steady gait and sprint at the end." + +"My system was all right, wasn't it?" demanded George. + +"It surely was. You didn't count on the paddle breaking, though." + +"Oh, yes, I did. I knew that if you exerted all your strength that any +paddle would snap; that's the reason I wanted you to save it until the +end. Suppose you'd cut loose over the other side of the island and the +paddle had broken there. We'd have been in a nice fix, wouldn't we?" and +George winked solemnly at their three visitors who seemed much amused at +his efforts to secure a rise from his companion. + +"Oh, dry up!" exclaimed Fred shortly, and George laughed gleefully at +having accomplished his purpose. + +Meanwhile the two other canoes were rounding the first turn. + +"Sprint, John! Sprint!" Grant urged the moment they had started. "Catch +up to them and hang right on to them all the way around." + +Paddling with all their strength Grant and John succeeded in catching up +with their opponents. When the bow of their canoe was within a few feet +of the stern of the other they eased up a bit and contenting themselves +with allowing their rivals to set the pace, they kept their position +with bulldog determination. + +Thomas and Hugh sprinted. Grant and John followed suit. If the leading +canoe slackened its pace the one behind did the same. Like a shadow the +two Go Ahead boys dogged their opponents' course. + +Such a proceeding always worries the leader. To know that a step behind +him is some one who follows him like grim death and who cannot be shaken +off by any means whatsoever, is bound to have its effect in the long +run. The pace-maker is irritated and bewildered and sometimes +demoralization follows as a result. + +Grant was aware of this and he intended to make the most of it. He knew +that if Thomas and Hugh discovered that it was out of the question to +pull away from the pursuing canoe their confidence would be shaken and +once this quality is lost, a great asset is gone. + +It is easier to follow the pace than to make it. Another advantage is +that the one behind can watch his opponent and note everything that he +does. The leader, on the other hand, cannot tell what his rival intends +to do and must always be on his guard lest he be taken by surprise. + +Thomas and Hugh worked desperately. Evidently they had decided that +their best chance was to tire out the boys in the canoe that followed +them so relentlessly. With this object in view they started a sprint +when they had covered about one-third of the course and they kept it up. +Their team-mates had tried to sprint the entire distance, and failed. +Could these two do it? George and Fred had been content to allow their +rivals to gain on them, but not so Grant and John. Their one idea was to +hang on and hang on and hang on, until the time should come when an +opportunity offered itself for a quick dash into the lead. This chance +had not yet presented itself. + +The four boys worked like demons. Down the whole length of the island +they raced, neck and neck. The same amount of open water showed between +the two canoes all the way along. It almost looked as if the first canoe +was towing the other. Maintaining these same positions they approached +the last turn. + +"Now, String!" said Grant in a low voice. "When they take this curve, +I'm going to shoot in between them and the shore. Be ready." + +"All right," replied John, without looking up from his task for an +instant. + +The leading canoe now turned and began to round the point of the island. +Close behind them followed Grant and John. Thomas and Hugh were not far +from shore, so that Grant would not have much room to pass, if indeed +such a thing was possible. Just before the canoes entered the +straightaway leading to the finish line, the two Go Ahead boys made +their bid for the lead. + +Grant in the stern swung the canoe in between the other and the shore. +The space was limited but their chance had come. It was now or never. + +"Now, String!" cried Grant. "Let 'em have it!" + +It seemed impossible that the two boys could work any harder than they +had been. Every one seems to have some reserve strength, however, no +matter how much he may have used before, and it was this store that +Grant and John called upon now. + +Inch by inch they crept up. Soon Thomas from the stern of his canoe +could see out of the corner of his eye the bow of the blue team's canoe. + +"Paddle, Hugh!" he cried. "Paddle for all you're worth!" + +It was a desperate contest, but Grant and John were not to be denied. +The difference that setting the pace or following it made, was just +enough to give them a slight advantage. As far as skill and strength +were concerned, the four boys were remarkably well matched. + +Down the home stretch they dashed, and little by little Grant and John +gained. They gained steadily also, and it was evident that if the course +were long enough they would be returned winners. But could they catch +and pass their rivals before the finish line was reached? That was what +worried Fred and George, who screamed themselves hoarse in their +eagerness to spur their comrades on. + +No open water showed between the boats now. A few yards more and the red +team was but three-quarters of a length ahead. Soon this was reduced to +half a length and still Grant and John gained. The line was but a few +yards distant now however. Could they do it? + +The veins stood out on their foreheads. Between their clenched teeth +their breath came in gasps. Still they struggled on, still they gained +slowly, almost imperceptibly and nearer and nearer they came to the +finish. + +"If the course was only a few yards longer," groaned George as he +watched the stirring finish from the canoe. + +A moment later and the two racers were almost on even terms. It was +nearly impossible to tell which one was in the lead now, so evenly were +they matched. The tape was only a few feet away. With one final effort +the four young racers urged their canoes forward; they broke the tape +and shot on past. The race was over. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIX--A CLOSE SHAVE + + + +"Well!" exclaimed George. "I never saw anything to beat that!" + +"Who won?" demanded Fred. + +"Don't ask me. I'm not the judge." + +The boys turned and looked at Mr. Maxwell who was seated in the other +canoe with Franklin and Herbert. His face was turned towards the two +canoes which had just flashed across the finish line. He wore a puzzled +expression and was evidently at a loss what to say. + +"Who won?" called George. + +Mr. Maxwell turned and looked at the speaker sorrowfully. "No one," he +said. + +"No one," exclaimed George. "Why, how can that be?" + +"Couldn't it be a tie?" asked Fred quietly. + +"Why, yes, of course. I hadn't planned for a tie though." + +"I declare the race a tie," announced the judge solemnly. "If either +boat was ahead of the other, I'm sure I didn't see it, and I wouldn't +dare call it anything else." + +The racers had turned around and were now making their way slowly back. +All four of the boys were well nigh exhausted, but they were smiling +nevertheless. + +"Who won?" called Thomas, for they had not heard the judge's verdict. + +"It was a tie," said George. + +"A tie?" exclaimed Grant, his face falling. "That's bad." + +"Why is it?" demanded George. + +"Because we needed the points." + +"By the way," exclaimed Hugh, "how do we award the points?" + +"Split them, don't we?" said Fred readily, appealing to Mr. Maxwell. + +"Each team gets one and a half. Two for first and one for second makes a +total of three, and a half of three is one and a half." + +"Whew!" whistled George. "You certainly are quick at figures." + +A general laugh went up at Fred's expense but he did not seem to mind. + +"That's the way it's figured out anyway," said Mr. Maxwell. "That makes +the total points three and a half for the red team and two and a half +for the blue." + +"Still one point behind," exclaimed Grant. "We'll have to get that back +somehow." + +"Well," said Thomas, "the swimming race comes next and three places +count in that. Three for first, two for second, and one for third; +you'll have a fine chance to catch us there." + +"I was just thinking," interrupted Mr. Maxwell, "that it might be a good +idea to reverse the order of these last two events. You boys are pretty +well tired out after that canoe race and to swim a hundred and +seventy-five yards now would be quite a severe strain. What do you say +to our having the sailing race next?" + +"Why," said Grant slowly, "I don't see any objection to that. What do +the rest of you fellows think about it?" + +"How about dinner?" exclaimed George. "We could never finish by the time +we had planned to eat and I must say I'm hungry right now." + +"So am I," said Hugh so earnestly that everyone laughed. + +"Why don't we have dinner right now then?" suggested Mr. Maxwell. "As +soon as we are through we can start the sailing race." + +"That's a good scheme," exclaimed Grant. "Let's do that." + +"And have the swimming race after the sailing?" queried Thomas. + +"That's right," said Grant. "The water's more apt to be quiet later in +the day than it is now and that will make it better for swimming." + +"Very true," agreed Mr. Maxwell. "The wind often seems to go down with +the sun and if the wind goes down the water becomes still." + +Without further delay they made their way ashore and preparations for +dinner were at once started. Grant usually did all the cooking, but +to-day he had an abundance of help. Wood was quickly gathered and a +blazing fire was soon under way. + +Two of the boys were set to work peeling potatoes which were to be fried +in the pan. Others made ready the dishes and collected the knives and +forks. Mr. Maxwell had several good sized bass he had caught before +breakfast, and, what was even better, he had brought along a dozen and a +half ears of green corn, two for everyone present. Was it any wonder +that the young campers' eyes sparkled with anticipation as they saw the +dinner being prepared? + +Their appetites were keen as only those in the woods can understand. The +fragrant odor of sizzling bacon and roasting corn coming to their +nostrils only served to increase their eagerness. + +"Isn't this great?" cried George enthusiastically, when at last dinner +was announced as ready and the pleasant task of disposing of it had +begun. "If anything can beat this, I'd like to know what it is." + +"There is nothing that can tie it even," laughed Mr. Maxwell, who seemed +to be enjoying himself as much as any of the boys. + +"I only hope Pop won't eat so much, he'll sink the Balsam," said Fred +doubtfully. "We have plenty of ballast aboard as it is." + +"You 'tend to your own dinner," advised George very promptly. "I'm too +busy to waste any time talking to you now." + +At last the meal was over, and every one had had sufficient to eat. + +"All ready to start the race?" inquired Mr. Maxwell. + +"Oh," groaned Franklin, "I don't feel as if I could move. I'd rather +crawl off somewhere and go to sleep. I guess I ate too much." + +"I _know_ I did," laughed John. + +"We'd better start though, I guess," urged Grant. "The course is long +and while there's a good breeze now you can't tell how long it will +last." + +"That's right," agreed Mr. Maxwell. "You'd better get ready." + +The boys at once made their way to their respective boats and made the +final preparations for the race. Both boats had had their sails up all +the morning in order to dry them out thoroughly and there was very +little left to be done. + +Mr. Maxwell sat in a canoe near at hand and watched the boys. + +"Remember," he said, "twice around the course. The first lap you go one +way and the second in the opposite. Be very careful to round every +stake. The start is from the same spot as the canoe race and the finish +is there, too. I will fire this pistol as a warning gun, and three +minutes later I will fire it again for the start. Be sure not to cross +the starting line before I give the second signal." + +"All right," said Grant. "We're all ready." + +"So are we," echoed Thomas from the Spruce. + +"Very well then," said Mr. Maxwell. "Get your anchors up and move out by +the starting line." + +This was soon done and a few moments later the two catboats were +jockeying back and forth off the entrance to the little harbor. Fred was +at the tiller of the Balsam and Hugh guided the Spruce. + +The sharp crack of the pistol announced that the race was about to +start. Grant had been waiting, watch in hand, for this signal. + +"Take a short tack out and back, Fred," he urged. "I'll watch the time." + +"Hard-a-lea!" called Fred as he put the tiller over and the Balsam came +around into the wind. His crew quickly shifted sides, the sheet was +hauled taut, and the trim little boat scudded swiftly along before the +fresh breeze. + +"Better go back now," advised Grant when they had covered fifteen or +twenty yards. He scarcely lifted his eyes from his watch which he still +held in his right hand. "We've got a minute and a half more." + +Once more the Balsam came about and began to retrace its short course +towards the starting line. The Spruce was just off its starboard side, +with bow pointing directly into the wind and consequently was almost +stationary. + +"We'll cross the line too soon," exclaimed John nervously. "We'll have +to come back if we do." + +"Leave that to me," said Grant confidently, his eyes still on the +second-hand of his watch. "I'll look out for that." + +"We're not a dozen feet from the line now though," cried John in alarm. +"You'd better come around, Fred." + +"Don't you do it," exclaimed Grant sharply. + +Closer and closer to the line they came. John, and for that matter Fred +and George also were intensely nervous for fear they should cross the +line before the signal. Grant, however, seemed confident that they were +on the safe side. + +"We'll have to turn around and start all--" began John, when Grant +suddenly interrupted him. + +"Now," he cried, and barely the fraction of a second behind his voice +came the sound of the starting gun. Almost simultaneously the Balsam +crossed the line; away to a splendid start and with a good lead of at +least fifteen or twenty feet on the Spruce. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XX--GEORGE SURPRISES HIS FRIENDS + + + +"I take it all back, Grant," exclaimed John. "You're all right." + +"It was certainly close though," said Fred solemnly. + +"But 'close' doesn't count in any game, you know," laughed Grant. + +"How about quoits?" inquired George. + +"That's right, Pop," exclaimed Grant, "it does count in quoits, but I +don't know of any other." + +"We'd better attend to our sailing," warned Fred. "Trim that sheet in a +little, String." + +"That enough?" + +"All right," said Fred. "My, I hope this breeze holds." + +"It's getting stronger, I think," said George. + +"It does seem to be," agreed Grant. "It's dead ahead of us now, but if +it doesn't change, it'll be right behind us on the last leg of the race. +I think it's always fun to be able to finish straight before the wind." + +"That's true," exclaimed John. "We go in the opposite direction the +second round, don't we?" + +The Balsam was skimming over the water rapidly on a long tack to +leeward. Behind her came the Spruce, also making good time and with +about the same distance between the two boats that had separated them at +the start. + +"They're pointing up a little more than we are, I think," remarked +Grant, after a glance at their rival. + +"We're all right, though," said Fred confidently. "I don't believe in +sailing as close hauled as that." + +"Perhaps not," agreed Grant. "At any rate you know more about it than +the rest of us. We'll have to do as you say whether we like it or not." + +They rounded the first stake thirty yards ahead of the Spruce. Fred's +tactics on the first leg had proved successful, anyway. + +"It's easy," exclaimed George confidently, as they slid past the stake +and settled back for the long reach to the next mark. + +"Don't talk like that, Pop," urged John earnestly. "Don't ever boast or +get overconfident; you're sure to regret it if you do." + +"Knock on wood, Pop," laughed Fred. "That'll take away all the bad +effects." + +The four friends were in excellent spirits, for they enjoyed a +comfortable lead which seemed to be steadily increasing. + +"There they come around the stake now," exclaimed Grant, gazing behind +them. "They gave it a little more room than we did." + +"And consequently sailed a little bit farther than necessary," added +Fred. "A few feet doesn't seem very much at the time but in the long run +it amounts to a good deal." + +"On the other hand," said John, "if you cut too close to the stake +you're apt to foul it and then you're disqualified." + +"The answer to that is easy enough," laughed Fred. "Don't hit it." + +"You fellows take more chances than I would," said John doubtfully. "I +believe in playing safe." + +Steadily the Balsam drew away from her rival. The wind was strong now +and the lake was dotted with white-caps. + +"Perhaps the Balsam is a rough-water sailor," remarked Grant. "At any +rate she seems to be doing splendidly in this breeze." + +"If the breeze should die down they'd probably catch right up to us," +said Fred. "Let's hope it doesn't." + +"What makes you think they'd catch us?" demanded John. + +"Nothing. Some boats sail better in one kind of a breeze than in others. +This seems to be suited to a strong wind and I thought it was possible +that the Spruce would do better in a light one." + +"But they're exactly alike," objected John. + +"I know it," replied Fred. "That doesn't necessarily mean they'll sail +just alike, though. I've seen ten boats all built on the same model, the +same size, and everything about them the same, and yet some of them seem +to be twice as fast as others." + +"It must be in the one who handles the boat, then," said George. + +"Not at all. I've seen them swap crews and the same boats win." + +"How do you explain it?" inquired Grant, who always liked to have a +reason for everything. + +"I can't, and I don't believe any one else can, either. Some boats seem +to do well under certain conditions, and that's all there is to it." + +"Well, the present conditions seem to suit the Balsam pretty well," +exclaimed George. "Let's hope they continue." + +The second stake was reached with the Balsam still farther in the lead +than before. The wind steadily increased in strength and forced the +sturdy little catboat through the water at an amazing speed. + +"I didn't know she could go so fast," exclaimed John enthusiastically. + +"None of us did, I guess," said Grant. "She's all right though, isn't +she?" + +"I should say so," cried George. "Say, just look at her go," and he +scrambled over to the other side of the boat. The Balsam was heeled far +over and the lee rail was awash. Now and then a wave, a little larger +than its fellows, slapped lustily against the side and covered the crew +with spray. + +"We'll have to reef her if this wind gets much stronger," said Fred just +before they had completed the first round. + +"What's the use?" demanded George. "It's great this way, and we're +certainly gaining on those fellows all the time." + +"Yes," said Fred, "but you don't want to lose the mast, do you?" + +"Or we might upset," added Grant. + +"Suppose we do," cried George. "It won't hurt us." + +"But we'd lose the race just the same," said Fred. "Let that sheet out a +little there, String. Whenever she heels over like that, give her a +little more rope and I'll bring her up into the wind for a second." + +"That makes us lose time, doesn't it?" asked Grant. + +"I think so. It seems to me that if we stopped and put a reef in the +sail we'd sail more evenly and as a result we'd go faster." + +"Those fellows in the Spruce don't seem to be putting in any reefs, I +notice," remarked George. "If they don't need them I don't see why we +do." + +"But the breeze is getting so much stronger," insisted Fred. "It really +seems to me that we should put in one reef anyway." + +"How long will it take us?" + +"Not two minutes. We can do it in no time." + +"We'd better wait until we round this next stake, I think," said Grant. +"We can do it, then." + +"All right," agreed George. "I don't believe in it, though. I love it +this way," and he exclaimed delightedly as the Balsam heeled far over +and the spray from the crest of one of the white-caps drenched him from +head to foot. + +"It's cold, though," objected John. + +"Nonsense," cried George. "If you were half a man you wouldn't mind it." + +John merely shivered, and placing Grant in temporary charge of the sheet +he crawled forward and drawing his sweater out from under the deck, he +put it on. + +"Get ready now," warned Fred. "The stake is just ahead." + +"And we're going to take in a reef as soon as we round it. Is that +right?" inquired Grant. + +"That's the idea," said Fred. "Here we go," and putting the tiller hard +over he brought the Balsam cleanly around the mark and headed her up +into the wind. + +"Let go that topping lift, Pop!" he cried. "Loose your halyards there, +Grant! Now, String, let's get busy!" + +He left his post, and ordering and helping his comrades, he took charge +of the work of reefing. He had predicted two minutes for the work, but +it took at least five, and before they had finished the Spruce was +almost up to them. + +"Hurry, Fred, hurry!" urged George. "They're catching us." + +"All right," cried Fred, springing back to the tiller. "Haul in your +sheet there, String!" + +The bow of the Balsam swung slowly around and as the sail filled she +began to slip through the water once more. Not twenty-five yards behind +them now came the Spruce, her full sail spread. Thomas waved his hand +and shouted something to the four Go Ahead boys but the wind blew the +sound away and the words were lost. + +"What did he say?" demanded John. + +"I didn't hear," said George. "He probably said they'd catch us in a few +minutes, and I guess they will, too." + +"You're a pessimist, Pop," said Fred, but he looked back anxiously at +the Spruce plowing along behind them. + +"No, I'm not either," exclaimed George. "I do think we made a mistake in +reefing that sail, though." + +"Wait and see," said Fred, but he himself appeared to be anxious. + +"If the wind should die down we'd be in a nice fix," said George in a +discouraged tone of voice. + +"It doesn't seem to be going down now, though," said Grant. "Just see us +go! And look at all the white-caps. I really think we're doing better +than we did before." + +"But we're not gaining on them any more," insisted George gloomily. + +"We don't need to," laughed Grant. "All we have to do is to hold our +lead." + +The relative position of the two boats was unchanged at the end of the +first leg on the second round. The Balsam still enjoyed her lead of +twenty-five yards over her rival. They had covered only a short distance +on the second leg when George suddenly remarked that the wind was dying +down. + +"I know it is," he insisted. "Just look; we aren't tipping half as much +as we were." + +"I hope you're wrong, Pop," said Fred anxiously. + +"But I'm not. Can't you see it yourself?" + +"Perhaps you're right. At any rate it may only be a lull." + +In silence the four young sailors watched the sail and looked out over +the water and gazed fearfully at the Spruce so close behind them now. + +"She's gaining," announced John. + +"No doubt of it," said George. "What shall we do?" + +"What can we do?" demanded John in despair. + +"Can't we take the reef out?" + +"If we did," said Fred, "we'd have to stop, and they'd surely pass us, +and whether we'd ever catch them or not would be a question." + +"But won't they pass us if we don't take the reef out?" demanded George. + +"I don't know. We've got to take a chance either way." + +"And no matter what we do," added George, "we're bound to lose." + +"Cheer up, Pop," urged Grant. "The wind hasn't gone down very much and +they haven't passed us yet." + +"Can't we take the reef out while we're going like this?" demanded +George. + +"Oh, we can," said Fred. "It would be awfully hard, though, and +dangerous, too; besides that, we might tear the sail." + +"Let me try it," begged George. "We mustn't lose this race and that's +all there is about it." + +Working under Fred's guidance, and taking desperate chances George +finally succeeded in shaking the reef out of the sail. The halyards were +tightened and once again the Balsam moved along under her full spread of +canvas. + +"Now I feel better," sighed George, as he settled back in the cockpit +once more. "That short sail worried me." + +"We certainly lost a lot of time fooling around there," observed Fred. +"It was all my fault, too." + +"Forget it," exclaimed Grant. "We're still ahead of them, aren't we?" + +"But not much," said Fred, and he glanced hastily around at the Spruce +not more than fifteen yards distant now. + +"I hope they don't get our wind," said George. "It's certainly going +down and we need every bit of it we can get." + +"You're right, Pop," said John. "The wind is lighter and you know what +Fred said about the Spruce probably doing better than the Balsam in a +light breeze." + +Still maintaining their slight advantage the Balsam turned the last +stake and started down the home stretch. The wind was dead astern of +both boats now and the sails were stretched at right angles to the mast +in order to get the full benefit of the breeze. + +"They'll blanket us, I'm afraid," muttered Fred gloomily. + +"What do you mean by that?" asked George. + +"Why, they'll get right behind us and shut off all our wind." + +"Don't let them do it, then." + +"You don't think I'd let them on purpose, do you?" + +"They'll catch us on this straight away, I'm afraid," said Grant in a +low voice. The boats were so close together now it was necessary to +speak softly to keep from being overheard. + +"Everybody move back towards the stern," ordered Fred. "Perhaps if we +get her bow out of water a little she'll do better." + +They followed Fred's directions, but little by little the Spruce crept +up on them. The wind was dropping rapidly; it seemed that on this +woodland lake storms and winds came and went with equal facility. + +The Spruce had blanketed their boat momentarily as Fred had predicted. +Drawing even, however, the Balsam once more caught the breeze and the +racers moved forward on even terms. + +"We certainly have some great finishes, don't we?" called Hugh from the +other boat. + +"Well, I should say so!" exclaimed Grant. "They're heartbreaking." + +All at once George left his seat and moved forward. + +"Where are you going, Pop?" demanded Fred. "You'd better come back here +and sit down." + +George, however, paid no attention to this advice nor did he deign any +answer. He continued serenely on his way until his reached the forward +deck. Straightening himself up, his amazed companions saw him place his +right hand on the mast and scratch it with his finger-nails. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXI--HOW THE PLAN WORKED + + + +"He's gone crazy," muttered Grant. "What does he think he's doing?" + +George, having completed his strange performance, returned to the stern +of the Balsam and quietly resumed his seat. + +"What were you trying to do?" demanded John curiously. + +"I scratched the mast." + +"I know you did. Why did you do it?" + +"To give us more breeze." + +"I suppose scratching the mast is going to make the wind blow," and John +laughed loudly. "I think you're crazy, Pop." + +"Wait and see," said George calmly. "I remember that I once read +somewhere about sailors scratching the mast when they wanted a breeze, +so I thought I'd try it. We need to try everything if we want to win +this race. They're ahead of us now." + +"All right," smiled John. "I guess you didn't do any harm anyway." + +"That's the way I figured," exclaimed George. "All sailors are +superstitious and they believe in those things. As long as we're +sailing, why don't we try them ourselves?" + +"Where's your breeze?" demanded Grant. + +"There it comes," said George, pointing astern of them. A puff of wind +was approaching and a patch of the water could be seen to be ruffled by +its breath. A moment later it struck the Balsam and in answer the little +catboat increased its speed. + +"Why won't the breeze help them as much as it does us?" inquired Fred. + +"We'll hope they won't get any of it," said George. "You notice that +that last puff didn't hit them and that we gained a little by it." + +"It's certainly close," said Grant. "We don't want another tie, though, +and we don't want second place, either." + +"Only a quarter of a mile to go," said Fred. "We'll need more wind." + +"Scratch the mast again, Pop," urged John. + +George did so and another gust of wind caught them and drove them along +a little faster. + +"Isn't that queer?" exclaimed Grant. "It seems to work though. Try it +again, Pop." + +Again George scratched the mast and once more a puff of wind caught +their sail. The Balsam was now several feet ahead of her rival and +rapidly approaching the finish. + +"Don't do it any more, Pop," urged Fred. "At least don't do it as long +as we are ahead. If they catch up to us try it again. Of course it's all +luck, but it is certainly strange, isn't it?" + +"It surely is," agreed John. "How do you account for it?" + +"You can't account for it," exclaimed Grant. "You don't suppose that +scratching the mast really makes the wind blow, do you? It has just +happened that way, that's all." + +Nearer and nearer the two boats came to the finish. Waiting for them was +Mr. Maxwell, seated in one of the canoes, on a line with the tape. + +"A little more sheet, String," said Fred. "That'll do." + +"They're almost up to us," whispered John, doing as Fred had ordered. +"Let Pop scratch the mast again." + +George was eagerly awaiting a signal to do this very thing. Fred nodded +to him, and using both hands this time George scratched the mast +lustily. Call it coincidence or luck or whatever you like, a strong puff +of wind struck the Balsam almost immediately. She heeled over and for +the first time in a half-hour made such speed that it was possible to +hear the water rippling under her bow. + +"Here we go!" cried George lustily, and with a rush the Balsam swept +forward and crossed the line a good six feet ahead of their rival. + +"Balsam wins!" shouted Mr. Maxwell, and a hearty cheer for the victor +was immediately given by the crew of the defeated boat. + +"How did you like my stunt?" grinned George proudly, addressing his +remarks to his three companions. "Any time you want to win a sailing +race just come to me and I'll tell you how to do it." + +"Huh!" snorted Fred, "I suppose you'll have a big head for the next year +on account of that." + +"Look here, Fred," exclaimed George, winking at his other friends. "I +wouldn't say very much if I were you. You insisted upon reefing the sail +and as a result we nearly lost the race; if it hadn't been for my great +brain and cleverness we surely would have been beaten. However, as long +as it turned out the way it did I will forgive you." + +"I made an error of judgment and yours was nothing but luck," retorted +Fred. "I want you to remember that, too." + +The boats were now returning to their moorings and when they had been +made fast the crews went ashore and met on the dock to talk things over. + +"You boys certainly have the closest finishes I've ever seen," exclaimed +Mr. Maxwell. "You don't try to fix them that way, do you?" + +"Not if we can help it, I tell you," said Thomas laughingly. "I thought +we were going to win this last race." + +"So did we," exclaimed Grant. "You would have won, too, if it hadn't +been for George here. At least that's what he says, anyway." + +"What did he do?" inquired Mr. Maxwell curiously. + +"I scratched the mast," said George. + +"'Scratched the mast'!" exclaimed Mr. Maxwell. "Why did you do that?" + +"To bring us more wind." + +"You must be superstitious," laughed Mr. Maxwell. + +"Well," said George, "I never used to be, but I am sort of that way now; +it worked so beautifully." + +"Where did you ever hear of such a thing?" + +"I read about it in some book and as things looked pretty desperate for +us I thought I'd try it." + +"You mean to say that all you have to do when you want a breeze is to go +up and scratch the mast?" + +"Oh, I don't think it would work every time," laughed George. "I guess +it will give you help only when you need it very badly. If you tried it +all the time I suppose you'd soon wear out the charm." + +"Well, you won, anyway," said Mr. Maxwell laughingly. "That makes you +all tied with four and a half points for each team. The swimming race +will have to decide it." + +"Is every one ready for that now?" asked Grant. + +"The red team is ready for anything," laughed Thomas. + +"All right," said Mr. Maxwell. "The race will start just as soon as +possible and remember that the points will be decided, three for first, +two for second, and one for third this time." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXII--A STRANGE PERFORMANCE + + + +A course had been measured one hundred and seventy-five yards in length. +The start was from a large rock that stood out of the water some fifteen +yards off shore and the finish was at the dock. + +The contestants made their way to the starting point by way of the +shore; at least they walked until they came to a spot directly opposite +the big rock and then waded out as far as possible, swimming the last +few yards. Before many moments had elapsed the eight boys were lined up +in a row waiting for the signal. Mr. Maxwell stood on the dock, a pistol +in his hand. + +"We're counting on you, Grant," John had said as they walked along the +shore. "You've simply got to win." + +"Suppose I do," said Grant. "That'll mean three points for us and unless +we take one of the other places, too, that'll give the red team three +points. If that happens the meet will end in a tie." + +"Maybe George can get a place. He's not a bad swimmer, you know." + +"I know he isn't, but you're just as good yourself." + +"The trouble is we've never seen these other fellows swim and we have no +idea whether they're any good or not." + +"Well, if we do our best we shan't have any reason to kick, I guess," +laughed Grant. + +He was far and away the best swimmer of the four Go Ahead boys, and so +often had he proved his superiority over them that it was now taken for +granted. He was the only one who had mastered the crawl stroke. He knew +it so well that it was almost second nature to him now, but to his three +companions it still remained a mystery. That it is not an easy thing to +acquire will be vouched for by any one who has attempted it. Fred was a +wretched swimmer and knew perfectly well that he stood no chance in the +race; he entered merely because he did not wish to miss anything. John +and George were about on a par, both of them good average performers, +but nothing more. + +"All ready?" shouted Mr. Maxwell through his megaphone. + +"Everybody ready?" asked Thomas. + +Every one said he was and Thomas waved his hand to the judge. All eyes +were fixed upon the figure standing on the dock, his right arm upraised +with the pistol in his hand. + +They had not long to wait. A flash and then the sharp report of the +revolver, and almost together eight gleaming white bodies hit the water. +Fred was the one exception; his position had been next to George and +when the signal for the start was given he had been a trifle slow in +diving. + +A mad scramble ensued the moment all the contestants were in the water +together and there was much splashing and confusion. Fred was behind the +others and consequently bore the brunt of the whole mixup. He had not +taken two strokes when George, who was ahead of him, struck him +violently in the stomach with his foot. + +It was a powerful blow and well nigh knocked all the wind right out of +Fred's body. "Ugh!" he groaned and sank from sight. + +George turned in alarm to see who it was that had been on the receiving +end of his effort and was just in time to see Fred reappear puffing and +gasping. This sight seemed to tickle George immensely and he began to +laugh. Fred choked and gargled and wheezed and try as he would, George +could not control his laughter. + +Meanwhile the other six contestants were far ahead and one glance +convinced George that he and Fred were hopelessly out of the race. + +"What's the matter with you?" exclaimed Fred angrily. + +"I didn't mean to kick you," said George, and once more he burst into +loud and uncontrollable laughter. + +"I'm not talking about that," cried Fred even more aroused by the +spectacle of his friend's mirth. "Why did you drop out of the race?" + +"I got laughing so when I saw your face that I forgot all about the race +and everything else. I never saw such a funny sight in all my life." + +"Huh," snorted Fred. "You're a nice one. We'll probably lose the meet on +account of you." + +"I couldn't help it," cried George, and once more he began to laugh. "I +just started laughing and I couldn't stop." + +"Come ashore before you drown, you idiot!" exclaimed Fred, and side by +side they made their way to land. + +The other contestants were now strung out in a long line. Grant was +easily in the lead and it seemed a foregone conclusion that he would win +the race. Like some great fish he plowed through the water. His feet +worked fast and evenly while his hands reached out with a great sweep +and drove him speedily along. His face was under water most of the time; +every few strokes he rolled over on one side, sucked in a great mouthful +of air and then continued as before. + +The real race was for second place and there were three in it. Hugh, +Thomas, and John went along almost abreast. John could see that Grant +would win the race easily enough, but he realized that in order to win +the meet it was necessary for him to finish at least third. He was a +good swimmer but was not a racer. Many times he had covered long +distances in the water but had paid scant attention to developing his +speed. + +He used a powerful overhand stroke and when he was moving slowly he was +practically tireless. He now was worried, however. He did not dare look +around to see where George was for fear he might lose a few precious +inches. He did not expect to see Fred, for he knew that his small +comrade was a very poor swimmer. He had considered himself and George +about on a par and he wondered how it could have happened that he had +outdistanced him so far. Had he known the truth undoubtedly he would +have been just as angry as Fred had been and his speed certainly would +not have been benefited as a result. + +Ahead of him he saw Grant and ahead of Grant he spied the dock and Mr. +Maxwell standing on it waiting. It seemed very far away. Beside him swam +Hugh and Thomas, one on his right and the other on his left. They were +breathing hard and splashing heavily, but still they did not seem to be +slowing up. + +John put forth every effort. He too was becoming short of wind and his +arms and legs began to feel the strain. It had been a hard day and this +last contest was a severe test for all the boys. + +"I must beat one of them! I must! I must!" John kept saying to himself +over and over again. Then the next time he saw his rivals Thomas was +several feet ahead of him and gaining. + +John groaned. Hugh still kept abreast of him and try as hard as he could +John seemed powerless to shake him off. He gritted his teeth and strove +desperately to make his arms go still faster. Nature could not be forced +however; his arms seemed made of lead and every time he raised them he +wondered if it would not be the last. + +Far ahead he saw Grant only a few feet from the dock. Thomas, too, was +many yards in advance of him now. "I simply can't keep it up any +longer," thought John, and the next instant, "Don't quit," he told +himself, and he forced his tired muscles to carry him along a few +strokes more. He set his jaw determinedly and decided he'd keep it up +till he reached the dock no matter what happened later. + +Suddenly an idea struck him. "Perhaps Hugh is just as tired as I am," he +thought. "In that case all I have to do is to keep on swimming at a +moderate pace and I'll beat him." + +Hugh was certainly splashing more than he had been and evidently was in +trouble. "I'll get him yet," thought John and for a moment he felt +stronger. "I've forgotten the others though," he suddenly realized and +the fear that some one would creep past him before the finish assailed +him all at once. He decided to roll over on his back and look. + +He did so and behind him he saw only two swimmers. They were not near +enough to be dangerous however and John did not even recognize them. +That two of the contestants were missing he did not notice at all. + +Often when swimming long distances he had turned over up on his back in +order to rest and now he was surprised to find how even a few strokes in +that position relieved his aching muscles. The finish was close at hand +now, however, and he dared not continue in that fashion any longer. He +rolled over and resumed his overhand stroke. + +Grant was already on the dock standing beside Mr. Maxwell. Thomas had +just reached the goal and was pulling himself up out of the water. To +his surprise John noticed that in spite of the fact that he had been +swimming on his back Hugh had not gained anything on him. His brief rest +had refreshed him considerably and with added confidence he struck out +for the finish. Without really noticing it he was aware that Hugh was +floundering more than ever. He did not turn to look, however, but +concentrated every effort on his swimming, and still struggled on +towards the goal. + +He lost sight of Hugh; he saw nothing but the dock ahead of him. His +lungs cried for mercy and his muscles ached, but vigorously he still +kept going. After what seemed centuries he reached the dock, not knowing +whether he had beaten Hugh out or not. In fact he did not care much now. +He had gained the dock at last and he was happy. + +He raised his eyes to look about him and what he saw was very strange +indeed. Mr. Maxwell, standing fully clothed on the dock, suddenly dove +right over his head into the water. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII--AN UNEXPECTED HONOR + + + +Tired as he was John realized that this was strange proceeding. He tried +to pull himself up on the dock, but he was too weak and slipped back +into the water. + +"Grant," he called, "give me a lift." + +"Come ahead," cried Grant, bending over and extending his hand to John. + +With this help the tired boy lifted himself out of the water and sank +down on the dock almost completely exhausted. He lay flat on his back, +his eyes closed. + +"Where's Hugh?" he panted. "Did I beat him?" + +There was no answer. + +"Grant," said John. "Did I beat Hugh?" + +Still no reply, and he opened his eyes to see what the reason for the +silence was. He slowly raised himself to one elbow and looked about him. +Black spots danced before his eyes and at first he saw nothing; then his +eyes suddenly became accustomed to the surroundings and he gasped. For +the moment he had forgotten that he had seen Mr. Maxwell jump into the +water but he remembered it now and he saw the reason for it. + +Grant had finished the race and not greatly tired had been standing +alongside Mr. Maxwell watching the others approach. The race between +John and Hugh was what interested them most for they saw that Thomas +would finish an easy second and so the final outcome of the meet +depended on these two. + +"A pretty tight race," remarked Grant. + +"I should--" began Mr. Maxwell when he suddenly stopped and stared. + +John had just turned over on his stomach again for the final dash. Hugh +was at his shoulder and the onlookers were enjoying the close finish. +Suddenly, however, Hugh disappeared from sight. He simply sank beneath +the water with no warning whatsoever and John reached the dock alone. + +"He's exhausted," cried Mr. Maxwell, and without waiting an instant he +dived into the water, fully clothed as he was, to rescue his nephew. + +When John opened his eyes he saw Mr. Maxwell in the water, swimming for +the dock with one hand and holding Hugh by the hair of his head with the +other. + +"What's the trouble, Grant?" demanded John. + +"Hugh sank." + +"What was the matter with him?" + +"He was tired out, I guess. Here, let me have him now," he said to Mr. +Maxwell and leaning out from the dock he seized Hugh by the arms. His +uncle gave the half-drowned boy a boost and he was soon stretched out at +full length on the little wharf. + +"That was a close call," exclaimed Mr. Maxwell grimly as he clambered +out after him. "It's a lucky thing he was so near the dock. Where are +the rest of the boys?" + +"Here are two of them," said Grant as Franklin and Herbert swam +leisurely up to the dock. Seeing that they were hopelessly beaten they +had not exerted themselves the last seventy-five yards of the race. + +"Where are the other two?" exclaimed John anxiously. He had recovered +most of his breath and strength now and not seeing George or Fred was +fearful lest the fate that Hugh had so narrowly escaped had befallen +them. + +"Turn around and you'll see." + +George and Fred came walking towards the dock. + +"Where did you two come from?" demanded John in surprise. "The last I +saw of you was when we all dived off that rock together. How did you get +up on shore that way?" + +"Have you ever been kicked by a mule?" asked Fred. + +"What are you talking about?" John was completely mystified. + +"I asked if you'd ever been kicked by a mule." + +"What has that got to do with this race?" + +"Simply this," said Fred. "A mule kicked me in the stomach at the start +of the race and I had to quit." + +"I think you're crazy," exclaimed John. "What happened to you, Pop?" + +"He was the mule," said Fred. "Who won the race anyway?" + +"Tell us what you're talking about first," said John, beginning to get a +little bit angry. "Stop talking in riddles." + +Fred explained how his stomach had come in contact with George's foot +and how, as a result, they had both been compelled to give up the race. +The tale provided much amusement to the listeners and even Hugh, who had +partly revived, joined in the laughter. + +"I'm no mule though," insisted George. + +"You've got a kick like one just the same," laughed Fred. "Tell me," he +continued, "who won the race." + +"Grant won," replied Mr. Maxwell. + +"Good work, Grant," cried Fred. "Who was second?" + +"Thomas." + +"When you tell me who was third you'll also tell me whether we won the +meet or not. Who was it?" + +"John was third," said Grant. + +"John?" exclaimed George in mock surprise. "It can't be possible." + +"Don't get so fresh," said John and he gave George a violent push which +sent him flying off the end of the wharf into the water. + +"Serves him right," said Fred approvingly. "He's very much too fresh." + +George came to the surface, gasping and choking. + +"Congratulations, String," he cried as soon as he had shaken the water +out of his eyes. "Glad you got a place; I thought you would." + +"You can't keep that fellow down," laughed Fred. "There's no use in +trying. He's fresh and he knows it, but no matter what you do to him he +keeps it up just the same." + +"He's not fresh," laughed Mr. Maxwell. "He's just full of spirits." + +"I don't know what we'd do without him anyway," said Grant feelingly. +"There are not many dull moments when Pop is around." + +"I would suggest," said Mr. Maxwell, "that you boys go and put your +clothes on. The sun is beginning to go down and it'll be cold soon." + +"I'm cold now," exclaimed John. "I'm going to get my clothes all right." + +He hurried off towards the tent closely followed by the seven other +boys. A brisk rub down with heavy towels soon got their blood to +circulating once more and no one felt any ill effects from all their +exercises and exertion of the day. + +"Now I shall present the prizes," said Mr. Maxwell when the boys were +assembled in front of the tent. "The blue team wins the meet by the +margin of eight points to six. I congratulate them and take great +pleasure in presenting to them the big American flag. They all know how +I feel about it and I expect them to treat it as it should be treated." + +"Three cheers for the blue team," cried Thomas lustily and they were +given with a will, as Grant stepped forward to receive the trophy. + +"And now the second prize," said Mr. Maxwell. "It's not as big as the +first but the size doesn't count. Everything depends on whether our +hearts are with the flag or not. If I should happen to come back to this +lake unexpectedly any time this summer I shall expect to see both these +flags flying in front of their respective tents." + +"We'll promise that all right," said Thomas readily, and as he took the +emblem from Mr. Maxwell's hand, Grant led a cheer for the red team. + +"One more prize," continued Mr. Maxwell. "I brought something which I +decided should go to the boy who in my judgment gave the best individual +performance. That is who in any one event showed the most nerve and +grit. Perhaps he didn't win the event but he worked hardest and that is +what to my mind deserves the credit." + +He produced a large four-bladed pocket knife and held it up for the +eight boys to see. This was a surprise to them all and they looked at +one another in amazement. They also cast many envious glances at the +knife which was certainly a beauty and one of which any boy could well +be proud. + +"It was an awful job deciding," said Mr. Maxwell. "Every one did so well +I was almost in despair as to whom to give it to. I have finally +decided, however, and I feel sure you'll all think the boy deserves it." + +Not one of the boys had the least idea who was to become the fortunate +owner of the knife and in keen suspense they all waited. + +"I will now ask the winner to step forward," continued Mr. Maxwell. "I +watched him closely in the contest which I think entitles him to the +prize and I don't remember ever having seen a finer exhibition of pluck. +I know just how tired he was and how much nerve he required to keep +himself going. He didn't win the race himself but he did win the meet +for his team and I think he should have the credit. John, here is your +knife. That was a great race you swam a few minutes ago." + +John was completely taken by surprise. He had not for a moment expected +that he was to be the fortunate one and he was almost overcome. + +"Yea, String!" shouted George heartily. "Let's give the old thin fellow +three cheers." + +Congratulations were in order and there was much laughter and fun. Every +one was in excellent spirits and all pronounced the meet a decided +success. The day was fast waning now and the party of visitors prepared +to leave the island for their camp at the other end of the land. The +four Go Ahead boys escorted them to their boat and good-bys were said. +Promises that the eight boys would see one another soon were made and +the Spruce weighed anchor and glided out of the little harbor. + +"Well," exclaimed Grant when their guests had gone, "I think we had a +pretty fine time to-day." + +"We certainly did," agreed Fred. "What we want now is a pole for our +flag. It ought to be set right up in front of the tent there." + +"I'll get the ax right now and we'll go and cut one," said George. "Come +along, Fred." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV--IN QUEST OF GAME + + + +The days and weeks slipped by and still the life in the island camp did +not pall on on the four Go Ahead boys. They were busy every moment with +the thousand and one duties and pleasures of camp life and the summer +days drifted by like a succession of pleasant dreams. + +One of the boys' favorite occupations was shooting at a target. Fred was +the owner of a little twenty-two caliber, hammerless rifle, and many an +hour was spent by the boys in practice with this small gun. It was +surprising how skillful they had become. + +Grant and John were lying on the wharf one afternoon trying to shoot the +heads off some water lilies that grew near the shore on the opposite +side of the harbor. + +"Now just suppose that one was an Indian," exclaimed John, taking +careful aim at an unsuspecting lily bud. The sharp spit of the little +rifle followed and the bullet struck the water some two feet the other +side of the "Indian." + +"You'll have to do better than that," laughed Grant. "We'll all be +scalped in a minute unless you get him. Let me try." + +John passed over the gun and on his first attempt Grant split the bulb +clearly in halves. + +"Good shot, Grant," exclaimed John. "You saved our lives." + +"Just suppose that had been a lion or a tiger or a rhinoceros or some +animal like that charging down upon us," said Grant. "Suppose we were +caught in a little ravine and we either had to kill the animal or be +killed ourselves. What would you do?" + +"I'd probably be so scared I'd faint or something," laughed John. + +"It would take nerve all right, wouldn't it?" + +"More than I've got, I'm afraid." + +"Oh, I don't know. I think most people are brave when it comes right +down to the point." + +"I hope I'd be, anyway," exclaimed John. "I think a coward is about the +worst thing in the world." + +"Some people that seem the most timid have the most nerve when it's +really needed," remarked Grant. "The ones that talk the loudest are not +always the bravest by a long shot. + +"Perhaps they try to make up by noise what they lack in nerve," laughed +John. "I've noticed that too, and I've also discovered that it doesn't +pay to make fun of anybody. Do you remember that boy at home? Everybody +used to call him a 'sis' and a 'willie-boy' but when Bob Jackson's dog +fell into the mill-race he was the only one who had nerve enough to jump +in after him. That taught me a lesson, I can tell you." + +"I wonder what animal is the most dangerous in the world." + +"A lion is, I guess." + +"I don't think so. Lions are mostly scavengers they say and I've heard +that tigers are worse than they are. A tiger doesn't give any warning at +all when he attacks." + +"Well, I'd just as soon not meet either one of them on a lonely road," +laughed John. + +"Nor I," agreed Grant. "I've heard though that a rhinoceros or an +African buffalo is worse than either a lion or a tiger." + +"How about a grizzly bear?" + +"They're all pretty bad, I guess," said Grant. "I wouldn't stop to argue +with any one of them." + +"Let me have that gun again," exclaimed John. "If we're going to meet +all these ferocious wild animals we'll need more practice in shooting." + +Just at this moment, however, George and Fred appeared. They came out of +the clump of trees behind the tent and seemed very much excited about +something. + +"Hey, Grant!" called Fred. "Where's the gun?" + +"Right here. What's the matter?" + +"Do you remember what you said about wanting to shoot one of those big +herons and have it stuffed?" + +"Yes. Why?" + +"Well, Pop and I discovered one just now in that little marsh over on +the other side of the island." + +"Bring the gun along and maybe you'll get a shot at it," exclaimed +George. "You'd better hurry though." + +"He won't be there now," said Grant. + +"Why won't he?" demanded Fred. "You won't get him if you sit there and +do nothing, like a great big galoot though. Let me have the gun if you +don't want it yourself." + +"Oh, I'll go with you," exclaimed Grant rising to his feet. "I don't +think for a minute he'll still be there though. What was he doing?" + +"Looking for fish, I guess," said George. "He was wading around in the +swamp on those great long legs of his; he looked as if he was on +stilts." + +"Grant doesn't seem very eager, Pop," remarked Fred. "I wish he'd give +us the gun." + +"Come along," cried Grant. "I've been waiting for you to start." + +"Huh," snorted Fred; "listen to that, I think we ought to have the bird +anyway; we discovered him." + +"Did he see you?" asked John. The four boys were now hurrying along +guided by Fred who was slightly in the lead. + +"I can truthfully say that he did not," said George decidedly and Fred +snickered. + +"What's the matter?" inquired Grant suspiciously. "What are you laughing +at?" + +"Nothing," said Fred quickly, but as he looked back at his companions +the suspicion of a smile lurked upon his countenance. + +"There's something funny about this," exclaimed Grant. "I tell you right +now that if you two are putting up a game on me there'll be trouble." + +"I don't believe they saw a heron at all," said John. + +"I tell you we did," exclaimed Fred earnestly. "Pop and I will both +swear to it; we saw one in the swamp over here. Of course we can't +guarantee that he'll still be there when you slowpokes arrive." + +"That's right," chimed in George. "We certainly did see one not five +minutes before we came back to the dock to tell you about it. I don't +see why you need be so suspicious about it." + +"Well, I wouldn't trust you two," said Grant. "You've acted sort of +funny about it too." + +"You only think we have," retorted Fred. "Careful now, the marsh is just +ahead of us." + +"Why don't we sneak up behind those bushes?" suggested George, pointing +to a clump of elderberries a few yards in front of them. + +"That's a good scheme," exclaimed Fred. "We can hide behind them and get +a good view of the marsh without being seen ourselves." + +Stealthily the four boys made their way until they reached the spot +George had designated. On the other side of the bushes and extending for +a hundred yards or so was the swamp where the heron was reported to have +been seen. + +"Careful now," whispered Fred as they crouched behind the clump of +elderberry bushes. "We don't want to scare him away." + +"If he's still there," muttered Grant. He had been suspicious of Fred +and George; their manner had seemed somewhat peculiar to him but they +were serious enough now and his doubts were removed. + +"Do you see him?" asked John eagerly, as Fred peered out through an +opening in the bushes. + +"Not yet." + +"Where was he when you saw him before?" demanded Grant. + +"Down by that point. I don't see him there now though." + +"Let me look," pleaded Grant excitedly. "I haven't seen him yet." + +"Look along the shore," directed Fred, yielding his place to Grant. +"He's more likely to be there than any place else I think." + +As Grant searched the marsh George suddenly made a peculiar noise. It +might have passed for a sob or a chuckle or he could have even been +accused of choking. + +"Stop that," cried Fred fiercely, hitting George sharply in the ribs +with his fist. + +"What's the matter with you two?" exclaimed Grant. He turned quickly +around and eyed his two companions narrowly. + +"I choked," stammered George. "I couldn't help it." + +"If you've been fooling me you'll do worse than choke," muttered Grant +fiercely. "You two are acting very queerly it seems to me." + +"Because I choked?" demanded George. "I don't see what there is queer +about that." + +"Will you swear you saw a heron here?" demanded Grant. + +"I will," exclaimed Fred. "I declare to you, Grant, there was one here. +We saw him first down by that point where I showed you." + +"He's not there now," said Grant. "That much is sure." + +"He may have moved along you know. Just because he isn't in that same +spot doesn't mean that he has left." + +"Well, I don't see him anyway." + +"Let me look," exclaimed George. "My eyes are better than yours." + +Grant exchanged places with George who now seemed to have recovered from +his recent affliction; he scanned the nearby marsh eagerly and was quiet +and serious now. + +"Well?" demanded Grant after a moment had elapsed. + +George turned and looked at the speaker. "Come here," he whispered, +crooking his finger mysteriously. + +Grant, much excited now, crowded up close beside George. Together they +peered out across the swamp. + +"See that dead log lying on the beach down there?" inquired George. + +"Yes." + +"Do you see anything the other side of it?" + +"No." + +"Not a thing?" + +"I don't see anything but the old dead limb of a tree sticking up." + +"That's not a dead limb, Grant." + +"Sure enough," cried Grant excitedly. "Say," he exclaimed, "I saw that +thing before but I thought it was a stick." + +"It's not though," said George triumphantly. "It's a heron and Fred and +I accept your apology for all you've thought about us." + +"Why doesn't it move?" demanded Grant. + +"Don't you know that herons often stand like that for a long, long time? +If you're going to shoot that fellow you'd better get a move on yourself +though." + +"I can't hit him from here." + +"Don't try. Sneak up closer." + +"Give me the gun, Grant," exclaimed Fred. "If you don't care anything +about shooting him I'd like a try at it myself." + +"No, you don't," said Grant quickly, and rising to his feet he crouched +low and began to run swiftly down towards the shore of the lake. + +"Follow those bushes along the shore," directed George. "Don't let him +see you, whatever you do." + +"He's all right so far," said Fred. "He's got good protection down as +far as the water anyway." + +"I hope he gets it," exclaimed John eagerly. "He's certainly a good shot +and that ought to help some." + +"Oh, he'll get it all right," said George. He and Fred looked at each +other for a moment and then both burst into silent but uncontrollable +laughter. + +"What's the matter with you two?" demanded John, completely taken aback +by their strange behavior. + +"Oh, String," said George. "If you only knew." + +"Well, why don't you tell me?" exclaimed John. "What sort of a game have +you put up on Grant anyway?" + +"Do you see that heron he's after?" + +"Yes, of course I do." + +"Well, it's dead. Fred and I found it on the shore and stuck it up +behind that log. Just wait till Grant finds it out," and the two +conspirators hugged each other delightedly. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXV--THE WORM TURNS + + + +Meanwhile Grant was stalking his game. He crouched low and making as +much speed as was consistent with quietness, he hurried along. + +"Just look at him!" cried George ecstatically, as now and again the +hunter could be seen to stop and peer cautiously in the direction of his +prey. + +"I should think the fact that it hasn't moved would make him +suspicious," remarked John. + +"He thinks herons always act that way," chuckled Fred. "I can hardly +wait for him to shoot." + +"You follows nearly queered your whole game a couple of times all +right," said John. "We were both suspicious of you. Why, twice you had +grins on your faces so long you could almost pin them in the back." + +"It was so funny," laughed George. "To think how we planned the whole +thing and how easily he fell into it. Why, it was almost too easy." + +"Don't be too sure," warned John. "He hasn't fired yet, you know." + +"He will all right," said Fred confidently. "The old bird has been dead +for about a month and you just ought to smell it." + +"Won't he be mad?" exclaimed George. This thought seemed to give him +special pleasure. + +"He'll probably shoot us," laughed Fred. + +"Where is he now?" inquired John. "I don't see him." + +"He's down behind that rock," said George. "There he comes." + +"He'd better shoot pretty soon," chuckled Fred. "The bird will fly away +if he isn't careful." + +"Isn't this rich?" exclaimed George. "Just think of putting up a game on +Grant like this." + +"Look at him!" cried Fred. "He's almost on his hands and knees now." + +"Shoot, Grant, shoot!" urged George. + +Nearer and nearer to the heron Grant crept. He had his gun half raised +as he stole along, prepared to shoot at any moment. His three companions +intently watched him, thoroughly enjoying the whole affair. + +"If he doesn't shoot pretty soon he'll see that it's dead," said John. + +"He's trying to get up behind that bush, I think," said George. + +"He's taking a chance," laughed Fred. "The heron will see him and fly +away if he isn't more careful." + +"There he goes!" exclaimed George. "He's going to shoot." + +"And now for the fun," cried Fred. "Won't he be mad though?" + +Grant stopped and sinking to one knee he raised the little rifle to his +shoulder. + +"Don't miss him, Grant," chuckled Fred. + +The gun spoke, and a moment later the faint report came to the ears of +the three boys who watched from behind the elderberry bushes. + +"Did he hit him?" laughed George. "What's he doing?" + +Grant had jumped to his feet after the first shot and started to run +along the shore. He came to the log where the dead heron had been +propped up but he did not stop there. He continued on past this spot and +the conspirators for the first time had an inkling that all was not +going as they had hoped. + +"What's happened?" demanded John in surprise. "What's he after?" + +"I'm sure I don't know," said Fred blankly. + +Some fifty or sixty feet beyond the spot where the dead log lay Grant +continued. Not one of his friends had been looking at this place for +their attention had been riveted on the dead heron. + +The grass grew level with Grant's knees where he was now. He leaned over +and seemed to be looking down at something on the ground at his feet. + +"What do you suppose it is?" demanded George curiously. + +"Look," exclaimed John and as he spoke Grant lifted from the grass a +great blue heron. He held it by the feet and turning towards the bush +where his companions were he waved his gun. Then he slung the big bird +over his shoulder and started to retrace his steps. + +George, Fred, and John had watched these proceedings in open-mouthed +amazement. + +"Well, what do you know about that?" exclaimed George limply. + +"I guess he's got us all right," sighed Fred. "Let's skip back to camp +before he gets hold of us." + +"We'd better stay and face the music," said George with a sigh. "Doesn't +that beat all? Just when we thought we had him good and fooled, he turns +around and puts the joke on us." + +"I don't see yet what happened," exclaimed John. + +"Why, he saw another heron, that's all," said Fred. "It was a live one +too, I guess." + +"Where's the one you and Pop fixed up for him?" + +"Still there behind the log." + +"Grant never even looked at it," said George. "He'll make our lives +miserable all the rest of the summer." + +"It's almost over now," said Fred. "He can't tease us long." + +In silence the three boys sat and watched their comrade approach. John +did not dread the meeting so much, for he had not been one of the +original conspirators, but Fred and George looked forward to Grant's +arrival with anything but pleasure. + +"What do you think of him?" cried Grant as he held up his prize for his +friends to see. "Isn't he a beauty?" + +"He's all right," said George weakly. + +"What's the matter, Pop?" demanded Grant. "You don't seem very +enthusiastic. Don't you like his looks?" + +"He's fine," replied George in a hollow voice. + +"Where did you find him?" demanded Fred bluntly. + +"Right where I shot him," said Grant. "You saw the spot where I picked +him up, didn't you?" + +"We saw it all right," said Fred grimly. "We haven't a word to say +either. You have the joke on us all right, Grant. All I ask is that you +don't rub it in too much." + +"I won't," laughed Grant. "It was awfully funny the way it turned out. I +never suspected at first that the heron you pointed out to me was dead. +I kept sneaking up as close as I dared and the thing never moved a bit +and it began to strike me as sort of queer. Then I remembered how you +fellows had snickered a couple of times and I felt pretty sure that +something was wrong. + +"All of a sudden I saw this bird just a few yards beyond the log. I knew +then that my chance had come to turn the joke on you, but I was so +anxious my arm was shaking like a leaf. I was afraid I surely would miss +and when I saw that I hadn't, I can tell you I felt pretty good. Here's +the heron and if you two fellows want yours you'll find him down by that +log. He smells a little strong though." + +"Let's go back to camp," exclaimed George. + +"All right," laughed Grant. "As long as you don't like the subject, I +won't say too much about it." + +Laughing and joking they made their way back towards their camp. George +and Fred realized how badly they had fared in their attempt to play a +practical joke, but they were good sports and consequently good losers. +They joined in the fun at their own expense, and were unstinted in their +praise of the prize Grant had gained. + +"We certainly got more than we were looking for that time," said George +laughingly. "You are----" + +He suddenly ceased speaking and gazed in surprise in the direction of +the tent. + +"What's the matter?" demanded John anxiously. + +"Some man with a big black beard just ran around the other side of the +tent," exclaimed George. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI--AN UNEXPECTED ENCOUNTER + + + +"Are you sure you saw a man?" asked Grant skeptically. + +"I know I did," replied George with the utmost conviction. + +"What did he look like?" + +"He looked like a tramp; a rough looking sort of a fellow with a black +beard and an old slouch hat." + +"Only one man?" + +"That's all I saw." + +"What shall we do?" demanded Fred blankly. + +"We'll go down and see what he wants," said George in a matter of fact +tone. "What else is there to do?" + +"Suppose he's looking for trouble?" suggested Fred. + +"Well then, he'll find it," said George grimly. "There are four of us to +his one." + +"He may not be alone," said Fred. "I think we'd better go slow." + +"Grant has a gun." + +"But he's not going to use it," said Grant quickly. "You don't catch me +shooting at anybody, tramp or no tramp. I don't want any blood on my +head." + +"Suppose they attack us?" demanded George. + +"'They,'" exclaimed Grant. "I thought you said you saw only one." + +"That's all I did see. There may be more of them though." + +"Probably a couple of guides," said John. "Let's go find out anyway." + +"I'd be careful," warned Fred. "There's no use in taking chances." + +"What's the matter with you, Fred?" demanded George. "What are you so +nervous about?" + +"I don't know. It seems funny to me though that a man like that should +be hanging around our tent." + +"He's probably waiting for us to come back." + +"Then why did he duck behind the tent the minute he saw us?" + +"Maybe he didn't see us at all." + +"The thing to do is to go down there and find out," exclaimed Grant. +"Come on, Pop, you and I will go anyway." + +"And so will I," added John. + +"I'll go myself," said Fred. "I'm not afraid; all I said was that I +thought we ought to be careful." + +"We'll be careful," George assured him. "Come along." + +The little band once again started towards the tent. As Fred had +remarked it seemed a strange thing that any man like the one George had +seen should be loitering around their camp. They had had no visitors +that summer aside from their opponents in the water sports and Mr. +Maxwell, and the appearance of a stranger on the island was unusual +enough to cause them some alarm. + +Side by side they walked towards the spot where their tent was pitched. +No further sign of their visitor appeared and this in itself made the +four boys somewhat uneasy. + +"Where did he go, do you suppose?" whispered John. + +"Are you sure you saw a man, Pop?" demanded Grant. + +"Of course I did. Do you think I'm crazy?" + +"Where is he then? No one else saw him." + +George made no reply to this remark and in complete silence they +continued on their way. At length they came to the tent itself but no +one was to be seen. They peered inside, but it was empty of any living +person. Grant turned to George triumphantly. + +"You're seeing things to-day," he laughed. He laid the heron on the +ground in front of the tent and placed his gun inside. + +"I saw a man," insisted George. + +"And you tried to make me see a live heron that was dead," said Grant. + +"It's certainly strange," muttered George. "I know I saw a man. I'd take +my dying oath on it." + +"But where is he?" demanded Grant. + +"That's just what I say," rejoined George. "Where is he?" + +"He doesn't seem to be--" began John, when he suddenly stopped. "Look," +he cried and pointed towards the shore. + +Two men were seated under a small tree which grew half-way between the +wharf and the tent. Their backs were towards the boys so that it was +impossible to see who they were. The back view however was not very +reassuring. The strangers appeared to be rough and unkempt and were +busily engaged in eating some food they had evidently helped themselves +to from the stores of the four young campers. Both men seemed entirely +unaware that they were being watched. + +"How did they get there without our seeing them?" whispered John. "Pop +saw one of them up by the tent." + +"The tent is between that tree and the place where we were standing," +said George. "It shut off our view and they probably walked down there +while we were coming towards the tent." + +"What shall we do?" whispered Fred. + +"Yell at them," suggested John. + +"Don't you do it," cautioned Grant quickly. + +"For goodness' sake," exclaimed George suddenly in a low voice. "Don't +any one of you fellows move," he ordered them. "Just wait here for me." + +He turned and darted quickly inside the tent while his three companions +were completely mystified by his strange behavior. They gazed after him +in amazement. + +"What's he after?" asked John in a whisper. + +"Maybe he went for the gun," suggested Fred. + +"I wonder if he did," exclaimed Grant. "We mustn't have that," and he +started to follow George inside the tent. + +Just as he was about to lift the flap and enter, however, George +suddenly appeared. He held one of the young campers' big balsam pillows +in each hand and he wore a queer expression on his face. His three +friends looked at him in amazement not unmixed with alarm. + +"What are you going to do?" demanded Grant. + +"Ssh!" hissed George. "Watch me." + +He cautiously stole forward in the direction of the two men. His +companions were too surprised to make any effort to restrain him. +Open-mouthed they stood and watched him stealthily approach the tree +underneath which the two rough-looking men were seated. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII--CONCLUSION + + + +"He's gone crazy," muttered Grant. "We should have held him back." + +On tip-toe and evidently trying to make as little noise as possible, +George stole forward. Nearer and nearer he approached, the pillows still +held firmly in his hands. He slackened his pace as he came closer and +redoubled his efforts to move cautiously. + +"They'll turn and see him in a second," whispered Fred, as much to +himself as to anybody else. All three of the boys were tense with +excitement as they riveted their attention on their companion who to +them was doing such a remarkable thing. + +George was scarcely ten feet distant from the men now. All at once he +stopped. He slowly drew back his right arm and taking careful aim he let +fly the pillow which he held. True to its mark it sped. It struck the +larger of the two men squarely in the neck. The second pillow followed +the other an instant later and it too scored a hit. Both had been aimed +at the same man. + +No sooner had George completed his bombardment than he uttered a wild +whoop and rushed forward. He dashed straight towards the man he had been +so successful in hitting and threw both arms around him. + +Grant, Fred, and John were too taken aback to do more than stand and +gaze stupidly at the strange proceedings taking place before their eyes. +George's actions to them were a complete mystery. + +Suddenly he ceased hugging the rough looking man he had pounced upon so +eagerly and turned to his three camp-mates. + +"Grant!" he cried. "John! Fred! Come here and see who this is." + +"Who is it?" exclaimed John blankly. "Thomas and Hugh?" + +"Here's your father, Fred," called George loudly. "Don't you want to see +him?" + +Fred started violently at these words. He stared ahead of him and then +suddenly gave vent to a wild shriek. + +"Dad!" he cried and rushing pell mell down the gradual incline he threw +himself upon the smaller of the two "tramps." + +"Why it's Mr. Button and Mr. Sanders," exclaimed Grant in surprise. +"Where do you suppose they came from?" + +"All dressed up to look like tramps," added John. "What do you suppose +they are trying to do?" + +"Play a joke on us, I guess," laughed Grant. "Lets go down and see +them." + +They soon joined the little group gathered underneath the tree and a +happy gathering it was. + +"What do you think of these two tramps, Grant?" inquired George when +greetings had been exchanged all around. + +"What do you think of a boy who would hit his poor old father in the +back of the neck with two big pillows?" laughed Mr. Sanders. "That +strikes me as pretty rough treatment." + +"It surely is," agreed Grant. "We usually take him down and duck him +when he gets fresh that way." + +"I'm afraid I can't do that," said Mr. Sanders sorrowfully. "He has +gotten so husky this summer I'd hate to tackle him now." + +"We didn't know you were coming up here," said Fred, addressing his +father and Mr. Sanders. + +"And we didn't want you to know it either," laughed Mr. Button. "We +planned a surprise for you." + +"You gave it to us all right," said John grimly. "We were sure you were +two thugs of some kind who had come up here to rob us." + +"How do you like our costumes?" demanded Mr. Sanders jovially. "Do we +really look like a couple of desperate characters?" + +"You certainly do, Dad," said George. "I never saw worse." + +"How did you dare to throw those big heavy pillows at me then?" + +"I recognized you right away, even from the back. You need a pretty good +disguise to fool your son you know." + +"So it seems," admitted Mr. Sanders and he rubbed the back of his neck +ruefully. + +"Didn't you see us coming?" asked John. + +"No," said Mr. Button. "We arrived here about twenty minutes ago and +didn't find a soul around anywhere. So we just made ourselves at home +and decided we'd have a little luncheon." + +"I saw one of you duck behind the tent," said George. "Then when we +didn't see you again it sort of worried us. Imagine how we felt when we +saw these two rough looking men sitting under the tree here." + +"Where had you boys been?" asked Mr. Sanders. + +"We went out to shoot a blue heron," said Grant. "Ask George about it; +he'll be glad to tell you all the details," and he nudged John who was +standing next to him. + +"I was the goat all right," laughed George, and he proceeded to recount +the story of how he and Fred had tried to put up a game on Grant but had +had the tables turned on them. + +The tale caused much merriment on the part of Mr. Button and Mr. +Sanders. Curiously enough these two men happened to be the fathers of +the boys who had been the victims of their own joke. + +"It served them right, Grant," laughed Mr. Button. "I hate these +practical jokers and am always glad to see them fooled. I notice it +usually happens that way too." + +The party had moved up to a spot directly in front of the tent now and +all were seated in a circle on the ground. The day was waning and the +sun was beginning to sink low in the western sky. A gray haze hung over +the surrounding hills and forests. A strong wind blew off the lake. + +"You know that breeze is cold," exclaimed Mr. Button with a slight +shiver, and he drew his coat closer about him. + +"Why shouldn't it be?" demanded Mr. Sanders. "It's almost fall now and +the summer is practically over." + +"I know it is," exclaimed George. "I hate to think of it too." + +"You've had a good time up here, have you?" inquired Mr. Button. + +"Wonderful," replied all the young campers with one accord. + +"You certainly look so," laughed Mr. Sanders. "You're as tanned as a lot +of Indians and you look just about as wiry." + +"It's been great fun," said John. "We've been out in the air all summer +and on the water so much we ought to be healthy." + +"We'll have to come back here again next summer," exclaimed George. +"What do you say to that, Dad?" + +"Personally I should think you'd rather go to some other place next +time. I like different experiences myself." + +"So do I," agreed Grant. "There are so many wonderful places and things +in the world that it's worth trying to visit and see all of them you +can, I think." + +"That suits me," exclaimed George. "What do you say, Dad? We'll go to +some other place next time." + +"As far as I'm concerned you may," said Mr. Sanders. "Go ahead." + + + THE END + + * * * * * + +THE OUTDOOR CHUMS SERIES + +By CAPTAIN QUINCY ALLEN + +The Outdoor Chums + + On the Lake + In the Forest + On the Gulf + After Big Game + On A House Boat + In the Big Woods + At Cabin Point + +For lovers of the great outdoors (and what boy is not?) this "Outdoor +Chums" series will be a rare treat. After you have read the first book +and followed the fortunes of the "Chums," you will realize the pleasure +the other seven volumes have in store for you. + +These rollicking lads know field, forest, mountain, sea and stream--and +the books contain much valuable information on woodcraft and the living +of an outdoor life. + +The Goldsmith Publishing Co. + +CLEVELAND, O. + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Go Ahead Boys in the Island Camp, by Ross Kay + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 35957.txt or 35957.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/9/5/35957/ + +Produced by RStephen Hutcheson, Roger Frank and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/35957.zip b/35957.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..85361a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/35957.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01f905c --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #35957 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/35957) |
